Making Easy Circuits https://makingcircuits.com Learn and build electronic circuits Tue, 10 Oct 2017 03:21:53 +0000 en-US 1.2 https://makingcircuits.com https://makingcircuits.com 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=4.8.2 https://makingcircuits.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/09/cropped-m-32x32.png Making Easy Circuits https://makingcircuits.com 32 32 Microprocessor Fault Finder Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/?p=229 Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:26:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/microprocessor-fault-finder-circuit_27.html

lt is often necessary to see exactly what logic activity is occurring on the address, data or control busses of a microprocessor system.
This is easily done by displaying it on an oscilloscope but not everybody can lay their hands on an oscilloscope at short notice. The ’stethosc0pe‘ here enables a microprocessor system to be tested without the need for an oscilloscope. Of course it is not intended as the be—all and end-all of test equipment, but then even a I cloctor’s stethoscope has limitations. `The actual circuit is fairly simple. The stethoscope probe is connected l to the clock input of a divider. The frequency of the input signal is divided by a certain factor. This I factor depends on what output of i 253% is selected with S1 and can_ i be between 488.3 Hz/ll/lltlz (with I Sl in position 1) and 15625 Hz/ |/lHz (S1 in position 6). By changing the position of this switch we can ensure that therevvill always be an audible output equal to the ’divided' input frequency. For example; assume we want to trace a clock signal of 1 MH; to see if it is present at various test points. If S1 is in position 1 then a tone of about 488 Hz will be heard. The clock signal is an example of a periodic signal which is always present. lf periodic signals are to be present on the three busses then the microprocessor must be working on a programl loopl. This could be part of the monitor program, for example a rcutine to test whether any key has been pressed. Special test pro- grams can also be used and there are thousands of possibles, depending on what is to be tested. For instance the 6502 programs shown below can be used to test data lines and address lines. Test programs can be placed directly (without modifi- cations) in virtually any location of memory. Because the pro~ cessor reads periodic opcodes and operands the R/Vlisignal will appear periodically. As there are a certain number of clock periods needed for a number of periodic instructions we can expect this to be reflected in a number of outputs whose dividing factor is reducer?. This stethoscope powerctj Lil, ihe circuit it tests. The probe itself is not very expensive as it can be made from a small screwdriver.

]]> 229 0 0 0 Simple Logic Tester Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/?p=231 Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:25:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-logic-tester-circui.html

The tester shows on a seven-segment, common-cathode display whether its input is logic 1 (H on the display) or logic 0 (L on the display).
An undefined level is indicated as “n’. When the input is low, T1 is switched off and T2 and T3 conduct. This results in a high output at ICM and a low one at lC lb, whereupon segment ‘d` lights. Together with permanently actuated segments ‘e’ and ‘t` , this causes an “L’ to be displayed. When the input is high, This on and T2 and T3 are off. The output of Cla is then low and that of ICH, is high. Apart from segments ‘e‘ and ‘t` , ‘b’, `c`, and‘g’ also light, which causes an H to be displayed. When the input is undefined. or open, all transistors are on (because of Rl, R2 and R3). The outputs of ICM and ICH, are then both high, which causes segments A ‘a’, ‘b‘ and ‘c’ to light together with ‘e’ and ‘f; an ‘n’ (no level) is then displayed. The buzzer is not essential, merely use ful; it may thus be omitted. If it is used, it should be a type with integral oscillator.

The type of the components used is not critical. The display may be any seven segment, common-cathode type. IC] may be a standard 7400 or an LS version of this or the open-collector version 7401; HC and HCT types are less suitable because these cannot provide the required output current.  The switching thresholds of the tester are at 1 V and 3 V, which is not standard, but in practice they do well. The 3 V threshold may be lowered slightly by increasing the value of R4. The input impedance of the tester is 5 kQ, which has no effect on the circuit on test. V  The current drawn by the tester is determined by the type of display; in the prototype, it is about 60 mA.

]]> 231 0 0 0 LM317 Dispaly Intensity Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/?p=233 Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:25:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/lm317-dispaly-intensity-controller.html

  1. When it detects a relatively high light intensity, the based and emitter voltage of T2 increase When the base voltage of Tz exceeds 2.7 Vj R4 limits the emitter voltage to 3.9V due to the constant current of 5.7 mA.
  2. This causes the voltage at the emitter of this pnp darlington transistor to be about LZVZ The voltage across Rs is the reference potential, 1.25 W of the Type LM3l7 regulator, so that lies about 5.7 mA, and the output voltage, UO, of the circuit is when T1 detects darkness.
  3. The maxi- mum output current is of the order of 700 mA when IC1 is adequately cooled. The input voltage range of the circuit is 8 to 15 VC
  4. This is a light dependent voltage source that regulates the supply to 7-segment dis- plays in accordance with the intensity of ambient light.
  5. The sensitivity of the regulator is adjustable with P1.
  6. T2 no longer conducts and the output voltage of the circuit is 5.7 L because the total resistance between the regulator output and ground is Rs+Ra+R4= 1,000 Q, and the current through it is still 5.7 mA.
  7. The regulating action is positive, a higher ambient light intensity results in the circuit raising the supply voltage to the displays. Phototransistor T1 does not conduct when it detects darkness, and the base of T2 is therefore grounded via R2 and Pt 
LM317 Dispaly Intensity Controller Circuit is shown below:
]]> 233 0 0 0 Missing Pulse Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/?p=235 Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:23:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/missing-pulse-detector-circui.html

This no pulse or missing pulse detector circuit is very interesting because it can detect or warn, the absence or delay of a pulse, which under normal conditions should receive acceptable predefined intervals.


Interesting applications detector pulselessness
- Monitoring the heartbeat of a patient
- Monitoring the rotational speed of a device, warning when this speed decreases, etc.

Running a no pulse detector

To implement this circuit integrated circuit 555 configured as astable multivibrator is used. See the diagram. The output of timer 555 will remain at high level while the pulse train input give the correct range. If a pulse fall behind or absent, the output goes low, detecting the problem.

Combining values of R1 and C1 should be chosen depending on the application you at no pulse detector. The values of R1 and C1 set forth below were made with the intention that the detector can operate with a manual switch at the entrance so you can see it working.

The input pulses are sensed by the pin 2 of 555. To the same point connects the base of a PNP transistor in order to discharge the capacitor C1, whenever appears the expected pulse, and thus start a new charging .

While the pulses arrive at pin 2 of 555 to correct intervals, the capacitor C1 is discharged before its voltage level reaches the level that causes the output 555 to go low.

Note: This circuit does not detect if closely spaced pulses or if the frequency of the pulse train increases.
 List of  components

- IC1: 555 Timer
- Q1: NTE159 PNP transistor
- R1 = R2 = 10K resistor
- Electrolytic capacitor C1 = 47uF
- Capacitor C2 = / 0.01uF capacitor





]]> 235 0 0 0 Blown Fuse Monitor Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/?p=236 Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:23:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/blown-fuse-monitor-circui.html

The post explains a simple fuse monitor or indicator circuit, for indicating the fuse status anytime.
This is one of the simplest yet effective alarm cum monitor for detecting any blown fuse. A resistance of value 1K is placed in series with a LED and connected across the fuse which is to be tested.
Normally when the fuse is healthy, LED 1 will not get any bias. 
Thus, it will not raise an alarm. However, the moment the fuse is blown, LED1 gets a feed in bias and starts to glow. 
The value of the resistor R1 and its wattage should obviously be decided depending on the type of LED and the supply across it. 
Suitably connecting a 12V zener and a 12V electronic buzzer across the fuse can enable an audio output (alarm sound) if so required.


]]> 236 0 0 0 Microprocessor Fault Finder Circuit Diagram https://makingcircuits.com/?p=237 Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:22:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/microprocessor-fault-finder-circui.html

  1. The pulse also goes to the input of lC1a so that when this LE stops another RESET pulse is automatically sent to the processor. In this way it is possible, simply by turning P1, to look at all the memory cycles one after another.
  2. Using WR and MREO only write instructions are ’latched’ E the processor aid, and using RD and Nll only opcode fetches; other combinations are ago possible, of course. RD and/or WR must still be used as addresses and data are only valid when these signals are active. lf processors other then the 280 are to be used then this circuit will have to be adapted to use the available signals.
  3. When fault finding in a micro-processor system it is not always possible to work in single-step mode, as the processor would then have to stop completely.
  4. The duration of the pulse supplied by lC1b can be adjusted with the ten turn potentiometer P1.
  5. This system gives a reliable read out of programs that are not more than a few decades of bytes long. However, the time delay is not stable enough for the system to be usable with bigger programs.
  6. Not all processors have a wait-input; the 280 (which ls the system we used to evaluate this circuit) has such an input, but with this we get the problem that the refresh of any dynamic RAMs used Q is lost if the processor is stopped.
  7. This pulse is combined with the Nugatory Request (MREO), Read (RD), and Write (WR) signals of the computer system so that a latch enable (LE) pulse is present at the output of N3 after the MMV time 1 of IC1b has elapsed.
  8. This circuit uses the RD, WR and MREQ signals so that during a read or write operation the information content is reajgnto the ;microProcessor aid. lf only RD and MREO were used, then only read instructions could be saved for examination.
  9. This LE pulse is sent to the ;microprocessor aid which then reads and holds the data and address present at that moment.
  10. This RESET pulse is supplied by monostable multivibrator (MMV) lCla; pulse duration is about 2 us (the pulse has to be short or the data in the dynamic RAMs might be corrupted). At the same time the second MMV, consisting of lClb, is triggered.
  11. After the circuit sends a short reset pulse to the processor the program is executed.
  12. With the fault finder described here, and the ’uProcessor aid' published elsewhere in this issue, both addresses and data can be looked at without the processor having to be stopped for any length of time. Operation is as follows. 
]]> 237 0 0 0 Simple Audio Mixer Circuits https://makingcircuits.com/?p=238 Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:22:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-audio-mixer-circuits.html

The amplifiers of a LM3900N device can be conveniently used to make a mixer unit for audio purposes; the unit enables three separate audio signals to be mixed together to produce a composite output.
The audio mixer circuit shown provides this facility using only a single LM39OON device and also enables any one channel to be selected by switches. The currents passing through the resistors R4, R8 and R,, are summed in the input circuit of the fourth amplifier. lf S; is open, amplifier 1 will be driven to saturation by the current passing through R2. lt will therefore be inactive. 

Th below shown simple mixer circuit will work with two or three channels, providing excellent input isolation and exceptional frequency response, extending well over the top end of the audio spectrum. lt is usable by one or more instruments plus microphone, or with special effects, such as mixing en input with pink noise, to give 'surf’. The unit will give 8db gain, and since low-level signals are involved, should be housed in an aluminum box. lf a mains supply is used, the usual anti-hum precautions must be taken. lt is useful to use scaled slider potentiometers, so that effects may be recreated.

]]> 238 0 0 0 Simple Mains Undervoltage Overvoltage Circuit Diagram https://makingcircuits.com/?p=239 Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:21:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-mains-undervoltage-overvoltage.html

The first shows the power supply arrangement. Xl is the step- down transformer. Dl through DQ form a bridge rectifier. Cl is the smoothing capacitor. Rl and D5 form a potential divider to feed a fixed reference voltage to the base of emitter-follower stage T1.
The output voltage, which is regulated, is available at the emitter of Tl. VR] is connected across the unregulated output. Therefore, the output VM at the variable point of the potentiometer can beset to any suitable voltage, and this serves as a proportional measure of AC supply input to monitor its value. The second shows the control circuit.The IC dual opamp is used . as a window detector with two comparators, one for “high’ and the other for ‘low’ voltage limits. The novelty of this circuit lies in its simple configuration using a single DC supply. Diodes D6 and D9 along with the resistor R3 form and AND logic gate. When the AC supply is within the preset limits, both i comparators give ‘high’ output and the AND circuit also- gives a high output. Outside the limits, one comparator gives ‘high’ output and the other gives ‘low’ output (about 3V). Then the AND circuit gives low output.  The output of the AND logic circuit is fed to the relay through a starting time-delay circuit comprising T2 and T3 Whenever the AND logic circuit gives 'high’ output, after the suitable delay set by the starting time-delay circuit, the relay operates and connects the gadget to AC mains. Thus, at initial switch-on, it provides delay in operation. It waits and sees the condition of AC mains voltage till the duration of its preset delay and if there are no tripping then only it switches on the load. Incidentally, Cl in Fig. 1 also serves as an averaging circuit for very fast AC mains fluctuations to avoid an unnecessary operation of the cutout. lf the relay needs higher current or higher voltage, the modification suggested in dotted lines may be carried. The relay and diode D7 in that case may be substituted with a resistor of say 5. 1 k, and the added transistor used as a driver stage to the relay that may be operated with suitable unregulated DC voltage supply. Choose the DC voltage VR about 2V higher than the relay operating voltage. Adjust the series resistor in the base path of the added transistor to provide sufficient base drive to saturate this final stage. lf a low-current low voltage relay is to be used, simply use it in series with a suitable resistor in the usual relay position.




For making adjustments, first remove C2 from the circuit to avoid delay which will confuse the matter unnecessarily. Set potentiometer VRI to get monitor voltage VM of 7V with nominal 220V supply. VR2 controls the lower limit and VR3 controls the higher limit. Initially keep VR2 in the lowermost position so that voltage at pin number 3 is minimum, and keep VR3 in the uppermost position so that voltage at pin number 6 is maximum. In this condition the window limits are wide open and the relay should operate. Nominal operating limits are between I80V and 250V. s lf the monitoring voltage is 7V with nominal 220V AC supply, then set VR2 to give 5V at pin number 3 and VR3 to give 8 V at pin number 6. Make a simple check before use. Adjust VRI to reduce the voltage VM below 5V or to increase . the voltage VM above 8V. In both cases, the relay should de- energize. If it does, bring back VM to 7V again and leave it there. Now the cutout is ready for use. Precise voltage settings can be made by varying the input supply using a variac. With a 220V supply, set VRI to give a monitor voltage of 7V; with l80V input, set VR2 to just de-energise the relay; and then with 250V input, set VR3 to just de-energise the relay. Now connect C2, as shown in Fig. 2, to get back the delay feature.

This device ensures safety and protection to your gadgets, but will not regulate the power supply. If the voltage excursions are too much and too often, or if uninterrupted operation is required along with safety, use this cutout in addition to a voltage regulator. V The load current is limited by the relay contact ratings. Therefore care should be taken to avoid using it with high current load. Otherwise, suitably modify the relay for higher currents. The stability of voltage limits depends mainly on the . potentiometers. Use good-quality potentiometers, either cermet or wirewound types. Do not try to use the usual trimpots instead.

PARTS LIST

IC1 —747C integrated circuit, I0-pin metal case ·
T1  —SL I00 (SEM) transistor
T2 —BC 108c (BEL) transistor
T3 -—BC177 (BEL) transistor
D1-D4 —Selenium rectifier bridge or BY 126 (4 Nos.)
D5 ——Zener diode, BZX6l—Cl2 (BEL)IW
D6-DI0 —BYl26 diodes
R1 —-500-0hm, I/2 W resistor
R2 -5.1kilohm, % W resistor
R3, R7 —10-kilohm, IA W resistor
R4 -500kilohm trimpot (variable resistor)
R5, R6 —1kilohm, I4 W resistor
R8 —1megohm, % W resistor -
VRI-VR3 -5-kilohm wirewound potentiometers (see text)
C1-500 uF/25V electrolytic
C2 — 500 pF/l2V electrolytic
C3 —— 0.68uF400V'bipolar or electrolytic .
C4 — 2000uF,I2V electrolytic
NI — Neon bulb
R -9V, 20mA relay (see text)
Xl -220V to I5V step-down transformer ]]> 239 0 0 0 Diode https://makingcircuits.com/?p=1576 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1576 1576 0 0 0 The Diode https://makingcircuits.com/?p=1619 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1619 1619 0 0 0 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=1703 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1703 1703 0 0 0 How IC 555 Works - Pinouts Explianed https://makingcircuits.com/?p=1724 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1724 1724 0 0 0 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=1769 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1769 This amplifier provides two channels of power up to 20 reais from two line inputs watts. It is ideal for use in computers, because its price / power / complexity is optimal.

At the level seen only one of the stages of the system since all stereo circuit both channels are identical. The numbers in brackets represents the equivalent of the terminal for the second channel. The heart of this project is a circuit from National Semiconductor, the LM1876, which provides in bar of two operational power amplifiers with functions mute (silence) and standby (off), which have not implemented this design to simplify it to the fullest. The incoming signal, after being conditioned, level, enter the amplifier for its non-inverting input. At the end of this part of the resulting signal is reinserted to its inverting terminal amplifier to form the feedback network. Since the circuit is internally balanced when working with starting source is not necessary to install the output capacitor BootStrap.en. 

See photo of the armed module

View photo integrated circuit mounted

FEEDING: This system requires for operation a voltage of +/- 28 volts and a current of 2 amps. To obtain can be used classical source transformer, diode bridge and capacitors.

In this case the transformer must have a primary line to line voltage (220v) and a secondary half a point for each branch 20v (40v end to end). The diodes must be 100V / 3A 1N5406 type or similar. a rectifier bridge, which facilitates the task and reduces the number of tracks / space can also be used. Filter capacitors are 4700μF x 50v.

See photo of the power supply (platelet)

HEAT SINK: key part in any audio system, the sink that this time we use is a simple computer cooler for Pentium III. We use this model since it has a metal surface greater than traditional ones . To power the vast fan take the positive phase of the source and lower your blood pressure with a regulator 7812 dissipated individually.

]]> 1769 0 0 0 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=2206 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2206    
R1-R2= 47Kohms C1-C11= 10uF 25V C8= 1.2nF 63V MKT
R3-R4-R5-R12-R13= 10Kohms C2= C33pF ceramic C9-10= 100nF 63V MKT
R6-R7= 3.3Kohms C3= C2.2uF 63V MKT C12=47uF 25V
R8-R9= 1.8Kohms C4= C47nF 63V MKT RV1-2= 100Kohms Lin.
R10= 270ohms C5-C7= 4.7nF 63V MKT RV3= 470Kohms Lin.
R11= 22Kohms C6= 22nF 63V MKT IC1= TL072, NE5532
]]> 2206 0 0 0 How to Reduce LED Comsumption using Pulsed Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/?p=2415 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2415 2415 0 0 0 Making an Opamp with 3 Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/?p=2716 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2716 The 3 transistor op-amp shown was designed for use as a 20 milliwatt headphone amplifier (40 ohm headphone). The circuit requires 10 parts but lacks efficiency since the output is single ended and draws around 60mA from AA batteries, or 120mA for a stereo application. Parts Selection: For a power output of 20mW (RMS), the peak output power will be 40mW and the peak output current will be I^2*R =.04 and I(peak) = 32 mA. The negative peak of the output signal occurs when transistor Q3 is completely turned off, so the output voltage is just the result of a voltage divider 40 ohms and R4. If the peak current is 32 mA, then the peak output voltage will be E=IR = .032*40 = 1.28 volts. Since the negative supply voltage is 3 and the peak load voltage is 1.28, there will be 3-1.28 = 1.72 volts across R4. So, we need a resistor that drops 1.72 at 32 mA or R4 = E/I = 1.72/.032 = 54 ohms, or 56 standard value. Next consideration was the base and collector currents for Q3. Since the output voltage swing is symmetrical, the peak voltage across R4 will be 3 + 1.28 or 4.28 and the current in R4 will be I= E/R = 4.28/56 = 76mA. The peak collector current of Q3 will then be 76mA plus 32 milliamps in the load or, 108mA total. This seems a little high for a 2N3906, maybe some other transistor would be better. Next consideration was the steady state DC current for the differential pair of transistors (Q1,Q2). The DC currents of Q1,Q2 should be somewhat balanced (with no signal) so that both transistors carry near equal DC currents. And this current should be somewhat greater than what is needed by Q3. The measured hFE gain of the 2N3906 at 100mA was about 100, so the peak base current of Q3 should be around 1 mA. The DC current for Q1,Q2 was then chosen to be about 3 times greater, or 3mA for each transistor (6 mA total). It could be larger, but would increase battery drain. Next step was to work out the common emitter resistor R3. Since the base of Q2 is at ground, the emitters will be about -700mV and the voltage across R3 will be 3-0.7 = 2.3, and the value of R3 will be E/I = 2.3/0.006 = 390 ohms. The total current in R3 will then be 6mA, or 3mA for each transistor Q1 and Q2. Next step was to assign a value to the Q3 e/b resistor (R2). In the balanced (no signal) condition, Q3's base current will be about 0.5mA and the remaining current for R2 will be 3mA - 0.5mA = 2.5mA, so the resistor value would be R2=Vbe/.0015 = 0.7/.0025 = 280 ohms (270 standard value). Resistor R1 will have the same value and is used to measure the DC current in Q1 which should be about 3mA, so the voltage across R1 should read around 810mV if things are working right. The amplifier gain was selected to be ten or (20dB) which defines the ratio of R5 to R6, or 1K and 10K. This makes the input impedance about 1K since the inverting configuration is used. For a higher input resistance, larger resistor values could be used (10K 100K) etc. Or you could ground the 1K imput resistor R6 and use the non-inverting input point (base of Q2) as a high impedance input. Notes: A small 1000pF cap was added to limit the bandwidth to around 100kHz and suppress oscillations. The value was found by experiment. The circuit seems fairly linear (low distortion) as indicated in the scope picture below. The top waveform is the ramp input from a function generator, and the lower waveform is the inverted output of the op-amp with a 40 ohm load. So, it's actually a plot of the rising input ramp and falling output ramp (2.25v p-p). Notice there is a slight bend in the output line indicating some non-linearity (distortion) but hard to see. The DC offset at the output will move negative as the battery voltage falls. It measured about +50mV at full supply voltage and drifted negative to -150mV with the supply at +/- 2.5 volts. This can be corrected with a small adjustment to R3. Lowering R3 will increase the current in Q1/Q2 and move the DC offset positive, and visa versa. Another approach is to replace R3 with a constant current source (one extra transistor) which should maintain the DC offset near zero as the supply voltage falls. But then it wouldn't be a 3 transistor opamp anymore. It would be a 4 transistor opamp.]]> 2716 0 0 0 Passive Graphic Equalizer Circuit using Resistors and Capacitors only https://makingcircuits.com/?p=2718 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2718 2718 0 0 0 Wireless Music Level Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/?p=2740 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2740 2740 0 0 0 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=2782 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2782 2782 0 0 0 Function Generator Circuit - Triangular, Square, Sine, Sawtooth Generator https://makingcircuits.com/?p=2819 Mon, 30 Nov -0001 00:00:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2819 2819 0 0 0 Simple Fire Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-fire-alarm-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:31:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-fire-alarm-circui.html

The post discusses a simple fire alarm circuit that you can build and install at home or shop. At the point when there is a fire breakout in the room the temperature increments.

This ultra smaller and minimal effort blaze alert faculties fire breakout in light of this.

Transistor BC177 (Q1) is utilized as the fire blaze sensor here. At the point when the temperature expands the leakage voltage of this transistor likewise increments.

The circuit is planned so that when there is an increment in the above leakage of Q1, transistor Q2 will get one-sided.

Therefore when there is a flame breakout the transistor Q2 will be on. The emitter of Q2 (BC 108) is associated with the base of Q3(AC 128).

So when Q2 is ON Q3 will be likewise ON. The transistor Q3 drives the hand-off which is utilized to drive the load ie,light, bell, horn and so forth as an evidence of the fire.

The diode D1 is utilized as a free wheeling diode to shield it from back EMF created when hand-off is exchanged.

Notes for the above Simple Fire Alarm Circuit The Preset R1 can be utilized to any wanted temperature level for setting the alert ON. This is not a lock type alarm, that is; when the temperature in the region of the sensor diminishes beneath the set point the caution stops. The circuit can be fueled utilizing  a 9V battery or a 9V battery eliminator. All capacitors are electrolytic and must be evaluated no less than 10V. The load can be associated through the C,NC,NO purposes of the relay contacts as per your need. The adjustment could be possible utilizing a solder iron, and a thermometer. Switch ON the power supply. Keep the tip of patching iron close to the Q1. Same time additionally keep the thermometer near to it. At the point when the temperature achieves your coveted quality seal R1.
]]> 219 0 0 0 Magnetic Proximity Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/magnetic-proximity-switch-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:31:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/magnetic-proximity-switch-circui.html

This is the circuit diagram of a magnetic proximity switch that finds a number of operations in many large areas.

The Magnetic Proximity Switch Circuit is based on a magnetic reed switch(S1) as being the proximity sensor. A monostable multivibrator calculated on NE555 (IC1) and a toggle flip flop in line with CD4013 (IC2) performs the remaining of the circuit. Any time a magnet is reached in neighborhood of S1 it slides to provide a negative prompt at pin 2 of IC1.The output of IC1 turns out high for a period of time established by R2 and C2.This clocks the IC2 connected as a toggle flip flop.The output (pin 1) of IC2 moves high while the transistor Q1 is biased to ON.The relay is initialized therefore do the devices attached to the relay.The LED D1 glows each time IC1 is turned on. Magnetic Proximity Switch Circuit   Remarks for the proposed Magnetic Proximity Switch Circuit Switch S1 is usually a general purpose magnetic reed switch. The devices to regulate could be hooked up employing NC,NO and C points of the relay as emphasized by the utility. Work with a twelve regulated power source for operating the circuit.
]]> 220 0 0 0 PWM Solar Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/pwm-solar-charger-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:30:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/pwm-solar-charger-circui.html

A request for a solar pwm solar battery charger circuit made by one of the user is discussed below, an appropriate circuit design for the same may be seen at the bottom of the article.

I have been reading your posts for hours upon hours looking for the exact design or how I can put multiple circuits together to create a safe autonomous solar charger. I see a lot of good partial circuits, but what makes it hard on putting them together is that you use the 555 timer for a PWM signal. I will not be interested in using the LM555 but rather the TMS320C2000 MCU Experimenter Kit that has an F28x controlCARD, http://www.ti.com/lit/ml/sprufr5f/sprufr5f.pdf ,and digitally create the varying PWM signals depending on solar radiance. Thus I will need to monitor the voltage levels of the solar panel, battery bank, and the 5V device to charge with the MCU. I would like to change the PWM converter to a buck converter. Also The solar panel I will be building will have about a 2.5V output that I need to boost to 5V. As far as amperage output goes I would say possibly 1 amp Max. But testing will have to be done to ultimately calculate that. I don't see the amperage varying more than +/- 0.5 amps. Guess components that would be able to handle a 2 amp load would be sufficient? The reason I'm making a solar panel with 2.5V output boosted to 5V, and correct me if I am wrong, is to have as much amperage as possible to the device. Each solar chip has an open cell voltage of 0.52V and a short circuit current of 75 mA. If I didn't boost the voltage and made a 5V solar panel would I have more current or less current? I will be charging an internal bank of two 3.7V Li-Ion batteries that have an Ah rating of 2.6 Ah each; as well as a 5V device hooked up to the solar charging unit. I would like to have automatic charging of both the internal batt bank(with an indicator circuit, red(0-33%), yellow(34-67%), green(68-100%) and the connect 5V device simultaneously for charging. When the batt bank is fully charged the circuit should trickle charge the batts maintaining voltage, while continuing to charging the 5V device. Then trickle charge/cut off the 5V device when it's fully charged until it is removed. If there is no sun out or not enough sun, then I would like the internal battery bank to discharge. The battery bank will either supplement the low solar voltage or be the sole source of power(like at night) to charge the 5V device. Definitely need overload protection as to not send current back into the circuitry of the device. This PWM Solar Charger Circuit must be completely autonomous and safe as to protect the circuit and the 5V device. The proposed solar pwm charger may be seen in the following design:
PWM Solar Charger Circuit
]]> 221 0 0 0 Recording Level Meter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/recording-level-meter-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:30:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/recording-level-meter-circui.html

The circuit shows a two—stage voltage amplifier driving a recording level meter. The AC signal input is amplified, rectified, and the resultant DC voltage shown on the meter. The circuit can be used with a tape recorder or audio mixer and should be fed from a point early in the pre-amp. Current consumption in a no-signal state is 2.8mA. The 12K preset gives a variation in sensitivity. The Recording Level Meter Circuit can be any general purpose type.

]]> 222 0 0 0 Dark Room Timer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/dark-room-timer-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:30:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/dark-room-timer-circui.html

 Working in a darkroom is always fraught with problems. You surely know Murphys Law of. . ., but Let’s not go into that here. Suffice it to say that normal lights cannot be used in a darkroom when photographs are being developed not even if you drop your glasses! The dark room timer circuit here is a simple, inexpensive design for a darkroom torch (or light) that can be mounted in a case small enough to fit into your pocket even with a 9 V battery included.

It gives enough light for note-taking or finding this or that in a darkroom, but the light is emitted by three special yellow LEDs which can safely be used near black/white or colour paper. Red LEDs are used for orthochromatic material (we had to look it up too, it means giving correct relative intensity to colours in photography'!). An energy saving circuit is included that automatically switches the lamp off when the ambient light is above a certain level. The diagram for the circuit makes it look like a mini power supply. When the circuit is switched 'on' with S1 T2 conducts and provides, in turn, a base drive current to transistor T1. This transistor then supplies the base current for T2 via R5 and P1. Switching S1 off causes C1 to deliver a negative pulse to the base of T2 and this transistor then stops conducting. Tl also stops conducting and the LEDs go out. The energy saving circuitry requires the addition of just one component, the LDR. When enough light falls on it the LDR's resistance causes T2 to switch off and extinguish the LEDs. The light level at which this happens is set by means of preset P1 Q LEDs D3 . . . D5 must be high efficiency types and are either red or yellow depending on what sort of photographic paper is used. There are various high intensity LEDs available, although the light intensity level can also be changed by varying the current flow through T1 (by substituting another value of resistor for R1 ). With the values stated about 20 mA flows through the LEDs and, seeing as the current consumption when the LEDs are off is only a few nA, the 9 V battery should last quite a while. Finally it is important to remember that some types of photographic paper are sensitive to all colours, including red and yellow, so check this before using the lamp.

Dark Room Timer Circuit is shown below

Dark Room Timer Circuit
]]> 223 0 0 0 Transmitting Electricity Without Wires https://makingcircuits.com/blog/transmitting-electricity-without-wires/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:29:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/transmitting-electricity-without-wires.html

 Here's 2 pictures which shows how to transfer electricity without using wires, one is the fully completed second sec exciter is guess what despite the last 2 series coil sections mistakenly wound in anti clockwise direction unlike the first 2 coils in the series wound in clockwise direction this thing actually works in pulsating the hv ,dc,ac and rf output.

so i borrowed a flux core housing pipe from my other EC units and used it to test this one and as i pulled the core out its hv ac dc and RF output all in the one pulsate as the neon indicator between the output terminals seem to indicate that in fact it looks like its flickering to but the speed looks like elf or vlf frequency , it appears to react more when i pull the core out more to and the other sec exciter well its neon is on constantly to show the hv ac, dc, and RF output all in the one and when the core is pulled out so far the neon then starts to react by blinking or pulsating so it can be controlled or made to do that by pulling the core out to a certain position, but the most interest is the second sec exciter its output neon blinking or pulsating all the time which appears to speed up when you pull the core out is something ill be experimenting with more often and it goes to show having 2 out of so many coil windings wound the wrong way appears to of enhanced its performance or other , one of the new sec exciters was already powered up when the picture was taken

 
here's a new design i come up with using the same features as the hv ac, dc rf output circuit with the microwave oven capacitor in it, this one dose away with the microwave oven capacitor and uses a hv photo flash capacitor and the 10.0uf capacitor that was where the photo flash cap is now, has been moved so this would be easier to build and smaller which im gonna try to do as im running out of pcb to make printed circuit boards with but if anyone has trouble powering this they need to have a more powerful sec exciter like mine 9 volts dc at 500 milliamps
this new ten part circuit when powered from the rf output of the sec exciter series coil tower will put out hv dc, hv and ac and strong rf currents a photo flash capacitor was used in this design of mine, and the 10.0 uf 100 volts larger brown capacitor was relocated. and the high output still lights a neon off either of the outputs so the rf currents may be stronger.
More facts regarding Transmitting Electricity Without Wires IVE CONDUCTED A SECOND TEST AFTER RE SOLDERING ONE OF MY INDUCTOR LEGS WHICH WAS LOOSE AND I USED MY FREQUENCY COUNTER SET TO 10 MEGA HERTZ RANGE AND WITH THE EM FLUX CONCENTRATING CORE PIPE WITH ONLY A FEW CORES IN IT AND NOT FILLED UP YET, AND WITHOUT BORROWING MY OTHER FULL CORE PIPE FROM MY OTHER SEC EXCITERS, I THEN SLID THE CORE PIPE OUT AND THE HIGHEST READING I GOT WAS 1 MILLION AND 597 THOUSAND AND 362 KHZ SO IT WAS PAST 1 MEGAHERTZ. ANYHOW WITH JUST ONLY 6 CORES IN THE CORE PIPE, AND THE RF OUTPUT CAN BE FELT AND YET THE OUTPUT SECTIONS NEON WAS BLINKING SLOW AS IF PAUSING OVER A MILLION HERTZ AT A SLOW RATE AND THE FREQUENCIES WENT DOWN AND UP PENDING WHERE THE SIX CORES WAS IN RELATION TO THE POSITIONS OF THE SERIES COILS , COMPARED TO THE CORES IN THE CORE PIPE, THE RADIO WAS MAKING STRANGE NOISES AND IF YOU LOOK AT THE SPEED THE NEON WAS BLINKING COMPARED TO THE SOUND COMING FROM THE RADIO IT WASN'T SYNCHRONIZED , ENOUGH BUT THE EXPERIMENT WAS INTERESTING AND WITH THE CORE PIPE WITH ONLY 6 CORES IN IT PULLED OUT TO A POSITION THE NEON WOULD LIGHT UP AND REMAIN CONSTANTLY LIT TILL YOU PULL THE CORE OUT OR SLIDE IT IN MORE . ALSO A NEON HELD BY ONE LEG AND BROUGHT UP TO EACH OF THE SERIES COILS WOULD LIGHT THE NEON UP PENDING ON THE POSITION OF THE CORE PIPE AND IF YOU PULL THE CORE PIPE OUT SO FAR THE NEON WOULD LIGHT UP AT A GOOD DISTANCE AWAY FROM THE 2 THICKEST GAUGE POWER COILS SO THE POWER IS MAINLY AT THESE 2 COILS AT THE END OF THE SEC EXCITER SERIES COILS ALSO THE NEON LIGHTS UP WHEN BROUGHT UP TO THE OTHER COILS TO PENDING ON THE POSITION OF THE CORE PIPE TO. AND SO IT SEEMS THE THICKER 20 GAUGE COILS AT THE END EMIT THE MOST RF POWER. THE TESTS NEED TO BE DONE AGAIN BUT USING A FULL CORE PIPE THIS TIME. AND NOT JUST A PIPE WITH 6 CORES ONLY. AT NO TIME DURING THE SECOND TEST DID THE HV CAPACITOR CIRCUIT PUT OUT HV SO IT SEEMS TO BE JUST HIGHER RF AND LOW VOLTAGE DC ONLY, WITH THIS PROTOTYPE SET UP. PULLING THE CORE PIPE WITH ONLY 6 CORES IN IT TO VARIOUS POSITIONS MADE THE RADIO CREATE DIFFERENT SOUNDS LIKE TUNING THROUGH VARIOUS FREQUENCIES. ONE SOUNDED A BIT LIKE A SOUND MADE ON THE OLD WAR OF THE WORLDS MOVIE BEFORE THE ALIEN SPACE CRAFT, ZAPPED OUT ITS DEATH RAY. IVE CAPTURED THIS ON VIDEO TO. ALSO WITH THE WHOLE THING POWERED UP AND THE RADIO INTERFERENCE FROM THE EMITTED RF WAVES, I FIND THE INTERFERENCE TO THE RADIO CHANGES WHEN I MOVE CLOSE TO THE WHOLE SET UP AS IF MY BODY'S E FIELD IS INTERACTING WITH THE ENERGY FROM THE COILS SO IF I MOVE BACK THE NEON BLINKS SLOWLY WITH THE CORE SET IN POSITION BUT WHEN I GET CLOSE THE RADIO INTERFERENCE GETS LOUDER AND EVEN MORE WHEN I BRING JUST MY HAND UP TO ANY OF THE COIL SECTIONS MAINLY THE 2 POWER COILS AND IF I TAP ONE OF THE POWER COILS THE SOUND COME OVER THE RADIO LIKE TAPPING ON A MICROPHONE SO I RECKON THIS PROJECT MAY HAVE SOME MORE BIZARRE MYSTERIES TO IT AND I THINK I T MAY HAVE SOME MORE SURPRISES TO IT LIKE TRANSMITTING TONE OR VOICE OVER THE RF WAVES FROM THE COIL OR OTHER. FROM A DISTANCE OR THE POWER COIL IS ACTING ALMOST LIKE AN EM PICKUP. OF SOME UNKNOWN KIND.
Pictures for Transmitting Electricity Without Wires
 
]]> 224 0 0 0 Police Strobe Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/police-strobe-light-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:28:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/police-strobe-light-circui.html

When powered this police strobe light circuit, produces the recognizable strobe light illumination that can be seen in police cars.

To arrive at the desired effect two pieces of lights were implemented (in our scenario: LEDs), which are activated alternately. Whenever a set is running, the corresponding LED turns on and off three times. Subsequently the other group is active and quite the same. The procedure is sustained indefinitely.

This effect is comparable to strobe lights that at times are used in the dance halls. Let's learn how the circuit works The circuit employs a 555 that features as clock decade counter 4017B. Changing the values of the resistors and capacitor attached to the timer may be used to change the clock speed. Although the values presented initiate the circuit to perform pretty well. The 4017B delivers sequentially in each of its outputs a high signal level. If only outputs 0, is well identified 2, 4, 5, 7, 9 are connected. This is done to produce flashing of the diode whenever each group of LEDs is connected. See that the outputs 1,3,6 and 8 are not associated and the time necessary to create the display LEDs off. The first group of LEDs connected to the outputs 0, 2 and 4, and the second group is connected to the outputs 5, 7, 9.
police strobe light circuit
List of components for police strobe light circuit
IC1: 555 timer IC2: 4017B decade counter Q1 = Q2: 2N2222 or 8050 D1 = D2 = D3 = D4 = D5 = D6 1N4007 diodes D7 to D18: RED 5mm LEDs R1: 1K resistor R2: 22K resistor R3 to R10: 470 ohm C1: 2.2uF/25V C2: 0.01uF ceramic discThe circuit is powered by a 12VDC supply or a battery of the same voltage as the cars (B +).
]]> 225 0 0 0 Signal Injector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/signal-injector-circuit-explained/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:28:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/signal-injector-circuit-explained.html

While troubleshooting amplifier and audio related equipment, a signal injector circuit becomes one of the most essential tools, here we learn how to make a signal injector circuit.

Here is a two in-one test instrument incorporating a signal injector and a signal tracer. If any audio equipment is not working, an audio signal can be injected at the volume control using this instrument. lf audio signal appears at the speaker of the set, you can be fairly sure that there is no trouble in the audio output stage. Otherwise, the fault lies in the audio stage itself. Thus, by injecting the signal, the fault can be traced. To check the ·RF stage, an audio signal can be injected in the RF stage. If the output appears at the speaker, the equipment is working properly, other- wise the fault lies in the RF stage. The Signal Injector Circuit  besides injecting signals at RF, IF and AF stages can also detect signals at these frequencies. 1 X 1 is a 3V output transformer used in pocket transistor sets.

Signal Injector Circuit
]]> 226 0 0 0 Light Activated Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/light-activated-switch-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:27:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/light-activated-switch-circui.html

This light activated switch circuit relay is activated only in the presence of light. It has many applications, it could be used as a photocell and to off the light in a room or turn on the radio when it is dawning, etc. Working of light activated switch

The photoresist / LDR whose ohmic value varies depending on the amount of light that may be incident upon its surface. A network of two resistors (R1 and R2) of equivalent value, causes the voltage at the non-inverting terminal of operational be 6 volts. If the LDR is not illuminated, its resistance is high and causes the voltage at the non-inverting terminal of the operational amplifier, drops below 6 volts. The output of the operational amplifier is high, the transistor Q1 is off and the relay is not active. When as soon as the LDR is illuminated, resistance and voltage across its terminals decreases to a lower value, causing the voltage at the inverting terminal of the opamp to increase over exceeding 6 volts. The value of LDR is not critical at all. The pot P is adjusted so as to have the same ohmic value just as the LDR, under all normal conditions. The supply battery can be 12 or 9 volt.
Light Activated Switch Circuit
Notes: LDR photoresistor = photoresistor List of  components for the Light Activated Switch Circuit - IC1: operational amplifier 741 - Q1: PNP transistor 2N3702 or equivalent - R1 = R2: 10K resistors - R3 = R4: 1.2K resistors - P: potentiometer is worth approximately twice the LDR - D1 Diode 1N4001 or equivalent - LDR: photoresist of any value - 1 relay (relay) 9 Volt (B = 12V) or 6 volts (B = 9V), with the winding resistance as high as possible, (500 ohms or more)
]]> 227 0 0 0 Simple Transistor Tester Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-transistor-tester-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:27:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-transistor-tester-circui.html

The circuit used in making simple Transistor Tester Combo-2 has only one IC.

This IC performs the following process as mentioned below:

Test Process1: Position the transistor to the three circuit terminals of Circuit 1 (located either below of left of the terminal). Once pointed, the red LED can then identify the PNP transistor base. This process will lead to the emission of a green LED, which points to the base of the NPN conductor.

Test Process 2: Now that you are aware of the transistor type and the base lead, simply position the transistor in the top circuit (Test 2). As you properly place the collector, the emitter works perfectly. However, there may be a chance to swipe leads in case if it fails to work. If the red and green LED works it proves the transistor is functional correctly.
Test Process 3: The transistor is now ready to be placed in the GAIN SECTION. Select either NPN or PNP. As you select, simply turn on the pot and keep it turned as long as the LED is illuminated. However, as a matter of practice be sure to check the value of the gain mentioned in the PCB.
The probe located at the end of the board helps to create square wave. Furthermore, this simple transistor tester probe is also efficient to testing audio of any sorts. 
Simple Transistor Tester Circuit
]]> 228 0 0 0 PIR Motion Sensor Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/pir-motion-sensor-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:26:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/pir-motion-sensor-circui.html

The post discusses a simple PIR motion sensor circuit shared by one of the interested members of this blog.

  This is my smallest, cheapest, foolproof etc. movement detector with dim-switch that works in all conditions. In the drawing "tv" means "or similar". Enjoy! I have operated the circuit with 2½-9V, but maybe ca 5V is the best. So I bought 4 off cheapest possible solar garden lamps with rechargeable batteries. Price 2 euro per piece. So now I'm going to put together four solar cells, four AAA-batteries and one 5252F (I have three ICs as spare parts!). The necessary coil is also included in the lamp, so I don't need to buy any parts. Enclosed the PCB with parts. The PIR has to be in the middle of the board and also the place of the two fastening screws are mentioned. So, make a big hole in the plastic box and/or in the PCB for the PIR and put all together. I don't know why it shouldn't work, but we'll see. Thumbs up!   PCB design for the proposed PIR Motion Sensor Circuit
 
PIR Motion Sensor Circuit
]]> 230 0 0 0 Simple Mutifunction Timer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-mutifunction-timer-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:25:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-mutifunction-timer-circui.html A timer is practically unachievable without IC 555 or counter ICs along the lines of CD4029 or CD4060. The simple mutifunction timer circuit in this article takes advantage of an inverter rather for accomplishing the same duty. As revealed in the projected multifunction timer circuit, gate N1 together with C1, R1, VR1 and VR2 shapes 21 monostable multivibrator. Each time S1 and S2, which happen to be ganged, come in point 2, input at gate N1 is retained low and thus as a result the output of gate N1 evolves into high. This high output charges C1 by means of series association of R1, VR1 and VR2. Simultaneously output of gate N2, which happens to be low, is directed at gate N6 and end result of gate N6 gets high. The high output causes the triac along with the power is applied to the load. After a while period of T = 0.7 x C1 (R1 + VR1 + VR2), at the output of gate N6 ends up being low so the triac inhibits conducting. Thereby this section of the circuit works in monoshot format. Each time S1and S2 have reached set 1, the input of gate N6 is in touch with the astable multivibrator developed around gates N3 and N4. Hence, the load is discontinued periodically. In this case VR3 is ganged with VR5, and VR4 is ganged with VR6 to produce a square wave. Duty cycle of the operation could be changed simply by eliminating the gang design (since the at charging and discharging period is going to be unique). Here gates N2 and N5 are like working as buffers. Once S1 and S2 have been in spot 3, the input of gate N6 is grounded and consequently the output of N6 continues as high provided that s the switches stay in this position. Therefore, the triac continues to be on while the current runs continually by way of the load. Eventually, any time S1 and S2 stay in position 4, the input of N6 is attached to Vcc on account of which the output stays at logic 0. The triac is unable to operate which means that you have no current in the load. 330k pots are supposed to be calibrated for 0 to 60 seconds and 10M pots calibrated for 0 to 30 minutes. As a result, anybody can attain any specific expected timing from 0 to 30 minutes. Application of tantalum capacitors unquestionably improves the reliability of this multifunction timer circuit, nevertheless the expense might also go up. Standalone on/off switch is not essential due to the fact that stand-by mode intake is just a few microamperes. In full load situation, the circuit draws around 5 to 6 mA current guaranteeing a lifetime for the battery. This particular timer switch work extremely well as a time regulator for washing machines, heaters and for system control associating short timing and so on. The circuit could possibly be quickly configured on a general-purpose PCB. It will cost you around $1, without battery source. multifunction timer circuit
]]> 232 0 0 0 Exponential Waveform Generator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/exponential-waveform-generator-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:24:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/exponential-waveform-generator-circui.html

This exponential waveform generator circuit provides you with a waveform which sinks exponentially from a specific voltage to near-zero, after which quickly resets to reactivate the sequence. In the beginning C1 is charged to +12V, and O1, O2 are each off. The timing capacitor at this time there discharges gently by means of R1, the exponentially sinking voltage occurring at low impedance at the output of unity-gain buffer RC2. R2 puts a stop to the leakage current from O1 impacting the discharge as D1 is reverse-biased. Any time the voltage on Cl extends to a merit beyond zero that may be fixed by R3, R4, the open collector O/P of lC1 turns out low, switching on O1 and quickly recharging C1. lC1 ofcourse reverts to its initial condition virtually instantly, however the recharge state is extended for a few milliseconds through the positive feedback loop by way of R5, C2 and O2, to guarantee C1 charges completely. After that time period C2 is additionally completely charged, and O2 goes off, switching off Q1, and enabling the gradual discharge of C1 to commence yet again. Using the part values proven for this exponential waveform generator circuit every phase continues roughly ten seconds.

exponential waveform generator circuit
]]> 234 0 0 0 Automatic Day/Night Switch Circuit using Bi-Metal Strip and LDR https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-daynight-switch-circuit/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:20:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/automatic-daynight-twilight-switc.html The following explained automatic day night switch circuit using a Bi-Metal strip and an LDR is able to automatically illuminate your porch light or power up some other equipment once the ambient lighting falls below the specific intensity. A ·light dependent resistor is employed in sequence with a relay. The resistor possesses a value above 1 megohm the minute switched on, this goes down A7 to below 110 ohms in case of a day light. It is imperative that the LDR be placed in sort of a location as not to pick up any kind of spurious luminosity because this will result in the relay to give up sporadically. ' A bimetallic strip type relay will offer ample delay to make sure that incident lights flashes never have any sort of impact. Automatic Day/Night Switch Circuit using Bi-Metal Strip and LDR diagram can be see in the following section
simple automatic day night switch circuit
]]> 240 0 0 0 Gas Sensor Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/gas-sensor-circuit-this-gas-sensor/ Mon, 27 Apr 2015 13:59:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/gas-sensor-circuit-this-gas-sensor.html This gas sensor circuit is going to identify just about all pollutants available as gaseous material when it is more than a specific predetermined limits. Just to illustrate the suggested circuit can be applied for sensing the LPG gas leakage in a your home or the increased signs of CO2 contamination in excessive traffic afflicted zones etc. It actually can much point out when someone was heavily drunk or intoxicated. The presented gas tester circuit could be easily checked by inhaling and exhaling into the sensing unit mouth which could validate its functioning, given that our breathing carries CO2 is going to be instantaneously distinguished by this specific gas sensor circuit. The resistance (which in neat air is approximately sixty k) will reduce the moment it acknowledges contaminants in the atmosphere. The CO quantities generally evident in exhaust gases lowers the resistance to under three k. This significance are very different a tad bit from one sensor to a different and, furthermore, it is actually vulnerable to air temperature, humidity, and standard of heating voltage. You may currently figure out the place the technical boundaries on measurements with semiconductor gas sensors are situated. Before studying in depth, it could be advisable to reread the information of the TCA965 window discriminator. The input voltage to lC2 (pin 8) which can be fixed by P1 goes up with escalating air pollution. The boundaries of the discriminator, in accordance with one per cent and 4.5% CO amounts respectively, are established with P2 and P3. With thoroughly clean air, the input on pin 8 can be found below the smaller limit (pin 7): LED D1 (green) illuminates mainly because pin 2 of IC2 is logic ’0’in the collection of 1...4.5 per cent CO, the yellow LED (D2) signals, due to the fact that the input to pin 8 at this point is located within the window. Whenever the CO amount surpasses 4.5 per cent, red LED D3 illuminates, given that the voltage on pin 8 at this moment is situated over the higher limit (pin 6). Up to now, so much better. Preheating indicator The gas sensor needs to be preheated each time before it is applied. To help you save needing to keep searching for the clock, a little auxiliary circuit functions as flashing indicator lamp. After the circuit is activated, IC3, along with N3 and N4, makes a low logic intensity for roughly 3 minutes. Gate N2 inverts this signal to ensure that the rectanguIar pulse generator in line with Nl turns transistor T1 in tempo with the pulse rate. After the pre-heating interval has lapsed, the output of N3 turns out high as well as the rectangular-pulse generator is stopped. While the base of Tl is after that completely at higher logic stage, the LEDs illuminate solid rather than blink. The pre-heating time frame will depend on R7 and C4, whereas the pulsating frequency relies on the values of R6 and C3. gas sensor circuit
Courtesy: Elektor Electronics
]]> 241 0 0 0 Simple Code Lock Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-code-lock-as-circuit-consists-of/ Mon, 27 Apr 2015 13:58:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-code-lock-as-circuit-consists-of.html As the simple code lock circuit consists of extremely few components it is also very cheap to build, the code is a 3-Step with no digits it may be repeated, for eg. 123 or 473 are OK, but not 112 or 767th This is the simple version of the circuit can be easily found in the code by simply try after some time. This circuit I had in my mind for quite some time in the past, just threw it together this weekend. The assorted-resistance value may seem a little strange I just selected whatever the next-best resistors I had in my junk box. The values are therefore only indicative and may be chosen as per individual comforts. With these values, you have to type in the code pretty quickly if you do not want to press all 3 buttons simultaneously. The simple code lock circuit is assembled as per the plan shown below and may be the easiest over a piece of prototype board. The switches are not soldered to pads, the shown are only for 3 selected out of the 10 keys. Therefore you solder only the capacitors, resistors, transistors, and the relay, the places where the switches are required could be just ways you can put solder pins. The 10-button keypad is supplied on the same pole with + voltage, which include the three contacts with the numbers they want to use as the code to be connected to the solder pins. going from bottom to top, ie. In the present diagram the Code is 321 The remaining contacts are soldered to each other and connected to the relay No.2, which locks the circuit. If you are having difficuty understanding, it's going from the keyboard 5 wires away (3x code button + 1x every other button + 1x positive voltage) This is necessary because otherwise all the switches could be pressed simultaneously, and thus the code would be triggered.
  ]]> 242 0 0 0 Automotive Engine Temperature Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automotive-engine-temperature/ Mon, 27 Apr 2015 13:58:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/automotive-engine-temperature.html The article talks about a basic opamp structured automotive engine heat controller circuit for regulating servos in accordance with the coolant heat, the concept was wanted by Mr. John Circuit demand from Mr. John Really like your websites. Discovered a lot of circuit I am going to be constructing. I am trying to find an easy automobile circuit that should switch on around three 12V servos, impacted by engine coolant heat range as calculated by the temp transmitting unit. After that switching the servos off one by one as the engine warms up. For a second time as contingent on the temperature transmitting unit. Servos could possibly be operated through relays. Temperature Ohms 48 degrees F 7000 87 degrees F 1930 146 degrees F 560 Thanks John Scientific explanation of the suggested automotive engine temperature controller circuit: A1, A2, A3 are three opamps IC 741 designed as comparators, with their inverting inputs hooked up to the output of LM35 IC which is basically a precision temperature detectors microchip. The non-inverting inputs of the three opamps are connected using 10k presets just about every for the necessary controls. A1 preset is fine-tuned in ways that its production turns out low from the stipulated 48 degrees C, in the same way A2 and A3 presets are grouped to deliver zero voltages at the particular opamp end results in accordance with the temperatures of 87 and 146 degrees C correspondingly. In case the above is scheduled and power is activated, all of the relays are concurrently switch ON initiating the servo1,2,3. At this point as the engine starts out to heat and grows to the first limit of 48 degrees C, A1 relay switches OFF the Servo1, in the same manner, A2 switches of servo2 at the set 87 degrees C, as well as A3 toggles off servo3 at around 146 degrees C.
]]> 244 0 0 0 Headphone Loudness Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/headphone-loudness-controller-circui/ Mon, 27 Apr 2015 13:58:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/headphone-loudness-controller-circui.html

Numerous contemporary top quality amplifiers include headphone loudness controller circuit in-built inside. Practically in most scenarios these are by hand flipped into circuit the minute preferred in some amplifiers the circuit is switched in constantly. Having said that you will find all kinds of outdated or contemporary affordable amplifiers that will be not installed with loudness benefit - in addition to being for devices for example such that this straightforward project has been created. The headphone loudness controller circuit displayed is designed for a mono amplifier a couple of are essential for stereo amplifiers. lt is often rather plainly constructed on component strips or matrix board, and, any time finished attached between your preamplifier and main amplifier. lf your unit is an built-in device it would best be conveniently possible to crack into the volume control circuit primarily hook up the unit in succession with the slider terminal of the potentiometer. Shielded terminals could possibly be recommended of extended measures are essential. We would wish to accentuate that this is a 'c0mpr0mise' circuit. Totally a loudness control needs to be specifically created to align with the amplifier for which it is manufactured. Moreover the level of Loudness compensation probably will be associated with the volume control positioning. This second condition necessitates swapping the available volume control by a appropriately tapped potentiometer a piece of equipment that is not easily accessible "off the shelf" as a result the circuit displayed below provides a limited level or compensation that could be well suited for good enough listening volumes. This circuit is going to accommodate the majority of amplifiers very efficiently as well as in any circumstance could be tweaked by insignificant variance of component values in the event i's. Switch SW1 could be a double-pole double-throw mode when stereo audio functioning becomes necessary.

]]> 245 0 0 0 Automatic Street light circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/street-light-circui/ Mon, 27 Apr 2015 13:46:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/street-light-circui.html

The post explains a simple automatic street light circuit which switches ON at night and switches OFF at day time.

Explanation The circuit chart show here is that of a road light that consequently switches ON when the sunsets and turns OFF when the sun climbs. Actually you can use this circuit for executing any sort of programmed night light.
The circuit utilizes a Light Dependent Resistor (LDR) to sense the light .When there is light the safety of LDR will be low. So the voltage drop crosswise over POT R2 will be high.This keeps the transistor Q1 ON. The gatherer of Q1(BC107) is coupled to base of Q2(SL100). So Q2 will be OFF thus do the transfer. The globule will stay OFF. At the point when dusks the safety of LDR increments to make the voltage over the POT R2 to lessening underneath 0.6V. This makes transistor Q1 OFF which thus makes Q2 ON. The transfer will be stimulated and the lamp module will sparkle. Notes. POT R2 can be utilized to change the affectability of the circuit. You can utilize globule of any wattage, if that transfer ought to have the sufficient rating. The Automatic Street light circuit can be controlled from a managed 9V DC power supply. The hand-off K1 can be a 9V SPDT transfer. ]]> 246 0 0 0 500VA Pure Sine Wave Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/making-300va-pure-sine-wave-inverter/ Fri, 01 Nov 2013 12:12:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2013/11/making-300va-pure-sine-wave-inverter.html Let's try to work out the proposed 500VA Pure Sine Wave inverter circuit layout elaborately with the following facts:IC2 and IC3 are in particular designed in the form of the PWM generator step. IC2 shapes the high frequency generator essential for the switching the PWM waveform which happens to be treated by IC3. For working the IC2 oscillations, IC3 is required to be supplied through a sine wave comparative instruction at the pin#5, or the control input of the right IC 555. Considering that producing sine waveform is somewhat challenging compared with a triangular waves, the triangle was favored because it looked much easier to render nevertheless works pretty much a sine wave counterpart. IC1 is connected up as the triangle wave generator, whose result is ultimately applied to pin#5 of IC3 for the building the expected RMS sine similar to at its pin#3. In spite of this the above refined PWM signals must be modulated over a push-pull version of design to ensure the waveforms have the ability to charge the transformer with alternately operating current. This could be required for accomplishing an secondary mains made up of equally positive as well as the negative half cycles. The IC 4017 is brought in mainly for enacting this function. The IC produces a in sequence jetting output from its pin#2 to pin#4, to pin #7, to pin#3 and returning to pin#2, in accordance with just about every ascending pulse side at pin #14. This pulse is created from the output of IC2, which is basically determined to 200 Hz precisely to ensure that the outputs of IC4017 ends up with a 50 Hz throughout the sequencing from the above mentioned pin outs. Pin#4 and pin#3 are specifically ignored, for making a killed zone around the gates sets off of the corresponding transistors/mosfets plugged into the pertinent outputs of IC4017. This dead time takes care that the fets by no means switch ON collectively possibly even for a nano second at changeover periods, thereby safeguards the well-being of the gadgets. The running positive outputs at pin#2 and 7 activate the corresponding fets which then compel the transformer to saturate with the AC power supply brought on in the specific winding. This leads to the procreation of approximately 330+ V AC at the secondary of the transformer. Nevertheless this voltage could well be a square wave with excessive RMS if this might not be treated with the PWM from IC3. Transistor T1 together with its collector diode is applied with the PWM pulses in ways that T1 at this point runs and grounds the base volatge voltages of the outputs fets in keeping with the PWM information. This contributes to an output that may be a definite reproduction of the the applied PWM fully optimized feed..... building absolutely etched pure sine wave AC counterpart. The explained 500VA Pure Sine Wave inverter circuit possesses other highlights for instance a manual output voltage modification circuit. The a couple of BC108 transistors are stationed for regulating the gate commute voltage degrees of the mosfets, the base current these particular transistors originate from a tiny sensing winding on the transformer which supplies the demanded output voltage measure data to the transistors. In the event that the output voltage should go beyond the anticipated normal intensity, the base volatge of the above transistors could possibly be realigned and cut down by adjusting the 5K preset, consequently bringing down the conduction of the mosfets, eventually straightening out the output AC to the preferred boundaries. The BD135 transistor together with its base zener presents a stabilized voltage to the involved electronics for perpetuating constant PWM output from the pertinent ICs. Using IRF1404 being the mosfets, the inverter have the ability to yield approximately 300 to 5000 watts of pure sine wave output. Submitted By Ravi Singh  
 
A few drawbacks and flaws were found while carrying out a close inspection of the above circuit details. The improvized circuit (hopefully) is presented below.
The above 500VA Pure Sine Wave inverter circuit could be even more enhanced using an automatic output correction feature as indicated below. It is executed by introducing the LED/LDR opto-coupler stage.  
]]> 247 0 0 0 463 0 0 464 463 1 Marker Generator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/marker-generator-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:43:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/marker-generator-circui.html

The marker generator circuit explained here is a constant- frequencyoscillator driving into a CMOS divider chain.

Switchable out- puts from the divider chain are selected to drive a pulse generator.

The oscillator is C1a in which R1 biases the IC into linear operation. The crystal determines the basic frequency of operation at 4 MHz in conjunction with C1, 2, 3 and 4 which appear to the crystal as one parallel capacitor. The capacitor C2 is  used to tune the oscillator exactly to frequency as explained in the text. The resistor R2 adds extra phase shift but also reduces the gain. Thus if the oscillator is slow in starting reducing R2 may help. The output of the oscillator is buffered from the rest of the circuit by IC1 /b. lC2 is a CMOS dual type D flip flop that divides the 4 MHz by four to provide an out put of 1 MHz, the 2 MHz also being brought out.  A further dual division by 10 is provided by lC3 which therefore provides outputs of 100 kHz and 10 kHz. The required output is selected by SW1 and applied to C5 and R3 which differentiate the square wave output of the divider. The waveform is then amplified and squared by IC1/c to provide an output train of narrow pulses, 'the amplitude of which may be varied by means of RV1
]]> 202 0 0 0 Precision Rectifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/precision-rectifier-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:41:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/precision-rectifier-circui.html

The post explains a simple precision rectifier circuit using just two opamps.

This precision rectifier operates from an asymmetrical supply, handles input signals up to 3 Vpp and has a frequency range that extends from DC to about 2 kHz. Its amplification is unity, and depends mainly on the ratio R4/R3. Opamp A1 is connected as a voltage amplifier (Ao=l), Az as an inverting amplifier (Ao:-l). Opamp Az, transistor T1 and diode D2 ensure that the output voltage, U2, is identical to the positive excursions of the input voltage, U1. When U1 is positive, the out- put of A1 is held low at about 0.25 V, so that T2 is disabled and can not affect the rectified out- put signal. Components R2 and D1 protect the pnp input stage in Az against negative voltages, which are effectively limited to -0.6 V. For negative excursions of the input signal, the function of A1, T2 and Dz is similar to the previously mentioned components. The peak output voltage . of the rectifier circuit is deter- ; mined mainly by the maximum output swing of the opamps and the voltage drop across the transistors plus D2: this amounts to about 3 V in all. When the circuit is not driven, it l consumes about lmA, and is therefore eminently suitable for building into portable, battery- operated equipment.
]]> 203 0 0 0 Theremin Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/theremin-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:41:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/theremin-circui.html This is the only musical instrument known to the writer that is played without being touched! The Theremin is named after Professor Theremin who, in 1928, amazed New York audiences when he demonstrated his ability "to obtain music from the ether". The instrument has two rods protruding from its housing, each one forming one 'plate’ of a capacitor. The performer's hands become the second  'plates’ when held near the rods. The capacitive changes engendered in one rod controls the pitch of the tone, the other rod responding by varying the amplitude of the output. simple. experimental circuit is illustrated . The plate should be around 30cm. square. lt ls placed next to a radio receiver tuned to a fairly strong station around 900 kHz. The slug of the coil is then adjusted to obtain the most pleasing tone. When the hand is moved near the plate, the picth of the tone will change. 
]]> 204 0 0 0 Sine Wave Oscillator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sine-wave-oscillator-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:40:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/sine-wave-oscillator-circui.html

To maintain oscillation the op. amp. must have a gain equal or exceeding this attentuation which is in fact x3. The desired gain is obtained by selecting the ratio of feedback resistance to input resistance of the inverting input (RV2 + R3)/R2. lf the overall gain, including feedback, exceeds unity the circuit will produce sine wave oscillation at a frequency set by the Wien network. Stabilisation of the gain is brought about by the action of diodes D1 and Dl% then  the instantaneous output voltage is close to zero, neither diode conducts, since even a germanium diode requires 0.4 volts or so forward voltage to bias it on. Consequently, the negative feedback loop is open (giving maximum gain) and, under the action of the positive feedback via the Wien network, oscillations build up rapidly. As soon as their amplitude is  sufficient to bias on either Dl or D2 (depending on the polarity of the output voltage swing), then R2, R3 and RV2 provide negative feedback, so limiting oscillations to a convenient level. Reinforcement of such oscillations takes place close to each zero crossing when D1 and D2 are open ire. non·conducting; the setting of RV2 determines the final amplitude. This method of stabilisation does give rise to a very small amount of crossover distortion, but the effect of this can be minimised by setting VR2 for the largest possible sine wave without clipping. ln any event, some distortion is a small price to pay for such a simple, easy-to~get—working sine wave oscillator and, further, it is a low level of distortion — some class B audio amplifiers are worse! Range switching is confined to a choice of two ranges, in the interest of simplicity and cheapness, but more ranges could easily be provided if the  constructor is so inclined. A simple emittentouower output stage completes the unit, with a logarithmic potentiometer as a level control, enabling the output to be set from 1 V rms down to 10 mV rms or so. With wiring up completed and thoroughly checked, switch on and, if possible, monitor the output on an oscilloscope. No ’scope? Then a pair of headphones, of reasonably high impedance, can be used instead. Set RV4 about half way, S1 to "low" and RVI about half way. lf there is no output, adjust RV2; clockwise rotation should give increased output. With an ac meter, measure the signal level at the junction of D1, D2 and RV2. Adjust RV2 for 3 volts rms. This will ensure the highest output level (thus reducing the effect of crossover distortion) consistent with sine wave operation (no`clipping). This should provide about one volt rms at the output.
]]> 205 0 0 0 Simple Neon Flasher Circuits https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-neon-flasher-circuits/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:39:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-neon-flasher-circuits.html

The post details about a few simple neon flasher circuits
The ionization potential of a neon used in the circuit is around 70V. To the extreme left of circuit 1, a neon is connected.
A 0.47 microFarrad capacitor connected across the neon gets charged through a 1 MOhms resistor. The moment the voltage across the capacitor reaches 70V, the neon get ignited as the capacitor starts discharging through it.
The capacitor is discharged through the lamp, creating a flash till the voltage falls below 45V, a sustainable voltage for the neon to glow.
It is a part of the circuit. Smaller values of R and C will result in an increase in the frequency and vice versa. The other two circuits are for the second and third neons respectively.
All the circuits operate on the same principle. All capacitors must have a sustainable voltage more than 100V. A capacitor is to be of polyester or polypropelene type for best results.
All neons do not have matching characteristics. Hence, while using multiple neons it is advisable to select matched ones.
]]> 206 0 0 0 Simple Metal Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-metal-detector-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:39:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-metal-detector-circui.html 
In this post we will how to make a simple metal detector circuit at home
This metal detector is a low sensitive type  can be powered by a battery 3 to 15V, and may be constructed employing four exclusive OR gates from a CMOS integrated circuit 4030. The gates have been connected as two oscillators and the detection coil metal's inductive element works together as one. When the detection coil is brought near to a metal body, the net effective inductance gets transformed in the same way and so does the frequency of the concerned oscillator. Gates A1 and A2 are the two oscillators whose frequency needs to be predetermined to around 160kHz and 161kHz, respectively, without a metal body near its vicinity and by using a frequency counter meter. The pulses generated by each of the oscillators are mixed by the gate A3 and across its output a frequency ranging from 1 to 321kHz is created, which is actually the result of the sum or difference between the two input frequencies. 321kHz signal is filtered by low pass filter having a bandwidth of about 10kHz, which may be seen built with the A4 gate and enables 1kHz signal to be amplified by crystal based headphones connected to the output. To construct the search coil 140 turns of super enameled 18 SWG copper wire must be wrapped over a mold or rigid tubular support having a diameter of 15cm.
 
]]> 207 0 0 0 Digital Volume Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/digital-volume-controller-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:38:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/digital-volume-controller-circui.html

The circuit shown here is based on the switching action of transistors. Volume of a stereo deck can be controlled with the help of a potentiometer which changes the resistance between the output of the preamplifier and input of the amplifier. This can be done with the help of decade counter, IC.4017 and some transistors. The input is applied at collectors and the output is taken from emitters of the transistors. Depending upon the output of IC 4017, the corresponding transistor gets saturated. Output from the emitters is taken through a coupling ” capacitor to block the DC components. When pin 4 of IC 4017 ° goes high, the corresponding transistor (T2) gets saturated and the input signal is directly fed to the output through the collector resistance-: To start with, press switch S1. The timer IC (IC 555) will start generating pulses at equal interval of time which are fed to IC2. Depending on the output of IC 4017 the transistor is selected. When desired volume reached; release the switch. To reset the counter, switch S2 is brought to position A. The time period of the output pulses · can be set, using the formula Td: 0.693 (R1 +2VR1 + 2R32) C1 seconds. Digital volume controller circuit diagram:
]]> 208 0 0 0 Water Level Controller Circuit using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/water-level-controller-circuit-using-ic/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:38:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/water-level-controller-circuit-using-ic.html The explained IC 555 based Automatic water level control circuit is a straightforward approach, project. It could automatically switch ON and OFF of the domestic water pump set based on the water level of the tank. You are able to utilize this motor driver circuit at your home or college employing more affordable components. The rough cost of the project is around $ 5 only. The principal good thing about this water level controller circuit is that it automatically controls the water pump with no involvement of the consumer. The control circuit of the circuit is an NE 555 IC; here we have manipulated the flip-flop within chip 555. Our project include two water level sensors, one particular attached at the top and the other towards the bottom. Functioning of this circuit is practically identical to a stable mutlivibrator Bi. Working simulation of this circuit is additionally provided below. Undoubtedly this can help you make your academic project. Water Level Controller Circuit using IC 555

How this Automatic water tank level controller work

-We understand that the property of the chip 555, ie its output will increase once the voltage at the second pin (trigger pin) is no more than 1/3 VDC. -We may also reset the IC by making use of a low voltage to the 4th pinout (reset pins). -In this particular project you will find 3 wires immersed in the water tank. We will specify two levels-Low Water Level (Low) and High (Up) Level. One of the pins of the probe or is of Vcc. -The lower level sensor is hooked up to the trigger (2) of the pin 555 CI. Therefore, the voltage at the 2nd pin is Vcc while it is inside water. -When the water level reduces, the second probe is detached from the water voltage, and the trigger pin gets to be under Vcc. Then the output of 555 gets high. -The output 555 is placed on a BC548 transistor, it trggers the relay coil and also the water pump collectively are switched on. -When the water level goes up, the upper level probe is included in water and the transistor turns OFF. Its collector voltage is VCE (sat) = 0.2. -The low voltage on the 4th pinout resets the IC. Therefore, the output of 555 turns into 0V. Thus the motor is switched OFF. -For a basic demo of this project, you may use a DC motor directly connected across the output of the 555 and ground rather than relay. - For practical execution, you have to make use of a relay. Relay rating is preferred based on the load (motor). Relay 32 amp is most effective for household purposes.  

List of Electronic components:

-Power supply (6v) -NE chip 555 - Resistors (100Ωx2, 10k) -Relais (6V, 30A) -BC 548 transistor x2 -1N4007 Diode]]> 209 0 0 0 SCR Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/scr-battery-charger-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:37:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/scr-battery-charger-circui.html

The post narrates a simple SCR based battery charger circuit for charging all types of batteries especially lead acid battery. Circuit Explanation A straightforward battery charger in view of SCR is demonstrated here. Here the SCR amends the AC mains voltage to charge the battery.In case the battery associated with the charger gets released the battery voltage gets dropped. This hinders the forward biasing voltage from arriving at the base of the transistor Q1 through R4 and D2.This switches off the transistor. At the time the transistor is turned OFF, the entryway of SCR (H1) gets the activating voltage by means of R1 & D3. This makes the SCR to direct and it begins to amend the air conditioner information voltage.The corrected voltage is given to the battery through the resistor R6(5W).This begins charging of the battery. At the point when the battery is totally charged the base of Q1 gets the forward inclination motion through the voltage divider circuit made of R3,R4,R5 and D2. This turns the transistor ON. In case the Q1 is turned ON the trigger voltage at the entryway of SCR is cut off and the SCR is turned OFF. In this condition a little measure of charge achieves the battery by means of R2 and D4 for stream charging. Since the charging voltage is just half wave corrected ,this sort of charger is suitable just for moderate charging. For quick charging full wave redressed charging voltage is required.
Notes. Gather the circuit on a decent quality PCB or basic board. The transformer T1 can be 230V essential, 18V/3A optional venture down transformer. The voltage of the battery at which the charging ought to stop can be set by  the POT R4. The battery can be associated with the charger circuit by utilizing crocodile cuts.
]]> 210 0 0 0 Flashlight Controlled Remote Control Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/flashlight-controlled-remote-contro/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:36:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/flashlight-controlled-remote-contro.html

It is sometimes very annoying for a person who, while watching a TV programme or listening to a radio or the like, has to get up to switch lights or fans or AC off. The same applies when he wants to switch them on. Using the simple flashlight remote control circuit shown in Fig. 1, one can switch almost any domestic electrical equipment from a distance, simply by flashing a torchlight.  The basic sensor used in this remote switching mechanism - is a light dependent resistor (LDR), whose resistance value changes in response to the incident light. The 555 timer is used in the monostable mode in Fig. 1, which is triggered when the voltage at its pin 2 falls below l/3 Vcc. This triggering takes place when light is incident on the LDR, thus lowering its resistance value. The l0k pot VRI is used  for setting up the triggering threshold. The output time  period of the 555 is adjustable up to l2 seconds by varying the 500k pot VR'2, so as to smooth up the light impulse (similar to switch debouncing); The output of the 555 is fed to the input ofa JK master/slave flip-flop (7473) which is configured in the toggle mode (by tying the J and K inputs to Vcc). ln the toggle mode, the output of the flip-flop changes state with every pulse at its clock input. The output of the 7473 feeds an amplifier stage comprising a BC 148 and a SLl00 transistor which are used to drive a relay that switches the instrument to be controlled. The circuit can be mounted on a small veroboard and placed in a cabinet with a small hole for exposing the LDR. Care should be taken to ensure that the LDR receives only the light from the torch, and that no ambient light falls on it. Once so installed, it will work reliably, with no false triggering that sometimes occurs in sound operated remote control units. The entire digram for the flashight controlled remote circuit is shown below:
 
]]> 211 0 0 0 Accurate Analogue Frequency Meter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/accurate-analogue-frequency-meter/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:36:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/accurate-analogue-frequency-meter.html

To measure frequency one does not  immediately have to ‘go digital’. The analogue approach will invariably prove simpler and cheaper, in particular when  the analogue readout (the multimeter)  is already to hand. All that is needed is n a plug-in device, a ‘trans1ator’, that will give the meter an input it can ‘under stand’. This design is based upon an  integrated frequency-to-voltage con verter, the Raytheon 4151. The device a is actually described as a voltage-t0 frequency converter; but it becomes clear from the application notes that  there is more to it than just that. The  linearity of the converter IC is about 1%, so.that areasonably good mul timeter will enable quite accurate b frequency measurements to be made. ·Because the 4151 is a little fussy about tithe waveform and amplitude of its input signal, the input stage of this design is a limiter-amplifier (compara tor). This stage will process a signal of any shape, that has an amplitude of at least 50 mV, into a form suitable for  feeding to the 4151. The input of this stage is protected (by diodes) against voltages up to 400 V p-p. The drive to the multimeter is provided by a ·short circuit-proof unity-gain amplifier. The circuit Figure1 gives the complete circuit of I the frequency plug-in. The input is safe for 400 V p-p AC inputs only when the DC blocking capacitor is suitably rated. The diodes prevent excessive drive volt ages from reaching the input of the comparator IC1. The inputs of this IC are biased to half the supply voltage by the divider R3/R4. The bias current flowing in R2 will cause the output of ICI to saturate in the negative direction. An input signal of sufficient amplitude to overcome this offset will cause the output to change state, the actual switchover being speeded up by the positive feedback through C3. On the opposite excursion of the inputsignal the comparator will switch back again, so that a large rectangularwave will be fed to the 4151 input.  The 4151 will now deliver a DC output voltage corresponding to the frequency of the input signal. The relationship  between voltage and frequency is given by: U/f = R9.R11.C5/0.486(R10+p1) V/Hz The circuit values have been chosen to give 1V per kHz. This means that a 10 volt f.s.d. will correspond to 10 kHz. Meters with a different full scale deflec tion, for example 6 volts, can, however,  also be used. There are two possibilities:   either one uses the existing scale cali brations to read off frequencies to 6 kHz, or one sets P1 to achieve a 6 volt  output (i.e. full scale in our example)  when the frequency is 10 kHz. The  latter choice of course implies that every reading will require a little mental gymnastics! With some meters it may be necessary to modify the values of P1 and/or R10; the value of R10 + P1 must however always be greater than 500E · The output is buffered by another 3130  (IC3). The circuit is an accurate voltage follower, so that low frequencies can be more easily read off (without loss of accuracy) by setting the multimeter to a lower range (e.g. 1 V f.s.d.).·The out put is protected against short-circuiting by R12. To eliminate the error that would otherwise occur due to the volt age drop in this resistor, the voltage follower feedback is taken from behind R12; To enable the full 10 volt output to be obtained in spite of the drop in R12 (that has to be compensated by the IC) the meter used should have an  internal. resistance of at least 5 kohm). This implies a nominal sensitivity of 500 ohm/volt on the 10 volt range. There » surely cannot be many meters with a sensitivity lower than that. If one has a separate moving coil milliameter available, it can be fitted with a series resistor that makes its intemal resistance up to the value required of a voltmeter giving f.s.d. · at 10 volt input. This alternative makes the frequency meter independent of the multimeter, so that it can bedused to monitor the output of a generator that for some reason may  have a dubious scale- or knob-cali bration. Construction No trouble is to be anticipated if the    circuit is built up using the PC board layout given in figure 2. Bear in imind that the human body will not necess arily survive contact with input voltages that may not damage the adequately rated input blocking capacitor. If one contemplates measuring the frequency of such high voltages the circuit should be assembled in a well-insulated box! The power supply does not need to be regulated, so it can be kept very simple. A transformator secondary of 12 volts, a bridge rectifier and a 470 uF/25 V reservoir electrolytic will do the job nicely. Although a circuit that draws 25 mA is not too well suited to battery supply,one may need or wish to do this. In this case the battery should be 'bridged by a low-leakage (e.g. tantalum) 10uF/25 V capacitor to provide a low AC source impedance. Calibration The calibration can really only be done with an accurate generator. 10 kHz signal is fed to the input and Pl is set to bring the multimeter to full scale deflection (e.g. 10 V). That com n pletes the calibration although it is vwise to check that the circuit is oper ating correctly by using lower input frequencies and observing whether the meter reading is also (proportionately) lower.
 
A few specifications: frequency range: 10 Hz . . .10 kHz input impedance: > 560 k sensitivity: 50 mV p-p max input voltage: 400 V peak minimum load on output: 5 k (if 10 V out required) ]]> 212 0 0 0 Simple Logarithmic Amplifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-logarithmic-amplifier-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:35:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-logarithmic-amplifier-circui.html The performance of the logarithmic operational amplifier, the circuit diagram of which is shown in figure 1, is best seen from its input/output characteristic shown in figure 2. For small input voltages, the amplification is high; when the input voltage rises, the amplification drops off and finally remains almost static for further increases in input voltage. Some applications of a logarithmic amplifier are: driving a graphic 4 recorder in weather stations, and in remote control systems (for instance, to avoid a too sudden and strong deflection of a servo arm). When used in conjunction with other equipment, the logarithmic amplifier is very flexible: analogue instruments as well as a row of LEDs can be connected to its output. Operational amplifiers A1 and A2 form a non-inverting pre-amplifier. As the input signal of A3 should not under any circumstances be- come negative, the input level of the circuit can be shifted with potentiometer P1 as required. At the same time, this stage works as a high- impedance input buffer for A3. As shown, the amplifier accepts inputs up to 8 V. If a higher value ‘ is required, the amplification factors of Al and A2 can be suitably modified. l The 'logarithmic’ part of the circuit l consists of A3 and transistor array lC2: the voltage at pins 4 and 5 ~ of the array is related logarithmically with the output signal of A2. The output stage of the logarithmic amplifier circuit consists of amplifier A4 which amplifies the inverted signal from A3. As the amplification factor of this stage can be altered by l means of preset potentiometer P2, the output of the circuit can be matched to the load. To preset P2, connect a multimeter to the output of the circuit and a signal at maximum level to the input: adjust P2 to the required output voltage. Simple Logarithmic Amplifier Circuit
]]> 213 0 0 0 Simple LED Voltmeter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-led-voltmeter-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:35:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-led-voltmeter-circui.html

This simple LED voltmeter circuit, although simple, is capable of accurate voltage measurement. The input is applied to the high impedance input of lC1 via the attenuator comprising of R1 to R5 inclusive. Since this IC is used as a unity gain buffer, the output at pin 6 is equal to the input voltage at pin 3, but at a low impedance.

IC2 is connected as a comparator driving a pair of LEDs, D1 and D2. The inverting input samples a portion of the unknown input voltage, whilst the non—inverting input is connected to a 1V reference obtained from the stable voltage across ZD1.

In use RV1 is adjusted till D2 just illuminates. At this point, if the control knob is of the 0 - 10 calibrated type, the pointer will indicate the input voltage. For example, with SW1 in position 2, and with a reading of 2 on RV1, the input voltage will be 2V.

With a little practice, the voltage can be read to 1-2%, comparable to a moving coll instrument. The input lmpedance on all ranges is 3.2M.

The proposed simple LED voltmeter circuit shows how an LM39OON amplifier may be employed to compare two input voltages and to indicate the result by means of a small lamp. If the input voltage connected to the non- inverting input is appreciably more positive than the other input, the output of the amplifier will provide a positive voltage which renders the TR2 conducting. The lamp will then be illuminated. One of the inputs may be a reference voltage so that one can then compare a single input voltage against this constant reference.  
]]> 214 0 0 0 Constant Volume FET Amplifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/constant-volume-fet-amplifier/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:34:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/constant-volume-fet-amplifier.html In numerous occasions it is desirable to obtain an amplifier that gives an output signal of constant amplitude for numerous input signal levels and with the very least distortion. A traditional way out of this challenge is to use a nonlinear amplifier. An operational, as an illustration, run as a nonlinear amplifier if 2 antiparallel diodes are included in the feedback loop. This program, nevertheless, while offering an output signal of close to constant amplitude, carries a setback: severe distortion. A more exquisite solution is to apply a constant volume FET amplifier circuit as shown in Fig below. In such cases, the nonlinear ingredient is restored with the FET (Q1) and its associated elements. When a small operational signal (741) is applied, its output is smaller. As a result, the gate of the FET receives an incredibly minimal negative bias and the resistance between drain and source is substantial. As a result, the voltage gain is high. The opposite happens in the event the input signal is bigger. Consequently, the common measure of the output signal self-regulates between 1.5V and 2.85V over a range of 50: 1 difference in the degree of the input signal without producing audible distortion. The value of R1 is determined by the optimum expected amplitude of input signal and is established on a per 200k volt RMS. As an illustration, to satisfy up to 50Vrms signals R1 must 10M. Circuit of a constant volume FET amplifier
]]> 215 0 0 0 Snooze Delay Timer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/snooze-delay-timer-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:33:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/snooze-delay-timer-circui.html

In this article we learn how to make a simple Snooze Delay Timer Circuit using very ordinary components.

When the Set switch is depressed the large electrolytic capacitor is charged via the limiting resistor (lk). This charge causes the BC109 to conduct which supplies enough base current to switch on the 2N1711 space and operate the relay. The relay contacts are wired in parallel with the mains switch so that if the mains switch is now turned off, the equipment will continue.The supply·voltage is taken from the equipment in which the unit is fitted and will determine the choice of` relay. The maximum delay being 1.75 hours. Snooze Delay Timer Circuit
]]> 216 0 0 0 Stereo Hi-Fi Headphone Amplifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/stereo-hi-fi-headphone-amplifier-circuit/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:33:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/headphone-amplifier-circuit-diagra.html

A simple yet extremely hi-fidelity type Stereo Hi-Fi Headphone Amplifier Circuit  can be studied in the following article which will give you an of the world experience once you build it and start using it

The four diodes in rectifier bridge B1 are bypassed with rattle suppression capacitors to ensure minimum noise on the supply rails to the opamps. This makes it possible to feed the 15V regulator from the raw voltage across Ca (+) and C10 (-) of the existing l8.5 V supply while the inputs of the volume control of the head- phone amplifier are driven direct from the outputs of IC4 l l (R) and IC4’ (L). At the l input side, few problems are i expected to arise when using gold-plated phono sockets mounted onto a separate ABS or epoxy plate. When a good quality, insulated, 6.3 mm, stereo headphone socket proves , unobtainable, the nearest alternative is a non-insulated type, whose common tag is connected direct to the ground point on the PCB, between C1 and C18 to effect central earthing. Opamps IC1 and IC; should be soldered direct onto the PCB, and are preferably fitted with a DIL-type heatsink. Provision has been made to screen the amplifiers and the supply on the Q board by means of two sheets of brass or tin plate, which are mounted vertically onto the dotted lines, and secured with  three soldering pins each. Series regulators T1 and T2 ( can do without a heat-sink. When the board is complete, , its underside should be  thoroughly cleaned with a brush dipped into white spirit or alcohol to remove any residual resin. The Stereo Hi-Fi Headphone Amplifier Circuit  can function optimally only if great care is taken both in the choice of the components and in the construction on PCB Type 87512, details of which are shown in Fig.2. As already stated, the headphone amplifier is suitable for building into the Top-of-the-Range Preamplifier. Next, the track side is sealed with a suitable plastic spray. When possible, use insulated sockets for the stereo input and output of the amplifier. At power—on. Mains-borne interference and clicks from St are suppressed in varistor R9 and high-voltage capacitor C19. Mains transformer Tr1 is preferably a toroidal type fitted behind a metal screen to ensure minimum hum and other interference picked up by the amplifier inputs. Presets Pz and P! are trimmed for minimum offset voltage at the respective amplifier output—this is likely to require a very sensitive DMM. The headphone amplifier can be terminated in 100 Q to 1 10Q, and is therefore perfect for use as a high-quality line driver also. The outputs are sh0rt—circuit resistant.
Stereo Hi-Fi Headphone Amplifier Circuit
]]> 217 0 0 0 Simple Infrared Transmitter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-infrared-transmitter-circui/ Tue, 28 Apr 2015 04:32:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/blog/2015/04/simple-infrared-transmitter-circui.html

The presented simple infrared transmitter circuit design can be used in the form of an infrared remote control, with a frequency modulated tone.

The transmitting frequency is determined by C1 and adjusted using the trimpot 100k. The transmitter LED must be of the infrared type and more power can be achieved by connecting two LEDs in series with a series 100 ohm limiting resistor (using no less than 22). The supply voltage which becomes the operating voltage for the infrared transmitter can also be increased to 9V in order to compensate the presence of the LED resistor. Simple Infrared Transmitter Circuit
Simple Infrared Transmitter Circuit
]]> 218 0 0 0 Light Operated Relay Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/light-operated-relay-circuit/ Thu, 30 Apr 2015 14:29:15 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=355 ]]> 355 0 0 0 40 LED Bicycle Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/40-led-bicycle-light-circuit/ Thu, 30 Apr 2015 14:41:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=361 The 555 circuit design below is a blinking bike light, activated with 4 C,D or AA cells (6 volts). A couple of arrays of 20 LEDs is assigned to alternately blink at around 4.7 flashes per second by employing RC values indicated as (4.7K for R1, 150K for R2 and a 1uF capacitor). Time period gaps for the two set of lamps are approximately 107 milliseconds (T1, top LEDs) and 105 milliseconds (T2 bottom LEDs). Two discrete transistors are positioned to supply consolidated current beyond the 200 mA which may be the max limit of the 555 timer. One LED is deployed in series with the base of the PNP transistor for enabling the bottom 20 LEDs to switch OFF each time the 555 output is rendered high while the T1 time interval is in progress. The positive output level of the 555 timer is 1.7 volts below the fed supply voltage. Putting the LED in series adds up to the forward voltage that may be needed for the PNP transistor to approximately 2.7 volts for enabling the 1.7 volt gap from power rail to the output is not adequate to to toggle the transistor. All the LED are powered with approximately 20 mA of current for a total of 220 mA. The proposed 40 LED bicycle LED circuit is supposed to function using additional LED lamps may be up to around forty for the indicated individual channels, or in other words 81 in all. The design may as well function as good using less number of LEDs so may be it possibly be rigged and checked with simply 5 to 10 LEDs (2 sepaarte channels of two in addition to one) before putting together the others..
40 LED GIF
]]> 361 0 0 0 Multistage Light Sequencer Circuit for Christmas Lighting Decoration https://makingcircuits.com/blog/multistage-light-sequencer-circuit-for-christmas-lighting-decoration/ Fri, 22 May 2015 12:08:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=373 #stop christmas lights Point by point operation: Assume the circuit doesn't begin when supply is connected and all lights are off and every one of the three capacitors are charged to around 5 volts. We join a jumper over the 220uF capacitor on the left which releases the capacitor and turns on the 2nd stage transistor and comparing light. At the point when the jumper is removed, the capacitor will begin charging through the base of the stage 2 transistor and stage 1 light. This causes the stage 2 transistor to stay on while the capacitor keeps on charging. In the meantime, the capacitor joining stage 2 and 3 will release through the 100 ohm resistor and diode and stage 2 transistor. At the point when the capacitor charging current falls underneath what is expected to keep stage 2 turned on, the transistor and light will kill bringing on the voltage at the collector of the stage 2 transistor to ascend to 5 volts. Since the capacitor associating stage 2 and 3 has released and the voltage ascends at the collector of stage 2, the capacitor from stage 2 and 3 will charge bringing on the 3rd stage to turn on and the cycle rehashes for progressive stages 4,5,6,7.... furthermore, back to 1. The arrangement rate is controlled by the capacitor and resistor values (220uF and 100 ohms for this situation), load current (200mA for this situation), and current increase of the specific transistor utilized. This plan keeps running at around 120 complete cycles for each moment for 3 lights, or around 167mS #stop]]> 373 0 0 0 1.5V LED Flasher Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/1-5v-led-flasher-circuit/ Fri, 22 May 2015 12:24:01 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=379 1.5 V LED flasher]]> 379 0 0 0 Fading Red Eye Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/fading-red-eye-circuit/ Mon, 25 May 2015 09:18:45 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=388  ]]> 388 0 0 0 Thermostat Circuit for 1KW Space Heater using SCRs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/thermostat-circuit-for-1kw-space-heater-using-scrs/ Mon, 25 May 2015 09:25:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=392 Thermostat for 1KW Space Heater using SCRs]]> 392 0 0 0 100 watt LED Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/100-watt-led-driver-circuit/ Mon, 25 May 2015 09:45:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=396   Instructions to Wind the Ferrite Transformer The transformer is wound with a EE ferrite core having a focal cross sectional territory of no less than 7 square mm. Alluding to the figure, the upper two essential winding are made up 30 turns of 0.3 mm width super enameled copper wire. The lower primary auxiliary primary winding comprises of 4 turns of the same wire as above. The auxiliary is twisted with 22 turns of 0.6mm super enameled copper wire. The techniques are as per the following: In the first place start winding the upper 30 turns, secure its finishes on the bobbin leads by patching, and put a thick layer of protection tape over these turns. Next, wind the optional 22 turns and bind its end terminals on the opposite side of the bobbin leads, put a layer of thick protection tape. Over the above layer begin winding the helper 4 turns and as above secure the finishes fittingly on the essential side leads of the bobbin, again put a few layers of protection over this, At last, wind the second 30 essential turns beginning from the past 30 turn end, and secure the end more than one of the leads of the bobbin on the essential side. Spread the completed the process of twisting with extra layers of protection tapes. Verify you recall the ended leads appropriately so you don't make wrong associations with the circuit and reason a conceivable flame peril. Parts List Every one of the 1 watt, CFR R1 = 10E R2 = 1M R3 = 470E R4 = 100E Each of the 1/4 watt MFR 5% R5 = 470E R6 = preset 22k R7 = 2k2 C1 = 10uF/400V C2 = 2.2nF/250V C3 = 220pF/1kV C4 = 2200uF/50V D1 -D4 = 1N4007 D5, D6 = BA159 shunt controller = TL431 opto = 4n35 T1 = MJE13005]]> 396 0 0 0 377 0 0 379 377 1 450 0 0 451 450 1 644 0 0 645 https://makingcircuits.com/ 644 1 Surge free Transformerless Power Supply Circuit using zero Crossing Detection https://makingcircuits.com/blog/surge-free-transformerless-power-supply-circuit-using-zero-crossing-detection/ Mon, 25 May 2015 09:56:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=398 Today with the approach of refined triac driver opto-isolators, exchanging an AC mains with zero intersection control is no more an intricate undertaking, and can be essentially actualized utilizing these units. The MOC arrangement triac drivers come as optocouplers and are authorities in such manner and can be utilized with any triac for controlling AC mains through a zero intersection identification and control. The MOC arrangement triac drivers incorporate MOC3041, MOC3042, MOC3043 and so on all these are practically indistinguishable with their execution characteristics with just minor contrasts with their voltage spces, and any of these can be utilized for the proposed surge control application in capacitive power supplies. The zero intersection identification and execution are all inside handled in these opto driver units and one needs to just design the power triac with it for seeing the planned zero intersection controlled terminating of the coordinated triac circuit. Before researching the surge free triac transformerless power supply circuit utilizing a zero intersection control idea how about we first see quickly in regards to what's a zero intersection and its included components. We realize that an AC mains potential is made out of voltage cycles which rise and fall with changing extremity from zero to greatest and the other way around across the given scale. For instance in our 220V mains AC, the voltage changes from 0 to +310V crest) and back to zero, then sending downwards from 0 to -310V, and back to zero, this goes on constantly 50 times each second constituting a 50 Hz AC cycle. At the point when the mains voltage is close to its immediate top of the cycle, that is almost 220V (for a 220V) mains info, its in the most grounded zone as far as voltage and current, and if a capacitive power supply happens to be exchanged ON amid right now, the whole 220V can be relied upon to leap forward the power supply and the related defenseless DC load. The outcome could be what we regularly witness in such power supply units.... that is moment smoldering of the joined load. The above outcome may be generally seen just in capacitive transformerless power supplies in light of the fact that, capacitors have the characteristics of carrying on like a short for a fraction of a second when subjected to a supply voltage, after which it gets charged and acclimates to its right determined yield level Returning to the mains zero intersection issue, in an opposite circumstance while the mains is nearing or intersection the zero line of its stage cycle, it can be thought to be in its weakest zone regarding current and voltage, and any contraption exchanged ON at right now can be required to be altogether protected and free from a surge inrush. Along these lines if a capacitive power supply is exchanged ON in circumstances when the AC information is going through its stage zero, we can expect the yield from the power supply to be protected and drained of a surge current. The circuit demonstrated above uses a triac optoisolator driver MOC3041, and is arranged in such a path, to the point that at whatever point power is exchanged ON, it flames and starts the joined triac just amid the initial zero intersection of the AC stage, and afterward keeps the AC exchanged ON typically for rest of the period until power is exchanged OFF and exchanged ON once more. Alluding to the figure we can perceive how the minor 6-pin MOC 3041 IC is joined with a triac for executing the methods. The data to the triac is connected through a high voltage, current constraining capacitor 105/400V, the load can be seen attached to the next end of the supply by means of an extension rectifier arrangement for achieving an unadulterated DC to the planned load which could a LED. At whatever point power is exchanged ON, at first the triac stays exchanged OFF (because of an unlucky deficiency of the entryway drive) thus does the load joined with the extension system. A food voltage got from the yield of the 105/400V capacitor reaches the inward IR LED through the pin1/2 of the opto IC. This data is observed and prepared inside with reference to the LED IR light response.... also, as soon the fed AC cycle is distinguished reaching the zero intersection point, an inward switch right away flips and flames the triac and keeps the framework exchanged ON for whatever is left of the period until the unit is exchanged Now and again once more. With the above set up, at whatever point power is exchanged ON, the MOC opto isolator triac verifies that the triac is started just amid that period when the AC mains is crossing the zero line of its stage, which thusly keeps the load flawlessly protected and free from the risky surge in surge.]]> 398 0 0 0 Simple Stereo FM transmitter circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-stereo-fm-transmitter-circuit/ Thu, 28 May 2015 09:18:15 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=407 stereo fm transmitter circuit For L1 make 3 turns of 0.5mm dia enameled copper wire on a 5mm dia ferrite center.    ]]> 407 0 0 0 Simple Tachometer circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-tachometer-circuit/ Thu, 28 May 2015 09:10:08 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=411 tachometer circuit  ]]> 411 0 0 0 Walking distance counter circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/walking-distance-counter-circuit/ Sun, 31 May 2015 14:16:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=418 walking distance meter circuit]]> 418 0 0 0 RF Field Strength Meter https://makingcircuits.com/blog/rf-field-strength-meter/ Sun, 31 May 2015 14:31:43 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=421 field strength meter circuit Problems: You can't expect extraordinary execution from such a basic RF Field Strength Meter. Affectability is sufficiently satisfactory to get a fundamental thought of the power that your transmitter is prepared to do. Conceivable uses: Use the field strength meter to discover when a transmitter is working at ideal power. It can be exceptionally helpful when adjusting stages (like if there should arise an occurrence of the 4W transmitter) or exploring different avenues regarding diverse recieving wires.]]> 421 0 0 0 Bi-color LED Flasher Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/bi-color-led-flasher-circuit/ Sat, 20 Jun 2015 08:04:44 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=425 bicolor LED 2 PIN-5mm Bi-color LED diode Image courtesy: http://www.betlux.com/led/5mm-Bi-color-LED-diode-2pin-BL-L517.htm B-color LEDs are available in 3-pin and 2-pin categories, in our activity we use the 2-pin Bi-color LED option for making things sleek and a lot effectual. 2 Pin Bi-Color LED Flasher Circuit 100 LEDs red and green 2 Pin Bi-Color LED Flasher Circuit 100 LEDs red and green Viewing the layout presented above, we are able to observe a clear-cut design utilizing a push-pull clock generator IC 4047. The IC is designed for producing an alternately switching pair of outputs, from the presented pinout#10 and 11 of the IC. The frequency of such alternately performing outputs could be pair by suitably altering the pot P1 and by picking out the preferred spectrum with C1. The switching outputs can be found set up with two oppositely wired SCRs, that happen to be subsequently connected with the Bi-color LED string across the mains input by means of a lowering high voltage capacitor C3. The circuit additionally includes a transformerless power supply stage which contains C2, D1, C4, Z1, for operating the IC with the desired low voltage DC. When ever the offered 2 pin Bi-color LED flasher circuit is activated, the IC begins oscillating at the fixed rate across its pin#10 and pin#11 alternately, operating the SCRs at the identical switching rate. The SCRs react to these pulses and perform correspondingly, making it possible for the Bi-color LED string to light up by means of an alternately green and red color flashing outcome. Parts list for the above discussed Bi-color LED flasher R1, R2, R3 = 1K C1, C4 = 100uF 25V C2, C3 = 0.33uF/400V Z1 = 12V 1 watt zener D1 = 1N4007 diode SCRs = 2nos BT169G LEDs = 100nos, of 2pin, Hi-bright RED, Green Bi-color LEDs]]> 425 0 0 0 609 0 0 610 0 0 613 https://makingcircuits.com/ 609 1 Stop Dog Barking with this Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/stop-dog-barking-with-this-circuit/ Sat, 20 Jun 2015 08:02:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=427 With reference to the above laid out dog bark inhibitor circuit, we are able to observe three specific stages included, the sound sensing unit and preamplifier circuit making use of the Q1 along with the electret MIC stage, the monostable stage employing IC1 as well as the correlated components and the ultrasonic sound generator stage by means of the IC2 along with speaker driver stage. At any time a dog barks, the Mic finds it producing a sequential lower and also higher pulse at the base of T1. T1 reacts to this and also delivers precisely the same amplified signal across C2, which subsequently sets off the pin#2 of the monostable IC1. The above mechanism causes IC1 to generate a high at a pin#3 for a period identified by the values of R5/C3. This high at pin#3 of IC1 makes it possible for the reset pin#4 of IC2 to turn active thus permitting the astable IC2 to supply the ultrasonic pulse at its pin#3, that may be accordingly amplified by the linked TIP122 transistor, driving the hooked up speaker. The speaker vibrates at the particular amplified degree radiating the ultrasonic sound in the course in which the dogs should be driven away. The above sound waves ought to fluster the dogs and also result in numerous mental turmoil in their ears on account of their high frequency sound, as well as resulting from the synchronized consequence with the dog's own barking phase. Basically the above dog barking preventing device may react to all kinds of high dB sound ranges, in spite of this as it will likely not be audible to a human ear this may under no circumstances be a problem, as well as could be avoided.]]> 427 0 0 0 Motor Soft Start Circuit Using Pulse Width Modulation https://makingcircuits.com/blog/motor-soft-start-circuit-using-pulse-width-modulation/ Sun, 21 Jun 2015 05:44:30 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=431   As could be observed in the diagram, the configuration employs two 555 ICs, IC1 being wired prefer as astable, while IC2 as a comparator. IC1 generates the needed clock signals at a particular frequency (dependent upon the values of R1 and C2) that could be put on to pin#2 of the IC2. IC2 utilizes the clock signal to obtain triangle waves across its pin#7, to make certain that all these is usually as compared to the potential available from its control voltage pin#5. Pin#5 acquires the needed control voltage by means of an NPN emitter follower stage created using the help of T2 as well as the associated components. When power is switched ON, T2 is raised on with a ramping or a gradually increasing voltage at its base via R9, and owing to the proportionate charging of C5. This ramping potential is appropriately duplicated across the emitter of T2 with regards to the supply voltage at its collector, meaning the base data is transformed into a slowly increasing potential starting from zero to almost the supply voltage level. This ramping voltage at pin#5 of IC 2 is quickly as compared to presented triangle wave across pin#7 of IC2, which is certainly translated into a linearly incrementing PWM at pin#3 of IC2. The linearly incrementing method of the PWMs goes on until C5 is completely imposed and the base of T2 reaches a stable voltage level. The above design looks after the PWM generation whenever power is switched ON. In order to implement the PWM soft start impact, the output from pin#3 of IC2 is required to be used on a triac power driver circuit, since shown below:   The above picture shows how the switch ON soft start PWM control may be enforced on heavy motors for the planned purpose.     In the picture above we see how triac driver isolators with zero crossing detector can be employed for driving the motors with the linearly incrementing PWMs for carrying out a soft start impact. The above process effectively deals with the start ON overcurrent situating on single phase motors. However when a 3 phase motor is utilized, the following strategy should be considered for executing the suggested 3 phase soft start on motors.  ]]> 431 0 0 0 Up down LED Sequence Controller with Push Buttons https://makingcircuits.com/blog/up-down-led-sequence-controller-with-push-buttons/ Sun, 21 Jun 2015 14:54:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=434 Knowing the suggested up/down LED series controller circuit utilizing push button is quite simple, and could be performed simply by mentioning the above mentioned figure. The image displays a LM3915 LED bar graph driver IC, put together in its typical style. Ten LEDs is seen linked over the ten outputs in the ICs. The LEDs are meant to light up one following the additional in the straight pattern through pin#1 to pin#10 of the IC, according to a rising potential across its pin#5, which means so long as the potential at pin#5 is zero, each of the LEDs could be deemed to get turned off, and since the potential at pin#5 is increased, the LEDs could be observed lighting up sequentially through pin#1 till pin#10. Pin#10 LED shows once the potential at pin#5 gets to about 2.2V. The sequencing from the LEDs may be within the dot mode (while pin#9 is open) or even within the bar mode (when pin#9 is actually linked to the positive supply). In the above design because the pin#9 is not really utilized or will be unconnected, the sequencing in the LEDs happen to be in the dot mode, which means only one LED is actually lit any kind of time on the spot over the appropriate pinout from the IC. Regarding applying the up or down sequence, SW#1 or SW#2 must be personally pressed. Whenever SW#2 is pressed, the capacitor across pin#5 on the IC is permitted to release gradually, evoking the potential to decline progressively until eventually may be it reaches 0V. According to this the LED series might be observed "running" in reverse" from pin#10 to pin#1. On the other hand whenever SW#1 is pressed, the 10uF capacitor is actually permitted to obtain charged slowly which usually requests the IC outputs to exert the LED sequencing from pin#1 towards pin#10. Therefore the two push buttons might be properly pressed and released for accomplishing any one preferred pinout of the IC to be in the active condition, based upon the charge level of the pin#5 capacitor. The concept could be applied for numerous other comparable apps by just combining the control stage using the several pinouts of the IC in the needed pattern.]]> 434 0 0 0 Atomizer Coil Temperature Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/atomizer-coil-temperature-controller-circuit/ Sun, 21 Jun 2015 14:51:03 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=436   The figure above displays a simple atomizer PWM heat controller circuit utilizing only a couple of transistors along with a solitary mosfet. The mosfet could possibly be replaced with a BJT in the event the functioning voltage is under 6V. The circuit is a fundamental transistorized astable multivibrator circuit, the adjustable resistor VR1 determines the PWM rate for the two channel of the astable. The LED offers an reverse indication for the PWM rates utilized on the gate of the mosfet. Better lights signifies a narrower PWMs on the mosfet gate and for that reason lessen temperature within the coil, on the other hand a dimming LED signifies a broader PWMs on the mosfet gate and thereby higher warmth on the linked filament coil. Parts List R1, R2 = 1K R2, R3 = 10K VR1 = 100K C1, C2 = 2.2uF/16V T1, T2 = BC547 Mosfet = IRF540 or any other mosfet equipped to handle above 10V/50amp drain to source parameters.]]> 436 0 0 0 How to Genearte Electricity from Sea https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-genearte-electricity-from-sea/ Sun, 21 Jun 2015 14:39:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=442 In the image above we find a vertical long flap composed of a firm plastic which is hoisted on a horizontal spindle, maintained two ball bearings in the ends, in a way that the spindle and the flap assembly will be able to suspend and oscillate in a see-saw form freely, across the two ball bearings. The ball bearings tend to be held through two adjoining vertical long pillars that are consequently clamped strongly on heavy metallic bases. The spindle finishes over the ball bearings is visible fitted with the two individual alternators, that means that as soon as the spindle experiences a horizontal push and pull , the same is moved along the alternator shafts which in turn allows their inner coil and magnet system to go through a matching back and forth spewing motions. The push pull drive about the vertical propeller argument is developed by the sea waves because the flap is submerged in the sea water as much as 60 PER CENT of its complete size. The above mentioned push pull, sea-saw like motion of the flap generates equivalent motion of the alternator shaft leading to a symmetrical volume of electricity to be generated across the particular output wires of the alternators. This free electricity may be used for charging batteries that could be eventually taken away for energizing LED lamps or inverters. The bottom framework that stablises the two support beams and the whole device has to be significantly weighty (manufactured from strong steel) and curved in the edges (to get guaranteeing minimal resistance to the waves). The base area of the foundation should be as smooth as you possibly can for avoiding the device from settling in the soft mud. When constructed, the whole framework could be merely elevated ( by a handful of guys) and mounted inside sea water near to shoreline or anywhere you can decide to place it within the sea water.]]> 442 0 0 0 Homemade Windmill Generator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/homemade-windmill-generator-circuit/ Tue, 23 Jun 2015 02:21:19 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=450 The theory of operating is dependent on a standard motor generator principle where an everlasting magnet sort motor's spindle is built-in with a generator or propeller system for the needed utilizing of wind power. As might be observed in the above diagram, the utilized propeller or the turbine design appears completely different. Here a twisted "S" shaped propeller method is utilised which includes a distinct benefit over the standard airplane kind of propeller. In this particular design the turbine revolving will not depend on the wind directions somewhat replies similarly well and effectively irrespective from which side the wind might be flowing, this permit the process to remove a complex rudder system, that happen to be generally utilised in standard windmills to be able to maintain the propeller self modifying its front position consistent with the wind flow. In the shown principle the motor associated with the turbine retains revolving with highest effectiveness irrespective of from which side or part the wind might be emerging, that allows the windmill to be more effective and active throughout the year. The electricity produced by the rotation of the motor coil due to the torque from the turbine can be utilized for charging a battery or might be for driving an LEd lamp or any preferred electrical load according to the consumer choice. In spite of this, because the wind speeds might be ever-changing and by no means regular, it might be crucial to consist of some type of stabilizer circuit across the output of the motor. We are able to get rid of the matter by using a boost or a buck converter circuit according to the specs of the linked load. But when your motor voltage specs is somewhat above the load and if there is certainly sufficient wind, you might leave out the required boost circuit and instantly hook up the windmill output with the load after the bridge the rectifier. In the diagram we are able to observe a boost converter being employed after correcting the windmill electricity by means of a bridge rectifier network. The following image describes the information of the required circuits, that are also not so complicated and might be developed utilizing many of the normal parts. ]]> 450 0 0 0 How to Generate Electricity while Walking from Shoes https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-generate-electricity-while-walking-from-shoes/ Tue, 23 Jun 2015 02:37:56 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=452 Image Courtesy: https://cdn.sparkfun.com//assets/parts/6/3/2/2/11015-04.jpg The above figure shows a small 5V spring loaded solenoid which seems to be the appropriate option for our offered shoe generator application. Considering that the solenoid is stipulated to function utilizing a 5V input @ 1amp, we are able to consider practically the similar quantity of power across its wires when it's exposed to a push and pull mechanical force.The right guidelines which can be completely ideal for charging a cellphone battery. A big benefit of utilizing these solenoids is the fact that these types of possess a spring loaded shaft mechanism, hence the only useful force essential for generating electricity by the unit is the gravitational force, although our feet is at rest, just in case the feet has been raised the spring action of the solenoid enhances the action producing the system extremely beneficial. Nevertheless, since solenoids usually utilize an iron rod as the plunger, we cannot assume the system to produce any electricity until this bar is changed into a magnet first, since merely a moving magnet should be able to generate electricity when relocated by means of a coil of wire. This alteration could be simply applied by fixing a couple of neodymium magnets at the top edge of the solenoid rod, as shown below, this will likely change the whole plunger into an efficient magnet, which might be then in a position to communicate with the coil of the solenoid for producing electricity, in case you have another effective technique of converting the rod into a long term magnet, you can utilize it for creating a much better reaction from the procedures.   In the following section we are going to find out how the method can be employed on a shoe for utilizing free electricity generation, which can be employed for charging a Li-ion cell. The set up above is introduced in a pictorial format for demonstrating the connectivity information of the system, invariably all the components will have to be perfectly covered up inside an enclosure and tightly associated with the shoe heel. In the figure we are able to without a doubt observe how the solenoid must be placed at the heel of the shoe, such that the solenoid is exposed to a pressing and a discharging pressure on its shaft while the user walks. Each and every time the solenoid shaft is drew or pushed, the magnet related to the shaft inside the unit interacts with the coil surrounding the magnet producing electricity which turns into accessible across the linking wires of the solenoid. Considering that the to and fro movement of the solenoid shaft ought to stimulate an irregular current at the output, this ought to improve for getting a DC, that is certainly exactly why a bridge rectifier might be observed associated with the wires of the solenoid. The repaired DC now can be utilized for charging a Li-ion battery or some other battery that could be graded at the specific voltage level. Caution: The circuit is not going to consist of an over charge security, which is often harmful for the battery, in these modern times Li-ion cells include internal PCMs or protection circuit components that guarantee entire protection for the cells against over charging or over discharging...make absolutely sure the Li-ion cell has this module connected to be able to charge it easily utilizing the offered idea of producing electricity from while walking.]]> 452 0 0 0 How to Generate Electricity from Gravity https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-generate-electricity-from-gravity/ Tue, 23 Jun 2015 02:46:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=454 The idea seems really effortless, in the set up image above you can easliy understand two pulleys (upgraded with ball bearing) on the top, as well as a generator motor at the bottom center. You can easily also observe a somewhat massive wheel with a lever handle device on the left hand side of the set up, while on the right side a dangling heavy load. All the above devices are related with a rope, such that the device results in being operating as discussed below: The thought here is to spin the wheel handle with manual force with the intention to pull the heavy load upwards until it touches the maximum height obtainable, in that case free the wheel in order that the load are going to collapse freely on account of the action of gravitational force. Despite the fact that this takes place the motor undergoing the pulley system also will get rotated and commences generating efficient electricity for either charging an hooked up battery or enlightening an LED. The switch SW1 provides a vital role in the whole process, this switch really should be in the OFF position while hoisting the load upwards, and in ON position before the wheel handle is focused on to be set free by the user. This is very much important mainly because with SW1 in shut OFF position the motor spindle serves such as a typical readily moving convenient to spin pulley, and delivers minimal durability to the person hoisting the load, and whenever SW1 is closed the motor will get loaded, and gives considerably more durability while shifting. As a result the suspended load at this point will get determined by the loaded motor and as a substitute for decreasing down freely moves comparatively at a slower velocity towards the ground as well as the gravitational has do employ the same level of work force for generating electricity from the motor. This is exactly certainly only an instance which reveals how a rather lower input force can be employed for obtaining lot more quantities of output power, as a result of a very standard and convenient to execute device. The wheel deal with device may be restored with other models of devices which might be in a position of developing even much higher conveniences for the same. Several of the examples are a 4 pulley/chain device, screw jack device and so forth. The load on the motor needs to be optimally measured in order that the gravity load occurs down at a significantly slower pace, or the height of the upper pulleys could very well be expanded to higher points for causing a crappy unwinding procedure by the load. The motor for this gravity LEd lamp circuit may very well be a normal everlasting magnet motor, a stepper motor or geared sort of electromagnet motor.]]> 454 0 0 0 Transformerless 1 Watt LED using SMD LEDs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/transformerless-1-watt-led-using-smd-leds/ Tue, 23 Jun 2015 02:55:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=456 A 1 watt LED equivalent lamp can be extremely easily created by including a many 20mA or 50mA smaller LEDs and configuring these along with an appropriate supply voltage. The fact is any high watt equivalent LED can be created by utilizing these smaller low current LEDs as preferred, consequently it's easy to create a 3 watt, or a 5 watt or perhaps higher rated LED utilizing the smaller counterparts for example the 3528 LEDs or the 2214 LEDs. The benefit of utilizing smaller LEDs for producing the exact illumination similar to the 1 watt, 3 watt or 5 watt may be summarized as enumerated below: Benefits (Pros) Low current LEDs may be controlled without requiring a heatsink, and over any normal PCB. The utilization of unique, costly aluminum base PCBs can consequently be prevented using these LEDs. Low current LEDs turn out to be suitable for transformerless capacitive power supply units, as well as SMPS procedure is generally discarded. With a capacitive power supply being used, the necessity of a current control turns into irrelevant since the input capacitor on its own works similar to an efficient current controller and alone has the capacity to reduce current to the determined levels. A high watt LED created by utilizing low amp LED might have the potential of creating more illumination in comparison with just one exactly the same rated high watt LED. As a result of the above luxuries, such high watt equivalents may be conveniently developed even by the noobs or people who find themselves fairly new in the field of electronics. Drawbacks (Cons) The only drawback is the required size of this kind of components which might be somewhat bigger area wise, as well as the assembly could possibly be somewhat very slow process. The following diagram demonstrates an illustration 1 watt LED lamp circuit created by making use of 16nos of 2214 (20mA) SMD LEDs and a surely graded transformerless power supply. steps to make a 1 watt LED utilizing many 20mA 2214 or 3528 LEDs Almost all the 20mA LEDs may be seen linked in collection with a portable transformerless power supply. A 20mH inductor could also be observed, this is exactly included to stop the initial switch ON surge, the zener diode offers an additional security from any kind of feasible voltage changes. We can incorporate an NTC thermistor at the input for offering actually greater security to the LEDs from surge currents.]]> 456 0 0 0 Multiple Voltages 3.3V, 5V from 12V without ICs or inductors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/multiple-voltages-3-3v-5v-from-12v-without-ics-or-inductors/ Wed, 24 Jun 2015 12:04:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=458
In this post we try to look for effortless techniques of deriving lower voltages from higher voltage sources, for instance 3.3V or 5V from a 12V or a 24V source.
Generally a step down voltage from a higher voltage source is acquired by making use of a linear IC for instance a 78XX series voltage regulator IC or a buck converter.
Both the above alternatives is generally very expensive and/or difficult alternatives for acquiring a selected needed voltage instantly for a certain utilization.
Zener diodes also emerge as valuable with regards to obtaining a lower voltage from a higher source, having said that it is never possible to get plenty of current from a zener diode voltage clamp. This occurs due to the fact zener diodes generally consist of a high value resistor for preserving itself from high currents, which blocks the passage of higher current to the output to just milliamps, which generally ends up being not having enough for an related load.
An easy and a clean way to gain a lower voltage from a certain higher voltage source is by utilizing series diodes as presented in the following diagram.
In the above diagram you can easliy observe about 10 diodes used for developing a 3V output at the extraordinary end, while other similar values can certainly be found in the kind of 4.2v, 5v and 6V levels across the suitable decreasing diodes.
We identify that generally a rectifier diode is identified to drop around 0.6V across itself, meaning any potential given at a diode's anode would probably develop an output at its cathode that would be generally somewhere around 0.6V much less than the input at its anode.
We take the interest in the above aspect with a view to obtain the suggested lower voltage chances from a given higher supply.
In the diagram 1N4007 diodes are presented which would definitely generate not above 100mA, despite the fact that 1N4007 diodes are ranked to take care of upto 1amp, it must be made sure that the diodes never commence warming up, in any other case that might contribute to considerably more voltages being able to deliver, simply because while the diode energizes the rated drop across it commences receding in the direction of zero, that's why not above a 100mA max really should be expected from the above design for stopping over heating and allowing an optimal result from the design.
For higher currents one might select higher rated diodes for instance 1N5408 (0.5amp max) or 6A4(2amp max) etc.
The weakness of the above design is usually that it will probably not deliver exact potential values at the output as well as is certainly not appropriate for uses where customized voltage recommendations could be desired or for purposes where the load parameter might be fundamental with regards to its voltage features.
For such type of programs the following configuration could possibly develop into quite appealing and even valuable:
The diagram above displays an easy emitter follower configuration making use of a BJT in addition to a handful of resistors.
The plan is easy to understand, here the pot is needed for modifying the output to any required level beginning with 3V or lower to the maximum provided input level, despite the fact that the maximum accessible output will be usually a lot less than 0.6V when compared with the utilized input voltage.
The main advantage of utilizing a BJT is always that it permits you to realize any kind of required voltage making use of bare minimum range of elements, in addition enables higher current loads to be considered at the outputs, additionally the input voltage lacks the constraints and could be increased in accordance with the BJT's dealing with capacity and by a few insignificant tweaks in the resistor values.
In the provided illustration, an input of 12V to 24V can be viewed, which might be designed to any kind of required level such as to 3.3V, 6V, 9V, 12V, 15V, 18V, 20V or even to almost every other intermediate value as a result of flicking the knob of the provided potentiometer.
]]> 458 0 0 0 LED Light Dimmer Using PWM https://makingcircuits.com/blog/led-light-dimmer-using-pwm/ Wed, 24 Jun 2015 12:25:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=460 In the image above, the supply is gained from an SMPS unit which used on the PWM circuit by means of a LM338 current controller circuit stage. The pot P1 is commonly used for adjusting the PWM duty cycles to the LED bank for accomplishing the required power levels. The resistor R3 decides the reducing current level from the IC LM338, perhaps it is measured with the following procedure: R3 = 1.25/LED current The circuit displays a 36 LED (1 watt each) bank being determined by the PWM as well as the current controller stages. The LED series resistors are released for protecting each 3 LED string from over voltage. seeing that the overall advanced voltage drop of the strings form to 3.3 x 3 = 9.9V and the supply voltage 12V that may be about 2V higher. R3 handles the overall current for the overall LED bank, and could be measured by applying the previously discussed formula, for the proven design the consequence could be estimated as: R3 = 1.25/0.35 x 12 = 0.29 Ohms Wattage = 1.25 x 0.35 x 12 = 5.25 watts, the following 0.35 is the current by way of each LED string, 12 is the range of strings, and 1.25 is the fixed reference as described by the IC LM338 datasheet.   In instances where the supply voltage is confined to 5V, as well as the planned programs demands a PWM control of the LEDs as a result of a mosfet, the following circuit could be aptly designed for the same. Arduino PWM LED intensity controller circuit While you can easliy observe, the above configuration is similar to the first one, barring the addition of the voltage booster level between pin3 of the IC 555 as well as the mosfet gate. Listed here several diodes and capacitors appropriately boost the pin3 PWM level from 5V peak to 10V peak, this evolves into essential since a mosfet is getting employed for the regulations, and mosfets usually do not reply optimally with gate voltages cheaper than 9V. The proven mosfet gate voltage booster stage could be as well practiced with PWM outputs which may be produced from an Arduino board or other MCUs.]]> 460 0 0 0 RGB LED Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/rgb-led-driver-circuit/ Wed, 24 Jun 2015 12:38:46 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=463 For that reason, the top most left, right end to end leads could form the cathode, anode of the red LED, the center left, right leads could correspond to the green LED, and likewise the lower most left, right end to end leads could suggest the terminals for the blue LED. RGB LED 3 watt Configuring these kind of leads of this RGB LED such that the individual colors could be realigned one at a time, is definitely not hard. The idea is simply to integrate three distinct adaptable voltage regulators with the three LEDs, as an illustration by applying a LM317 voltage regulator, as proven in this article diagram. RGB 3 watt LED color mixer, controller circuit making use of IC LM317 RGB 3 watt LED color mixer, controller circuit using IC LM317   Speaking about the above diagram one can possibly consider that the three LM317 voltage regulators find themselves in basic fact specifically alike with their part and wiring configuration. All of the devices include the function of voltage adjustment and are all current controlled by means of a BC547 transistor and a resistor Rc. The leads of the 3 watt LED are associated individually to the outputs of the 3 LM317 circuits, although the input is provided to all of the the 3 devices by way of a basic DC source which might be a SMPS adapter ranked correctly for utilizing the RGB illumination. The anode, cathode orientation of the LED is furthermore suggested in the diagram which need to be cautiously and appropriately set before attaching them to the 317 outputs. The moment it is all totally performed, as well as the power is activated, the voltage control feature present in the LM317 devices can be employed for starting the illumination levels of the particular LEDs discretely for developing any of the stipulated color effects, beginning with the primary RGB to voilet, indigo, orange, maroon etc. The 10K presets of the 317 circuit may be replaced with 10K pots for allowing an external control for the needed color mixing impact on the LED. The value of Rc could be measured by applying the following formula: Rc = 0.6/LED current rating]]> 463 0 0 0 220V String LED light Circuit using one Capacitor https://makingcircuits.com/blog/220v-string-led-light-circuit-using-one-capacitor/ Wed, 24 Jun 2015 12:44:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=466 mains AC LED string light making use of a single PPC capacitor Examining the above LED string light design making use of a single PPC capacitor: The plan seems effortless and achievable including quite trustworthy as a result of the more and more LEDs in range caring for the initial surge current. The many more LEDs guarantees that the total LED forward drop is nearly the AC mains value which helps reducing the initial current to a realistic level. If we consider the forward drop of the proven white LEDs to be around 3.3V, then with 50 LEDs in sequence it reaches somewhere around 3.3 x 50 = 165V, even though not way too approximately 220V but satisfactory sufficient to just counter the initial surge from the PPC capacitor which serves just like a momentary short circuit whenever power is activated. Almost certainly 90 numbers could well be just simply ample and absolutely protected. As can be visible in the above diagram, there are actually 50 LEDs on the upper string connected in sequence and the exact string with the exact quantity of LEDs at the more affordable side of the design. The free ends of these kinds of two range are attached to each other but making use of the opposite polarities, that is certainly the anode side of one string is completed common with the cathode side additional string and the other way round. The mains AC is placed on these kinds of common joints by way of a PPC high voltage capacitor. A nominal 0.33uF is proven in the diagram on condition that 5mm LEDs are employed in the circuit. We recognize that mains AC is essentially comprised of differing current which changes its cycle polarity 50 times a second, constituting the 50 Hz spec. The LED strings are intentionally linked with their opposite end polarity in order that one string illuminates in reaction of one half AC cycle while the other string for the other opposite AC half cycle. Due to the fact this is exactly required to arises rapidly (50 times per second) the human eye struggles to define the fractional lapse or shutting off of the strings, and both the strings are considered lit up brightly and endlessly. 220V AC string LED Light circuit]]> 466 0 0 0 Customized CDI Spark Advance/Retard Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/customized-cdi-spark-advanceretard-circuit/ Wed, 24 Jun 2015 13:00:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=468 During this post we shall understand more about an easy circuit that permits a manual regulate function for the ignite timing of a motorcycle's CDI both to gain an enhance ignition, retarded ignition or simply an ordinary timed ignitions.
After a complete learning related to the matter I became apparently prosperous in creating this circuit which may be useful for any motorcycle rider for accomplishing upgraded speed and fuel performance by adjusting the ignition timing of the vehicle's engine as required, according to its instant speed.
Everyone believes that the timing of the ignition spark drawn inside a vehicle engine is essential concerning its fuel capability, engine life as well as the speed of the vehicle, inaccurately timed CDI sparks have access to a sick moving vehicle and vice versa.
The advisable igniting precious time for the spark inside the combustion chamber is when the piston is related to 10 degrees after it has crossed the TDC (Top Dead Center) point. The receive coil is tuned to correspond this and at any moment the piston actually reaches prior to the TDC, the pickup coil generates the CDI coil to fire the spark, called as BTDC (before top dead .
The combustion carried out with the above practice normally creates a good engine operating as well as emissions.
On the other hand the above performs effectively just provided that the engine is operating at a few advised average speed, but also for motorcycles that more or less will reach remarkable speeds the above plan will start malfunctioning as well as the motorcycle is inhibited from accomplishing the stipulated high speeds.
This occurs mainly because at higher speeds the piston moves much swiftly in comparison with the ignition spark might prepare for it. Despite the fact that the CDI circuit is associated with the initiating appropriately, and endeavors to accentuate the piston posture, by the point the spark has the ability to kick off at the spark plug, the piston bears already traveled much in advance of the TDC, resulting in unfavorable combustion circumstance for the engine, that might leads to inefficiencies, avoiding the engine from achieving its stipulated higher speed boundaries.
Hence in an effort to correct the ignition firing time, we should instead moderately proceed the spark plug firing by convincing a fractionally excellent trigger for the CDI circuit, and for not so active speeds this merely should be turned around as well as the firing should be possible relatively retarded for permitting optimum productivity for the vehicle engine.
We will exchange views about all these limitations much elaborately in a few other article, presently we would like to investigate the process which would enable us to accomplish a manual adjustments of the ignition spark timing either to move forward, retard or work generally in accordance with the speed of the motor bike.
From the above communication you can easliy close that the pickup coil result in is not going to entirely turn into trustworthy for high speed motorcycles, while some method of evolving the pickup signal evolves into essential.
Generally this is accomplished making use of microcontrollers, I have used to accomplish the similar making use of common elements, it appears that it appears to be a logically achievable design, despite the fact that just a practical test can reveal it's effectiveness.
Adjustabe CDI Spark Advance/Retard Circuit for Motorcycles
Adjustabe CDI Spark Advance/Retard Circuit for Motorcycles
Making reference to the above design of the suggested adjustable CDI spark advance and retard timer circuit, you can easliy observe a common IC 555 and an IC 4017 circuit which are usually rigged in a typical "LED chaser light circuit" mode.
The IC 555 is focused such as an astable that delivers and feeds clock pulses to pin#14 of the IC 4017 which usually reacts to these kind of pulses and generates an "jumping" high logic across its output pinouts originating from pin#3 to pin#11 after which you can return back to pin#3.
A handful of NPN/PNP BJTs can be watched on the left side of the diagram, these are definitely located to reset the two ICs as a reaction to the signals received from the motorcycles pickup coil.
The pickup coil signal is fed to the base of the NPN which that prompts the ICs to reset and restart the oscillations, at any moment the pickup coil experiences a accomplished development by the linked flywheel.
Right now, the IC 555 occurrence is adjusted such that as soon as the pickup coil identifies one development and resets the ICs, the 555 IC has the ability to delivers about 9 to 10 pulses making it possible for the IC 4017 to perform a high upto its pin#11 or at least upto its pinout#9.
The above could be set for revolutions according to the idling speed of the motorcycle.
This indicates that in the course of idle speeds the pickup coil signals permits the 4017 outputs to travel via nearly all the pinouts until its reset back to pin#3.
On the other hand, now let's attempt to represent precisely what would probably comes about at higher speeds.
At higher speeds the pickup signals would certainly deliver more rapid signals rather than the normal setting, thinking that would certainly subsequently avoid the IC 555 from creating the mentioned 10 pulses, so can be currently it is actually capable to yield say around 7 pulses or 6 pulses at a certain higher speed of the vehicle.
Therefore would certainly avoid the IC 4017 from making it possible for just about all its output to be high, preferably now it is actually in the position to operate only as much as pin#6 or pin#5, after which the pickup would probably force the IC to reset.
From the above communication you can easliy simulate an incident where at idle speeds, the outputs of the 4017 IC is dividing the pickup flywheel rotation into 10 divisions, whereby the bottom 3 or 4 pinout signals could be thought to be equivalent to the signals which might be taking place prior to the exact pickup coil activating signal, in the same way the pinout high logics at pin#2,4,7 can certainly be simulated to be the signals emerging soon after the exact pickup coil activating has eliminated past.
For that reason you can easliy consider the signals at the lower pinouts of the IC 4017 to be "advancing" the exact pickup signals. Furthermore, due to the fact the resetting from the pickup moves the IC 4017 high to its pin#3, this pinout could be believed to be matching the pickup's normal "recommended" trigger....while the pinouts that follow the pin#3, which may be the pinouts2,4,7 may very well be thought to be the signals corresponding to the late signals or the "retarded" signals, with reference to the exact pickup generates.
Tips on how to Begin the Circuit
Due to this we first must understand the time required by the pickup signal to yield each alternate pulses.
Believe you record it to be around 100 millisecond (an arbitrary value), this might indicate that the 555 IC ought to deliver pulses at its pin#3 at the rate of 100/9 = 11.11 ms.
The moment this is set, you can easliy approximately consider the outputs from the 4017 to be developing high logic across all its outputs that would steadily "recede" as the pickup signals become more quickly and much faster as a reaction the vehicle's speed.
This will likely bring about a receding "high" logics across the bottom pinouts of the IC 4017, for that reason at higher speeds the rider would probably acquire an alternative of manually resorting to the lower sets of pins for activating the CDI coil, as presented in the diagram (observe selector switch alternatives).
In the figure you can easliy observe a selector switch that are available for picking the pinout generates from the IC 4017 IC for activating the CDI coil.
As discussed above, the lower list of receding pinout high logics once picked, would certainly permit an proceed activating of the CDI coil thereby enable the rider to obtain a self adjusting automatic advance firing of the CDI coil, but this needs to be picked only after the vehicle is moving much above the advisable normal speed.
Likewise if the rider contemplates a lower speed for the vehicle, he can toggle the switch for picking the "retarded" timing alternative, accessible across the pinouts which can be subsequent to the pin#3 of the IC 4017.
In the course of the advised normal speeds the biker can select the pin#3 as the activating output for the CDI that may enable the vehicle to enjoy an impressive ride at the provided normal speeds.
In the next article we'll make an effort to research a circuit that could permit the above advance and retard timing of the sparks rapidly without the riders interference that allows you to make certain optimum productivity in the course of the several speed levels of the motorcycle.
]]> 468 0 0 0 371 0 0 375 371 1 Simple Chargeable Solar LED Lamp Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-chargeable-solar-led-lamp-circuit/ Fri, 26 Jun 2015 03:21:08 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=470 The solar panel voltage features could be somewhere between 18V and 24V. A relay is presented in the circuit it is wired with the LED module such that it's activated just during the nighttime or when it's dark below threshold for the solar panel to create the preferred any kind of power. As far as the solar voltage is obtainable, the relay continues energized isolating the LED module from the battery and making sure that the 40 watt LED module remains to be closed off at the time of day time and even while the battery is getting charged. After dusk, when the solar voltage evolves into satisfactorily low, the relay will no longer be capable to maintain its N/O position and flips to the N/C changeover, connecting the battery with the LED module, and illuminating the array by way of the accessible entirely charged battery power. The LED module can be viewed linked to a heatsink which need to be sufficiently huge that allows you to arrive at an optimal benefit from the module and for providing longer life span and brightness from the device. The suggested reducing resistors could be measured from the provided formulas: Rx = 1.25/battery charging current Ry = 1.25/LED current rating. Considering the battery to be a 40 AH lead acid battery, the desired charging current needs to be 4 amps. for that reason Rx = 1.25/4 = 0.31 ohms wattage = 1.25 x 4 = 5 watts The LED current is available by separating its total wattage by the voltage rating, that is definitely 40/12 = 3.3amps for that reason Ry = 1.25/3 = 0.4 ohms wattage = 1.25 x 3 = 3.75 watts or 4 watts. Reducing resistors are not useful for the 10 watt LEDs due to the fact the input voltage from the battery is equal to the particular 12V limit of the LED module thereby are unable to go beyond the protected boundaries.]]> 470 0 0 0 How to use High Watt LEDs with Arduino https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-use-high-watt-leds-with-arduino/ Fri, 26 Jun 2015 03:46:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=472 For handling single LEDs or multiple LEDs from related Arduino outputs, individual mosfets could be essential as as follows:   The LED resistors could very well be measured applying the following formula: R = (U - LEDfwdV)/LED Current whereas U is the supply voltage LEDfwdV is the LED forward functioning voltage of the selected range LED current is the ampere rating features of the LEDs made use of For that reason here U = 12V LEDfwdV = 3.3V x 3 = 9.9V due to the fact 3nos are there anytime in just about every range and 3.3V getting the forward voltage spec of every LED LED current = 350mA, let's take it 300mA or 0.3Amp to preserve things better. Substituting these in the formula: R = (U - LEDfwdV)/LED Current = 12 - 9.9/0.3 = 7 ohm watts could be measured as Watts = LEDfwdV x LED current = 9.9 x 0.3 = 2.97 watts or 3 watts For handling 9nos of 1 watt LEDs collectively by way of an Arduino, the following effortless set up could be provided simply by a 12V external supply: For handling single LEDs or multiple LEDs from related Arduino outputs, individual mosfets could be essential as as follows: The LED resistors could very well be measured applying the following formula: R = (U - LEDfwdV)/LED Current whereas U is the supply voltage LEDfwdV is the LED forward functioning voltage of the selected range LED current is the ampere rating features of the LEDs made use of For that reason here U = 12V LEDfwdV = 3.3V x 3 = 9.9V due to the fact 3nos are there anytime in just about every range and 3.3V getting the forward voltage spec of every LED LED current = 350mA, let's take it 300mA or 0.3Amp to preserve things better. Substituting these in the formula: R = (U - LEDfwdV)/LED Current = 12 - 9.9/0.3 = 7 ohm watts could be measured as Watts = LEDfwdV x LED current = 9.9 x 0.3 = 2.97 watts or 3 watts]]> 472 0 0 0 Red, Green, Blue (RGB) LED Random Flasher Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/red-green-blue-rgb-led-random-flasher-circuit/ Fri, 26 Jun 2015 04:00:20 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=476 The IC 4060 delivers the clock pulses to the IC 4017 for accomplishing the intended the sequencing of its output pins in accordance with every clock pulse at its pin14. On the other hand here the output of the 4017 IC is designed slightly with different methods for developing a distinctive RGB flashing layout. The following, the red, green blue strings are wired in a particular tactic to acquire the talked about required sequencing layout, that is certainly when activated the R, G. B strings first light up in range (in a "chasing" for instance design), following all the three strings acquire illuminated collectively and turn off, after this following up the three strings light up one after the other without shutting off during this process, lastly the three LED light up collectively but are displayed swiftly to complete the range. The cycle then resets and will go going back to the initial level as mentioned in the above justification. THe 1M pot could be adjusted for finding the required control and sequencing rate on the RGB LEDs.]]> 476 0 0 0 How to Connect Multi-Color LEDs in Series https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-connect-multi-color-leds-in-series/ Fri, 26 Jun 2015 04:16:57 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=478                 It only ought to be performed in accordance with the specifications, for finding the appropriate information. Mentioning the above images, we could notice that the LED strings are not appropriately wired and that may be a reason why the design is offering untrue and irregular reaction. You should not wire LEDs obtaining distinct V/I features in series. You should invariably group up the LEDs with similar features collectively when a series association is necessary to be adopted. In spite of this if the specification is due to a mix and match approach for example the above images, yet still the same color LEDs needs to be associated in series and if required in equivalent with their individual series resistors. High watt LEDs will produce heat, for that reason organizing these kinds of devices over a heatsink is essential as well as to prevent a thermal runaway you can combine a present regulator, that is definitely fine, certainly no complications with these kinds of limitations. Nevertheless asserted the LEDs ought to be wired up as advised in the above informative article, only then you certainly will be able to gain an impressive result from the system. And imagine you might have a power supply that may be rated to supply a lower voltage but higher current when this is the case you may choose to merely link up all the LEDs singly in equal with each LED designed with its own reducing resistor, a well measured one. Establishing the LEDs for the cultivate light circuit making use of power LEDs I had actually reviewed this in one of my prior content, perhaps you may read it here For that reason the proper method of wiring the LEDs for the above illustration high power grow light assembly needs to be as indicated below diagram. All the positive and negative ends of the particular strings now merely has to be incorporated with the power supplies (+)/(-) terminals When you have any kind of concerns or issues feel free to publish them in the comment box below.   It is my opinion I certainly failed to notice something in the above design. Due to the fact the current specifications of all the LEDs are similar, voltage features could be avoided, and different color LEDs could be associated within the similar strings. As a result let's review the design appropriately over again. The first string from left has 4 red LEDs and 3 blue LEDs, supply is 24V, for that reason the current reducing resistor for this string could possibly be measured provided below: R = supply minus total LED fwd. voltage divided by LED current = 24 - (4x2)+(3x3.2) divided by 0.6 (600mA) = 10.66 ohms wattage =(4x2) + (3x3.2) x 0.6 = 10,56 watts you could determine resistors for the other strings far too, in the above method. The current control for the above set up could be manufactured as discussed below artices: http://homemadecircuitsandschematics.blogspot.in/2013/06/universal-high-watt-led-current-limiter.html http://homemadecircuitsandschematics.blogspot.in/2011/12/make-hundred-watt-led-floodlight.html]]> 478 0 0 0 How Microwave Sensors Work https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-microwave-sensors-work/ Fri, 03 Jul 2015 03:56:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=480 The following image delivers the breakdown limitations or the complete maximum voltage and current ratings that must definitely be related to the IC, these kinds of limitations ought not be exceeded, to be exact these kinds of needs to be maintained properly below the revealed values.   The two images proven below demonstrate the phase shift or the difference in the position of the reflected frequency in accordance with the original radiated frequency when the target is contacting (first image below), just in case the target is receding or getting back (the second diagram below) KMY 24 Microwave Sensor frequency result when target is getting close to KMY 24 Microwave Sensor frequency response when target is approaching KMY 24 Microwave Sensor frequency result when target is receding KMY 24 Microwave Sensor frequency response when target is receding   Within the next (approaching) article we shall attempt to realize relating to the best way to use a microwave sensor as a result of an effective circuit.]]> 480 0 0 0 Current Controlled CREE XM-L T6 LED Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/current-controlled-cree-xm-l-t6-led-driver-circuit/ Fri, 26 Jun 2015 04:39:04 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=486 Making reference to the above diagram, the design is a simple current controlled stage where T2 signifies the maximum current limit of T1 by handling the base potential of T1. Any time the circuit is activated, T1 is turned on through R1 illuminating the LED. The practice enables the complete current utilized by the LED to penetrate one amongst the elected resistors (R2, R3, or R4) to ground. This produces a proportionate level of voltage across this current sensing resistor, which will kinds the activating voltage for the base of T2. As long as this imagined voltage is higher than 0.7V, T2 is required to activate and ground the base potential of T1, therefore restricting its conduction, and consequently restricting power to the LED. The LED is currently forced to shut, on the other hand the procedure as the LED endeavors to switched off this also commences reducing the voltage across the individual base resistor of T2. T2 at present experience a decrease of activating voltage and switches OFF, rebuilding the LED right back its original position through T1, until again the limitation practice is activated which in turn proceeds, keeping a current governed illumination over the related LED, that may be a Cree XM-L 10 watt lamp for this reason. In this article R4 ought to be elected to enable the LED to illuminate with optimal utilization (max brightness), that is definitely at its rated 3 amp level....R2 and R3 could be elected to deliver another required lower current operation (lower intensity) to the LED such that by locating these kind of delivers three several intensity levels for the LED. Elements List T1 = TIP 41 (on heatsink) T2 = TIP 31 (on heatsink) R1 could be measured by applying the following formula: R1 = (Us - LEDv) x hFe / LED current = (3.5 - 3.3) x 25 / 3 = 1.66 ohms Wattage of the resistor = (3.5 - 3.3) x 3 = 0.6 watts or 1 watt R2, R3, R4 could be measured as: Low Intensity = R2 = 0.7/1 = 0.7 ohms, wattage = 0.7 x 1 = 0.7 watts or 1 watt Moderate Intensity R3 = 0.7/2 = 0.35 ohms, wattage = 0.7 x 2 = 1.4 watts Optimal Intensity = R4 = 0.7/3 = 0.23 ohms, wa ttage = 0.7 x 3 = 2.1 watts  ]]> 486 0 0 0 Adjustable Current Switch Mode Power Supply (SMPS) Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/adjustable-current-switch-mode-power-supply-smps-circuit/ Fri, 26 Jun 2015 04:46:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=489 Discussing the above design we get a definite idea relating to the way to adjust or make a variable current SMPS driver circuit. The opto coupler (suggested by red square) will likely be contained by default for all SMPS devices, and so long as the TL431 is not present then we could possibly have to configure the overall configuration involved with opto coupler LED. If the TL431 stage is actually a part of the SMPS circuit, as a result we only have to examine developing the BC547 stage which evolves into entirely liable for the suggested current control of the circuit. The BC547 can be visible linked with its collector/emitter across the TL431 IC's cathode/anode, and the base of BC547 can be visible linked with the output (-) of the SMPS via a couple of selectable resistors Ra, Rb, Rc, Rd. These kinds of resistors being in between the base and emitter of the BC547 transistor activate performing like current sensors for the circuit. However these are correctly measured such that by shifting the jumper connection across the related contacts, several current limits are established in the range. When the current tends to increase beyond the set threshold as determined by the values of the matching resistors, a potential difference is created across the base/emitter of the BC547 which evolves into ample to activate the transistor, shorting the TL431 IC between the opto LEd and ground. The above measures promptly lights up the LED of the opto, submitting a "fault" signal to the input side of the SMPS via the opto's in-built photo transistor. The condition right away makes an effort to carry out a shut down across the output side which unfortunately quits the BC547 from executing and the condition fluctuates from ON to OFF and ON swiftly making sure that the current certainly not is more than the predetermined threshold. The resistors Ra...Rd could be measured through the use of the following formula: R = 0.7/cut-of current threshold As an illustration if assume we need to connect an LED at the output possessing a current rating of 1 amp. You can easliy set the value of the corresponding resistor (preferred by the jumper) as: R = 0.7/1 = 0.7 ohm Wattage of the resistor could be easily received by multiplying the variants, i.e. 0.7 x 1 = 0.7 watts or simply 1 watt. The measured resistor makes certain that the output current to the LED certainly not crosses the 1 amp mark, consequently protecting the LED from destruction, other values for the remaining resistors could be correctly measured to possess the required variable current option in the SMPS module.]]> 489 0 0 0 How a Microwave Sensor or a Doppler Sensor Works https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-a-microwave-sensor-or-a-doppler-sensor-works/ Sat, 27 Jun 2015 02:09:37 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=491   The following image delivers the breakdown limitations or the complete maximum voltage and current ratings that must definitely be related to the IC, these kinds of limitations ought not be exceeded, to be exact these kinds of needs to be maintained properly below the revealed values.   The two images proven below demonstrate the phase shift or the difference in the position of the reflected frequency in accordance with the original radiated frequency when the target is contacting (first image below), just in case the target is receding or getting back (the second diagram below). KMY 24 Microwave Sensor frequency response when target is approaching   KMY 24 Microwave Sensor frequency response when target is receding KMY 24 Microwave Sensor frequency result when target is getting close to KMY 24 Microwave Sensor frequency result when target is receding Within the next (approaching) article we shall attempt to realize relating to the best way to use a microwave sensor as a result of an effective circuit.]]> 491 0 0 0 How to Make a Remote Controlled Trolley https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-remote-controlled-trolley/ Sat, 27 Jun 2015 02:33:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=494 The left side brown color unit is the Tx or the transmitter unit while the adjoining circuit broad is the Rx or the receiver unit. The Tx unit can be visible with 4 red colored buttons marked as A, B, C, D, as well as the Rx board could be seen obtaining 4 relays (black color boxes). The four particular buttons of the Tx module are wirelessly paired for functioning the four matching relays of the Rx module. You will notice connectors fixed around the ends of the board (green colored), these kinds of connectors are correctly terminated with the (+) (-) supply inputs for the Rx board including with the relay contacts, for all the 4 relays. A relay, as we all know contains 5 basic contacts and their pinouts viz: 2 pins for the coil, one for the pole and one each for the N/C and the N/O. Considering that there are 4 relays in the Rx unit, it will be easy to find 5 x 4 = 20 outputs connected with the significant connector points. It might be a difficult process to independently figure out these kinds of relay terminations on the connectors, as a result I would advice soldering wires directly on the relay pinouts in an effort to save yourself from the above process, this work will likely be preferred in the future while we engage the unit with the trolley's control circuit. Developing the relay control circuit for the trolley To accomplish this you require a variety of relays and diodes. The relays needs to be accurately rated that allows you to deal with the high power wheel motors of the trolley. I might suggest choosing OEN make relays for this, as proven the following image: 12V, 285 ohms, 10 amp relay   12V, 285 ohms, 10 amp relay The diodes which can be expected in the relay driver circuit could be our standard 1N4007 diodes. The circuit particulars for the same could be noticed in this article diagram:   Implementing the above stipulated relays as well as the diodes it is very important to accomplish developing the above relay driver circuit board which can be simply performed on a piece of veroboard. After this we have now an essential process at our disposal that is certainly establishing the green wires proven in the above diagram with the remote control Rx board. Before the integration we shall must add a few mods in the Rx module, as discussed below:     Making use of pieces of insulated wires, correctly stripped and tinned at the ends go on attaching (by soldering) all the pole pins of the relay and link this common joint with the positive line of the Rx board. Right now in this particular condition we could imagine that when the relays are not in an activated situation (through the remote handset) the pole positive input of each relay will likely be connected to their particular N/C points, when activated the positive from the pole would probably shift and get linked with the suitable N/O points. In other words, on activation the N/O contact are showered with the positive supply as well as we are now thinking about this optimistic supply from the N/O contacts mainly because these will likely be initiated only once the relays are turned on, intending that when the Tx (transmitter) buttons are pressed. For that reason all the suitable N/O pinouts ought to be linked to the green wires of the above indicated relay driver circuit. The moment this is accomplished, the Rx will likely be associated with the relay driver module for carrying out all the meant techniques of the remote controlled trolley, that is: the forward, reverse, motions and the left, right turns. Powering the relay Driver Board Due to the fact the relays in the relay driver level could well be liable for moving the heavy motors linked with the trolley wheel,the supply because of this might need to be equivalently strong, for that reason deep cycle lead acid batteries emerge as a good choice for this application. If perhaps the motors to be rated at 12V, a 40AH lead acid battery could well be sufficiently good for making it possible for the trolley to move in spite of bulkier loads. Configuring the Wheels with the Motors for the Aimed techniques As could be recognized in the following figure, the talked about remote controlled trolley requires 4 wheels for suporting and rolling the system. On the other hand simply the front two wheels might be liable for permitting the intended reverse, forward, right and left techniques, as well as the motors could well be required to be clamped with such two front wheels of the trolley, as proven in the following image: The rear wheels are merely dummy wheels, fixed only for enabling a free rolling of the trolley, as a reaction the front wheel orders. As could be realized in the above image, the module started as PCB assembly is the relay driver board, the remote module suggests the Rx remote receiver board while the battery is the 40 AH 12V battery which we talked about in the prior a segment of the article. After assembling you could have to tweak and examine the motor wire connections with the relay driver board. For a forward and reverse motion both the motors ought to be as one collectively, although for carrying out a right or a left flip, the motors have to pass through an opposite rotational movement. If you come across the motor not behaving in the above manner, it could be most definitely resolved by simply swapping the polarity of one of the motors. This certainly will quickly correct the scenario and force the motors to apply the selected techniques. Ultimately the A. B, C, D buttons could be correctly matched or interchanged for the any of the particular techniques by tweaking the green wire links with the Rx module, in accordance with the users choices.]]> 494 0 0 0 How to Make a Ultrasonic Remote Control Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-ultrasonic-remote-control-circuit/ Fri, 03 Jul 2015 03:51:28 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=497 The recommended ultrasonic remote control circuit utilizes ultrasonic transducers to deliver and acquire the ultrasonic signals. Ultrasonic transducers are being used in measuring the distance of an object and several other programs. In this circuit, we give them a try for another objective of generating a remote controlled relay. Ultrasonic remote control receiver circuit Ultrasonic remote control receiver circuit       Ultrasonic remote control transmitter circuit Working Of Circuit: This project involves two parts i.e., transmitter circuit and receiver circuit. The transmitter circuit contains a 555 timer IC that may be the heart of the circuit. Here, the 555 timer is employed in astable multi vibrator mode. It may oscillate at a frequency of 40 - 50 KHz. The ultrasonic transducer is utilized to transmit this frequency by using ultrasonic waves. A 9v battery enable you to power the transmitter circuit. The variable resistor R3 (in transmitter circuit) are often used to adjust the frequency. The receiver circuit contains two essential levels for the processing of the ultrasonic waves obtained by the obtaining transducer. The first level is a rectifier which amplifies the signals by using the transistors Q1 and Q2. The improved and filtered DC is provided to the inverting pin of the operating amplifier CA3140. The inverted output is utilized to bias the transistor Q3 which encourages the relay and there goes the second stage. The preset resistor R2(in receiver circuit) enable you to adjust the level of sensitivity of the circuit. You can make use of a 9v SMPS power supply to power the receiver circuit. The receiver circuit really should remain ON and a push-to-on switch can be employed in the transferring circuit to function as a remote. Bring together the circuits on basic function PCB’s. You may surround the transmitter circuit in the right casing and the transducer, push-to-on switch and LED needs to be outside of the casing. Ultrasonic waves are directional in nature and as a result, you must lead the waves straight onto the acquiring transducer for the relay to turn on. Parts List for the above discussed ultrasonic remote control circuit: Transmitter circuit: R1 – 18K, R2 – 10K, R3 – 5K variable resistor, R4 – 1K, C1 – 680pf, C2 – 0.01µf, C3 – 100µf, 25v, L1 – green LED, TR1 – ultrasonic transmitter, S1 – push-to-on switch, Receiver circuit: R1 – 10K, R2 – 5K variable resistor, R3- 10K, R4 – 15K, R5 – 100K, R6 – 10K, R7 – 4.7K, R8 – 15K, R9 – 10K, R10 – 12K, R11 – 390K, R12 – 470K, R13 – 27K, R14 – 1K, C1 – 0.56µf, C2 – 0.1µf, C3 – 0.22µf, C4 – 10µf, 25v, D1, D2 – 1N4148, D3 – 1N4007, Q1, Q2 – BC 548, Q3 – BC 558, Q4 – SL 100, RY1 – 9v relay, RX1 – ultrasonic transmitter]]> 497 0 0 0 Car Blown Tail Lamp Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/car-blown-tail-lamp-indicator-circuit/ Fri, 03 Jul 2015 03:43:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=499 The performance is reasonably easy: The IC 555 is configured as a simple voltage comparator, where its pin2 results in being the sensing input. The BC557 alongside the linked R1, R2 resistors forms a current to voltage converter stage. Assuming that a working bulb lamp continues associated across the proven points, a small negative potential corresponding to the bulb current consumption is designed across Rx. This potential evolves into satisfactory to continue the BC557 turned on and performing which sustains pin2 of the IC high. With the above situations, pin3 of the IC stays low and the LED continues to be switched off. In spite of this in an event the car bulb fuses or quits illuminating, the potential across Rx fades away or eliminates to an range where the BC557 merely quits executing. This quickly offers pin2 of the IC high as well as the LED commences glowing suggesting the blown brake light bulb situation to the user. The above design could be moreover efficiently employed in numerous purposes which desire some form of current (amp) supervising for instance an over-current or over-load cut off etc. R1 could be measured provided below: R1 = 0.7/bulb current rating The above discussed circuit could be significantly made easy by way of the following cofiguration: Car brake light lamp blown fused indicator circuit using transistors]]> 499 0 0 0 Making an Adjustable SMPS Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/making-an-adjustable-smps-circuit/ Fri, 03 Jul 2015 03:39:17 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=501 Observe the bottom right side of the diagram noted with red dotted lines, it displays the variable part of the circuit everyone is focused on. This portion evolves into liable for the planned voltage regulation behavior. Here the resistor R6 might be replaced with a 22K pot for producing the design variable. Magnifying this section delivers the best view of the associated particulars:       If in case you have a fixed voltage SMPS circuit, open it and just watch out for the optocoupler in the design, it could be generally placed just around the central ferrite transformer, as could be used in the following image:   As soon as you have identified the opto-coupler, clean up by removing all the elements related on the output side of of the opto, indicating across the pins which might be towards the output side of the SMPS PCB. And attach or integrate these pins of the opto with the assembled circuit making use of the TL431, proven in the prior diagram. You can actually assemble the TL431 section on a small piece of general purpose PCB and glue it on the main SMPS board. If your SMPS circuit does not possess an output filter coil, you can still simply short the two positives of the TL431 circuit and join the termination to the cathode of the SMPS output diode. In spite of this imagine your SMPS already consists of the TL431 circuit with the opto coupler then simply find the position of the R6 resistor and replace it with a pot (see R6 location in the first diagram above). Don't forget to add a 220 ohms or 470 ohm resistor in series with the POT otherwise while adjusting the pot to the upper most level could quickly destroy the TL431 shunt device. That's it, now you realize in what way to convert or make a variable voltage SMPS circuit making use of the above talked about actions. In case you have an extra problems relating to the design or the clarification, feel free to convey by way of your views.]]> 501 0 0 0 727 0 0 728 https://makingcircuits.com/ 727 1 Programmable Valve Timer Circuit for Water Control Apllication https://makingcircuits.com/blog/programmable-valve-timer-circuit-for-water-control-apllication/ Fri, 03 Jul 2015 04:17:28 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=507 Speaking about the diagram above you can easliy see two similar timer levels making use of the ICs 4060 which are put together with each other such that when the upper module stops counting, the lower gets turned on and the range proceeds extremely from the upper timer to the lower and back to the upper timer module. The functioning of the system could be realized as discussed below: When power is activated, the circuit will remain disabled since pin12 of the upper IC has little or no access to a ground for initiating the counting practice. On the other hand the moment water is introduced across the shown "water sensing points" the pin12 of the upper IC experiences a ground potential by way of these sensing conductors and promptly begins the counting process. The initialization commences with a low at pin3 of the upper IC, the red LED now lights up suggesting the start of the counting method by the system. After approximately 2 minutes which might be set by correctly adjusting P1, C1, the upper IC finishes its counting reverting its pin3 with a high logic, which quickly activates the relay by way of the associated BC547 driver stage. The relay clicks energizing the water valve mechanism into action. The green LED all together lights up recognizing the above activation of the relay and the valve. The high from pin3 of the upper IC as well assures that the IC latches itself and stops counting for the moment, this is exactly applied by the diode that's attached across pin3 and pin11 of the upper IC. The above talked about high from the pin3 of the upper IC all together triggers the lower BC547 into conduction which will grounds the pin12 of the lower IC, confirming a activating signal to the lower IC. The lower IC now starts out counting until 8 minutes have lapsed, this time period could be correctly set by adjusting P2/C2 of the module. When this set period elapses the pin3 of the lower IC goes high, "kicking" a activating pulse to pin12 of the upper IC, which reacts to this and quickly resets the upper IC into its original status in order that it commences counting its established 2 minute slot. The above method switches OFF the relay and the valve mechanism delivering a free route for the water to flow again, for until 2 minutes have passed and the cycle repeats, but only on condition that the water sensing points remain subjected to a water content.]]> 507 0 0 0 577 http://- 0 0 578 577 1 579 http://- 577 0 580 579 1 595 http://- 0 0 596 https://makingcircuits.com/ 595 1 Remote Controlled Fan Dimmer Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/remote-controlled-fan-dimmer-switch-circuit/ Sat, 04 Jul 2015 09:20:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=510 The a variety of functions associated within the circuit may be noticed by making use of the following points: When an infrared beam concentrates at the sensor, the sensor delivers a low logic in accordance with this which usually leads to the PNP BC557 to carry out. The sensor utilised here is a TSOP1738, you could read more about it in this particular simple IR remote control content The conduction of the BC557 transistor in keeping with the IR beam links the positive supply to pin14 of the IC 4017 that may be considered to be a clock pulse by the IC. This clock pulse is translated into a single sequential hop of a high logic from the current pinout to the next following pinout in the sequence across the presented outputs of the IC 4017. This sequential transfer or shift of a high logic pulse from one pinout to the next across the complete outputs from pin#3 to pin#10 and back is completed in keeping with just about every short lived beam focused on the IR sensor by the IR remote handset. You can easily discover the IC 4017 outputs gain a number of exactly measured resistors whose outer free ends are shorted and attached to ground via a 1K resistor. The above configuration forms a resistive potential divider which yields a sequential incrementing or dropping potential levels at the node "A" according to the shifting of the high logics across the outputs as talked about in the above clarification. This various potential is ended at the base of an NPN transistor whose emitter can be viewed attached to pin#5 of IC 555 that may be designed as a high frequency astable. The 555 step fundamentally performs such as a PWM generator which may differ proportionately as its pin#5 potential is varied. The various PWMs are manufactured at its pin#3. By default pin#5 is linked with a 1K resistor to ground which makes certain that if you have no voltage or minimum voltage at pin#5 causes an incredibly narrow PWMs at its pin#3 and as the potential or voltage at its pin#5 is raised the PWMs also achieve width consequently. The width is maximum when the potential at pin#5 reaches 2/3rd of the Vcc of its pin#4/8. At this point it appears that, as the outputs from the IC 4017 shifts establishing a varied voltage at the base of the NPN, a respective amount of differing voltage is distributed over pin#5 of the IC 555 which usually is converted into an suitably changing PWMs across pin#3 of the IC. Since the pin#3 of the IC is attached to the gate of a triac, the conduction of the triac is consequently inspired from high to low and vice versa in keeping with the modifying PWMs over its gate. This is certainly successfully changed into a required speed control or an effective regulation of the associated fan across the triac's MT1 in addition to the AC mains input. Consequently the speed of the fan evolves into adjustable from fast to slow and vice versa in accordance with the infrared IR beams toggled on the linked IR sensor of the circuit. Tips on how to Install the circuit. It could be carried out with the aid of the following actions: In the beginning preserve the emitter of the BC547 transistor shut off with pin#5 of the IC555. Now the two stages (IC 4017 and IC 555) could be realized to be isolated from each other. First check the IC 555 stage in the following manner: Disconnecting the 1K resistor across pin#5 and ground need to increase the speed of the fan to maximum, as well as connecting it back should drop it to minimum. The above will demonstrate the appropriate performance of the IC 555 PWM stage. The 50k preset setting is not important and could be set to somewhere around center of the preset range. Following, we should instead examine whether the IC 4017 output node at "A" generates a varying voltage from 1V to 10V in accordance with each pressing of the IR remote beam over the circuit's IR sensor. If the above circumstance is achieved, it is possible to consider the stage to be performing appropriately, and now the emitter of the BC547 could be integrated with pin#5 of the IC555 for the final testing of the fan speed regulation using a IR remote handset. The remote handset might end up being any TV remote control which we generally use in our homes. If the above design is unable to perform effortlessly with a linked fan, it could really need to experience a minor alteration for bettering the benefits as presented below: The circuit drives the help of a MOC3031 triac driver stage for enforcing a trouble free and clean fan control by way of the remote handset. WARNING: THE WHOLE CIRCUIT IS DIRECTLY LINKED WITH THE MAINS AC, OBSERVE EXTREME CAUTION WHILE TESTING THE CIRCUIT IN POWERED POSITION]]> 510 0 0 0 Protecting Motor from Overcurrent Conditions https://makingcircuits.com/blog/protecting-motor-from-overcurrent-conditions/ Mon, 06 Jul 2015 02:07:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=513     Analyzing the implementation of an opamp based current controller circuit design   Simple motor over current controller circuit using the IC 741   The first diagram clarifies the fundamental current control stage calculations employing an opamp and a handful of passive elements, and it seems fantastic. As suggested in the diagram as far as V1 - V2 is much less than 0.7V, the output of the opamp should really be zero, and the occasion it arrives above the 0.7V, the output should really drive high, however this might follow a PNP transistor at the output, not with an NPN,....anyway let's progress. Here the 0.7V is with reference to the diode attached with one of the inputs of the opamp, as well as the thought is definitely to be sure that the voltage in this pin is more than the 0.7V limit in order that this pinout potential crosses the other complementing input pin of the opamp ending with a disconnect trigger to be drawn for the linked motor driver transistor (an NPN transistor as selected in the design) On the other hand in the second diagram, this disorder will likely not gain executed, in actual fact the circuit will never reply whatsoever, let's observe the reason why. In the second diagram when power is activated, both the input pins attached across the 0.1 ohm resistor will likely be put through pretty much an equal level of voltage, but since the non-inverting pin has a dropping diode it will gain a potential which may be 0.7V cheaper than the inverting pin2 of the IC. This would cause the (+) input acquiring a shade lower voltage than the (-) pin of the IC, which usually will generate a zero potential at pin6 of the IC right at the onset. With a zero volts at the output the attached NPN would probably merely refuse to begin as well as the motor will continue to be shut OFF. With the motor shut off at this time there won't be virtually any current driven by the circuit and no potential change drawn across the sensing resistor. For that reason the circuit remains hidden with practically nothing taking place. There may be a different problem in the second diagram, the motor in question will likely need to be attached across the collector as well as the positive of the transistor for producing the circuit efficient, here a relay lacks the role, and is as a result not preferred. The damaged scenario talked about above could be reverted by means of swapping the contribution pinouts of the IC across the suggested issues, that is certainly across the sensing resistors, as presented in the sorted out third diagram. Making reference to the third diagram whenever power is activated, pin2 will likely be put through a 0.7V significantly less potential than pin3 of the IC, forcing the output to go high at the onset. With the output going high provokes the motor to commence and achieve energy, and in case the motor endeavors to attract a current more the the stipulated value, the exact amount potential impact will probably be released across the 0.1 ohm resistor, now because this potential starts growing pin3 starts off encountering a falling potential, just in case it collapses below the pin2 potential, the output will rapidly turn back to zero disrupting the base drive for the transistor and switching off the motor right away. With the motor shut OFF in the course of that instant, the potential across the pins will certainly usually get normalized and will recover back to the original status, which will activate the motor and the scenario continue self-adjusting by way of a speedy ON/OFF of the driver transistor, keeping an appropriate current control over the motor. The sensing resistor could be measured provided below: R = 0.7/current The following as described for a 0.7amp current limit for the motor the value of the current sensor resistor R needs to be R = 0.7/0.7 = 1 ohm]]> 513 0 0 0 How to Automate your House using Smart Gadgets https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-automate-your-house-using-smart-gadgets/ Mon, 06 Jul 2015 02:16:30 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=516 516 0 0 0 Toy Using a Motor Timer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/toy-using-a-motor-timer-circuit/ Mon, 06 Jul 2015 02:25:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=518 Speaking about the above diagram, the T1, T2 stage in addition to the linked elements form an astable multivibtator with an oscillator frequency period equivalent to the required motor reverse forward timing period. The TIP127 step is the latch circuit for permitting a push button start for the circuit. The IC 4017 performs the forward and the backward pulses for the transistor driver step containing Q1-----Q4. The transistor driver is connected as a H-bridge for aiding the reverse forward motion of the motor as a reaction to the activates get from the IC 4017 outputs. The circuit could be noticed by using the following justification: Any time the push button is pressed for a moment, T3 experiences a short ground pulse by way of the switch which generates the transistor turning it ON and offering a confident pulse to the circuit. The initialization trigger leads to a logic low to occur at pin4 of the IC 4017 which holds and latches T3 into a powerful ON position despite the push button is developed. During this time pin15 also obtains a positive pulse resetting the IC such that pin3 commences with a logic high. With pin3 initially high actuates the H-bridge as well as the motor in a particular direction based upon the polarity of the motor wires across the bridge network. Now T1 and T2 commence counting and the moment their set time lapses, pin14 experiences a triggering pulse from the collector of T2 which forces pin3 high logic to shift to pin2. The above condition promptly reverts the H-bridge polarity and brings about the motor to begin an opposite course of its motion, until the following pulse at pin14 of the IC arises. Whenever the subsequent pulse is imagined at pin14 of the IC 4017, the high logic at pin2 of the IC now moves a step ahead and settles at pin4 of the IC. On the other hand seeing that pin4 is correlated with T3, a high at this pin quickly switches OFF T3, for that reason breaking the latch and switching OFF the power to the total circuit. The toy motor circuit now totally switches OFF until the push button is pressed again. A 0.1uF capacitor needs to be attached in equivalent with R2 with the intention that at any instance power is activated T2 activates ON first and permits a proper implementation of the system regarding the set time intervals. The time intervals could be set or adjusted in accordance with user desire by altering the values of possibly R2/R3 or C1/C2 or these pairs. Despite the fact that the circuit is executed as a toy here, it could gain numerous attractive industrial purposes which enables them to be modified for carrying out various user particular programmed machine activations.]]> 518 0 0 0 Automotive LED Brake Light Circuit making use of 1 watt High Efficiency LEDs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automotive-led-brake-light-circuit-making-use-of-1-watt-high-efficiency-leds/ Tue, 07 Jul 2015 15:58:20 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=520 automotive LED brake light circuit making use of 1 watt high efficiency LEDs The circuit for the LED brake light could be noticed above, and it seems to be pretty straightforward. The LM338 is designed as a current limiter, where Rx establishes the optimum allowed amps to the attached LEDs. It could be measured by making use of the following formula: Rx = 1.25/LED current When LeDs are attached in series there effective current usage is usually similar to the rating of the one individual LED. For that reason in the diagram each string could require 350mA since this is certainly the rating of each 1 watt LED. Paired current for all the three strings could well be 3 x 350mA = 1050mA or somewhere around 1 amp Substituting the above parameter in the formula we have: Rx = 1.25/1 = 1.25 Ohms Wattage = 1.25 x 1 = 1.25 watts The resistors Ry which may be viewed attached in series with the LEDs are generally optional, these could be involved only for supporting the IC and supplying correct balance across the LED strings. It could be measured making use of the following formula: Ry = (Supply - LED total FWD voltage) / LED current Since here the LEDs are specified with a forward voltage of 3.3V and 3 nos are set up in the range, the combined forward voltage evolves into 3 x 3.3 = 9.9V For reducing full loading of the LEDs, we could require the current at 300mA in place of the particular 350mA For that reason Ry = (13 - 9.9) / 0.3 = 10.33 ohms or simply 10 Ohms wattage = (13 - 9.9) x 0.3 = 0.93 watts or 1 watt Seems like we overlooked an essential inclusion in the above diagram, it's the dimmed LED feature in the course of the standard course of the vehicle and while the brakes are not employed. The following diagram recommends how merely this can be applied making use of a equivalent attached resistor Rz, with Rx. LED brake light circuit dimming when vehicle is running without brakes LED brake light circuit dimming when vehicle is operating without brakes Here the values of the Rx and Rz could be similar still double that of the above measured value that is 1.25 x 2 = 2.5 Ohms. This may enable a 50% dimming of the tail lights while the brakes are in the released position. If one would like to gain further dimming of the LEDs Rx could be increased to 3 ohms or 3.5 Ohms, this may also mean lowering the Rz value proportionately such that the parallel value of the two resistors constitutes 1.25 Ohms.]]> 520 0 0 0 How to Select Resistor Values in Electronic Circuits https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-select-resistor-values-in-electronic-circuits/ Fri, 10 Jul 2015 14:44:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=522 The best way to use Resistors for driving Transistors (BJTs). A transistor need a resistor across its base and emitter and this is most likely the one of the very most essential relation between these two components. A NPN transistor (BJT) ought to have a particular level of current to flow from its base to its emitter rail or ground rail in an effort to actuate (pass) a bulkier load current from its collector to its emitter. A PNP transistor (BJT) ought to have a given amount of current to flow from its emitter or positive rail to its base in an effort to actuate (pass) a heavier load current from its emitter to its collector. In an effort to control the load current optimally, a BJT should provide an effectively measured base resistor. You really should view an pertaining example article for producing a relay driver stage The formula for examining the base resistor of a BJT can be watched below: R = (Us - 0.6).Hfe / Load Current, Where R = base resistor of the transistor, Us = Source or the trigger voltage to the base resistor, Hfe = Forward current gain of the transistor. The above formula will supply with the appropriate resistor value for running a load by way of a BJT in a circuit. Despite the fact that the above formula may possibly seem vital and essential for designing a circuit making use of BJTs and resistors, the information in fact need not be so much correct. As an illustration believe we need to drive a 12V relay making use of a BC547 transistor, if the relay's operating current is approximately 30mA, from the above formula, we may well figure out the base resistor as: R = (12 - 0.6). 200 / 0.040 = 57000 ohms that's comparable to 57K The above value may very well be believed to be incredibly optimal for the transistor such that the transistor will run the relay with maximum performance and without dissipating or wasting additional current. Yet basically you may realize that actually any value between 10K and 60k facilitates the same achievement, the only marginal problem being the transistor dissipation which might be slightly more, might be around 5 to 10mA, that could be completely negligible and does not really matter in any respect. The above talk shows that despite the fact that calculating the value of the transistor could be advised but it's not totally necessary, as any economical value may well function for you equally well. But that being said assume in the above illustration if you picked the base resistor below 10K or above 60k, then absolutely it could begin producing some adverse consequences to the results. Below 10k the transistor would certainly commence acquiring warmer and dissipating substantially..and above 60K you might locate the relay stuttering and not triggering tightly. Resistors for driving Mosfets In the above illustration we detected that a transistor fundamentally is dependent upon a decently measured resistor across its base for carrying out the load process appropriately. Simply because a transistor base is a current centered device, where the base current is directly proportional to its collector load current. If the load current is more, the base current will in addition ought to be increased equally. Unlike this mosfets are totally different customers. These are definitely voltage dependent devices, that means a mosfet gate is not going to rely upon current rather on voltage for activating a load across its drain and source. As far as the voltage at its gate is finished or around 9V, the mosfet will fire the load optimally irrespective of its gate current which can be as low as 1mA. On account of the above function a mosfet gate resistor is not going to require significant calculations. Even so the resistor at a mosfet gate needs to be as low as possible but much higher than a zero value, that may be in between 10 and 50 ohms. Even if the mosfet could still lead to in the correct way even when no resistor was presented at its gate, a low value is strictly advisable for countering or minimizing transients or spikes across the gate/source of the mosfet.   Employing a resistor with a LED Similar to a BJT, making use of a resistor with an LED is necessary and could possibly be performed applying the following formula: R = (Supply voltage - LED fwd voltage) / LED current Yet again, the formula results are merely for receiving absolute optimal results from the LED brightness. As an illustration presume we have a LED with specs of 3.3V and 20mA. We need to illuminate this LED from a 12V supply. Employing the formula signifies that: R = 12 - 3.3 / 0.02 = 435 ohms That shows that a 435 ohm resistor will be essential to accumulating the most helpful benefits from the LED. Although practically you may realize that any value between 330 ohm and 1K would perform positive results from the LED, so its pretty much little experience and some understanding but you still could quite possibly get across these challenges even without any calculations.   Implementing resistors with zener diodes Quite a few a situations we locate it necessary to include a zener diode stage in an electronic circuit, as an illustration in opamp circuits where an opamp is employed like a comparator and we choose to employ a zener diode for fixing a reference voltage across considered one of the inputs of the opamp. One might question how a zener resistor is generally measured?? It's not hard at all, and is just the same as what we did for the LED in the prior discussion. That is certainly simply use the following formula: R = (Supply voltage - Zener voltage) / load current Its not necessary to state that the specifications and limitations are similar as executed for the LED above, no important difficulties will be come across if the elected zener resistor is moderately less or substantially above the measured value. The best way to use Resistors in Opamps Usually all ICs are produced with high input impedance specs and low output impedance specs. Indicating, the inputs are comfortable and safe from inside and are not current dependent for the operating limitations, but despite this the outputs of almost all IC will likely be affected by current and short circuits. Thus calculating resistors for the input of an IC is probably not important by any means, but while configuring the output with a load, a resistor might end up being critical and might have to be calculated as discussed in our above interactions. Employing resistors as current sensors In the above illustrations, particularly for the LeDs and the BJTs we noticed how resistors could possibly be configured as current limiters. Right now let's discover how a resistor could be applied as a current sensors: Additionally you can discover the same in this illustration article which leads how to build current sensing modules As per Ohms rules when current by way of a resistor is passed, a proportionate level of potential difference builds up across this resistor which may be measured making use of the following Ohms law formula: V = R/I, where V is the voltage produced across the resistor, R is the resistor in Ohms and I is the current passing by way of the resistor in Amps. Let's think as an illustration, a 1 amp current is passed by way of a 2 ohm resistor, resolving this in the above formula delivers: V = 2/1 = 2 V, If the current is dropped to 0.5 amps, then V = 2/0.5 = 1 V The above terms reveal exactly how the potential difference across the resistor can vary linearly and consequently in accordance with the flowing current by way of it. This property of a resistor is appropriately executed in all current measuring or current protection related circuits. Perhaps you may observe the following ideas for studying the above feature of resistors, these types of designs have utilized a measured resistor for sensing the most wanted current levels for the certain purposes.. Universal High Watt LED Current Limiter Circuit - Constant... Cheap Current Controlled 12 Volt Battery Charger Circuit... LM317 as a Variable Voltage Regulator and Variable... Laser Diode Driver Circuit - Current Controlled | Homemade... Make a Hundred Watt LED Floodlight Constant Current...   Making use of resistors as Potential Divider To this point we spotted how resistors should be considered in circuits for limiting current, now let us compare how resistors could be wired for getting any most wanted voltage level inside a circuit. Numerous circuits prefer exact voltage levels at particular points which emerge as critical references for the circuit for carrying out the designed services. For such type of programs measured resistors are employed in series for choosing the exact voltage levels also referred to as potential changes as per the circuit's demand. The required voltage references are gained at the junction of the two picked resistors (see figure above). The resistors which are usually designed for determining precise voltage levels are referred to as potential divider networks. The formula for locating the resistors and the voltage references could be noticed below, though it could be furthermore simply obtained making use of a preset or a pot and by measuring its center lead voltage making use of a DMM. Vout = V1.Z2/(Z1 + Z2)]]> 522 0 0 0 Battery Current Sensor with Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/battery-current-sensor-with-indicator-circuit/ Fri, 10 Jul 2015 14:42:10 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=524 Parts List for the offered battery current indicator circuit R1----R5 = 1k P1-----P4 = 1k presets A1-----A4 = LM324 IC Diode = 1N4007 or 1N4148 Rx = 0.6/specified battery charging current Easy methods to start up the circuit In the beginning continue all the preset slider arms on the way to the ground end. Disconnect the P1---P4 connection with Rx and connect it with an external variable voltage source which might be simply made with a 1K pot. For creating the variable power supply, take a 1K or a 10K pot, connect its outer terminals with the supply rails and connect its center terminal with the free end of P1---P4 which was shut off from Rx. Adjust the pot and create a 0.7V at the center lead of the pot. Now adjust the P1 such that the white LEd just glows. Increase the pot center lead voltage to 1V and set P2 such that the yellow LED just glows, shutting off the red LED. Next, increase the pot center lead voltage to 1.3V and after some time to 1.5V and adjust P3 and P4 likewise as done for P1, P2. The moment the setting is performed the pot can be eliminated and the P1----P4 end reconnected to the Rx point. The above range of 0.6V to 1.5V will likely be subject to the picked Rx value as well as the needed current range, where 1.5V could be realized to the maximum voltage across Rx created for the same maximum required charging current for the battery or almost every other load. As an illustration, a 1 ohm resistor elected for Rx will create 1.5 V across it when a current of 1.5 amp is passed by means of it, whereas the same voltage will likely be created for a 5 amp current if Rx is picked as 0.3 ohms etc. The formula for locating Rx = 1.5/maximum charging current.]]> 524 0 0 0 Difference between Solar Tracker and MPPT https://makingcircuits.com/blog/difference-between-solar-tracker-and-mppt/ Fri, 10 Jul 2015 14:40:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=526 How Solar Trackers Operates Solar trackers are electro-mechanaical systems manufactured to track the sun rays practically, indicating the solar panel keep on changing it's surface orientation in accordance with the sun's shifting positions such that it retains a perpendicular angle with the sun rays the whole day. The above movement is carried out making use of motors and an LDR sensor circuit. The LDR sensor circuit regularly detects the likelihood of sun rays and instructs the motor to turn the panel consequently such that the panel keeps tilting from east to west fraction by fraction. A solar tracker even offers the ability to take a look at an overcast condition and adjust the panel for acquiring the recommended or optimal angle of the sun rays. This potential of a solar panel makes it considerably advantageous in comparison to an MPPT since it has the ability to generate and accumulate almost 95% of the accessible solar energy at any quick the whole day. Despite the fact that a solar panel evolves into attributed with the above function, it will not likely contain the potential to transfer a dropped voltage at the output into a consequently boosted current as we researched in the above discussion making use of an MPPT device. So in case a 24V solar tracker technique is directly linked with a 12V battery, despite the fact that the panel would continue checking the sun and create optimum power all through the day, the battery might not be recommended with a doubled current, indicating with the above talked about features the solar panel which contains the potential to deliver 2.5V amps at 24V will remain to render 2.5 amps to the battery despite the the boosted 5 amps as made by the MPPT. Here the MPPT demonstrates its metal since its above ability evolves into essential and major and will never be forgotten about. For that reason it implies that an MPPT can never be overlooked even if a solar tracker is being employed, and it needs to be in addition employed with a solar tracker that allows you to make the combination deadly strong and almost 100% effective under all conditions. This combination makes certain that the user is in a position realize the maximum from the accessible solar panel and the sunshine, despite the fact that this might signify some heavy investments at the start, the costs could possibly be dealt with within a few seasons of use of the system. In spite of everything comparing the two competitors we can consider and accomplish that the unique winner is the solar tracker system. That being said, an MPPT also evolves into really important for attaining unbelievable achievements from a solar panel system and also when a fixed solar panel is chosen by an user.]]> 526 0 0 0 High Current Li-ion Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/high-current-li-ion-charger-circuit/ Fri, 10 Jul 2015 14:38:23 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=529 The design consists of two essential levels, the IC2 voltage regulator stage and the IC1 over charge cut-off stage. IC2 is connected in its normal voltage regulator form, where P1 performs as the control knob allowing it to be adjusted to create the essential charging voltage across the associated Li-ion battery at the output. IC1 pin3 is the sensing input of the IC and is ended with a preset P2 for supporting the over charge voltage level adjustment. The preset P2 is adjusted such that when the battery reaches its full charge value, the voltage at pin3 just evolves into greater than pin2, contributing to a quick high at pin6 of the IC. The moment this occurs the high from pin6 latches on to pin3 with a lasting high via R3, D2, freezing the circuit in that position. The above high is usually supplied at the base of the BC547 which right away grounds the ADJ pin of IC2 forcing it to close down its output voltage consequently cutting off the voltage to the Li-ion battery. The Red LED now illuminates suggesting the full charge level and the cut off circumstances of the circuit.. Parts List fro the suggested high current li-ion battery charger circuit R1, R5 = 4K7 R2 = 240 Ohms P1, P2 = 10 K Presets R3, R4 = 10K D1, D5 = 6A4 diode D2 = 1N4148 D3, D4 = 4.7Vzener diode 1/2 watt IC1 = 741 opamp for 12V input, LM321 for 24V input IC2 = LM338 How to Start up the circuit. In the beginning do not connect any battery at the output, and rotate P2 in order that its slider touches the ground end, in other words adjust P2 to make pin3 to zero or ground level. Feed the input voltage, adjust P1 to get the preferred level of voltage across the output where the battery really should be attached, the green LED will be illuminated in such a position. Now cautiously move P2 upwards until the the red LED just illuminates and latches in that position, avoid moving P2 any further, make sure with green LED shutting of in accordance with red LED illumination. The circuit is focused now for the preferred high current Li-ion charging from a car battery or any 12/24V source..]]> 529 0 0 0 MPPT Lead Acid Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/mppt-lead-acid-battery-charger-circuit/ Fri, 10 Jul 2015 14:36:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=532 I/V quality curve of solar panel Figure 1 shows the regular elements of a solar panel systems. Isc is a short-circuit current that options by way of the panel for instance the solar panel is short circuited. It is always the most effective current which may be acquired from the solar panel. Voc is the open-circuit voltage at the terminals of the solar panel. Vmp and Imp are the voltage and current levels where utmost power is available from the solar panel. While the sunshine lowers the optimum current (Isc) which might be obtained, the highest current from the solar panel also suppresses. Figure 2 signifies variation of I-V qualities with sun light. The blue curve links the particulars of the optimum power at various values of insolation   I-V variation characteristics with regard to sunlight I-V variation qualities concerning to sunlight The purpose of the MPPT circuit is to attempt to keep up the operating level of the solar panel at the optimum power point in a number of sunshine circumstances. As realized from Figure 2, the voltage where maximum power is provided is not going to alter considerably with sunshine. The circuit designed with the bq2031 employs this character to perform MPPT. An additional current control loop provides the decrease the charge current as the daylight reduces in addition to take care of solar panel voltage around the maximum power point voltage.   MPPT circuit for charging lead acid batteries MPPT circuit for charging lead acid batteries bq2031-Based MPPT Charger Figure 3 shows the schematic of a DV2031S2 board with an extra current control loop included onto undertake the MPPT utilizing the working amplifier TLC27L2. The bq2031 continues the charging current by maintaining a voltage of 250 mV at sense resistance R 20. A reference voltage of 1.565 V is produced through the use of 5 V from U2. The input voltage is in comparison with the reference voltage to deliver an error voltage which may be applied at the SNS pin of bq2031 to lessen the charge current. The voltage (V mp) wherein maximum power can be obtained from the solar panel is conditioned employing resistors R26 and R27. V mp = 1.565(R 26 +R 27)/R 27. With R 27 = 1 k Ω and R 26 = 9.2 k Ω, V mp = 16 V is attained. TLC27L2 is internally altered with a bandwidth of 6 kHz at V dd = 5 V. Considering the bandwidth of TLC27L2 is far below the switching frequency of bq2031, the added current control loop happens to be regular. The bq2031 in the earlier circuit (Figure 3) delivers an optimum current of 1 A. If perhaps the solar power panel can produce enough power to charge the battery at 1 A, the outer control loop is not going to continue into action. In spite of this if the insulation lessens and the solar power panel challenges to provide satisfactory energy to charge the battery at 1 A, the outer control loop reduces the charge current to conserve input voltage at V mp. The outcomes exhibited in Table 1 reveal the performing of the circuit. The voltage readings in daring sort suggest the difficulty the moment the secondary control loop is lessening the charge current to conserve input at V mp]]> 532 0 0 0 Motion Activated PIR Relay Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/motion-activated-pir-relay-circuit/ Fri, 10 Jul 2015 14:35:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=535 This circuit consumes a HC - SR501 PIR motion sensor that may be the heart of the circuit. Originally when the motion is detected by the sensor, it delivers a small signal voltage(usually 3.3 volts) that may be provides to the base of the transistor BC547 by way of a current control resistor and thus, its output goes high and it switches the relay on. This relay could possibly be designed to function with a electrical bulb or a tubelight, night lamp or anything else that works well on 220VAC. This circuit is generally found in gardens, so that at night, when we go for a stroll in the garden, the circuit switches on a light automatically and it continues to be lit until we are in the sensor’s vicinity and it gets turned off when we walk away from that place and for this reason minimizing the electricity costs. Here’s a back view of the sensor HC-SR501…   The sensor comprises of two preset resistors widely available to regulate the delay time and sensing range. The delay potentiometer could be changed to determine the time for which light continues to be on. The sensor when obtained, it consists of the default mode ‘H’ which signifies the circuit switches on the light when motion is detected and it continues on for preset time and after the preset time lapses, if the sensor could still sense motion, it can not switch the light off and if it might not detect the motion, it switches off the light. Here I will discuss the technical knowledge of the sensor HC-SR501… Working voltage range: 4.5VDC to 12VDC. Current Drain: <60uA Voltage output: 3.3V TTL Detection distance: 3 to 7 metres(can be adjusted) Delay time: 5 to 200 seconds(can be adjusted) Considered one of the weaknesses of PIR motion sensors is that its output goes high although a rat or a dog or some other animal moves in front of it and it switches on light unnecessarily. In cold countries, the sensor’s sensing range enhances. On account of low temperature, infrared radiations released by humans travel more distances and for this reason producing unwanted switching of lights. If fitted in backyards, you will find possibilities of activating of light when a car passes by because the radiations provided by hot engine of car fools the sensor. PARTS LIST: D1, D2 - 1N4007, C1- 1000uf, 25V, Q1 - BC547, R1 - 10K, R2 - 1K, L1 - LED(green) RY1 - Relay 12V T1 – Transformer 0-12V.   PIR Motion sensor built unit PIR Motion sensor built unit After conducting the manufacturing of the circuit, enclose it in an effective casing and use a separate casing for the sensor and join the sensor to circuit applying long wires so that you could place sensor at the place you require to similar to a garden and circuit is going to be inside in order that the circuit is secured from weather. And you should definitely apply a separate PCB for relay. Also, don’t neglect to exercise a perfect relay with correct current and voltage rating. You may use a terminal block which hooks up to the relay’s switching contacts, and manage it as proven in image so that you could adjust the electrical device hooked up to relay contacts effortlessly.   The ways to access this sensors save electricity to great extents. It may possibly decrease your electricity bills too! “PLEASE SAVE THE POWER FOR THE NEXT HOUR!” If the above design is designed to function with an alarm and a lamp such that both the loads function in the course of night but the alarm only in the course of day, then the diagram could be improved in the following means.   PIR alarm with light circuit with day night automatic switching action]]> 535 0 0 0 How to Make Digital Christmas Candle Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-digital-christmas-candle-light-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 06:25:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=546   IC1-----IC2 = 4017 T1, T2 = BC547 pin15 capacitor, resistor are 0.22uF and 1M respectively rest of the resistors are all 4k7 The Design The offered digital Christmas candle light timer circuit is generally applied by configuring the above two circuits by making use of the following recommendations: The left diagram above means the 25 LED timer circuit that may be required to light up in sequence from day#1 when the circuit is activated, until the 25he of December when the final 25th LeD lights up, at the rate of 1 LED per day. The level is established by wiring or cascading three IC 4017 ICs. The clock inputs of all the three ICs are rigged with the clock output of the right hand side circuit making use of IC 4060, whose pin3 output is intended to be linked with the pin14 of all the IC 4017. R1, R2 and C1 of IC1 are measured such that pin3 delivers a high clock after a period of specifically 24 hours, the moment the technique is activated. This 24 hour clock pulse is given to the pin14 of the three 4017 ICs in order that a high logic shifts in sequence from pin3 of IC1 every single day until the 25th day when the last LED at pin#1 of IC3 lights up. The circuit is operated choosing two 9V rechargeable batteries, one being attached perfectly with the supply pins of the IC steps even though the other attached by way of a 1K resistor. The battery that is certainly plugged in by way of a 1K resistor is effectively linked with the circuit and confirms that the ICs are usually driven with the minimum essential current, in an effort to preserve the memory of the ICs in case that the main battery obtains exhausted in the midst of the 25 day period and while the user takes away it for recharging and replacing it back.]]> 546 0 0 0 How To Make a Mains Over Load Protector Circuit for Lathe Machine https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-mains-over-load-protector-circuit-for-lathe-machine/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 07:01:01 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=548 The content addresses an easy overload cut off circuit for protecting heavy mains managed machines for instance a lathe machine.
I have at present talked about one effortless overload protector circuit design in one of my prior content, the same works extremely well for the suggested lathe machine overload cut off application.
Making reference to the circuit diagram below, you can easliy discover the following main levels in it:
An opto coupler level powered by a bridge rectifier
and a latching relay circuit stage together with the above opto coupler level.
The AC mains is supplied at the suggested left side input, that may be passed on to the load via a load sensing resistor R1 and the linked cut off relay's N/C contacts, N/C stands for generally closed, indicating the connections are associated across this point while the relay is in a deactivated position.
R1 is positively measured such that a potential difference satisfactory enough to activate the opto LED produces across it the moment an overload going over the harmful zone is achieved.
The overload cut off process is carried out in the following manner:
For assuming that the load is within the the standard selection of consumption, the voltage across R1 continues low, retaining the opto LED disabled.
In spite of this in case of a short circuit or an overload at the output, which is usually in a lathe machine for the suggested design, the voltage across R1 shoots and results in being suitably high to be able to activate the opto LED promptly.
The opto LED subsequently brightens the related LDR sealed inside the light proof enclosure producing its resistance to fall drastically.
This drop in the the LDR voltage enables a biasing current to the base of R1 which together with T2 quickly flips into a latching mode activating the relay.
The relay links reply this and offer the essential changeover cutting off the AC line to the load or the lathe machine.
The circuit continues latched and frozen until the power to the circuit is shut OFF and activated resetting the relay in its initial form. Conversely the proven push button are often pressed for the same.
The green LED shows the latched mode of the overload protector circuit along with ensures a power off to the output load.
The opto coupler is a homemade device, the development particulars could also be researched in this article:
http://homemadecircuitsandschematics.blogspot.in/2011/12/how-to-build-simple-electronic.html
Employing an LED/LDR combination for the opto coupler appears significantly trustworthy in its procedures, on the other hand a normal LED/transistor opto (for instance a 4n35 etc) could also be tested instead, and might possibly perform as reliably, it might be a matter of some experimentation.
R1 could also be measured making use of the following formula:
R1 = LED forward voltage / overload current (in amps)
P1 s for adjusting the sensitivity of the circuit.
]]> 548 0 0 0 How To Make a Digital Voice Changer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-digital-voice-changer-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 06:51:07 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=550 The HT8950 consists of, among other efficient blocks of an amplifier with internal polarization microphone, an A / D of 8 bits, a static RAM (SRAM) and a D / A converter 8 bits. The A / D and D / A work at a sampling rate of 8Khz, good enough to protect the spectrum of the human voice (3Khz) and delivers an output quality and quite high signal to noise ratio (SNR).The following table summarizes the function of each pin for HT8950A version.No. NAME FUNCTION1 OSC1 input of the oscillator2 VIB input mode selector vibrato3 TGU step input selector UP4 TGD input selector step DOWN5 ROB Input Selector mode step ROBOT6 VSS negative supply line (GND)7 NC Not connected8 A0 output internal amplifier9 AIN input of the internal amplifier10 VDD Positive Power Line11 LED LAMP Output for volume12 AUDIO Audio Output13 VREF Reference voltage internal amplifier14 TS chip test input15 FVIB control output frequency vibrato16 OSC2 output of the oscillatorIn Figure 2, the schematic diagram of the digital voice changer proven. The system is composed generally of a digital voice modulator and an audio amplifier, produced around respectively the chip IC1 (HT8950A) and IC2 (LM386I) the user's voice is grabbed by an electret microphone (MIC1) and reproduced generally or frequency offset in a dynamic speaker (SPK1). The complete assembly runs from a 9V battery (B1). After being caught by the microphone, the voice signal is employed on the internal amplifier HT8950 by way of R4 C2 network. The voltage achieve of this amplifier, that may be an open loop is normally comparable to 2000, established R3 (feedback resistor) and R4 (input resistance), being of the order of 8.3 times. Resistors R5 and R7, as well as the capacitor C4, the biasing circumstances render the electret element.An amplified and limited in bandwidth time, the injected HT8950 voice signal to the A / D bits where internal 8 is digitized at a nominal sampling rate of 8Khz. The sampling signal generator delivers a time base, in turn regulated by an oscillator. The frequency of the latter, which is about 512Khz, would depend on R2.After digitized voice signal is stored in a static RAM (SRAM), also regulated by the time base generator, a control circuit pulls info from the RAM and transferred to a latching register. From the latter, the speech signal goes to a D / A converter the 8-bit reset to its original analog form or shifted frequency spectrum. This signal can be acquired on the AUDIO output (pin 12).Depending on the speed with which the SRAM data to the D / A are supplied, the original signal is reproduced with or without offset frequency spectrum. This problem varies according to the elected step by push-button switches S2 type (UP) and S3 (DOWN). Specially, with every touch, move the speech spectrum S2 step up and S3 moves it a step down. In both situations, the series is constantly sustained, as proven in Figure 3. Once changed to its analog form, the speech signal is carried out through C3 R8-network to a LM386 (IC2) amplifier, liable for helping the speaker (SPK1) which make it audible. The resistor R6 plays the role of a pull-down of the D / A HT8950 internal current mode and trimmer R9 as master volume control system. Other equipment understand auxiliary capabilities. D1 specially controls the supply voltage to a safe value HT8950 (below 2.8V) and R1 vibrato frequency fixed at 8 Hz, an estimated. List of Materials Resistance (1 / 4W 5%) R1-100K R2-47K R3-39K R4, R5, R6-4,7K R7-470 R8-8,2K R9-5K, Trimmer, 1 lap Capacitors C1-4,7uF / 16V electrolytic C2-0,47uF (474), ceramic C3, C5-0,1uF (104), ceramic. C4, C6, C7-220uF / 16V, electrolytic. Semiconductors Zener diode D1-6,2V / 0.5W Integrated CircuitsModulator voice IC1- HT8950A IC2- LM386 audio amplifier Transducers MIC1- electret microphone, miniature SPK1- Speaker 8 / 0.25W Electromechanical S1,..., S4-push-button switches Miniature NAJ1- type connector for 9V battery snap.]]> 550 0 0 0 483 0 0 484 483 1 How To Make a Fan Speed Controller for Heatsink https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-fan-speed-controller-for-heatsink/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 06:42:15 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=553 ]]> 553 0 0 0 DC to AC Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/dc-to-ac-inverter-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 05:17:13 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=557     A relatively easy design might be noticed in the above diagram for the offered 220V DC UPS inverter circuit. Due to the IC IRS2153 from International Rectifiers which contains almost everything included inside one package for the essential execution.. Fundamentally, the IC is a qualified half bridge mosfet driver unit possessing all the essential safety limitations built-in, in order that we never must hassle concerning these while developing a customized half-bridge inverter circuit. As can be watched in the diagram, there may be rarely anything difficult, it's just about establishing the mains input and an equivalently rated battery at the other side for developing a trouble free 220V online UPS circuit which happens to be solid state in design, noiseless, and transformerless. The Rt and Ct are correctly elected for acquiring the essential 50 or 60Hz frequency for the output load. It could be performed by making use of the following formula: f = 1/1.453× Rt x Ct, where Ct will probably be in Farads, Rt in Hz, and f in Hz. L1 could be picked with some testing to ensure the square wave harmonics could be regulated to a few preferred level. The following, to prevent problem an automatic over charge cut off element is not involved, instead a trickle charge aspect is preferred charging the battery. This will likely take a pretty longer time for the battery to get charged but the problems of over charge is removed and diminished to safe levels. The 1K 10 watt resistors signifies the charging rate for the battery, optionally the battery could be charged by way of a perfect external charger circuit]]> 557 0 0 0 633 0 0 634 https://makingcircuits.com/ 633 1 IR Remote Controlled Door Lock Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/ir-remote-controlled-door-lock-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 06:09:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=561 On this page we understand more about an easy infrared based remote control door lock circuit which you can use for securely locking doors by way of unique foolproof IR frequencies.
The offered infrared remote control circuit may be used for locking your main door, gate, garage door, shop or any entrance which might prefer a simple internal locking by way of a remote control system.
The above diagram reveals an excellent IR based remote receiver design, through which the IC LM567 forms the IR frequency decoder while the IC 4017 forms the flip flop stage.
D1 is a photodiode sensor which turns the IR frequency from the IR transmitter into a respectively pulsating voltage across R2.
This pulsating voltage is imagined and identified by the pin3 of the IC LM567, if the frequency of the pulse complements with the fixed frequency of the IC it promptly sets off its output pin8 with a low logic pulse.
The IC frequency is fixed by finding R1/C1 correctly which evolves into the unique code of that certain remote control process. Any kind of value between 10 Hz to 500 kHz could be set making use of these RC timing components of the IC.
When a matching frequency is determined across R2, pin8 of the LM567 is offered with a low signal.
This generates the associated BC557 submitting a positive pulse to pin14 of the IC 4017.
Pin14 being the clock pin of the IC 4017 creates a resulting shifting high across its presented outputs, determined by the initial status either a high or a blank signal is established at the base of the linked BC547 relay driver stage.
This allows the relay to toggle over the particular position forcing the solenoid device towards a locking or an unlocking position.
C3 is particularly released that allows you to delay the result of the relay toggling, indicates that the far away transmitter might want to be pressed for a few seconds so that you can execute the above locking/unlocking processes. This is quite certain that an intruder or a hacker cannot really impact the Rx by way of a varying/sweeping frequency creating device.
The following image indicates the IR transmitter handset for the above RX unit, which evolves into the remote control handset for locking or unlocking the door.
The above Tx is an easy RC based two transistor oscillator, which might be employed as the Tx remote handset for the suggested IR door lock circuit.
The 3V is employed by way of a push button switch activating the pulses through the IR diode towards the photo diode of the above discussed Rx circuit.
In this particular Tx circuit also the R and C components ought to be suitably picked such that the transmitted frequency specifically fits with the set frequency of the Rx circuit.
The pertinent formulas could be researched in the following article
http://homemadecircuitsandschematics.blogspot.in/2015/02/infrared-remote-control-security-lock.html
After assembling the circuits the units could be certified externally to establish the relay toggling in keeping with the Tx IR frequency.
The moment this is accomplished, the Rx circuit might be aptly enclosed inside a sturdy box and incorporated with the door from the interior for the designed locking/unlocking
]]> 561 0 0 0 How To Make Battery Charging Fault Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-battery-charging-fault-indicator-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 06:07:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=564   The IC LM3915 which can be a dot/bar LED exhibit driver IC forms the main charging indicator module of the circuit. It's pin5 is the sensing input, the rising battery voltage is imagined as of this pin as well as the IC reacts to it by giving rise to a equally sequencing LED illumination across its 10 outputs, as presented with the 10 hooked up LEDs. A LM317 IC could also be noticed joined at the input of the circuit, it's wired as a persisting current generator in order that the circuit has the ability to deliver error free indications and functions irrespective of the input current level. Rx is picked well so that you can permit this appropriately. When power is activated, the 100uF/25V capacitor across the pin5 preset of the IC shortly grounds pin5 in order that all the outputs of the IC start by left switch off. This will be relevant to be sure that the TIP122 has the ability to begin the charging practice as well as the BC557 is inhibited from an accidental activate on account of the initial surge transients. Whenever the 100uF is charged up, pin5 is able to identify the actual voltage that is been applied by the battery while it's been charged, which need to be usually anywhere around 3 to 3.3V for a fully discharged 3.7V Li-ion battery. Below each LED could be set to reveal an increment of 0.42V, which means that that the illumination of the 10th LED shows 4.2V which might be realized to be the battery full charge level indication. Additionally this shows that during power ON, 7 LEDs ought to be activated to signify an appropriate battery discharge level and charging procedure. Less that 7 LEDs activated would likely reveal a badly discharged battery or a damaged battery utilizing excess current than the specified range. With all the LEDs lighting during power activated would likely indicate whether the battery is fully charged or the battery is not accepting charge and is damaged. Under standard circumstances, around 7/8 LEDs needs to be activated at power switch ON and as the battery voltage enhances on account of charging, the LEDs will probably sequence by illuminating the 8th, 9th and the 10th LED in sequence. Once the 10th LED is illuminated, a low logic is made available to the base of the TIP122 that may be now inhibited from a base bias and the charging voltage to the battery is as a result block, switching off the charging voltage to the battery. The low logic from the 10th pin is usually made available to the base of the presented BC557 which carries out and hooks up pin5 of the IC instantly to the 5V supply to make sure that the 10th LED evolves into latched as well as the scenario is locked until power is switched OFF and ON for further behavior. Find out how to the create the discussed battery negligence with indicator circuit It's the simplest part in the design. Initially do no attach any battery across the shown points. Apply an exact 4.2V at the input. Now begin adjusting the pin5 preset such that the LEDs light up in sequence as well as the 10th LED merely brighten brightly. Seal the peset once this is guaranteed. Your circuit is geared up now for the suggested battery fault conditions including charge level indications. Battery Fault indicator making use of a Flashing LED. The following replace displays a convenient design which may be employed for suggesting a battery charging malfunction by way of a flashing LED       Originally both the opamp outputs could be deemed to be low, if the battery is discharged below 11V, which is mentioned with a swift blinking of the LED. C1 ought to be set for acquiring this fast blinking. The lower opamps is focused choosing pin5 preset such that once the hooked up 12V battery touches around 12.5V, its output pin goes high, once this occurs the BC547 activates and contributes a high value capacitor C2 in parallel with C1 slowing down the flashing rate drastically and suggesting that the battery has accessed the next upper charging level including that the battery is good which explains processing the charge nicely. As the battery proceeds to get charged and gains a voltage level of around 14V, the upper opamp that may be set making use of pin3 preset to result in at this stage generates and offers a high across the hooked up LED stopping its flashing and illuminating it to solid. The moment this occurs the user may consider the battery to have reached the optimal charging level and may remove it from the charger. How the fault of the battery charging is Suggested in the above circuit 1) If the LED blink swiftly would certainly originally signify that the linked battery is over discharged, still this situation need to develop as well as the LED need to transit into a slow flashing after an hour or so relying upon the sate of the battery. If this will never take place, the battery could be deemed not taking the charge on account of internal destruction or short circuit. 2) If the LED brightens solid when power is activated would clearly suggest a defective battery which might be entirely inactive internally and struggling to accept any current. The above design tend to be enhanced for an automatic over charge cut off by way of a few modification as presented in the following diagram:     Though creating the two presets ensure that the 100K link continues shut off in the upper opamp. After creating the thresholds, the 100k link could be reconnected into position. The circuit would not cause until a battery is hooked up, so confirm the battery to be charged is first hooked up then simply power is activated. For a 3.7V battery, the 4.7V zener will have to be replaced with two.]]> 564 0 0 0 366 0 0 367 366 1 How to Make a Strong RF Discharge Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-strong-rf-discharge-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 07:21:20 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=573   Parts List R4,R5 = 100 OHMS, 1 WATT D1, D2, D3, D4 = 1N4007 C1 = 100uF/500V, SCR = BT151 TR1/TR2 = 220V/0-12V/1AMP TRANSFORMERS. Making reference to the diagram above, the begin displays a simple capacitive discharge process. The circuit made up the diodes, C1 as well as the SCR form a capacitor charge/discharge switching phase that may be powered from a improved AC making use of several mains transformers. TR1/ and TR2 transformers are paired collectively such that the low voltage TR2 winding attaches with the TR1's low voltage winding. When mains is placed on TR2 primary, the same 220V (low current) is boosted across the upper winding of TR1. This voltage is employed for charging the high voltage capacitor C1 in the circuit via a switching SCR stage that may be switched on by way of the 50Hz low voltage input from TR2 via D2. The switched C1 discharge is put on to the primary of a car ignition coil, which steps up this voltage to a staggering 40,000V or higher. This voltage is kept suspended across a thin filament position within a aptly dimensioned conical shaped aluminum radiator. When the revealed push button is pressed, the high voltage endeavors to force its path by way of the filament developing a huge arc and explosion across the points. This yields a powerful RF disturbance in the region which can be further magnified and propagated by the cone to the target which is here a small electrical bulb. If the discharge is accurately tough may possibly deliver a short lived brightness of the bulb filament then fusing on account of the released RF electricity.]]> 573 0 0 0 358 0 0 How to Make a Sinewave Inverter Circuit Using Arduino https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-sinewave-inverter-circuit-using-arduino/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 07:37:12 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=575 The article clarifies tips on how to create a very simple sinewave inverter circuit applying PWM feed from an Arduino Uno board, the content also addresses a sinewave 3 phase inverter making use of the same input from an Arduino.
According to the inquiry the first diagram below reveals a single step PWM sine wave inverter employing an Arduino feed for the PWMs.
The design seems quite effortless, the 4047 IC is set up as a totem pole astable for creating the fundamental 50 Hz or 60 Hz frequency.
This frequency forces the two power BJ transistor steps alternately at the stipulated frequency rate.
The transistors could possibly be changed to IGBTs for obtaining better performance, but mosfets needs to be eliminated since these really need specific recognition while developing the PCB, and additional buffer BJT levels to reduce heating up of the mosfets from possible hidden stray inductance or harmonics.
In the above diagram P1 and C1 establish the frequency of the astable which may be changed by suitably creating P1 employing a frequency meter for the planned inverter operating frequency.
T1 as well as the related components which stabilize a limited 9V for the IC 4047 could be removed if the elected inverter operating voltage is not over 15V, on the other hand higher voltage up to 60V may very well be tried out and is suitable for acquiring a stream-lined and a more efficient inverter design.
The PWM from the Arduino is employed across voltage divider networks over the two outputs of the IC via reverse biased diodes which make certain that simply the negative pulses of the PWMs get to know the power stages and slice their conduction correctly.
On account of these PWM cutting up consequence, the brought about current inside the transformer is usually respectively designed for acquiring the designed PWM sinewave stepped up mains voltage at the secondary of the transformer.
The PWM frequency from the Arduino ought to be set at around 200 Hz, if a automated 50 Hz totem pole can be acquired from the Arduino then the IC4047 might be totally discarded as well as the signals could be incorporated directly with R2, R3 left side ends.
3 Phase Inverter circuit making use of Arduino
The following two diagram are made to perform as a 3 phase PWM governed inverter from an Arduino.
The first diagram is wired utilizing six NOT gates from the IC 4049. This step is needed for bifurcating the Arduino PWM pulses into complementary high/low logic pairs in order that the a bridge 3 phase inverter driver IC IC IRS2330 can be produced appropriate for the fed PWMs.
The second diagram from above forms the bridge driver step for the suggested Arduino PWM, 3 phase inverter design, utilizing the IC IRS2330 bridge driver chip.
The inputs of the IC suggested as HIN and LIN embrace the dimensioned Arduino PWMs from the NOT gates and drives the output bridge network established by 6 IGBTs which usually drive the hooked up load across their three outputs.
The 1K preset is employed for handling the over current limit of the inverter by accordingly adjusting it across the shut down pin of the I, the 1 ohm sensing resistor could be diminished correctly if the current a somewhat higher current is described for the inverter.
]]> 575 0 0 0 How to Make a Digital Stop Watch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-digital-stop-watch-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 08:29:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=578   A low logic signal on the latch-enable input pin 5 (LE) of IC2 latches the count in the counter module into the on chip set output latches. In an event when switch S2 is activated, pin 5 is driven to go low and thereby the count figure is able to be saved in the latch section of the IC. Display-select pin 6 (DS) ascertains if the figure on the counter or the placed count in the latch could be revealed on the display or not. In the event that pin 6 is held low the figure in the output latch section is empowered to get presented, on the other hand if pin 6 is provided with a high logic the count stored in the counter is activated over the hooked up display. On an instance when switch S2 is changed, the base of pnp transistor T2 is attached to ground to be certain that it starts functioning. The emitter of T2 is rigged with DS pin of IC2. Therefore, the moment switch S3 is activated, reset pin 13 of IC2 is put together with negative by way of the transistor T1 ensuring that the oscillator is inhibited from developing clock pulses. This performance is carried out to put into practice a synchronization between IC1 and IC2. At the first phase, reset the module that allows you to permit the display to indicate ‘0000.’ Following disconnect switch S2 for the stop watch to cause its counting the periods. In the event you wanted to reduce the clocking of the chip, simply shut off the control S2. The provided rotary switch S1 could be preferred picking the a variety of time intervals at the output of the astable multivibrator (IC1). The design will continue to work off a 5V supply inputs. The circuit could be conveniently fitted and constructed on a general-purpose PCB. It is important to enclose the complete circuit in a metallic cabinet with slots built for four 7-segment displays, rotary switch S1, start/stop switch S2 and reset switch S3 in the dashboard plate of the picked encloser.]]> 578 0 0 0 How to make a Simple Digital Clock Circuit Explained https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-simple-digital-clock-circuit-explained/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 08:26:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=582   As could be noticed in the provided diagram the heart of the circuit is produced by the IC1 (LM8560), that may be allocated with the following outputs terminals: 1. The output for driving the display Duplex Model numbers (pin 1-14) 2. The output for creating an alarm signal at pin 16. 3. The output alternative which might be applied for handling external electrical equipment by way of an in-built automatic timer. The parts R1, C1 feature in the circuit that allows you to allow an input 50 Hz clock to pin25 of the IC. The diodes D1, D2 are situated as rectifiers to serve as signal generators to the cathode of display number for creating an alternating operating of the display illumination regarding the input of IC1. The alarm signal from pin 16 of IC1, is attached with a potentiometer P1(Volume) as well as further incorporated with pin 3 of IC2 (LM386) which designs the amplifier level for driving a loudspeaker in the course of alarm activations. The P1 is protected with the intention to supply a good tuning choice for the alarm signal volume. In addition the signal from the "sleep" pinout from pin 17 can be used for handling almost every other most wanted prompt circuit. The best way to set the time in this digital clock 1. S6 is utilized to set hours. 2. S4 is utilized to set minutes. To set the alarm time the following switches should be employed: 1. S3 to hold down the time 2. S5 to set hours for the alarm. 3. S4 to set minutes for the alarmm. The moment the previously discussed time limit by way of S4/S5 elapses, the alarm may commence ringing which might be ended by pressing switch S2 or in actual fact another switch out of the provided kinds. The following switches can be used for handling an external device from the clock activates. 1. Originally you would like to continue switch S6 pressed 2. Next press S4 to set minutes. 3. Press switch S5 to set hours. The output signal for the above discussed ON/OFF control of equipment could be gained from pin17 of the IC. Making use of time dilation alarm to repeat alarm. That allows you to make use of this feature for instance you should Repeat alarm or to lengthy for another nine minutes, you really should press switch S7.]]> 582 0 0 0 How to Make a LED Cricket Stump Circuit at home https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-led-cricket-stump-circuit-at-home/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 13:57:01 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=587   The IC1 that may be an IC 555 is designed as a monostable whereby R3 and C2 as well as R4 determines the ON time of the LEDs. An NPN transistor T1 can be watched along with pin2 trigger input of the IC, whose base is rigged with a number of reed switches in sequence. The thought is straightforward: The complete circuit really should be fitted inside each of the bails with the reed switches enclosed inside the end tubes of the bails. In addition, an everlasting magnet has to be attached at the upper ends of the stumps in order that the reed switches continue to be closed for assuming these are definitely conducted over the stumps. The figure above displays how the magnets inside the stumps really should be inserted and deployed for the bails to reply these.   As far as the bails are retained over the stumps, the reed switches continue to be closed off providing a shut OFF T1. In spite of this the occasion the bail is totally dislodged from the slots, enables the reed switches to open and activate T1 which inturn activates the monostable enlightening the LEDs for a time period as determined by R3/R4/C2. The LEDs stay turn off until these are again installed over the stumps for a repetition. That handles the bail circuitry, really effortless.... isn't that? In the above diagram you can easliy also understand LDRs being installed right at the top of the stumps just under small apertures that my be drilled on top surfaces of the stumps. These kinds of LDRs grow to be come across the ambient external light the occasion the bails are dislodged from the slots. considering that these kinds of LDrs ought to be built-in with sets of similar monostables inside the stumps, the function turns out to be liable for enlightening the LEDs linked on the stumps, hence the complete system consisting of the stumps as well as the bails grow to be synchronized delivering a simple phase of the procedures. The following circuit displays how the circuit inside the stumps really should be designed for utilizing the LED stump circuit functions.   In the diagram we can manage to observe the integration techniques of the LDRs with a 555 IC based monostable. Assuming that the bails are held over the stumps, the ambient light stay blocked from the LDRs which continues T1 shut OFF. but the while the bails are thrown of the stumps, the LDRs emerge as connected to the ambient light making it possible for T1 to acquire a biasing voltage which usually generates the monostable so that the LEDs are activated for the set time frame mounted by the applicable components. The LEDs shut of after the set time has expired until the bails are relocated over the stumps for another series. Parts List for the above discussed LED cricket stump circuit R1 = 220K R2, R4, R5 = 10k R6, R7 = 220 ohms R3 = 1M preset C1 = 0.22uF C2 = 100uF/16V C3 = 0.01uF T1 = BC547 IC1 = NE555]]> 587 0 0 0 430 http://www.nrdcentre@gmail.com 0 0 431 430 1 581 0 0 582 581 1 How to make a SG 3525 Automatic PWM Voltage Regulation Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-sg-3525-automatic-pwm-voltage-regulation-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 14:11:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=591 The section that's circled is a simple bridge rectifier with a potential divider level by using a 100k pot. It rectifies and directs a sample comments voltage from the inverter mains output to pin1 of the IC which detects this advice and consequently manages the PWM of the IC and manages it in order that the output from the inverter certainly not crosses a established limit as set by the 100k preset. pin1 is the sensing input of the IC which reacts and produces the PWMs narrower the moment the fed voltage from the 100k pot crosses a specific certain limit. Pin1 of IC SG3525/3524 actually forms one of the pinouts of the internal error amplifier opamp. The word error amplifier itself implies that the opamp is allocated to identify and examine a comments sample voltage (error signal) from the inverter output and correct the output PWM width suitably. This voltage is imagined as regards to the other pin of the IC (pin16) that could be internally fitted at a reference voltage of 5.1V. Just in case an emerging response is determined, the potential at pin1 of the IC which happens to be the sensing input of the error amplifier relatively goes higher than the other complementing pin16 of the opamp developing a high at the output of the internal error opamp. This high is employed internally to improve or slim down the PWM frequency which inturn provokes the mosfets to carry out with relatively lower current, as a result rectifying the output voltage of the inverter immediately with reference to the feedback signal. Parts list for the above presented SG 3525 inverter circuit with auto PWM voltage control feature.   ]]> 591 0 0 0 How to make a Car Interior Light Fader Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-car-interior-light-fader-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 14:25:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=594   The lamp is hooked up to the battery's positive by way of a fuse. The other end of the lamp is linked to a single-pole-3-throw switch. When finally this switch is situated at ON, the other end of the lamp gets plugged into ground i.e. the negative terminal of the battery for this reason, the lamp gets activated. In OFF place, the lamp continues to be shut off from the ground. In DOOR position, the lamp gets joined to the ground by means of door switches (in parallel). When a door is opened, the respective door switch is closed.     Making reference to the recommended car interior light fader circuit, when any of the door is opened, its switch is closed for this reason, the base of T1 gets linked with ground as well as stop executing. In this particular state, C1 gets charged swiftly with the aid of R3 and D1. Immediately after C1 is charged, the mosfet is fed with the gate voltage thru R4 and thus it commences executing and consequently the lamp is activated. Currently, when that door is closed, its switch gets open. The base of T1 gets turned off from the ground which is held at a voltage supplied by the R1/R2 voltage divider. This action switches on T1, and the voltage that come from R3 confirms it way to ground thru emitter of T1. The activating of T1 deprives C1 of its charging current and thus C1 starts off discharging steadily thru R4 and R5. The gate voltage of T2 lessens as C1 produces. With this particular decline in the gate voltage the power of the lamp is also lowered. Lastly, when the gate voltage goes below the threshold voltage the lamp switches off. The values of R5 and C1 should take care of the fading delay time of the lamp. Increasing the values increases the precious time and vice versa. T2 should be any suited N-channel mosfet suitable for controlling no less than 50V and 10A. The complete circuit is generally constructed on compact sized general purpose board and enclosed in the room lamp cover.]]> 594 0 0 0 How To Make a 6V to 220V Boost UPS Circuit for Satellite TV Modems https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-6v-to-220v-boost-ups-circuit-for-satellite-tv-modems/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 14:40:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=597   I had looked at a small back up system, I had obtained a small 6 volt 11 watt CFL Ballast circuit believing as low-cost alternate solution, but the same failed to work. Why I am looking for AC supply rather then DC? I do not desire to tamper with their system and get penalized for what ever downfalls that might come across it on account of natural span of process. Could you please guide me with an uncomplicated affordable circuit which may offer me 220 volt 20 watts power from 6 volt 5ah battery. To be specific 220 volts from 6 volt battery, as I have obtained a 6 volt 5 ah battery recently. The output wattage need is lesser than 20 watts, the adapter ratings are: Output - 16 volt 1 amp Input - 240 volt.06 amp The Design 6V to 220V Boost UPS Circuit for Satellite TV Modems Due to the fact nowadays all electronic systems work with an SMPS power supply, the input is unable necessarily needs to be an AC for generating these kinds of equipment, relatively an equivalent DC or pulsed DC also develop into beneficial and performs pretty much as good. Making reference to the diagram above, a number of segments can be viewed, the IC1 setting makes it possible for a 6V DC to be enhanced to a more significant 220V pulsed DC by way of a boost converter topology making use of the IC 555 in its astable form. The extreme left side battery section confirms an changeover from mains to battery back up every time a power failure is imagined by the circuit. The thought is quite effortless and is not going to need to have much of an elaboration. IC1 is designed as an astable oscillator, which drives T1 as well as L1 at the same frequency. T1 causes the complete battery current across L1, triggering a relatively boosted voltage to turn up across it in the course of the OFF periods of the T1 (induced back EMF from L1). L1 ought to be correctly determined such that it yields the preferred magnitude of voltage across the presented terminals. The suggested 200 turns is tentatively worked out and may require considerably tweaking for acquiring the proposed 220V from the input 6V battery source. T2 is presented for regulating the output voltage to the required safe levels, which is 220V here. Z1 needs to be as a result a 220V zener, which carries out as soon as this limit is went beyond, which leads T2 to carry out and ground pin5 of the IC, stalling the frequency at pin3 to a zero voltage. The above method continue to readjusts itself swiftly providing an ongoing 220V at the output. The adapter which may be noticed at the extreme left is commonly employed for two purposes, first making sure that IC1 performs constantly and delivers the essential 220V for the associated load no matter what the mains existence (equally as we now have in online UPS systems), so you can make certain a charging current for the battery when mains voltage occurs. The relevant TIP122 transistor is situated to create a controlled 7V DC for the battery in order to reduce over charging of the battery.]]> 597 0 0 0 How to Make a Cellphone Jammer Circuit Explored https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-cellphone-jammer-circuit-explored/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 14:59:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=600 In our above discussion, a normal VCO has a function of tuning between 790-910 MHz with a voltage tune from 0 to +6 VDC. This ends up to somewhere around 20 MHz of tune/volt. per volt. Which means, in the event you had the plans to "jam" the frequency ranges between 870-890 MHz, it may well necessaite a +1 volt peak-to-peak triangle wave with a DC offset of +4 volts. This can turned out to be a voltage signal sweeping between +4 and +5 VDC (referenced from ground), in addition to might sweep the VCO's RF output between 870-890 MHz. In spite of this,, in pretty much, the voltage-to-frequency mappings are not this simply critical.. A further essential little bit of the RF jammer sequence is the finish stage RF power amplifier. This could be viewed as a a stage which isolates a mini RF input signal, say as an example at +10 dBm (10 milliwatts), and enhances it approximately around +36 dBm (4 watts) and further. The convenient to get source of such amplifiers is from a few neglected analog cellphones itself. A number of unused old cellphones (Motorola, Nokia, Uniden, etc.) could possibly make use of a broadband RF power "hybrid" module which enables to create their construction much stress free and scales-down. These particular RF module equipment are usually wideband in relation to frequeny, and is created to easily increase RF signals lying beyond their stipulated range. reinforcing the module's RF power control bias (Vapc) or Vdd voltage could in addition draw out moreover get a lot out of these, but might additionally #blank# impact the estimated life expectancy of the power module. The RF power module could need to be attached to a substantial, and well polished heatsink and may necessiatate a cooling fan on higher power amplifiers. In an effort to carried out this project, we shall make use of a Hitachi PF0030 820-850 MHz RF power amplifier module obtained from an employed or abandoned CT-1055 Radio Shack/Nokia cellphone. Such normal appliances are installed to over 900 MHz with just a affordable reduction in gain at those upper frequency rages.. Implementing the Vdd voltage at +15 to +17 VDC could very well just a little increase the obtainable RF power output. I've pulled these to attain up to 10+ watts output under adequately layed out and fitted with a huge heatsink, however it's typically not consuming the risky scenario. Press upon keeping the optimal RF output power around 5 to 8 watts. An inexpensive amount broadband RF power hybrid boards seldom make full use of exceeding +13 dBm (20 mW) of RF input to run as designed to be.. It might be quite right being powerred staright from the VCO's RF output not desiring any extra RF pre-amplification stage. Enhancing the RF input power could possibly only tend to influence the life expectancy of the power module and likely yield a nominal stress on the output gain. The critical area of any radio strategy could possibly be the antenna. Throw favorable amount of money on the antenna part (and coaxial cable), and you will definitely minimal headaches on your way. Count on a coathanger and a handful of alligator clips and you may be looking to make contact with me an incredible number of instances a day complaining that it doesn't work. On the other hand the valuable thing is, you could possibly well look out a fairly good antenna from (possibly) junked analog cellphone. Those magnetic or trunk fitted antennas grow to be suitable the best. Glass-mount antennas or some thing like that "stick-on" are traditionally a nuisance. Directional gain (Yagi) antennas may be made an effort to enrich the jammer's working range, nevertheless for just in the area the antenna is aimed. High-gain, omni-directional antennas could be taken into consideration quite effective for many of us RF jamming implementations. For homebrew prototypes, you might consider scaling down (or up) 900 MHz band amateur radio band antennas. Below presented is the voltage-to-frequency mapping of Z-Comm V580MC04 VCO. The RF output power was around +8 dBm over the full frequency spectrum.     The following picture reveals a general idea of an old Radio Shack CT-1055 (Cat No. 17-1007A) 800 MHz band analog cellular phone. You will notice the existence of the Hitachi PF0030 RF power amplifier IC module fitted over a heatsink, and adequate heatsink compound getting used concerning the device and the heatsink. In the talked about prototype the complete IC together with the heatsink was salvaged. If you fail to happen to obtain such an alanogue cellphone circuit with you, you might purchase it brand new from the market, the pinout particulars of the same might be demonstrated below: The following concept represents an overview of the complete 800 MHz Cellular Phone Jammer unit     An alternate of the above could be experienced below:   Comprehensive circuit diagram of the above spelled out cellphone jammer:     10V regulated power supply for the above cellphone jammer stages    ]]> 600 0 0 0 How to Make a Voltage Stabilized Transformerless Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-voltage-stabilized-transformerless-power-supply-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 15:10:40 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=605 The feature of the different components employed across the a number of levels of the above presented voltage governed transformerless power supply circuit could be realized from the following points: The mains voltage is improved by the four 1N4007 diodes and filtered by the 10uF/400V capacitor. The output across the 10uF/400V now actually reaches around 330V that may be the peak improved voltage attained from the mains. The voltage divider network designed at the base of the TIP122 makes certain that this voltage is lowered to the estimated level or as essential across the power supply output. If a 12V is desirable the 10K pot could be set to accomplish this across the emitter/ground of the TIP122. The 220uF/50V capacitor makes certain that in the course of turn on the base is provided a non permanent zero voltage with the intention to make sure that it stays changed OFF and safe from the initial surge in-rush. The inductor additionally makes certain that in the course of the activate period the coil delivers a high resistance and quits any inrush current to get inside the circuit, avoiding a possible trouble for the circuit. For accomplishing a 5V or another linked stepped down voltage, a voltage regulator for instance the presented 7805 IC can be employed for attaining the same.]]> 605 0 0 0 How to Make a Light Activated Water Level Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-light-activated-water-level-controller-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 15:18:54 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=609   Providing you will discover an lack of water across the sensing zone, the LDRs go through the incident light (situated from the opposite side, inside the tank) which usually continues pin3 of the IC low, on the other hand when water begins rising and will probably cover the LDR in the path, reverts to a high at pin3 of the IC which instantaneously guides the opamp output to go high starting the relay and the pump. A hysteresis control feedback resistor across the opamps (R2/C1)) make certain that the once the scenario is imagined it keeps latched for a few certain time as well as the pump motor is in a position to drive until the water has achieved the bottom of the tank. The time for which the opamp continues latched could be dependent upon adjusting the feedback resistor hooked up between the output and the input pins of the opamp.]]> 609 0 0 0 How to build a Infrared Remote Control Security Lock Circuit for Automotive Applications https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-infrared-remote-control-security-lock-circuit-for-automotive-applications/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 15:30:12 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=613 The LM567 IC is truly one of my favorites mainly because it's too extremely versatile, and evolves into appropriate in the majority of of the critical circuit principles by way of hassle free configurations. One such critical yet effortless IR remote control receiver application can be watched in the above diagram, which stimulates simply by way of a unique established frequency as set by R1/C1 in the circuit. The above theory can be employed in automotive security programs for locking the ignition with the aid of a specifically set frequency code. In the established circuit R1/C1 establishes the latching frequency of the unit, which might be measured employing the following formula: f = 1/R1C1, which constitutes to be 100kHz for the presented values of R1, C1. Pin3 that may be the receptor pinout of the IC is designed with a IR diode for acquiring an incoming tone locked frequency set at the matching 100kHz frequency. Any time these kinds of a similar frequency is noticed at pin3 of the IC, pin8 reacts and evolves into low momentarily activating the transistor latch. The transistor and relay latch all together to accept the result and open the locked ignition for the user. Almost every other frequency which often can not coincide with the set R1/C1 value is definitely eliminated by the IC preserving the ignition properly secured and locked, therefore the system evolves into particularly dependable and protected from potential bike thieves. pin1 output from the IC could be connected with an audio amplifier and buzzer just in case an audio signal is sensed vital in the course of the remote control activation. But yet this really need the transmitter to be combined with a modulated audio signal over the carrier base frequency. A relatively easy complementing IR remote handset circuit could be noticed below: Infrared (IR) Remote Control Security Lock Transmitter Circuit   Infrared (IR) Remote Control Security Lock Transmitter Circuit It is usually an easy two transistor R/C based oscillator, whose frequency varies according to the proved R and C values and coincidentally here too the formula resembles its Rx counterpart, that could be: f = 1/RC As a result the Tx circuit frequency evolves into less difficult to determine and match with the LM567 receiver circuit talked about in the prior section. For triggering the Rx circuit, the above Tx circuit IR diode emission merely should also be concentrated on the IR receiver diode of the Rx unit. This instantaneously unlocks the Rx circuit for the designed results. The design can be employed for locking a multitude of other security devices which need to have a simple specifically coded locking functions.]]> 613 0 0 0 How to make a Proximity Detector Circuit Using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-proximity-detector-circuit-using-ic-555/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 15:39:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=615   Parts List fro the suggested IC 555 based IR proximity detector circuit. 2 IC LM 555 2 IC sockets 8 pin 1 relay 12 V 5 pin 1 Infrared Phototransistor General Purpose 1 Infrared Diode General Purpose 3 BC547 2 capacitors. 10 uF / 50 V 1 1N4148 diode 1 red led 5mm 1 68 H 1 1K5 2 10K 1 100K 1 470 R H All 1/2 W 1 10k 1/4 w resistor to be hooked up concerning 1M preset center lead and the BC547 pair]]> 615 0 0 0 How to make a Simple Music Box Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-simple-music-box-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 15:47:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=619 Bill Of Materials for the music box circuit - IC1 = IC2: 555 timer - IC3: CD4017 decade counter - Q1: TIP29 NPN bipolar transistor or the like - R1 = R2: 33K resistor - R3 = R5 = R9: 10K resistors - R4 = R7 = R10: 15K resistors - R6 = R8: 22K resistors - R11: 470 ohm resistor - C1: 10uF/25V - C2: capacitor of 10nF - D1 = D2 = D3 = D4 = D5 = D6 = D7 = D8: diode 1N4148 or equivalent - LS: Miniature speaker 8 ohms.]]> 619 0 0 0 How to make a Extended Telephone Ring Amplifier/Repeater Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-extended-telephone-ring-amplifierrepeater-circuit/ Sun, 12 Jul 2015 15:55:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=622   Telephone Ring Amplifier/Repeater extension Circuit List of components for the suggested Telephone repeater circuit - 2 transistors Q1, Q2: BC547B - One transistor: Q3: BC337 - Five diodes D1, D2, D3, D4, D5 1N4148 - One capacitor C1: 0.033uF - 1 electrolytic capacitor: C2: 1uF, 50V - Two resistors R1, R2: 100K - 1 resistor R3: 8.2K - 1 resistor: R4: 180K - 1 resistor: R5: 39K - 1 relay (relay) 12V - 1 12V loud buzzer Caution: Do not reverse the polarity of the telephone wires to the repeater.]]> 622 0 0 0 How to Make a Simple Thermostat Circuit Using Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-simple-thermostat-circuit-using-transistors/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:09:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=626   Bill Of Material for the above transistor thermostat circuit: - Resistors: R1, R4, R6: 10K, R2: 12K, R3: 6.8K, R5: 33K, R7: 470K, R8: 2.2K, R9: 560 ohms. - Potentiometer: Linear 10K. - NTC: Negative temperature coefficient 10K. - Capacitors: C1: 100nF, C2: 47uF, 10V (electrolytic capacitor). - LEDs: 1 red, 1 green - Transistors T1 and T3: 2N2222, T2: 2N2907, T4: 2N2905 - Relay: 12V DPDT.]]> 626 0 0 0 How to Make a Power Interruption Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-power-interruption-alarm-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:15:27 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=629 Power Interruption Alarm Circuit Bill Of Materials for the offered mains failure alarm circuit - 1 resistor R1 = 12K - 1 resistor R2 = 2.7K - 2 resistors: R3 = R4 = 1K - 1 NPN: BC547 - 1 470 uF/25V - Four semiconductor diodes: D1 = D2 = D3 = D4 = 1N4007 - 1 Thyristor TR1: C106Y1 (NTE5452) - One transformer 120/240 VAC to 9 VAC or more than 500 mA - 1 buzzer 6 or 9 volts - 1 PP3 9 volt battery.]]> 629 0 0 0 How to Build a Automatic Night Operated LED Lamp https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-automatic-night-operated-led-lamp/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:23:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=631 Bill of material for the talked about automatic night controlled LED lamp. - 1 PNP BC557A - One compatible phototransistor - 1 super bright white LED - 1 battery 3V coin - One 1K resistor]]> 631 0 0 0 How to Make a Parallel Battery Charger/Changeover Circuit Using SPDT Switches https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-parallel-battery-chargerchangeover-circuit-using-spdt-switches/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:32:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=633  ]]> 633 0 0 0 How to Build a Greenhouse Motorized Water Diverter and Humidity Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-greenhouse-motorized-water-diverter-and-humidity-controller-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:38:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=635 This circuit is pretty very much like the one that's described in one of the earlier content, for an extensive learn concerning the circuit info, you might think of the following post: Greenhouse temperature regulator The following design is a basic humidity sensor circuit which might be utilized for sensing and controlling greenhouse humidity levels. As might be observed in the diagram, six NOT gates are linked in parallel for getting optimum performance from the devices. The gates are all located as potential difference sensors across their input pins. The 10M resistor at first holds the inputs to a low logic level since it's associated with the ground supply of the circuit. The inputs are likewise shut down to the positive by means of an correctly etched PCB to form a closely set up copper mesh layout. Provided that the humidity level is not beyond the unwanted threshold, the NOT gates inputs remain at a low logic state ensuing a high at their outputs which keeps the relay and a associated water sprayer initiated. In spite of this, the moment the humidity level tends to cross the set high level it tends to build a low resistance across the copper mesh PCB forcing the inputs of the NOT gates to turn out to be higher in potential until it flips and inverts the individual outputs to logic low, which often switches OFF the relay and the water sprayer for the present time. The 10M resistance might be refined for setting-up the most wanted cut off humidity threshold level. The LED ON implies the toggling of the relay and vice versa.    ]]> 635 0 0 0 How to Make a Differential Temperature Detector/Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-differential-temperature-detectorcontroller-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:43:08 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=637 List of components for the above differential temperature detector circuit: - IC1: operational amplifier 741. - Q1: PNP BC557 - R1 = R2: 4.7K - R3 = R4: 1.2K - R5: 2.7K - P: 100K pot - D1 = D2 = D3: diode 1N4001 - RL1: 12V relay.]]> 637 0 0 0 How to Make a 4 LED Temperature Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-4-led-temperature-indicator-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:47:17 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=639 BOM for the proposed 4 LED temperature detector circuit - IC (integrated circuit): LM324 - Thermistor: 1 10K (R10) - Resistors: 5 5K (R2, R3, R4, R5, R6), 1 10K, 4 220 (R7, R8, R9, R11) - Diodes LED: 1 green, 1 yellow, 1 red - 1 "buzzer" Note: for the thermistor, you have to maintain the terminals long enough, to ensure that it could be terminated across the place where the temperature is in query.]]> 639 0 0 0 How to make a Set Reset Circuit using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-set-reset-circuit-using-ic-555/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:51:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=641 Note: In the description of the circuit, it is offered to be provided with 12 volts, but it surely might work well despite a voltage range from 5-15 volts. One can utilize a 9 volt battery PP3, therefore have a much handy circuit. Number of circuit components for the above described IC 555 set reset circuit - Resistors: R1 = R2 = 3.3M, R3 = 10K, R4 = 1K - Capacitors: C1 = 10nF - Transistor: BC547 - Rectifier Diode: 1N4148 or equivalent - Diode LED: 1 red - Integrated circuit: NE555 - Relay: 1 with identical voltage to the supply voltage of the circuit - Switches: 2 momentary or similar push ON contact. (SW1, SW2) - Other: battery connectors (CN3), switches (CN1, CN2). Check out the recent chart.]]> 641 0 0 0 How to Build a Logic Level Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-logic-level-indicator-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 05:55:32 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=643 Parts List for the above discussed logic tester probe circuit - 1 Integrated circuit CD4001 (4 2-input NOR gate CMOS version) - 3 LEDs (1 red, 1 green, 1 yellow - 5 resistors: 3 1K (R1, R2, R3), 1 2.2M (R5), 1 4.7M (R4) - 1no capacitor: 100 nF]]> 643 0 0 0 How to Make a Car Battery Voltage Monitor Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-car-battery-voltage-monitor-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:00:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=645 Car Battery Voltage Monitor Circuit making use of LEDs and IC LM324 Parts list for the circuit - IC1: LM324 integrated (quad opamps in a single integrated) Circuit - D1: 3.3V zener diode, 1/4 watt - D2 = D3 = D4 = D5: Diodes LED (2 red, 1 yellow or amber, 1 green) - R1 = 1K - R2.....R6: all 1K preset +12V: is the car battery whose voltage is usually to be felt]]> 645 0 0 0 How to Build a Tuned Infrared (IR) Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-tuned-infrared-ir-detector-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:06:45 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=648     Both the circuits can be employed for any application that will require a specifically tuned infrared detection for instance in IR remote control, IR security systems or IR based lock and key devices. The first circuit takes advantage of a LM567 step locked loop frequency detector chip to form the receiver circuit. R2/R3/C2 fix the latching frequency for the IC such that the circuit reacts and generates a zero logic output on detection of this frequency at its input pin3 via the photodiode. The photdiode is brought on by a 555 based astable circuit revealed at the left of the diagrams. The 555 circuit furthermore utilizes a photo diode for transferring the frequency over the acquiring LM567 photo diode device. The 555 transmitter needs to be tuned specifically to the frequency that may be set with R2/R3/C2 in the LM567 circuit. Anything else is just overlooked by the Rx circuit. In the second tuned infrared detector circuit, an LC tuned opamp is commonly employed for obtaining an replying to the specifically tuned transmitter frequency. The L1/C1 feedback loop located across the opamp output input pinouts determines the latching resonant frequency upon which it could be designed to latch on. L1/C1 could be correctly refined for accomplishing some other different tuned frequencies for carrying out the locking actions. Here too a 555 astable is employed as the IR transmitter for activating the opamp Rx circuit. On detecting a suitable frequency from the 555 Tx, the opamp reacts and generates a low logic at its output pin which might additionally built-in to an external device for the particular functions. The above circuit could be correctly designed for the suggested train ID detection, and 8 such Rx units could be laid down the tracks, and the 555 Tx units on each of the trains, such that the uniquely picked number of trains with the different Txs are found by the Rx receivers as well as the matching low logic details are deliver to the computer for advising the user relating to their occurrence.]]> 648 0 0 0 How to Make a Simple Shadow Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-simple-shadow-detector-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:13:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=650 Points to be noted: - The circuit is driven by 9 volt lead acid battery or any equivalent SMF battery. - The LDRs ought to be positioned with a separation of about 3cm. for an optimal reply in order to stay away from wrong activating. Parts list for the offered shadow detector circuit - 1 Operational amplifier: LM741 (IC1) - 2 LDRs (photoresistor / LDR) (R1, R2) - 1 NPN transistor 2N2222 or similar (Q1) - 1 1N4007 diode (D1) - 1 red LED diode (D2) - 9 volt relay (RL1) - Two 10K resistors (R3 and R4) - 1 1K resistor (R5) - 1 resistors 470 (R6) - 1 100 nF capacitor (C1)]]> 650 0 0 0 How to Build a Cyclist's Safety Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-cyclists-safety-light-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:19:42 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=652 Parts list for the talked about bicycle safety light IC1: 555 timer D1 through D12: red LEDs 5mm R1: 10K resistor R2: 100K resistor R3 to R14: 1K 1/4 watt C1: 10uF/25V]]> 652 0 0 0 105 0 0 106 105 0 123 105 1 124 106 1 How to Make a Refrigerator Door Open Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-refrigerator-door-open-alarm-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:23:30 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=655 Parts list of the refrigerator door open alarm circuit IC1 - IC2: 2 Timer 555 C1: 1uf 25V C2: 100nF R1: 10K 1 / 4W R2: LDR (photoresistor) R3: 2.2M 1 / 4W R4: 1M 1 / 4W D1:1N4148 Buzzer: Piezo type DC]]> 655 0 0 0 How to Build a LED Chaser Circuit with Slow Adjustable Fading Effect https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-led-chaser-circuit-with-slow-adjustable-fading-effect/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:27:55 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=657 The suggested chasing, fading LEd light circuit might be recognized with the aid of the above schematic along with the following explanation: The upper circuit is a regular LED chaser design consisting of a decade counter IC 4017 and a clock oscillator making use of IC 555 astable configuration. This IC 4017 yields a sequencing high logic (equal to supply voltage) across its total output pins due to the clocks at its pin14 from the IC 555. If we hook up LED instantly across the 4017 outputs and ground, the LEDs would certainly light up in a dot mode fashion from the very first pinout upto the last in a sequencing pattern similar to a chasing effect. This impact is rather common and everyone probably be ready with discover and developed such light chasers circuits very often. In spite of this according to the request the impact ought to be improved by attaching a slow transition over the LED illumination as it sequences across the whole channel. This fading transition on the sequencing LEds is predicted to yield an appealing group LED chasing impact rather than an lighted dot like look. The above interesting display could possibly be very easily executed by hooking up the LEDs to an advanced BJT delay generator circuit. This BJT circuit turns into accountable of producing the meant transition delay over the LED illumination which enables you to be demonstrated in the lower design. This stage ought to be continued across all the chosen outputs of the 4017 outputs for attaining the preferred chasing, fading slow transition over the LEDs. As looked for the rate of the above fading slow transition could possibly be managed by changing the provided pot. The circuit is essentially a basic delay timer which provides the illumination on the sequencing LEDs for a couple instances based upon the set value of the pot. The kept charge on the capacitor generates this timed delay impact on the LEDs which might be fixed as per ones own selection. The speed of the sequencing could possibly be also modified by tweaking the 555 IC 100k pot as per individual selection which this may subsequently impact the delay transition impact therefore is simply a matter of some trial and error until the most appealing set up is identified.]]> 657 0 0 0 How to Make a 0 to 99 Digital Pulse Counter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-0-to-99-digital-pulse-counter-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:32:42 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=660 0 to 99 Digital Pulse Counter Circuit Parts List for the mentioned digital counter circuit IC1: 555 IC2 = IC3 = 4026B DS1 DS2 = = 7 segment display C1 = C2 = C3: 0.047uF R1: 10K 1 / 4W R2: 1M 1 / 4W R3: 33K 1 / 4W Switches SW1 = SW2 = normally open push to ON switches]]> 660 0 0 0 452 0 0 455 452 1 How to make a Temperature Triggered DC Fan Speed Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-temperature-triggered-dc-fan-speed-controller-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:36:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=662 Parts List R1: 15K thermistor R2: 1.5K R3: 1K R4: 47 R5: 680 VR1: preset 22K C1: 100uF/25V Q1: 2N2712 (NPN) or equivalent Q2: BD140 (PNP) or equivalent D1 LED M: Motor DC brushed or brushless Note: The DC motor may be not the same as a computer motor. Ensure that the current rating of the motor is not going to surpass the rating of the transistor Q2. (maximum current 1.5 amps). It is strongly recommended not to go over 1 amp and use sink.]]> 662 0 0 0 How to Build a Temperature to Voltage Converter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-temperature-to-voltage-converter-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:40:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=664 LM334 which can be a accuracy temperature sensor chip is set up with another accuracy voltage regulator IC LM317 circuit developing a precise, linear temperature to voltage converter circuit. The gain pot and R2 might be changed and experimented for attaining the preferred temperature to voltage ratio. According to the demand, the voltage should be 0 at 25 degree C, this might be produced by establishing an atmosphere at the described temperature after which you can regulate the pot to obtain a 0V at the output. The above modification might hopefully permit the output to generate 1V increment for each and every 4.16 degree decrease in the temperature around LM334, this might also require some changing.]]> 664 0 0 0 How to Calculate Capacitor Current in Transformerless Power Supplies https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-calculating-capacitor-current-in-transformerless-power-supplies/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:44:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=666 You might have analyzed numerous transformerless power supplies within this blog and in the web, in spite of this establishing the essential mains capacitor in such circuits has constantly continued to be a problem for the many constructors.

Before we understand the formula for determining and optimizing the mains capacitor in a transformerless power supply, it might be vital that you first summarize a regular transformerless power supply design. The following diagram demonstrates a classic transformerless power supply design:  

Talking about the diagram, the a range of parts needed are designated with the following particular features: C1 is the nonopolar high voltage capacitor which can be launched for reducing the lethal mains current to the preferred restrictions according to the load requirement.

This element thus turns into highly crucial as a result of the designated mains current decreasing purpose. D1 to D4 are set up as a bridge rectifier network for correcting the stepped down AC from C1, to be able to make the output appropriate to any specific meant DC load. Z1 is placed for stabilizing the output to the necessary safe voltage limits.

C2 is set up to filter out any ripple in the DC and to produce a completely clean DC for the attached load. R2 might be optional but is advisable for treating a turn on surge from mains, even though ideally this component has to be restored with a NTC thermistor.

In the whole transformerless design mentioned above, C1 is a single significant component which should be dimensioned properly to ensure that the current output from it is optimized optimally according to the load requirement.

Choosing a high value capacitor for a comparatively lesser known load may well improve the chance of too much surge current getting into the load and damaging it sooner.

A correctly determined capacitor on the other hand guarantees a managed surge inrush and small dissipation sustaining sufficient safety for the linked load.

The significance of current that could be optimally convenient by means of a transformerless power supply for a specific load might be determined through the use of Ohm's law: I = V/R where I = current, V = Voltage, R = Resistance Nevertheless as we can notice, in the above formula R is an odd parameter since we are managing a capacitor as the current limiting member.

To be able to crack this we should instead obtain an approach which is able to translate the capacitor's current limiting value when it comes to Ohms or resistance unit, to ensure that the Ohm's law formula might be overcome.

To accomplish this we first discover the reactance of the capacitor which is often viewed as the resistance same as a resistor.

The formula for reactance is: Xc = 1/2(pi) fC where Xc = reactance, pi = 22/7 f = frequency C = capacitor value in Farads

The outcome received from the above formula is in Ohms and this can be instantly replace it with in our above Ohm's law.

Let's crack an illustration for knowing the achievement of the above formulas: Let's refer to how much current a 1uF capacitor can produce to a specific load:

We certainly have the following data in our hand: pi = 22/7 = 3.14 f = 50 Hz (mains AC frequency) and C= 1uF or 0.000001F

Solving the reactance equation making use of the above data gives: Xc = 1 / (2 x 3.14 x 50 x 0.000001) = 3184 ohms somewhere around Substituting this equivalent resistance value in our Ohm's law formula, we get: R = V/I or I = V/R

Considering V = 220V (since the capacitor is designed to assist the mains voltage.) We get: I = 220/3184 = 0.069 amps or 69 mA approximately

Likewise other capacitors might be determined for understanding their maximum current providing capacity or rating. The above conversation widely describes how a capacitor current might be determined in almost any appropriate circuit, especially in transformerless capacitive power supplies.

]]> 666 0 0 0 How to Make a Barcode Security Lock Circuit - Part2 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-barcode-security-lock-circuit-part2/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 06:55:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=670 In the design, a 4033 IC that could be a 7 segment decoder is utilized with a IC 555 clock generator for producing the unique results in a reaction to the barcode. Pin4 of the IC 555 is associated with the opamp sensor output signifying that the IC 555 is going to be active and run the IC 4033 only for the white spaces on the barcode, since the white spaces are meant to produce high logic pulses across the opamp output could keep the IC 555 pin4 reset pin started throughout these types of periods. And while the IC 555 is clocking, IC 4033 could be busy producing the BCD sequences across its output pins, and across the black lines of the barcode this series generation will remain inhibited. Now to be able to get a consistent and constant outputs from the IC 4033 for individual barcode, the barcode card must be swiped making use of a motor mechanism or a solenoid mechanism with a controlled continuous speed instead of with hand. The motor might be controlled with a set/reset mechanism such that it moves the whole barcode length before the laser/LDR assembly. The motor switch ON might initiate the opamp circuit which then begins sensing the barcode pulses to modify it into a PWM type. This PWM is immediately replied by the IC 555/4033 circuit until the complete barcode is study. The moment the reading finishes the outputs of the 4033 remain latched with a unique set of high and low outputs. These outputs could be separately set up with relay mechanisms with the intention to switch on an electrical lock, a gate, or any meant security method.   A 4 input NAND gate IC 4012 could be utilized and designed with any specific four picked unique outputs of the decoder for signaling a security relay. If 3 high outputs are picked then one of the NAND inputs could possibly be shorted to the positive supply.]]> 670 0 0 0 How to Make a Barcode Security Lock Circuit - Part1 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-barcode-security-lock-circuit-part1/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:03:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=672 When the barcode card is swiped, the laser beam is incorporated from across the black/white barcode lines with different intensities and is received/detected by the LDR through an properly drilled aperture, as might be visualized in the left diagram above. The circuit on the right displays a basic opamp comparator circuit incorporated with the LDR sensor for translating the barcode data into a in the same way varying digital signals The 10 k preset is gently set such that the opamp has the capacity to reply even to the minutest difference in light felt by the LDR. Thus the different light intensities from a swiping barcode card is instantly replied by the opamp and is transformed into a in the same way modifying rectangular waveform across its pin6. Since here we have been merely considering to utilize the decoded data to uniquely activate a appropriate lock and key arrangement, reading only the frequency and the RMS could be adequate for making use of the barcode info as a potential security locking/unlocking data. Within the next publish we are going to discover ways to create a barcode decoder circuit or signaling a relay mechanism.]]> 672 0 0 0 How to Build a Button Start Ignition Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-button-start-ignition-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:13:55 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=676 T1/T2 together with connected parts form a latch circuit and gets activated the moment P1 is pressed. The latching triggers relay#1 which can be believed to be wired with the motor and the ignition system. As offered this begins the motor and the ignition sparking. The adjacent stage comprising T5/T6 constitutes a delay ON timer which at the same time commences counting as soon as the above method is started off. C1/R7 chooses the delay ON period which can be properly set for attaining the preferred 5/6 seconds. as soon as this delay period is lapsed relay2 is turned on which can be believed to be set up with a solenoid mechanism for spraying oil over the ignition chamber. As soon as this really is actuated, the flame illuminates and illuminates an LDR which can be observed built-in with the Darlington T3/T4. T3/T4 performs as a reaction to the illumination and immediately breaks the latch and the relay1 activation. The motor and the sparking are inhibited from the supply and are immediately turned OFF. The T7 protection phase helps to ensure that in the event no flame is felt, after a few just a few seconds it generates and switches OFF the whole system. The above described automatic ignition burner mechanism could possibly be also efficiently employed for vehicle button start achievement. For a condition where the motor is needed to maintain running after the flame is observed, the above circuit might be altered as presented under:   Button Start Ignition Circuit Here, when power is turned on, T1/T2 get self-latched, the 100uF capacitor in parallel with the LDR guarantees a feedback latch voltage for sustaining the latching impact. The ignition relay also at the same time becomes turned on by means of the N/C biasing voltage of the solenoid relay. After 5/6 seconds when solenoid relay triggers, the ignition still holds on due the existence of the 470uF capacitor. The flame illumination overrides the 100uF capacitor and retains the motor operative, nevertheless the ignition relay deactivates in due course when the 470uF is fully discharged. In case the flame is not going to strike, the 100uF capacitor parallel to the LDR charges fully and breaks the latch switching OFF the motor relay, the solenoid relay along with the ignition relay.]]> 676 0 0 0 How to Make a Model Locomotive Infrared Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-model-locomotive-infrared-controller-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:18:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=678   ]]> 678 0 0 0 How to Build a Simple Industrial Delay Timer Circuits https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-simple-industrial-delay-timer-circuits/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:23:14 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=680 In this particular publish we are going to go through two ordinary externally activated timer circuits for two various application requirements.

 

Talking about the diagram above the offered solenoid timer with reed switching can be viewed set up across a single timer/counter chip 4060.
Provided that the reed switches are not activated, the pin12 of the IC remains high by means of the 1M resistor, nevertheless if one or the other of the reed switches is activated, the BJT is forced to perform and ground pin12 of the IC which often becomes reset and causes the solenoid via the TIP127 transistor, the IC now starts counting. After 30 seconds (which can be varied or customized according to individual choice by means of the 1M pot), pin3 of the IC goes high leading to the TIP127 to deactivate on its own along with the solenoid.
The positive feedback by means of diode 1N4148 to pin11 ensures that the IC gets latched within this posture until the reed switch is produced and the IC gets reset to its original state.

 


The 3/6 hour selectable timer circuit might be researched above. Once again a 4060 comes to the rescue and performs the application by including minimum variety of parts.
The IC is set up in its regular timer configuration.
The 3.3M pot together with the 0.47uF capacitors figure out the desired variable time interval across the demonstrated pinout 3 and 2.
The pin3 is placed to produce the necessary delay of 6 hours, so that pin2 enables to obtain a 50% less which is a 3 hour delay choice.
The above is properly chosen by means of a SPDT switch wired as demonstrated in the diagram.
The feedback diode guarantees a latching action which can be basically eradicated if a constant ON/OFf series is preferred by the user, forever.

]]> 680 0 0 0 How to Build a Reverse Forward Motor Timer Circuit for Incubator Mechanism https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-reverse-forward-motor-timer-circuit-for-incubator-mechanism/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:28:13 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=683 In the figure above we are able to discover a design for employing the suggested overcome forward motion of an incubator motor after a preset list of time interval. At the quick when power is turned on we certainly have the following situation: The magnetic switch for "set" might be believed to remain in a deactivated condition or compromised although the motor or the developed incubator mechanism is within its zero start position. Please be aware that if possible the "set"/"reset" switches ought to be carried out employing magnetic reed switches. With power is turned on, IC 4060 is reset by means of C2 to ensure that it is linked to it counting method from zero, and pin3 is provided a zero logic. This starting zero logic is given by means of C3 to the base of T1 which promptly performs forcing T3 and its connected relay to switch on. R7 along the way ensures T1/T3 get latched within this mode. The DPDT relay at this moment actuates at its N/O contacts beginning the motor and the mechanism towards an believed "forward" motion. As quickly the motor starts moving, the "set" button is produced such that T4 and the upper SPDT gets a chance to actuate, whereby the SPDT relay reaches a N/O position changeover providing the N/C contacts of the DPDT with a standby supply.. The motor and/or the mechanism maintains moving until it has achieved the "reset" position which in turn causes T2 to activate and break the T1/T4 latch. With T4 switched OFF, the DPDT relay transforms its position from N/O to N/C and offers an opposite (reverse) activity to the motor mechanism. The incubator motor mechanism now flips its direction and is linked to a reverse motion until it has achieved the "set" point which immediately switches OFF the base drive of T4, the SPDT switches OFF cutting power of the DPDT and the whole mechanism comes to a stand still. At the same time the IC 4060 goes on counting until it possesses one more time generated a zero logic after experiencing a high logic at its pin3. The cycle as just stated gets begun and repeats the method as described above.]]> 683 0 0 0 How to Make a 2V DC Solid State Relay (SSR) 100 Amps https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-2v-dc-solid-state-relay-ssr-100-amps/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:34:45 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=685 A clear-cut high current solid state relay or an SSR may be designed implementing a handful of mosfets and an optocoupler, as established in the digaram above. The concept appears easy to follow. In an lack of an external trigger, the lower mosfet remains turned OFF permitting the upper mosfet to perform by means of the 10k resistor linked across the positive and the gate of the mosfet. This permits the N/C contact to get effective, and a DC load linked across the supply positive and the N/C gets started in this particular circumstance and vice versa. On the other hand in the existence of an input trigger, the mosfet associated with the opto emitter receives a chance to activate, switching OFF the upper mosfet. In this circumstance a load hooked between positive and N/O points gets initiated or vice versa]]> 685 0 0 0 How to Make a Morse Code Flasher for Lighthouse Application https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-morse-code-flasher-for-lighthouse-application/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:39:22 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=687 Parts list for the morse code lamp for lighthouse application R1 = TO BE CALCULATED R2, R3, R4, R6, R7 = 1M R5 = 1K P1 = 100K PRESET C1, C2, C3 = 0.22uF C4 = 10uF/25V D1---D8 = 1N4148 T1 = 2N2222 T2 = BC557 IC1 = 4060 IC2 = 4017 The projected morse code light house lamp may perhaps be demonstrated in the above diagram. The operation can be conceived with the following points: IC1 4060 is set as a clock generator at certain predetermined rate by effectively choosing the value of R1. For utilizing the stipulated sequence rate, this certainly will be at the rate of 1/2 seconds at pin3 of the IC The IC 4017 is wired in its normal sequential decade counter mode where its output pins react with a temporary high with each clock carried out at its pin14. When the circuit is turned on, capacitors C2, C3 reset the two ICs such that IC1 starts counting from zero and a logic low at its pin3, while IC2 also does the same by keeping its first pin3 high. With pin3 high at the beginning, T1 is activated which often switches ON the lamp. After 1/2 second, pin3 of IC2 goes high, switching OFF T2, this generates no impact on pin14 as it gets grounded via R7, pin3 remains to be ON until another 1/2 second. Throughout the next low from IC1, T2 gets turned on and toggles pin14 of IC2 which causes IC2 to shift its pin3 high to pin2. Seeing that pin2 is furthermore associated with T1, the lamp happens to be ON for another 1/2 + 1/2 second after which, the sequence is shifted to pin4 of IC2 (not shown). Considering that pin4 is not linked with T1, the lamp has become turned off until another 1/2 + 1/2 second that is for complete 1 second. Throughout the succeeding next 1/2+1/2+1/2+1/2 periods, the high jumps from the previously listed pinouts to across pin7/10 turning on the lamp one more time for 2 seconds. As soon as the above valuable time is elapsed, the high is now transferred across pins1,5,6,9,11. Pins1,5,6,9 together implement a delay of 4 seconds, nevertheless since this stage will need to have a delay of 7 seconds according to the request, P1 ought to be modified such that when the high shows up at this pinout, the resetting of IC1 takes place for approximately 3 seconds which plays a role in the total of 7 seconds. After this the series is flipped back to pin3 of IC2 for repeating the course as per the above stipulated morse code rate.]]> 687 0 0 0 How to Build a Smart Solar Cellphone Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-smart-solar-cellphone-charger-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:43:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=689 Talking about the above wise solar charger circuit, the design might be split up into three basic steps: 1) The mosfet based buck converter stage. 2) The IC 555 astable stage, and 3) The opamp based solar tracker MPPT stage. The phases are created to function right here manner: The buck converter generally includes a P-channel mosfet, a swift reply diode and an inductor. This level is insured with the intention to gain the preferred amount of stepped down voltage with maximum effectiveness, considering that loss by means of heat as well as other guidelines are minimum applying a buck topology. The IC 555 stage is rigged to produce a frequency for the buck converter mosfet as well as as a continuing voltage regulator by means of its control pin5. The BJT at its pin5 grounds and shuts off the buck converter frequency each and every time it gets a base trigger signal either from the opamp tracker stage or from the feedback set across the buck converter output via the 10k preset. Visiting the opamp stage, its inputs might be observed designed in such a technique that the potential at the inverting input of the IC remains a pinch greater than its non-inverting input as a result of the existence of the three 1N4148 reducing diodes. The 10k preset is modified such that at peak voltage the sample solar voltage at pin2 is kept just below the supply voltage at pin7, this really is important since the input feed ought not to be greater than the supply voltage of the IC as per the normal guidelines and specifications of the IC. In the above circumstance, the output pin6 of the opamp is held at zero potential on account of the shade lower potential of pin3 than pin2. Under optimal load situations, when the load voltage spec is on par with the solar panel voltage rating, the panel immediately operates with maximum effectiveness and the opamp tracker remains dormant, in spite of this in the event an unmatched or incompatible overload load is felt, the panel voltage is likely to get pulled down with the load voltage level. The problem is tracked at pin2 which also views a proportionate voltage drop, but the potential at pin3 remains solid and unmoved as a result of the existence of the 10uF capacitor, until the moment when the pin2 potential tends to go below the 3 diode drop set across pin3. Pin3 now starts seeing a rising potential than pin2, which swiftly offers a high at pin6 of the IC. The above high at pin6 delivers a trigger at the base of the BC547 transistor placed across pin5 of the IC555. This causes the astable to shut off itself and the buck output, which often offers the load ineffective restoring normalcy across the panel and the opamp tracker stage...the cycle maintains switching quickly, guaranteeing an optimized voltage for the load in addition to an optimized load for the panel so that its voltage by no means falls below its critical "knee" zone. The inductor of the converter stage might be developed making use of 22 SWG magnet wire, with around 20 turns over any appropriate ferrite core. The 10k preset can be utilized for changing the buck voltage to the needed levels as per the load requirements. How to Establish the Circuit Once built, the above described smart solar charger might be set with the following methods: 1) Usually do not hook up any load at the output. 2) Utilize an external DC (very low current) across the input of the circuit where the panel is meant to be attached in. This DC ought to be at a level around equivalent to the chosen panel peak voltage features. 3) Change the 10k preset of the opamp such that the potential at pin2 turns into somewhat less than the potential at pin7 of the IC. 4) Subsequent, change the other 10k preset such that the output from the buck converter generates a voltage just equal to the meant load voltage rating. If its a cell phone that should be charged, the voltage might be set to 5V, for a Li-ion cell it might be set to 4.2V and so on. 4) Lastly hook up a dummy load which can possess working voltage rating much lower than the input DC but higher current rating than the input DC....and verify the overall reply from the circuit. The circuit must generate the following outcomes: With the pin6 feed associated with pin5 BJT of the IC 555 the DC should never display a drop of more than 2V than its real magnitude. Which means if the input DC is 15V, along with the load is 6V, the drop across the input DC might be observed not going above below 13V. Conversely with pin6 turned off this should decrease and align in keeping with the load voltage, that is definitely if the DC is 15V and the load is 6V, the input DC might be observed reducing at 6V. The above outcomes would certainly verify a proper and an optimal working of the offered smart solar cell phone charger circuit. The phases has to be developed, analyzed, established step-wise, and then built-in with each other]]> 689 0 0 0 How to Charge a Cellphone battery with a Laptop Battery https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-charge-a-cellphone-battery-with-a-laptop-battery/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:53:14 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=692 The demonstrated LED will close of when the 3.7V cell is nearly fully charged. Caution: Turn off the power to the 3.7V cell the moment the red LED starts shutting off, with the intention to stop the cell from over charging and harm. For providing better safety you really should set the output voltage to 3.9V, even though this may indicate the cell obtaining charged only upto 80% and not upto the optimal point.]]> 692 0 0 0 How to Build a Remote Controlled Night Lamp Circuit with Timer https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-remote-controlled-night-lamp-circuit-with-timer/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 07:56:46 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=694 The offered remote night lamp timer circuit might be visualized in the above diagram and learned about with the following points: The IR sensor TSOP1738 replies to an incoming IR signal from an appropriate IR handset for example a TV remote or similar, and generates a logic low at its pin labelled as "out". The recommended Tx signal could possibly be temporary, most likely for a fraction of a second for beginning the activating result in the circuit. The above activity immediately charges the 100uF as well as switches ON the BC557. This in the same way turns on the BC547 and the LED. The kept charge maintains the turned on position for a particular time period established by means of the chosen values of the 100uF capacitor and the 1M resistor. These types of might be changed, experimented for getting any preferred time delay for the LED illumination period. The 100uF gradually commences discharging via the 1M resistor and the base/emitter of the BC557 until it gets to be too low for the transistors to hold the conduction, the LED accordingly is furthermore switched OFF as soon the RC figured out time is elapsed. The 1K and the 1N4148 diode guarantees a total discharge of the timing capacitor 100uF whenever the LED is turned OFF, to ensure that the new cycle has the capacity to start with a properly discharged capacitor, for performing constant time delays, with minimum errors.]]> 694 0 0 0 How to Make a 3 Phase Signal Generator Using Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-3-phase-signal-generator-using-transistors/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 08:01:40 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=696   Talking about the schematic above we are able to notice three identical transistor stages set up in a cross combined manner, owning parallel RC timing constants across their bases. The 10k resistor along with the 1u capacitor fundamentally turn out to be accountable of offering the needed delay impact for producing the meant 3 phase signals with 120 degree phase shift. When ever power is turned on, the phases may look like to go through a locked sequence, nevertheless considering that all the capacitors are not able to have a exactly same value, the one which has a shade lower value than the other charges up first, initiating a sequential conduction across the transistor. Let's believe that on account of inconsistency in values, the middle transistor base capacitor becomes charged first, this permits the middle transistor to perform first which often grounds the base of the extreme right transistor avoiding it from carrying out for that immediate situation, but at the same time the base capacitor of the left or the right transistor also gets charged in conjunction which forces the middle transistor to turn off and release the right transistor conduction. The above mutual push and pull process encourages and settles into a constant sequential train of conduction across the transistors provoking the meant three phase signal pattern to become across the collectors of the transistors. Because of the constant charge and discharge design of the caapcitrs, the subsequent signal shape is a pure sine wave. The 2K2 resistor demonstrated in yellow strangely turns into critical in beginning the 3 phase signal generation series, without which the circuit appears to stall suddenly. As I have said before the degree of stage might be modified by altering the RC values across the bases of the transistors, here it's set up to generate a 120 degree phase shift.]]> 696 0 0 0 How to Make a Water Softener Circuit Explained https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-water-softener-circuit-explained/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 08:11:15 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=698 In the above water softener circuit we are able to understand a small tank or metallic container utilized as an advanced water storage area by which the hard water is permitted to pass. This container consists of a ferromagnetic material for example iron. This iron container is related to a unique electromagnetic arrangement comprise of a U shaped iron device set up with a few long lasting magnets and number of wound inductors as demonstrated in the image above. This electromagnetic device relies upon parallel path concept for taking out a re-designed significance of magnetic field from handful of current input and in an oscillating manner.   The precise detail of the electromagnet might be observed in the above image, and the whole process studies in this post The coils or the demonstrated inductors are associated with an alternating frequency generator circuit which can be executed employing any appropriate oscillator design such a IC 555 or an transistor AMV circuit. The inductor winding data is not essential, any thin super enameled wire might utilized, around 500 turns on each side will be enough. The tank being a ferromagnetic material receives totally magnetized producing a strong effects on the water content. The calcium content which can be in the hard water get considerably affected and commence attaching among themselves. The process permits the unnecessary calcium to clog on the tank walls along with the soft clean water is permitted to go through outlet across the other end of the container.]]> 698 0 0 0 How to Build a 3 Phase VFD Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-3-phase-vfd-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 08:17:28 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=700 3 Phase Adjustable Frequency Drive Circuit I have already integrated and described the working of the above PWM generator phase which happens to be essentially manufactured for producing a various PWM output across pin3 of IC2 as a reaction to the potential utilized at pin5 of the same IC. The 1K preset demonstrated in the diagram is the RMS control knob, which might be properly modified for obtaining the preferred proportionate quantity of output voltage by means of PWMs at pin3 of IC2 for furthermore working. This really is set to generate a respective output which might be comparable to the mains 220V or 120V AC RMS. The subsequent diagram below reflects a single chip H-bridge 3 phase driver circuit implementing the IC IRS2330. The design appears simple since many of the difficulties are taken care of by the chips in-built advanced circuitry. A competently determined 3 phase signal is used across the HIN1/2/3 and LIN1/2/3 inputs of the IC by means of a 3 phase signal generator stage. These inputs of the IC may also be observed built-in with the above PWM output for the essential voltage regulation across the IGBTs or mosfets associated with the 3 phase motor. This regulation will undoubtedly assist the motor to acquire the preferred speed as per the settings (via the1k preset in the first diagram).   VFD bridge Circuit Below diagram we imagine the needed 3 phase signal generator circuit. VFD 3 phase frequency geneartor Circuit The 3 phase generator is designed around several CMOS chips CD4035 and CD4009 which produces precisely dimensioned 3 phase signals across the demonstrated pinouts. The frequency of the 3 phase signals varies according to the given input clocks which must be 6 times the meant 3 phase signal. Which means, if the preferred 3 phase frequency is 50 Hz, the input clock ought to be 50 x 6 = 300 Hz. Moreover it suggests that the above clocks could possibly be diversified with the intention to vary the useful frequency of the driver IC that might could well be accountable of differing the motor operational frequency. Nevertheless considering that the above frequency modification must be automatic as a reaction to the different voltage, a voltage to frequency converter turns into important. The subsequent stage talks about a basic precise voltage to frequency converter circuit for the essential execution.   voltage controlled oscillator circuit In the above voltage to frequency converter circuit a IC 4060 is utilized and its frequency dependent resistance is affected by means of a LED/LDR assembly for the meant conversions. The LED/LDR assembly is sealed inside a light proof box, and the LDR is located across a 1M frequency dependent resistor of the IC. Considering that the LDR/LDR reaction is rather linear, the different illumination of the LED on the LDR produces a consequently differing (rising or reducing) frequency across pin3 of the IC. The FSD or the V/Hz range of the stage could possibly be set by properly establishing the 1M resistor or perhaps the C1 value. The LED is voltage is produced and illuminated with the aid of the PWMs from the first PWM circuit stage. It suggests that as the PWMs differ, the LED illumination may even vary which usually would certainly give rise to a consequently increasing or decreasing frequency at pin3 of the IC 4060 in the above diagram. This differing frequency from the IC 4060 currently basically ought to be built-in with the 3 phase generator IC CD4035 clock input. The above stages form the main components to create a 3 phase VFD circuit. Currently, it might be crucial that you talk about relating to the DC BUS essential for providing the IGBT motor controllers and the establishing processes for the whole design. The DC BUS utilized across the IGBT H-bridge rails might be acquired by rectifying the offered 3 phase mains input utilizing the following circuit configuration. The IGBT DC BUS rails are linked across the points mentioned as "load" 3 phase DC rectifier circuit   3 phase DC rectifier circuit For a single phase source the rectification might be used utilizing regular 4 diode bridge network configuration. Tips on how to Establish the suggested 3 phase VFD circuit It might be carried out according to the following directions: After making use of the DC bus voltage across the IGBTs (without the motor attached) regulate the PWM 1k preset until the voltage across the rails turn out to be equivalent to the meant motor voltage features. Subsequent regulate the IC 4060 1M preset to be able to adjust any of IC IRS2330 inputs to the needed proper frequency level according to the presented motor requirements. After the above processes are finished, the stipulated motor might be linked and supplied with various voltage levels, V/Hz parameter and established for an automatic V/Hz procedures over the attached motor.]]> 700 0 0 0 619 0 0 620 https://makingcircuits.com/ 619 1 How to Build a Pedal Speed Controller Circuit for Electric Vehicles Part-1 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-pedal-speed-controller-circuit-for-electric-vehicles-part-1/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:06:25 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=702 In the electromechanical set up demonstrated in the figure above you can easily observe the following incorporated components: A small gear associated with a screw mechanism. The head of the screw obtaining a white mat reflector surface A LED/LDR assembly placed in front of the screw head. How the Suggested mechanism functions. The gear demonstrated in the above figure is usually to be locked with a different gear having a ratio which might be 10 times more than this gear. The bigger gear really should be set up with the pedal mechanism such that it is linked to a rotational activity in accordance with the pressing of the pedal. The rotational result from the gears will subsequently generate a forward motion of the screw head across the chamber where the LED/LDR assembly is situated. The method may cause a correspondingly varying amount of shown light from the LED to be obtained by the LDR. This varying data (by means of a varying resistance) in accordance with the pedal depression may be then provided to a signal processor circuit for enforcing the meant speed control of the specific vehicle. Within the next submit we are going to understand the signal processor stage making use of PWM method.]]> 702 0 0 0 How to Build a Pedal Speed Controller Circuit for Electric Vehicles Part-2 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-pedal-speed-controller-circuit-for-electric-vehicles-part-2/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:11:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=704 Making reference to the above circuit diagram we are able to determine the circuit operation with the aid of the following points: IC1 is set up as a 80Hz pulse generator owning highest ON time and minimum OFF time as its duty cycle IC2 is rigged as a comparator which first transforms the above 80Hz pulse utilized at its pin2 with triangle waves produced at its pin6 and compare the triangle waves with the modulating voltage offered at its pin5. The pin5 modulating voltage is resulting from a BJT BC547 emitter that may be designed as an accepted collector with its base associated with the LDR inputs accomplished from the pedal behavior. The varying resistances as a reaction to the pedal pressing is in a different way to the 100K preset setting and a proportionate magnitude of voltage is produced at the base of the transistor which changes the low current input into the same high current signal over pin5 of IC2. This immediate potential level is approved and prepared by IC2 producing proportionate magnitude of PWM signals for the mosfet and the linked motor. The motor speed is thus managed and varied according to the fluctuating PWMs in keeping with the pedal pressings of the vehicle. The above methods successfully convert the pedal actions into a managed procedures of the vehicle motor and its speed. The best way to Establish the Circuit. It's very simple. Press the pedal to its maximum point such that the screw head touches to the closest possible position in front of the LED/LDR assembly. Next adjust the 100k preset until pin3 of the IC2 begins producing PWMs with maximum width, this might be established by assessing the voltage at pin3 to be as close as possible to the supply voltage of the circuit, that is 5V. As soon as this is achieved, the establishing process could possibly be believed to be finalized. The outcomes could possibly be now confirmed by pressing the pedal at different levels and checking the motor speed vary in an equivalent manner.]]> 704 0 0 0 How to Make a High Current Transformerless Power Supply Using Dimmer Switch https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-high-current-transformerless-power-supply-using-dimmer-switch/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:16:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=706 A pleasant illustration might be observed in the above diagram exactly where a dimmer switch could be noticed wired with a capacitive transformerless power supply circuit for operational a high current load for example a string of high watt LEDs. As could be spotted the capacitor employed is a 4uF high value capacitor which can be scored to offer as much as 350mA of current when managed in its max effectiveness only provided that the load does not need to shunt or short the power. The dimmer switch enables the whole high current to go through the capacitor but blocks the voltage by chopping the AC stage into determined sections. The above function guarantees a full 350 mA to achieve the load yet reduce the harmful high voltage from the capacitor to the load to be able to stop the load from damage or over heating....the process confirms a perfect effective procedure of the offered high current transformerless power supply circuit.]]> 706 0 0 0 How to Make a Transcutaneous Nerve Stimulator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-transcutaneous-nerve-stimulator-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:24:58 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=709 Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulator (TENS) - schematic A basic Transcutaneous Nerve Stimulator Circuit could be observed in the above figure, making use of the work horse IC 555 set up in its regular astable mode P1 is utilized for creating a number of ranges of frequency outputs along with a variations in the pulse widths of the output frequency for the developing the above described TENs methods T1 is employed for generating TENs at the level of the supply voltage for obtaining highest performance. The transformer might be any specific normal radio output audio transformer or created by winding 10:100 turns 36 SWG super enameled wire on a small EE ferrite core. The output of the transformer could possibly be organized in the form tiny protruding copper prods, not too sharp but adequate enough for producing a slight digging effect on the skin and might be wrapped on the impacted area with certain appropriate cohesive band]]> 709 0 0 0 How to Build a Boost Charger Circuit for Super Capacitors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/boost-charger-circuit-for-super-capacitors/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:31:08 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=711 The offered boost charger circuit for charging super capacitor banks might be observed in the above figure. The total circuit can be viewed wired around the ubiquitous IC 555, set up as a high frequency astable. High frequency is needed in an effort to generate a compact ferrite coil which turns into to blame for generating the needed stimulated voltage. The fairly low current output from the IC is heightened utilizing T1 which switches the linked ferrite inductor at the rate of the given astable frequency. The above steps encourages a determined boosted voltage across the coil which happens to be correctly improved making use of the connected BA159 quick recovery diode. The subsequent voltage at the cathode of the diode is provided to the connected super capacitors for the meant charging of the devices. A opinions loop may be seen from the output to the base of T2 which guarantees a completely maintained voltage for the super capacitors....in case the voltage is likely to rise above the specific fixed value, Z1 receives forward biased and switches ON T2 which often grounds pin5 of the IC choking the pulse width of the pin3 frequency. This process immediately decreases the output to the safe limits and the cycle maintains switching making sure the voltage constantly remains within the arranged thresholds.]]> 711 0 0 0 319 0 0 338 319 1 How to Build a Self Optimizing Solar PWM Charger Circuit with Buck Converter https://makingcircuits.com/blog/self-optimizing-solar-pwm-charger-circuit-with-buck-converter/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:37:19 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=713 Note: Make sure you hook up a 1K resistor across pin5 and ground of IC2 for proper working of the circuit. The offered solar PWM buck charger circuit could be grasped with the aid of the following reason: The circuit includes three simple phases viz: the PWM solar voltage optimizer utilizing handful of IC 555s in the the form of IC1 and IC2, the mosfet PWM current amplifier and the buck converter employing L1 along with the relevant parts. IC1 is rigged to generate a frequency of around 80 Hz while IC2 is set up as a comparator and PWM generator. The 80 Hz from IC 1 is given to pin2 of IC2 which makes use of this frequency for producing triangle waves across C1.... which can be even more compared to the immediate potentials at its pin5 for dimensioning the proper PWMs at its pin3. The pin5 potential as might be observed in the diagram, is resulting from the solar panel by means of a potential divider level and a BJT common collector stgae. The preset located using this potential divider is originally properly modified such that at the peak solar panel voltage the output from the buck converter generates the optimal magnitude of voltage suiting the attached battery's charging level. As soon as the above is placed remaining is managed instantly by the IC1/IC2 stage. In the course of peak sunlight the PWMs get correctly hardened being sure minimum stress on the solar panel yet creating the right optimal voltage for the battery as a result of the existence of the buck converter phase (a buck boost type of design is easily the most effective procedure for lowering a voltage source without disturbing the source parameters) Right now, as the sun light starts reducing the voltage across the set potential divider also commences to drop consequently which can be found at pin5 of IC2....on detecting this constant deterioration of the sample voltage IC2 sets out broadening the PWMs in order that the buck output has the capacity to sustain the necessary optimal battery charging voltage, this means that the battery goes on to obtain the correct amount of power irrespective of the sun's retarding illumination. L1 ought to be dimensioned correctly such that it yields the estimate maximum voltage level for the battery when the solar panel is at its peak requirement or put simply when the sunlight is in the best possible position for the solar panel. RX is launched for figuring out and limiting the highest charging current limit for the battery, it might be determined by making use of the following formula: Rx = 0.7 x 10 / Battery AH The way to establish the circuit. Presume a 24 V peak solar panel is chosen for charging a 12 V battery, the circuit could be set as directed below: In the beginning do not hook up any battery at the output Hook up 24 V from an external C/DC adapter across the points where the solar panel input will have to be provided. Hook up a 12 V for the IC1/IC2 circuit from another AC/DC adapter. Regulate the potential divider 10k preset until a potential of around 11.8 V is accomplished at pin5 of IC2. Subsequent, by way of a few trial error tweak and boost the variety of turns of L1 until a 14.5 V is calculated across the output where the battery ought to be linked. That's all! the circuit is currently set and prepared to be utilized with the meant solar panel for obtaining an optimized highly economical PWM buck based charging methods. In the above design I have attempted to put into practice and remove an oppositely different voltage and current output from the the circuit with regards to the sunlight, in spite of this a deeper investigation made me understand that really it should not be replying oppositely somewhat corresponding to the sun light. Simply because in MPpT we want to draw out maximum power throughout the peak hour while also to be certain that the load fails to hog the panel and its effectiveness. The following amended diagram now can make a much better sense, let's seek to examine the design immediately: In the above updated design I have produced the following vital change:   I have added a NPN inverter at pin3 of IC 2 to ensure that now the PWMs from IC 2 has an effect on the mosfet to take out maximum power from the panel and decreases the power slowly as the sun light decreases. The PWM pulses together with the buck converter ensures a perfect compatibility and maximum power extraction from the panel, but reduces steadily in accordance with the sun's reducing strength. In spite of this, the above set up guarantees about one significant element, it guarantees a balanced input/output power ratio which happens to be consistently a key issue in MPPT chargers. Even more in the event the load attempts to draw out an incredible amount of current, the BC557 current limiter instantly arrives into action avoiding the disturbances of the smooth performing of the MPPT by cutting off power to the load in the course of those periods.]]> 713 0 0 0 How to Build a Heart Rate Monitor, Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-heart-rate-monitor-alarm-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:43:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=715 Heart Rate Monitor, Alarm Circuit Talking about the diagrams above, you can easily observe a few circuit stages, the first being the heart rate sensor/processor with an built-in frequency multiplier, while the second by means of an integrator, comparator. The upper signal processor design continues to be widely described in the prior submit, the further voltage multiplier that is certainly been incorporated to the processor utilizes the IC 4060 for boosting the comparatively less quickly heart rates into a consequently differing high frequency rate. The above correspondingly changing high frequency heart pulse rate from pin7 of IC 4060 is given to the input of an integrator whose task is to transfer the digitally varying frequency into a equally varying exponential analogue signal. Lastly this analogue voltage is placed on the non inverting input of a Ic 741 comparator. The comparator is set by means of the connected 10k preset such that the voltage level at pin3 remains just below the reference voltage at pin2 when the heart rate is in the vicinity of the secure region. In spite of this if the heart rate is likely to boost over the crucial region, a correspondingly higher voltage level is produced at pin3 which exceeds the pin2 reference level triggering the output of the opamp to go high and sound the alarm. The above set up only displays and alarms concerning the higher important heart rate, to be able to attain a two way checking, which means to get an alarm for both higher and lower crucial heart rates...the second circuit consisting the IC555 and IC741 might be completely removed and restored with a regular IC LM567 circuit set to maintain its output low at the protected pulse rate, and go high at the up or down critical rates.]]> 715 0 0 0 How to Make a Heart Rate Sensor with Processor Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/heart-rate-sensor-with-processor-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:48:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=718 Tips on how to Begin the Heart rate sensor circuit Starting the suggested heart rate sensor, processor is in fact very simple. Of course we all will realize that the difference between the oxygenated blood and de-oxygenated blood might be barely distinguishable and need significant accuracy in all values to be able to permit the processor to judge the subtle differences within the blood stream and yet have the ability to change into a swinging voltage change at the output. To be able to make sure a completely optimized IR beams from the IR Tx diode, the current by means of thus making it confined to a well determined proportion such that the oxygenated blood provides a comparatively higher resistance for the rays to go through however permits fairly lower amount of resistance for the rays during the deoxygenated state of the blood making it simpler for the opamp to distinguish between the beating heart pulses. This is just performed by modifying the presented 470 ohm preset. Maintain your index finger tip over the D1/D2 pair, turn on power and keep modifying the preset until the LED at the output starts to develop an individual flashing impact. Seal of the preset once this is accomplished. Positioning arrangement of the index finger over the enclosed photo diodes It might be performed by soldering the diodes over the PCB at certain measured distance apart that evolves into just good for the index finger tip to cover the radiating tips of diodes totally. For an optimal reply the diodes needs to be enclosed inside an appropriately sized opaque plastic pipes, as demonstrated in the following figure: Heart Rate infrared circuit In the next submit we'll understand a basic heart rate monitor and alarm circuit specially created for the elderly citizens for keeping a track of their heart critical rate.]]> 718 0 0 0 How to Build a ESR Meter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/esr-meter-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 14:52:10 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=720 The circuit might be recognized in the following way: TR1 together with the connected NPN transistor forms a basic feed back activated obstructing oscillator which oscillates at some quite high frequency. The oscillations stimulate a proportionate magnitude of voltage across the 5 turns secondary of the transformer, and this caused high frequency voltage is employed across the capacitor in question. An opamp may also be observed related to the above low voltage high frequency feed and is configured as a current amplifier. Without any ESR or in the event of a new good capacitor the meter is placed to reveal a full scale deflection showing a minimum ESR across the capacitor which consequently arrives down toward zero for different capacitors owning different amounts of ESR levels. Lower ESR leads to comparatively higher current to create across the inverting sensing input of the opamp which can be in the same way exhibited in the meter with a higher degree of deflection and vice versa. The upper BC547 transistor is released as an ordinary collector voltage regulator stage in an effort to function the oscillator stage with a lower 1.5 V to ensure that the other electronic device in the circuit board around the capacitor under test is stored under zero stress from the test frequency from the ESR meter. The calibration process of the meter is simple. Maintaining the test leads shorted collectively the 100k preset near the uA meter is modified until a full scale deflection is accomplished on the meter dial. After this, various capacitors with high ESR values might be proved in the meter with respectively lower degrees of deflection as discussed in the earlier section of this post. The transformer is made over any specific ferrite ring, by using any thin magnet wire with the demonstrated number of turns.]]> 720 0 0 0 How to Build a 3 Phase Brushless (BLDC) Motor Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/3-phase-brushless-bldc-motor-driver-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:00:14 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=722   The above demonstrates the pinout diagram of the IC IRS2330 which basically ought to be linked to a couple of a couple of external elements for applying the offered BLDC controller circuit.   3 Phase BLDC Motor Driver Circuit In the above diagram we experience the procedure for attaching the IC pinouts with some external features wherein the appropriate hand side IGBT stage displays a standard H bridge configuration utilizing 6 IGBTs built-in with the suitable pinouts of the IC. The above integration concludes the output power stage for the BLDC controller circuit, the "load" implies the BLDC 3 phase electromagnet coils, now its pertaining to configuring the inputs HIN1/2/3 and LIN1/2/3 of the IC with the pertinent hall sensor outputs. BLDC Hall impact buffer stage Before applying the hall sensor causes to the driver IC inputs, it's needed to be buffered by means of several NOT gates as presented in the diagram above. Finally, the outputs of the NOT gates is incorporated properly with the inputs of the IC IRS2330. The negatives of all the hall sensors might be thought to be grounded. The second circuit which forms the main driver configuration is likely to be also observed owning a current sensing stage across its lower left section. The resistive divider could be correctly dimensioned for allowing an over current protection and control over the linked BLDC motor. For obtaining complete information relating to the current sensing configuration and other complexities of the entire design, it is easy to seek advice from the following datasheet of the IC: http://www.irf.com/product-info/datasheets/data/irs2330pbf.pdf]]> 722 0 0 0 720 http://www.O97LSSC.org ... [Trackback] [...] Find More Informations here: makingcircuits.com/blog/3-phase-brushless-bldc-motor-driver-circuit/ [...]]]> 0 0 How to Make a Optimizing Grid and Solar Electricity in Parallel with an Inverter https://makingcircuits.com/blog/optimizing-grid-and-solar-electricity-in-parallel-with-an-inverter/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:04:14 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=724 Talking about the above grid, solar panel optimizer circuit, we are able to notice two basic identical stages making use of two opamps. The two stages are precisely identical and form two parallel linked zero drop solar charge controller stages. The upper stage1 contains a continuing present function as a result of the existence of the BJT BC547 and Rx. Rx might be chosen implementing the following formula: 0.7x10/Battery AH The above aspect guarantees a proper charging rate for the attached battery. The lower solar charge controller is without a current controller and feeds the inverter (GTI) instantly by means of a series diode, the battery also attaches with the inverter by way of another individual series diode. Both the solar charge controller circuits are created to produce the maximum fixed charging voltage for the battery along with the inverter. Provided that the solar panel has the capacity to obtain peak sun light it overrides the battery voltage and permits the inverter to make use of current instantly from the panel. The methods also enables the battery to get charged from the upper solar charge controller stage. On the other hand as the sun light commences depleting the battery overrides the solar panel input and provides the inverter with its power for carrying out the operations. The inverter is a GTI which is fixed with the grid mains and contributes in sync with the grid. Provided that the grid is more effective the GTI is permitted to be inactive which correspondingly avoids the battery from obtaining drained, in spite of this in the event that the grid voltage falls and turns into inadequate for powering the associated appliances, the GTI takes over and commences satisfying the deficiency by means of the conneced battery power. Components list for the above solar, grid optimizer circuit R1 = 10 ohms R2 = 100k R3/R4 = see text Z1,Z2 = 4.7V zener C1 = 100uF/25V C2 = 0.22uF D1 = high amp diodes D2 = 1N4148 T1 = BC547 IC1 = IC 741 R3/R4 needs to be picked such that its junction geneartes a volatge which might be just more than the set refernce at pin2 of IC1 when the input supply is simply over the optimal charging level of rthe hooked up battery. For instance guess the charging voltage is 14.3V, then at this voltage R3/R4 junction ought to be simply greater than pin2 of the IC which may 4.7V on account of the provided zener value. The above needs to be set utilizing an aritificial 14.3 V external supply, the level could be modified correctly as per the preferred battery voltage]]> 724 0 0 0 How to Build a Brushless (BLDC) Motor Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/brushless-bldc-motor-controller-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:09:55 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=726 The image above demonstrates a fundamental BLDC motor arrangement owning two sets of permanent magnets across the periphery of an external rotor and two sets of central electromagnet (A,B,C,D) as the stator. To be able to start and maintain a rotational torque often A, B or C, D electromagnets ought to be in an triggered state (never together) relying upon the positions of the north/South poles of the rotor magnet with regards to the started electromagnets. To be accurate, let's believe the situation demonstrated in the above situation with A and B in a turned on state such that side A is energized with South pole while side B energized with North Pole. This could certainly imply that the side A could be exerting a pulling impact over its left blue North pole and a repelling impact on its right side south pole of the stator, in the same way the side B could well be drawing the lower red south pole and repelling the upper north pole of the rotor....the whole method could possibly be then believed to be exerting a remarkable clockwise motion over the rotor mechanism. Let's also believe that in the above circumstance the Hall sensor is in a deactivated condition since it might be a "south pole activated" Hall sensor device. The above impact would certainly attempt to align and force the rotor such that the south locks on face to face with side B while the north pole with side A, nevertheless before this circumstance has the capacity to transpire the Hall sensor is introduced in a close proximity to the shifting upper south pole of the rotor, and when this just transits across the Hall sensor it is forced to turn on, delivering a positive signal to the hooked up control circuit which immediately replies and switches OFF electromagnets A/B, and switches ON electromagnets C/D, making certain that the clockwise moment of the rotor is one more time enforced sustaining a regular rotational torque on the rotor. The above described switching of the electromagnets as a reaction to the Hall sensor activating signal can be very simply executed implementing the following uncomplicated BLDC control circuit idea.   The circuit is not going to require much of an explanation since its too simple, in the course of the activate circumstances of the Hall sensor, the BC547 and the coupled TIP122 is in the same manner activated which often turns ON the related sets of electromagnets linked across their collector and positive, throughout the disconnect periods of the Hall sensor, the BC547/TIP122 pair is turned OFF, but the significant left TIP122 transistor is turned on triggering the opposite sets of electromagnet. The condition is toggled alternately, constantly provided that power continues to be utilized maintaining the BLDC rotating with the necessary torques and momentum.]]> 726 0 0 0 How to Build a RF Signal Jammer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/rf-signal-jammer-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:14:12 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=730 A basic appearing RF signal jammer circuit can be watched in the above diagram, that could be effective at jamming different kinds RF signal within the choice of 5 to 10 meters. The circuit can be accomplished suitable with any expected frequency to be jammed by merely making use of various sets of L1/L2 and by amending the 22pF trimmers appropriately. The frequency that is certainly jammed making use of this circuit could possibly be well within the range of 50 MHz to 1Ghz, in spite of this rendering it suitable for frequencies above 500 MHz could easily get much complex and parameters much important on account of the fact that higher frequencies need shorter interconnections and may consist of other steadiness problems. The existing design can be employed for jamming FM radio stations located in the within 40 meters radial distance or even higher. On the other hand the unit may be utilized as an effective 1km range audio transmitter by providing a MIC input across the pont mentioned "Test". The circuity of the suggested RF signal jammer is essentially composed of two different phases: The one consisting T1 and the relevant parts form the RF oscillator stage while the other stage comprise of T2 and the complementing parts for amplifying and transmitting the low voltage oscillations from T1 into the air. The above solid RF carrier signals transmitted by T2 might be accordingly modulated with any external frequency for example an audio or speech by supplying the signal across the terminal suggested "Test". The circuit is definitely sturdy and does not need to falter with different input supply voltages as a result of the existence of the 78L05 voltage regulator at the base of T1 which clamps the base of T1 with a continuing biasing current ensuring the oscillations produced by the T1 stage remains very sturdy and continuous. The above characteristic is completely enhanced by the T2 stage which welcomes the oscillations from the T1 stage and amplifies and converts the signals with much higher current to ensure that the signals have the ability to travel across larger radial distances in the air. On the other hand to be able to make use of an optimal transmission of the signals, 50 OHM impedance antenna must be employed with the output of the circuit. This may be any normal aluminum dipole yagi antenna. An easy flexible wire measuring about a meter would certainly also do but would certainly reduce the transmission strength by about 60 % producing the unit much ineffective with regards to the transmission range is concerned. For producing the RF jammer appropriate for other frequencies, the coil L1 and L2 ought to be shortened concerning their number of turns and/or also the diameter...this will require some testing until the appropriate frequency is identified. The adjoining trimmers may additionally tweaked for obtaining an optimal result from the jammer circuit or until a good jamming is accomplished by means of the circuit. A good quality, well designed PCB is strictly suitable for starting the RF jammer circuit The submit illustrate a fairly easy homemade RF signal jammer circuit that can be employed for jamming any RF signal within a radial choice of 10 meters. A basic seeming RF signal jammer circuit can be visible in the above diagram, which can be efficient at jamming a wide range RF signal within the selection of 5 to 10 meters. The circuit can be achieved suitable with any desirable frequency to be jammed by merely employing several sets of L1/L2 and by revising the 22pF trimmers suitably. The frequency which is usually jammed implementing this circuit may very well be well of about 50 MHz to 1Ghz, on the other hand making it very suitable for frequencies above 500 MHz could possibly get much complex and parameters much important as a result of the fact that higher frequencies prefer shorter interconnections and may comprise of other constancy difficulties. The current design should be considered for jamming FM radio stations situated the within 40 meters radial distance or even higher. Additionally the unit can certainly be utilized as an impressive 1km range audio transmitter by providing a MIC input across the pont mentioned "Test". The circuity of the recommended RF signal jammer is simply created of two specific levels: The one composing of T1 and the related parts form the RF oscillator stage while the other stage containing T2 and the complementing parts for amplifying and transmitting the low voltage oscillations from T1 into the air. The above powerful RF carrier signals transmitted by T2 could be effectively modulated with any external frequency for instance an audio or speech by supplying the signal across the terminal suggested "Test". The circuit is extremely dependable and is not going to falter with various input supply voltages on account of the occurrence of the 78L05 voltage regulator at the base of T1 which clamps the base of T1 with a persisting biasing current being sure that the oscillations developed by the T1 stage continues very solid and dependable. The above function is absolutely accompanied by the T2 stage which allows the oscillations from the T1 stage and amplifies and modifies the signals with much higher current in order that the signals can easily travel across larger radial distances in the air. In spite of this in an effort to carry out an optimal transmission of the signals, 50 OHM impedance antenna must be employed with the output of the circuit. This might be any regular aluminum dipole yagi antenna. An easy flexible wire measuring about a meter would likely also do but would probably reduce the transmission strength by about 60 % providing the unit much incompetent as long as the transmission range is concerned. To create the RF jammer appropriate for other frequencies, the coil L1 and L2 will have to be shortened with regards to their number of turns and/or also the diameter...this will desire some trials until the correct frequency is established. The adjoining trimmers might also tweaked for finding an optimal reply from the jammer circuit or until an awesome jamming is obtained by way of the circuit. A good quality, well designed PCB is strictly advisable for producing the RF jammer circuit]]> 730 0 0 0 How Brushless DC (BLDC) Motors Work https://makingcircuits.com/blog/brushless-dc-bldc-motors-work/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:19:07 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=732 We certainly have discovered and understand numerous fascinating aspects of magnets and how these devices work together. We realize that a North Pole of the magnet attracts the south Pole of another magnet while like poles repel. In the above revealed diagram we notice a disc with an inserted magnet at its edge (shown in red color) that could be placed with north pole facing outward, and also an electromagnet positioned at a parallel proximity to the circular edge of the disc which generates a south magnetic field when energized. Now considering the arrangement is located as demonstrated in the first upper diagram with the electromagnet in a deactivated state. Within this situation the moment the electromagnet is switched on with a suitable DC input it reaches and yields a south magnetic field impacting on a pulling force over the disc magnet which often forces the disc to rotate with some torque until its long lasting magnet is available in line with the electromagnets opposite lines of flux. The above activity reflects the simple format during which BLDC principle functions. At this point let's observe how in fact the above theory is executed utilizing Hall result sensors to be able to maintain an ongoing motion over the rotor. The following instance diagram describes the mechanism widely:   In the above diagram we essentially observe an easy BLDC rotor/stator arrangement, where the outer circular element is the rotating rotor while the central electromagnet evolves into the fixed stator. The rotor could possibly be observed owning a few everlasting magnets set at the periphery which may have south pole as the affecting lines of flux, the central stator is a solid electromagnet which is supposed to produce the exact power of North Pole magnetic flux when energized with an external DC. We are able to also imagine a hall sensor located near one of the corners of the inner rotor periphery. The hall impact simply sustains the magnetic field of the rotating rotor and draws the signal to a control circuit accountable of operating the stator electromagnets. Talking about the upper position we refer to the blank area (which can be invalid of any magnetic field) of the rotor in close contact with the hall sensor maintaining it in a turned OFF condition. At this point, the turn off signal from the hall impact informs the control circuit to turn on the electromagnets, which immediately encourages a dragging impact on the rotor south pole standing just round the corner. At these times the South pole arrives down surging generating the necessary torque on the rotor and endeavors to align itself consistent with the north pole of the electromagnet. In spite of this along the way the south pole of the rotor also pulls itself near to the hall sensor (as demonstrated in the lower diagram) which instantly picks up this and switches ON advising the control circuit to turn off the electromagnets. Switching off of the electromagnets at the right moment as signaled by the hall effect sensor does not allow stalling and hampering of the rotor motion, somewhat permits it to continue with the motion through the developed torque until the earlier position starts shaping up, and until the hall sensor yet again "feels" the blank area of the rotor and gets shut OFF repeating the cycle. The above toggling of the hall sensor appropriate to the numerous rotor positions inflicts a constant rotational motion with a toque which can be straight proportional to the stator/rotor magnetic interactions, and ofcourse the hall effect positioning. The above conversations describes the most critical two magnet, one hall sensor mechanism. To be able to achieve particularly higher torques more magnets and sets of electromagnets are being used in other higher effectiveness brushless motors through which several hall result sensor could be viewed for following multiple sensing of the rotor magnets to ensure that different sets of electromagnets might be switched at the desired appropriate phase.]]> 732 0 0 0 How to Build a Long Duration Timer Circuit Using Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/long-duration-timer-circuit-using-transistors/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:22:44 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=734 The circuit might be recognized with the aid of the following information: A temporary push of the push button charges the 1000uF capacitor fully and generates the NPN BC547 transistor, maintaining the position even though the switch is introduced as a result of the slow discharging of the 1000uF via the 2M2 resistor and the emitter of the NPN. Activating of the BC547 furthermore transforms ON the PNP BC557 which in turns switches ON the relay and the attached load. The above circumstance carries on provided that the 1000uF is not discharged below the cut off levels of the the two transistors. The above talked about functions are extremely simple and make a regular timer configuration which might be too incorrect with its efficiency. In spite of this the addition of the 1K/1N4148 network immediately the transforms the circuit into a greatly precise long duration timer for the following factors. The 1K and the 1N4148 link makes sure that whenever the transistors work out the latch on account of inadequate charge in the capacitor, the residual charge inside the capacitor is required to release fully by means of the above resistor/diode link via the relay coil. The above characteristic ensures that the capacitor is totally worn out off and empty for the next cycle therefore has the capacity to generate a clean begin from zero. Without the above function the capacitor could be not able to release totally and the recurring charge inside would certainly stimulate undefined commence points producing the methods incorrect and unpredictable. The circuit could possibly be a little more forward improved through the use of a Darlington pair for the NPN enabling the utilization of considerably more value resistors at its base and equally low value capacitors. Lower value capacitors would generate lower leakages and assist to improve the timing precision throughout the long duration counting periods.]]> 734 0 0 0 How to Build a 12V Car Laptop Charger Circuit Using Boost Converter https://makingcircuits.com/blog/12v-car-laptop-charger-circuit-using-boost-converter/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:26:46 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=736 The recommended inverter circuit is definitely a just simply boost converter unit created for producing the necessary laptop charging voltage. A basic boost converter can be created utilizing the IC 555, I probably have talked about it by means of various other articles within this site. As might be observed right here figure, an easy yet very economical boost converter circuit could be designed for making use of with laptops from any specific high current source acquiring a lower voltage than the laptop charging level.   Switch Mode 12V Car Laptop Charger Circuit Using Boost Converter The numerous phases incorporated in the above 12 V laptop boost charger circuit could be recognized given below: IC1 which happens to be a 555 IC is set up as a regular astable for producing a dependable specific frequency at the rate of 12 kHz which can be obtained at pin3 of the IC. The above high frequency output is provided to the base of a driver BJT T1 for activating the above frequency with high current in L1. On account of the inherent property of the inductor L1, throughout every OFF time of T1, the exact quantity of stimulated voltage is kicked back from the inductor L1 and provided to the load attached at the output via the fast recovery diode BA159. The load the following is the laptop which allows the enhanced voltage for charging its internal battery. Given that the laptop may need an accurate 19 to 20V for the functions, the output from L1 has to be controlled and stabilized to be able to render things secure for the associated laptop battery. The above measures is looked after by presenting T2 and the connected R4 and Z1 elements. Z1 is chosen to be precisely equivalent to the laptop charging voltage that is at 20 V (17V is incorrectly demonstrated in the diagram). At any time the output tends to drift away from this value, Z1 receives forward biased activating T2, which often grounds pin5 of the IC. The above circumstance instantly decreases the IC 555 pin3 voltage to minimal levels for that specific on the spot until Z1 prevents carrying out along with the circumstance is restored to the safe zone....the switching is sustained at a swift speed preserving a continuing voltage for the laptop]]> 736 0 0 0 How to Make a Solar Panel Enhancer Using Solar Mirror Concept https://makingcircuits.com/blog/solar-panel-enhancer-using-solar-mirror-concept/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:30:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=738 A much more processed albeit expensive method may well observed in the following image:   In this particular process a concave reflector exceeding three times the dimension of the solar panel is utilized. A 60 degree curvature might do very well. It ought to be mentioned that the degree of curvature ought not to be comparatively significant which would probably result in huge amount of heat to focus over the solar panel in addition to the light which may on the other hand deteriorate the effectiveness. The inner concave surface may very well be possibly installed with lots of parts of mirrors such that these types of uniformly cover the whole surface in a concave technique. The solar panel could be equipped utilizing iron clamps as demonstrated n the diagram above, making certain it reaches a central position for maximum light concentration. The sun rays irrespective of its position in the sky would now permit its rays to get shown and targeted across the solar panel surface for allowing the unit to acquire highest enhancement performance and work at its peak efficiency for most of the days period.]]> 738 0 0 0 How to Build a Solar Induction Heater Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/solar-induction-heater-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:34:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=740 The circuit is powered from a 24 V DC supply, at current ranging up to 15 amps. A 7812 voltage regulator drops the input voltage to 12V for the driver IC which can be a regular half bridge driver IC IRS2153 or any other equivalent. The push pull output from the IC drives a pair of mosfets which often forwards the oscillations to the main work coil of the induction heater via a DC blocking capacitor and an impedance matching inductor. The blocking capacitor avoids too much current from transferring by means of the work coil and prevents damaging the mosfets while the inductor ensures no disturbing harmonics work out the line and induce inefficiencies into the system. The 376 nF tank capacitors are employed to obtain a resonance with the work coil at about 210 kHz frequency which is set by the R/C network across pin2 and pin3 of the driver IC. The 33k resistor could possibly be created variable for fine tuning or optimizing the resonance effect The work coil dimensions and the resonant capacitor arrangement are supplied in the figure below:   A buck converter for transforming the panel high voltage to the essential 24 V for the induction heater could be designed with the help of the following diagram:   T1, T2 as well as C1, C2 and the connected resistors form a classic astable multivibrator (AMV) with a set frequency of around 30 kHz. The panel volatge is given to the above AMV and oscillated at the said frequency before feeding it to the buck converter stage created by employing a mosfet and an linked diode, inductor stage. During the turn off periods an equivalent amount voltage is supplied from L1 in the from of back EMFs which happens to be properly filtered and provided to the linked induction heater circuit across the output terminals. C4 ensures the transformed bucked voltage is free from any ripples so enabling in generating a cleaner DC for the induction heater circuit. The managed 24 V DC at the outputs might be accomplished by approximately winding the proper number of turns for L1 through some trial and error as well as by the involvement of D2 which in the end stabilizes the output voltage to the essential ranges.]]> 740 0 0 0 722 http://restaurant85050.free-blogz.com/385506/the-best-side-of-restaurant-delivery 0 0 724 http://alexishxelr.ezblogz.com/564567/not-known-facts-about-paintball 0 0 How to Make a Office Call Bell Network Circuit with LED Monitor https://makingcircuits.com/blog/office-call-bell-network-circuit-with-led-monitor/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:37:58 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=742 The circuit above demonstrates an illustration wiring for three office rooms which can be lengthy to any most wanted numbers basically replicating the stages. As may be seen the upper section comprises three identical stages of transistor set/reset modules, each module being made up of two NPN transistors, one PNP, a couple push buttons and a few resistors. The push button labeled as "ON" is utilized for signaling or provoking the latch circuit comprised of T1 and T2. The OFF button does the reverse that is deactivates the certain module activation. When started a positive voltage turns into offered at the collector the corresponding PNP transistor which can be shut down for activating the office bell located at the specific office, in the diagram these are labelled as "Trigger to room#1, room#2, room#3...." When one of these triggers is started it's presented to a relay driver circuit system set up in the intended office chamber where the trigger is provided to the base of the relay driver transistor as demonstrated in the diagram below (labelled as "trigger from head office"). This encourages the relay to get initialized as well as the linked bell across the relay contacts. The member now presses the green switch in result which happens to be moved back to the head office and gathered across one of the inputs marked "trigger from room#1, room#2 room#3..." relying upon from where the member might have attended the green button. This activity allows an immediate switching off of the bell. If it was from the concerned room, say as an example room#1 then the corresponding red LED placed in "room#1"module gets lighted and latched, if it was from any other room the corresponding red LED is activated offering the right immediate location of the member in the course of his/her reaction to the call made from the head office. The red LED illumination could be reset and restored to its turned OFF position by pressing the reset button at the extreme right corner of the above head office call bell monitor circuit above.   Parts list All R1 = 100 k All R2, R3, R4 = 10 K All diodes = 1N4148 All C1 = 100uF/25V All NPN = BC547 All PNP = BC557]]> 742 0 0 0 How to Build a 48V Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/48v-inverter-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:53:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=746 Talking about the demonstrated 48V inverter circuit, the IC 4047 forms the main oscillator stage accountable of generating a totem pole outputs for the linked output stage. The output stage is created by configuring a 4 individual high gain high power transistors modules, two of them on each channel of the push pull output stage. The TIP122 are on their own internally set up as Darlingtons that happen to be furthermore associated with TIP35 transistor in the Darlington for producing especially strong current gain across each of the components. C1 and R1 has to be properly set for attaining the preferred frequency as per the needed requirements...could be 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The presented 48 V inverter configuration is made to produce an enormous 2 kva of output power offered the devices are installed on sufficiently large heatsinks and the battery rated at 48 V, 100 AH, also the transformer rated at 36-0-36V, 1 kva For lower outputs, certainly one of the modules could possibly be eradicated from each of the channels. The BJT BC546 is placed to offer a fairly fixed 9 V to the IC to be able to maintain the IC safe from the high battery voltage and within its specific working voltage limit.]]> 746 0 0 0 How to Make a Home Solar Electricity Set up Circuit for an Off-the-grid Living https://makingcircuits.com/blog/home-solar-electricity-set-up-circuit-for-an-off-the-grid-living/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 15:58:25 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=750 The above solar panel regulator might be set up with the following plain inverter circuit which can be quite sufficient for powering the required lamps by way of the attached solar panel or the battery. Pats list for the above inverter circuit: R1, R2 = 100 ohm, 10 watt R3, R4 = 15 ohm 10 watt T1, T2 = TIP35 on heatsinks The last line in the request indicates an LED version to be meant for replacing and upgrading the current CFL fluorescent lamps. The same could be executed by means of removing the battery and the inverter and developing the LEDs with the solar regulator output, as demonstrated below:     The negative of the adapter has to be linked and made popular with the negative of the solar panel]]> 750 0 0 0 How to Build a 150 LED PWM Tubelight Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/150-led-pwm-tubelight-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 16:01:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=752 The figure demonstrates a PWM based LED intensity controller circuit implementing the IC 555. IC 555 are widely employed in nearly all PWM based circuit applications as a result of their simple design and accurate PWM generation ability which can be adjustable starting from minimum to the maximum. In the presented design the 555 IC is set up in its normal PWM mode with a slight variation in which it's discharge pin7 is utilized as the output rather than its normal pin3 which happens to be quite raised for the discharge function here. The above configuration tends to make the performing a little more economical and permits the spaces of the duty cycles to be sharp even more precise. Pin7 turns into to blame for producing negative pulses only for the connected transistor, although the positive pulses result from the 10 k resistor across the base and positive of the transistor. VR1 is employed as the PWM control pot which almost offers a selection from zero to the highest supply voltage for the LEDs by way of changing ON/OFF duty cycles as based on the setting of the 100k pot TIP122 is rated to hold upto 5 amp with sufficient heatsinking which means greater than 150 LEDs rated at 20 mA each may be offered with the device as demonstrated in the circuit diagram.]]> 752 0 0 0 How to Build a Calculating Flyback Diode/Resistor for High Current Inductors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/calculating-flyback-dioderesistor-for-high-current-inductors/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 16:05:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=754 A relay being a pretty small load (high resistance coil), normally a 1 amp rated 1N4007 diode evolves into a lot more than adequate for such applications, in spite of this in situations where the load is comparatively huge or the coil resistance is extremely low, the created back emfs could possibly be comparable to the utilized current levels, which means if the employed current is in the range of 10 amp, the reverse emf would certainly also be around this level. To absorb such substantial jolts the reverse back emf diode too has to be robust with its amp specs. Usually, in such instances where the back emf could possibly be above 10 or 20 amps, getting an appropriate single diode turns into hard or very expensive. A sensible way to counter this is to use many smaller rated diodes in identical, nevertheless since diodes exactly like BJTs are semiconductor devices, don't turn out well when linked in parallel. The reason being, each diode in the parallel string might have a slightly different turn on levels producing the devices perform individually and the one which switches ON first evolves into accountable of taking on the greatest bulk of the caused current, which itself tends to make the specific diode vulnerable. Consequently, in an effort to solve the above issue each diode ought to be added with a series resistor, properly determined for the application as per the presented guidelines. It might be completed in the following manner: Guess the maximum believed emf current across the inductor is 20 amps, and we choose to utilize four 6 amp diodes as the freewheeling diodes across this coil, suggests that each diode need to share around 5 amp current, the same is applicable for the resistors also, which can be hooked up in series along with them. Utilizing Ohm's law we are able to estimate the resistors such that they produce minimum safe resistance collectively but singly provides an optimal high resistance forcing the current to share the paths similarly across all the diodes. Usually a 0.5 ohm resistance is going to be quite secure for preserving the power device, consequently 0.5 x 4 turns into 2 ohms, so each diode may very well be 2 ohms rated. The wattage with each other ought to be graded for managing the whole 20 amps, for that reason dividing 20 by 4 gives 5, which means each resistor needs to be rated at 5 watts each.   ]]> 754 0 0 0 How to Convert 3 phase AC to Single phase AC https://makingcircuits.com/blog/3-phase-ac-to-single-phase-ac/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 16:13:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=758 Now  DC circuit, as soon as the 3 phase rectified DC is accomplished, this may ought to be transformed to the most wanted single phase AC, according to the request this value needs to be 220 V. A full bridge mosfet driver topology might be integrated for applying the above requirement, as demonstrated in the following diagram:   Full bridge mosfet driver circuit The structure appears uncomplicated to configure, nonetheless it would deliver and subject the load to the full 530 V rather than the stipulated 220 V. The matter could be normalized and managed to the preferred levels by way of an external voltage sensor circuit, which might be furthermore built-in with the Ct pin of the IC IRS2453. The easy way out could be applied by incorporating the following circuit: inverter output voltage regulator circuit The 220k preset is modified accurately to ensure that the transistor simply starts carrying out at voltages around 240 V across the load. When the transistor performs, the Ct pin is grounded at that on the spot, forcing the IC to slow down its oscillations which often provides the high side outputs to go low, cutting off the improved high voltage to the mosfets. This contributes to decreasing down of the voltage across the load that enables the BC547 to turn off and bring back the IC procedures....the process repeats ensuring the output continues under control and at the specific 220 V level.]]> 758 0 0 0 425 0 0 426 425 1 How to Make a Infrared (IR) Controlled LED Emergency Lamp Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/infrared-ir-controlled-led-emergency-lamp-circuit/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 16:16:12 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=760 Talking about the schematic of the suggested LEd emergency lamp circuit with infrared remote dimming feature, the design essentially includes three phases: the infrared toggled 4017 sequencer, the LED dimmer utilizing T2, and the automatic emergency switch making use of T3. The IR sensor is a regular TSOP series IC set up with a BJT buffer T1 which amplifies the output from IRS sensor each time its toggled with an external IR remote transmitter, which might be easily your TV remote control handset. The above switching reply is correctly utilized at the clock input of the IC 4017 which can be a Johnson divider counter chip and turns into to blame for producing a sequencing positive high shifts across its pin3 (start) to pin (11) and back to pin3 (repeat). Each of he above 10 sequencing high outputs are shut down via 10 individual rectifier diodes and a series resistor. The resistors are determined so as to produce a correspondingly incrementing potential difference at the base of T2 referring to the value of the resistor set by VR1 across the base and ground of T2. Based upon which output of the IC4017 might be high at any presented instant, the associated LED brightness is identified in accordance with this chosen output (toggled via the IR stage and the remote handset). At pin3 the illumination could be the highest while at pin11 it may well set to generate the minimum brightness over the connected LED. T3 is located to invert its collector voltage in accordance with the input at its base obtained from an external AC to DC 5V adapter unit. The moment this supply is taken away or goes wrong, T3 switches ON via R5 enabling the needed battery voltage to reach the collector of T2, which inturn passes it on to the LED hooked up across its emitter/ground terminals with the needed amount of glow as dependent upon the particular output of the IC 4017 at that immediate picked to be high by the user employing the IR remote control facility. Parts list for the above IR controlled LED emergency lamp with dimmer circuit R1, R3 = 100 ohms, R2 = 100K, R4 = 4K7, R5 = 10K, R6---R15 = 200 ohms to 2K (proportionately incremented) VR1 = 10k preset C2 = 47uF/25V C1, C4= 22uF/25V, C3 = 0.1, CERAMIC, T1 = BC557B T2 =TIP122 T3 = TIP127 ALL DIODES ARE = 1N4148, LED = 1 watt high bright IC1 = 4017 Battery = 4V/4AH or bigger]]> 760 0 0 0 How to Build a Wireless Home theater Circuit using Bluetooth Headset https://makingcircuits.com/blog/wireless-home-theater-circuit-using-bluetooth-headset/ Sun, 19 Jul 2015 16:21:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=762 Each of the inputs of the above demonstrated class D amplifier could possibly be instantly set up with the cut/stripped speaker wires of a scavenged Bluetooth headset circuit as provided below:   Disconnect the speaker wires from the speaker, strips the ends cautiously for the suggested integrations with the amplifier inputs   For making use of both the inputs of the amplifier and for loving a stereophonic home theater response, an additional appropriate and properly combined Bluetooth headset unit is going to be essential. As soon as the integration of the two Headsets, combined with source Bluetooth is conducted, a throbbing magnificent class D 400 watt stereo music may very well be felt over the hooked up speakers. The system could possibly be placed as a home theater system or simply for enjoying a pure 400 watts of music from your cell phone or other Bluetooth suitable gadgets. For those who already have a ready made home theater amplifier system, hook up the input of the amplifier with any one cut/stripped speaker wire of the Bluetooth headset (if the amplifier is not a differential type) and make absolutely sure the negative line of the headset is created common with the amplifier negative line. On the other hand a bridge network may very well be raised for remedying the different output from the headset speaker and the output could possibly be straight joined with the inputs of the single ended amplifier.]]> 762 0 0 0 How to build Low impedance microphone amplifier https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-low-impedance-microphone-amplifier/ Tue, 21 Jul 2015 05:35:03 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=765 How to build Low impedance microphone amplifier       Parts List for the above Low impedance microphone amplifier circuit   all resistors are 1/4 watt 5% unless stated
  • R1=15k
  • R2= 150k
  • R3= 2k2
  • R4= 820
  • R6= 10k
  • R7= 10k
  • P1= 1M
  • C1= 3k9
  • C2= 100u
  • C3= 22u
  • C4= 4u7
  • C5= 470u
  • C6= 10u
  • C7= 100n
  • C8= 47u nonpolar
  • D1= 1N4148
  • U1= TL081
  • CN1= SIL6
 ]]> 765 0 0 0 How to Upgrade a Low Power Inverter to a High Power Inverter using a Simple Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/upgrade-a-low-power-inverter-to-a-high-power-inverter-using-a-simple-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:10:20 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=770 Making use of BJTs can be very dependable and less complicated but quiet large, if space is your trouble and require the upgrade from low to high power inverter in the nearly all compact manners, then mosfets turns into the widely used option and could be wired as demonstrated in the following diagram:   The input is produced again from any totem pole IC outputs, the mosfets might be rated according to the most wanted upgrade from lower to the highest magnitudes. The diode integration indicates a basic PWM insertion which happens to be optional, but could be utilized if a altered sine wave output meant to be incorporated into the upgrade.]]> 770 0 0 0 How to make a Super Capacitor Hand Cranked Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/super-capacitor-hand-cranked-charger-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:17:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=772     The way out of the much anticipated super capacitor charger circuit is very easy, it's by utilizing a bridge rectifier for the needed DC conversion across both the cycles of the AC. Normally we understand a bridge rectifier is set up in such a way that the associated diodes turn out to be outfitted for rectifying an AC by way of both half cycles utilized across it. The chosen hand cranked alternator device also behaves like an AC generator wherein the forward movement of the cranking generates a forward or a positive current while the retracting action in the device does the opposite and builds up a negative current across its outputs. In case the wires of the hand cranked generator or any generator are hooked up directly with a filter capacitor which can be a super capacitor in the existing situation would charge the capacitors during the first activity and instantly release the capacitor throughout the reverse motion of the cranking, leading to a net zero charge inside the capacitors. When a bridge rectifier is associated across such a generator as demonstrated in the diagram, both the positive and the negative currents across its output are correctly developed into a single polarity voltage that could help to charge the super capacitors essentially without inflicting any loss across the capacitors. I have hooked up the diagram in pictorial form, please take a look The reverse current will matter only just in case the red/black wires are changed while hooking up with the super capacitor.... the capacitors will get harmed if the current within this situation surpasses 1 amp. the 30 amp indicates the max current persistence in standard situations as presented in the connected picture. However it will matter only if the voltage from the generator is likely to go beyond the max voltage rating of the super capacitor..if it continues to be within the capacitors voltage range the forward current limit turns into unimportant and might be disregarded....so make sure you verify the generator's maximum voltage, it ought not become more than 24 V for the mentioned super capacitor module. The diodes in the bridge could possibly be 1N5408 for being sure total safety to the system. The super capacitor may be charged/discharged at will thousands of times regardless of any measures or care.]]> 772 0 0 0 How to Build a Automatic Fish Aquarium Light Optimizer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-fish-aquarium-light-optimizer-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:21:46 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=774 As demonstrated in the diagram the offered automatic fish aquarium light optimizer circuit comprises of only a few transistors as the active parts, whereby the NPN device is set up as a standard collector while the other PNP as an inverter. Throughout day time the solar panel generates the stipulated amount of light transformation offering the popular collector phase with the needed amount of voltage. The NPN transistor base is limited with a maximum of 12 V with the help of the linked zener which will makes sure that the potential across the linked red, blue, green, white LEDs by no means surpasses this value no matter the solar panel peak voltage ranges. In the course of dusk when the solar panel light starts worsening, the LEDs as well go through a consequently reducing voltage problems simulating a equally dimming impact in their illumination stages, in accordance with the sunlight....until it's nearly dark when these LEDs entirely shut off. At the same time, provided that the solar panel voltage sustains an optimal voltage the PNP is compelled to stay shut off, nevertheless as the sun commences to set, the potential at the base of the PNP device starts dropping just as soon as it drops below the 9 V mark, guides the linked blue LEDs to enhance gradually until these turn out to be completely lighted after dusk. The procedure becomes reversed at daybreak, along with the cycle maintains repeating simulating a day/night cycle light consequence inside the fish aquarium The 9 V at the emitter of the PNP might be resulting from any common 9 V AC/DC adapter or simply from a cell phone charger unit.]]> 774 0 0 0 How to Make a Wireless Helmet Brake Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/wireless-helmet-brake-light-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:29:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=776 The suggested helmet brake light circuit could possibly be conveniently executed by utilizing an affordable homemade FM transmitter and a small FM transistor radio. A compact FM transmitter can be viewed in the following diagram which turns into the brake light transmitter circuit for the helmet LEDs. The above design shows a basic FM transmitter circuit which can be built-in with the brake light voltage signal of the motorcycle, or just across the brake light lamp connection The circuit produces an FM signal over the standard FM band of 80 to 108 MHz. Hence the transmitted signals turn out to be receivable over any ordinary FM radio positioned within a radial distance of 30 meters.The coil would require tweaking for set up the precise point of reception over an FM radio The mentioned 12V lines need to be linked straight across the brake light lamp of the bike. The BC547 on the right together with its base zener makes certain that the FM transmitter circuit obtains the designated 3 V for the operations. The UM66 IC is a musical chip which allows the circuit to produce an AF modulated FM transmission making sure much more powerful and robust FM signals compared to a transmitter without having audio modulation stage. Consequently every time brakes are utilized, the transmitter is turned on and directs a powerful audio modulated FM signal for the FM radio placed inside the helmet. The FM Radio as the Receiver Any compact FM radio could be utilized when considering for obtaining the transmitted signals from the above described FM transmitter. An illustration circuit of a small FM radio may be observed below: In the image you can easily observe a speaker related to the radio and also a 9 V battery as the supply source. Both of the previously listed attachments ought to be taken off the kit and ought to become something as provided below after the recommended changes: So that you can produce the above radio suitable for a LEd driver stage and for illuminating a couple of LEDs in accordance with the obtained FM transmitter signals, we will need to create some fascinating electrical alterations with the demonstrated FM radio kit. The following figure demonstrates precisely how a small electrical stage consisting a BJT and inductor can be utilized for changing the amplified audio from the radio into a DC which might then light up a pair of LEds brightly each and every time the brakes are used in the motor bike. In the above diagram we observe the speaker terminals of the FM radio being joined with an inductor and the output across the inductor further associated with a diode, capacitor rectifier stage for transforming into a sturdy DC base drive for the following BC547 LED driver stage. We are able to also observe the 9 V battery being changed to a 3.7 V Li-ion cell to be able to create the design compact and quite easily inclosable inside the helmet. When the radio starts acquiring the switched audio, the weak audio frequency across the speaker wires turn out to be focused and stimulated with the aid of the attached inductor, this improved voltage is fixed and filtered by the diode capacitor network to ensure that the BC547 has the capacity to obtain a clean DC conversion for driving the set of LEds situated over the helmet body. Now at any time the brakes are employed the signal from the transmitter is acquired by the FM radio inside the helmet leading to the necessary illumination of the LED strip by means of the operations as spelled out in the above section. Tips on how to start up the offered LED helmet brake light circuit Before setting up the Rx LED module over the helmet, the radio board ought to be set properly as per the following justification: Turn On the FM radio without any antenna associated and the station selection on the radio being on any random situation. You can definitely find the LEDs glowing in this scenario, now adjust the volume manage preset in the amplifier section of the FM board very gradually unless you find the LED just prevents illuminating. After the above setting remove the speaker output wires from the LED driver stage and let a speaker be linked with these wires. Additionally hook up the antenna wire back in the demonstrated position. Activate the transmitter unit and adjust the red colored frequency coil or it may be a capacitor trimmer in other variants of FM receivers, tune it carefully until a clean and powerful musical audio (UM66 music) is identified in the speaker. Seal the tuning device with glue. Now take away the speaker and attach the wires back with the LEd driver stage. Activate the transmitter and you'll find the LEDs glowing brightly as a reaction to the acquired musical transmission from the Tx unit. Switching of the Tx circuit ought to turn off the LEDs at the same time immediately verifying the ideal functioning of the process. Verify the reply just a few more times after which you might continue with the last installations.]]> 776 0 0 0 How to Build a Automatic LED Candle Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-led-candle-light-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:34:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=778 The suggested automatic darkness activated candle light circuit can be viewed in the demonstrated diagram which utilizes an amber colored LED for simulating a candle light impact. According to the demand the circuit ought to be LDR based which also means the unit must trigger as soon as it's adequately dark inside the room or the moment the main indoor lights are switched OFF, or when the user goes to bed. The displayed automatic LED candle light is extremely uncomplicated and relatively dependable with its procedures, let's figure it out by means of the following justification: The 0.33uF/400 V capacitor together with the four diodes and capacitor forms a portable transformerless power supply circuit stage for operating the LED during dark or without having ambient light. The first transistor from left in the existence of ambient light circumstances obtains adequate base drive via the LDRs lower resistance and performs to maintain the base of the second BC547 at ground potentials. As a result of this the second transistor continues to be inactive and switched OFF making certain that the associated LED also remains to be turned OFF under such ambient external illuminations. Nevertheless whenever the ambient light around the LDR decreases or is shut OFF, the left transistor is inhibited from the base drive as a result of the LDRs high resistance without having ambient light, which additional encourages the right hand side transistor to begin carrying out, consequently activating the LED. The opposite reaction is immediately shown in the event the ambient light is turned on or in the course of daybreak. Caution: The circuit is not isolated from mains voltage, utmost care and precaution is predicted from the user wile putting together, examination, placing the unit in operated circumstance. The LDR needs to be properly enclosed inside an appropriate cover such that the LED light by no means attains it under any specific situation, elsewhere it might result in false activating and oscillations of the circuit and the LED. The publish represents an easy transformerless LED candle light circuit which switches ON automatically without the presence of ambient light in the room and vice versa. The presented automatic darkness turned on candle light circuit can be watched in the presented diagram which employs an amber colored LED for simulating a candle light result. In accordance with the inquiry the circuit is required to be LDR based which also means the unit must actuate only after it's properly dark inside the room or the moment the main indoor lights are switched OFF, or when the user goes to bed. The displayed automatic LED candle light is quite simple and quite trustworthy with its functions, let's are aware of it by way of the following clarification: The 0.33uF/400 V capacitor in addition to the four diodes and capacitor forms a lightweight transformerless power supply circuit stage for running the LED during dark or without any ambient light. The first transistor from left in the occurrence of ambient light problems experiences enough base drive via the LDRs lower resistance and carries out to continue the base of the second BC547 at ground potentials. Due to this fact the second transistor continues to be inactive and switched OFF ensuring that the hooked up LED also remains to be turned OFF under such ambient external illuminations. In spite of this whenever the ambient light around the LDR reduces or is shut OFF, the left transistor is inhibited from the base drive on account of the LDRs high resistance without having ambient light, which even more guides the right hand side transistor to commence executing, and thus activating the LED. The opposite reaction is instantly shown just in case the ambient light is activated or throughout daybreak. Caution: The circuit is not isolated from mains voltage, utmost care and precaution are estimated from the user wile building, assessing, fitting the unit in driven condition. The LDR ought to be correctly enclosed inside the right cover such that the LED light certainly not grows to it under almost any problem, normally it could produce false switching on and oscillations of the circuit and the LED.]]> 778 0 0 0 How to Make a High Current Auto Cut Off Battery Charger Circuit Using a Single Transistor https://makingcircuits.com/blog/high-current-auto-cut-off-battery-charger-circuit-using-a-single-transistor/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:40:41 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=780 Yes it is going to function which enables it to quit charging the battery when around 14 V is attained across the battery terminals. but I am doubtful about the 1 ohm base resistor value...it ought to be determined correctly. The transistor and the IC both might be installed on a common heatsink utilizing mica separator kit. This may benefit from the thermal protection feature of the IC and will help protect both the devices from overheating. Circuit explanation The presented single transistor high current battery charger is a simple way of charging a battery and also accomplishing an auto shut off when the battery reaches a full charge level. The circuit is really a clear-cut common collector transistor stage making use of the demonstrated 2N6292 power device. The design is furthermore introduced as an emitter follower and as the term indicates the emitter follows the base voltage and permits the transistor to conduct only providing the emitter potential is 0.7V lower that the utilized base potential. In the demonstrated diagram, the base of the transistor is given with a controlled 15 V from the IC 7815, which guarantees a potential improvement of about 15 - 0.7 = 14.3 V across the emitter/ground of the transistor. The diode is not needed and ought to be taken off the base of the transistor to be able to reduce an unneeded drop of an extra 0.7 V. The above voltage also turns into the charging voltage for the associated battery across these terminals. While the battery charges and its terminal voltage remains to be below the 14.3 V mark, the transistor base voltage keeps carrying out and providing the essential charging voltage to the battery. In spite of this the moment the battery starts achieving the full and above 14.3 V charge, the base is inhibited from a 0.7 V drop across its emitter which forces the transistor to stop executing and the charging voltage is cut off to the battery for the present time, whenever the battery level commences going below the 14.3 V mark, the transistor is turned on again...the cycle keeps repeating being sure a safe charging fr the hooked up battery. Base resistor = Hfe x battery internal resistance]]> 780 0 0 0 How to Build a DIY LED Brightness and Efficiency Tester Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/diy-led-brightness-and-efficiency-tester-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:45:12 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=782 A translucent white material such a roughened acrylic piece could possibly be released between the two device inside the pipe to be able to create the LED light diffuse over the LDR and generate an uniform distribution of light instead of obtaining concentrated over a small inconsistent area of the LDR. With a DC used across the enclosed LED leads the demonstrated set up would certainly deliver a direct reading in the ohm meter showing the Ohms of the lowered LDR resistance. This value could be mentioned and compared by other LEDs or a standard good quality LED in hand for getting the needed information regarding their brightness levels and performance.   ]]> 782 0 0 0 How to Make a Dissolved Oxygen Sensor Display Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/dissolved-oxygen-sensor-display-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:48:41 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=784 Nowadays companies manufacture a wide variety of sensors for assessing oxygen in water referred to as Dissolved Oxygen sensors, which you may utilize in water, chemical processor jobs, laboratory, and ecological. Dissolved oxygen (DO) is the illustration or the evaluation of the oxygen dissolved in a unit volume of water, usually in units of mg/L or ppm. The desired sensing unit may consist of 2 electrodes, an anode and cathode, in electrolyte and from the water in question by an oxygen permeable membrane, as noticed in Figure 2. Oxygen diffuses across the membrane and interacts with the cathode to a potential difference proportional to the oxygen diffused into the sensor. DO sensors accordingly essentially establishes the lacking stress of the oxygen in water; allows extra oxygen to across the membrane and more voltage to be created. The current is then transformed into a millivolt output, that might be evaluated with a WSN wireless node. The type of dissolved oxygen sensor demonstrated above are usually perfect because the output may be immediately found and interfaced with any preferred measuring instrument for example a millivoltmeter, LED bar graph meter, transistorized amplifier, opamp based amplifier etc for translating the gathered data into the the essential levels in order that it may be analyzed properly for the outcomes. The internal view of the above instance sensor might be observed in the following image: The demonstrated outputs presents an instant readable data by using millivolts that may be useful for for activating an external electronic circuit stage.]]> 784 0 0 0 How to Build a Digital Up/Down Volume Control Circuit Using IC DS1668 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/digital-updown-volume-control-circuit-using-ic-ds1668/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:52:30 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=786 The above IC may very well be outdated these days, so if you are not able to locate the above chip here's a better substitution that one could choose utilizing the philips TDA8551 IC.]]> 786 0 0 0 How to Make a Power ON Alarm with Auto OFF Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/power-on-alarm-with-auto-off-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 14:56:44 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=788 ]]> 788 0 0 0 How to Build a Solar Panel Optimizer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/solar-panel-optimizer-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:01:03 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=790 When sunshine drops, voltage of the panel also drops and now we are not able to manage to obtain heavy current from the panel simply because that could reduce the voltage below 12V which may completely quit the charging method. Consequently as described above A1 comes into action and disconnects R1 and attaches R2. R2 is chosen at a higher value and enables only restricted amount current to the battery such that the solar voltage is not going to crash below 15 vots, a level that's imperatively needed at the input of LM338. When the sunshine drops below the second set threshold, A2 triggers RL#2 which often switches R3 to render the current to the battery even lower making certain that the voltage at the input of the LM338 by no means drops below 15V, yet the charging rate to the battery is actually preserved to the closest optimum levels. If the opamp phases are improved with more selection of relays and following current control actions, the unit may be fully optimized with even better effectiveness. The above process charge the battery quickly at high current during peak sunshines and lowers the current as the sun intensity over the panel falls, and in the same way offers the battery with the right rated current such that the it gets totally charged at the end of the day. What Goes On with a Battery Which can not be Discharged? Believe in the event the battery is not optimally discharged to be able to undergo the above procedure the next morning, the circumstance could be fatal to the battery, because the initial high current may have harmful impacts over the battery mainly because it's yet to discharged to the stipulated ratings. To verify the above issue, a few more opamps are launched, A3, A4, which monitor the voltage level of the battery and start the identical measures as done by A1, A2, to ensure that the current to the battery is optimized with regards to the voltage or the charge level present with the battery throughout that period of time.]]> 790 0 0 0 How to Make a Municipal Water Supply Sensor, Pump Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/municipal-water-supply-sensor-pump-controller-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:03:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=793 The circuit design of the offered municipal water sensor with pump starter is very easy as might be observed in the demonstrated diagram. A Darlington TIP 122 transistor turns into the main active sensing device in the circuit. The device being a Darlington is extremely delicate therefore evolves into in particular suitable for the application. Its base and the positive DC are with each other clamped as probes across the water pipe mouth where the incoming utility water is meant to be felt. In absence of water the probes stay separated with air gap which provides a very high resistance across the probes which often retains the transistor/relay stage turned off. The 10uF capacitor at the base of the transistor makes certain that the transistor would not get rattled or upset with external noises seeking to create way by means of the sensor wires. When utility water supply is linked to, the pipe mouth starts throwing water into the adjoining tank, the speed of the water by way of pipe brushes across the probes producing a comparatively low resistance across it. This low resistance permits the positive DC to achieve the base of the BJT initiating it into conduction...the transistor currently performs and switches ON the relay, the relay contacts shift position and turn on the linked pump.]]> 793 0 0 0 509 0 0 510 509 1 How to Build a Insect Wing Signal Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/insect-wing-signal-detector-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:09:41 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=795     ]]> 795 0 0 0 How to Make a Free 200 Volts Just Above your Head https://makingcircuits.com/blog/free-200-volts-just-above-your-head/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:15:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=797 All intellectuals for example the CEOs of oil and gas companies, government officials of countries know about the fact that just six feet above ground which may be around your head region the atmosphere may very well be charged with a minimum of 200 volts of free electricity. Even just 3 feet above the ground the air may very well be charged with as high as +100 V. If you compare the above with your home electricity which might be just 120 V, and your car battery having only 12 V, these man made electricity appears quite insignificant. The +200 V in the air is completely free, infinite, unmetered and incredibly clean electricity without any emissions, it's by means of electromagnetic energy (EM). Great scientists of an earlier period like Nikola Tesla and Henry Moray already have effectively plucked this free energy from air and verified the world of its presence. If you think about the many tall structures such as the CN tower, the Eiffel tower, the Washington monument, the Kutub minar, the One world trade center, and the Egyptian Pyramids each one of these could be utilized like antennas for using this free energy in huge magnitudes. The Egyptian Pyramids were in fact designed as electrical energy creating and wireless creating power structures. The capstone of the pyramids were created and placed atop the pyramids to act similar to a taking and moving antenna along with the foundation of the pyramids were built with sandstone (a quartz crystal electricity conductor) to gather the collected electrical power - to work as a capacitor. The sandstone (arenite) bricks utilized to assemble the pyramids were made up of crystal quartz and/or feldspar which include exorbitantly high electrical conductors and the little bit of metallic on the capstone allowed for highest possible power development and accessibility. Furthermore, the Giza Plateau in which the pyramids take a position was particularly chosen as the creating place just because the area includes lots of hidden water streams. The pyramids were designed above limestone layers which can possess spots between them loaded with running (flux) water. These kinds of distinctive layers of rock referred to as aquifers broadcast electricity in the upward direction because they take underground water to the surface area. The significant volume flow (flux) of the River Nile which is given into these aquifers produces an electrical current. This really is known as physio-electricity. The pyramids were made to benefit from, accumulate (capacitor), as well as transmit this electrical power wirelessly. In 1901 Nikola Tesla began constructing the Wardenclyffe Tower (Tesla Tower). He acknowledged historical scientific knowledge and started to reeducate the World by exhibiting what the Egyptians discovered and systematically manufactured over 4000 years back. If the Egyptians were to utilize an insulating housing around the pyramids and reinstalled a capstone antenna (plated with an electricity running and transporting metal like silver) their pyramids would possibly one more time produce, store and produce wirelessly this no cost and unlimited electromagnetic energy. Even though these are generally centuries old they might be up to now allowed to work as utility producing power plants. Their principal framework is totally still in effect. Some 80 in the past Nikola Tesla utilized a set up wherein he employed a 6 feet metallic antenna rod and may possibly take out electricity free of charge that operated a 60 kW AC motor which has been later managed to do inside a test electric automobile. The above set up produced by Tesla was so useful that it can run the test automobile Pierce-Arrow at a remarkable 90 miles per hour. Throughout the year 1932 the above principle was again analyzed and executed efficiently by an additional scientist Dr. Moray by means of a cheap long copper wire as the antenna for getting free electromagnetic waves in the air. In the above experiments, we are able to think about antenna basically like a transducer for changing free EM into AC or vice versa. It simply has two stages of operation: one is the receiving antenna which plucks free EM (offered as RFs) and generates it to the electronic or electrical gadgets for their use, in the second stage the AC is transported back to air by way of transferring antennas from these types of gadgets through radiant energy. The quickest antenna is a length of cable, connected at one end to a transmitter unit or receiver end. More frequently, the radiating/receiving component is regular far away from the transmitter or receiver, and Alternating current is delivered to or from the antenna through a transmission line, also referred to as a feed line or feeder. You will find quite a lot of free energy in the air above that the application of lengthier wire antenna greater than five hundred feet or strung beyond head height can make harmful magnitudes of electrical current. Consult any electrician and he will possibly certainly inform you that Earth is normally generally known as ground while talking about electricity circuitry. This individual may also clarify that DC electric current tends to make its way to ground or earth. A lightning rod, created by Benjamin Franklin, shows this. In case lightning strikes a building it will preferentially have an effect on the rod and be implemented to ground through the wire, instead of transferring by means of the building, where it may possibly result in a fire or produce electrocution. The Planet - the floor we take a position on, move around on, rest on, play. run on, travel on and develop on is negative electrically charged and plays the role of a circular capacitor. In keeping with Canada’s Department of Natural Resources - http://cfs.nrcan.gc.ca/pages/160 - The offers a net negative charge of between 400,000 and 5000,00 coulombs, simultaneously the same positive charge is installed over the surroundings above earth's surface It says: “There is about a 300 000 volt (V) potential variance between the Earth’s surface and the electrosphere, which provides an average electric field strength of about 6 V/metre (m) all through the atmosphere. Near the surface, the fine-weather electric field strength is related to 100 V/m..” Average height of a man is 6 feet or 2 meters so 100 V/m x 2 meters = 200 Volts 6 feet off the ground. Wikipedia also promises that Earth’s atmosphere is electrically charged. They expose the reality by unveiling the following justification - “The dimensions of atmospheric electricity may be seen as proportions of improvement of potential between a point of the Earth’s surface, and a point somewhere in the air above it. The atmosphere in numerous regions can often be discovered to be at different local potentials, which vary from that of the earth sometimes even by around 3000 Volts within 100 feet (30 m). The electrostatic field and the difference of potential of the earth field based on investigations, is in summer about 60 to 100 volts and in winter 300 to 500 volts per meter of difference in height, a basic estimation gives the outcome that when such a collector is organized for instance on the ground, and a second one is fitted vertically over it at a distance of 2000 meters and both are linked by a carrying out cable, there is certainly a difference in potential in summer of about 2,000,000 volts and in winter even of 6,000,000 volts and more.”http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Atmospheric_electricity The above documents are precisely consistent with what Nikola Tesla and Dr. Thomas Henry Moray verified about 80 a long time ago and tried their best to advise the world about it, that planet earth and we are enclosed by a envelope of free electrical energy, it's almost understanding the appropriate procedure for tapping and removing this limitless source of free energy for running any preferred tools on earth. Moray might convincingly gather this free energy from air and light up 35 nos of 100 watt bulbs and 1200 watt iron constantly with each other, Solar electricity has been widely utilized and used in today's world but the most critical thing these devices might be lost is effectiveness. The producers and engineers must basically recognize Tesla and Moray principles and help make the solar panels more effective by utilizing much less reflective materials on them. Solar panels reveal many of the sun rays during the day except for when the rays are flawlessly perpendicular on these kinds of devices. Reflecting sun rays signifies wasting valuable EM energy. The law if reflection narrates that in specular reflection the event wave angle on a specific surface matches the angle at which it's shown back. Solar panels material and the glass indicate the majority of the energy that may be elsewhere stored the whole day and night 24x7, freely available of cost. To be able to transfer the existing solar panels into extremely beneficial energy transforming devices or energy getting antennas, is to render these devices with non-reflective material painted black. Black will soak up all radiant energy contained in the atmosphere whether or not its day or night it won;t actually matter, the solar panels will be able to have the ability to change sun energy into electricity in day time and EM energy into electricity throughout night, allowing a perfect free energy producing machine.]]> 797 0 0 0 642 0 0 643 https://makingcircuits.com/ 642 1 How to Build a Cellphone Display Light Triggered Remote Control Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/cellphone-display-light-triggered-remote-control-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:20:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=799 The suggested cell phone display light remote control circuit could possibly be observed in the presented diagram. The information might be known from the following clarification: The circuit fundamentally includes three phases: the left flip flop stage utilizing NAND gates, the center delay ON stage applying BJTs T1, T2 and the right side is a light detector and processor circuit stage implementing the IC 4017. When power is first switched, the capacitor attached across pin15/positive of IC 4017 resets the IC making certain that at begin pin 4 and pin 2 of the IC generates logic zero. Presuming the cell phone display to be inactive, the LDR is kept at complete darkness being sure an entirely neutral and a deactivated situation of the circuit. Right now guess a call is made on the linked cell phone, it's display lights up producing a low resistance on the LDR which often permits a confident "clock" to strike pin14 of the IC 4017. This causes the IC to move its logic high from its pin3 to pin2. At this position the cell phone display light duration or the call duration become irrelevant could be disregarded. Nevertheless the high at pin2 starts charging C2 via R2 to be able to switch on the delay ON timer comprised of T1 and T2. Believe absolutely no additional call is created on the cell phone in this required and the display is permitted to close off, pin2 goes on charging C2 until the potential stage at the base of T1 goes up to a point of saturation turning on T1 and T2. T2 collector immediately directs a positive signal at pin15 of IC 4017 forcing it to reset getting rid of the pin2 high across C2 and restoring the IC to its earlier standby position. In spite of this, believe while C2 was charging and before T1 can perform an additional call was designed on the cell phone, might have produced another "clock" at pin14 of the IC4017, making its output to shift from pin2 to pin4. In the above circumstance eliminating pin2 high stops the delay ON timer from signaling and its role is taken away in this circumstance but the high shift at pin4 transmits a positive pulse to the flip flop stage, leading to the relay to alter state either from N/C to N/O or vice versa based upon its first scenario. The moment the flip flop gets involved itself and the relay into a flipped mode, a positive from the relevant output of either N1 or N2 is given back to pin15 of IC 4017 resetting it back to its original standby position for the next activating cycle. Consequently the relay becomes effectively started or deactivated for toggling the associated load ON/OFF with the above methods. All following couple of calls made on the modem cell phone within the stipulated time brings about the relay ON and OFF which inturn is utilized for toggling any appropriate load across the contacts. The unit might be regarded as completely quick and easy as a result of the incorporation of a timed and paired signal inputs from the cell phone. Parts List R1, R7, R6, R11 = 100K R2 = 330K R3, R4, R10, R8 = 10K R5, R5, R9 = 2M2 T1, T3 = BC547 T3 = BC557 D1 = 3V ZENER D2---D8 = 1N4148 C1,C3 = 1uF/25V C2 = 1000uF/25V C4, C5 = 0.22uF C6, C7 = 10uF/25V N1----N4 = IC 4093 LDR = SHOULD BE AROUND 10K TO 33K IN CELL PHONE LIGHT]]> 799 0 0 0 How to Make a Testing an MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) Surge Protector Device https://makingcircuits.com/blog/testing-an-mov-metal-oxide-varistor-surge-protector-device/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:23:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=801 An MOV will have to be linked across LINE and NEUTRAL and not LINE and GROUND, so ground might not be essential to MOVs, essentially it basically ought to be linked across the load mains input terminals. An MOV is made to protect against immediate high voltage surges which could survive for not more than a few nano seconds....for instance if there's an quick voltage spike of say 600 V for 3 nano seconds, the MOV will gladly counteract it by brief circuiting it across the associated terminals. In spite of this if this type of spike maintains even for a second it could result in the MOV to get damaged and catch fire. To establish and show the operating these particular devices you might need a 600 V AC source resulting by upgrading the domestic 220 V by means of an auto transformer, thereby making the circuit set up as demonstrated in the diagram. The figure exhibits a bridge network which rectifies the 600 V AC to 700 V DC and this DC is then fired across the MOV circuit carrying a susceptible 220 V, 10 watt lamp. This is achieved by way of a 2uF/1KV capacitor to be able to safeguard the MOV as it's not built to manage continual high surges. Generally the hooked up lamp would certainly immediately get burnt when exposed to this substantial 700 V, but the experiment will hopefully demonstrate how the enormous voltage is effectively assimilated and neutralized by the MOV preserving the bulb's life. The diode set up is not advised, simply because TVS diodes can behave like short circuit if they occur to get ruined, this could indicate the wires catching fire or the fuses blowing of. An NTC may be chosen according to its highest voltage rating specifications, this voltage rating will figure out how much immediate high voltage the device is rated to limit.]]> 801 0 0 0 How to Build a Automatic PIR Controlled Fan Circuit for Schools and Colleges https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-pir-controlled-fan-circuit-for-schools-and-colleges/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:28:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=803 In the presented diagram you can easily observe a regular preprogrammed PIR module, a 7805 voltage regulator IC stage for providing the PIR, and a effortless 12 V transistor/relay driver stage. The PIR module has three terminals, the best one is the ground terminal, center one is the positive +3.3V or +5V, and the left terminal is the responsive output lead of the device. When the specific designated (+) and (-) terminals of the PIR device are linked to the stipulated supply voltages, the device immediately turns into responsive and commences "thinking". No human occurrence or movement ought to be produced ahead of the unit's lens through this initial turn on period for around a minute or so, until the device locks ON and puts itself into an alert or a ready stand by position. The unit now evolves into ready and reacts to even the slightest human movement or existence in front of its lens by producing a positive supply at its output terminal, this high at its output terminal continues as far as a human occurrence is identified within a radial selection of around 20 meters in front of the PIR device. The output becomes a zero voltage the moment the human existence moves away or is taken away. The above precise high/low voltage reply at the output lead turns into ideally suited or available for a transistor relay driver level as revealed in the diagram. When the PIR output is high as a result of the occurrence of a human (children in classroom), the transistor BC547 base obtains the +3.3V out from the appropriate lead of the device and immediately switches ON the relay. The relay consequently switches ON the fan and the system remains ON provided that the students occupy the premise. When the students entrust and vacate the idea, the PIR instantly switches OFF its output to a zero voltage level, in spite of this the existence of the 470uF/25V capacitor at the output lead of the PIR stops the BC547 from obtaining switched off instantaneously somewhat maintains it ON for a couple seconds more after the PIR has reverted its output to zero. After this delay the BC547 also gets deactivated, switching OFF the relay and the fan or almost every other preferred load in any way that could be wired with the relay. The above circuit might be efficiently altered as provided below for working lights, with a feature making certain that it's executed only at nighttime and not throughout the daytime when sufficient daylight is available. PIR light switch relay driver circuit with darkness detector]]> 803 0 0 0 How to Make a Solar Garden Light with Programmable Timer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/solar-garden-light-with-programmable-timer-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:30:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=805 Talking about the offered solar garden light with timer circuit diagram, we observe a handful of IC 4060 timer phases connected with each other to develop a couple of sequential programmable timers. Throughout day time when the solar panel is active, the hooked up battery is permitted to charge by means of it, while the 4060 timers are kept inactive as a result of the existence of the positive voltage from the panel to pin12 of the upper 4060 IC. When darkness strikes, based upon the choice of the zener diode between the solar panel positive and pin12 of the upper 4060 IC, the voltage is carried down to zero permitting pin12 to get a resetting zero logic by means of the attached 1M resistor. Once such things happen the upper IC 4060 commence counting and after a specific delay set by its pin9 capacitor and pin10 pot, its pin3 turns out high. The BC547 associated with this pin3 now triggers all the associated LEDs lighting them after the preferred period of time has passed. The 1N4148 diode hooked up across this pin3 and pin11 of the upper 4060 freezes the IC counting method and latches the LEDs completely ON. In spite of this, in such a circumstance, the lower BC547 also gets activated and resets pin12 of the lower IC 4060 which often starts counting, and exactly the same after a set time period dependent upon its own pin9 capacitor and pin10 pot values switches ON its pin3. This high from pin3 of the lower IC 4060 latches itself on account of the occurrence of the 1N4148 diode across its pin3 and pin11, and it also grounds the base of the LED BC547 driver such that most LEDs turn off. The whole solar garden light timer circuit currently latches within this position until the next morning, when the rising positive voltage from the solar panel one more time resets the upper IC pin12 and the whole circuit. The circuit remains inactive until dark. The pattern consequently will keep repeating as described above.]]> 805 0 0 0 How to Build a 32V, 3 Amp LED Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/32v-3-amp-led-driver-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:33:03 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=807 The transformer is wound over a normal EE ferrite core obtaining a central cross sectional area of a minimum of 7 square mm. Talking about the figure, the upper two primary winding are created up 30 turns of 0.3 mm diameter super enameled copper wire. The lower primary auxiliary primary winding contains 4 turns of the similar wire as above. The secondary is wound with 22 turns of 0.6mm super enameled copper wire. The methods are given below: First start winding the upper 30 turns, secure its ends on the bobbin turns by soldering, and put a thick layer of insulation tape over these turns. Next, wind the secondary 22 turns and solder its end terminals on the other side of the bobbin leads, put a layer of thick insulation tape. Over the above layer start winding the auxiliary 4 turns and as above obtain the ends properly on the primary side leads of the bobbin, again put some layers of insulation over this, At last, wind the second 30 primary turns beginning with the earlier 30 turn end, and acquire the end over certainly one of the leads of the bobbin on the primary side. Cover the completed winding with further layers of insulation tapes. You should definitely be aware of the finished leads correctly so that you will also don't produce wrong connections with the circuit and result in a potential fire danger. Parts List All 1 watt, CFR R1 = 10E R2 = 1M R3 = 470E R4 = 100E All 1/4 watt MFR 5% R5 = 470E R6 = preset 22k R7 = 2k2 C1 = 10uF/400V C2 = 2.2nF/250V C3 = 220pF/1kV C4 = 2200uF/50V D1---D4 = 1N4007 D5, D6 = BA159 shunt regulator = TL431 opto = 4n35 T1 = MJE13005]]> 807 0 0 0 422 0 0 423 422 1 445 0 0 446 445 1 How to Make a Arduino Mains Failure Battery Backup Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/arduino-mains-failure-battery-backup-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:35:40 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=809 The most basic solution to put into practice the offered application is as simple as utilizing two diodes as demonstrated in the above diagram. The layout demonstrates two diodes with their cathodes associated collectively and anodes terminated to a 14 V source and anodes to the positive of a 12 V battery source respectively. The typical cathodes of the diodes are additional hooked up to a IC 7805 IC whose output is lastly put on to the Arduino board. When mains exists the 14 V supply guarantees s continuous trickle charge supply to the connected battery via R1 as well as gives the Arduino borad by means of D1 and the 7805 IC. Within this circumstances D1 cathode encounters a much higher potential than the cathode of D2 due a comparatively lower battery potential at D2 cathode. The above circumstance maintains D2 reverse one-sided enabling the battery charge to stay blocked and pass only the adapter voltage to the Arduino board. However the moment the mains provide fails, D1 immediately prevents carrying out and allows D2 to get forward not balanced to ensure that now the battery immediately requires over and starts providing the Arduino via the 7805 IC.]]> 809 0 0 0 376 0 1 How to Build a Soil Moisture Sensor Meter with Automatic Water Sprayer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/soil-moisture-sensor-meter-with-automatic-water-sprayer-circuit/ Fri, 24 Jul 2015 15:38:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=811 Talking about the presented schematic we observe a basic yet seriously precise soil moisture sensor meter with an automatic predetermined water shower system for rebuilding the soil moisture stage to optimum points. The design is dependent on a single voltage sensor/LED driver IC LM3914 or a LM3915. The demonstrated sensor pins that happen to be essentially two brass rods are set up as voltage sensors across the essential soil area where it might be positioned. The voltage across these pins rely upon the level of moisture display across that specific soil area. This felt voltage proportionate to the soil moisture level is used across pin5 of the IC for the needed comparison with an integrated reference voltage level. The threshold level exactly where the shower pump ought to be turned on is placed by P1. Based upon this setting, the IC internal circuitry experiences the soil moisture and creates a shifting sequential low logic across the presented 10 outputs beginning with pin1 to pin10. This felt output across the appropriate IC outputs are mentioned by 10 specific LEDs which illuminate in sequence as a reaction to the rising or depleting soil moisture levels. The LED illumination sequencing style might be chosen to imitate a bar mode or a dot mode by adequately placement the pin9 switch of the IC to both ON or OFF. The phase consisting BC547 and BC557 make up the relay driver phase for managing the motor pump switching as per the user choice. The base of the PNP transistor is properly incorporated with any of the output pins of the IC relying at exactly what moisture threshold the user desires the motor to be began or stopped. For instance guess pin15 establishes a specific moisture threshold level of the soil and the user senses it to be the unsafe level at which the motor ought to be began to be able to bring back the soil moisture, then this pinout could possibly be selected and connected with the base of the BC557 transistor for the mentioned motor switching. Once the motor is activated the soil is showered until its moisture level is renewed to the preferred level and this encourages the IC to revert its sequence from pin15 to pin14 and toward pin10, switching OFF the motor and the shower. The above method continues repeating ensuring the soil moisture level by no means goes down below the unwanted parched situation.]]> 811 0 0 0 How to Build a Automatic PWM Door Open/Close Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-pwm-door-openclose-controller-circuit/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 14:41:56 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=814 If an Arduino based PWM is meant to function, the IC phase in the above diagram could possibly be taken away and the PWM from the Arduino may very well be utilized instantly at the base of the mosfet via a 10 ohm resistor as demonstrated below   Parts List R1 = 10K R2 = 47 OHMS P1 = 100K POT D1, D2 = 1N4148 D3 = MUR1560 C1,C2 = 0.1uF/100V Z1 = 15V, 1/2 WATT Q1 = IRF540 N1---N6 = IC MM74C14 DPDT = DPST SWITCH OR DPDT RELAY The to start with circuit above, which can be not making use of an Arduino input is set up around 6 hex-inverter Schmidt NOT gates from the IC MM74C14, where N1 forms the essential rectangular wave pulse generator, N2 is utilized for detecting the duty cycle of the pulses produced by N1 via the pot P1, although the remaining gates are wired as buffers. P1 is employed for figuring out the speed exactly where the door ought to actually work instantly. The ultimate PWM output accomplished from the outputs of the buffers N3 to N6 is put on to a driver mosfet Q1 which evolves into to blame for managing the speed of the connected motor based upon the given food PWM data. A DPDT switch may be seen rigged with the motor terminals and the mosfet, this switch is utilized for getting an immediate braking and reversal of motor rotation. The valuable thing concerning this circuit is the fact that it may rely on a H-bridge driver configuration for attaining the motor flipping actions, quite the identical is used through a regular DPDT switch. According to the request, for performing the automatic door starting and shutting via photo delicate device, the DPDT might be replaced with a DPDT relay and the coil of this relay could possibly be consequently managed by means of the meant photo sensitive device (photo-interrupter) for example a photo diode or an LDR. The photo interrupter level is going to be updated quickly.]]> 814 0 0 0 How to Make a Remote Controlled Pulley Hoist Mechanism Circuit Part-2 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/remote-controlled-pulley-hoist-mechanism-circuit-part-2/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 14:48:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=816 The enclosed relays in the Rx PCB will function as a reaction to the pressing of the associated buttons on the Tx transmitter module, so it's all about tracing out the N/O, N/C and the poles of these two relays and wire them up with the external heavy duty relays for enforcing the preferred motor reverse forward motions. The following diagram thoroughly details the wiring layout of the relays, once the wiring is finished in accordance with the demonstrated diagram one of the buttons may cause the motor to rotate clockwise while pressing the other would certainly flip the motor direction anticlockwise.   When no buttons are functional the motor would stationery. The motor would wind or unwind the pulley ropes as long as the appropriate buttons of the Tx is held pressed by the user and would halt once produced. On the other hand, you could look at having fun with the in-built Rx modules "relay operation selector" connections by inserting the plugs properly until the needed spec are located whereby the relay is permitted to toggle ON/OFF with each and every alternate press of the Tx buttons along with the user do not have to maintain the pertinent Tx button pressed constantly for performing the meant motor rotations.]]> 816 0 0 0 How to Make a Remote Controlled Pulley Hoist Mechanism Circuit Part-1 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/remote-controlled-pulley-hoist-mechanism-circuit-part-1/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 14:51:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=818 Here we observe a horizontal spiral drill bit formed shaft with its teeth locked within the teeth of a normal circular gear wheel. Now, as the spiral gear is rotated by way of a motor its teeth tend to push and roll in the forward motion pushing the teeth of the circular gear in an exact direction leading to a synchronized rotation of the lower circular gear. The circular gear is a common which is often used for raising or moving the load and in case the motor goes wrong because of power failure or any other interruption, the spiral gear makes certain that the circular gear teeth get locked across the spiral gear teeth and evolves into virtually motionless under such circumstances. This theory is exactly what can make a worm gear system recommended for the suggested bicycle hoist mechanism. The following diagram exhibits to the technique wherein the above described worm gear mechanism might be executed in between parallel supports and with the aid of two adjacent rope and pulley assembly. As per a visual demonstration it might be observed that whenever the motor is actuated, the gear assembly begins moving in a particular fixed direction such that the load is pulled upwards by means of coiling of the rope around the two adjacent pulleys, the reverse occurs when the motor direction is flipped. The central rod which can be noticed supported (pivoted) over firm structures on either side ought to be improved with sealed ball bearing rings to be able to allow a smooth rotation of the whole system. The NEXT publish will give details of ways the above mechanical design could possibly be regulated by way of a RF remote control unit]]> 818 0 0 0 How to Build a PWM Air Blower Controller Circuit for Biomass Cook Stoves https://makingcircuits.com/blog/pwm-air-blower-controller-circuit-for-biomass-cook-stoves/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 14:56:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=820 The above described fan speed controller really should be operated by means of an uninterruptible power supply system from a standby well-recharged battery back up stage. The battery consequently usually requires an automatic battery charger circuit to ensure that it remains prepared for offering an immediate nonstop power to the fan, being sure a smooth and a nonstop supply to the motor and feed of air to the biomass cook stove. Each one of these problems are satisfied in the following circuit diagram which happens to be an opamp based automatic battery charger circuit. The charger circuit as presented below uses a number of opamps for the needed detection and cut-off throughout the battery full and battery low level thresholds. The 10k preset attached at pin3 of the left 741 IC is placed such that at any time the battery touches the full charge level the output of the IC just goes high deactivating the appropriate TIP127, cutting off the charging voltage to the battery. The glowing LED implies charging ON circumstance of the battery and vice versa. The right hand side IC 741 phase is placed for supervising the low voltage condition of the battery. When it arrives the lower threshold, pin2 of the IC turns into less than the reference pin3, which inturn leads to the output of the IC to go high deactivating the connected TIP127. The load now is inhibited from obtaining any power from the battery.This threshold cut off is set by modifying the 10k preset at pin2 of the IC Here too the base LED signifies the pertinent circumstances, glow implies battery low, while shut-off signifies battery above the lower threshold. The two diodes are associated with a particular purpose, while the mains is found the 14V supply from the SMPS being somewhat higher than battery voltage maintains the horizontal diode reverse one-sided and permits only the SMPS voltage to achieve the load or the fan blower by means of the vertical 1N5402 diode. In the event when mains voltage breaks down, the horizontal diode associated at the collector of the right hand side TIP127 immediately gets forward not balanced changing the dead SMPS supply with the battery supply, confirming an continuous flow of the supply to the fan. The 14V transformerless SMPS could possibly be purchased ready made from the market or developed personally. A couple of appropriate circuits might be observed in the following links: 12V 1 Amp MOSFET SMPS 12 V SMPS using VIPer22A IC 12 V SMPS using TNY tiny switch IC All the above models will have to be tweaked at their output phases for obtaining the essential 14 V.]]> 820 0 0 0 How to Build a Grid Transformer Fire Hazard Protector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/grid-transformer-fire-hazard-protector-circuit/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 14:59:37 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=822 Note: T1 needs to be located as close as possible to the transformer, while D5 needs to be stored exposed to ambient atmosphere, well removed from the transformer heat. Parts List R1 = 2k7, R2, R5, R6 = 1K R3 = 100K, R4 = 1M D1---D4, D6, D7---D10 = 1N4007, D5 = 1N4148, VR1 = 200 Ohms, 1Watt, Potentimeter C1 = 1000uF/25V, T1 = BC547, T2 = 2N2907, IC = 741, OPTO = LED/LDR Combo (see text). Relay = 12 V, SPDT. amp spec as per transformer rating]]> 822 0 0 0 How to Build a Laptop Anti-theft Security Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/laptop-anti-theft-security-alarm-circuit/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:03:22 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=824 The whole justification for the above circuit could also be present in this article A considerably less complicated approach could possibly be by utilizing a capacitive sensor switch circuit as demonstrated below. The supply will have to be controlled from a 6V or a 12V battery. The unit may very well be linked to the laptop, any individual heading close or trying to get hold of the object would likely immediately activate the alarm. The idea continues to be described thoroughly in this post. ]]> 824 0 0 0 How to Build a Aquarium Fish Feeder Timer Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/aquarium-fish-feeder-timer-controller-circuit/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:06:51 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=826 As demonstrated in the suggested fish feeder timer controller circuit, N1, N2 and N3, N4 are the four NAND gates from the IC 4093, set up as flip flop timer phases. N1, N2 forms the 7 second delay timer, the period might be modified and set with the aid of the 1M pot, exactly the same N3, N4 is wired up as the second 5.2 second delay generator stage. IC 4060 is intended as the 24 hour timer circuit for the needed cycling of the preferred time sequences. When the circuit is operated, the 0.1uF capacitors at the inputs of N1 and N3 ground the specific inputs via the 100k resistors, providing an adverse latch across gate outputs, which often maintain transistor relay driver turned OFF. Right now, for beginning the circuit the "start" button is pressed which reverts the gate latches to positive turning on the relays at the same time. This problem forces pin12 of IC 4060 to turn out to be high to ensure that it remains disabled for the present time. According to the presented settings of the 1M pots, after nearly 5 minutes the capacitor at the N3 output charges up first forcing the N4 input to go high which one more time returns the latch to negative switching off the 5 second relay first, precisely similarly N2 relay follows and gets shut OFF after next 2 seconds. The above scenario leads to the output of N2 and the input of N1 to go "low" which means that now pin12 of IC 4060 is allowed at the needed "low" which enables it to commence its counting until the mentioned 24 hour time is elapsed, when its pin3 goes high leading to an automatic activating of the above described cycle. The method right now maintains repeating forever provided that the aquarium feeder circuit is held in the powered condition.]]> 826 0 0 0 How to Make a Chasing Car Tail Light Circuit Using 1 watt LEDs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/chasing-car-tail-light-circuit-using-1-watt-leds/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:09:58 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=828     Chasing Car Tail Light Circuit Using 1 watt LEDs]]> 828 0 0 0 How to Make a Industrial Tank water fill/drain controller circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/industrial-tank-water-filldrain-controller-circuit/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:14:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=830 Talking about offered tank fill/drain sequence controller circuit diagram, when power is very first used at the emitter of the PNP 2N2907, its base capacitor briefly permits it to perform until pin10 of the bottom-right 4017 latches the base of the transistor into a long term conduction method. The circuit right now gets latched and powered. All the 0.1uF capacitors associated with the pin14 of the 4017 make sure that the IC becomes reset and in a standby position with their appropriate outputs held at a "0" logic. This guarantees that most of the relays stay in a deactivated position at power turn on. Additionally, the input capacitor of N1 resets N1/N2 into a negative latch to ensure that the output of N2 starts with a logic zero maintaining the relay close off. Right now when the "start" button is pushed, N1 negative latch is reverted to a positive latch producing a positive at the output of N2 which often triggers RL1, turning on the motor solenoid inlet valve that could be associated across its N/O contacts and mains. The inlet valve maintains water running in the tank until it gets to the specific threshold, activating the reed relay into a closed position. This steps one more time grounds the N1 input by means of the series capacitor reverting the N1/N2 latch to its original negative condition. The inlet valve here gets turn off. Shutting off the above relay transistor brings about an optimistic pulse to appear at pin14 of the connected IC 4017, which replies by shifting its output high logic from its pin3 to pin2, pin2 now turns into high which starts charging the input capacitor of N3 via the 1M setting until after the fixed delay the capacitor evolves into fully incurred leading to a high logic at the input of N3. N3 reacts by producing its output low which inturn forces the input of N4 to turn out to be low and its output high....toggling ON the hooked up relay driver stage. This is linked to the water pump and keeps it turned on until the input capacitor of N4 charges fully, reverting N4 output to zero and shutting off the motor. This delay is dependent upon the 1M pot at the input of N4. The switching OFF of the above relay transistor leads to the next IC 4017 to push its logic high to its pin2 which quite exactly the same is associated with the N5/N6 timing sequence activating RL3 and its connected drain solenoid but only until the N6 capacitor gets fully imposed in which the relay shuts off after a delay set by the N6 1M pot The above switching exactly like in earlier phases affects the last IC 4017 which transfers a logic high at its pin2 activating a temporary high logic at the input of N1, one more time reverting its latch to a confident mode, simulating the pressing of the commence switch....the method commences over again, and repeats for 3 times until a high logic is forwarded to pin10 of the bottom right 4017. This high logic blocks the PNP 2N2907 conduction breaking the power supply to the circuit via the PNP, immediately switching OFF the entire circuit into a stand still. The power now really should be turned OFF and activated again to be able to bring back the circuit in a standby position. RL1 = Activates water solenoid RL2 = Starts 220V water pump (2 min ON delay is adjusted by N3 pot, "t" minutes ON is determined by N4 pot) RL3 = Opens drain solenoid (t1 is set by adjusting N6 pot)]]> 830 0 0 0 How to Build a Car Power Window Controller Circuit - Part 1 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/car-power-window-controller-circuit-part-1/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:20:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=832 Window Glass Up/Down Controller implementing a Single switch The demonstrated car power window controller circuit fundamentally involves three stages: a transistor latch including a current sensor, a NAND gate based flip flop stage and a relay driver stage for flipping the motor actions alternately. The pointed out lock/unlock switch toggles the flip flop stage created by participating three NAND gates from the IC 4093, whose output replies with a long term high and low alternately with every push of the switch. Electronic Car Power Window Controller Circuit Parts list R1, R3, R6, R7 = 100K R5,R8 = 2M2 R9 = 4K7 C1,C4 = 22uF/25V C2,C3 = 0.22uF T1,T3 = BC547 T4= 8050 T2 =8550 RL1,RL2 = 12V/20AMP ALL DIODES = 1N4007 R10 = TO BE CALCULATED N1---N3 = IC 4093 This switch additionally ensures that the latch section consisting T1 and T2 gets triggered to be able to permit the supply voltage to achieve the remaining section of the circuit. The output from the flip flop obtained at N2 pin4 is provided to a relay driver stage for signaling the power window motor with a forward or a reverse motion based upon the position of the window glass. It has got to be guaranteed that while hooking up the motor the polarity of the wires are set such that a high at pin4 of N2 actuates the window in the closing mode, and vice versa. The relay is a heavy duty DPDT relay whose N/C, N/O contact connections with the motor allow the motor to perform the needed to and fro motion. Generally, reed switches are being used for detecting the the finish of the glass up and down actions in an effort to prevent the motor from obtaining loaded and damaged, in spite of this here we certainly have a captured another and a much sophisticated method. In the recommended car power window controller circuit we now have used a current sensor stage by means of T3, which identifies a mounting current across R10 and switches ON itself when the level crosses a set threshold. When T3 switches ON it breaks the T1/T2 latch disconnecting the supply to the motor. In spite of this if a reed switch is integrated for the above activities, the reed contacts located for detecting the up and the down thresholds of the glass might be wired across C1, and T3 stage could be taken away completely. R10 might be restored with a wire link (see figure below). Making use of two switches The above design could possibly be a lot less complicated if two separate push buttons are suggested for the up/down operations of the window glass. The less complicated power window circuit which includes just a few number of BJTs may be observed below. Four of the above circuits will have to be placed on each door of the vehicle for the preferred power window switching. Within the next write-up we are going to talk about the brake switch controller stage for the above described design.]]> 832 0 0 0 How to Build a 1.5 V Inductance Meter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/1-5-v-inductance-meter-circuit/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:26:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=836 Waveform Image: ]]> 836 0 0 0 How to Make a Lithium Polymer Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/lithium-polymer-battery-charger-circuit/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:30:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=838 The section at the significant right which includes an opamp is the over charge cut off stage and ensures that the battery is rarely permitted to overcharge, and cuts off the supply to the battery the moment the over charge threshold is attained. The 10 k preset placed at pin3 of the opamp is utilized for setting the over charge level, for a 3.7 V li-polymer battery this might be set such that the output of the opamp goes high whenever the battery is charged to 4.2 V (for a single cell). Since a diode is located at the positive of the battery, the LM 317 output needs to be set to about 4.2 + 0.6 = 4.8 V (for a single cell) for compensating the followed diode forward voltage drop. For 3 cells in series, this value will have to be modified to 4.2 x 3 + 0.6 = 13.2 V When power is very first turned on (this ought to be completed after hooking up the battery across the presented position), the battery being in a discharged state pulls the supply from the LM317 to the current level of its voltage level, let's believe it to be 3.6 V. The above circumstance retains pin3 of the opamp well below the reference voltage level fixed at pin2 of the IC, producing a low logic at pin6 or the output of the IC. Right now as the battery starts building up charge its voltage level begins rising until it attains the 4.2 V mark which pulls pin3 potential of the opamp beyond pin2 forcing the IC's output to go immediately high or at the supply level. The above encourages the indicator LED to light up turn on the BC547 transistor attached across the ADJ pin pf the LM 317. As soon as this occurs the ADJ pin of the LM 317 receives grounded forcing it to turn off its output supply to the lipo battery. On the other hand at this moment the complete circuit becomes latched in this cut off position as a result of the feedback voltage to pin3 of the opamp via the 1K resistor. This procedure guarantees that the battery under no situation is able to obtain the charging voltage once the over charge limit is achieved. The circumstances remains locked until the method is turned OFF and reset for likely beginning a new charging cycle. In the above recommended 11.1V battery pack, there are 3 cells in series and the battery poles are shut down separately by means of a connector. It's suggested to charge the individual batteries separately by spotting the poles properly from the connector. The diagram demonstrates the simple wiring information of the cells with the connector: ]]> 838 0 0 0 453 0 0 454 453 1 456 454 0 461 456 1 650 0 0 654 https://makingcircuits.com/ 650 1 711 0 0 715 https://makingcircuits.com/ 711 1 How to Build a Cellphone Controlled Car Starter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/cellphone-controlled-car-starter-circuit/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:33:56 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=841 The submit offers a basic cellphone activated remote control circuit which can be utilized as a cellphone controlled remote car starter. The unit would certainly cost less than $20 to build.
I have already taken care of more than a few fascinating cellphone remote control circuits within this blog, most of which could be executed to manage or toggle some electrical equipment remotely utilizing ones own cell phone, exclusively.
The fundamental cellphone regulated relay circuit stage associated with all the earlier circuits may be additionally efficiently employed for beginning the ignition system of a vehicle, by means of the owners cell phone. The schematic for the same might be observed below and may understood with the following justification:

Cellphone Controlled Car Ignition Starter Circuit

The design is essentially a transistorized audio amplifier circuit, which can be placed for amplifying the designated ringtone from the nearby cell phone modem. The cellphone demonstrated with the circuit remains completely associated with the circuit and forms the essential section of the whole program.
The diagram demonstrates a NOKIA 1280 cellphone as the modem, in spite of this any inexpensive cellphone could be raised for the reason supplied the cellphone consists of the "assign tone" benefit discretely for the specific preferred numbers.
The number of the owner or the user is first stored and assigned with an appropriate ringtone accessible within the cellphone modem to ensure that the modem replies simply to the owners phone and not to some other irrelevant numbers. The default ringtone of the modem is placed to "empty" to be able to mute all other unwanted calls.
When the owner calls the moden cellphone, the ringtone is identified by the circuit and amplified to a level adequate for the relay to get energized. The relay continues energized for as long as the call stays linked.
Considering that the relay contacts are set up or built-in with the ignition switch of the car, instantly causes the ignition method of the vehicle beginning the engine and the whole system.
A feed back from the initiated alternator ensures that the relay is immediately shut off regardless of the call duration from the owner's cellphone.
The car ignition hence has the capacity to begin without the owner or the driver needing to get inside the car and undergo the manual procedures. The car begins remotely by way of the owner's cell phone, a fail proof and a foolproof process yet as cheap as you are able to consider.
Parts List for the cell phone managed car ignition starter circuit
R1 = 22k
R2 = 220 Ohms,
R3 = 100K,
R4,R6,R7 = 4K7
R5 = 1K
R8 = 33K
R13 = 100 ohms,
T1, T2, T4, T5 = BC547
T3 = BC557,
C1 = 0.22uF
C2,C3, C4 = 100uF/25v
D1, D2 = 1N4007
L1 = 40 mH coil, example: a piezo buzzer coil will do.
diode = 1N4007
Relay = 12V/SPDT
Modem = NOKIA 1280
The charger section is demonstrated in the diagram, and ought to stay associated comtely with the connected cellphone modem.

]]> 841 0 0 0 How to Make a 3.7 V Class-D Speaker Amplifier for Differential Analog Input https://makingcircuits.com/blog/3-7-v-class-d-speaker-amplifier-for-differential-analog-input/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:38:41 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=844 A lot more information regarding the IC BD BD5460 could be obtained from the following datasheet of the IC.   ]]> 844 0 0 0 How to Make a Small Induction Cookware https://makingcircuits.com/blog/small-induction-cookware/ Sat, 25 Jul 2015 15:43:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=846 The schematic could be the just like described within my earlier post, that could be essentially a Royer based design, as demonstrated right here: L1 is created by using 5 to 6 turns of 8mm copper tube into a spherical-helical shape as demonstrated above in an effort to suit a small steel bowl in the middle. The coil might be as well squeezed flat into a spiral form if a small steel pan is meant to serve as the cookware as presented below:   L2 could very well be constructed by winding a 3mm thick super enameled copper wire over a thick ferrite rod, the number of turns needs to be experimented until a 2mH value is accomplished across its terminals. TR1 could possibly be a 20V 30amp transformer or an SMPS power supply. The actual induction heater circuit is pretty simple with its design and will not require much of a clarification, the couple of things that should be looked after are provided below: The resonance capacitor ought to be comparatively nearer to the main working coil L1 and ought to be created by hooking up around 10nos of 0.22uF/400V in parallel. The capacitors needs to be strictly nonpolar and metalized polyester type. Even though the design might appear quite simple, choosing the center tap within the spirally wound design might cause some headache simply because a spiral coil might have an unsymmetrical layout which makes it hard to identify the precise center tap for the circuit. It may be produced by a number of trial and error or by utilizing an LC meter. A wrongly situated center tap could possibly force the circuit to work abnormally or generating unequal heating of the mosfets, or the whole circuit more than likely are not able to oscillate under a toughest circumstances.]]> 846 0 0 0 481 0 0 482 481 1 How to Make a Switching OFF Lights in a Periodic Sequence https://makingcircuits.com/blog/switching-off-lights-in-a-periodic-sequence/ Sun, 26 Jul 2015 05:16:13 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=848   ]]> 848 0 0 0 How to Build a Spy Circuits - FM Bug Transmitters https://makingcircuits.com/blog/spy-circuits-fm-bug-transmitters/ Sun, 26 Jul 2015 05:24:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=850 The second instance below demonstrates an additional single transistor FM spy circuit that includes a tuned circuit or a frequency identifying phase in it. In the original prototype the coil is made by etching a spiral track layout on the PCB itself, on the other hand for optimum gain and overall performance these kinds of etched antenna coil needs to be prevented and the traditional wire wound type of coil ought to be used. Below's one more circuit you would want to learn about. The circuit essentially utilizes the “Q factor” of the tank network accomplished from the coil and the capacitor for producing a comparatively high voltage. This stepped up potential qualities the circuit with somewhat longer selection of transmission. For an enhanced overall performance ensure the coil and the capacitor are located as close as possible. Insert the coil leads as deep down the PCB as possible so that you can ensure it is tightly hugging the PCB. C2 value could possibly be tweaked for attaining a better choice reply from the circuit. If possible a 10pF could possibly be attempted. The coil consists of 5 turns of 1mm thick super enamelled copper wire, with 7mm diameter.   The next FM transmitter design is a bit different than the above kinds. Simply the design may very well be categorized as a common emitter type, as opposed to the others which are usually somewhat common base types with their design. The circuit employs an inductor at its base which adds a better saturation capability to the device which often permits the transistor to react in a more more healthy manner. The next design in the list is a lot better than its earlier alternatives since it makes use of a slug based adjustable inductor. This permits the transmitter to be tuned by changing the slug core utilizing a screwdriver. Within this design we are able to notice the coil being connected to the collector of the transistor that enables an enormous 200 meters range to the design, with a current that could be not a lot more than 5mA. The MIC stage is isolated from the base with the aid of a 1u capacitor and the acquire of the mic could be well tweaked by modifying the series 22k resistor. This circuit might be rated as the best as far range is concerned however it may well lack stability that may be enhanced, we’ll find out how in this article clarification. The stableness of the above circuit could possibly be upgraded by tapping the antenna from one top turn of the coil as demonstrated in the following figure. This really improves the reaction of the circuits as a result of a number of factors. The antenna gets removed from the collector of the transistor which enables it to operate easily without needless loading, and the falling of the antenna to the top additional enables the appropriate side of the coil to get a higher stepped up voltage brought on across itself as well as the coil creating a higher attentiveness of transmission power on the antenna. Even though this enlargement may well not actual increase the range of the device, it helps make sure that the circuit will not get rattled when hand held, or when the grip is encircled close over the circuit inside its enclosure. If you would like your bug circuit to transmit music rather than spying or eavesdropping, you might most likely find the following design fascinating. The offered FM transmitter will permit incorporating a stereo input at the same time from the source to ensure that the info contained inside both the channels enter into the air for an maximum reception. The design configuration is pretty very much like the one that’s mentioned above so would not require much of a clarification. Examining a Two Transistor Spy Circuit Adding a transistor stage to the above talked about single transistor FM transmitters could possibly allow the designs with significant sensitivity. An electret MiC itself has an integrated FET making it very economical and makes it a stand alone vibration amplifier device. Adding another transistor stage with it boosts the sensitivity of the device to too much to handle limits. As could be observed in the following diagram, the participation of an extra transistor stage accumulates to the gain of the MIC making the whole unit definitely delicate such that it now picks even the sound as low as a pin dropping on the floor. The extra transistor stops too much loading of the MIC thereby being sure much better effectiveness to the sensitivity. Five issues that that can make the circuit fantastic with it reception are: The usage of a fix capacitor in the tank circuit together with a adjustable trimmer. A low value coupling capacitor with the MIC adequate to handle the capacitive reactance of the MIC which can be around 4k at 3kHz. A 1u coupler is insured between the oscillator and the audio amplifier to be able to constitute for the low impedance given by the 47k base resistor. The coil employed is wound almost making use of super enameled copper wire which guarantees greater performance than PCB etched kind of coil. The complete circuit might be compactly designed over a small sized PCB for getting better steadiness and a drift free frequency reply.]]> 850 0 0 0 415 0 0 416 415 1 How to Build a LM317 as a Variable Voltage Regulator and Variable Current Regulator https://makingcircuits.com/blog/lm317-as-a-variable-voltage-regulator-and-variable-current-regulator/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:16:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=852 To be accurate the upper LM317 forms the variable current regulator stage while the lower behaves like a variable voltage controller stage. The input supply source is linked across the Vin and ground of the upper current regulator circuit, the output out of this stage goes to the input of the lower LM317 variable voltage regulator stage. Fundamentally both the phases are attached in series for applying a total quick and easy voltage and current regulation for the linked load which can be a laser diode in the present case. R2 is chosen to obtain a range of around 1.25A max current limit, the minimum permitted being 5mA when the full 250 ohms is placed in the path, which means the current to the laser might be set as preferred, somewhere between 5mA to 1 amp. The above is determined by utilizing the following formula: R = 1.25/max allowed current The current managed voltage provided from the upper stage is next placed on the lower LM317 voltage regulator circuit, which allows the most wanted voltage to be set between 1.25V to 30V, here the max range getting 9V since the source is a 9V battery. This really is accomplished by adjusting R4. The talked about circuit is allocated to handle not a lot more than 1.5amps, if higher current is needed, both the ICs could be replaced with LM338 for getting a max 5amp current or LM396 for a max of 10amp current.     ]]> 852 0 0 0 How to Build a 6V, 12V Battery Charger Circuit for Positive Earth Cars https://makingcircuits.com/blog/6v-12v-battery-charger-circuit-for-positive-earth-cars/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:21:07 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=855 The diagram of the offered 6V and 12V positive earth car battery charger circuit demonstrates two separate stages comprise of one LM396 adjustable voltage regulator stage and another 555 IC dependent 6V to 12V increase converter stage. The upper LN396 phase is set up to generate a changeable output selection of 1.25V to max based on the alternator voltage supply capacity, although the lower enhance converter is located to replace the 7V AC from the alternator to the needed 14V for charging an optional12V battery. The 10K preset in the LM396 circuit might be modified for attaining a continuing 7V for the linked 6V battery. The resistor displayed relating to the base and emitter of the connected BC547 transistor functions as the current limiter. The value might be chosen according to the formula: R = 0.6 x 10/Battery AH. The 555 IC boost circuit is liable for improving the 7V from the alternator to the essential levels for charging the associated 12V battery. The preset VR1 could be fine refined to get the exact 14V across the battery. The coil TR1 might be wound given below: Core: 1 inch OD Primary: 12 turns using 1mm magnet wire Secondary: 24 turns using 1mm magnet wire]]> 855 0 0 0 How to Troubleshoot Inverter Output Voltage Drop Issue https://makingcircuits.com/blog/troubleshoot-inverter-output-voltage-drop-issue/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:25:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=857 The battery AH is far too inadequate for managing a 200 watt load. To be able to attain 200 watts of power without reducing the output voltage, the very least 40 AH could well be needed from the battery. The FEts are carrying out properly and fully, the 2.5V is approximately the 50% of the supply considering that the outputs are switching at 50% duty cycle, the peak voltage might be close to the supply DC of the IC. The 8V regulator shouldn't be taken away as it's existence is not going to damage the circuit in in any case, it may be restored with a 9V for a better reply, although. The transformer primary needs to be graded at somewhat less than the battery voltage for maximum efficiency, for instance with 12V battery it might be a 9-0-9V rated. This may make sure a standard output voltage within the essential range at the same time the battery voltage falls to a pretty lower level. Considering that the IC4047 is stipulated to work with higher voltages than 12V, it is not going to influence its efficiency even though no regulator is utilized, but a regulator is actually appropriate for better safety. Amp of the battery turns into irrelevant provided that the IC highest voltage rating is not surpassed.]]> 857 0 0 0 How to Make a Knight Rider LED Scanner Circuit - Mustang Type https://makingcircuits.com/blog/knight-rider-led-scanner-circuit-mustang-type/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:29:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=859 In the presented mustang scanner LED light circuit, several 8-bit parallel-out shift register ICs 74LS164 are being used, related to the IC555 set up as the clock oscillator. The circuit could be recognized by thinking about the following two modes in the design: As might be observed in the above circuit diagram, a 3 pole, 9 throw switch is utilized as the changeover switch for imitating the 2 services described in the earlier section above. In mode1 S1 is attached as demonstrated in the circuit diagram, within this position the LEDs light up in an sequencing LED bar like fashion with every growing edge of the clocks from the IC555 until all the LED light up and the final "high" reaches pin16, when T1 briefly resets both the ICs creating in immediate shutting off of all the LEDs simultaneously. In the specific prototype the LEDs from Q9----Q16 needs to be organized such that Q16 faces Q8, while Q9 faces the outer end of the pertinent strip. The moment the above occurs, a new cycle is linked to afresh and the cycle repeats for provided the S1 position is just not transformed. In mode 2 let's think about the switch S1 associated with the positive supply, hence S1a gets linked with the +5V line, S1b gets connected with the collector of T1 while S1c with R5. Additionally the reset pin9 of IC1 and IC2 get associated with the collector of T1 whose base may be seen designed with the last output Q16 of IC2. On power turn on, the LEDs start enlightening in a BAR like mode unchanged from Q1 to Q8 and from Q9 towards Q16 as a reaction to each clock pulses provided by the astable IC 555 at pin8 of the two 74LS164 ICs. Right now the moment the high across the shifting outputs reach pin 16, T1 immediately inverts and provides a low to the serial pins1,2 of the ICs to ensure that right now the LEDs start shutting off one at a time across the arrays in a similar range as it lighted in accordance with every clock from IC555. The technique maintains duplicating as long the switch S1 position is not modified from its current position. The above two features are fairly conveniently executed and we certainly have our LEDs scan the complete array quite in the manner the actual Mustang scanner should preferably do, nevertheless with the above two services the capabilities appear a lot restricted and we may wish to insert just a few more of the benefits as could be observed in the original video. I'll maintain the post updated with the new added abilities, but meanwhile let's find out how the LEDs might set up to the above scanner design according to the request made by Mr. Dannel. For easy calculation and configuration we include 32 + 32 LEDs on each left and right strips. The arrangement and the connection information might be confirmed by means of the following diagram: Mustang Knight Rider circuit LED wiring details Mustang Knight Rider circuit LED wiring particulars An additional fascinating scanner feature that may be very easily put into the above circuit with a function generating quick to and fro sequencing over the two strips in groups of four. This may be conveniently made by toggling an arrangement in which T1 would certainly halt once all the LEDs turn on in bar like style. Currently in this particular position a 4017 with its own oscillator would likely get into the scene with its outputs switching OFF the lit LEDs rapidly in a reverse forward manner. The switching might be carried out utilizing BJTs which might ground the appropriate anodes of the LEDs in the act. Consequently we now have three attractive scanning sequences toggled in our very own homemade mustang LED scanner circuit, any further feasible remedies are accepted from the viewers.]]> 859 0 0 0 How to Build a 0 to 50V, 0 to10amp Variable Dual Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/0-to-50v-0-to10amp-variable-dual-power-supply-circuit/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:32:44 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=861 The basic design of the offered 0 to 50V variable dual power supply circuit with 0 to 10 amp variable current facility is demonstrated in the above figure. The whole design is transistor (BJT) based and is practically unbreakable. Furthermore it's built with an over load and over current protection benefits. The two section contained in the design are precisely comparable with their configurations, the only improvement being the utilization of PNP devices in the lower configuration while NPN in the upper configuration. The upper NPN design is set up to generate a adjustable reply beginning with 0.6V to 50V positive while the lower PNP section turns into accountable of creating an oppositely the same reaction from -0.6V to -50V output. The highest limit might be suitably transformed by simply altering the voltage rating of the transformer. In spite of this for higher voltages you might have to properly update the BJT voltage ratings appropriately. In both the designs, P2 implements the function of varying the voltage levels as preferred by the user, while P1 features as the current regulator and is useful for changing or set up the output anywhere from 0 to 10 amp current. Here too the maximum rating depends upon the choice of the transformer amp rating and might be transformed according to personal preferences. T1s in the both the sections turn out to be the basic part or the heart of the whole voltage control working in the circuit, which evolves into feasible as a result of the widely used common collector configuration of the devices. The other two active BJTs only assist to apply the same simply by managing the base power of the T1s thus rendering it easy to change the thresholds to any most wanted user described voltage and current levels, as per the ratings of the transformer or the input supply. Parts list and more info on the circuit could possibly be discovered Right here]]> 861 0 0 0 How to Build a DIY Contact MIC Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/diy-contact-mic-circuit/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:37:37 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=863 A piezoelectric disk produces a voltage when deformed. Piezo elements are useful when needing to identify vibration or a knock. You can utilize these for tap or knock sensors quite conveniently by studying the voltage on the output. They are able to as well serve for a small audio transducer for example a Buzzer. The trick is the preamp - a simple circuit accustomed to match the piezo’s signal.The derived piezo/preamp combo can be utilized for electrifying an acoustic guitar. Circuit Explanation The battery offers +9 volts which can be linked to the source of the JFET device, MPF-102. This voltage is attached to the source by means of source resistor 1.5K. One terminal of this amplifier is well-known to both the input and output signals. This terminal is the JFET drain terminal. Because of this, we occasionally call this amplifier circuit a "common drain circuit”.The Drain resistor 220k is linked to the source to the battery's ground terminal. The main Element utilized in the circuit is the MPF-102 Transistor. Under no-signal situations, bias voltage leads to the JFET source to obtain a very small current. This current sets the source voltage at a point halfway between the Supply and ground.This is the suggested bias setting for most small-signal or analog audio amplifiers.It permits the maximum signal before distortion. The signal penetrates the amplifier by way of gate resistor 3.3M. The voltage drop across 3.3M is the input signal at the JFET gate. This signal is an AC voltage. The signal enters JFET,which is a amplifying device.The variance between the source and the gate sets the voltage drop across resistor 560 Ω. Typically, the bias voltage across resistor 560 Ω carries the JFET channel at a medium resistance value. The bias voltage is a DC voltage. When we use a signal, the input signal differs the negative bias voltage across resistor 560 Ω. The different gate signal brings about the JFET's to differ. For that reason, generally current transmits through the JFET. The source resistor 1.5K transforms the current variations to voltage variations. Considering that the input signal handles the channel width.That is, a small signal manages a large signal. In our situation, the JFET gate voltage handles the JFET source current. This result’s in Amplification. The output signal seems between the Source and ground. Capacitor 4.7uF blocks the DC voltages in the circuit, but transmits the amplified AC signal.The gate is much more harmful than the ground terminal. Now the output is developed across the Source and ground. But we've linked the Source to Supply. Then the Source is a lot more positive than the ground terminal. With the gate negative and the Source positive, This output signal simply leaves the amplifier by means of capacitor 4.7uF and shows up across resistor 220k. This Capacitor obstructs DC and moves only. PCB Design for the above described DIY contact MIC circuit Following are the images of the DIY contact mic prototype. ]]> 863 0 0 0 699 0 0 704 https://makingcircuits.com/ 699 1 How to Build a Thunder Lightning Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/thunder-lightning-detector-circuit/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:41:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=865 Parts List R1 = 2M2, R2 = 100K, R3 = 1K, C1 = 0.01uF A1, A2 = IC 324 Talking about the above effortless thunder lightning detector circuit, the design is essentially a couple of opamps from the IC LM324 wired up as a high gain amplifier circuit. The antenna may very well be a meter long flexible wire utilized right here for obtaining the RF disruptions from the thunder lightning arcs. Considering that the circuit is a high gain amplifier, it may well turn out to be very easily disappointed and provide incorrect outcomes if some things are not looked after. All the interconnections ought to be as compact as possible, and the PCB ought to be carefully cleaned with thinner to be able to take away any kind of flux residue which may elsewhere produce malfunctioning of the circuit. After creating the above design, at first you should not hook up any wire to the antenna terminals. Make certain the LED continues close off after the circuit is operated, and utilize a 9V PP3 battery for operating the circuit, an AC/DC adapter is useless when you might find the LED constantly ON if a mains adapter is utilized. Subsequent, take a gas lighter and click the device with its tip held near the antenna point of the circuit. You ought to discover the LED lighting and flashing as a reaction to every clicking of the gas lighter. This could establish a properly developed detector circuit. Lastly, you may connect the 1 meter long antenna wire to the demonstrated position and wait for a potential thunder lightning hits in the vicinity. You are going to be amazed to observe the LED dance and flash specifically in tandem with the lightning illumination sequences. You can enhance the Led reply by adding an opto coupler and a corresponding high watt lamp with the circuit, such that the entire room gets dazzled each and every time the lightning is displayed in the sky..]]> 865 0 0 0 How to Make a Cellphone RF Triggered Car Amplifier Auto-Mute Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/cellphone-rf-triggered-car-amplifier-auto-mute-circuit/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:43:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=867 The following post provides a circuit design which might mute your car amplifier music the instance it detects a cellphone call inside the car, making it possible for an automatic muting throughout the circumstances, and preserving the user from the manual problems.
A loud music could possibly be a nuisance while a phone call is being witnessed or dialed. All of us generally really like hearing loud music while traveling in cars, however this could possibly imply difficulties in the event a phone call will have to be been present for. An automatic muting system which may identify a cellphone call and mute the car amplifier instantly for the present time might be quite useful as it would conserve the user from some disappointment, and manual hardwork. Let's find out how this might be feasible utilizing the following described little circuit.
We realize that all cellphones produce quite a lot of radio frequency (RF) each and every time these are generally initialized by means of an incoming or an outgoing call. The level of the produced RF could possibly be different for different cellphones but just the same some degree of these will be constantly found around called cellphones regardless of how much it's been limited.
These types of provided RFs from a cell phone considers it very simple to perception it's functional problem and might be efficiently useful for any appropriate toggling function by way of an connected circuitry.
The following circuit demonstrates a basic RF sniffer or detector circuit which might be integrated for the recommended vehicle amplifier muting while a call has been obtained or dialed over a cellphone inside the meant idea.
Talking about the figure below, the design essentially includes two phases, the RF sensor comprised of by A1 and A2 and a relay driver stage consisting the succeeding BC547 driver stage.
A1 and A2 are each set up as a high gain amplifier and are linked in series for attaining maximum sensitivity.
The feed back resistor 2M2 is liable for figuring out the gain or the sensitivity level of the opamps. Increasing it increase the sensitivity and vice versa.
The ipamps with each other turn out to be recommended for choosing all sorts of RF signals that could be specific to the locality.
It's sensitivity could possibly be set by changing the 2M2 pot or preset according to the offered RF level around.
Inside a car there may be a host of other disruptions apart from the cell phone Rf, consequently the sensitivity ought to be refined optimally such that the sensor accumulates only the RFs from the cell phone and not from the ignition system of the vehicle.
Furthermore, multiple of these units may very well be located on various corners of the car interior and the outputs built-in with the main relay driver so that the receiver has the capacity to sense the Rfs from all over inside, and from the cell phones of the members who may occupying the rear car seats.
It could possibly permit to maintain the individual muting circuits set with minimum sensitivity making certain that these units feel only the cell phone RFs and no other spurious interruptions.
Returning to the offered car amplifier mute circuit, the moment a cellphone is initialized with a call, the RFs are immediately determined by the circuit's antenna and transformed into an amplified DC ever-changing at the cell phones varying emission levels. The amplified output across A2 outputs is properly filtered by the connected diode and capacitor network, and employed for driving the relay stage in which the relay clicks and switches ON the mute terminals of the car amplifier, making the music to turn off for the moment, until the call is completed or finished by the user.

Cellphone RF Triggered Car Amplifier Auto-Mute Circuit

]]> 867 0 0 0 How to Build a Vibrating Cell Phone Remote Control Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/vibrating-cell-phone-remote-control-circuit/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:46:54 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=870 The circuit is actually a transistorized high gain amplifier where a piezo is utilized as the vib. sensor. The vibrating from the piezo produces a in the same way oscillating voltage at the base of T1 which can be properly heightened by all the following transistor phases comprise of T2, T3, T4, T5, T6 and the connected parts. The amplified DC signal is lastly used across the linked relay which toggles as a reaction to the identified vibrating over the piezo. Considering that a cell phone might well have an unreliable vibrating rate could possibly lead to a related oscillatory reply over the relay switching. To stay away from this a high value capacitor in the range of 500uF ought to be attached instantly across the base and emitter of T6, this may make sure that T6 maintains its conduction at the same time the cell phone vibs are occasionally missing. In the above mode, the relay remains initiated only for provided the vibrating signals are made, in an effort to translate the reply into a toggling impact a flip flop circuit turns into crucial. The following easy 4093 IC based design evolves into completely appropriate for the needed conversions. The input result in might be linked to the pole of the relay, while the N/O of the relay will have to be associated with the positive of the supply. On the other hand, the relay could possibly be completely eradicated, and the "input trigger" of the above flip flop circuit straight linked with the collector of T6. As soon as this is achieved the relay would react with an alternate ON/OFF toggling motion each time the modem cellphone is called by the owner or the user. The deliver of the flip flop could be utilized for switching any most wanted appliance or in case it's deployed inside a vehicle might be used to function the central locks and the ignition system for attaining a total cell phone operated security function. C1 in the very first vibrating detector circuit could possibly be a 0.22uF capacitor and has to be applied only if the piezo is shut down over a longer distance from the circuit, elsewhere C1 could possibly be disregarded. Ideally the piezo needs to be located close with the circuit board. The piezo transducer is a 27mm common device which can be typically making use of in piezo buzzer circuits. It has got to be correctly stored inside a plastic enclosure for insuring an optimal response from this. The whole unit could be more enclosed inside a plastic box with the piezo assembly stuck on inner top surface of the box. The modem cellphone ought to be instantly positioned over the above enclosure right on the outer opposite surface of the piezo assembly (see figure below) The modem will have to be properly protected over this place to ensure that the unit will not drop away from the box while vibrating. Right now your cellphone vibrating based remote control circuit is ready and can be utilized for almost any preferred GSM based remote control application and might be turned from any part of the world, simply with a flick of a button. Ensure that the vibrating feature is allocated to switch on only for the specific numbers and not for the default numbers to make sure a quick and easy procedure of the unit. ]]> 870 0 0 0 How to Build a Timer Circuit with Auto Pause and Resume During Power Failures https://makingcircuits.com/blog/timer-circuit-with-auto-pause-and-resume-during-power-failures/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:49:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=872 The altered version of the above 4060 timer circuit may be observed in the following schematic. The circuit contains an automated pause and restart function of the IC's counting procedure in the course of power downfalls and restorations respectively.   The parts that happen to be tinted in blue are the placed changes, we are able to notice a battery backup being added at pin16 of the IC via diodes, and a relay at pin9 of the IC. Considering that the capacitor C3 is liable for beginning the counting strategy of the timer while it gets completely charged, this element might be aimed at the designed pausing/resuming of the timer. As might be observed in the diagram, this is all simply executed by linking C3 to the "hot" pin9 of the IC via a pair of relay contacts (N/O to be precise). Nevertheless for creating the above execution work, the IC ought to be provided with its basic running current and voltage while the mains is unavailable. This is achieved by using a battery support to the IC via isolating diodes at pin16 of the IC. The connected 10K resistor ensures that the battery maintains obtaining the needed trickle charge provided that the mains remains to be existing. When power is very first turned on, the relay at pin9 triggers and links C3 in the line to ensure that the IC has the capacity to start usually and commence its counting method. In an event of a mains malfunction,the battery requires over and sustains the IC powered in an uninterruptible way, although also at the same time the relay at pin9 of the IC disconnects C3 from the line to be able to quit the capacitor from reducing the kept immediate charge via pin9, this guarantees that the elapsed time period gets locked inside the capacitor for that specific instance until the mains is renewed. The occasion mains power comes back C3 is associated back with the circuit by the relay, allowing it to restart the counting practice precisely from where it had quit and not from zero as it would elsewhere do if the above mods weren't integrated. The above could possibly be also exactly the same used in other timer ICs for example in IC 555 monostable circuit or IC 4047, IC 556 IC 4022 etc. As mentioned in the feedback the above designs might have some restrictions and imperfections, an affordable set about could be noticed in the below presented diagram which might hopefully permit minimum conflict, not a lot more than 1% +/-. Notice the relay connection in blue across R4 and the inclusion of the high value 10M hold resistor.   ]]> 872 0 0 0 How to Modify a Bluetooth Headset Device for Personalized Applications https://makingcircuits.com/blog/modify-a-bluetooth-headset-device-for-personalized-applications/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 15:55:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=874 In the earlier put up we discovered concerning the internal circuitry of a typical Bluetooth headset, in this submit we will observe just how the gadget may be altered or "hacked" to be able to ensure it is function for other personalized applications.
In the prior post we figured out to break open a Bluetooth headset device and also investigated the numerous parts bound up within.
Even though the majority of the phases inside the headset seem to be too advanced to digest, the two elements which can be still quite standard are: the speaker and the mic, and those are precisely what we have been enthusiastic about for applying the suggested hacking methods, since these two ports essentially turn out to be the input and the output terminals of the device.
To be accurate it's the speaker outputs which is a lot more helpful, which might be thought to be creating analogue audio frequencies in a push-pull format. This analogue signal could be very easily translated and transformed into a logical signal for working a toggling device such as a relay.
Down this page number of pictures you can easily observe the speaker wires which can be just simply cut and striped at the ends for using the dealt with analogue frequencies for the essential alterations.

 


As soon as the above procedures are created, it's only about establishing the wires with a bridge network accompanied by an opto coupler stage, as demonstrated below:

 


The bridge network transforms the differential output reply from the Bluetooth speaker outputs into a full wave DC, which can be even more filtered by the 100uF capacitor to generate a clean DC across the opto input.
The DC is changed into a obvious content across the collector/ground of the opto transistor. This output could very well be set up with any regular flip flop circuit for toggling any preferred load.
The above toggling could possibly be begun by triggering the Bluetooth headset with a data from a cell phone or any equivalent appropriate device. Each and every time the speaker replies, the information gets translated into the above mentioned toggling effect over a attached relay.
A flip flop circuit may be seen in the following figure which might be incorporated with the above opto output for accumulating the meant relay operations.


Parts List
R3 = 10K,
R4, R5 = 2M2,
R6, R7 = 39K,
R4, R5 = 0.22, DISC,
C6 = 100µF/25V,
D4, D5 = 1N4148,
T1 = BC 547,
IC = 4093,
The above technique describes a simple way of hacking a Bluetooth headset for remotely working a specific appliance, within the next submit (yet to be posted) we are going to discover ways to hack a Bluetooth Headset as a wireless home theater system.

]]> 874 0 0 0 Exploring a Bluetooth Headset https://makingcircuits.com/blog/exploring-a-bluetooth-headset/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 16:04:44 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=877 To break it open you can utilize a screw driver as presented in the image below. In spite of this you simply must preserve significant deftness and treatment while working the gadget ensuring you don't harm the internal circuitry.   The moment the cover is taken away, you will discover an additional plastic protecting which you may likewise take away making use of the tip of your screw driver.   As soon as the inner protection shield is peeled of, the actual PCB with numerous parts would pop out from the shell as demonstrated below.   In this particular position the couple of essential things that could turn out to be noticeable are: two wires functioning toward a small speaker, two wires towards an in built MIC, an USB connector and an connected battery. See below for the information For obtaining the whole set up out of the box, you can possibly go ahead and get rid of the speaker and the Mic from their specific locations, in an effort to research them detailed. The MIC could possibly be discovered concealed inside a metallic clipping which might be pulled out with some careful effort.   The moment eradicated.... the MIC, the speaker and the PCB with all the connected elements might be analyzed in details as presented in the following figure:   Another essential area we could possibly be engaged within the circuit is the USB socket, considering that its the input which obtains all the data, as well as the battery for obtaining well informed concerning what's inside a typical Bluetooth headset.   The battery is a 3.7V Li-ion, 120mAH battery, as might be observed in the following picture:   OK that's it, right now we precisely understand all that's inside a Bluetooth headset gear, and it's time for you to understand some of the easy hacking methods that might permit us to make use of any Bluetooth headset unit for carrying out the meant procedures. The subsequent submit will tell you that to hack a Bluetooth Headset for other individualized implementations for instance for remotely working an appliance, as a spy bug, and audio relevant applications for example to create wireless speaker systems and home theater systems.]]> 877 0 0 0 How to Make a 2kva Ferrite Core Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/5kva-ferrite-core-inverter-circuit/ Tue, 28 Jul 2015 16:09:43 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=880 The 220V acquired at the output of TR1 in the above 5kav inverter circuit still simply cannot be useful for working regular appliances since the AC content could well be oscillating at the input 40kHz frequency. For transforming the above 40 kHz 220V AC into 220V 50 Hz or a 120V 60Hz AC, additional phases could be needed as mentioned below: Initially the 220V 40kHz will have to be rectified/filtered by means of a bridge rectifier comprised of fast recovery diodes rated at around 25 amps 300V and 10uF/400V capacitors. Subsequent, this repaired voltage which might now build to around 310V will have to be pulsed at the demanded 50 or 60 Hz by way of another full bridge inverter circuit as demonstrated below:   The terminals marked "load" could possibly be right now instantly employed as the final output for running the preferred load. Right here the mosfets may very well be IRF840 or any parallel type will do. Tips on how to Wind the Ferrite Transformer TR1 The transformer TR1 is the main device which can be accountable for upgrading the voltage to 220V at 5kva, being ferrite cored based it's designed over a number of ferrite EE cores as detailed below: Considering that the power engaged is substantial at around 5kvs, the E cores ought to be impressive in size, an E80 type ferrite E-core might be attempted. Be aware of you might have to include a lot more than 1 E core, may be 2 or 3 E-cores with each other, positioned side by side for attaining the enormous 2KVA power output from the assembly. Make use of the largest one that might be accessible and wind the 5+5 turns utilizing 10 numbers of 20 SWG super enameled copper wire, in parallel. After 5 turns, stop the primary winding insulate the layer with an insulating tape and start the secondary 18 turns over this 5 primary turns. Utilize 5 strands of 25 SWG super enameled copper in parallel for winding the secondary turns. As soon as the 18 turns are finalized, terminate it across the output leads of the bobbin, insulate with tape and wind the remaining 5 primary turns over it to carried out the ferrite cored TR1 construction. Do not overlook to join the end of the first 5 turns with the start of the top 5 turn primary winding. E-Core Set up Technique The following diagram provides a concept concerning how greater than 1 E-core can be utilized for applying the above mentioned 2 KVA ferrite inverter transformer design:     ]]> 880 0 0 0 558 0 0 559 558 1 632 0 0 635 https://makingcircuits.com/ 632 1 636 0 0 637 https://makingcircuits.com/ 636 1 750 0 0 751 https://makingcircuits.com/ 750 1 Keyboard Beep Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/keyboard-beep-circuit/ Sat, 01 Aug 2015 05:33:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=885 key bleep key bleep1]]> 885 0 0 0 How to Build a Simple 100 watt Inverter Circuit Using 2N3055 Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-simple-100-watt-inverter-circuit-using-2n3055-transistors/ Sat, 01 Aug 2015 05:48:51 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=889 ]]> 889 0 0 0 How to Calculate Timer Circuits using CMOS Gates https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-calculate-timer-circuits-using-cmos-gates/ Mon, 10 Aug 2015 11:29:58 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=909 There are many occasions when a switching delay is required. One way of achieving this is to use an RC network and an inverter (see figure 1). This is quite practical and obvious as there are nearly always some gates "left over’ in a circuit. Unfortunately, every electronic component has a definite tolerance and so it is vir- tually impossible to determine the delay precisely in advance. However a considerable improvement can be achieved by connectingtwo inverter/ RC networks in series as shown in figure 3. ` The nominal threshold voltage of the inverter in figure lis half the supply voltage and has a tolerance of 1 30%. Figure 2 shows the signal input to the gate. If this input is between Us = 0.35 Ub and UC = 0.65 Ub the inverter may consider it either logic 'O' or ’1’! These voltages occur when a capacitor is charged through a resistor after a period of 0;43 1' and 1.051 respectively. (T is the time ` constant of the circuit and is equal to R x C). The nominal threshold voltage UC = 0.5 Ub is reached after a time of t = 0.69 T. s

 

lf the two inverters and RC networks of figure 3 are used, each RC net- work must produce the same delay, equal to half the total value of figure 1. The total delay will then be 1/2 x 0.43 T+ 1/2 x 1.05 T= 0.74 T at its worst case! This is a lot closer to the nominal value of 0.69 T.

 

The foregoing should make it clear f why the circuit of figure 4 gives such consistently reproducible results, Hovvever, for really satisfactory _ operation, Cll/IGS inverters must be used. The reason is that these gates have a threshold value of about half the supply voltage. Further, their output vi/ill always be either zero or the supply voltage. Schmitt triggers should not be used! lf the delay times using 4000 series CMOS are found to be too long the new 74HCXX series can be used. These are pin and function compatible to the 74LSXX series and just as fast!

 

calculate delay timer with NOT gates

]]> 909 0 0 0 Stereo Preamplifier Circuit with Bass Treble Control https://makingcircuits.com/blog/stereo-preamplifier-circuit-with-bass-treble-control/ Fri, 14 Aug 2015 13:53:03 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=914 stereo  ]]> 914 0 0 0 Water Temperature Controller Circuit for Central Heating Systems https://makingcircuits.com/blog/water-temperature-controller-circuit-for-central-heating-systems/ Sun, 16 Aug 2015 06:20:28 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=919 heater]]> 919 0 0 0 Simplest Water Level Controller Circuit with Buzzer https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simplest-water-level-controller-circuit-with-buzzer/ Fri, 14 Aug 2015 14:08:30 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=922 simplest water level controller circuit]]> 922 0 0 0 Simplest Homemade Electric Guitar https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simplest-homemade-electric-guitar/ Fri, 14 Aug 2015 14:16:27 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=927 simple electric guitar circuit]]> 927 0 0 0 Simple Light Activated Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-light-activated-switch-circuit/ Fri, 14 Aug 2015 14:22:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=930 simple light activated switch circuit]]> 930 0 0 0 Simple Mains Voltage Stabilizer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-mains-voltage-stabilizer-circuit/ Fri, 14 Aug 2015 14:50:13 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=935 simple mains 220v voltage stabilizer circuit The first parameter which must be considered while designing an auto-transformer for voltage regulators is the desired output regulation for a certain input voltage range, specified as a certain percentage of a noininal output voltage. In this simple case we shall take this to be +/-9 percent of 220 volts output, a figure most commonly used commercially. This means that in practice the outputvoltage may be anything between 200 and 240 volts approximately for the given input range over which regulation as specified is valid. A typical set up in India would specify this output over an input voltage range of say from 175 to 250 volts.   simple auto transformer circuit This means that with a minimum of 175VAC input(between points l and 3 of Fig. 3), the output from the autotransformer (between points l and 4 of Fig. 3) should be 200V AC. This represents a turns ratio of 7:8 between the input voltage tap and output step-up voltage tap with reference to the common terminal. This point hasfbeen diagrammatically described in Fig. 3.   Now, if we allowed the tappings to remain intact(input between 1-3 and output between l-4)`and gradually in- creased the input voltage from a variac till an output of 240V AC was recorded-the upper limit for our,output voltage range-we shall find that an input of 210V was necessary to achieve this. Any further increase in input voltage, without changing the transformer taps, would result in an output voltage crossing the specified danger mark of 240V AC output. So, at this point we need a step-down' tap which should reduce 210V input AC to 200V AC (a lower limit for output voltage of our regulator).   If the input remains between 1-3 but the output is taken from l-2 instead of 1-4, this aim could be achieved. This switching could be effected electrically with relays or else manually with switches. Accordingly, a turns ratio of 21 : 20 would be necessary between the input step terminal and output tap with reference to the common. Actual number of turns are, however, left for considera- tion of transformer manufacturer, who will take into account core size,load current required and stamping material used.   Again we find that an output voltage of 240V AC-our upper limit-would be given for an input of 252V AC.So with these basic hints in mind you should be able to evolve the correct ratio of steps and the total number of these steps required for certain specified values of input and output voltages. Fig. 4 shows a representative practical circuit that may be used with a transformer of the above type with the relay designed to trip over at 210V input. Mains input is provided between fixed terminals of the winding of autotransformer. ln addition there are two secondary windings provided for control purposes. A 20V AC output of one secondary is half-wave rectified by D1 and smoothed by Cl to give approximately 24V required to drive a relay through switching transistor T2.   A second half-wave recified DC supply is provided by 30V winding and D2 and C2. This is used as a voltage reference supply for voltage sensing circuitry. Referring to the main circuit diagram we find that the transistors Tl and T2 are connected in such a way that only one transistor out of them can conduct at a time. Let us assume that preset VRI is so adjusted that transis- tor Tl is initially off. Accordingly, transistor T2 would be receiving a positive bias at its base through R7.   Hence T2 would be conducting, thereby energising relay RL1, and collector of T2 would be pulled to the emitter voltage level determined by the voltage divider action of R8 and R3, which is very much nearer to ground potential, The N/O (normally open) contacts of the relay, which are connected to the step- down terminal of the auto-transformer, will make contact.   For the transistorTl to be non-conducting, its base should be at a negative potential as compared to its emitter which is fed with a stabilised voltage given by zener diode D3. However the voltage at the base of Tl is variable, depending upon the input mains voltage as well as the preset position. Therefore for the above condition, the voltage would have to be higher than the trip point voltage of 210V at which point B would have to be more negative as compared to fixed reference voltage at point A. Now, if the input voltage started going below the trip point voltage, the point B would slowly become less and less negative as compared to point A which would remain at more or less fixed reference zener voltage. This condition would continue till a point is reached where the base of Tl actually becomes pgzsitive with respect to its emitter. and when 'this difference exceeds + 0.6V-the forward conduction voltage of a silicon junction-the base emitter diode of Tl conducts, pulling the collector of Tl to ground. This simultaneously clamps the base of T2 to ground making it non-conducting, hence releasing the relay. Relay changeover contact is now connected to N/ C (normally closed) contact of the relay which is connected to the step-up tap on power transformer. Practical adjustment of this is a mere simplicity and needs a variac for continuously changing input voltage. Output voltage is monitored simultaneously with a good quality multimeter and as soon as it approaches the upper limit of 24OV, the preset VRl is adjusted to switch the relay RLl which starts reducing voltage from then onwards. Diode D4 shorts the reverse transients generated due to back EMF in the relay coil while switching, thus preventing T2 from permanent damage. T , Fig. 5 gives another type of circuit generally preferred by some manufacturers on account of its greater reliability and accuracy in the long run. The basic circuit is a Schmitt trigger' operating between well-defined limits. As usual, relay voltage is derived from Dl and Cl, and reference voltage is given by D2 and C2. 1 Due to the potential divider action of resistors Rl, R2 and preset VRl, a voltage depending upon input mains voltage appears at point marked A. So long as this voltage is below the breakdown voltage of zener dicide D3, transistor Tl cannot conduct. Its collector receives a positive potential via R5 which in turn biases T2 through its base resistor R6.Thus the relay is energised, making N/O contacts of the relay. If however the input voltage increases to a level where the sample voltage at point A increases above the breakdown voltage of D3, transistor Tl would conduct and bring its collector to the emitter voltage of T2. Since base resistor R6 of T2 is also connected here, transistor T2 does not conduct anymore as there is no sustaining positive voltage difference between its base and emitter.As a result the relay is released and its pole is now connected to the stepdown terminal of the auto~transformer through N/ C contacts of the relay.    ]]> 935 0 0 0 466 0 0 467 466 1 Automatic Signalling Circuit for Model Trains https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-signalling-circuit-for-model-trains/ Fri, 14 Aug 2015 15:05:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=939 model train controller circuit         model train IC pinouts Hints l. lt is convenient to lay a closed track; it allows the train to move continuously. But closed tracks available with the train are too short in length. To increase the length of the track, use ‘T’ sections used as guide rails for sliding shutters used in cupboards. 2. The toy train used was ‘Taj Express’ which has a man- ual start and stop system. 3. By adding one inverter gate to each block we can set up a cabinman’s train position indicator. For this fix an LED in each block and let theacorresponding added inverter gate drive the LED. Thus the lit LED will indicate the position of the train. ,]]> 939 0 0 0 457 0 0 460 457 1 Simple Time Delay Relay Protector Circuit for Refrigerators https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-time-delay-relay-protector-circuit-for-refrigerators/ Fri, 14 Aug 2015 15:41:19 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=944 simple refrigerator protector circuit using a time delay relay during power sudden power fluctuations Providing a time delay for each time the compressor re-starts gives the following advantages: l. Lock-free motor start, leading to a longer motor life. 2. Life of the thermostat switch increases, as power is drawn through this switch a few minutes after it makes the contacts. 3. Defrosting is less frequently required. 4. Providing a fuse specified by the manufacturer almost eliminates the risk of motor burning. 5. A substantial reduction in electricity bill. ” By connecting the circuit shown here, a time delay of up to five minutes can be obtained by varying . A practical setting of three minutes is however considered ideal for a refrigerator.]]> 944 0 0 0 Simple Latch Circuit using Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-latch-circuit-using-transistors/ Fri, 14 Aug 2015 15:54:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=947 simple all purpose latch circuit using transistors]]> 947 0 0 0 Make a Police Strobe Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/make-a-police-strobe-light-circuit/ Tue, 18 Aug 2015 11:13:32 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=954 1 2     The moment a group is switched on, the associated LED turns on and off 3 times. After that the other array is activated which is the identical. The procedure is continued endlessly. This appearance is just like strobe lights that sometimes can be seen in the party halls and other similar places are. While the police car circuit works The circuit takes advantage of a 555 that drives and acts as a clock counter 4017B decade clock generator. Altering the values ​​of resistors and capacitor attached to the 555 timer it is possible to adjust the time clock rate. Even though the values ​​shown are quite sufficient to cause the circuit to perform fairly well. The 4017B provides sequentially activating logics in each of its outputs a signal equivalent to the supply level or of high level. When only the outputs become 0, is well ensured that 2, 4, 5, 7, 9 are engaged. This is achieved to produce the flashing of the diode while each one group of LEDs is linked together. Notice the outputs 1,3,6 and 8 are not attached and the time needed to generate the display LEDs off. The first array of LEDs hooked up to the outputs 0, 2 and 4, and the second group is linked with the outputs 5, 7, 9. Number of circuit parts - IC1: 555 timer - IC2: decade counter 4017B - Q1 = Q2: 2N2222 bipolar transistor or the like - D1 = D2 = D3 = D4 = D5 = D6 1N4001 diode - D7 to D18: LEDs - R1: 1K resistor - R2: 22K resistor - R3 to R10: 470 ohm resistors - C1: Electrolytic capacitor 2.2uF - C2: 0.01uF capacitor. The circuit is driven by a 12VDC supply or a battery of the matching voltage as that of the automobiles (B +).]]> 954 0 0 0 Cheap MPPT Solar Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/cheap-mppt-solar-battery-charger-circuit/ Fri, 21 Aug 2015 06:42:42 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=965 simplest mppt solar charger circuit]]> 965 0 0 0 Simple MPPT Circuit Simulating an Incremental Conductance Concept https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-mppt-circuit-simulating-an-incremental-conductance-concept/ Fri, 21 Aug 2015 07:04:07 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=969 An easy incremental conductance "type" of solar MPPT charger circuit is described right here.

The Design

The functioning theory of the following solar charger simulates the process of incremental MPPT voltage sensing, and regulating it according to the attached battery charging needs.

I have as well talked about this in one of my earlier articles where the design is in a guideline modification form.

The circuit directs the needed amount of voltage to the battery by sensing the highest power point of the solar panel, and by placing or keeping away from a couple of diodes appropriately in series with the supply path.

The working might be precisely known by researching the following instance:

As demonstrated in the circuit diagram, the total drop by the diodes when all are in series could well be around 20 x 0.6 = 12V.

Let's believe we certainly have a solar panel with optimum power point at around 26V and we want to employ this level for charging a 12V battery obtaining 14.4 V as the maximum charging voltage.

To start the MPPT performance we regulate the 10K preset of the IC LM3915 which can be a dot/display mode LED voltage indicator such that all its output turn out to be low (all LEDs ON) at the recommended 26V.

With this position the gates of all the mosfets turn out to be negatively one-sided to ensure that all of them stay shut off.

With all the mosfets shut off, all the diodes obtain in the path of the supply decreasing about 12 volts, which gets deducted from the solar panel total voltage, supplying about 26 - 12 = 14V across the battery, which happens to be pretty much the essential optimum charging voltage for the battery.

The above circumstance avoids the solar panel voltage from dragging down to the battery voltage level yet makes sure an optimal charging problems for the battery.

Currently believe the panel voltage falls by a few volts as a result of decreased sunlight or further equivalent problems.

This drop in the potential generates a proportionate drop at pin#5 of the IC which often switches OFF one or two of its outputs beginning with pin#10 and downward.

This forces the appropriate mosfets to perform and bypass a few diodes or even more thereby enabling a proportionate compensation for the battery under charge.

This guarantees that the battery is rarely missing out on the essential charging voltage even under unfavorable circumstances where the solar panel has lowered significantly. The operating also makes certain that even under undesirable problems the MPP of the panel is rarely decreased, and its voltage never dragged down by the battery under charge.

As mentioned above the IC LM3915 tracks and monitors the highest power point of the panel which can be in fact the optimum open circuit voltage of the specific panel under the provided conditions, and toggles the series diodes correctly such that the battery is imposed optimally even under toughest circumstances without negotiating with the highest power point of the solar panel.

The above design could be additional improved by adding this current and voltage managed tracker circuit in between the output of the circuitand the battery.

incremental type solar charger MPPT circuit

 

 

 

Parts List

All Diodes = 6A4
All Mosfets = 50V, 10A or similar, N-channel
All gate resistors = 47 ohms

]]> 969 0 0 0 50 watt Solar Inverter with Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/50-watt-solar-inverter-with-charger-circuit/ Fri, 21 Aug 2015 07:17:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=975 solar charger inverter school project circuit Parts List for the suggested solar inverter with charger circuit meant for science projects. R1,R2 = 100 OHMS, 5 WATTS R3, R4 = 15 OHMS, 5 WATTS T1, T2 = 2N3055, MOUNTED ON SUITABLE HEATSINK TRANSFORMER = 9-0-9V, 3 TO 10 AMPS R5 = 10K R6 = 0.1 OHMS 1 WATT P1 = 100K PRESET LINEAR D1, D2 = 6A4 D3 = 1N4148 T3 = BC547 C1 = 100uF/25V RELAY = 9V, SPDT LDR = ANY STANDARD TYPE SOLAR PANEL = 17 VOLTS OPEN CIRCUIT, 5 AMPS SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT.]]> 975 0 0 0 Simple PWM MPPT Circuit using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-pwm-mppt-circuit-using-ic-555/ Fri, 21 Aug 2015 08:32:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=978 A re-designed type of the above design utilizing buck converter may be seen in this post. The way to Establish the Circuit It might be completed in the following method: At first continue S1 switched OFF. Introduce the panel to peak sunshine, and modify the preset to get the needed maximum charging voltage across the mosfet drain diode output and ground. The circuit is ready right now. As soon as this is achieved, turn on S1, the battery will begin obtaining charged in the MPPT mode. Adding a Current (Error Amplifier) Control Feature A cautious research of the above circuit reveals that as the mosfet attempts to make up the dropping panel voltage level, it permits the battery to obtain more current from the panel, which impacts the panel voltage dropping it further down activating a run-away circumstance, this might be totally against the MPPT law. A current control feature as demonstrated right here diagram looks after this issue and does not allow the battery from attracting too much current beyond the stipulated limits. Consequently assists in keeping the panel voltage unaltered. RX which happens to be the current decreasing resistor could be determined with the aid of the following formulation: RX = 0.6/I, where I is the stipulated minimum charging current for the linked battery simplest mppt solar charger circuit  ]]> 978 0 0 0 295 0 0 297 295 1 Homemade Buck Boost MPPT Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/homemade-buck-boost-mppt-circuit/ Fri, 21 Aug 2015 08:48:51 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=986 mppt circuit using IC lm3915   The major processor in the above diagram is the IC LM3915 which switches its output pinout consequently from the top to the bottom in keeping with the reducing sun light These types of outputs may be seen set up with switching power transistors which can be consequently associated with the numerous taps of a ferrite single long inductor coil. The lower most end of the inductor can be viewed linked to a NPN power transistor which happens to be turned at around 100kHz frequency from an externally designed oscillator circuit. The power transistors linked with the outputs of the IC switch in accordance with the sequencing IC outputs, linking the proper taps of the inductor with the panel voltage and the 100kHz frequency. This inductor changes are properly determined such that its different taps turn out to be suitable for the panel voltage because these are switched by the IC output driver phases. Thus the process ensure that while the sun strength and the voltage falls, it's correctly connected with the appropriate tap of the inductor sustaining almost a constant voltage across all the presented taps, according to their measured ratings. Let's realize the working with the aid of the following situation: Believe the coil is chosen to be appropriate for a 30V solar panel, consequently at peak sunshine let's believe that the upper most power transistor is turned on by the IC which subjects the whole coil to oscillate, this enables the total 30V to be accessible across the extraordinary ends of the coil. Currently think the sunlight falls by 3V and decreases its output to 27V, this really is instantly felt by the IC such that the first transistor from the top now switches OFF and the second transistor in the series switches ON. The above activity chooses the second tap (27V tap) of the inductor from top performing a matching inductor tap to voltage reply making certain that the coil oscillates optimally with the lowered voltage...similarly, now as the sunlight voltage decreases further the specific transistors "shake hands" with the pertinent inductor taps being sure a perfect matching and effective switching of the inductor, in accordance with the accessible solar voltages. As a result of the above matched reaction between the solar panel and the switching buck/boost inductor...the tap voltages over the relevant points may be believed to maintain an ongoing voltage through out the day irrespective of the sunlight condition.... For instance presume if the inductor was created to generate 30V at the topmost tap accompanied by 27V, 24V, 21V, 18V, 15V, 12V, 9V, 6V, 3V, 0V across the subsequent taps, then each one of these voltages could possibly be realized to be regular over these taps irrespective of the sunlight levels. Also bear in mind that that these types of voltage might be modified as per user specifications for attaining higher or lower voltages than the panel voltage. The above circuit may also be designed in the flyback topoogy as demonstrated below: In both the above configurations, the output ought to stay continuous and steady with regards to voltage and wattage no matter the solar output. MPPT circuit]]> 986 0 0 0 Simple Solar Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-solar-battery-charger-circuit/ Sat, 22 Aug 2015 16:59:23 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=993 Talking about the offered solar panel voltage regulator, charger circuit we notice a design that makes use of very regular elements and yet satisfies the requirements in the same way essential by our specifications. A single IC LM 338 turns into the heart of the whole configuration and evolves into sensibly for applying the preferred voltage regulations single handedly. The demonstrated solar panel regulator, charger circuit is framed as per the normal mode of the IC 338 configuration. The input is provided to the demonstrated input points of the IC and the output for the battery obtained at the output of the IC. The pot or the preset is employed to precisely set the voltage level that could be regarded as the safe value for the battery. The circuit also provides a current control feature, helping to make sure that the battery constantly obtains a fixed fixed charging current rate and is in no way over powered. The module could be connected as instructed in the diagram. The appropriate positions mentioned could be basically cabled even by a layman. Rest of the function is looked after by the regulator circuit. The switch S1 ought to be toggled to inverter mode once the battery gets fully charged (as suggested over the meter). The charging current might be chosen by properly choosing the value of the resistors R3. It is possible by solving the formula: 0.6/R3 = 1/10 battery AH The preset VR1 is adjusted for obtaining the essential charging voltage from the regulator.]]> 993 0 0 0 Make this Zero Drop Solar Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/make-this-zero-drop-solar-battery-charger-circuit/ Sun, 23 Aug 2015 11:09:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=995     Parts List R1,R2 = 10K R3,R4 = use an online potential divider calculator for fixing the required junction voltage D2 = 1N4148 C1 = 10uF/50V C2 = 0.22uF Z1 = ought to be much lower than the chosen battery over charge level IC1 = 741 Mosfet = in accordance with the battery AH and the solar voltage. Including a current control characteristic to the above zero drop solar charger circuit The above circuit appears quite an effective design in spite of this lacks a current control feature. The diagram below demonstrates how the above circuit could be enhanced with an existing control feature by simply including a BC547 transistor phase across the inverting input of the opamp. R5 may be any low value resistor for instance a 100 ohm. R6 decides the highest permitted charging current to the battery which might be set by utilizing the formula: R(Ohms) = 0.6/I, where I is the optimal charging rate (amps) of the attached battery.   Note: A P-channel mosfet might not function properly, consequently the mosfet in the above zero drop solar circuits needs to be restored with N-channel mosfets as presented in the folowing diagrams. Viewers are suggested to do the changes according to the following diagrams.     Tips on how to Begin the zero drop solar charger circuit   It really is very simple. You should not hook up any supply at the mosfet side. Upgrade the battery with a adjustable power supply input and adjust it to the charging level of the battery which can be allowed to be charged. Now cautiously change the pin2 preset until the LED just shuts off....flick the preset to and fro and check the LED reply it ought to also blink ON/OFF in the same way, definitely regulate the preset to a point where the LeD just shuts off totally....seal the preset. Your zero drop solar charger is set, and set. It is possible to verify the above by using a higher input voltage at the mosfet side, you'll discover the battery side output generating the entirely controlled voltage level which was earlier set by you.]]> 995 0 0 0 How to Make a 6V Solar Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/6v-solar-battery-charger-circuit/ Sun, 23 Aug 2015 12:17:30 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1000 ]]> 1000 0 0 0 How to Make a Simple Solar Tracker System - Mechanism and Control Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/solar-tracker-system-mechanism-and-control-circuit/ Sun, 23 Aug 2015 12:26:37 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1002 solar tracker mechanism with gears and dimensions As demonstrated in the figure, a comparatively simple mechanism may be observed right here. The solar tracker is essentially installed over a few stand with a central movable axis. The pivotal arrangement permits the panel mounts to proceed a circular axis over nearly 360 degrees. A motor gear mechanism as presented in the diagram is installed just at the corner of the pivotal axis in such a means that when the motor revolves the total solar panel changes correspondingly regarding its central pivot, either anticlockwise or clockwise, based upon the motion of the motor which often is dependent upon the position of the sun. The place of the LDRs are important listed here and the set of LDR which symbolize this vertical plane motion is so placed that it experiences the sun light precisely and attempts to keep the panel perpendicular to the sun rays by moving the motor in the suitable direction by means of an obvious variety of stepped rotations. The LDR sensing is really precisely obtained and interpreted by an electronic circuit which orders the motor for the above discussed measures. An additional mechanism which can be quite much like the above vertical setting, but moves the panel by means of a lateral motion or rather it moves the whole solar panel mount in circular motion over the horizontal plane. This movement occurs as a reaction to the situation of the sun throughout the periodic changes, consequently as opposed to the vertical activities; this operation is extremely constant and simply cannot be experienced each and every day. Once more the above motion is in reaction to the command provided to the motor by the electronic circuit which functions as a reaction to the sensing produced by the LDRs. For the above process a different set of LDRs are utilized and are fitted horizontally over the panel, at a particular position as demonstrated in the diagram. How the Solar Tracker Control Circuit Performs   dual axis solar tracker LDR circuit A cautious research of the circuit demonstrated in the diagram shows that the entire design is definitely quite simple and simple. Right here a single IC 324 is commonly employed and only two of its op amps are being used for the preferred procedures. dual axis solar tracker LDR circuit The op amps are primarily cabled to form a type of window comparator, to blame for signaling their outputs at any time their inputs waver or drift out of the fixed window, set by the appropriate pots. Two LDRs are linked to the inputs of the opamps for sensing the light levels. Provided that as the lights over the two LDRs are even, the outputs of the opamp stay deactivated. In spite of this the moment one of the LDRs detects an unique magnitude of light over it (which can take place as a result of the altering position of the sun) the balance over the input of the opamp shift toward one direction, instantly producing the pertinent opamps output go high. This high output immediately triggers the full bridge transistor network, which often spins the linked motor in a set direction, such that the panel revolves and adjusts its alignment with the sun rays until uniform amount of light is renewed over the relevant set of LDRs. As soon as the light level over the relevant LDR sets is gained, the opamps again turn out to be inactive and switch off their outputs as well as the motor. The above series retains on occurring for the complete day, in steps, as the sun alters its posture and the above mechanism maintains moving in respect to the suns position. It ought to be mentioned that two sets of the above described circuit assemblies is going to be essential to managing the dual measures or simply just to create the above mentioned dual tracker solar system mechanism. Parts List R3 = 15K, R4 = 39K, P1 = 100K, P2 = 22K, LDR = Normal type with a resistance of around 10 K to 40K in daylight under shade and unlimited strength in total darkness. Op-amps are from IC 324 or separately two 741 ICs can also be incorporated. T1, T3 = TIP31C, T2,T4 = TIP32C, All diodes are 1N4007 Motor = As per the load and size of the solar panel Courtesy - Elector Electroniks India Tips on how to Add a Set/Reset Facility in the Above Circuit At the initial look it may seem that the above circuit is not going to incorporate an automatic resetting feature. Nevertheless a closer study indicates that really this circuit will reset instantly when dawn sets in or in the morning daylight. Perhaps this is correct simply because that the LDRs are located inside enclosures that happen to be specfiially created in a "V" shape for helping this activity. From the reflection of of the rising sun light, in the course of morning hours the sky gets more activated than the ground. Since the LDRs are placed in "V" manner, the LDR which encounters more toward the sky obtains more light than the LDR which faces toward the ground. This scenario stimulates the motor in the opposite direction, such that it causes the panel to revert at the start of morning hours. As the panel reverts in the direction of the east, the relevant LDR starts obtaining subjected to all the more ambient light from the rising sunlight, this transmits the panel even harder toward the east until both LDR are practically consequently uncovered toward the east rising sunlight, this totally resets the panel to ensure that the method commences once again.   solar tracker mechanism details with LDR installation and gear fitting solar tracker system information with LDR installation and gear fitting Set Reset Function In the event a set reset characteristic turns into crucial, the following design could be integrated. The set switch is put at the "sun-set" end of the tracker, such that it becomes desperate when the panel finishes it's days tracking. As can be viewed in the below given figure, the supply to the tracker circuit is been given from the N/C points of the DPDT relay, it implies when the 'SET" switch is pressed, the relay triggers and disconnects the supply to the circuit so that the whole circuit proven in the above post now gets turned off and fails to interfere. Simultaneously, the motor draws the reversing voltage via the N/O contacts so that it can start the reversing strategy of the panel to its original position. Once the panel finishes its reversing method toward the "sun-rise" end, it forces the reset switch positioned suitably somewhere at that end, this steps deactivates the deliver yet again resetting the total system for the next cycle.   ]]> 1002 0 0 0 How to Build a Solar Charger Using Flyback Converter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-solar-charger-using-flyback-converter-circuit/ Sun, 23 Aug 2015 12:30:58 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1005 ]]> 1005 0 0 0 How to Build a Solar Panel/AC Mains, Relay Changeover Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-solar-panelac-mains-relay-changeover-circuit/ Sun, 23 Aug 2015 12:34:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1007 Taking a look at the suggested circuit diagram, we observe three simple phases, on the left an IC 741 circuit, at the center a voltage regulator phase utilizing IC LM317, while on the top an AC/DC adapter circuit. The AC/DC adapter circuit is a basic improved transformer power supply, created for supplying 7V DC as far as there is certainly mains power accessible. The IC317 circuit is a regulator circuit, set up for producing a continuing current, 7 volts output to the 6V battery which can be associated at the presented points. The pot with the LM317 IC might be modified to generate the needed charging output for the specific battery. The vital section of the circuit is the IC 741 phase, which happens to be establish as a high voltage trigger circuit. The connected predetermined is altered such that the relay triggers when the solar panel voltage is above 7 volts. The activation of the relay signifies the regulator circuit and the battery receive the voltage from the solar panel via the N/O contacts of the relay. In spite of this, the time the panel voltage falls below 7 volts, the relay switches OFF, hooking up the DC adapter power with the regulator circuit, and now the battery begins getting charged by way of the AC/DC adapter voltage source. R1 = Reference voltage/charging current = 1.25/Chg.Current]]> 1007 0 0 0 How to Make a Transformerless Solar Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-transformerless-solar-inverter-circuit/ Sun, 23 Aug 2015 12:37:40 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1009 220v, 120v transformerless solar inverter circuit Considering that the IC are not able to function with at voltages a lot more than 15V, it is well guarded by way of a reducing resistor and a zener diode. The zener diode limitations the high voltage from the solar panel at the linked 15V zener voltage. In spite of this the mosfets are able to be controlled with the full solar output voltage, which can lie somewhere between 200 to 260 volts. On overcast problems the voltage may decrease to well below 170V, So possibly a voltage stabilizer can be utilized at the output for regulating the output voltage under such circumstances. The mosfets are N and P kinds which form a pair for employing the push pull actions and for producing the needed AC. The mosfets arenot specific in the diagram, preferably they needs to be scored at 450V and 5 amps, you will discover many versions, if you google a bit over the net. The utilized solar panels should purely have an open circuit voltage of around 24V at full sunlight and around 17V during bright dusk periods.   Parts List R1 = 6K8 R2 = 140K C1 = 0.1uF Diodes = are 1N4148 R3 = 10K, 10 watts, R4, R5 = 100 Ohms, 1/4 watt B1 and B2 = from solar panel Z1 = 5.1V 1 watt Use these formulas for calculating R1, R2, C1.... ]]> 1009 0 0 0 How to Make a Solar Water Heater with Battery Charger Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-solar-water-heater-with-battery-charger-controller-circuit/ Wed, 26 Aug 2015 15:30:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1014 ]]> 1014 0 0 0 How Actual MPPT works https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-actual-mppt-works/ Wed, 26 Aug 2015 15:36:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1016 Common solar charger controllers only control the solar panel voltage and make it suitable for charging the attached battery, on the other hand these really do not perform the panel legislation properly. Standard charger regulator which use linear ICs for the stipulations are not able to maintain the solar panel from obtaining packed straight by the linked battery or the inverter or in any way might be attached as the load. The above circumstance has a tendency to decrease the solar panel voltage appropriately producing its utilization wasteful simply because now the panel is limited from generating the scored amount of current to the load. Exactly why does these linear or PWM regulator chargers find it difficult to stay away from loading of the solar panel in spite of becoming incredibly sophisticated, precise and right with their procedures? How do actual MPPT chargers function? The response to the above problems is nowhere fast resolved widely on the web, for that reason I believed it essential to offer with an comprehensive reason concerning the variance between normal charger controllers and actual MPPT. Returning to the above query, the solution can be found in the truth that linear regulator chargers Usually Do Not separate the solar panel from load totally. Essentially MPPTs were created to make sure that the net input wattage was constantly brought to the output load no matter the load adaptability with the panel. This really is mainly accomplished with the aid of a monitoring SMPS buck increase technology. For that reason we are able to insist that it's the SMPS buck enhance technology that forms the back bone of all MPPT designs and has supplied with a very economical alternative of configuring power control and supplying devices. In MPPT charger controllers, the solar panel voltage is very first transformed into a high frequency parallel pulsating voltage. This voltage is used into the primary of a competently dimensioned compact ferrite transformer, which produces the needed level of current at its secondary winding, matching the stipulated charging rate of the battery. The voltage nevertheless might not be matching the battery charging voltage, as a result here a regular linear regulator is integrated for fixing the voltage level appropriately. With the above set up the battery remains entirely isolated from the solar panel, and gets effectively charged even under bad weather circumstances, considering that now the solar panel is permitted to perform without influencing or decreasing its offered immediate voltage under any given condition. This can help to apply the designed optimum power point tracking impact, which can be nothing but enabling the panel to operate under minimal loading yet ensuring the linked load gets the full power essential to its optimum efficiency. It might be fascinating to understand how an SMPS avoids the panel or any source from acquiring loaded instantly by the load. The strategy is situated behind the utilization of the ferrite technology. Ferrite transformers are really effective magnetic devices which saturate efficiently to produce an effective conversion from input to output. Take the illustration of a normal 2 amp iron core transformer power supply and a 2amp SMPS. In the event you load the two alternatives with full current that is with 2amps, you will discover the iron core voltage dropping significantly while the SMPS voltage decreasing only slightly or else negligibly....so this really is the technique behind the success of an SMPS dependent MPPT in comparison to a linear IC based MPPT charger controller.]]> 1016 0 0 0 How to Use an SMPS Circuit as a Solar Charger https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-use-an-smps-circuit-as-a-solar-charger/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 07:23:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1018 ]]> 1018 0 0 0 412 http://www.innovative-systems.co.in 0 0 413 412 1 How to Make a Solar Fence Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-solar-fence-charger-circuit/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 07:31:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1020   The above circuit can be operated by way of the following solar panel current controlled battery charger circuit:    ]]> 1020 0 0 0 How to Make a 25 Amp Battery Charger Circuit Using LM338 ICs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-25-amp-battery-charger-circuit-using-lm338-ics/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 07:38:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1024 ]]> 1024 0 0 0 563 0 0 564 563 1 565 0 0 567 565 1 Universal Solar Cellphone Charger Concept Explored https://makingcircuits.com/blog/universal-solar-cellphone-charger-concept-explored/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 07:43:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1026 The first four blocks signify a regular solar electrification set up. The solar panel voltage is first designed to the preferred battery voltage by means of a solar charger/controller module. The output from the solar module is then given to an inverter battery for charging it. The charger/controller immediately removes the charging of the inverter battery when it's fully charged and resumes when it gets to the under charge threshold level. The battery is utilized for traveling the inverter at any time needed. The output of the inverter is employed for charging the offered mobile phones and the Li-Ion batteries. 20 cell phones would certainly approximately utilize 20 to 30 watt hour of power, so a 100 watt inverter would probably properly work the purpose. A 40 AH car battery is advisable right here, which might cheerfully fulfill the 5 day autonomy demand. The solar panel is not at all important below, a 60 watt panel owning an open circuit voltage of 30V and a short circuit current of 3 amps will likely be quite well suited for the current application. The solar charger/controller is the only devices which might be produced at home. I have by now mentioned the kind of circuit in this post, which can be efficiently raised for the existing application (the transformer ought to be changed by the solar panel terminals).]]> 1026 0 0 0 How to Make a Sequential Delay Timer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-sequential-delay-timer-circuit/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 07:50:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1028 The Design The offered 2 LED sequential delay timer circuit design could be observed above, it may be also employed as a transistor LED sequential bar graph generator circuit. I demonstrated 3 delay timer stages rather than two here, in spite of this a variety of stages could be integrated according to the application specifications. Right here as soon as the circuit is operated, the LEDs are meant to turn on in series one after the other at a specific rate based upon the values of the appropriate RC parts which can be discretely variable, and might be set separately every one of the sequential phases.. Fundamentally, the circuit is created by configuring a group of two-transistor (T1 and T2) delay ON timer levels. At first when power is turned on all the LEDs or the attached loads remains turned OFF Very first the extreme left C2 starts charging gradually, and after a fixed time as set by the values of C2, R2, P1 and D1, T1 is activated ON, with T1 ON, T2 also switches ON and the first LED from left switches ON. With the above activity T2 collector at the same time gives a charging voltage for the center delay timer's C2, which yet again repeats the cycle exactly the same as sated above. As a result of this the center LED illuminates, and its T2 provides the signal to the right hand side delay timer phase, which experiences an equivalent stage lighting the third LED in the range. The circumstance now continues latched with all the LEDs lighted until the "reset" switch is pushed for some instances and unveiled. The pushing of the reset button allows the LeDs to shut off gradually in the overcome order in sequence. In the event where the circuit is needed to function instantly similar to an LED chaser circuit, in which the LEDs need to cycle consequently producing an incrementing bar graph type series, and a reverse bar graph shutting off consequence, the following proven design may be integrated for the same. In the above process, T3 is at first activated when the circuit is very first powered. Once the last LED is lit, T3 is compelled to close off as a result of optimistic potential from the collector of the extreme right hand side T2 transistor. The LEDs currently start shutting one after the other with a time delay as based on the value of R1s. For situations where the LEDs need to turn off all of a sudden or immediately, the above layout could be altered in accordance with the following diagram: As could be noticed, in the above diagram, the moment the last LED is lit, T3 is furthermore turned ON, and it pushes all the timing capacitor to turn off instantly or suddenly. When this occurs all the LEDs shut off, and T3 subsequently is shut OFF to ensure that the cycle is permitted to do again as just stated. Parts List R1 = 610K (can be adjustable) R2 = 2k2 R3, R6 = 10K R4, R5 = 1K P1 = 1M pot D1 = 3V zener diode D2 = 1N4007 D3 = 1N4148 T1,T3 = BC547 T2 = BC557 C2 = 33uF/25V (adjustable)]]> 1028 0 0 0 100 watt Current Controlled LED Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/100-watt-current-controlled-led-driver-circuit/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 07:55:28 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1030 Investigating the figure we are able to observe a few transistors are combined with each other such that the base of the upper transistor T1 evolves into the collector load of the bottom transistor T2. The upper transistor T1 which in fact possess the LED current is pretty susceptible on its own, as well as being not equipped to manage the quantity of current by means of itself and the LED. On the other hand because the base current of this transistor chooses the quantity of collector current which could cross, it basically signifies that by limiting its base current to some safe stipulated levels, it may be easy to continue the all round usage within bearable limitations. A current sensing resistor attached at the emitter of T1 is employed to convert the current consumed, into a potential improvement, across it. This potential difference turns into the base activate for R2. In spite of this provided that this voltage is below 0.6 volts or simply below the minimum forward voltage drop of T2, T2 continues to be unresponsive, but as soon as it begins going above this value, causes T2 which often clamps the base voltage of T1, turning it into inactive. This immediate cut off of the base drive to T1 shuts the LED for some portion of a second, delivering the current and the potential decrease across the current decreasing resistor to zero. This motion reverts the circuit to its original posture and the LED is once again turned on. The method repeats several occasions per second to keep the LED and the current to safe and exactly reasonable limitations. The value of R2 is computed in such a means that it maintains the potential improvement across on its own below 0.6 volts until the LED current gets to 100 watts, after which the minimizing method starts. Caution: The LED ought to be installed on a properly fully optimized heatsink as per the specs offered in its datasheet.. For measuring R1 you can use the following formula: R1 = (Us - 0.7)Hfe/Load Current, where Us = supply voltage, Hfe = T1 forward current gain, Load current = LED current = 100/35 = 2.5 amps R1 = (35 - 0.7)30/2.5 = 410 Ohms, wattage for the above resistor could well be = 35 x (35/410) = 2.98 or 3 watts Formula for calculating R2 is: R2 = 0.7/LED current R2 = 0.7/2.5 = 0.3 ohms, wattage might be determined as = 0.7 x 2.5 = 2 watts]]> 1030 0 0 0 How to Connect Solar Panel with Battery and Diesel Generator for of-the-grid Living https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-connect-solar-panel-with-battery-and-diesel-generator-for-of-the-grid-living/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 08:02:19 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1032 The best way to Hook up a Solar Panel System After you’ve obtained all the above elements, the fixing of the units could be began with the following actions: Set up the panels over the rrof of your house, such that it encounters directly into the sky. This alignment helps to ensure that the panel continues to be subjected to the sun light throughout most of the time between day break and dusk. The above position ought to offer an optimum of 24 volts when the sun light is entirely incident over the panel and around 12 volts in the course of twilight periods. It is possible to verify the output voltage from the panel, utilizing a multitester (DC volt range) when there’s adequate daylight over the panels. Subsequent arrives the testing of the battery charger/regulator unit, it is possible to do by temporarily hooking up its inputs to the solar output voltage (around 15 to 20 volts). Right now examining the output from the regulator must read around 14 volts, this makes sure the right working of the unit. The inverter may generally require no testing as it might be achieved priorly while purchasing it from the dealer. Now it’s time to be used the inverter with the regulator, once again that’s quite simple. Just hook up the output terminals of the regulator/charger to the battery input of the inverter. Also plug-in the inverter to the mains input line of your house electrical. You may want to take the guide of an expert electrician only for this part of the link. Place the charger and the inverter set up in one corner of the house, such that they will be securely positioned faraway from heat, water and human interventions. The battery which happens to be the main power storage element may now be introduced into the scene and mixed with the regulator’s pertinent terminals (mentioned as (+)(-) bat). Lastly it’s the instance when we associated the solar panel with the above located units. Attach wires of essential length to the solar panel terminals and perfectly go ahead them to the house interior to enable them to be hooked up to the charger appropriate terminals (written as +IN and –IN). With the above design done right as mentioned and the sunlight at full throttle, your battery will begin gaining charged. The regulator will observe the charge and switches it OFF and ON as per the scenario. Considering the battery in the charged condition at first, would need 6 hours of charging from the panels after which the inverter might be switched on for getting the preferred AC power, more suitable it has got to be carried out when it’s fairly dark inside the house. On the other hand a diesel controlled car alternator could be integrated for providing the inverter by means of an additional regulator assembly and a change over switch. This activity will make sure an AC power to the house 24-7.]]> 1032 0 0 0 How to Desalinate Sea Water Rapidly https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-desalinate-sea-water-rapidly/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 08:06:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1034 An easy and an inexpensive set up (Entirely Designed By Me) as demonstrated in the diagram will be able to turn sea water into fresh drinking water in large quantity, based upon the size of the sphere. The primary characteristic of this method unlike other traditional methods is the quick change rate of waste water into fresh water. Furthermore, given that the entire method is solar functioned, cost received is zero. Another great benefit of this design is that it's not influenced by the position of the sun and will function during the day as efficiently. Let’s research tips on how to desalinate sea water by means of a basic the set up: The method is essentially comprised of a big hollow glass sphere with a “T” shaped glass tube extension emerging from its top portion. The sphere consists of solid glass at the bottom, up to the focal point of the sphere. This base surface might be colored black to boost the effectiveness of the unit. As can be watched in the diagram, the short vertical arm of the tube which stretches upwards terminates into a funnel. The funnel bears a valve by means of a tap. The long horizontal arm is bent at 90 degrees and elapses inside the reservoir tank. The complete set up is positioned outdoors in an open area where clear sunlight is available the whole day. Sea water is poured by way of the funnel and the glass sphere is permitted to fill totally, only up to the circumference of the globe. Now the tap is closed. How the System Performs? As soon as the sphere is made up of water, it reacts like a big, solid and a powerful convex lens. In our childhood days everyone has had fun with this awesome piece of lenses. We certainly have observed how it is capable of concentrate and focus sun rays at one single point when positioned at a specific angle under sunlight. (Click Image to Enlarge) The produced focal point is in fact a focused beam of the sun rays gathered and deflected at a little point. This point is very hot, and is capable of generate burning effect over everything located under it. The above theory continues to be basically taken advantage of in the existing design. Without water the sphere is worthless and will act exactly like a standard glass. The sunrays engaging in it thus are not able to produce much of a heat. But the instance it is loaded with water, it is changed into a big solid convex lens obtaining a focal point precisely at its center. Sun rays striking the glass sphere are immediately refracted all throughout the curvature of the filled water to achieve specifically at the center. Right here the rays concentrate into single hot spot. Water at this time begins heating up instantaneously and the heat is slowly shifted to the entire mass of the packed water. As the temperature goes up, water molecules are transformed into vapor. The water vapor created, increase by means of the “T” shaped glass tube and the reservoir tank. The tank being fairly much cooler assists in transforming the obtained water vapor into clean, drinkable water* (see comments) on its roof. Water molecules collected on the roof of the reservoir tank gradually collect to form water drops which eventually fall into the tank and pure water is hence gathered inside the tank. This water is completely pure, and free from viruses, bacteria or dust particles. The performance of this equipment will reduce if the filled water is murky or muddy. Simply because in this condition the focal point is going to be relatively dull and won’t have the ability to produce sufficient heat. The above technique must have definitely made you realize relating to the best way to desalinate sea water merely and efficiently.]]> 1034 0 0 0 Easy Solar Cooker Apparatus for Free Home Cooking https://makingcircuits.com/blog/easy-solar-cooker-apparatus-for-free-home-cooking/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 08:11:08 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1036 Steps to make a basic solar cooker at home: Talking about the figure, we observe that the main element to blame for creating the extreme heating impact is the large dish type cone. The cone may be ideally developed making use of an properly sized tin sheet. Cut and turn the tin sheet to make a cone of around 4 feet in diameter. Make certain that the conical point generates a small hole or starting for the central pole to go through it. Obtain the edge of the cone with nuts and bolts to make a rigid structure. Fix the cone utilizing clamps over a flat open ground as demonstrated at the site where it is to be set up (where a good amount of sunshine is available.) A hollow metallic pipe is fixed into the ground by way of the central opening of the cone. An properly sized bowl painted black over its bottom round is repaired by means of welding at the top end of the pipe as presented in the diagram. This practically finishes the plain set up technique of this super cost-efficient solar cooker system. As the sun rises, the rays incident over the cone’s inner polished surface gets incorporated at a particular angle and get focused around the top end of the pole where the welded bowl is placed. The pole will require further adjustments until the targeted rays perfectly strike the bottom of the bowl. You will discover that within minutes the bowl gets heated to significant limits and sprinkling water over it sizzles. A super economical solar cooker is for your use, any food you would like might be prepared merely by positioning it over the central bowl. Now you understand all the methods concerning how to get a solar cooker that absolutely functions.]]> 1036 0 0 0 Simple Solar Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-solar-inverter-circuit/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 08:15:15 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1038 For Charging Batteries up to 250 AH The charger section in the above circuit could be accordingly improved for allowing the charging of high current batteries in the order of 100 AH to 250 AH. An outboard transistor TIP36 is properly built-in across the IC 338 for helping the essential high current charging. The emitter resistor of TIP36 needs to be determined correctly usually the transistor may indeed blow off, do it by trial and error technique, begin with 1 ohm at first, then slowly go on lowering it until the needed quantity of current turns into attainable at the output.   ]]> 1038 0 0 0 Understanding Solar Panels Voltage, Current Specs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/understanding-solar-panels-voltage-current-specs/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 08:19:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1040 1040 0 0 0 LED Emergency Light with Automatic Battery Cut-of Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/led-emergency-light-with-automatic-battery-cut-of-circuit/ Fri, 28 Aug 2015 08:23:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1042 Parts List R1 = 2M2 R2 = 1M R3, R4, R5, R9, R6, R7, R8 = 4K7 ALL LED RESISTORS = 330 OHMS D1, D2, D3 = 1N4007 D4----D7 = 1N5402 C1 = 1000uF/25V C2 = 1uF/25V T1, T3 = BC547 T4, T2 = BD139 Z1, Z2 = 3V/400mW P1 = 10K PRESET IC1 = IC 555 TRANSFORMER = 12V, CURRENT = 1/10 OF BATTERY AH LEDS = WHITE 5mm, OR AS PER CHOICE. BATTERY = 12V, AH = AS PER LED POWER AND BACK-UP Specifications. The above circuit could be much less complicated by removing the IC555, and by utilizing just a single PNP transistor rather than two NPN in the battery auto-battery cut of section. P1 is utilized for changing the ambient light guideline in which the LEDs prevent lighting. P2 is set such that at 14.6V (across the battery terminals) the base LED turns into very dim, barely noticeable, and at 12.5V it's brightly lit. The above circuit may be also combined with a solar panel for getting a programmed charging facility from both the sources that is from the panel during day time and from mains after the sun sets. Parts List R1,R2,R3, R4, R5 = 1K P1 = 470K P2 = 1K C1 = 1000uF/25V D1---D5 = 1N4007 T1 = BC547 T2 = 8050 T3 = TIP127 ALL LED RESISTORS = 330 OHMS LEDS = WHITE, 5MM LDR = ANY STANDARD TYPE TRANSFORMER = 0-12/1AMP]]> 1042 0 0 0 Automatic 40 Watt LED Solar Street Light Circuit Project - Part-2 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-40-watt-led-solar-street-light-circuit-project-part-2/ Sun, 30 Aug 2015 12:57:45 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1011 This concludes the complete justification of the suggested 40 watt automatic solar LED street lamp circuit project. For those who have any queries, you might show them by means of your feedback. Constructed prototype readily available for INR 5000/- All Inclusive, with all part numbers unchanged. Parts List R1 = 100K P1 = 100K pot C1 = 680pF C2 = 0.01uF R2 = 100 Ohms T1 = TIP122 R3----R14 = 10 Ohms, 2watt LEDs = 1 watt, 350 mA, cool white IC1 = IC555 In the final prototype the LEDs were installed on unique aluminum based heatsink type PCB, it is highly suggested, without which the LED life would weaken.   ]]> 1011 0 0 0 How to Build a Automatic 40 Watt LED Solar Street Light Circuit Project - Part-1 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-automatic-40-watt-led-solar-street-light-circuit-project-part-1/ Sun, 30 Aug 2015 12:54:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1045   Parts List R1, R3,R4, R12 = 10k R5 = 240 OHMS P1,P2 =10K preset P3 = 10k pot or preset R10 = 470K, R9= 2M2 R11 = 100K R8=10 OHMS 2 WATT T1----T4 = BC547 A1/A2 = 1/2 IC324 ALL ZENER DIODES = 4.7V, 1/2 WATT D1---D3,D6 = 1N4007 D4,D5 = 6AMP DIODES IC2 = IC555 IC1 = LM338 RELAYS = 12V,400 OHMS, SPDT BATTERY = 12V, 26AH SOLAR PANEL = 21V OPEN CIRCUIT, 7AMP @SHORT CIRCUIT. Solar Charger/Controller, High/Low Battery Cut OFF and Ambient Light Detector Circuit Stages: Talking about the circuit diagram above, the panel voltage is controlled and maintained to the needed 14.4 volts by the IC LM 338. P3 is utilized for setting the output voltage to precisely 14.3 volts or somewhere near to it. R6 and R7 forms the current reducing parts and ought to be determined properly as talked about Right here. The under control voltage is following placed on the voltage/charge control and the connected steps. Two opamps A1 and A2 are connected with converse configurations, which means the output of A1 turns into high when a preset over voltage value is identified, while the output of A2 turns out high on detection of a specific low voltage guideline. The above high and low voltage thresholds are correctly set by the fixed P2 and P1 respectively. Transistors T1 and T2 reply appropriately to the above outputs from the opamps and triggers the specific relay for managing the charge levels of the associated battery with regards to the presented guidelines. The relay attached to T1 in particular manages the overcharge limit of the battery. The relay hooked up to T3 is liable for holding the voltage to the LED lamp phase. Providing the battery voltage is above the low voltage limit and provided that no ambient light occurs around the system, this relay maintains the lamp turned on, the LED module is immediately turned OFF in the event the required problems are not finished. IC1 together with the connected elements forms the light detector circuit, its output goes high in the existence of ambient light and vice versa. Believe it's day time and a partially discharged battery at 11.8V is attached to the appropriate points, also believe the high voltage cut off to be set at 14.4V. On power turn on (either from the solar panel or an external DC source), the battery will begin charging via the N/C contacts of the relay. Since it's day, the output of IC1 is high, which switches ON T3. The relay hooked up to T3 holds the battery voltage and prevents it from achieving the LED module and the lamp stays shut OFF. As soon as the battery gets completely charged, A1's output goes high activating T1 and the linked relay. This disconnects the battery from the charging voltage. The above scenario latches ON with the aid of the feedback voltage from the N/O contacts of the above relay to the base of T1. The latch continues until the low voltage situation is attained, when T2 switches ON, grounding T1's base biasing and reverting the top relay into the charging mode. Within the next Post we can easily talk about the PWM managed, easy LED lamp module and discover how the above circuit is built-in along with it.]]> 1045 0 0 0 How to Make a Simple Solar MPPT Circuit Using IC555 - PWM Maximum Power Point Tracker https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-make-a-simple-solar-mppt-circuit-using-ic555-pwm-maximum-power-point-tracker/ Sun, 30 Aug 2015 13:03:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1047 An improved version of the above design utilizing buck converter may be seen in this post. How to Set up the Circuit It might be completed in the following way: At first keep S1 turned OFF. Show the panel to peak sunshine, and regulate the preset to get the essential optimal charging voltage across the mosfet drain diode output and ground. The circuit is ready right now. As soon as this is achieved, turn on S1, the battery will begin obtaining charged in the MPPT mode. Attaching a Current Control Characteristic A careful research of the above circuit reveals that as the mosfet makes an effort to provide the dropping panel voltage level, it permits the battery to obtain more current from the panel, which impacts the panel voltage reducing it additional down activating a run-away circumstance, this might be totally against the MPPT law. A current control feature as demonstrated below diagram looks after this issue and prevents the battery from attracting too much current beyond the specific limitations. Consequently assists in keeping the panel voltage unaltered. RX which happens to be the current restraining resistor could be determined with the aid of the following formula: RX = 0.6/I, where I is the stipulated minimum charging current for the linked battery   A crude but less complicated version of the above described design might be constructed making use of pin2 and pin6 threshold detection of the IC555, the total diagram could be observed below: ]]> 1047 0 0 0 How to Calculate Solar Panel, Inverter and Battery Charger Specifications for Acquring Optimal Results https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-calculate-solar-panel-inverter-and-battery-charger-specifications-for-acquring-optimal-results/ Sun, 30 Aug 2015 13:19:12 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1049 The following publish describes by means of calculations tips on how to choose and assess the right solar panel, inverter and charger controller combinations for obtaining optimal results in the form of free electricity.

For comfort, let's assume you have available a a hundred watt gadget you are aiming for to use with totally free solar power for ten hours every night.

To figure out precisely how large solar panel, batteries, charge controller and inverter you are required to have, watch the below circumstances.

1. Analyze the amount of electricity needed. 100 Watts x 10 hours = 1,000 Watt hours. Which happens to be the total power that is required.

2. Subsequent determine how large solar panel you actually need. Based upon a ten hour day of brightness, the approximation is self-explanatory:
1,000 Watt hours / 10 hours sunlight = 100 Watt solar panel.

The easy simple truth is that almost all the summer time days or weeks offer about 15 hours of sunshine and winter season you get approximately 4-5 hours of natural light. Almost always choose the most awful scenario predicament for
your solar panel. On those grounds, select a winter season day of sunshine.
1,000 Watt hours / 5 hours sunlight = 200 Watt solar panel.

(Depending on standard United States daily sunlight.)

3. Estimate the optimum size of the batteries which can be important. 1,000 Watt hours divided by 12 Volts = 83 Amp Hours of reserve battery power. 1,000 / 12 = 83.3
A standard marine deep cycle battery functions perfectly in this instance. Select much larger battery to be assured, believe 100 Amp hours power.

4. To calculate just how large solar charge controller you absolutely need, think about your solar panel energy specs, which is a hundred watts divided by twelve Volts.
100 / 12 = 8.3 Amps.
Desirably pick larger sized units, thereby use a ten Amp solar charge controller.

5. Know what power inverter can be utilized. That's the trouble-free element. You may want to energize a a hundred Watt load, consequently select an inverter including the
approximately a hundred Watts constant power standing.

]]> 1049 0 0 0 How to Build a Energy Saving Automatic LED Light Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-energy-saving-automatic-led-light-controller-circuit/ Mon, 31 Aug 2015 09:26:23 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1052   In accordance with the demand, the above circuit needs to be operated from a battery, charged from a solar charger controller circuit. I have talked about a lot of solar charger controller circuits within this blog, the LAST CIRCUIT presented in the post can be used for the existing use.]]> 1052 0 0 0 Make this Garden Solar LED Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/make-this-garden-solar-led-circuit/ Thu, 03 Sep 2015 08:56:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1055 The above diagram can also be integrated the following manner. It seems a lot more sensible now as the resistor is taken off the emitter for aiding economical initiating of the transistor. The diagram demonstrates a defective transistor number (8050), make use of 8550 rather. Suggested Solar Panel Specifications 6 to 8V/2 watt Voltage - 6V Current - 330 mA]]> 1055 0 0 0 Hybrid Two Input Solar, Wind Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/hybrid-two-input-solar-wind-battery-charger-circuit/ Thu, 03 Sep 2015 09:00:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1057 ]]> 1057 0 0 0 5V 3 Amp Fixed Voltage Regulator Circuit using IC LM123 LM323 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/5v-3-amp-fixed-voltage-regulator-circuit-using-ic-lm123-lm323/ Thu, 03 Sep 2015 09:04:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1059 LM123 Electrical Specs The following guidelines show the main working specifications of the IC LM123: Input Voltage: Minimum 7.5V, Maximum 15V Output Voltage: Minimum 4.7V Maximum 5.3V Line Regulation: Typically 5mV at 7.5V and 25mV at 15V Load Regulation: Typically 25mV at 7.5V and 100mV at 15V Circuit Diagram of IC LM123, input 7.5V to 15V, output fixed 5V, 3Amp Courtesy: http://www.ti.com/lit/ds/snvs757b/snvs757b.pdf Application Note: Producing a Solar Cell Phone Charger Circuit Utilizing IC LM123 The following circuit demonstrates one typical instance where the above IC is efficiently useful for charging 3 to 4 cell phones at the same time from a 12V 3 amp source. The source may be a lead acid battery, a AC/DC adapter or an alternative input for example from a solar panel, wind turbine etc.   ]]> 1059 0 0 0 Making a Transformerless Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/making-a-transformerless-power-supply-circuit/ Mon, 07 Sep 2015 07:33:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1061 transformerles power The circuit is intended in order that the neutral terminal goes toward the earth of your power supply. This implies the lively is attached to the capacitor. Now, the fact that lively functions could this be: The lively terminal soars 120x 1.4 = 180v in the positive direction after which declines to 180v within the reverse path. Quite simply it really is 180v greater than the neutral line then 180v below the neutral. With regard to 240v mains, this is 325v greater then 325v lower. The neutral is coupled to the framework of your job of course, if you contact it, not much will take place. Will not increase or slide. However assume you link up the power leads round the improper approach. The active has become coupled to the framework and if an individual contact the chassis and a water pipe, you might receive a 180v or 345v jolt. Honestly, that is the reason why a CAPACITOR dependent power supply should be entirely isolated. At this point we come face to face with the query: So how exactly does a capacitor make a 12v power supply? Whenever a capacitor is attached to the mains, one lead is climbing and plummeting. Based on the scale the capacitor, it is going to permit current to move into and out of the other terminal. If the capacitor is a substantial value, a higher current may pass into and from the lead. Furthermore, an increased voltage will permit a larger current to circulate. This current is “taken out of the ground” and “moves straight into the ground.” Will not range from mains. The mains merely: “has a bearing on” the movement of current. Therefore we now have a circulation of current directly into and out of the capacitor. In case you placed a resistor between the capacitor and “ground,” the quantity of current that can pass, is determined by 3 items, the amplitude of the voltage, the dimensions of the capacitor and also the acceleration of the increase and drop. Whenever current runs by way of a resistor, a voltage grows along the resistor in case we opt for the proper value of resistance, we are going to obtain a 12v power-supply. THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE The OUTPUT VOLTAGE of most transformerless power supplies is going to be around 50% Greater than the mains voltage in case a LOAD is just not linked. You got it: The output of a 120v CAPACITOR POWER SUPPLY (transformerless power supply) is going to be around 180v and a 240v mains transformer-less power supply will be approximately 345v. How would you obtain a 12v or 24v supply???? Functions similar to this: The transformerless power supply is a CURRENT based power supply. Quite simply we need to mention CURRENT magnitudes and not voltages. For a bridge circuit (known as full-wave design) it is going to provide 7mA for each 100n. Assume we have 220n. We now have 15mA accessible. We consider the 15mA and point out: Just how many v will establish around a 100R load? The solution = 0.015 x 100 = 15v. In case we work with 82R the voltage will probably be about 12v. When we apply 220R the voltage will likely be 33v. That's the way the output voltage is actually formulated. Should you include one more 220n over the 220n, the voltages will probably be TWO TIMES. Is actually as basic as this.]]> 1061 0 0 0 Simple Door Security Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-door-security-alarm-circuit/ Tue, 08 Sep 2015 16:35:51 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1069 door knock alarm circuit       Parts List parts list]]> 1069 0 0 0 Driver Circuit for CREE XM-L T6 LED https://makingcircuits.com/blog/driver-circuit-for-cree-xm-l-t6-led/ Sat, 12 Sep 2015 11:46:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1078 Talking about the above diagram, the design is a simple current controlled stage where T2 establishes the highest current limit of T1 by managing the base potential of T1. When the circuit is turned on, T1 is activated via R1 lighting the LED. The method permits the whole current used by the LED to go through one of the chosen resistors (R2, R3, or R4) to ground. This produces a proportionate amount of voltage across this current sensing resistor, which in turn forms the activating voltage for the base of T2. If this sensed voltage surpasses 0.7V, T2 is forced to trigger and ground the base potential of T1, therefore limiting its conduction, and eventually minimizing power to the LED. The LED is currently forced to turn off, in spite of this the method as the LED tries to shut off it also starts lowering the voltage across the particular base resistor of T2. T2 now encounters a loss of initiating voltage and switches OFF, restoring the LED back to its original state via T1, until again the restriction procedure is begun and this goes on, sustaining a current controlled illumination over the associated LED, which is a Cree XM-L 10 watt lamp in this instance. Right here R4 ought to be picked to permit the LED to light up with optimal intake (max illumination), which may be at its rated 3 amp level....R2 and R3 might be chosen to provide any other preferred lower current operation (lower intensity) to the LED such that by choosing these generates three different intensity levels for the LED. Parts List T1 = TIP 41 (on heatsink) T2 = TIP 31 (on heatsink) R1 may be calculated by using the following formula: R1 = (Us - LEDv) x hFe / LED current = (3.5 - 3.3) x 25 / 3 = 1.66 ohms Wattage of the resistor = (3.5 - 3.3) x 3 = 0.6 watts or 1 watt R2, R3, R4 could be determined as: Low Intensity = R2 = 0.7/1 = 0.7 ohms, wattage = 0.7 x 1 = 0.7 watts or 1 watt Medium Intensity R3 = 0.7/2 = 0.35 ohms, wattage = 0.7 x 2 = 1.4 watts Optimal Intensity = R4 = 0.7/3 = 0.23 ohms, wa ttage = 0.7 x 3 = 2.1 watts To be able to drive the offered Cree LED from an mains managed SMPS, the following measures might be incorprated to be able to implment the needed volatge and current regulated procedures: 1) Procure a 12V/3amp readymade SMPS. 2) Open it and search for the small optocoupler part on the PCB. This may appear like a tiny 4-pin black IC. 3) After you have situated it, change its input side by with care carrying out all the instructins as mentioned in this article post: Modify and Customize Current inside a readymade SMPS]]> 1078 0 0 0 280 0 0 282 280 1 220V Transformerless LED Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/220v-transformerless-led-driver-circuit/ Sat, 12 Sep 2015 11:51:04 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1080 Talking about the regular transformerless constant current LED driver circuit using the IC MBI6001, we are able to notice a small external parts utilized besides a few resistors. Right here the resistors R1, R2, and R3 assist to figure out the right PWM setting for attaining the meant regular current output from the IC. The values of the resistors are effective by the producer and can be utilized according to the provided guidelines. We’ll speak about this in the later section of the post. How many LEDs can be utilized at the Output. The number of LEDs which can be securely utilized at the output of this IC is really not crucial. One can utilize a variety of LEDs across the demonstrated output pins of the IC, the voltage across the series is instantly realigned by the ICs internal circuitry. In spite of this the highest joined forward voltage of the linked LED series are not able to go over the the input AC voltage value, elsewhere the light from the LEDs can find decreased and unexciting. Choosing Continuous Current Limit for the LEDs As described previously the IC makes use of PWM for managing the current to the LED, and this might be set as per the need or the optimum safe limit of the LED string. The above is dependent upon the numerous resistors integrated externally with the IC and is used by both improving the PWM duty cycle or by reducing the duty cycle of the PWM. On the other hand 90mA is the largest amount of current which might be accomplished out of this IC, that means high watt LEDs simply cannot be employed with this particular transformerless continuous current LED driver IC circuit. Also, above 23mA the IC may begin heating up, lowering the overall effectiveness of the circuit, consequently above this restrict the IC needs to be trapped with a piece of aluminum heatsink to be able to sustain optimum reply. The following table demonstrates the values of R2 which might be properly chosen by the consumer as per the desired LED specifications.   The resistor R1 could be changed to a 1K resistor and is nothing important, even though its objective is meant for fine tuning the strength of the attached LED string, for that reason might be refined a bit to get the preferred power from the LEDs. R3 is optional and could be basically absent, its make use of is limited for certain sophisticated necessity and might be disregarded for common application as highlighted above.]]> 1080 0 0 0 Scrolling, Chasing RGB Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/scrolling-chasing-rgb-circuit/ Sat, 12 Sep 2015 12:01:10 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1084 We'll need 24 of these LEDs for generating meant scrolling impact, as soon as obtained these types of might be constructed serially as demonstrated in the following image: As may be seen, the cathodes are all made common and grounded via personal 100 ohm resistors (linked to the harmful supply f the circuit). The anode ends can be viewed chosen with some appropriate figures that ought to be properly associated with the specific output pinouts of the IC 4017 circuit as proven in this article figure: The circuit working could be known with the aid of the following factors: We are able to refer to four IC 4017, 10 phase Johnson's decade counter/divider device which can be cascaded in a special way such that the designed scrolling consequence is accomplished from the design. Pin#14 which can be the clock input of the ICs are all connected with each other and built-in with a clock source, which may be very easily attained from any regular astable circuit such as a IC 555 atable, transistor astable, a 4060 circuit or simply a NAND gate oscillator circuit. The speed of the frequency set on the astable circuit chooses the speed of the scrolling impact of the LEDs. When power is turned on, C1 immediately causes pin#15 of IC1 to go high briefly. This pulls pin#3 of IC1 to a high while the left pinouts of IC1 are all set to zero logic. With pin#3 of IC1 heading high leads to pin#15 of IC2 to also go high, which likewise puts pin#3 of IC2 at a high logic and all its other pinouts at logic zero......this in turn causes IC3 and IC4 to undergo an equivalent set of pinout orientation. So during power turn on all the 4017 ICs achieve the above condition and stay disabled making certain that at first all the RGB LEDs are kept turned OFF. In spite of this the instance C1 charges fully, pin#15 of IC1 is pleased from the high produced by C1, and now it's capable of react to the clocks, and in the method the high logic series from its pin#3 moves to the next pin#2....the first RGB string now lights up (first RED string lights up). With pin#3 of IC1 getting low, IC2 too now turns into allowed and quite in the same way gets prepared to answer the following clock at its pin#14. Consequently the instance IC1 logic sequence shifts more from its pin2 to pin4, IC2 satisfies by pressing the pinout high from its pin#3 to pin#4....the next RGB string now lights up (green string lights up and substitutes the earlier red LED string, the red being moved to the next RGB string). With the succeeding clocks at pin#14 of the ICs the similar is accompanied by IC 3 and IC4, such that the RGB string now seems to be shifting or scrolling across the provided 8 succeeding LED strips. As the sequencing continues across the 4 cascaded 4017 ICs, eventually of time the last logic pulse actually reaches pin#11 of IC4, the moment this occurs the high logic at this pin immediately "pokes" pin#15 of IC1 and pushes it to reset and go back to its primary position, and the cycle begins afresh.... The above RGB scrolling consequence might not be too amazing, because the moving pattern could be in the manner R> G> B......, that is one color occurring behind the other. To be able to attain a much more attractive appearing pattern in the manner R> R> R> R> G> G> G> G> B> B> B> B.....and so on, we have to apply the following circuit, it displays a 4 channel design, for additional number of channels, you might basically continue adding the IC 4017 ICs in the identical, fashion as demonstrated in the diagram.   ]]> 1084 0 0 0 Car LED Bulb Circuit Using 3020 SMD LEDs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/car-led-bulb-circuit-using-3020-smd-leds/ Sat, 12 Sep 2015 12:05:45 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1086 In the above image, we are able to refer to the LEDs constructed over pcs of PCB strips, tiled in a specific measured manner. The vertical PCBs are 7 in numbers, and have 4 LEDs on each strips. One circular PCB comprise of 22 LEDs may be seen placed over the vertical PCB structure. The vertical PCBs thus incorporate 7 x 4 = 28 nos of 3020 LEDs, while the circular PCB mount 22 nos of LEds, giving a total of 28 + 22 = 50 LEDs These 50 LEDs are linked to form 12 strings of 4 LEDs each, and a single string of 2 LEds. Each of the 12 strings need to have their own individual series resistor (SMD) whose value could possibly be around 55 ohms 1/4 watt. The single 2 LED string must connect a separate 250 ohm, 1/4 watt resistor. These resistors act like current limiters for preserving the LEds from car alternator voltage fluctuations as well as help with keeping the illumination level across all the LED groups as even as possible. The resistors can be employed at the rear side of the PCB strips. The circuit diagram for the offered simple car LED lamp is demonstrated below: Car LED bulb circuit making use of 3020 SMD LEDs and current decreasing resistors]]> 1086 0 0 0 1w, 4w, 6w, 10w, 12w LED Driver Circuit SMPS https://makingcircuits.com/blog/1w-4w-6w-10w-12w-led-driver-circuit-smps/ Mon, 14 Sep 2015 08:22:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1088 4 to 12 watt smps led driver circuit The offered smps LED driver circuit is exceedingly adaptable and in particular fitted to driving high watt LEDs, in spite of this being a non-isolated topology does not give safety from electric shocks at the LED side of the circuit. Aside from the above disadvantage, the circuit is perfect and is practically guarded from all feasible mains surge related hazards. Even though a non-isolated configuration may appear a little unwanted, it reduces the constructor from winding complex primary/secondary sections on E-cores, since the transformer here is restored with a few easy ferrite drum type of chokes. The main element here to blame for the performance of all the capabilities is the IC VIPer22A from ST microelectronics, which has already been specifically made for such small transformerless compact converter applications.   4 to 12 watt smps led driver circuit (1) The circuit working of this 1 watt to 12watt LED driver may be known as presented under: The input mains 220V or 120V AC is half wave repaired by D1 and C1. C1 together with the inductor L0 and C2 make up a pie filter network for cacelling EMI disturbenaces. D1 ought to be ideally changed to two diodes in series for preserving the 2kv spikes bursts genareated by C1 and C2. R10 guarantees some level of surge security and works similar to a fuse throughout catatrophic circumstances. As may be seen in the above circuit diagram, the voltage acroiss C2 is aplied to the interal mosfet drain of the IC at pin5 to pin8. An inbuilt continuous current source of the VIPer IC provides a 1mA current to pin4 of the IC which is the Vdd pin of the IC. At about 14.5V at Vdd, the curent sources gets turned OFF and causes the IC circuitry into an oscillatory mode or initiates pulsing of the IC. The parts Dz, C4 and D8 turn out to be the circuit regulation network, where D8 charges C4 to the peak voltage in the freewheeling period and when D5 is forward one-sided. Throughout the above measures, the source or the referance of the IC is set to about 1V below ground. For an extensive info regarding the circuit information of the 1 watt to 12 watt LED driver, make sure you undergo the following pdf document offered by ST microelectronics. WARNING: PLEASE ADD A SMALL PIECE OF HEATSINK WITH THE IC, OTHERWISE THE LEDS WILL START FLASHING ON/OFF RAPIDLY AS SOON AS THE IC BECOMES TOO HOT...THEREFORE MAKE SURE THE IC IS NOT ALLOWED TO BECOME HOT, BY ADDING A SUITABLE HEATSINK.]]> 1088 0 0 0 501 0 0 503 501 1 538 0 0 539 538 1 540 0 0 542 540 1 584 0 0 586 584 1 629 0 0 630 0 0 631 https://makingcircuits.com/ 629 1 640 0 0 641 https://makingcircuits.com/ 640 1 648 0 0 649 https://makingcircuits.com/ 648 1 664 0 0 666 https://makingcircuits.com/ 664 1 749 0 0 752 https://makingcircuits.com/ 749 1 Transformerless 110V Tube Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/transformerless-110v-tube-light-circuit/ Mon, 14 Sep 2015 08:27:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1092 ]]> 1092 0 0 0 Chasing LED Trouser Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/chasing-led-trouser-circuit/ Sat, 19 Sep 2015 08:30:56 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1094 The offered running LED trouser will allow you to enhance any piece of clothing with LEDs which will react to your walking pattern or your foot step vibrations. Provided that you are motionless or not strolling the LEDs will remain turned off, and as soon a foot step is identified, the LEDs will jump in a chasing or sequencing fashion to produce a dazzling and unstable bar graph like result. The above characteristic is definitely beneficial in maintaining the current intake to the minimum to ensure that the connected battery can last for a much longer period of time in comparison to the other forms of LED trousers where the LEDs are invariably ON throwing away valuable battery power. Furthermore the concept produces a vibrant functioning light impact with every phase you practice. Circuit Explanation The circuit is really an easy vibration sensor which depends on the vibrations acquired by an connected mic. The sensing circuit is set up around the IC LM3915 which happens to be a dot/bar LED driver chip, it's major feature is to change minute voltage variations into respectively ever-changing output by means of sequencing LED graph. In the demonstrated LED trouser chasing light circuit, when a vibration is identified (foot steps), the mic picks up it and transforms it into minute electrical pulses. Exactly with every vibration instinct the mic briefly creates brief across it terminals, this leads to temporary grounding of the base of the NPN transistor by means of the 0.1uF capacitor. Consequently brings about the base drive via the 1M resistor to turn out to be zero switching of the transistor shortly. This causes a complete supply potential becoming permitted to pin#5 of the IC. According to the specs of the IC this brings about the output of the IC to shoot and light up all the LEDs from LED#1 to LED#10 in a swift sequencing design. The moment the foot step is paused the transistor is once again turned on closing off all the LEDs in a blink. The above activity maintains on duplicating as long the individual keeps walking producing a random filming LED bar impact on the trousers. The LEDs utilized ought to be high bright type preferably in blue/white/red colors or as per individual choices. The complete LED trouser circuit might be driven by a single 9V PP3 battery, that is certain to survive for a long period unless you are running around non-sop with the LED trousers on, throughout the night long. Two this kind of modules can be employed on the side stitch of the trouser legs, the mics needs to be locate at the bottom of the trouser, ideally attached ahead of the heel side of the shoe, this could be achieved by terminating the mic by way of a few inches of flexible wires. The presented 10k preset is for changing the sensitivity of the circuit so that the LEDs don't react to external sounds for example loud music, vehicle horns etc.   ]]> 1094 0 0 0 Making a 10w, 12w LED Lamp with Fixture https://makingcircuits.com/blog/making-a-10w-12w-led-lamp-with-fixture/ Sat, 19 Sep 2015 08:36:32 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1096           ]]> 1096 0 0 0 Simple NiCd Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-nicd-battery-charger-circuit/ Fri, 02 Oct 2015 10:54:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1098 simple N-Cd cell charger 6 cells 8 cells multiple   Hindi Translation NiCd  बैटरी चार्जर यह NiCd बैटरी चार्जर आसानी से उत्तराधिकार में कांटे की शकल 8 NiCd कोशिकाओं को रिचार्ज कर सकते हैं। यह मात्रा शक्ति के स्रोत के हर दूसरे सेल के लिए one.65v द्वारा उठाया जाता है, जहां मामलों में संवर्धित किया जा सकता है। BD679 एक गुणवत्ता heatsink पर स्थापित किया गया है कि घटना में, इनपुट वोल्टेज 25V की एक अधिकतम करने के लिए सुधार किया जा सकता है। सर्किट चार्जर बिजली की आपूर्ति से बंद कर दिया है जब बैटरी का निर्वहन नहीं होगा। ज्यादातर मामलों NiCd कोशिकाओं में पूरी तरह से चौदह घंटे की दर से शुल्क लिया जाना चाहिए। यह वास्तव में 14 घंटे के लिए सेल की क्षमता का 10% की एक रिचार्जिंग चालू है। यह एक बस के बारे में एक पूरी तरह से छुट्टी दे दी सेल के लिए सच है। एक उदाहरण के रूप में, एक 600 एमएएच सेल पूरी तरह से चौदह घंटे के लिए 60mA पर आरोप लगाया है। फिर से चार्ज वर्तमान घटना में है कि यह अंततः सेल को बर्बाद कर देगा अत्यधिक है। वर्तमान चार्ज की डिग्री 0mA से 600mA को 1K pot द्वारा नियंत्रित किया जाता है। NiCd कोशिकाओं उचित polarity के साथ जुड़े हुए हैं, जबकि BC557 शुरू कर दिया है। आप एक BD679 की पकड़ पाने 2A की मौजूदा क्षमता के साथ-साथ 30v की एक मामूली राशि वोल्टेज युक्त NPN औसत बिजली Darlington ट्रांजिस्टर के किसी भी प्रकार के साथ एक अन्य स्रोत को विफल करना चाहिए। 0.5 ओम, उच्चतम संभव उत्पादन चालू करने के लिए एक ओम बाधा का मूल्य कम करके 1 ए को बल मिला हो जाते हैं।  ]]> 1098 0 0 0 Simple Low Voltage Cut OFF Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-low-voltage-cut-off-circuit/ Fri, 02 Oct 2015 11:09:08 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1101 simple low voltage cut out circuit   Hindi Translation   कम वोल्टेज कट आउट एक 12V बैटरी की वोल्टेज एक न्यूनतम स्तर तक फैली हुई है एक बार इस विशेष सर्किट शायद पहचान करेगा। यह यह एक मोटर वाहन को शुरू करने के लिए असफल हो जायेगी जहां सिर्फ एक चरण में छुट्टी दे दी हो रही एक ऑटोमोबाइल बैटरी से बचने के लिए संभवतः गहरे निर्वहन या प्रतिक्रिया करने के लिए निश्चित रूप से है। इस सर्किट में पूर्व में की पेशकश की है सब कुछ करने के लिए दूसरों से अलग है। यह हिस्टैरिसीस भी शामिल है। हिस्टैरिसीस वास्तव में निचले और ऊपरी पता लगाने अंक आमतौर पर एक दूरी से अलग कर रहे हैं, जिसमें एक विशेषता है। लोड बाहर ले जाया जाता है जब वोल्टेज तो 10V है एक बार आमतौर पर, यह कम वोल्टेज काट सर्किट शायद रिले काटना होगा। बैटरी वोल्टेज 50mV से भी कम समय के माध्यम से कुछ हद तक चढ़ाई और एक बार फिर पर सर्किट बदल सकते हैं। इस रूप में भेजा जा सकता है "सर्च कर रहे हैं।" देरी पर बंद / हमारे 100U शामिल करके कम किया जाना जारी है। लेकिन पूरी तरह से जगह ले जाने से बचने के लिए, 47R के लिए एक 10R emitter टर्मिनल में निर्धारित है। सर्किट 10v में बंद हो सकती है, लेकिन अंत में एक 33R emitter में है हर बार 10.6v जब तक वास्तव में पर वापस बारी कभी नहीं होगा। यह विशेष रूप से संघर्ष के मूल्य के रूप में अच्छी तरह से मोड़ पर और बारी-बंद voltages के अलावा रिले का तार के प्रतिरोध पर निर्भर करेगा।]]> 1101 0 0 0 20 watt, 5 watt Fluorescent Lamp Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/20-watt-5-watt-fluorescent-lamp-inverter-circuit/ Fri, 02 Oct 2015 13:36:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1104 20 watt cfl inverter circuit cfl This particular 20 watt, 5 watt Fluorescent Lamp Inverter circuit will probably push a 5 watt tube from an old CFL lamp from 6v or 12v. It creates an incredibly convenient emergency light. The transformer is built by winding FIVE HUNDRED turns for the secondary section. This includes turning around TEN turns on upper part of every other prior to progressing over the rod. The rod may be circular or chiseled, from your outdated AM radio. It is actually known as ferrite rod. The FIVE HUNDRED turns must be put in prior to achieving the finish which implies ONE HUNDRED turns should consume 1/5th of the range. This lowers the voltage amongst the turns since the enamel is only going to endure ONE HUNDRED volts. Prior to starting turning, employ a minimum of 3 levels of “sticky-tape” in order to avoid the high voltage shorting into the rod. The dimensions of the wire is not really crucial and nearly anything around 0.25mm or finer will probably be acceptable. Following winding the secondary, the primary can be FIFTY turns plus the feedback will be TEN turns. The primary might be 0.5mm wire and also the feedback 0.25mm. Link up the transistor, parts and tube and switch the circuit ON rather quickly, and OFF. In case the tube fails to light up right away, invert the wires to the feedback winding. The transistor has to be 2N 3055 (or perhaps the plastic-type variation, TIP 3055). It is going to get heated while lighting the light fixture and must be mounted on a heatsink. The lamp ought not to be extracted as the circuit could overload and harm the transistor. The proposed emergency Fluorescent Lamp Inverter circuit requires 250mA while operating a 5 watt CFL (or 18 watt fluorescent conduit) on 12v supply. The 1k base resistor could be lowered to 820R and the illumination increases marginally however the current increases to 500mA. The circuit is much efficient on 6v. The 1k base resistor is lowered to 220R and the transistor continues to be cool.   Hindi Translation   सीधा सर्किट शायद एक 12 वी की आपूर्ति से दो 20Watt fluoroscent ट्यूबों के लिए ऊपर रोशन करेंगे। सर्किट भी बैटरी पैक के माध्यम से वर्तमान को कम से कम करने के लिए एक चमक परिवर्तन प्रदान करता है। दो समकक्षों के समान रूप से दूर ले जाया रोशनी हिस्सा और सफाया 100uF प्रदान करते हैं। 100uF के उन्मूलन रोशनी सामूहिक रूप से एक अप्रत्याशित आपातकालीन परिस्थिति के लिए एक अत्यंत उत्पादक सर्किट के उत्पादन के लिए 250mA को 500mA से वर्तमान कम हो जाती है कम करता है। नोट: एक 20 वाट ट्यूब (नियमित रूप से 2 फुट ट्यूब) रोशन सामान्य 5 वाट सीएफएल की तुलना में काफी अधिक चमक बचाता है। 20 वाट सीएफएल पलटनेवाला सर्किट सीएफएल यह विशेष रूप से 20 वाट, 5 वाट फ्लोरोसेंट लैंप इन्वर्टर सर्किट शायद 6V से एक पुराने सीएफएल लैंप से एक 5 वाट ट्यूब धक्का या 12 वी जाएगा। यह एक अविश्वसनीय रूप से सुविधाजनक इमरजेंसी लाइट बनाता है। ट्रांसफॉर्मर माध्यमिक अनुभाग के लिए पाँच सौ से बदल जाता है घुमावदार द्वारा बनाया गया है। यह हर दूसरे से पहले छड़ी पर प्रगति करने के ऊपरी भाग पर लगभग दस बदल जाता मोड़ भी शामिल है। रॉड परिपत्र या अपनी पुरानी AM रेडियो से, गढ़े हुए हो सकता है। यह वास्तव में फेराइट छड़ी के रूप में जाना जाता है। पांच सौ से बदल जाता रेंज के 1/5 वीं का उपभोग करना चाहिए एक सौ से बदल जाता है जो अर्थ खत्म प्राप्त करने के लिए पूर्व में डाल दिया जाना चाहिए। यह तामचीनी केवल एक सौ वोल्ट सहना जा रहा है के बाद से बदल जाता है के बीच वोल्टेज कम करती है। मोड़ शुरू करने से पहले, रॉड में shorting उच्च वोल्टेज से बचने के क्रम में "चिपचिपा टेप" के 3 स्तरों की एक न्यूनतम रोजगार। तार के आयामों वास्तव में महत्वपूर्ण है और 0.25 मिमी या महीन भर के लगभग कुछ भी शायद स्वीकार्य हो जाएगा नहीं है। माध्यमिक घुमावदार के बाद, प्राथमिक पचास बदल जाता है हो सकता है प्लस प्रतिक्रिया दस बदल जाता है हो जाएगा। प्राथमिक 0.5 मिमी तार और भी प्रतिक्रिया 0.25 मिमी हो सकता है। ट्रांजिस्टर, भागों और ट्यूब लिंक अप और नहीं बल्कि जल्दी पर सर्किट स्विच। मामले में ट्यूब, अभी तक प्रकाश घुमावदार प्रतिक्रिया के लिए तारों पलटना विफल रहता है। ट्रांजिस्टर 3055 (या शायद प्लास्टिक-प्रकार की भिन्नता, टिप 3055) 2N हो गया है। यह प्रकाश स्थिरता प्रकाश व्यवस्था, जबकि गरम हो जा रहा है और एक heatsink पर मुहिम शुरू की जानी चाहिए। दीपक अधिभार और ट्रांजिस्टर को नुकसान पहुँचा सकता सर्किट के रूप में निकाला नहीं होना चाहिए। 12 वी की आपूर्ति पर एक 5 वाट सीएफएल (या 18 वाट फ्लोरोसेंट नाली) जबकि संचालन प्रस्तावित आपातकालीन फ्लोरोसेंट लैंप इन्वर्टर सर्किट 250mA की आवश्यकता है। 1K आधार रोकनेवाला 820R के लिए उतारा जा सकता है और 500mA करने के लिए रोशनी बढ़ जाती मामूली हालांकि वर्तमान बढ़ जाती है। सर्किट 6V पर बहुत ही कुशल है। 1K आधार रोकनेवाला 220R के लिए उतारा जाता है और ट्रांजिस्टर शांत होना जारी है।]]> 1104 0 0 0 Ambient Light Controlled LED Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/ambient-light-controlled-led-circuit/ Wed, 07 Oct 2015 10:32:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1112 ]]> 1112 0 0 0 50 Watt LED Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/50-watt-led-driver-circuit/ Wed, 07 Oct 2015 10:38:54 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1115 ]]> 1115 0 0 0 529 http://no 0 0 50 Watt LED Lamp Wiring Details https://makingcircuits.com/blog/50-watt-led-lamp-wiring-details/ Wed, 07 Oct 2015 10:46:55 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1117 ]]> 1117 0 0 0 Cheap 100 Watt LED Bulb Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/cheap-100-watt-led-bulb-circuit/ Wed, 07 Oct 2015 10:51:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1119 ]]> 1119 0 0 0 Simple 0.6V to 12V Boost Converter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-0-6v-to-12v-boost-converter-circuit/ Wed, 07 Oct 2015 10:55:41 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1121 ]]> 1121 0 0 0 698 0 0 703 https://makingcircuits.com/ 698 1 How to Change Fluorescent Tubes to LEDs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-change-fluorescent-tubes-to-leds/ Wed, 07 Oct 2015 11:00:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1123 The starter is connected across one of the adjacent pair of end pins while the ballast is connected in series with the other adjacent pins of the side connectors. The series outputs from the ballast and one of the connectors are lastly shut down for getting the mains AC voltage. When AC is first turned on, the starter fires randomly and switches the tube in a flickering mode, which causes reverse high voltage EMFs to be produced by the ballast. This get rid of starts and ignites the tube internal gas and lights up the tube preventing the starter such that now the starter no longer performs current, rather the current is now carried out by means of the lighted tube internal gaseous path. As soon as the tube is activated completely the choke or the ballast basically works like a current limiter for limiting a safe stipulated quantity of amps to the tube as per the resistance of the ballast coil. In good quality ballasts the resistance or the number of turns inside the ballast is going to be properly determined to reduce heat generation and make sure longer tube life. In spite of this one big disadvantage with these regular iron core ballasts is the discharge of excessive heat while decreasing current to the tube, which means it is quite ineffective as far utility saving is involved. LED tube lights much like T17 fluorescent have grown to be quite typical available in the market in these days however these come with their very own particular fixtures, and simply cannot be changed on the standard FTL fixtures. Considering that the majority of homes have these regular iron core type fixtures fitted on their walls, obtaining an LED tube replacement which is instantly appropriate for these turns into extremely suitable and useful. Within this submit we talk about an easy LEd tube light circuit which supplies all the good features of LED technology and yet is instantly replaceable over standard T17 FTL fixtures. The circuit design could possibly be observed in the following diagram situated at the middle of fixture wiring and displays how the circuit configuration permits an immediate set up characteristic. The circuit is a regular capacitive power supply which can be half wave rectified by D1 and filtered by C1. The zener Z1 guarantees a continuing 180V DC across the linked LED module. The LED module is practically nothing, but contains around 50 numbers of 1 watt LEDs in series end to end. The present choke or the iron ballast is permitted to be in the wiring chain which now acts like a perfect surge suppressor so enabling enthralling the incoming current in-rush in the course of first turn on. The starter in spite of this performs simply no part in the design and might be either taken away or its existence could be disregarded.   Changing Fluorescent Tubes to LEDs Parts List C1 = 105/400V C2 = 10uF/400V D1 = 1N4007 Z1 = 180V zener, 1 watt LED Module = see text]]> 1123 0 0 0 Simple Adjustable LED Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-adjustable-led-circuit/ Wed, 07 Oct 2015 11:06:41 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1125 ]]> 1125 0 0 0 Simple Home Theater Circuit Explained https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-home-theater-circuit-explained/ Wed, 07 Oct 2015 11:17:51 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1127 Seeking the demonstrated circuit above, the design is a typical tone controller circuit, owning discrete bass and treble controls. The first section includes a transistor which solely turns into to blame for the needed frequency dimensioning features. The pertinent pots can be used for obtaining the most wanted bass and treble enlargement results from the circuit. The CIRCUIT DIAGRAM is fairly easy and yet presents very cut and increase with the relevant bandwidths. The second phase which makes use of the IC 741 is furthermore a bass, treble control circuit, in spite of this considering that an IC is utilized the outcomes become much improved than the earlier phase and once again the results may be discretely checked and used utilizing the relevant pots related to the circuit. It may be obviously observed that the above mentioned two phase are linked in series. This means the received music and speech improving capabilities from the individual units right now turn out to be deepen to much sharper and strengthened extents, but the information still can be manageable to the preferred any preferred limits making use of the four pots connected with the individual levels. The above units might be fully optimized to get audio outputs getting extreme and heavy bass results or the outcomes might be trimmed to emphasize extreme “chilling” treble effects from the outputs. Two of the above circuit assemblies could be constructed individually to make the final home theater system circuit, meaning you may lastly have eigt pots to control for attaining any wanted levels of engineered sound levels. The above units have to be increased although, before the outcomes could be truly appreciated by means of the appropriate woofers and tweeter units. If you by now own or plan to select a ready made amplifier, then the above units may be basically launched in between the audio source and the amplifier input, or if you can be a total electronic freak, you might want to make the increased section also all by you. A stereo amplifier circuit design is demonstrated below, one of the channels is employed for driving the woofers and the other one is employed for inducing the tweeters. A number of modules talked about in the above part will have to developed and linked to the presented stereo amplifier circuit for finishing the offered home theater circuit design. Parts List R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R9 = 2K2, R6, R7, R8 R10, R11, R12, R13 = 10K, VR1, VR2, VR3, VR4 = 100K, LINEAR POTS, C1 = 0.1uF, C2, C3 = 0.022uF, C4, C10, C5, C11 = 1uF, non polar, C6, C7 = 0.033uF, C8, C9 = 0.0033uF, T1 = BC547B, IC1 = 741]]> 1127 0 0 0 Simple Adjustable Constant Current Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-adjustable-constant-current-circuit/ Sat, 10 Oct 2015 11:37:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1129 simple adjustable current control circuit]]> 1129 0 0 0 Charging many Li-ion Batteries from a Single Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/charging-many-li-ion-batteries-from-a-single-charger-circuit/ Fri, 16 Oct 2015 07:30:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1135 Circuit for managing Li-ion battery charging heat Automatic Li-Ion Cell Charger and Controller Circuit.]]> 1135 0 0 0 Incubator Heater Backup Circuit with Charger https://makingcircuits.com/blog/incubator-heater-backup-circuit-with-charger/ Fri, 16 Oct 2015 07:43:04 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1137 Talking about the above design of the offered emergency incubator lamp with charger circuit, we are able to notice an easy layout comprise of a transistorized voltage regulator phase created by a Darlington paired 2N3055/TIP41 BJTs and an opamp based battery over voltage, lower voltage cut off level. The mentioned 30V input DC is resulting from the stated 30V 25amp transformer after properly correcting it via a bridge rectifier and a filter capacitor (3300uF). The provided input is done by the Darlington BJT phase and an approximately 14V is accomplished across the emitter of the 2N3005 transistor at a specific current level based on the 1k resistor at the base of the TIP41 transistor. This resistor might be improved or reduced for correspondingly improving or reducing the emitter current of the 2N3055. The above controlled output is employed to power the incubator heater lamp as well as to charge the connected 12V 60AH battery. So long as the battery voltage is below the optimal full charge level, the red LED at pin6 of the opamp 741 stays lighted and the green LED continues turned OFF. The above circumstance maintains the BC547 and the linked relay toggled OFF, that permits the DC voltage from the 2N3055 emitter to cross to the battery via the N/C contact of the relay and via the specific 6amp diode attached at the N/C of the relay. As soon as the battery is fully charged, the red LED switches OFF, the green LED is switched on, so does the BC547 transistor and the relay. The relay contact currently changes from its N/C to N/O, cutting off the charging supply to the battery, and stopping any chance of over charging for the battery. The above activity also allows the battery voltage to reach the heater lamp via the N/O contact and the series diode at the N/O contact. In spite of this the described situation has an issue.....here the changeover action from mains to battery could be inhibited at any time the battery might be in the charging mode. Simply because in the course of the charging stage the battery voltage could be somewhere within the full charge and low charge value, sustaining the relay contacts towards the N/C position which often would certainly reduce the battery voltage from achieving the heater lamp. To be able to correct the above problem a BC557 can be viewed launched, that will make certain that every time mains goes wrong and the relay is at the N/C, it's compelled to revert to the N/O position and hold this until the battery level drops below the fixed risky low voltage level.]]> 1137 0 0 0 Manufacturing Oxygen at Home - Circuit Diagram https://makingcircuits.com/blog/manufacturing-oxygen-at-home-circuit-diagram/ Fri, 16 Oct 2015 07:58:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1139 The above shows the circuit diagram for making oxygen at home in large quantities]]> 1139 0 0 0 Simplest Variable Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simplest-variable-power-supply-circuit/ Mon, 19 Oct 2015 11:38:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1145 ]]> 1145 0 0 0 Simple Digital Voltmeter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-digital-voltmeter-circuit/ Mon, 19 Oct 2015 11:44:07 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1149 Pinout information of IC L7106 for interfacing with a 3 and 1/2 digital LCD display.   ]]> 1149 0 0 0 Charging Two Batteries from a Single Supply Source https://makingcircuits.com/blog/charging-two-batteries-from-a-single-supply-source/ Tue, 20 Oct 2015 13:33:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1151 ]]> 1151 0 0 0 LED Tube light from a Dead CFL Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/led-tube-light-from-a-dead-cfl-circuit/ Tue, 20 Oct 2015 13:40:07 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1153     ]]> 1153 0 0 0 Car Voltage Stabilizer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/car-voltage-stabilizer-circuit/ Tue, 20 Oct 2015 13:53:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1155 Parts List R1 = 0.1 Ohms, 100 watts, made from 1mm iron wire. R2 = 2 Ohms, 1 watt, R3 = 120 Ohms, 1/4watts, R4 = 0.1 Ohms, 20 watts, as described for R1 (this resistor is really not needed, might be restored with a wire short.) R5 = 0.05Ohms, 20 watts, make as R1 T1 = MJ2955 mounted on big finned type heatsink T2 = BC547, C1 = 10,000uF, 35V C2 = 1uF/50V C3 = 100uF/25V P1 = 4k7 preset, IC1 = LM317 D1, D2 = 20 amp diode (3nos. 6 amp diodes in parallel) Simplified Version Making use of the IC LM196, the above configuration turns into very simple, you might refer to the following diagram which demonstrates a less complicated version of the suggested car alternator voltage stabilizer circuit utilizing least amount parts.   10 amp car voltage stabilizer circuit R3 = 240 ohms D1, D2 = 15 amp diodes P1 = 10k preset C1,C2,C3 as specified above IC1 = LM196]]> 1155 0 0 0 Automotive Speed Limit Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automotive-speed-limit-indicator-circuit/ Tue, 20 Oct 2015 14:04:07 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1157 A standard execution of the above design may be observed right here diagram. Right here the load or the speed limit warning alarm is linked at the transistor collector pin#5 output rather than pin#4 as narrated in the above spot. The collector load configuration presents the benefit of better current acquire enabling a greater wattage device for example a relay or an alarm to be instantly utilized with the circuit. ]]> 1157 0 0 0 Constant Current Circuit for High Watt LEDs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/constant-current-circuit-for-high-watt-leds/ Tue, 20 Oct 2015 14:11:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1159 The figure demonstrates a adjustable resistor for setting the current limit, on the other hand R1 may be restored with a set resistor by determining it making use of the following formula: R1 = Vref/current or R1 = 1.25/current. Existing might be various for distinct LEDs which enables you to be computed by isolating the optimum forward voltage with its wattage, as an example for a 1watt LED, the current could be 1/3.3 = 0.3amps or 300 ma, current for other LEDs could be computed in comparable fashion. The above figure would likely assist the highest of 1.5 amps, for larger current ranges, the IC might be basically restored with an LM338 or LM196 as per the LED specifications. Producing an existing regulated LED tubelight. The above circuit can be extremely effectively useful for producing accuracy current managed LED tube light circuits. General instance is drawn out below, which may be very easily altered according to the needs and LED features.   The series resistor linked with the three LEDs is measured by utilizing the following formula: R = (supply voltage - Total LED forward voltage) / LED current R = (12 - 3.3+3.3+3.3)/3amps R= (12 - 9.9)/3 R = 0.7 ohms R watts = V x A = (12-9.9) x 3 = 2.1 x 3 = 6.3 watts]]> 1159 0 0 0 333 0 0 334 333 1 Automatic Plant Irrigation Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-plant-irrigation-circuit/ Tue, 20 Oct 2015 14:25:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1161 The above stated automatic plant irrigation circuit was effectively developed and analyzed and the following pictures display the prototype unit and the PCB design.       ]]> 1161 0 0 0 405 0 47 407 405 1 Laser Operated Security Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/laser-operated-security-alarm-circuit/ Sat, 24 Oct 2015 16:42:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1163 ]]> 1163 0 0 0 Free Electricity from Gym Equipment https://makingcircuits.com/blog/free-electricity-from-gym-equipment/ Mon, 26 Oct 2015 11:37:56 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1165   A straightforward charger/controller is demonstrated below, which is often raised for this application too. The circuit makes use of the popular IC LM338. The "push-pull" voltage from the motor, or the changing voltage from the motor is first repaired by the four diodes, filtered by the capacitor and controlled to the preferred battery voltage by the IC LM338 circuit. ]]> 1165 0 0 0 Amplifier/Loudspeaker Overload Protector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/amplifierloudspeaker-overload-protector-circuit/ Mon, 26 Oct 2015 11:43:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1168 ]]> 1168 0 0 0 Infrared Motion Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/infrared-motion-detector-circuit/ Mon, 26 Oct 2015 11:47:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1170 ]]> 1170 0 0 0 Understanding IC 4043 Pinouts, Datasheet https://makingcircuits.com/blog/understanding-ic-4043-pinouts-datasheet/ Mon, 26 Oct 2015 11:52:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1172 Let's sum up the input output pinout benefits and requirements of the IC 4043 with the following information: 1Q to 4Q (Pins: 2, 9, 10, 1) 3-state buffered latch output 1R to 4R (Pins: 3, 7, 11, 15) reset input (active HIGH) 1S to 4S (Pins: 4, 6, 12, 14) set input (active HIGH) OE (Pin:5) common output enable input VSS (Pin: 8) ground supply voltage N.C. (Pin: 13) not connected VDD (Pin: 16) supply voltage]]> 1172 0 0 0 6V to 12V Boost LED Emergency Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/6v-to-12v-boost-led-emergency-light-circuit/ Mon, 26 Oct 2015 11:57:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1174 Parts List R1 = 100K R2 = 100k pot, R3 = 100 Ohms, R4 = 4k7, 1 watt C1 = 680pF, C2 = 0.01uF C3 = 100uF/100V L1 = see text IC = LM555 T1 = TIP122 D1 = BA159 Make sure you Hook up A 10 OHM RESISTOR IN SERIES WITH THE LED String FOR Preserving IT FROM HIGH Stimulated VOLTAGE. Improving THE VALUE OF R2 Ought to Boost THE Illumination OF THE LEDs AND VICE VERSA.]]> 1174 0 0 0 Generator Mains Power Booster Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/generator-mains-power-booster-circuit/ Mon, 26 Oct 2015 12:02:43 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1176 Circuit Justification The circuit seems to be a straightforward AC voltage booster. The main part which can be to blame for providing the excess power is the high voltage capacitor C1 which charges up with each AC cycle and reverts the power by means of the switching triac into the linked load. The load thus gets added power due to the switching high voltage capacitor by way of the triac. The triac is usually a BTA41/600A, which replies and switches ON the moment the diac fires. The minimum voltage necessary for the diac to fire is around 30 volts. The above idea may also be used with the following circuit which happens to be less complicated than the above and is also very much cheaper.   The capacitor ratings might be altered and tried as per the load, and individual choices. However this circuit can be utilized only for heater applications such as irons, heaters, geysers, ovens, toasters, blowers, dryers, hot air gun etc.  ]]> 1176 0 0 0 476 0 0 478 476 1 514 0 0 515 514 1 516 0 0 517 516 1 621 0 0 622 https://makingcircuits.com/ 621 1 2000 watts Heater Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/2000-watts-heater-controller-circuit/ Mon, 26 Oct 2015 12:07:37 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1178 ]]> 1178 0 0 0 Enhance Car DRL with this Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/enhance-car-drl-with-this-circuit/ Wed, 28 Oct 2015 11:32:37 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1180 Parts List for the above enhanced DRL circuit design R1 = (1.25/DRL amp value) x 3 R2 = 1k 1/4 watt R3 = 10K C1 = 470uF/25V T1 = TIP122 D1, D2, D4 = 1N4007 D3 = also 1N4007 (optional) Relay = 12V, 400 ohms, SPDT]]> 1180 0 0 0 Making Smart Car Turn-Signals, Side-Markers, and Parking Lights https://makingcircuits.com/blog/making-smart-car-turn-signals-side-markers-and-parking-lights/ Wed, 28 Oct 2015 11:41:12 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1182 Enhancing Car Turn Signal Lights, Park-Lights and Side-Marker Lights The second necessity desires one more lamp which might be placed as a side marker lamp to react to the above side indicator or the turn signals but flash with an opposite switching. Also the same lamp is also expected to light up when the park lights are ON. The diagram of the improved or the improved side marker lamp as demonstrated above fulfills the problems by flashing the linked lamp with reverse switching, as well as reacts to the park switch toggling throughout standard procedures. The TIP122 is liable for initiating the lamp when the park lights are switch in. In spite of this when the turn signal switch is toggled, regardless of the park light input the BC547 starts oscillating in accordance with the turn flash signals leading to the TIP122 to also blink the lamp with the associated flash rate. The 100uF capacitor ensures that the TIP122 is given with its preserved positive feed for maintaining the lighting on the bulb in the course of the flashing behavior. In accordance with the first diagram continues to be somewhat altered with the following handful of changes: 1) The transistor has become improved to TIP142. 2) The park-light input activate continues to be restored with +12V trigger from the ignition key so that the lamp works as fog lights and not as parking lights. The above circuit could possibly be upgraded even more by introducing a PWM dimming control characteristic as demonstrated below. The characteristic allows dimming of the fog lights when the park lights are activated, however helps to ensure that the impact is inhibited the instant the turn signals are activated. The 100k preset may very well be set properly for attaining the preferred decrease in the fog light luminosity   ]]> 1182 0 0 0 Single Phase Preventer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/single-phase-preventer-circuit/ Wed, 28 Oct 2015 11:46:10 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1184   Another simple single phase preventor circuit can be seen the following diagram:   simple single phase preventor circuit using an opamp   As can be seen in the design, the voltages from all the 3 phase are fed to the non-inverting pin#3 of the opamp, via a rectifying diode, so that a DC becomes available at this pin of the IC. Pin#2 which is the inverting input of the opamp is held at some constant reference level through the voltage divider network using a 3k3 and a 10k resistor. As long as all the 3 phases are present, the sum of their phases produce a zero potential at pin#3 of the IC, this happens since we all know that sum of the phases when joined end up producing a zero potential. Therefore pin#3 is held at 0V, which tends to be lower than the pin#2 of the IC, resulting in a 0V at pin#6 of the IC which keeps the relay switched OFF. However in a case where any one or two phases are absent allows the pin#3 potential to climb a much higher level than pin#2, resulting in a high at pin6 of the IC, the relay responds and toggles ON, shifting contacts to the N/O position. Now since the relay contacts become responsible for disconnecting or connecting the load with the 3 phase supply, due to an absence or a missing phase. Therefore it becomes imperative to use a 3 contact relay, through which the load may be enabled with the 3 phases for its operation. With such connection whenever the relay toggles, it either connects the lad or disconnects the load from all the 3 phases depending on whether the 3 phase is good or bad, thus implementing the intended 3 phase prevention for the load.]]> 1184 0 0 0 86 0 0 88 86 1 315 0 0 491 0 0 493 491 1 520 0 0 521 520 1 525 0 0 530 525 1 532 0 0 534 532 1 656 0 0 657 https://makingcircuits.com/ 656 1 659 0 0 660 0 0 662 https://makingcircuits.com/ 660 1 663 https://makingcircuits.com/ 659 1 674 0 0 675 https://makingcircuits.com/ 674 1 Triac Controlled Mains Voltage Stabilizer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/triac-controlled-mains-voltage-stabilizer-circuit/ Sat, 31 Oct 2015 11:40:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1187 All the gates are correlated to one another in such away that the output of only a specific gate remains effective at a particular time frame in accordance with the level of the input voltage. Thus, as the input voltage increases the gates react to the transistors and their outputs eventually turn out to be logic hi one after the other making certain that the earlier gate’s output is shut OFF and vice versa. The logic hi from the particular buffer is used on the gate of the specific SCR which performs and attaches the appropriate “hot” line from the transformer to the external associated appliance. As the voltage increases, the appropriate triacs eventually choose the suitable “hot” ends of the transformer to raise or reduce the voltage and preserve a somewhat maintained output. Construction Clues and Testing Tips The construction of this triac control AC power guard circuit is easy and just couple of picking out the needed parts and assembling them properly over a basic PCB. It is pretty obvious that the individual who is trying to make this circuit knows a little more than simply the fundamentals of electronics. Points might go absolutely wrong if you experience any mistake in the final set up. You prefer an external variable (0 to 12 volts) universal DC power supply for setting up the unit in the following way: Provided that an output supply of 12 volts from TR1 symbolize to 225 volts input supply, by means of calculations we come across that it will generate 9 volts at an input of 170 volts, 13 volts will correspond to 245 volts and 14 volts will be comparable to an input of around 260 volts. In the beginning keep the points “AB” turned off and make sure the circuit is completely turned off from the AC mains. Change the external universal power supply to 12 volts and hook up its positive to the point “B” and negative to the common ground of the circuit. Now adjust P2 until LD2 is just turned on. Reduce the voltage to 9 and adjust P1 to turn on LD1. Likewise, adjust P3 and P4 to light up the appropriate LEDs at voltages 13 and 14 respectively. The setting process is now finish. Remove the external supply and join points “AB” together. The entire unit may now be attached to the mains AC so that it can begin working immediately. You might confirm the efficiency of the system by providing a varying input AC by means of an auto transformer and consulting the output utilizing a digital multimeter. This triac controlled AC voltage stabilizer will shut OFF at voltages below 170 and above 300 volts. Parts List You prefer the following parts for the development of this SCR control ac voltage stabilizer: All resistors are ¼ Watt, CFR 5%, unless otherwise stated. R5, R6, R7, R8 = 1M ¼ watt, All Triacs are 400 volts, 1KV rated, T1, T2, T3, T4 = BC 547, All zener diodes are = 3 volts 400 mW, All Diodes are = 1N4007, All presets = 10K linear, R1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 = 1K ¼ watt, N1 to N4 = IC 4093, C1 and C3 = 100Uf/ 25 volts, C2 = 104, ceramic, Power Guard Stabilizer Transformer = “Made to order” having 170, 225, 240, 260 volts output Taps at 225 volts input supply, or 85, 115, 120, 130 volts taps at 110 AC input supply. TR1 = Step down transformer, 0 - 12 volts, 100 mA.]]> 1187 0 0 0 Mains 220V/120V Short Circuit Breaker Protector https://makingcircuits.com/blog/mains-220v120v-short-circuit-breaker-protector/ Sat, 31 Oct 2015 11:46:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1189 Circuit Demonstration: The short-circuit protector circuit demonstrated in the schematic appears fairly uncomplicated and might be verbally simulated given below: The sensing phase of the circuit in reality turns into the heart of the whole process and contains an opto-coupler OP1. Normally we understand, an opto-coupler internally contains an LED and a switching transistor design, the transistor is turned on as a reaction to the lighting of the built-in LED. Thus the initiating of the transistor which forms the output of the device occurs without having physical or electrical contact rather by means of the passage of light rays from the LED. The LED which turns into the input of the device might be switched by means of some external agent or a voltage source which needed to be held aloof from the output stage of the opto-coupler. In our circuit, the opto coupler LED is powered by means of a bridge network which receives it voltage source from the potential produced across resistor R1. This resistor R1 is attached in such a way that the AC mains current to the house wiring transmits through it thereby any over-load or over-current is subjected over this resistor. In the course of an over load or short circuit situations, the resistor immediately builds up a potential across it, which can be improved and delivered to the opto coupler LED. The opto LED instantly lights up, turning on the corresponding transistor. Talking about the circuit we observe that the opto transistor’s emitter is linked to the gate of an external SCR, whose anode is further more linked to a Triac's gate. All through regular problems, the triac stays turned on, enabling the load linked across it to remain operating. Such things happen simply because the SCR stays turned OFF and enables the triac to acquire its gate current by means of R3. In spite of this in the instance of an over load or a short circuit, as mentioned previous, the opto-coupler transistor carries out and causes the SCR. This promptly pulls the gate potential of the triac to ground, preventing it from carrying out. The triac instantly turns OFF, preserving the load and the house wiring to which it is set up. The SCR remains latched, until the problem is improved and the circuit is restarted. The section consisting C1, Z1, C2 is an easy transformerless power supply circuit, useful for powering the SCR and Triac circuit. Parts List R1 = iron coiled wire; its resistance is calculated to generate 2 volts across it at the determined critical load circumstances. R2, R3, R4 =100 Ohms R5 = 1K, R6 = 1M, C1, C2 = 474/400V SCR = C106, Triac = BTA41/600B Opto-Coupler = MCT2E, ZENER = 12V 1W Diodes = 1N4007]]> 1189 0 0 0 716 http://emilioytoid.blogdon.net/5-simple-techniques-for-embroidery-4605904 0 0 725 https://makingcircuits.com/ 716 1 Programmable Timer Circuit for Fish Aquarium https://makingcircuits.com/blog/programmable-timer-circuit-for-fish-aquarium/ Tue, 03 Nov 2015 13:29:41 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1207 The pots might be improved to 3m3 for producing higher time interval periods, so is true with the specific capacitors. The Programmable Timer Circuit for Fish Aquarium might be modified as per the delivered request, in the following manner: If we think about the first timing sequence to commence at 7am and end at 12pm, means the upper left timer's P1 ought to be modified such that it triggers the relay and switches off the relay after precisely 5 hours. For maintaining the lamp turned OFF in the above position and switch it ON back at 6 pm we right now adjust P1 of the upper right timer section such that its output generates after another 5 hours. This switches ON the lamp again. The above circumstance ought to be held unaffected until night 10pm, which is about 4 hours of period, for that reason we adjust the lower right timer's P1 to get it activated after 4 hours of time interval. Ultimately, for beginning the above process back again the next morning at 7am, P1 of the last timer at the lower right is realigned such that it resets the first timer after 9 hours..... and the cycle repeats. For creating the circuit operate based on the above stipulated timing structure, after modifying the specific hours, the unit ought to be run or turned on precisely at 7 clock in the morning....rest will immediately carry out.]]> 1207 0 0 0 4 Step Battery Charging Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/4-step-battery-charging-indicator-circuit/ Thu, 05 Nov 2015 05:40:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1214 Parts List for the battery status monitor circuit R1---R4 = 6K8 R5 = 10K P1---P4 = 10k presets A1----A4 = LM 324 z1 = 3.3V zener diode LEDs = 5mm, color as per individual choice.]]> 1214 0 0 0 5KVA Voltage Stabilizer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/5kva-voltage-stabilizer-circuit/ Sat, 14 Nov 2015 08:24:40 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1218 10KVA, Automatic Voltage Stabilizer Circuit Diagram Using Solid State Relays, Image Parts List R1 to R9 = 1K, 1/4 watt, P1 to P7 = 10K preset, C1 = 1000uF/25V VR1 = 1K Preset, opamps = IC 324, Transformer = Input 230volts or 120volts, Taps - incrementing/decrementing voltage levels (TAPs) as per individual specs. SSR = 10KVA/230volts = output, 5 to 32 volts DC = input Full circuit diagram of the suggested A Basic 5 KVA to 10 KVA Automatic Voltage Stabilizer Circuit @220 Volts, 120 Volts 5 kva 10kva Automatic Voltage Stabilizer Circuit]]> 1218 0 0 0 561 0 0 562 561 1 587 0 0 588 587 1 611 0 0 615 https://makingcircuits.com/ 611 1 Automatic Ceiling Fan Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-ceiling-fan-circuit/ Mon, 16 Nov 2015 11:16:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1222 Caution - THE CIRCUIT IS NOT Identified FROM MAINS AC...... Be Particularly Very much CAUTIONED WHILE Constructing AND TESTING THIS CIRCUIT.]]> 1222 0 0 0 Simplest Mains Voltage Stabilizer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simplest-mains-voltage-stabilizer-circuit/ Mon, 16 Nov 2015 11:19:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1224 Parts List for the SIMPLE AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE STABILIZER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM You will require the following components to make this homemade automatic mains voltage stabilizer circuit: R1, R2 = 10K, R3 = 470K, C1 = 1000 uF / 25 V D1, D2 = 1N4007, T1 = BC547, TR1 = 0 - 12 V, 500 mA, TR2 = 9 - 0 - 9 V, 5 Amp, IC1 = 741, Z1, Z2 = 4.7V/400mW Relay = DPDT, 12 V, 200 or more Ohms, Approximate Voltage Outputs for the Given Inputs INPUT------OUTPUT 200V -------- 212V 210V -------- 222V 220V -------- 232V 225V -------- 237V 230V -------- 218V 240V -------- 228V 250V -------- 238V How to Set Up the Circuit The suggested easy automatic voltage stabilizer circuit might be set up with the following procedures: In the beginning do not hook up the transformers to the circuit. Making use of a adjustable power supply, power the circuit across C1, the positive goes to the terminal of R1 while the negative goes to the line of D2’s cathode. Set the voltage to about 12.5 voltage and adjust the preset so that the output of the IC just becomes high and causes the relay. Now decreasing the voltage to about 12 volts should make the op amp trip the relay to its original state or make it de-energized. Repeat and verify the relay action by modifying the voltage from 12 to 13 volts, which could produce the relay flip flop respectively. Your starting process has ended. Now you might hook up both the transformer to its suitable positions with the circuit. Your simple home made mains voltage stabilizer circuit is ready. When set up, the relay trips at any time the input voltage exceeds 230 volts, bringing the output to 218 volts and keeps this distance constantly as the voltage extends to higher levels. When the voltage falls back to 225, the relay gets de-energized pulling the voltage to 238 volts and keeps the impact as the voltage further goes down. The above activity keeps the output to the appliance well between 200 to 250 volts with fluctuations starting from 180 to 265 volts.]]> 1224 0 0 0 Getting More Current from 78XX Voltage Regulators in Parallel https://makingcircuits.com/blog/getting-more-current-from-78xx-voltage-regulators-in-parallel/ Mon, 16 Nov 2015 11:27:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1226 ]]> 1226 0 0 0 Sine Wave Inverter Circuit using Bubba Oscillator https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sine-wave-inverter-circuit-using-bubba-oscillator/ Tue, 22 Dec 2015 07:42:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=744   The much anticipated sine wave inverter by means of bubba oscillator might be recognized with the aid of the following points: The stage consisting two 555 ICs are set up as PWM generators where IC1 forms a square pulse generator for the PWMs while IC2 forms the monostable PWM generator with regards to the modulation input applied at its pin5. The sine wave modulation input at pin5 of IC2 is ahieved by making use of a bubba oscillator produced by utilizing four opamps from the IC LM324. The produced sine wave pulses are set at accurate 50 Hz and given to pin5 of IC2 via a BJT common collector for even more processing. The 50 Hz for the bubba oscillator is placed by choosing R exactly with the aid of the following formula: Before learning How to Build a Sine Wave Inverter Circuit using Bubba Oscillator it's important to learn something about bubba oscillator   The Bubba oscillator is a unique form of phase shift oscillator. The idea employs 4 levels to deliver an incredibly steady output frequency. The accessibility of quad op amp integrated circuits helps make execution specifically effortless. Every one of the 4 op amps includes a matching RC network exterior to the chip. All these networks adds a period shift of 45 , to get a overall phase shift of 180 , that is certainly required to position the answer in the transfer functionality in oscillation. Acquiring 4 levels likewise helps to keep the rate of change of period with regard to time adequately reduced for better efficiency and balance. As soon as the signal advances via each op amp, the feedback expression (B in the diagram in figure 1) will probably be 1/4 Considering that we'd like genuine part of the answer, A*B, of the transfer equation to become comparable to one, the gain of the Bubba oscillator should be 4. The Bubba oscillator will take advantage of op amps in a buffering topology in order to avoid loading among every single op amp. The stability of the frequency becomes a great deal better at each subsequent level. You possibly can tweak the frequency at prior stages in the circuit, nevertheless efficiency might be affected. Such as, the total harmonic distortion following the second stage could be a whole lot worse compared to after the 4th stage. In various other programs, in case a more serious total harmonic distortion is bearable in the layout, tapping within a prior position can help you save space and cost, given that much less components will be essential.]]> 744 0 0 0 How to Build a Stereo headphone amplifier https://makingcircuits.com/blog/stereo-headphone-amplifier/ Tue, 22 Dec 2015 07:21:04 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=882 the LM4910 has about three operational amplifiers in house. A couple of the amplifier's include on the surface configurable gain although the other amplifier is usually internally predetermined at the bias point behaving as a unity-gain buffer. The closed-loop gain of the two configurable amplifiers is defined by opting the ratio of Rf to Ri . As a result, the gain for every channel of the IC is AV = -(Rf/Ri)-------Eq#1 By just operating the loads by means of outputs VO1 and VO2 with VO3 working like a buffered bias voltage the LM4910 is not going to call for output coupling capacitors. The standard single-ended amplifier setup in which one particular aspect of the load is linked with ground demands huge, pricey output coupling capacitors while Building a Stereo headphone amplifier The construction like the one included in the LM4910 features a significant edge over single supply, single-ended amplifiers. Because outputs VO1, VO2, and VO3 are generally biased at VREF = 1.58V, simply no net DC voltage is available throughout each load. That gets rid of the importance of output coupling capacitors that happen to be recommended inside a single-supply, single-ended amplifier setup. With no output coupling capacitors inside a regular single-supply, single-ended amplifier, the bias voltage is defined along the load which results in either elevated interior IC power waste and probable loudspeaker problems. POWER DISSIPATION Energy waste can be a serious worry when making an effective amplifier. An immediate outcome of the higher power transferred to the load by a bridge amplifier can be an escalation in inside energy turbulence. The highest power waste for any presented application could be produced by the power dissipation chart or from the earlier equation]]> 882 0 0 0 How to Build a Door Bell with Memory Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-build-a-door-bell-with-memory-circuit/ Mon, 21 Dec 2015 08:57:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=892 Door Bell with Memory  ]]> 892 0 0 0 Simple Accurate Capacitance Meter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-accurate-capacitance-meter-circuit/ Mon, 21 Dec 2015 07:44:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=898 simple analogue capacitance meter circuit  ]]> 898 0 0 0 Simple Vibration Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-vibration-detector-circuit/ Mon, 21 Dec 2015 08:34:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=901 simple vibration detector circuit]]> 901 0 0 0 Making an Electronic Tuning Fork Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/making-an-electronic-tuning-fork-circuit/ Mon, 21 Dec 2015 08:19:15 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=905 electronic tuning fork circuit]]> 905 0 0 0 Simple Mains Overload Protection Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-mains-overload-protection-circuit/ Mon, 16 Nov 2015 11:30:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1228 ]]> 1228 0 0 0 Simple Triac Dimmer Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-triac-dimmer-switch-circuit/ Mon, 16 Nov 2015 11:34:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1230 The circuit diagram presented above is an classic illustration of a dimmer switch, where a triac continues to be employed for managing the depth of light. When AC mains is provided to the above circuit, as per the setting of the pot, C2 charges fully after a specific delay supplying the necessary firing voltage to the diac. The diac performs and causes the triac into conduction, but this also releases the capacitor whose charge decreases below the diacs firing voltage. Because of this the diac prevents carrying out and so does the triac. Such things happen for each cycle of the mains AC sine wave signal, which cuts it into discrete sections, leading to well customized lower voltage output. The setting of the pot sets the charge and the release timing of C2 which often chooses for how much time the triac stays in a carrying out mode for the AC sine signals. Will probably be seeking to discover why C1 is put in the circuit, simply because the circuit would certainly work even without it. It's accurate, C1 is definitely not needed if the associated load is a resistive load like an incandescent lamp etc. In spite of this if the load is an inductive type, the inclusion of C1 evolves into extremely critical. Inductive loads have a bad habit of getting back an element of the stored energy in the winding, back into the supply rails. This scenario can block up C2 which then evolves into not able to charge correctly for starting the subsequent succeeding initiating. C1 within this circumstance assist C2 to keep up is cycle by offering bursts of small voltages even though C2 has totally discharged, and thus keeps the proper switching rate of the triac. Triac dimmer circuits have the property of producing a lot of RF disruptions in the air while working thereby an RC network turns into crucial using these dimmer switches for lowering the RF generations. The above circuit is demonstrated without the feature thereby will produce a number of RF which may interrupt advanced electronic audio systems. The circuit of a dimmer switch noted below integrate the required measures for subsiding the above situation. Parts List for the above improved fan dimmer circuit C1 = 0.1u/400V C2, C3 = 0.1/250V, R1 = 15K, R2 = 330K, R3 = 33K, R4 = 100 Ohms, VR1 = 220K, linear Diac = DB3, Triac = BT136 L1 = 40uH]]> 1230 0 0 0 Make an 741 Opamp Comparator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/make-an-741-opamp-comparator-circuit/ Mon, 16 Nov 2015 11:41:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1232 When this occurs the value increases above the fixed reference at pin #2, this updates the IC about the sense voltage increasing above the refefnce voltage at pin #2, this immediately reverts the output of the IC which changes to positive from its initial zero voltage position. The above change in the state of the IC from zero to positive, generates the relay driver phase which switches ON the load or the lights which happen to be linked to the pertinent associates of the relay. Mind you, the values of the resistors attached to pin #2 can also be modified for changing the sensing threshold of pin #3, so they are all inter-depended, giving you a wide angle of variation of the circuit parameters. Another feature of the R1 and R2 is that it prevents the need of utilizing a dual polarity power supply making the required configuration quite simple and clean. As presented below, the above described procedure reply could be just corrected by interchanging the input pin positions of the IC or, by thinking about another alternative where we only inter-change the positions of the LDR and the preset.   How to make a 741 opamp comparator circuit ]]> 1232 0 0 0 How to Calculate Filter Capacitor for Smoothing Ripple https://makingcircuits.com/blog/calculate-filter-capacitor-smoothing-ripple/ Sat, 28 Nov 2015 08:54:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1237 What's Ripple in Power Supply Circuits In most AC to DC power supplies the DC generation is obtained by rectifying the AC input electricity and purifying by means of a smoothing capacitor. Despite the fact that the course removes the AC to practically an absolute DC, an insignificant content of unfavorable extra alternating current is consistently left behind within the DC content, and this undesirable interference in the DC known as ripple current or ripple voltage. This lingering undesirable AC content in DC mainly is caused by insufficient filtering or suppression of the rectified DC, or often times as a result of other sorts of convoluted occurrence for example feedback signals from inductive or capacitive loads related to the power source or additionally could possibly be from high frequency signal remote devices. The above discussed recurring ripple factor (γ) is theoretically understood to be the ratio of the root mean square (RMS) quantity of the main ripple voltage to the unqualified quantity delivered in the DC line of the power supply output, which is sometimes symbolized in %. There is certainly likewise a different option of articulating the ripple factor, which happens to be by means of the peak-to-peak voltage valuation. And this technique would seem incredibly easier to display and determine through the use of an oscilloscope, which enables you to be much conveniently tested by way of an offered formula. Before we appreciate the formula for assessing the ripple amount in DC, it might be initially worthwhile to recognize the method of transforming an alternating current into a direct current applying rectifier diodes and capacitors. Typically a bridge rectifier which includes 4 diodes is designed for modifying an alternating current into a full wave direct current. In spite of this even after rectifying, the accompanying DC could possibly have large volumes ripple because of the large peak-to-peak voltage (deep valley) yet somehow consistent in the DC. The reason being the function of the rectifier is restricted merely upto modifying the negative cycles of the AC to positive cycles as shown below. The unrelenting deep valleys between each and every rectified half cycle opens up highest ripple, which are usually sorted out primarily by putting in a filter capacitor across the output of the bridge rectifier. This substantial peak-to-peak voltage between the valleys along with the peak cycles are smoothed or reimbursed by means of filter capacitors or smoothing capacitors across the output of the bridge rectifier. This smoothing capacitor is furthermore referred to as the reservoir capacitor mainly because it services similar to a reservoir tank and holds the energy in the course of the peak cycles of the rectified voltage. The filter capacitor preserve the peak voltage and current throughout the rectified peak periods, at the same time the load as well acquires the peak power in the course of these phases, but for the duration of the plunging edges of these periods or at the valleys, the capacitor instantaneously kicks back the accumulated energy to the load making sure the reimbursement to the load, and the load is in a position to attain a moderately stable DC with a discounted peak to peak ripple as opposed to the initial ripple without the capacitor. The sequence goes on, just as the capacitor charges and discharges getting into the act so that they can cut down the variation of the main peak-to-peak ripple component for the associated load. The above smoothing effectiveness of the capacitor significantly depends on the load current, as this grows the smoothing competence of the capacitor correspondingly declines and which is usually the cause bigger loads necessitate more substantial smoothing capacitor in power equipment. The above conversation clearly shows what's ripple in a DC power supply and just how it is normally decreased by integrating a smoothing capacitor after the bridge rectifier. In the following section we are going to discover ways to figure out the ripple current or simply the peak-to-peak variance in a DC amount by the affiliation of a smoothing capacitor. Put simply we are going to figure out how to determine the appropriate or the perfect capacitor value guaranteeing that the ripple in a DC power source is minimized to the smallest degree.   The above section articulated precisely how a DC content after rectification could possibly transport the utmost possible quantity of ripple voltage, and the way in which it could be restricted appreciably through the use of a smoothing capacitor, even while the ultimate ripple content which is often the difference between the maximum amount and the smallest value of the smoothed DC, under no circumstances manage to wipe out fully, and undeniably depends on the load current, stated another way if the load is fairly bigger, the capacitor tends giving up its capability to make up or optimize the ripple factor. In the next paragraphs we are going to endeavor to determine the formula for computing filter capacitor in power supply circuits for guaranteeing smallest ripple at the output (determined by the attached load current spec). C = I / 2 x f x Vpp where I = load current f = input frequency of AC Vpp = the bare minimum ripple (the peak to peak voltage after smoothing) that may possibly be permissible or Alright for the end user, due to the fact that essentially it's by no means achievable to render this zero, since that could call for an impracticable, nonviable mammoth capacitor value, most likely not probable for anybody to apply. Let's aim to comprehend the connection between load current, ripple and the optimal capacitor value from the following examination. In the stated formula we are able to observe that the ripple and the capacitance are oppositely proportional, signifying when the ripple needs to stay lowest, the capacitor value has to augment and vice versa. Imagine we accept a Vpp value that could be, assume 1V, to be contained in the finalized DC content after smoothing, in that case the capacitor value could possibly be determined as demonstrated below: C = I / 2 x f x Vpp (considering f = 50Hz and load current condition as 2amp)) = 2 / 2 x 50 x 1 = 0.02 Farads or 20,000uF (1Farad = 1000000 uF) Accordingly, the above formula exposes just how the demanded filter capacitor could possibly be estimated with regards to the load current and the smallest permissible ripple current in the DC element. By talking about the above addressed case in point, one could make an effort replacing the load current, and/or the eligible ripple current and successfully determine the filter capacitor value appropriately for keeping up with an perfect or the expected smoothing of the rectified DC in a particular power supply circuit.]]> 1237 0 0 0 How Capacitors Work https://makingcircuits.com/blog/1241/ Tue, 01 Dec 2015 11:54:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1241 Introduction to Capacitors Similar to the Resistor, the Capacitor, often named a Condenser, is a straightforward passive component which can be used to “store electricity”. The capacitor is an element which includes the facility or “capacity” to save electricity through an electrical charge generating voltage difference (Static Voltage) between its plates, comparable to one small rechargeable battery pack. There are various sorts of capacitors you can find at tiny capacitor beads applied in resonance circuits to sizable PF correction capacitors, yet they pretty much all apply the same process , they stock up electrical charge. In its own fundamental shape, a Capacitor includes a couple of identical conductive (metal) plates that happen to be not associated or reaching one another, yet are electrically set apart possibly by air or by some kind of a reliable insulating substance resembling waxed paper, mica, ceramic, plastic or some design of a liquid gel as employed in electrolytic capacitors. The insulating coating between a capacitors plates is often referred to as the Dielectric How Capacitors Work As a result of this insulating coating, DC current simply cannot run through the capacitor mainly because it inhibits it letting rather a voltage to be contained across the plates in the shape of an electric charge. The conductive metal plates of a capacitor often is a choice between square, circular or rectangular, or they usually are of a cylindrical or sphere-shaped structure with the basic structure, dimensions and fabrication of a parallel plate capacitor based upon its utility and voltage specs. When applied to a direct current or DC circuit, a capacitor charges as high as its source voltage however prevents the supply of current through it mainly because the dielectric of a capacitor is nonconductive and in essence an insulator. Nevertheless, any time a capacitor is coupled to an alternating current or AC circuit, the movement of the current generally seems to complete right via the capacitor with almost no resistance. The two main forms of electric charge, positive charge being Protons and negative charge as Electrons. Whenever a DC voltage is scheduled across a capacitor, the positive (+ve) charge rapidly mounts up at one plate whereas a associated negative (-ve) charge develops on the second plate. Almost every particle of +ve charge that happens to come across one plate a charge of the equivalent sign will likely abandon the -ve plate. In that case the plates keep on being charged neutral and a potential difference as a result of this charge is confirmed between the a pair of plates. As soon as the capacitor extends to its steady state situation an electrical current struggles to stream via the capacitor on its own and around the circuit on account of the insulating characteristics of the dielectric employed to split up the plates. The circulation of electrons onto the plates is termed as the capacitors Charging Current which proceeds to run until the voltage across each plates (and consequently the capacitor) is on par with the implemented voltage Vc. At this stage the capacitor is reportedly “fully charged” with electrons. The potency or percentage with this charging current is at its optimum merit whenever the plates are entirely discharged (original state) and progressively decreases in value to zero as the plates recharge to a potential difference across the capacitors plates comparable to the supply voltage. The level of potential difference show across the capacitor is determined by the volume of charge settled onto the plates by the function that is performed by the supply voltage as well as by the amount of capacitance the capacitor holds which is drawn out below. Capacitor Design introduction to capacitors the symbol The parallel plate capacitor is the most basic version of capacitor. It usually is built up by means of a couple of metallic or metallised foil plates separated parallel to one another, with its capacitance value in Farads, genuinely predetermined by the surface area of the conductive plates as well as the space of isolation across them. Varying any specific of these respects changes the the value of its actual capacitance which in turn forms the reference of functionality of the variable capacitors. Additionally, as capacitors retain the power of the electrons by using an electric charge on the plates the more substantial the plates and/or scaled-down their isolation the noticeably better would be the charge that the capacitor accommodates for virtually any assigned voltage across its plates. To put it differently, bigger plates, more compact distance, a lot more capacitance. By putting on a voltage to a capacitor and determining the charge on the plates, the ratio of the charge Q to the voltage V provide you with the capacitance value of the capacitor as well as being therefore assigned as: C = Q/V this formula is additionally re-arranged to render the more acquainted formulation for the degree of charge on the plates in the form of: Q = C x V Despite the fact that in this article we declared that the charge is accumulated on the plates of a capacitor, it is really more appropriate to state that the electricity within the charge is trapped in an “electrostatic field” between the a pair of plates. Every time an electrical current streams into the capacitor, recharging it up, the electrostatic field turns into a lot more powerful since it stores more electrical energy. In the same way, given that the current flows out of the capacitor, discharging it, the voltage variance between the 2 plates falls off and the electrostatic field drops just as the electrical energy circulates away from the plates. The character of a capacitor to retain charge on its plates through an electrostatic field is known as the Capacitance of the capacitor. Moreover, then again capacitance is usually the characteristic of a capacitor which prevents the transformation of voltage across it. The Capacitance of a Capacitor Works Capacitance is the electrical property of a capacitor as well as being the level of a capacitors potential to retain an electrical charge onto its a pair of plates with the unit of capacitance that is being the Farad (shortened to F) identified as after the British physicist Michael Faraday. Capacitance working is understood to be genuinely that a capacitor possesses the capacitance of One Farad any time a charge of One Coulomb is built up on the plates by a voltage of One volt. Capacitance, C is invariably positive and does not have any negative units. Even so, the Farad is an extremely massive unit of evaluation to exercise by itself therefore sub-multiples of the Farad are actually employed which include micro-farads, nano-farads and pico-farads, for instance. Typical Units of Capacitance Microfarad (μF) 1μF = 1/1,000,000 = 0.000001 = 10-6 F Nanofarad (nF) 1nF = 1/1,000,000,000 = 0.000000001 = 10-9 F Picofarad (pF) 1pF = 1/1,000,000,000,000 = 0.000000000001 = 10-12 F Subsequently making use of the data above we are able to put together a straightforward table to facilitate us change between pico-Farad (pF), to nano-Farad (nF), to micro-Farad (μF) and to Farads (F) as shown. Pico-Farad (pF) Nano-Farad (nF) Micro-Farad (μF) Farads (F) 1,000 1.0 0.001 10,000 10.0 0.01 1,000,000 1,000 1.0 10,000 10.0 100,000 100 1,000,000 1,000 0.001 10,000 0.01 100,000 0.1 1,000,000 1.0     capacitor conversion table Capacitance of a Parallel Plate Capacitor The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is proportional to the space, A in metres2 of the most compact of the two plates and inversely proportional to the area or isolation, d (i.e. the dielectric depth) handed out in metres between both of these conductive plates. The generalised formula for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor is specified in the form of: C = ε(A/d) in which ε corresponds to the absolute permittivity of the dielectric substance employed. The permittivity of a vacuum, εo better known as the “permittivity of free space” carries the importance of the constant 8.84 x 10-12 Farads per metre. To put up the maths somewhat less complicated, this dielectric constant of free space, εo, that may be drafted quite as: 1/(4π x 9×109), may additionally possess the units of picofarads (pF) per metre as the constant issuing: 8.84 for the value of free space. Notice however that the consequent capacitance significance will probably be in picofarads instead of in farads. Typically, the conductive plates of a capacitor are split up by some form of insulating substance or solution instead of an ideal vacuum. When determining the capacitance of a capacitor, we are able to judge the permittivity of air, and in particular of dehydrated air, for being the equivalent value just like a vacuum since they are quite comparable. capacitor capacitance Capacitance Solving Example No1   cap chart A capacitor is constituted of 2 conductive metal plates 30cm x 50cm that happen to be spaced 6mm away from one another, as well as employs moisture free air being its exclusive dielectric component. Estimate the capacitance of the capacitor. the capacitance of a capacitor In that case the value of the capacitor which includes a couple of plates set apart by air is computed as 221pF or 0.221nF The Dielectric of a Capacitor   In addition to the in general dimensions of the conductive plates and their range or interval away from one another, an additional aspect which influences the all around capacitance of the product is the make of dielectric substance applied. Stated another way the “Permittivity” (ε) of the dielectric. The conductive plates of a capacitor happen to be made out of a metallic foil or a aluminum film enabling the supply of electrons and charge, nonetheless the dielectric matter implemented is invariably an insulator. The many insulating substances simply because the dielectric in a capacitor are different in their capability to prevent or transfer an electric charge. This dielectric component can be produced from numerous insulating resources or compositions these particular elements with the most typical forms considered a good choice is: air, paper, polyester, polypropylene, Mylar, ceramic, glass, oil, or a variety of other materials. The element wherein the dielectric substance, or insulator, maximizes the capacitance of the capacitor in comparison to air is referred to as the Dielectric Constant, k and a dielectric matter with a superior dielectric constant is a significantly better insulator in comparison with a dielectric substance with an inferior dielectric constant. Dielectric constant is a dimensionless number because it is determined by free space. The original permittivity or “complex permittivity” of the dielectric substance between the plates is so therefore the product of the permittivity of free space (εo) and the relative permittivity (εr) of the substance utilized as the dielectric which is prescribed as: Complex Permittivity capacitor permittivity Quite simply, in the event we consider the permittivity of free space, εo as our source amount thereby making it equivalent to one, any time the vacuum of free space is substituted by a different version of insulating substance, their permittivity of its dielectric is referenced to the basis dielectric of free space offering a multiplication variable often known as “relative permittivity”, εr. Therefore the importance of the complex permittivity, ε ends up being equivalent to the relative permittivity multiplied by one. Standard units of dielectric permittivity, ε or perhaps dielectric constant for typical substances are: Pure Vacuum = 1.0000, Air = 1.0006, Paper = 2.5 to 3.5, Glass = 3 to 10, Mica = 5 to 7, Wood = 3 to 8 and Metal Oxide Powders = 6 to 20 etc. This subsequently bestows us an ultimate formula for the capacitance of a capacitor as: capacitance One approach accustomed to raise the all around capacitance of a capacitor at the same time maintaining its dimensions compact is to “interleave” additional plates collectively within an individual capacitor body. In place of just one single pair of parallel plates, a capacitor should have numerous individual plates hooked up collectively in that way improving the working surface, A of the plates. For a regular parallel plate capacitor as demonstrated above, the capacitor carries a couple of plates, labelled A and B. For that reason as the quantity of capacitor plates is 2, you can easily stipulate that n = 2, where “n” symbolizes the quantity of plates. As a result our formula above for an individual parallel plate capacitor must be: capacitance But yet, the capacitor sometimes have two parallel plates and just one side of each plate is within contact with the dielectric in the center just like the alternative part of each plate shapes the outside the capacitor. When we consider the two halves of the plates and connect these with each other we systematically consist mainly of “one” entire plate connected with the dielectric. Regarding an individual parallel plate capacitor, n - 1 = 2 - 1 which is the same as 1, you can easily mathematically overlook this 1 as C = (εo.εr x 1 x A)/d is simply the as good as expressing: C = (εo.εr.A)/d that may be the traditional formula above. At this point presume there exists a capacitor comprised of 9 interleaved plates, after that n = 9 as proven. Multi-plate Capacitor At the moment there are 5 plates in touch with one lead (A) together with 4 plates to the second lead (B). Therefore Each side of the 4 plates tied into lead B get in touch with with the dielectric, although just one side of each of the external plates joined to A is basically in touch with the dielectric. In that case just as above, the beneficial surface area of each group of plates is just 8 and its capacitance is due to this fact presented as: capacitance Contemporary capacitors are generally categorized in accordance with the traits and characteristics of their insulating dielectric: Low Loss, High Consistency something like Mica, Low-K Ceramic, Polystyrene. Average Loss, Moderate Constancy which include Paper, Plastic Film, High-K Ceramic. Polarized Capacitors similar to Electrolytic’s, Tantalum’s. Voltage Standing of a Capacitor All of capacitors possess the highest voltage evaluation so when picking out a capacitor contemplation needs to be provided to the volume of voltage to be implemented across the capacitor. The highest possible measure of voltage that may be used on the capacitor without injury to its dielectric substance is usually assigned in the data sheets as: WV, (working voltage) or as WV DC, (DC working voltage). In case the voltage employed across the capacitor turns into far too significant, the dielectric will probably break apart (referred to as electrical break down) as well as arcing is going to transpire between the capacitor plates leading to a short-circuit. The working voltage of the capacitor hinges on the form of dielectric substance being applied and also its consistency. The DC working voltage of a capacitor is simply that, the the greatest amount of DC voltage as opposed to the highest AC voltage because a capacitor with a DC voltage rating of 100 volts DC simply cannot harmlessly exposed to an alternating voltage of 100 volts. Because an alternating voltage carries an r.m.s. rating of 100 volts while a maximum value of over 141 volts!. So therefore a capacitor that could be expected to work at 100 volts AC ought to have a functioning voltage for a minimum of 200 volts. In reality, a capacitor needs to be decided on making sure that its working voltage either DC or AC is no less than 50 % above the highest possible potent voltage to be carried out on it. An additional issue which impacts the functioning of a capacitor is Dielectric Leakage. Dielectric leakage transpires in a capacitor as the consequence of an undesirable leakage current which makes its way via the dielectric substance. Frequently, it is evaluated that the resistance of the dielectric is exceedingly substantial and a high-quality insulator preventing the flow of DC current originating from the capacitor (as with an ideal capacitor) from one plate to the second. Nevertheless, in case the dielectric substance ends up being spoiled due to extreme voltage or over heat, the leakage current by means of the dielectric gets to be exorbitantly high contributing to a speedy decline in charge on the plates and an overheating of the capacitor after a while causing untimely malfunction of the capacitor. After that by no means employ a capacitor in a circuit with increased voltages in comparison with the capacitor is rated for otherwise it could turn out to be hot and burst.]]> 1241 0 0 0 How to Calculate SMPS Transformer https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-calculate-smps-transformer/ Mon, 07 Dec 2015 12:31:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1258 L(min) = [Vin(max) - V(out) x T(ON) / 1.4 x Iout(min) Vin(max) =  maximum voltage next to the output rectifier within that specific output. Vout = output voltage. Toff(est) = anticipated ON time of power device at the maximum input voltage. Iout(min) = least heavy anticipated load current to achieve that output. Determined from the above formula is L(min) which is the minimal recommended inductance, below which the core is going to be drained of flux at the least rated load current for that specific output. Make sure you plan a circuit that permits for functioning without having any load. Unquestionably, you can not replace zero for Iout(min) because that might contribute to an L(min) figure of infinity. And surely, that actually isn’t imaginable, could it be? Which means that, what you need to accomplish is that you ought to decide upon the very least permissible current. Work with a resistor load along at the output of the power source in order that should you have hardly any load, this resistor load delivers the bare minimum load. Iout(min) needs to be significant enough that L(min) certainly is not exceedingly big; it additionally should not be exceedingly massive which may induce excessive power deficits, therefore a negative efficiency, on account of the power dissipation in the output resistor. Commonly, this resistor is termed a dummy load whose exclusive objective is always to offer the minimal load if there is hardly any other load at the output of the converter / supply of power. Seeing that we understand the minimum needed inductance, we should comprehend the number of turns to incorporate on our core. Through the datasheet of the core, you will discover the AL magnitude. This signifies the inductance upon each turns squared: AL = L/N^2 L will be the inductance and N would be the amount of turns. Implementing M as the argument: L = √ L/AL Thus, here is the formula which may be utilized to figure out the quantity of turns when we identify the preferred inductance. Occasionally you probably will not be familiar with the AL valuation. You possibly will not find out the component spec the core you own thereby unable to identify the datasheet. No matter what the explanation, it is possible to experimentally identify the AL valuation. Execute several turns and determine using an L meter, the inductance. After that, measure the inductance for a sets of many different number of turns. Do it again for all these selected numbers of turns. Therefore, determine the inductance for, as an example, 5, 10, 20, 40 turns after which for each and every, determine the AL value. Obtain the average AL value. One of the things that can be done is, you might sketch a graph of L against N2. The gradient of the most effective match line could possibly be the AL value. You might also mathematically determine the gradient of the “regression line”. Exercise whatsoever course you realize is the quickest. At this moment let’s check out a case in point to solve just what you’ve understood until at this instant. Let’s stipulate that our converter is a half-bridge converter. The input voltage for the converter will be different out of 150VAC (212VDC) to 250VAC (354VDC). Output voltage from the converter can be 14VDC. The turning frequency is 50kHz. Transformer primary: 26 turns Transformer secondary: 4+4 turns The formula for computing the minimal essential inductance is: L(min) = [Vin(max) - V(out) x T(ON) / 1.4 x Iout(min) We will have to evaluate the output voltage with the transformer secondary at 354VDC input, that may be our optimum input voltage. We’ll believe that the voltage drop as a result of the rectifier diode is 1V. Consequently the typical output voltage within the transformer secondary is 15V. Transformer turns ratio (primary: secondary) = 26:4 = 6.5 Thus, at any time typical secondary voltage is the same as 15V, typical voltage across transformer primary is 6.5 * 15V = 97.5V. In case duty cycle was 100%, voltage across transformer primary could well be 177V (50% the DC bus voltage - consider half-bridge topology). Therefore, the duty cycle is (97.5/177)*100% = 55%. Average output voltage on transformer secondary will be 15V which has a duty cycle of 55%. Consequently, maximum output voltage is 15V/0.55 = 27.3V, and then there is assumed a diode reduction of 1V. Therefore, Vin(max) is 26.3V. At optimum input voltage, duty cycle will probably be smallest. This can be any time the off time is going to be the greatest. We now have determined a duty cycle value of 55% - this is actually the minimum duty cycle number. Since switching frequency is 50kHz, period of time is 20µs. The off period is 0.45 * 20µs = 9µs. Which is our Toff(est). Let’s stipulate that the particular minimal load is going to pull 500mA current. Using a 14V output and 500mA current, the electricity dissipated in the output resistor will likely be: P = VI = 14  x 0.5 W = 7 Watts That is certainly a great deal of power! In case it’s agreeable, by all means employ a 500mA minimum load. If you decide to fetch the minimum load all the way down to 250mA, you trim down power dissipation (above) to 3.5W. Therefore now we have figured out all the essential variables. Let’s connect these into the formula. L(min) = (26.3 - 14) x 9 x 10^-6 / 1.4 x 0.25 = 316uH This is often the bare minimum expected inductance. Feel free to use an inductance higher than the minimum number established, considering that, well you determined the minimum essential inductance. Let’s believe we’ll exploit an inductance of 450µH. Let’s stipulate that we’ve picked out a toroid core with an AL valuation on 64nH per turn squared. To begin with, the expected inductance is 316µH that could be equivalent to 316000nH. Therefore the preferred range of turns is: It can be possibly 70 or 71 turns. This is often for 316µH. Regarding 450µH: Let's make this around 84 turns. So...now you know How to Calculate SMPS Transformer Turns at home, which you can apply this easy solution in order to determine the necessary output inductance for any converter in which employs the forward, push-pull, half-bridge or full-bridge topology. It’s effortless and also Lets hope I have personally had the opportunity to enable you to comprehend without a doubt. I want to appreciate your feedback and opinions!]]> 1258 0 0 0 Simple Solar LED Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-led-solar-light-circuit/ Sun, 13 Dec 2015 03:41:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1265 straightforward solar garden led light circuit, we applied just one transistor for the switching functioning, One particular issue with the earlier design is actually, will not offer a controlled charging for the battery, eventhough it not necessarily is likely to be totally crucial considering that the battery will never be charged to its 100 % potential, this particular feature may need much better. An additional related problem with the earlier circuit is it has the reduced power specialization which will eliminate it from applying high power batteries and LEDs. The below circuit successfully handles equally the above couple of challenges, through a relay and a emitter-follower-transistor stage. While in ideal sun light, the relay receives ample power with the panel and continues to be switched ON using its N/O contacts turned on. This lets the battery to acquire the charging voltage via a transistor emitter follower voltage regulator. The emitter follower layout is designed with a TIP122, a resistor and a zener diode. The resistor offers the essential biasing for the transistor to run, as the zener diode number clamps the emitter voltage so as to ensure that it is controlled at just under the zener voltage value. The zener value is as a result suitably decided to fit the charging voltage of the attached battery. Emplyoing a 6V battery, the zener voltage could possibly be determined as 7.5V, pertaining to 12V battery the zener voltage may very well be close to 15V etc. The emitter follower furthermore ensures that the battery will never get overcharged over a issued charging restriction. While in night time, if a substantive decrease in sunlight is recognized, the relay is inhibited from the demanded minimal retaining voltage, triggering it to switch from its N/O to N/C contact. The above mentioned changeover quickly changes the battery across charging mode to the LED mode, lighting the LED from the battery voltage. Bill of materials to get a 6V/4AH solar light circuit employing a 1 watt LED Solar Panel = 12V, 800mA Relay = 6V/300mA Rx = 10 ohm/2 watt zener diode = 7.5V, 1/2 watt]]> 1265 0 0 0 Simple Laser Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-laser-alarm-circuit/ Sat, 19 Dec 2015 07:08:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1268 The concept presents itself remarkably simple, and utilizes an IC 555 dependent monostable multivibrator stage together with an LDR sensor. As presented in the plan, the laser beam is drawn by means of a laser pointer circuit attached at certain matching location across the area boundary which must be guarded. Because a laser beam carries the characteristic of concentrating over a particular position without distortions, and on a straight line, no matter what the distance may be, the target within this utility is fine-tuned over an LDR across a particular length, as determined in the diagram. The LDR is encased inside a light proof container with a miniature opening that enables just the laser beam to come into at the same time impeding the majority of the surrounding illumination around. Provided that the laser beam is kept centered over the the LDR, the resistance of the LDR is turned on the very least degree that can be around 10K to 50K roughly as determined by the specific LDR technical specs. The minimal resistance from the LDR provides a very high potential at the base of the connected BC557 transistor making this dormant. Consequently this retains the pin#2 of the IC555 monostable at an increased potential and the output of the IC at logic zero, to ensure that the relay is kept turned OFF. At this point in a case when an intruder (a human being or creature) tends to make an an effort pass by the secured line of entrap, intersects or obstructs the laser beam, which at once results in the LDR resistance to maximize and activate the BC557 device through the 1M resistor. The BC557 acts to this and fires, grounding pin#2 of the IC as well as setting off the monostable actions. The above method pushes the pin#3 of the IC to get high and activate the relay, the relay contacts in all probability being associated with an security alarm, triggers the security alarm, cautioning the field proprietor about the intrusion. The alarm goes on to "shout" for a few minutes of time determined by the magnitudes of R and C, whose quantities are precisely proportional to the period of the security alarm activation interval. The above mentioned laser alarm circuit can be set up across most of the corners of farm for confirming highest possible and 100% safety for the invaluable harvests and for providing a relaxing sleep to the field possessor.]]> 1268 0 0 0 Multi-Level Cascaded Sinewave Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/multi-level-cascaded-sinewave-inverter-circuit/ Sat, 19 Dec 2015 08:47:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1271 You can easily identify that the Multi level cascaded principle generates a far more noticeable and effectual demonstration of a real sine wave compared to the SPWM idea which counts entirely on coordinating the RMS significance with the primary sine wave level. Developing a standard Multi Level Cascaded sine wave Inverter can be hugely challenging, however the theory which is discussed below allows the application more convenient by employing common ingredients. Multi Level Cascaded Sine Wave Inverter Circuit Multi-Level Cascaded Sinewave Inverter Circuit Parts List All resistors are 10k, 1/4 watt All diodes are 1N4148 All BJTs are TIP142 ICs are 4017 With reference to the figure above, we are able to observe just how easily the multilevel cascaded inverter principle may be realistically enforced by means of just a muti-tap transformer, a few 4017 ICs and eighteen power BJTs, which can be readily swapped with mosfets if desired. At this point a couple of 4017 ICs that happen to be Johnson's 10 stage counter divider chips, are cascaded to churn out a sequentially moving or following logic highs across the outlined pinouts of the ICs. These sequentially moving logic are utilized for activating the associated power BJTs in an exact progression which subsequently switch the transformer winding in a manner which then causes the transformer to construct a cascaded design of sine equivalent waveform. The transformer makes up the core of the circuit and engages a specifically wounded primary with eleven terminals. These terminals are simply taken out uniformly from one extended worked out winding. The BJTs connected with one of the ICs trigger one of the halves of the transformer by means of 5 taps making it possible for the procreation of multi level rectangles, constituting one half phase of the AC waveform, at the same time the BJTs in connection with the second ICs performs the parallel operation to structure up the lower 50% AC cycle through a 5 level cascaded waveform. The ICs are powered by clock signals put on the shown state in the circuit, that can be procured from any regular 555 IC astable circuit. The initial five units of the BJTs develop the five numbers of the waveform, the remaining four BJTs transform the corresponding in opposite sequence to accomplish the cascaded waveform obtaining an overall of nine skyscrapers. These skyscrapers are produced by bringing forth an climbing and diminishing voltage stages by the switching of the interacting winding of the transformer which happen to be calculated at the appropriate voltage ranges For instance, winding #1 could possibly be calculated at 150V with reference to the central tap, the winding #2 at 200V, winding #3 at 230V, winding #4 at 270V as well as winding #5 at 330V, therefore when these are flipped in sequence by the range of the indicated five BJTs, we obtain the initial five numbers of the waveform, after that as these winding are powered in opposite by the following four BJTs it results in the sinking 4 level waveforms, consequently implementing the top part of the half cycle of the 220V Alternating current. The identical is duplicated by the alternative nine BJTs involved with the other 4017 IC contributing to the lower half of the five level cascaded AC, which accomplishes 1 full AC waveform of the preferred 220V AC output. Transformer Details: As could be spotted in the earlier mentioned plans, the transformer is a traditional iron core variety, manufactured by winding the primary and the secondary using winding equivalent to the suggested voltage taps. Whenever linked with the matching BJTs these winding could be anticipated to generate a five level or an overall of nine number of cascaded waveform in which the initial 36V winding may well correspond and stimulate a 150V, the 27V may well trigger the exact same of 200V, while the 20V, 27V, 36V could well be committed of causing 230V, 270V and 330V across the secondary winding in the presented cascaded structure. The group of taps on the lower hand of the primary may well implement the changing over to finish four ascending amounts of the waveform. An equivalent operation may be replicated by the nine BJTs in connection with the interrelated 4017 IC for developing the negative 50% sequence of the Alternating current...the negative is provided on account of the reverse adaptation of the transformer winding with reference to the middle tap.]]> 1271 0 0 0 No Load Detection Shut Down for Inverters https://makingcircuits.com/blog/no-load-detector-shut-down-for-inverters/ Thu, 24 Dec 2015 02:41:51 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1452 The write-up examines a relay cut-off circuit which is often installed into inverters in order to makes sure a no load detection, shut down for inverters immediately implemented stopping the inverter from working without need. The discussed theory refers to a problem in which a no load condition is expected to be discovered and cut-off from continuing, that is we explore a circuit pertaining to protecting against a no load condition for inverters.   No Load Detection and Shut Down for Inverters As displayed in the above image, a no load detector and cut of technique could be opened up by using this layout in any inverter circuit. The functional specifics could be comprehended with the following description: The circuit includes two stage, particularly the current amplifier and sensor stage making use of the T3/T4 Darlington pair, along with a basic delay ON timer stage employing T1, T2 and the involved parts. When SW1 is started up, the delay-ON timer is started via C1 which will start charging through R2 and D5 trying to keep T1 turned off in the operation. With T1 switched off, T2 is switched ON which as a result switches ON the relay. The relay helps the positive from the battery to get linked with the inverter in order that the inverter is capable of start up and produce the specified AC mains into the desired home equipment. Considering the existence of a load within the output the battery experiences a symmetrical sum of current intake, and in the process Rx encounters a current circulation through it. This current is changed into an equivalent quantity of voltage around Rx that is detected by the T3/T4 Darlington pair and it is pushed to switch ON. Having T3/T4 started up, C1 will be immediately stopped from becoming charged, leading to an instant deactivating of the delay ON timer, ensuring the output of the inverter never stops the supply of the voltage to the load. On the other hand, imagine the output of the inverter is lacking virtually any load (no load condition), T3/T4 may be then struggling to activate, that enables C1 to acquire charge steadily so that the potential around it can be ample to activate T1. The moment T1 is activated, T2 will be blocked and thus will be the relay. Considering the relay contacts cut-off and changed from N/O to the N/C contact, the positive for the inverter is likewise cut-off, the device reaches a stand still.]]> 1452 0 0 0 364 0 0 365 0 0 368 365 1 IC TL494 PWM Modified Sine Wave Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/ic-tl494-pwm-modified-sine-wave-inverter-circuit/ Thu, 24 Dec 2015 03:25:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1454 Looking at the picture above, the many pinout functions of the IC for executing the PWM inverter functions can be grasped with the following facts: Pin#10 and pin#9 are the two outputs of the IC that happen to be organized to operate in tandem or in a totem pole arrangement, which means each the pinouts can never turn out to be positive collectively instead are going to oscillate alternately from positive to zero voltage, that would be once pin#10 is positive, pin#9 possibly will see zero volts and vice versa. The IC is capable to deliver the above totem pole output by connecting pin#13 with pin#14 and it is the reference voltage output pin of the IC fixed at +5V. Consequently given that pin#13 is rigged with this particular +5V reference it enables the IC to generate alternately swapping outputs, nevertheless in case pin#13 is grounded the outputs of the IC is compelled to change in a parallel switching format (single ended mode), which means the two the outputs pin10/9 will start changing over collectively rather than alternately. Pin12 of the IC is the supply pin of the IC which may be identified attached to the battery by means of a limiting 10 ohm resistors which filters out any specific potential surge or a turn on shoot up for the IC. Pin#7 is the primary ground of the IC when pin#4 and pin#16 are grounded for certain stipulated reasons. Pin#4 is the DTC or perhaps the dead time regulation pinout of the IC which decides the dead time or the space between the turn on intervals of the a pair of outputs of the IC. By the manufacturer it will be hooked up to ground to ensure the IC produces the very least interval for the "dead time", but for accomplishing greater dead periods of time, this pinout could be provided with an external changeable voltage from 0 to 3.3V letting a linearly workable dead time from zero to 100%. Pin#5 and pin#6 are the frequency pinouts of the IC which need to be associated with an outside Rt, Ct (resistor, capacitor) system for establishing the needed frequency across the output pinouts of the IC. Either one of the two could be modified for altering the preferred frequency, in the suggested PWM modified inverter circuit we implement a adjustable resistor for empowering the alike. It might be fine-tuned for accomplishing a 50Hz or 60Hz frequency on pins9/10 of the IC in accordance with the conditions, by the individual. The IC TL 494 offers a dual opamp network internally arranged as error amplifiers, that happen to be placed to rectify and dimension the output switching duty cycles or the PWMs in accordance with the usage technical specs, in ways that the output delivers precise PWMs and guarantees the best RMS personalization for the output stage. The inputs of the error amplifiers are designed across pin15 and pin16 for 1 of the error amps and pin1 and pin2 for the subsequent error amplifier. Usually a single error amplifier is employed for the highlighted automatic PWM set up, along with the other error amp is retained inactive. As may be seen in the diagram, the error amp with the inputs at pin15 and pin16 is kept sedentary by grounding the non-inverting pin16 and by linking the inverting pin15 to +5V with pin14. Therefore internally the error amp linked to the above pins keep on being non-active. Nevertheless, the error amp possessing the pin1 and pin2 as the inputs are appropriately employed here for the PWM adjustment functioning. The figure reveals that pin1 which happens to be the non-inverting input of the error amp is hooked up to the 5V reference pin#14, by means of a variable potential divider by means of a pot. The inverting input is associated with pin3 (feedback pin) of the IC that may be in fact the output of the error amps, and makes it possible for a feedback loop to build up for pin1 of the IC. The above pin1/2/3 arrangement makes it possible for the output PWMs to be establish precisely by modifying the pin#1 pot. This concludes the main pinout application n guideline for the mentioned modified sine wave inverter using the IC TL494. Currently for the output power stage we are able to see a few mosfets put into use, powered by a buffer BJT push pull stage. The BJT stage guarantees perfect switching platform for the mosfets by presenting the mosfets with minimal spurious inductance problems and fast discharge of the internal capacitance of the fets. The series gate resistors protect against any transients aiming to create its route into the fet hence guaranteeing the procedures to be completely secured and effectual. The mosfet drains are associated with a power transformer that can be a regular iron cored transformer owning a primary design of 9-0-9V if the inverter battery is evaluated at 12V, and the secondary could possibly be 220V or 120V in accordance with the user's country requirements. The power of the inverter is essentially contingent on the transformer wattage as well as the battery AH specifications, one can possibly modify most of these variables in respect to personal preference. To make a stream-lined  IC TL494 PWM Modified Sine Wave Inverter, the iron core transformer could be swapped with a ferrite core transformer. The winding particulars for the same could possibly be noticed below: By means of super enamelled copper wire: Primary: Wind 5 x 5 turns center tap, choosing 4 mm (2 2 mm strands wrapped in parallel) Secondary: Terminate 2000 turns of 0.5 mm Core: any specific fitting EE core that would have the ability to contain these winding effortlessly.]]> 1454 0 0 0 402 0 0 403 402 1 H-Bridge Inverter Circuit Using IC IRS2453(1)D https://makingcircuits.com/blog/h-bridge-inverter-circuit-using-ic/ Thu, 24 Dec 2015 04:00:15 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1456 In this post we discuss the method for making a simple H-Bridge Inverter Circuit Using IC IRS2453(1)D and a few associated passive components.   Among the various pre-existing inverter topologies, the full bridge or the H-bridge topology is undoubtedly the most effective and successful. Configuring a full bridge topology could possibly require a great number of criticality, nevertheless with the introduction of full bridge driver ICs most of these have at the moment grown to be the least complicated inverters anybody can construct. Full bridge inverter circuits also known as the H-bridge inverter, are the really economical types as these never rely on a center tapped transformers yet still have the ability to work with the proposed push-pull abilities right across the whole primary winding of the connected tansformers. This characteristic makes it possible the application of smaller transformers and purchase more power outputs simultaneously. Nowadays as a result of the hassle-free accessibility to full bridge driver ICs conditions have turn out to be totally hassle-free and manufacturing a full bridge inverter circuit at your home is now a kids fool around. At this point we talk about a full bridge inverter circuit making use of the full bridge driver IC from International Rectifiers. The described chip is a remarkable full bridge driver IC because it single handedly looks after all of the the leading criticality associated with H-bridge topologies by means of its leading-edge integrated circuitry. The assembler basically requires to connect a couple of several elements externally for accomplishing a full fledged, functioning H-bridge inverter. The straightforwardness of the modelis indisputable from the diagram demonstrated below: Pin14 and pin10 are the high side floating supply voltage pinouts of the IC. The 1uF capacitors in effect maintain these critical pinouts a tint more than the drain voltages of the respective mosfets making sure that the mosfet source potential remains below the gate potential for the preferred conduction of the mosfets. H-Bridge Inverter Circuit Using IC IRS2453(1)D The gate resistors eliminate drain/source spike probability by stopping sharp conduction of the mosfets. The diodes across the gate resistors are established for effective discharging of the inner gate/drain capacitors in the course of their nonconduction intervals for guaranteeing maximum reaction from the units. The IC IRS2453(1)D is furthermore showcased with an integrated oscillator, which means simply no external oscillator stage may be necessary using this type of chip. A few exterior passive parts manage the frequency for operating the inverter. Rt and Ct could be determined for finding the required 50Hz or 60 Hz frequency outputs over the mosfets. The following equation could be used for determining the amounts of Rt/Ct for the discussed H-Bridge Inverter Circuit Using IC IRS2453(1)D: f = 1/1.453 x Rt x Ct in which Rt is in Ohms and Ct in Farads. An additional fascinating characteristic of this IC is its potential to tackle extremely high voltages upto 600V rendering it flawlessly qualified for transformeless inverters or stream-lined ferrite inverter circuits. As can be viewed in the presented diagram, in case an externally approachable 330V DC is implemented across the "+/- AC rectified lines", the arrangement straight away results in being a transformerless inverter whereby any expected load may be associated straight across the points imprinted as "load". On the other hand in case a regular step-down transformer is employed, the primary winding could be associated across the points marked as "load". In this instance the "+AC rectified line" could be coupled with pin#1 of the IC and ended universally to the battery (+) of the inverter. In case a battery greater than 15V is employed, the "+AC rectified line" has to be attached straightly with the battery positive whilst pin#1 ought to be carried out with a stepped down adjusted 12V from the battery supply applying IC 7812. Despite the fact that the above demonstrated H-Bridge Inverter Circuit Using IC IRS2453(1)D appears to be extremely convenient to develop, the format involves certain stringent stategies to be adopted.]]> 1456 0 0 0 458 0 0 459 458 1 468 0 0 469 468 1 470 0 0 471 470 1 472 0 0 474 472 1 487 0 0 488 487 1 638 0 0 639 https://makingcircuits.com/ 638 1 Simple Induction Heater Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-induction-heater-circuit/ Fri, 01 Jan 2016 11:19:10 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1463   induction]]> 1463 0 0 0 420 0 0 421 420 1 502 0 0 504 502 1 553 0 0 555 553 1 658 https://www.facebook.com/navizzz 0 0 661 https://makingcircuits.com/ 658 1 723 http://louislqojc.blogminds.com/restaurant-delivery-an-overview-3572190 0 0 Simple 12V 500mA SMPS Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-12v-500ma-smps-circuit/ Fri, 01 Jan 2016 12:45:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1479 I endeavored to develop a simple 12V 500mA SMPS circuit. It makes use of an built-in circuit TNY267P of a sequence of circuits TinySwitch-II: TNY263, TNY264, TNY265, TNY266, TNY267 a TNY268. This part combines together the control circuit and the switching element (MOSFET), current and thermal fuse and self-power technique. This really is the whole thing essential to a compact flyback supply. It neglects to even require an auxiliary winding. All of this is adapted into DIP8 package (just the same as the 555)! The highest voltage is 700V, the operating frequency is 132kHz. Referring at the schematic diagram of the simple 12V 500mA SMPS circuit it becomes clear below. On account of the minimal power, I employed halfwave rectifier. Voltage highs are controlled applying transil (zener diodes) 180V. This can easily be replenished by the customary parallel composition of resistance and capacitor. Feedback will be supplied with optocouplers, the minimum threshold is picked out purely via zener diode (ZD). ZD achieves the output voltage. It happens to be approximately 1V above the formal voltage of ZD, due to the fact that the voltage decline of the LED optocoupler is occupied. For 19V output voltage ZD 18V is implemented. As expected i better not force one to construct 19V supply - output voltage are typically fine-tuned by adjusting a couple of elements: - Secondary winding pertains to 1.4 z / V. - ZD is mostly about 1V under the needed voltage. For low voltage (about 5V or less) try replacing fast diode on output with Schottky diode. Optimum power in this source in an covered power supply and 230V power is 13W. Transformer is a compact ferrite EE. Middle column includes a cross-section of 4.5 x 4.5 mm, air gap 0.4 mm. Primary carries 140 turns of wire diameter 0.15 mm. Secondary incorporates (for 19V output) 27 turns of wire 0.4 mm. On account of the small power the secondary is not separated to a pair of regions. To begin with, I wrapped the whole primary. The levels are interlaced primary. Between primary and secondary i employed protective shielding - copper tape and hooked up it to the frigid end of primary (needless to say it simply cannot establish a shorter turn!). After that I wrapped solid isolation - 12 sheets of duct tape. Subsequently I wrapped secondary. In the event of difficulty disturbance include a noise reductions circuit and / or work with a capacitor roughly 1n / Y1 between primary and secondary section. Specific guidelines are available in the datasheet of TNY263 - TNY268. The greater component the number, the increased the prospective power. Be aware additionally the current compilation of TinySwitch-III: TNY274 - TNY280. From this series one can find IC's making it possible for substantially more electrical power. They are able to moreover accommodate with schematic listed below, but the pinout are not the same.   12V 500ma smps circuit]]> 1479 0 0 0 3.3V 2amp SMPS Circuit for LEDs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/3-3v-2amp-smps-circuit-for-leds/ Sat, 02 Jan 2016 04:04:14 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1485 ]]> 1485 0 0 0 382 0 19 383 382 1 544 0 0 547 544 1 Make this Small Tesla Coil https://makingcircuits.com/blog/make-this-small-tesla-coil/ Thu, 07 Jan 2016 11:27:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1495 !!! WARNING!!! Tesla coil is a tremendously hazardous machine! Its supply voltage is lethal! Without expertise in the concepts of working together with high voltage, you possibly can not assemble it. Tesla coil will cause a broadband radio frequency disturbance. Electromagnetic radiation could certainly destroy electronic digital products or storage means. The spark gap generates ozone (O 3), nitrogen oxides poisonous gases, they are required to be ventilated! Spark gap discharges UV luminosity. Current at ignition emission of as much as many kiloampers. Capacitor may easily continue to be charged even with shutdown. The gadget is extremely vociferous that could affect hearing ability. Whatever you carry out at your own personal liability! For virtually any damage or destruction I truly do not accept any accountability.]]> 1495 0 0 0 Increasing LM317 Current with a Transistor https://makingcircuits.com/blog/increasing-lm317-current-with-a-transistor/ Sun, 10 Jan 2016 12:15:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1499 ]]> 1499 0 0 0 Buck Solar Charger Circuit Using IC TL494 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/buck-solar-charger-circuit-using-ic-tl494/ Fri, 15 Jan 2016 16:04:43 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1508 We understand that a 5V solar charger circuit may be effortlessly designed implementing linear ICs such as LM 317 or LM 338, Despite this the largest downside with such linear chargers could be the release of heat by means of their body or by way of package dissipation, resulting in wastage of valuable energy. For this reason or issue these kinds of IC aren't able to make a zero drop voltage output for any load and demand at the very least 3V increased inputs compared to the particular outputs. The circuit of the 5V charger discussed at this point is totally free from all of these headaches, let's discover how an effective functioning can be accomplished through the offered circuit. With reference to the above mentioned 5V PWM solar charger circuit, the IC TL494 constitutes the center of the whole program. The IC is actually a professional PULSE WIDTH MODULATION processor chip IC, utilized in charge of maintaining a buck converter stage, accountable for switching the high input voltage into a recommended reduced output. The input towards the circuit could be ranging from 10 and 40V, which usually turns into the best assortment for your solar panels. The crucial element of the IC consists of: Accurate PWM output which can be adaptable depending on consumer requirements. To be able to produce genuine PWMs, the IC incorporates a highly accurate 5V reference created by applying bandgap principle making it thermally resistant. This specific 5V reference which can be attained in pin#14 of the IC gets to be the base voltage for all the essential invokes included around the IC and in control of the PWM control. The IC includes a couple of outputs which is often possibly put together to oscillate in tandem within a totem pole construction, or perhaps equally at any given time similar to a single ended oscillatory output. The very first alternative results in being well suited for push-pull type of programs for example in inverters etc. Except for the current plan just one ended oscillatory output results in being better and also this is accomplished through grounding pin#13 of the IC, additionally with regard to obtaining a push pull output pin#13 could possibly be attached with pin#14, The outputs of the IC features a very beneficial and an appealing assemblage inside. The outputs tend to be ended through a couple of transistors within the IC. These types of transistors are usually put in place using an open emitter/collector throughout the pin9/10 and pins 8/11 correspondingly. Regarding purposes that call for a positive output, the emitters works extremely well as the outputs, that exist through pins9/10. With regard to this kind of programs typically an NPN BJT or an Nmosfet could well be put together outwardly for agreeing to the positive frequency throughout the pin9/10 of the IC. In the current layout because a PNP is utilized together with the IC outputs, a negative sinking voltage gets to be the best choice, and for that reason as opposed to pin9/10, we now have associated pin8/11 with all the output stage including the PNP/NPN crossbreed stage. These outputs present adequate sinking current intended for running the output stage as well as for operating the high current buck converter arrangement. PWM Buck Control The PWM rendering, which usually gets to be the key element for any circuit is accomplished by serving a sample feed-back transmission to the interior error amplifier of the IC by means of its non-inverting input pin#1. This PWM input are seen installed using the output in the buck converter by way of the potential divider R8/R9, and also this feedback cycle inputs the mandatory information for the IC in order that the IC has the capacity to produce manipulated PWMs throughout the outputs so that the output voltage persistently stays at 5V. Additional output voltage could be predetermined by merely modifying the valuations of R8/R9 according to ones personal program demands. Charging Current Control The IC possesses a couple of error amplifiers established in house intended for governing the PWM according to outside feedback impulses. One of many error amp is employed for governing the 5V outputs as talked about previously, the next error amp is needed for manipulating the output current. R13 becomes the current sensing resistor, the potential produced throughout it is actually raised on to one of inputs pin#16 of the subsequent error amp which can be investigated with the reference at pin#15 put on the opposite input of the opamp. Within the suggested layout it can be established for 10amp by way of R1/R2, which means in the event the output current will probably boost above 10amps, the pin16 should be expected to go beyond the reference point pin15 starting the specified PWM compression till the current is fixed back to the desired ranges. Buck Power Converter The power level demonstrated in the layout is really a regular power buck converter stage, employing a hybrid Darlington pair transistors NTE153/NTE331. This hybrid Darlington stage takes action with the PWM manipulated frequency from pin8/11 of the IC and runs the buck converter stage which involves a high current inductor along with a high-speed switching diode NTE6013. The above mentioned level creates a highly accurate 5v output guaranteeing minimal turbulence along with a prefect zero drop output. The coil or the inductor could be wound around virtually any ferrite core having a 3 simultaneous strands of super enameled copper wire each and every using a dimension of 1mm, the inductance value could be just about anywhere around 140uH for the recommended layout. Hence this particular TL494 based buck battery charger circuit can be viewed as a possible perfect and incredibly effective solar charger circuit for many kinds of solar battery charging programs.]]> 1508 0 0 0 Small Transistor Amplifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/small-transistor-amplifier-circuit/ Sat, 16 Jan 2016 13:39:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1511 ]]> 1511 0 0 0 Simple 1 Watt LED Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-1-watt-led-driver-circuit/ Sun, 17 Jan 2016 14:58:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1521 ]]> 1521 0 0 0 Simple Touch Sensitive Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/touch-sensitive-switch-circuit/ Wed, 27 Jan 2016 16:16:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1525 ]]> 1525 0 0 0 AC Mains Current Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/ac-mains-line-current-detector/ Sun, 31 Jan 2016 11:20:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1529 ]]> 1529 0 0 0 Sound Decibel Meter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sound-decibel-meter-circuit/ Tue, 02 Feb 2016 10:59:08 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1533 ]]> 1533 0 0 0 TV Remote Control Tester Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/tv-remote-control-tester-circuit/ Wed, 10 Feb 2016 08:28:46 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1539 Transistors can be BC547 for the NPN, and BC557 for the PNP tester1      ]]> 1539 0 0 0 Simple Radio Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-radio-circuit/ Sat, 27 Feb 2016 08:55:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1572 Note: The LM358 is a class B amplifier with no bias and produces excessive crossover distortion when used in audio applications. A better choice is the LM1458, which could be replaced for the shown LM358.   simple powerful radio circuit]]> 1572 0 0 0 Simple Inverter Circuit for Newcomers https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-inverter-circuit-for-newcomers/ Sun, 06 Mar 2016 07:58:10 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1577 You can also change them to 2N3055 and operate by simply changing the battery polarity Despite the fact that this is a saturable-core inverter absolutely no independent feedback winding are exercised. Instead, feedback is generated by cross-coupled joints in the way of a multivibrator. With a 100 % load, the performance is in the neighborhood of 75 % efficiency, and the output voltage is approximately 106 V.   For 220V output simply change the transformer with a 220V transformer The “moderate” pi-section filtration system smooths out the spikes of the output waveform shape to result in a trapezoid wave, instead compared to a square wave, to be offered at the output. This particular makes the unit far better for the operations of radios, recorders, along with other electronic products. Within this form of circuit, the efficiency, frequency, output voltage, and starting up power are interdependent to a notable level. Consequently, certain testing with the biasing resistances may confirm rewarding. Chances are, however, that just one component, for example R1, may need to be changed. In so far as achievable, the biasing systems with regard to the two transistors must be roughly equivalent. Or else, an unsymmetrical waveform, out of balance transistor dissipation, along with other failures could transpire. The following image shows a simple inverter circuit for Newcomers which can be easily built at home and operated with any small lead acid such as battery rated at 12V 7AH All resistors are 10 watt wire wound type and the transistors must be mounted on large heatsinks simple inverter circuit for newcomers Waveform Image   sine waveform]]> 1577 0 0 0 Basic Electronic Formulas for Devices https://makingcircuits.com/blog/basic-electronic-formulas-devices/ Sat, 12 Mar 2016 08:10:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1590

for2

for3

Fundamental Formula for Transistor and Diode

The attributes of semiconductor devices are analyzed in university lessons. The presentation to the circuits together with functioning of diodes and transistors and fundamental formulas are supplied by assorted books or handbooks. Here are just a few emphasizes. The I-V attribute of a diode is determined through the Shockley equation: I=Is×(enVd/Vt-1), in which Is - the reverse bias saturation current (~10−15 to 10−12 A for Silicon); Vd - forward voltage drop in volts; Vt - the thermal voltage (~0.026V at ambient temperature), n - the "ideality factor" (from 1 to 2). At a restricted current I, voltage drop Vd upgrades by approximately -2 mV/oC. Inside a bipolar transistor collector current Ic in linear function resembles the base-emitter voltage by the identical Shockley (also known as Ebers-Moll) equation, except for n=1. The collector current works for the base current IB by Ic=IB×h21, in which h21 - static current gain (typically 20-1000). In spite of this, Ic is unable to overrun Vin/|Z|, in which Vin- the supply voltage, Z- net impedance in the external collector circuit. In case Ic extends the earlier mentioned boundary, the transistor is conducts. MOSFET tendencies may differ using the gate voltage Vg. Whenever Vg <vth, vg="" when="" id≈0.="" current="" drain="" with="" condition="" off="" within="" is="" mosfet="" the="" voltage,="" limit="" gate="" -="" vth="" wherein="">Vth along with the secondary load is such that Vd> Vg-Vth, the MOSFET remains in an active state, wherein Id is proportional to the (Vg-Vth)2 and virtually is unable to count on the Vd. As soon as Id actually gets to particular limit identified by an external circuit, MOSFET get into behaving like a close to constant resistance. During this function Vds≈Id×Rdson, in which Rdson - the ON-state channel's resistance designated in data sheets as a feature mainly of temperature and gate voltage. Power MOSFETs are frequently employed as switching equipment which run in possibly ON or perhaps OFF state.   More will be updated soon under this basic electronic formulas for devices and components article]]> 1590 0 0 0 Simple High Power LED Flashlight Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-hi-powered-led-flashlight/ Fri, 01 Apr 2016 11:09:41 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1624 Recommended Components
  • 24 Super-bright LEDs
  • 3 batteries [AA]
  • Resistor to manage current flow
Procedure of Assembly  led flashlight circuit Fig 1.0: The circuit design shows the basic layout of the design.   Referring to the circuit diagram, all the 24 LEDs are attached together in parallel form. While the optimum voltage to generate bright light from the LEDs need 3.3 – 4 volt [Current – 20mA], but here the current use is 0.4 – 0.6A. The circuit used in this demonstration is a 3 x AA 1.2 V along with nickel-metal hydride battery. A 1ohm resistor is used to limit the current supply to ensure the voltage remain 3.6V. However, the assembly of the resistor and the LED is made on a PCB Board. Once the things are in place the next step is to solder the 1ohm resistor and the LED and further soldering other parts on the PCB. The next and final part is to attach the PCB to the battery holder. You can use glue in this case. If you are planning to use this high power LED flashlight circuit on steel-made cabinet or cars, you need to add a magnetic system.]]> 1624 0 0 0 High Temperature Fire Alarm Circuit Using Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/high-temperature-fire-alarm-circuit-using-transistors/ Fri, 01 Apr 2016 11:15:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1627 de facto. Accident is unfortunate, but if you remain a bit cautious and maintain basic safety practices, you may save your property from the fire, if it ever happens to you. While fire alarm circuit is a widely available tool in the market, many often retorts to building such component. Making a fire alarm tool is simple. All you need to gather are the components and follow specific procedure for installation to build the system. simple fire alarm circuit Circuit Design of Fire Alarm Circuit   This fire-alarm circuit is designed in such a way that when the system receives temperature that exceeds to the permeable limit, this tool will automatically generate alarm. Recommended Components Resistors [1/4W +- 5%]
  • 66ohms – R1
  • 720K – R2
  • 10K – R3
  • 500 ohms – R4
Capacitors 1N4001 Diode – D1 Zener Diode 3V 0.5w – ZD1 3 Siren Sound Generator [UM3561] – IC1 Transistors are as follows BC547 – Q1 BC547 – Q2 2N2907 – Q2 BC547 – Q3 2N2222 – Q4 9v Relay 100 ohms 8 ohms 1 watt Speaker Procedure of Assembly To define a proper tool, the proposed system will use the combination of silicon NPN transistor Q1 [BC109] and PNP Germanium Transistor Q2 [AC188]. The main reason to use both the components is for heat detection. The Q1 should be connected to Q2 and further Q2 should connect with RY1 relay.   The next part of the high temperature fire alarm circuit design process is with ICI-UM3561 where the IC that generates siren should be connected to a 3v power supply unit. In brief, connect Pin 5 and 6 of the IC to the power unit. During relay running procedure ensure that you have placed Pin 2 to the ground. The R2 resistor over Pin 7 and Pin 8 operates to limit the oscillator frequency. In order to boost signal from IC1 R4 resistor the output has to be sent from Q3 and Q4 transistors using the Darlington Compound process. The R4 is further connected to the Zener Diode series to control voltage supply on IC1. The R1 resistor is in series is connected to LED1 and also parallel to R4. Doing this would enable the tool working properly.      ]]> 1627 0 0 0 Simple Solar Plant Watering Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/solar-plant-watering-alarm-circuit/ Fri, 01 Apr 2016 11:44:20 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1630 Recommended Components
  • NPN transistors BC547 40V 200mA – Q1
  • NPN transistors 2N2222 40V 500mA – Q2
  • 3mm LED – LED1, LED2
  • Resistors 10K 0.25W – R1
  • Resistors 100ohms 0.25W – R2
  • Potentiometer 50K – VR1
  • Buzzer 6V – BZ1
  • 5v AA Battery x 3
  • Wires for connection
Procedure of Assembly If you are looking to save cost albeit considering the quality, you may opt for cardboard instead of a PCB. First draw the full layout of the system i.e. layout of the components. Then do it on a cardboard in your desired size and finally cut out the layout design. Once ready, the next step is to make hole on all the pin areas using nail and hammer. Then place all the parts over the cardboard in the respective position as per the layout and further wire leg of all components by soldering. The next step and final step is to set the Solar Cell [6V] onto the layout and you are ready to test the proposed simple solar water plant watering alarm circuit]]> 1630 0 0 0 Simple 20 watt Amplifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-20-watt-amplifier-circuit/ Sat, 02 Apr 2016 05:58:40 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1633 The circuit diagram for the project with bass and treble feature The IC1 in the circuit [TDA2005] is the mother behind building the system. This IC is specifically meant for amplifier based projects. The IC contains a pair of op-amp, which is further connected following to the bridge to initiate the power. The IC can accept DC power supply up till 12 volts with response frequency of 35Hz to 15KHz. Procedure of Assembly Start by sending input signal into the circuit via C1 capacitor and before transistor Q1 sends the signal. The other capacitors C2, C3, C6 along with VR2 potentiometer manages the level of signal [managing high frequency sound]. The C4, C5 capacitors and VR3 potentiometer helps to manage the bass sound or sound of low frequency. In order to adjust the signal sent through VR1, the capacitor C8 need to get coupled to the IC1 [Pin1] input. On the other hand, R9, R10, R12 resistor gain is in place. The C11 and C12 capacitors are also set gain trapping for low frequency. C17 capacitor, which is a feedback is set on a low-scale frequency. Also the R8, C14 and R13, C18 enables prevention of high frequency modulating oscillator. The proposed simple 20 watt amplifier circuit output lies in IC1 [Pin 8 & Pin 10].]]> 1633 0 0 0 Bedside Lamp Timer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/bedside-lamp-timer-circuit/ Sat, 02 Apr 2016 06:18:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1639 Parts List   parts   Circuit operation: Q1 and Q2 are preferably complementary in characteristic. Here in this circuit. Q1 is BC328 which is a 800mA PNP transistor and Q2 is BC238 which is a 100mANPN transistor. Q1 and Q2 are such connected that in the off state it has least drainage current. As soon as the switch P1 is pressed the relay is turned ON and IC1(4012 Dual 4 input NAND Gate) and IC2 (4060-14 Stage ripple counter and oscillator) get power. The relay power up the lamp abs IC2 gets reset as a HI appears at pin no 12. R4 and C4 determines the oscillating frequency of IC2. By changing the value of R4 and C4 time T1 can be adjusted. As soon as the pin no 3 of IC2 goes high after 30 minutes (T1) this turns off the circuit via C3. During those 6 minutes of alarm time the LED blinks at a frequency that is provided by the oscillator IC (IC2) at pin no 9. IC1 is connected to IC2 pin 1, 2 and 15 as shown in the bedside lamp timer circuit. Two NAND gates of IC1 are parallel to boost the current to the blinker. The time can be aler altered by altering the values of R4 and C4. An optional buzzer of Piezo character can be introduced between pin 1 and 14 of IC1. Note: It is observed in practice that the timing changes with different brands of IC2. In particular Motorola make ICs operate faster.  ]]> 1639 0 0 0 Solar Charger Controller Circuit using Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/solar-charger-controller-using-transistors/ Tue, 19 Apr 2016 02:24:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1650   Dropout Voltage The input voltage is more than the input voltage by 1.25V in case charging at the highest rate -the lesser, the more desirable. Low Dropout Voltage (LDO) is the pick up expression for nearly anything under close to 2V. This may possibly be decreased to under 1V by helping to make D3 a schottky rectifier. Current Limiting Current limiting is made available from the solar panel it is not a universally recognized truth that the solar panel happens to be a constant current equipment. Because of this, a solar panel will probably tolerate a short circuit. For that reason, the control will not require current controlling. Float Charge of Lead-Acid Batteries This management charges the battery with a constant voltage as well as regulates a charged battery (float charge). The float charge voltage requirements is a touch under a the charge voltage, therefore to allow for the two voltages, a negotiate is achieved through bringing down the voltage a bit that is precisely how Most automobile techniques work with. In order to get hold of optimum charge in a 12V battery, fix the regulation to 14 to 14.6V. Automobile designs additionally bring down voltage to 13 to 13.5V with the intention to meet scorching heat functioning as the battery is commonly situated in the hot engine slot -battery includes a negative thermal coefficient of voltage. Voltage Adjustment To be able to fix the voltage, remove the battery and hook up a 1K dummy load resistor to the output. The resistor is essential to shunt potential MOSFET seepage current in addition to the green LED current. LDO Solar Charger controller Circuit Functionality using transistors R4 and D1 structure a 6V shunt zener voltage reference. Q1 & Q2 constitute the traditional differential amplifier that amplifies the distinction between the reference voltage and the feedback voltage through the center tag of potentiometer R6. The output is taken out via the collector of Q1 and triggers the gate of P-Channel MOSFET Q3. Differential voltage gain might be approximately 100 to 200. For most desirable accomplishment, I decided on Q1 & Q2 for equivalent hFE. As the feedback voltage boosts at the slider of R6, Q2 triggers on stronger and rips off a part of the emitter current off from Q1. The collector current of Q1 pursues the emitter current and restricts substantially less voltage across R1 consequently eliminating Vgs of Q3 and switching it off. C2 offers frequency reimbursement to avert the amplifier through frequency. Q3 is inactive unless of course the battery is plugged in reverse -should this materialize, Q3 conducts on and helps prevent the reference voltage input to zero as a result switching Q1 & Q3 and discouraging hazardous battery current. D3 inhibits the battery voltage from emerging across an dormant solar panel. Thermal Management This really is a linear series regulator that will desolve considerable power each time the pass transistor is together executing current and reducing voltage at the same time during optimum charge rate while the voltage restriction is minimal, the heatsink works warm when the battery is completely charged and you have affordable charge current, the heatsink is cool but in case the battery sets forth to peak off at optimum voltage, the heatsink functions sizzling hot such is the characteristics of a linear regulator. During 4A, Q3 lowers 3.3V (considering solar panel voltage is 18V)(the residual 0.7V is the D3 voltage decline. P = 4A * 3.3V = 13.2W. The heatsink is graded at 3.9°C/W, therefore heatsink temperature surge = 13.2W * 3.9°C/W = 51.5°C. Incorporating the 25°C ambient temperature leads to a heatsink temperature of 76.5°C. Even if this may look like scorching hot to the finger, it happens to be gentle to the transistor which is evaluated for a junction temperature of 175°C. For the Long term A 6V model while this regulation could be fine-tuned right down to 7V for charging 6V batteries, the efficiency is minor, and definitely will impact at cut down current. A 6V variant is on the drawing board.]]> 1650 0 0 0 1 Watt AM/CW Transmitter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/1-watt-amcw-transmitter-circuit/ Wed, 20 Apr 2016 07:35:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1653   AMPLITUDE MODULATION [AM]: Amplitude modulation is one of the most common electronic standard used to transmit information via carrier waves. Since the radio frequency generates amplitude at all time for no modulation, therefore, it is unable to carry any audio information. AM is widely used during communication via morse code. Simply put the AM produces signal on two adjustment sidebands and power stationed at the carrier frequency level. It is for this reason the majority of the power output generated by the transmitter gets wasted. CW: It is a very basic modulation form where a transmitter output when switched ON and OFF state helps to build the characters in the Morse Code. CW transmitter is cheap and widely available in the market. Furthermore, the signal carried by the CW have its frequency less than 500Hz. Because of low frequency the sound generated remains somewhat inaudible only a faint noise can be heard] on a general receiver. However, to make up the crisis ham radio receivers and shortwave has a beat frequency oscillator [BFO] attached to its circuit. The BFO helps to generate second carrier internally. The internal carrier beats the signal received by CW transmitter and further generates a tone that goes in ON/OFF state upon the receipt of CW signal. This is actually the process the shortwave receives the Morse code signals.   RF Oscillator: It is on the T2 [NPN BSX20]. AT this stage the carrier frequency is generated by Crystal Oscillatory Circuitry. Alternatively, the frequency can be generated through capacitance-inductance Variable Frequency Oscillator [VFO]. While the RF oscillator is developed with an intent to manage frequency stability [Xtal] and power delivered to 50mW@14v, it is equipped to work on low voltage power supply. Moreover, it generates very less heat. Filter: Here the power amplification of RF is taken care. The RF is connected to the antenna via antenna impedance matching circuitry [L1 / L3, C16, C18]. Also it is important to take care so as not to generate any harmonic frequency. Generating the frequency will end up interference in the splatter and other adjacent bands [L3 / L4, C16, C17, C18, C19, C20]. Furthermore, the L-type narrow band-pass filter circuit [3-element] along with a low-pass filter used to generate the frequency efficiently removes the harmonic signals.   Modulator: This is managed in T1 [PNP BC557] where the audio is taken care of. Here, the voice gets enhanced because of some component circuits that [R10, R11, C25, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7], whereas the others get suppressed [+- 3kc/side bandwidth] by managing the HAM radio specs along with the use of collector modulation. However, it is important to consider not to overdo the modulation [don’t exceed above 100%] as that may lead to distortion.   Housing / Shielding: Care should be taken to mount the whole system onto a metal case [aluminum based]. And if you are unable to manage steel-made cases an alternative would be to arrange graphite-painted PVC box or self-sticking aluminum tape. Also ensure that the aluminum tape pieces are conducting each other.   However, following are the specifications to design the proposed 1watt AM/CW 10-meter band transmitter RE-TX1HF10:  
  • RF PEP Power Output: 1W@14v, modulation rate 85% [approx.]
  • Frequency range at peak: 28Mc – 30Mc
  • AM Modulated [if it is keyed then CW]
  • Output impedance adjustable [till 50 ohms]
  • Low-pass PII filter + harmonic L-filter [band-pass type]
  • Voltage: vcc 10 – 16 volts
  • Average current: I= 120mA
  • XTal Oscillator: 28.xxx
  • Frequency adjustment of 2Kc
  • LF Input: +/- 100mV@1K
  • Connecting with external oscillator
    Parts list 10-meterband AM / CW transmitter T1 =BC557 (modulator) T2 =BSX20 oscillator (2N2219. BC109 works also, but little less power) T3 =BD135 amplifier (with heat sink isolated from the transistor) T4 =2N2222, BC338 mute C1 = 100nF C2 = 47uF/16v (tantal) C3 = 2.2 uF/50v (changed in rev v1.5) C4 = 33nF (polyester) (changed in rev1.5) C5 = 10nF (polyester) C6 = 47nF (changed in rev1.5 ) C7 = 4.7uF/50v C8 = 10nF C9 = 0...22pF (60pf for 27Mc) C10 = 120pF C11 = 56pF C12 = 470uF/16v C13 = 100nF C14 = 47nF C15 = 470pF C16 = 6...40pF C17 = 12pF C18 = 120pF C19 = 56pF C20 = 100pF C21 = 470pF C22 = 100nF C23 = 10pF*(added in revision v1.2) C24 = 33nF (changed in rev1.5) C25 = 0,47uF (polyester, added in rev1.5) R1= 3k9 R2= 3k9 R3= 3k3 R4= 5k6 R5= 1k2 R6= 220 R7= 12 R8= 100k R9= 4k7* (added in revision 1.4) R10= 270 (added in rev1.5) R11= 390 (added in rev1.5) Ls1, Ls2 = 470 1/2 watt carbon, 0,2 Cul turned 3 times over the entire length of the resistor (or 2.7uH inductor) L1 = 0.8 mm insulated copper wire, 8.5 turns close together, 7mm inner diameter L2 = 0.8 mm insulated copper wire, 12 turns close together, 6mm inner diameter L3 = 0.8 mm insulated copper wire, 13 turns close together, 7mm inner diameter L4 = 0.8 mm insulated copper wire, 7 turns close together, 7mm inner diameter L5 = 100 uH inductor (*added in revision 1.3) L6 = 100 uH inductor (*changed in revision 1.4) Crystal fundamental frequency or overtone for your desired frequency (28...30Mc) C4, C5, C6, C25 polyester film capacitors]]> 1653 0 0 0 Car Engine Overheating Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/car-engine-overheating-alarm-circuit/ Sat, 23 Apr 2016 08:05:28 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1663 car engine over heating alarm circuit   The aforesaid circuit diagram shows the way the circuit need to be designed. As per the figure, when the engine temperature rises the thermistor decreases. The thermistor is further attached to R1 in order to distribute the power-supply voltage to Pin 2 [ICI-LM741]. Furthermore, the voltage decreases as the temperature increases. The adjustment of the voltage is done by VR1 – 100K on Pin 3 [IC1]. When the voltage on Pin 2 go low than Pin 3, the IC1 gets switched to make the voltage output on Pin 6 in order to send to IC2. The IC2 is connected and used as an astable multi-vibrator to the circuit that generates sound signal. The level of temperature that makes the sound can be adjusted with the help of VR1, whereas, on the other hand, the VR2 will manage sound frequency. The thermistor used in this circuit act as beads and is negative temperature coefficient [NTC]. A thermistor is such a device that is resistant to heat. Here the circuit current is set up-to 10mA. List of Components Following are the components that you need to design the circuit: REISTORS
  • R1 [4.7k] – 1 piece.
  • R2 [22k] – 1 piece
  • RTH1 [NTC Type Thermistor] – 1 piece.
  • VR1, VR2 [Variable Resistor of 100k] – 2 pieces
CAPACITORS
  • C1 [0.01 uF 63V Polyester – 1 piece
  • C2 [100uF 16v Electrolytic Capacitor] – 1 piece
SEMICONDUCTOR
  • ZD1 [Zener Diode 5.1v] – 1 piece
  • IC1 [LM741 op-lamp] – 1 piece
  • IC2 [NE555 timer] – 1 piece
Loudspeaker [8 ohms] – 1]]> 1663 0 0 0 Electronic Fuse Circuit for Power Supply   https://makingcircuits.com/blog/electronic-fuse-circuit-for-power-supply/ Tue, 10 May 2016 02:09:03 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1671 How it works?   The maximum current output of the fuse can be set to 10 mA (approx.). The maximum current that can be allowed is what the transistor can take (BUZ11 – 20A). The fuse used in the circuit has +5V of power supply along with a 7805 integrated stabilizer and reference voltage of +5V. Keeping this in mind, it is imperative that stability is one of the prime factors to an accurate measurement of current limit.  The system is controlled by the potentiometer [here Spectrol 534 of 10 units are used. Alternatively, you can also use two potentiometers of which one can be used for adjust coarseness and the other to achieve clarity. In order to manage the constraints in current fuse, you can use a LED Diode Q1 [green].]]> 1671 0 0 0 How to Design IC 555 Astable Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-design-ic-555-astable-circuit/ Tue, 10 May 2016 02:22:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1674   The Pin1 is laid in ground state. Pin 4 and Pin 8 are first shorted and is then connected to generate +Vcc. The output i.e. VOUT is adapted from Pin 3. Pin 2 and Pin 6, which are also shorted is connected to the ground via Capacitor C. Pin 7 on the other hand supplies +VCC via RA resistor. RB resistor is connected in between of Pin 6 and Pin 7. Furthermore, the Pin 5, there are two options: applying modulation input or connect F with a bypass capacitor 0.01.   How it operates?   In order to understand the way Timer 555 works as free-running multivibrator, here lies a circuit diagram as given below astable-multivibrator-operation   Referring to Fig 1.1, when VOUT output is in high state or Q in low state, the transistor in discharged state is disconnected. The capacitor C then charges towards VCC via RA and RB resistance, thus keeping the charge time C as constant (RA + RB). However, this makes the voltage threshold go up to +2/3 VCC. The Comparator 1 generating hi-output and also enabling the flip-flop, in order to keep Q high and output low. With Q in high state, there become saturation of discharge transistor and Pin 7 gets grounded so as to enable Capacitor C can discharge via RB resistance keeping the discharged time constant to RBC. As the capacitor gets discharged the voltage triggered at the inverting input of Comparator 2 gets discharged. As the input goes down to 1/3VCC, the Comparator 2 output increases. This result reset of the flip-flop in order to keep Q low and output of the timer high and it further proves that the output of auto-transition goes from low to high and vice versa, further continuing the repetition.   Designing a 555 IC astable multivibrator circuit (calculations)   It is vital to note that the charging time of Capacitor C from 1/3VCC to 2/3VCC is equal to the output time when high, which is equated as tc or THIGH = 0.693 (RA + RB). The following section shows the inference: At any point of the charging period of the capacitor’s voltage is signified as VC= VCC(1– et/RC) The charging time of the capacitor from 0 – 1/3 VCC is calculated as: 1/3 VCC = VCC (1-e t/RC ) The charging time of the capacitor from 0 – 2/3 VCC is calculated as: t2 = RC loge3 = 1.0986 RC. Therefore, the time consumed by the capacitor for charging [from +1/3 VCC - +2/3VCC) is: tc = (t2 – t1) = (10986 – 0.405) RC = 0.693 RC Further upon substitution of R = (RA + RB) as in the above mentioned equation we get: THIGH = tc = 0.693 (RA + RB) C [NOTE: RA & RB in ohms, C in farads) The discharging time of capacitors from +2/3 VCC - +1/3 VCC equates to when the output time is low and is shown as: td or TLOW = 0.693 RB C [Note: Here, RB in ohms, C in farads] However, following is the process of the equation: At any point during discharge state, the voltage maintained across the capacitor is signified as: VC = 2/3 VCC e – td/ RBC OR td = 0.693 RBC Oscillation period [overall], T = THIGH + TLOW = 0.693 (RA + 2RB) C. The oscillation frequency as the reciprocal of T is signified as: f = 1/T = 1.44/ (RA + 2RB) C The aforementioned calculation signifies that the oscillation frequency remains independent of + VCC [Supply voltage collector]   NOTE: Duty cycle term is often used together with astable multi-vibrator. The time ratio tc, duty cycle when output in high state in respect to T [Total time period] is stated as:   % duty cycle, D = tc / T * 100 = (RA + RB) / (RA + 2RB) * 100   Based upon the aforementioned equation it has become evident that the output of the square wave [Duty cycle 50%] cannot be achieved until and unless when RA = 0. Furthermore, there is also possible issue to short RA resistance to 0. Keeping RA = 0 ohm, terminal 7 has its direct connection to +VCC followed by repetition of the cycle. When capacitor is discharged from transistor and RB the transistor receives extra current from VCC via a short in between of +VCC and Pin 7. This situation may put risk damaging the timer and the transistor. If there is a need to acquire symmetrical square wave it can be done if a diode can be connected across RB resistor.  Capacitor C get its charge Diode D and RA to +2/3 VCC (approx.) further discharging via the transistor [Terminal 7] and RB [Resistor] till the voltage of the capacitor goes down to 1/3 VCC and further repetition of cycle. In order to avail output in square wave, RA must be combined of a pot and a fixed resistor R. This will help to acquire the correct square wave. While 555 is used extensively these days, it is rather better to use 7555 [a CMOS version of 555]. This actually saves from high current input and noise control.]]> 1674 0 0 0 555 Timer Ramp Generator https://makingcircuits.com/blog/555-timer-ramp-generator/ Sun, 15 May 2016 02:52:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1679   The current charge with the help of PNP is signified as: ic = VCC – VE / RE where VE = R2 / (R1 + R2) *VCC + VBE When a trigger starts the monostable multivbrator as shown in figure, the PNP current source forces a constant charging into the capacitor C. The voltage across the capacitor is, therefore, a ramp as illustrated in the figure. The slope of the ramp is given as When 555 monostable multi-vibrator timer is enabled, the source of current from the PNP pushes to charge constantly to C Capacitor. Therefore, the voltage available in the capacitor is a ramp [as shown in Fig 1.0]. Slope, s = I/C The following image shows the waveform of the slope of the IC 555 ramp generator circuit ramp trigger and waveform                              ]]> 1679 0 0 0 PWM Lamp Dimmer using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/pwm-lamp-dimmer-using-ic-555/ Sun, 15 May 2016 04:14:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1683 Referring to the circuit design it is clear that IC timer NE555, which is the core of the system is wired into the circuit in the form astable multi-vibrator. Here, R1, R2, POT R3 resistors and C1 capacitors are the main components for timing. To adjust the duty cycle of the IC, POT R3 is used. If the duty cycle is higher then the lamp gets brighter or vice versa. When the astable multi-vibrator is on a charging cycle, the D1 Diode avoids the lower section of POT R3. This mechanism is simply to maintain constant output frequency no matter whatever is the condition of the duty cycle. The Q1 and Q2 transistor builds a darlington driver stage for a lamp of 12V. The R4 resistor on the other hand restricts base current of Q1 transistor. Explaining variable duty cycle astable multi-vibrator For ease of understanding, the timing of the astable multi-vibrator is explained in the diagram below [Fig 1.1]: IC 555 PWM control   Referring to the figure, as you see the upper and lower parts of POT R3 is signified as Rx, Ry. Now when the output of the astable multi-vibrator is set to high, the C1 Capacitor then moves through R1, Rx, R2. On the other hand, Ry which signifies the lower part of POT R3 is negligible, since D1 Diode avoids it. When the capacitors voltage is 2/3 Vcc, the upper comparator simply flips the output. This makes internal flip-flop to manage toggling the output. This procedure results lowdown of astable multi-vibrator. To sum up, an astable multi-vibrator remains in high state till the charge available in C1 is equal to 2/3 Vcc. The equation states thus: Ton = 0.67 (R1 + Rx + R2) C1. Now as the internal flip-flop is all set, the capacitor then discharges via R2, Ry, straight to the discharge pin. When C1 capacitor’s voltage is 1/3 Vcc, the lower comparator again flips the output, which evidently enables the internal flip-flop manage toggle its output. This, according to the equation would be: Toff = 0.67 (R2 + Ry) C1. Following is a diagram of NE555 to enable better explanation of the system: IC 555 internal diagram Constant Frequency irrespective of the situation of POT3   The total resistance always remains same no matter where POT3 knob is placed. If there is a decrease in Rx (upper-side) then Ry also gets increased with the same amount. The similar situation is applicable to Ton and Toff. Following is a calculation to make it easier [as per Figure 1.2]: Ton = 0.67(R1+Rx+R2)C1 Toff= 0.67(R2+Ry)C1 Output of the waveform “T”, total time: T = Ton + Toff So, T = 0.67(R1+Rx+R2+R2+Ry)C1 T= 0.67(R1+2R2+Rx+Ry)C1   While Rx + Ry = R3 So, T = 0.67(R1+2R2+R3)C1 And Frequency F = 1/(0.67(R1+2R2+R3)C1   It has become therefore imperative that frequency is only dependent on C1, R1 and R2 and moreover R3. There is connection on the knob position.  ]]> 1683 0 0 0 Voltage Double Circuit using NE555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/voltage-double-circuit-using-ne555/ Sun, 15 May 2016 04:27:22 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1689 ]]> 1689 0 0 0 Inverter Circuit Using IC SG3524 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/inverter-circuit-using-ic-sg3524/ Mon, 16 May 2016 11:02:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1696 The circuit uses 12V battery. First with a voltage module times the pressure of the op amp power supply. You can select, IC sg3524,  ICL7660 or MAX1044. Amplifier 1 generates 50Hz sine wave as a reference signal. Operational amplifier 2 as an inverter. 3 op amp and the op amp as a comparator with hysteresis 4. In fact, the op amp 3 and switch 1 is the ratio of the switching power supply configuration. 4 op amps and switch 2 also. Its switching frequency instability. In the op-amp output signal is positive phase, the operational amplifier 3 and switch work. 2 then the op amp output is negative phase. Then the positive input of operational amplifier 4 potential (fixed to 0) than the negative input potential is high, so the output of the operational amplifier 4 fixed to 1, the switch is turned off. In the op-amp output is 1 when the negative phase, and vice versa. This enables the two switches alternately work. When the reference signal ratio detection signal, that is, the op amp negative input 3 or 4 signal is high a small value than the positive input signal, the comparator output is 0, the switch to open, followed by the detection signal is rapidly increasing, when the detection signal a small high value than the reference signal, the comparator output 1, switch off. Here we should note that, in the comparator circuit has a flip positive feedback process, which is characteristic of the hysteresis comparator. For example, in the reference signal is lower than the detection signal of the premise, as they continue to close the difference, at the moment they are equal, and the reference signal immediately detected signal higher than a certain value. This "certain value" influence the switching frequency. The lower the frequency the greater it. Here it is selected 0.1 ~ 0.2V. C3, C4's role is to make a high frequency current through the freewheeling switch, while the lower frequency of 50Hz signal generating large impedance. C5 by the formula: = 50 is calculated. L generally 70H, measured at the production of the best. Thus C is about 0.15μ. The ratio of R3 and R4 must be strictly equal to 0.5, a large waveform distortion obviously, not a small start-up, but rather a number of large, non-small. Maximum switch current is: I == 25A. Existing inverters have square wave output sine wave output and two kinds. High efficiency of the inverter square wave output, designed for the use of sine wave power for appliances, except for a few outside the majority of electrical appliances NA can be applied, the output sine wave inverter is no disadvantage in this regard, but there low efficiency, how to choose according to their needs which requires the. This article describes simple inverter using SG3524 IC, and the concrete circuit diagram and principle analysis. We are in a "mobile" era, mobile office, mobile communications, mobile leisure and entertainment. In the mobile state, people not only need low-voltage direct current from the battery or battery supply, but we need more indispensable in everyday environments 220 volts AC inverter that meet our needs.]]> 1696 0 0 0 400 0 43 401 400 1 462 0 0 465 462 1 477 0 0 479 477 1 557 0 0 560 557 1 592 0 0 593 https://makingcircuits.com/ 592 1 Simple Inverter Circuit using 4 Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-inverter-circuit-using-4-transistors/ Mon, 16 May 2016 11:18:46 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1699  ]]> 1699 0 0 0 IC 555 Inverter Circuit with Triacs https://makingcircuits.com/blog/ic-555-inverter-circuit-triacs/ Mon, 16 May 2016 11:55:13 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1704 IC1 is IC555 V1, V2 = 2n2907 all diodes are 1N4007 R3, R4 = 27K C3, C4 = 470nF IC2 = 7806 IC VT1 = 8amp/400V triacs transformer= 30-0-30V/10amp battery = 36V/25AH wattage output = 300 watt]]> 1704 0 0 0 Simple 12V to 220V Inverter Circuit for Newcomers https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-12v-220v-inverter-circuit-for-newcomers/ Thu, 26 May 2016 07:43:57 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1709 Even though you are able to develop a stronger circuit, the sophiisticatedness because of the very large currents to be managed on the low-voltage part causes circuits that could be unsuitable in this summer situation. We need to remember, for instance, that for a stingy 1 amp at 230 VAC, the battery primary section would need to deal with greater than 20 ADC!. The circuit diagram of 12V to 220V Inverter Schematics in our venture is not hard to go by. A classic 555 timer chip, recognized as IC1, is put together as an astable multivibrator with a frequency in close proximity to 100 Hz, which may be modified precisely through potentiometer P1. Given that the mark/space ratio (duty factor) of the 555 output can be a good way from becoming 1:1 (50%), it is employed to drive a D-type flip-flop generated by using a CMOS type 4013 IC. This makes excellent contributory square-wave signals (i.e. in antiphase) upon its Q and Q outputs well suited for operating the output power transistors. Because the output 12V to 220V Inverter current obtainable from the CMOS 4013 is rather little, Darlington power transistors utilized to get to the specified output current. We have decided on MJ3001s from your currently defunct Motorola (only as a semi-conductor maker, needless to say!) which can be low-cost and easily obtainable, nevertheless any kind of similar power Darlington could possibly be applied. These push a 230 V to 2 × 9 V center-tapped transformer put to use ‘backwards’ to generate the 230 V output. The existence of the 230 VAC voltage is actually displayed with a neon light, although a VDR (voltage dependent resistor) type S10K250 or S07K250 trims off the surges and spikes which could turn up with the transistor transitioning points. The output signal this particular circuit generates is around a square wave; just roughly, mainly because it is to some degree deformed by entering the transformer. Thankfully, it truly is ideal for virtually all electrical gadgets it is effective at delivering, whether or not they be lights, little motors, or power products for electronics. COMPONENTS LIST Resistors R1 = 18k? R2 = 3k3 R3 = 1k R4,R5 = 1k?5 R6 = VDR S10K250 (or S07K250) P1 = 100 k potentiometer Capacitors C1 = 330nF C2 = 1000 µF 25V Semiconductor T1,T2 = MJ3001 IC1 = 555 IC2 = 4013 Miscellaneous LA1 = neon light 230 V F1 = fuse, 5A TR1 = mains transformer, 2x9V 40VA (see text) 4 solder pins Remember that, although the simple 12V to 220V inverter circuit is supposed and intended for powering with a car battery, i.e. from 12 V, the transformer is actually given that has a 9 V primary. However at 100 % power you should support a voltage decrease of around 3 V between collector and emitter of the power transistors. This fairly large saturation voltage is actually a disadvantage popular among most devices in Darlington configuration, which usually basically includes two transistors in a single package. We’re recommending a PCB design and style to help to make it straightforward to build this particular assignment; since the part overlay exhibits, the PCB simply holds the low-power, low-voltage parts. The Darlington transistors ought to be installed onto a finned anodized light weight aluminum heat-sink making use of the regular insulation add-ons of mica washers and shouldered washers, because their collectors tend to be attached to the metal cans and might in any other case be short-circuited. An output strength of 30 VA signifies a current usage of the order of 3 A through the 12 V battery at the ‘primary side’. Therefore the cables hooking up the collectors of the MJ3001s [1] T1 and T2 to the transformer primary, the emitters of T1 and T2 towards the battery negative port, and also the battery positive port to the transformer primary have to have the minimum cross-sectional area of 2 mm2 in order to decrease voltage drop. The transformer could be any 230 V to 2 × 9 V form, having an E/I iron core or toroidal, graded at close to 40 VA. Effectively built on the board demonstrated in this article, the circuit must do the job immediately, the exclusively adjusting being to set the output to a frequency of 50 Hz using P1. You must remember that the frequency solidity of the 555 is rather inferior by modern day requirements, which means you should never depend on it to drive your radio-alarm effectively - however is certainly a tool very helpful or without a doubt appealing to possess on vacation in any case? Look out as well for the undeniable fact that the output voltage of this inverter is equally as hazardous as the mains through your household energy electrical sockets. Therefore you have to utilize likewise basic safety guidelines! Additionally, the task must be encapsulated in a sturdy ABS or diecast so absolutely no elements could be confronted during procedure. The circuit really should not be too hard to adjust to other mains voltages or frequencies, for instance 110 V, 115 V or 127 V, 60 Hz. The AC voltage needs a transformer using a diverse primary voltage (which will in this article results in being the secondary), and also the frequency, some adapting of P1 and perhaps minimal adjustments to the values of timing elements R1 and C1 on the 555.]]> 1709 0 0 0 Li-Ion Solar Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/li-ion-battery-solar-charger-circuit/ Sat, 04 Jun 2016 08:10:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1713 Loking at the above simple solar charger circuit using transistors, the automated cut off for the over charge level and the under level is performed by using a few BJTs put together as comparators. Remember the earlier low battery indicator circuit employing transistors, in which the lower battery level was portrayed implementing merely a couple of transistors and some additional passive elements. In this article we hire equivalent design for the detection of the battery levels as well as for reinforcing the specified switching of the battery over the solar panel and the attached load. Let's believe in the beginning we own a moderately discharged battery that causes the 1st BC547 from left to end conduction (it is fixed through adapting the base preset to this particular limit), and makes it possible for the subsequent BC547 to perform. The moment this BC547 acts it help the TIP127 to switch ON, which makes it possible for the solar panel voltage to arrive at the battery and start charging it. The above mentioned circumstance alternatively helps to keep the TIP122 powered down in order that the load cannot function. As the battery starts out acquiring charge, the voltage throughout the supply track likewise start off increasing right up until a degree in which the left side BC547 is simply in a position to run, evoking the right side BC547 to quit performing any more. The instant this takes place, the TIP127 is blocked from the negative base signals and yes it steadily ceases conducting in a way that the battery little by little becomes cut-off from the solar panel voltage. Nonetheless, the above mentioned condition makes it possible for the TIP122 to bit by bit obtain a base biasing trigger and it starts out conducting....that helps to ensure that the load now is capable of getting the specified supply for its procedures. The above discussed Li-ion Battery solar charger circuit using transistors along with auto cut-offs works extremely well for almost any small range solar controller programs for instance for charging cellphone battery packs or other styles of Li-ion battery packs correctly. For getting a Controlled Charging Supply The style may be simply revised for empowering a regulated fixed voltage supply for the battery, as proven beneath:   solar (1)]]> 1713 0 0 0 Ultrasonic Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/ultrasonic-alarm-circuit/ Sat, 18 Jun 2016 16:49:28 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1720 The figure above demonstrates an easy IC 741 centered ultrasonic sound detector security alarm circuit. The detecting gadget implemented below is a normal electret condenser mic. The mic input is provided to the inverting input of the IC pin#2. Pin#3 of the IC is effectively clamped to a aptly chosen reference voltage with regards to the pin#2 of the IC. A feed back connection may also be viewed by means of the 1M preset throughout the output along with the inverting input of the IC. This feed-back hook up causes the IC function like a remarkably sensitive inverting amplifier. The MIC is consequently determined to identify ultrasonic pulses that could be organically emanated from any appropriate supply for example when an electronic instrument similar to a TV, DVD player etc is switched ON, or a mobile call in the neighbourhood is perceived. An automobile ignition might also cause the circuit activate with an alarm sound. The detection gain or level of responsiveness range of the ultrasonic alarm circuit could be fixed by modifying the laid out 1M preset. The minute a high frequency audio in the ultrasound spectrum is detected by the mic, contributes to a high logic pulse to yield at pin#6 of the IC that could be effectively dimensioned, and purified by the output architecture containing the sequence 470nF coupling capacitor along with the relevant diode, resistor, capacitor filter layout. The high logic works extremely well as an input to a MCU circuit alternatively for operating a relay driver stage.]]> 1720 0 0 0 Simple Electronic Siren Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/electronic-siren-circuit/ Sat, 09 Jul 2016 06:02:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1727 Electronic Siren Circuit Diagram Here lists below the components that you need to design the project: Resistors Capacitors Semiconductors Others R1 = 150 KΩ C1 = 0.015 µF IC1 = CD4011 LS1 = 8Ω speaker R2 = 500 KΩ C2 = 0.22 µF T1 = BEL187 C3 = 0.5 µF D1 = 1N4148 C4 = 10 pF D2 = 1N4001 NOTE: All resistors should be ¼ watt and ± 5% Carbon.]]> 1727 0 0 0 Fridge Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/fridge-alarm-circuit/ Sat, 09 Jul 2016 06:16:30 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1730 Circuit diagram of fridge alarm system As per the above diagram, TH1 thermistor is deployed as the temperature sensor. The resistance of the thermistor changes with the surrounding temperature. Furthermore, CL7611 IC1is added with the thermistor to develop the entire process of the system. To indicate battery status, we have used IC2. The LED1 used in the circuit will glow once the temperature goes above 5C. However, following are the parts that are needed to develop the system: Resistors Semiconductors Others R1, R2 = 4.7 MΩ IC1 = CL7611 Push-to-on switch = SW1 R3 = 2.2 MΩ IC2 = 8211 GL16 thermistor= TH1 R4 = 56 KΩ T1 = 2TX300 R5 = 12 KΩ LED1 = RED R6 = 10 KΩ LED2 = Green R7 = 270 Ω R8 = 390 Ω Designing an alarm circuit to control temperature of a refrigerator is not a complex procedure. The parts listed in the document are easily available in the market. Following this design will surely ease building up the the system.]]> 1730 0 0 0 Sound Operated Music Bell https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sound-operated-music-bell/ Sat, 09 Jul 2016 06:24:43 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1733 Above shown is the Circuit Diagram of sound operated music bell Referring to the circuit, the external relay has not been used. The circuit constitutes a timer stage [NE555], melody stage of around SL100 and UM66, and trigger stage of around NE555. The transistor used in this circuit BC548B is in biased state on Class C operation. The sound generating every second impacts on Pin 2 IC timer 555. With VR1at its max state, approx., 30 seconds is the hold-on time on NE555. However, as per the requirement we need to set the value lower by VR1and the same is done as per the calculation: T = 1.1*VR1*C1 Here it is important to note that the resistance of the preset in the circuit is VR1. IC UM66 has 64 notes of ROM which produces in series and further with the sound of clap. This leads to the trigger of the timer. The output of IC NE555 at Pin 3 is therefore used via IN4001 diode and further to the Pin 2 of IC UM66. As S UM66 starts receiving supply, it generates electrical fluctuation of music at the base of SL100. The music generated is then heard from the attached 4-ohm speaker. Following are the list of equipment that you need to build this simple and effective solution: Resistors Capacitors Semiconductors Others R1 = 10 KΩ C1 = 22 µF/16V IC1 = NE555 MIC1 = 34 LOD condensers microphone R2 = 470 KΩ C2 = 0.1 µF IC2 = UM66 SW1 = On/Off switch R3 = 2.2 KΩ C3 = 0.22 µF T1 = BC548B R4 = 150 KΩ C4 = 220 µF/10V T2 = SL100 R5 = 100 Ω C5 = 0.01 µF D1 = 1N4001 VR1 = 1 MΩ NOTE: All resistors should be ¼ watt and ± 5% Carbon.]]> 1733 0 0 0 Simple Touch Switch Circuit using IC 4017 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-touch-switch-circuit-using-ic-4017/ Tue, 12 Jul 2016 14:42:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1741 The IC fundamentally incorporates ten outputs, originating in its pin#3 and randomly finishing off at pin#11, constituting 10 outputs which are usually intended to develop a sequencing or switching high logics across all of these output pins based on every positive signal implemented at its pin#14. The sequencing would not really need to accomplish at the last pin#11, instead may very well be allotted pull up at any preferred in between pinout, and then go back to the first pin#3 to begin the sequence afresh. This is simply carried out by hooking up the last sequence pinout with the reset pin#15 of the IC. That makes certain that at any time the progression gets to this pinout, the sequence quits at this point and reverts to pin#3 which happens to be the first pinout for making it possible for a recurring cycling of the phase in an exact order. As an illustration in our model pin#4 which is the 3rd pinout in the range can be viewed linked with pin#15 of the IC, means that while the progression leaps from pin#3 to the subsequent pin#2, thereafter to pin#4 it promptly reverts or flips returning to pin#3 to make it possible for the sequence yet again. This cycling is brought on by touching the mentioned touch plate which in turn causes a positive signal to emerge at pin#14 of the IC whenever it's touched. Let's anticipate at power launch the high logic is at pin#3, this pin is not associated anywhere as well as being empty, whilst pin#2 can be found associated with the relay driver stage, consequently at this point the relay continues turned OFF. The minute the touch plate is tapped, the positive voltage at pin#14 of the IC toggles the output progression which at this point leaps from pin#3 to pin#2 making it possible for the relay to activate. The situation is retained stationary at this stage, with the relay in the turned on situation as well as the plugged in load initialized. But the instant the touch plate is handled just as before, the cycle is compelled to bounce from pin#2 to pin#4, which stimulates the IC to go back the logic returning to pin#3, stopping of the relay along with the load and helping the IC going back to its standby mode situation.]]> 1741 0 0 0 Simple Home Automation System Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/dtmf-controlled-home-automation-system-circuit/ Thu, 14 Jul 2016 15:20:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1744 Designing the Circuit An operational amplifier comes integrated with the IC decoder. The op-amp which generates output goes to the pre-filters in order to separate high and low frequencies. The output us further goes via frequency and code generation circuits, which enables 4-bits binary code. The tone generated from the mobile phone is passed to op-amp via a series of 100 kilo-Ohm resistor and Capacitor 1nf. In the DTMF IC, the Pin 1, which is an inverted pin is connected to Pin 4. This implies that the Pin 3 Vref is the operational amplifier’s output with further feedback to Pin 2 by the resistors. The crystal oscillator is connected to Pin 7 and Pin 8 on a frequency of 3.579545 MHz. The Pin 15 is th data valid pin usually remains low, but goes high upon detection of a DTMF tone. From detection of frequency to digitally convert the data, this entire process is managed steering circuit, which consists of RT/GT, EST, Capacitor and 10K Resistors. Pin 11 and Pin 14 helps to produce the output. These two pins are also connected to PBo – PB3 of the controller. PDo and PD1– the output pins of the controller are connected to relay, and the relay output is further connected the main source i.e. the appliances. It is vital to note that relay essentially works as a switch, which generates isolation from different circuit parts. However, in this project the relay used is the magnetic relay to enable AC load of 5 Volts, which is the maximum voltage derived from a controller. Operating the Circuit The controller constantly checks for the input after the circuit receives the power. Now if we press 1 on the mobile keypad, the IC decoder decodes the tone to output the value 0001. The decoded output is further passed to a microcontroller generating higher output at Pin PDo, which is connected to relay. As the relay used here is to switch the circuit, the appliance will then turn ON. And if the input received by the relay is 2, the appliance that you are trying to turn ON will go OFF. Similar idea goes with pressing other values in the mobile keypad. Requirements Following are the components that you need to design the circuit: 1. Microcontroller U1 – Atmega8 2. IC HT9107B 3. AC load 4. Relay 5. C1, C2, C3, C4 Capacitors 6. Relay 7. X1 Crystal Oscillator The popularity of DTMF is getting prominent day by day, but is somehow limited because of the limitations of a mobile, which can only generate 16 tones. Furthermore, security is also another concern as anybody can operate an appliance simply by calling the mobile connecting to the system. Looking at the benefits, you can control your appliances from anywhere. The setup cost is low and it also helps low consumption of electricity.]]> 1744 0 0 0 Boost Converter Circuit for Solar Cells https://makingcircuits.com/blog/boost-converter-circuit-solar-cells/ Wed, 20 Jul 2016 01:54:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1747 The IC used is 4069[/caption]   The 10Khz oscillator as well as control circuit accomplish energy from the battery which is being charged which need to be grater than 4 volts. The output stage (mosfet and inductor) achieve electrical power through the solar panel array and deliver a recharging current by means of the schotty diode (VSK 330). Productivity is enhanced using a 220uF capacitors put in between the input and output. A zener diode rated at 12V along with a 120 ohm resistor were included with safeguard the design from disproportionate voltage just in case the battery is turned off in the course of functioning. Supplementary safety is acquired with the TL431 voltage reference diode which restricts the output voltage to 18 volts. In the event that the output goes beyond 18 volts, the cathode of the TL431 collapses, quitting the oscillator to the point where the output drops below 16 volts. While functioning, the PWM of the oscillating waveform was fine-tuned with the 100K pot for achieving optimum current for the connected battery. This tuning is usually done by tracking the voltage across the 1.5 ohm resistor leads and fine-tuning for highest voltage. This would be the optium adjustment wherein efficiency is strongest and highest possible electrical power is recovered from the solar panel array. Control is not applied as a result the most effective positioning might require realignment as circumstances vary, illumination conditions, climate, battery voltage, etc. A bit of deterioration arises in the 1.5 ohm resistor, possibly 5% which can be minimized with a realistic value resistor, or a milliamp digital meter with minimal resistance. The majority of components used in this boost converter circuit for solar cells are relatively regular apart from perhaps the 5mH inductor. I accustomed a ferrite torroid core picked up from a trash bag PC switching PS. The main core determines 1.5 inch outside diameter by 5/8 thicker. The winding were eliminated and restored with 26 turns of the similar 18 gauge wire. The resistance determines 24 milliohms. The inductor number is pretty resilient which enables be nearly all everything from 1mH or bigger in case the resistance was small while the core is unable to saturate for the peak current. More substantial inductors could have decreased maximum currents nevertheless bigger resistance for the matching size.]]> 1747 0 0 0 Screaming Alarm Circuit using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/screaming-alarm-circuit-using-ic-555/ Fri, 22 Jul 2016 03:05:01 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1755 How it works? Screaming light entirely depends upon the strength of light. The more strong the light to the circuit, the sound increases. As the light generates an impulse into the circuit, therefore when the light is high it will produce more sound. IC 555 timer is the mother in this type of circuit design as it helps to generate oscillation depending upon the amount of light received by light dependent resistors. The following diagram Figure 1.0 illustrates the circuit design: screaming alarm circuit The principal IC 555 timer used in this circuit generate oscillation that is necessary to run the system. As the timer can be applied on three different mode: Monostable, Astable and Bistable, here we have used astable form to avoid any external triggers. The Pin 4th pin in the circuit is connected to 8th pin on 5V voltage supply. The 3rd pin via C1 capacitor is connected to the speaker and the 2nd pin of IC is attached to the 6th pin. Following the astable pattern, here Pin 2 which is connected to Pin 6 enable trigger the circuit in continuous fashion. As the VCC is supplied with voltage of 5V this initiates charging C2 capacitor via LDR and R1 resistors. When the capacitor attain 2/3rd of VCC, Pin 3 gets triggered and further discharges  via R1, thereby generating the pulse. Again when the capacitor reaches 1/3rd of VCC, it initiates charging. Besides the timer, the light dependent resistor is another crucial component. By principle a light dependent resistor shows high resistance on no light, the resistance gets reduced once it starts receving light. Here we also used 2 mega ohm photo resistors, and the two LDR resistors along with 1K ohm resistor maintains serial connectivity. They are further connected to C2 capacitor [100nf].  The two pins on 6th and 2nd are shorted, and is connected to C2 capacitor. The another part of the capacitor has its ground connection. The speaker is also another important material to design the circuit as it helps to transfer the signal from electric to physical state, by acting as a transducer.  As the speaker has two type of magnets - permanent and moving, they helps to convert the electrical signals into vibrations, which gets generated by the IC 555 timer. In this project we have used one speaker of 8ohms which is connected to the output of Pin 3 of the 555 IC via C1 electrolytic capacitor. The positive section of the capacitor's terminal is connected to Pin 3 of the IC while the negative is connected to the speakers positive node, and grounded. What you need? Following is a list of component that you need to procure to make this LDR operated screaming alarm circuit:
  1. IC 555 timer
  2. speaker
  3. DC battery
  4. Light dependent resistor
  5. Breadboard
  6. Wires for connection
  7. R1 resistor
  8. Capacitors – C1, C2
  Operating the Circuit To operate the screaming alarm circuit connect the circuit to the breadboard and apply power of 5V. Keep the LDR on dark zone and this will fail to produce output. Now place the LDR in light, and you can then hear the sound. Apply more light, the sound will go high.]]> 1755 0 0 0 Carbon Gauge Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/carbon-gauge-circuit/ Fri, 22 Jul 2016 03:10:44 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1758   Refer Figure 1.0, the pin 2 of IC1 has a negative connection interfaced via 1M-ohm pot. In this circuit the peripheral device is the screen, made from pieces of copper foil or using four aluminum is connected in the set of two – A and B. They are further fitted on lamination sheet or plastic and the required measurement should follow a size as mentioned in the diagram. Another option is build it as a PCB by applying etching. Set A and B are connected to Terminal X and Y of the circuit. Carbon Measurement Maintain a fixed distance and place the metal part of the foil in the screen over the outlet of the silencer. Keep it in the position for at least three minutes and remove. Enable maximum resistance position of the VR1 and initiate the circuit. This will enable the carbon particles spread over the foil to behave like a resistor in between X and Y. Now apply rotation slowly to VR1 towards A where the resistance position is minimum. When the circuit reaches the critical position and IC reaches its optimum point LED1 will light up.]]> 1758 0 0 0 Voltage Stepper Circuit or Voltage Booster Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/voltage-stepper-circuit-or-voltage-booster-circuit/ Fri, 22 Jul 2016 03:24:04 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1761 Referring to the figure, the IC555 is deployed to work as an astable multivibrator, which will generate rectangular pulse on the frequency of around 10kHz. The output of the IC555 is used to gear the transistor T1 and T2. As the type of T2 is PNP, ensure to conduct when the base remain negative, in other words, when the IC's output is low. This will further charge capacitor C4 through D1 diode and T2 is grounded. On another situation when the output of the IC is in high state, T2 closes while T1 runs. Also during this state, C4 fail to discharge for the diode D1. In this way voltage in C4 and input voltage gets added and enable charge of C5 capacitor via diode D2. Furthermore, the available voltage in capacitor C5 equals to the pulse voltage of VCC over C4 and D1. Aforesaid is the actual process of the operation. However, to build the system there is few consideration shared for understanding. On a situation when the current is more than 50mA, the regulation gets lost. But on DC voltage, if the current range between 5V – 18V, boosting is possible. Also to derive proper result it is ideal to increase value of C4 and C5 capacitors to 47 µF/40V. Following are the parts that you need to build the voltage stepper circuit:
Resistors
R1 240 Ω
R2 5.1 KΩ
R3 56Ω
Capacitors
C1, C2  103 ceramic
C3 104 ceramic
C4, C5 33 µF/40v electrolytic
Semiconductors
IC1 NE555 or any similar
T1 2N2222
T2 2N2907
D1, D2 IN4007
 ]]> 1761 0 0 0 Simple Smoke Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-smoke-detector-circuit/ Fri, 22 Jul 2016 03:35:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1765 Smoke Detection Logic Before we start let us give some few insights on the smoke detector system. Smoke detectors are mainly of two different type: Ionization smoke detectors and Photoelectric or Optical smoke detectors. The photoelectric detectors have a light source and a photocell like light detector. The photocell works as with the falling of light into the system. During smoke the light coming from the photocell gets blocked, which helps to generate the signal. On the other the ionization detectors are made of two electrodes and an ionization body with ions into it. On a no-smoke situation, these ions roam freely and the electrodes lie in the normal state. When there is smoke these ions are unable to move freely and the electrodes cease to work. Though the conductivity may change depends upon the manufacturer of the alarm system, but theoretically the process has no difference. Therefore, the alarm system can be developed upon measuring the output of the smoke detector. To build the proposed system, we have used Smoke / Gas Sensor MQ-2. The device is highly sensible to methane, propane, butane hydrogen, LPG and other combustible gases. The system also has two electrodes. They are made of Aluminum Oxide and a heating system made of Tin Oxide. The following diagram in Figure 1.0 is the circuit diagram of our project: smoke alarm circuit   How it works?  Building a smoke detector is cheap, yet very much effective. To develop the system, we have used LM358 comparator is used beside the MQ-2 smoke sensor. Here the LM358’s inverted terminal is interfaced with POT to so as to adjust the sensitivity of the circuit. The output generated by LM358 uses a LED as an indicator. As an alternative for the alarm you can also use a buzzer. Further, the non-inverted terminal of LM358 is interfaced with the smoke sensor’s output. During clean air, the conductivity between the electrodes remain less because of the resistance order working on 50KW. Here the value of the input of the inverting terminal remain higher than the input of the non-inverted terminal, which keeps the LED in OFF state. When there is heavy smoke because of fire, the sensor gets filled with the smoke and the sensors resistance drops to 5KW, which increases the conductivity between the electrodes. This process enables high input of the comparator’s non-inverted terminal resulting to high output. With this situation the LED turns ON and the fire alarm starts ringing. Building the smoke detector circuit is simple, however, please ensure to preheat the heating element of the smoke sensor to sense smoke or gas. Also as a word of caution, do not touch the sensor when its ON because in this state the sensor gets very hot because of the heating coil. To control the sensitivity of different level of smoke, you can adjust it with POT.Furthermore, you can also use buzzer instead of LED to generate smoke alarm.]]> 1765 0 0 0 6v DC 20 watt Florescent Lamp Driver Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/6v-dc-20-watt-florescent-lamp-driver-circuit/ Mon, 01 Aug 2016 03:31:25 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1771 PART LIST = R1 = 15K Ohm / 0.5W R2 = 22K Ohm / 0.5W C1 = 100uF / 16V C2 = 0.0047uF / 4n7F / 4.7KpF T1 = 2N2907/ any 500mW PnP General Purpose Transistor T2 = TIP3055 / or any TO220 3A NpN Switch Mode Transistor Tr1 = Ferit Core Transformer. 15w 0.8mm magnet wire Primary winding and 300w 0.5mm magnet wire Secondary winding (rewinding from cpu psu transformer ! ). S1 = Switch Bat = 6V 4AH cell gel batery Basicaly this 6v DC 20 watt Florescent Lamp Driver Circuit is a self-oscillating on ~ 25-35 KHz. with R2 and C2 as frequency dependen parts. Here photo unit I've built :   6V CFL and one more image of the unit energizing a 15 watts cfl lamp portion only. Observe how brilliant the cfl light possess using just 6V battery cell gel ! :   6V CFL With around 100mA usage this particular device can function for approximately several hours before the battery may decrease it voltage to ~ Three volts. WARNING = THIS DEVICE CAN EASILY DEVELOP SUBSTANTIAL VOLTAGES WITHIN THE SECONDARY WINDING OF THE TRANSFORMER ! NEVER EVER TOUCH WHILE THE BATTERY IS ATTACHED WITH THE DEVICE ! WORK WITH EXTREME CAUTION !]]> 1771 0 0 0 Wireless Cellphone Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/wireless-cellphone-battery-charger-circuit/ Tue, 09 Aug 2016 03:04:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1778 How it works? Before we delve onto the building of the the wireless cellphone wireless charger circuit, let us first try to see the principle behind the operation of the circuit. A wireless mobile battery charger circuit is based on the theory of mutual inductance. Based upon the theory of inductive coupling the power gets transferred to the receives on a wireless form. Inductance comes in two different type: Mutual InductanceandSelf Inductance. In mutual inductance the conductor that carries the current is strategically positioned near to another conductor so as to pass the voltage to other conductor, and this is possible simply because of the presence of induced magnetic flux. The magnetic flux induced is further connected to another conductor, and the flux helps to induce the voltage to the second conductor. This principle of connecting conductors and induce of voltage among them is referred as inductively coupled. Building the Circuit The following images illustrates the circuit design of the proposed circuit: Transmitter Circuit R1 = 1K R2, R4 = 10K R3, R5 = 100 D2, D3 = 1N4148 C1---C8 = 6.8nF MOSFETS = IRF540 wireless charger transmitter circuit Receiver Circuit wireless charger receiver circuit As per diagram, there are two circuits that are used to develop the wireless battery charger. The first one is the transmitter circuit and is used to generate voltage on wireless fashion. This circuit has oscillator circuit, transmitter coil and DC power source. The oscillator circuit has two n channel MOSFETS – 4148 diodes and IRF 540. As the DC power flows to the oscillator, the current flows via the coils L1 and L2, and further drains the transistor’s terminal. Also at the same moment the voltage is found also in the transistors gate terminal. It is important to note that one transistor lies in OFF state while the other remain ON. Therefore, as the voltage releases from the OFF state transistor gets raised up, it further falls via the tank circuit, which is made of 0.674 transmitter coil and capacitors 6.8nf. One way to measure the operating frequency is by applying a formula - F=1/[2π√(LC)] The second circuit, which acts as a receiving circuit is made of rectifier circuit, regulator and receiver coil. Now, when placing the receiving circuit near to the inductor, the AC power gets inducted, and is further set by the rectifier circuit, regulating on 5V DC with the help of the 7805 regulator. The rectifier circuit has 6.8nf capacitor and diode 1n4007. The regulator’s output has its connection to the battery. Operating the system In order to operate the wireless cellphone charger circuit, you first need to build the circuit as shown in Figure 1.0, and then turn on the power supply. Next you need to connect the battery charger at the circuit’s output point. Position the receiver coil near to the transmitter coil, and this will initiate charging the battery. Wireless mobile charger is very useful as you can now have the luxury to charge the phone from anywhere. You can also charge camera batteries and Bluetooth headset. A little bit of modification into the proposed system, you can apply it to charge car battery. However, on the flip side power gets wasted to certain degree because of the mutual induction, and the design is meant only to cover a short distance. If you plan to cover a long distance you need to increase the inductor.]]> 1778 0 0 0 485 0 0 486 485 1 Automatic Light Circuit for Washroom   https://makingcircuits.com/blog/develop-automatic-light-switch-for-washroom/ Tue, 09 Aug 2016 03:57:27 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1782 How it works The operational procedure of this effective device is simple. When one steps into the washroom, the system automatically detects the presence and turns the light on. As soon as the person leaves the washroom, the system again detects the absence and turns the light off. How to build the proposed automatic light circuit for washroom? The following diagram in Figure details the way the circuit is built: washroom The primary component that you need to develop the system is the reed switch. This switch comes in two type, and we will use the one that shuts-off in normal state and turns on with the effect of magnetic field. 9V power supply is applied to the circuit – Pin-16 of 4017 IC has 9V and Pin-8 is left on ground state. As a comparator, the circuit uses op-amp IC 741 and is defined in such a way to maintain high output state when the washroom door remains closed. The automatic washroom light circuit is further strategically placed onto the door so that it can come close to the reed switch when the door closes. Furthermore, the IC 4017 is deployed in a way to act on both instance – door open or close. So, the next time when the washroom door is opened and closed, the circuit cuts the relay making the light to extinguish. While IC 4017 is designed to handle nine counts, here we have applied only two counts and then reset. Because of the IC’s capacity to manage count value, here we have used it as one-bit counter. As the washroom door opens, the reed switch initiates and the output of the IC 741’s sixth pin goes high, and as the door closes Pin-6 goes off. Again when the washroom door is closed, this enable triggering of the decade counter of IC 4017, and thus the relay helps toggling the system in ON and OFF state every time the door is opened or closed.   Improved Corrected Version of the above described automatic washroom light circuit As you may note that the above explained design is full of flaws, it was taken from another site and it seems that the designer of the circuit has no knowledge of electronics. First of all a IC 741 is not required for the reed switch operation in response to the door closing or opening. Secondly, the relay should not be connected directly to 4017 output, must be done through a transistor driver. Third, the output from IC 4017 must be taken from pin#2, and not from pin#3. Fourth, pin#15 must be configured with a resistor/capacitor network as shown in the below corrected version: washroom light]]> 1782 0 0 0 575 0 0 576 575 1 583 0 0 585 583 1 597 0 0 601 https://makingcircuits.com/ 597 1 How to Test a SCR https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-test-a-scr/ Wed, 10 Aug 2016 09:00:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1789 Simple SCR testing circuit Referring to the diagram below initializing the shown normally-open “on” push to ON button connects the gate to the anode, enabling current coming from the negative lead of the battery, by means of the cathode-gate PN junction, via the switch, by way of the load resistor, and returning to the battery. This specific gate current must compel the SCR to latch on, permitting current to move straight through cathode to anode without additionally activating via the gate. While the “on” pushbutton is removed, the load needs to continue to be switched ON. how to test SCR Pressing the normally-closed “off” push-button switch switches OFF the circuit, driving current via the SCR to end, consequently purging it to deactivate (low-current dropout). When the SCR is unable to latch, the issue could be with the connected load rather than the SCR. Some nominal level of load current needs to maintain the SCR latched in the “on” condition. This lowest possible current quantity is named the holding current. A load with exceedingly high a resistance usually will not get adequate current to maintain an SCR latched while gate current ends, as a result delivering the erroneous appearance of a poor (unlatchable) SCR in the evaluation circuit. Retaining current values for various SCRs ought to be provided by the manufacturing companies. Average retaining current magnitudes range between 1 milliamp to 50 milliamps or even more for more substantial models. For the evaluation to be completely exhaustive, above the activating action is required to be examined. The forward breakover voltage constraint of the SCR could possibly be analyzed by maximizing the DC voltage supply (without having pushbuttons actuated) until the SCR latches pretty much all by itself. Be careful that a breakover check might need greatly increased voltage: numerous power SCRs possess break down voltage ratings of 600 volts or higher! Additionally, in case a pulse voltage generator can be obtained, the crucial rate of voltage surge for the SCR could possibly be examined in the same manner: confront it to oscillating supply voltages of unusual V/time rates without pushbutton buttons actuated and observe where it latches. In this particular straightforward structure, the SCR test circuit could possibly be sufficient as a start/stop control circuit for a DC motor, lamp, or other functional load: (Figure below) DC Motor start and stop controller circuit using an SCR scr motor control circuit A different functional SCR test circuit implementation for the SCR in a DC circuit is often as a crowbar unit for over-voltage protection. A “crowbar” circuit includes an SCR positioned in parallel with the output of a DC power source, for positioning an immediate short-circuit on the output of the particular supply to protect against extreme voltage from arriving at the load. Harm to the SCR and power supply is eliminated by the cautious positioning of a fuse or tangible series resistance prior to the SCR to minimize short-circuit current: (Figure below) scr crowbar circuit]]> 1789 0 0 0 Make this Quadraphonic Sound System Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/make-quadraphonic-sound-system-circuit/ Sat, 13 Aug 2016 08:05:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1796 Parts Required :- l. Integrated circuits lC 741 2 Nos. 2. Potentiometer-ganged 100 K ~ 100K linear 3. Resistances (1/4 watt) 100K 6 Nos: IOK 2 Nos. 4. Presets :- 100 K 2 Nos.]]> 1796 0 0 0 717 http://dallaswmamy.acidblog.net/535929/helping-the-others-realize-the-advantages-of-delivery-food 0 0 Simple Wheel RPM Meter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-wheel-rpm-meter-circuit/ Sat, 13 Aug 2016 08:27:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1799 The LDR and the lamp are fixed on to the opposite sides of the block as shown in the figure. Under ordinary conditions, the light emitted from the bulb keeps the LDR illuminated An LDR when illuminated properly offers a very small resistance (few hundred ohms). A flat circular plate, with a small projection at its periphery is cut out from a card board sheet. This is then placed on to the shaft of the wheel in place of the actual wheel, The RPM of the machine is set at a speed which is to be tested and then the supply to the player is switched on, The rpm sensing unit is placed in a position such that the projection in the card board record interrupts the light falling on the LDR at each rotation. Thus on completion of each rotation the light falling on the LDR is interrupted. The LDR is connected to the trigger (pin 14) of the decade counter. The pulses for IC 7490 decade counter are generated hy the LDR which depend upon the speed ofthe record player. The counter counts the number of pulses received to the maximum of 9 after which it resets to zero. The second IC, IC 7448, is a b c d to g 7 segment display decoder and it, along with a 7 segment common cathode display, displays the number of ctnmts, Since there is only one 7 segment display, the counter can count only upto 9, utter which it resets to zero and again starts counting from one onwards. For 16 rpm it should cross zero once & then count 6. For 33 rpm it should cross zero thrice and then count 3. A stop watch or wrist watch is used to check the time i.e. to find out number of revolutions made by the record per one minute time. wheel RPM meter Parts Required for the proposed simple wheel RPM meter circuit (1) Integrated circuits :- Ic 7490 IC 7448 (2) 7 Segment cnmmon catlmdn display. (3) Push—On Switch 1no (4) LDR 1no (4) Bulb (6) Wooden block, Card board with projection (see tcm).]]> 1799 0 0 0 Simple Telephone Amplifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-telephone-amplifier-circuit/ Sat, 13 Aug 2016 08:37:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1803 Parts Required (1) CA 3020 or CA 302OA. (2) Telephonc pick up coil (see text) (3) Condensers :— 5 mfd 25 volts - 2 Nos. 10 mfd  volts - 1 No. .01 mid 50V - 2 Nos. (4) Output transformer (pocket transistor type) (5) Rcsistanccs. (3; watt) 5.1 K -1no 510 k - l N0. 1 K - l No. (6) Potentiometer :·—10 K log. l N0.]]> 1803 0 0 0 Simple 100 watt to 500 watt Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-100-watt-to-500-watt-inverter-circuit/ Mon, 15 Aug 2016 07:41:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1806 Of all the components that you need to build the system, the role of two components – CD4047 multi-vibrator and IRF540 MOSFET transistor deserve special mention. The CD4047 multi-vibrator manufactured by Texas Instrument consumes very low power. The system is designed on a way to work both as monostable and astable multi-vibrator. Furthermore, it also operates on gatable or free running mode and provides pretty descent stability in frequency. CD4047 has the power to generate duty cycle of 50%, which actually creates the pulse. The IRF540 MOSFET transistor is used in this development is because of its capacity for high switching and a current range which can e used for making any inverter from 100 watt to 500 watt. Developing the System Referring to Figure 1.0, the 12V battery is connected to the LED diode. The battery is also connected to Pin 8 of IC4047 i.e. the power-supply pin or VCC, and is also further connected to Pin 4 and Pin 5 which works as astable and complement of IC4047. It is important to note here that the diode will not be able to produce any reverse current. The LED in the circuit acts as a battery indicator to see if its working. The CD4047 IC, in this development will function as astable multivibrator mode. To make the multivibrator mode work you need to get one capacitor, which need connection between Pin 1 and Pin 3. The Pin 2 is further connected to a variable resistor and a resistor in order to update the output frequency of the IC. The rest of the pins should remain in grounded mode. Pin 10 and Pin 11 are connected to IRF540 mosfet gate. Both these pins also referred as Q and ~Q generates duty cycle of 50%. In order prevent loading of the mosfet the output frequency has its connection to the mosfet via a resistor. The AC current, which is generated by the two mosfets behaves like two electronic switches. The current from the battery is enabled to move upper or positive half of the transformer’s main coil via Q1. This is done on a situation when Pin 10 gets high and lower or negative half is attained by the opposing current flow via the primary coil of the transformer and when Pin 11 is high. Therefore, the power gets generated by switching the two mosfets. The AC power is further supplied to step-up the transformer’s secondary coil from where we receive the higher AC voltage. The Zener diode on the other hand enables bypass the reverse current. For upgrading this circuit to any range between 100 watt to 500 watt inverter, you don't have to change anything just make sure the wattage of the transformer is rated above the required output wattage and the AH rating is 10 times more than the transformer primary amp rating]]> 1806 0 0 0 Simple 12V Solar Charger Circuit with Boost Converter https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-12v-solar-charger-circuit-with-boost-converter/ Tue, 23 Aug 2016 11:50:57 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1814 A Solar Charger excellent for Self-Sufficiency The intent behind this circuit should be to achieve a Solar Charger 13.6V supply with low price. For this reason the project is introduced as a hobby. We have employed an output circuit more streamlined compared to a conventional photovoltaic system design and driver transistor is "low voltage". The two of these elements offer an increase in efficiency by 20% in the Circuit Solar Charger on Conventional solar set up. Circuit means knowledge of electronics and photovoltaic solar energy. Solar cell 0.5V @ 280mA Solar Charger This particular circuit is made to power 12V supplies. Currently the bulk of electronic devices are created to work with a voltage of 12V. With the higher increases of LED lights there isn't any obstacle by somebody wanting to choose to live using a low voltage supply which enable it to take pleasure in electronic delights of living in the city. Circuit diagram 12V Solar Charger 12V solar charger circuit with boost converter 12v solar charger circuit Circuit advantage versus Conventional Photovoltaic Solar Charger Set up The most important downside of solar energy is obviously precisely the same sunlight! The sun will never glimmer all day and night. Our eyes adjust to variations in the level of the sun, but a solar panel reacts in a different way. When the sunlight offers solar radiation at reduced strength, ie, in the early hours of the morning and later mid-day, solar panel overall performance diminishes. Not just it reduces the power, but the output voltage likewise reduces. The output voltage necessary to charge a 12V battery is 13.6 V minimum, this means during lower solar strength load turns into zero. Solar Charger Circuit demonstrated beneath doesn't work wonders yet offer a a reasonable output with low voltages. The additional benefit of Circuit Solar Charger to a conventional photovoltaic system is minimal expense in solar panels. You don't actually have to purchase a 12v panel. A few solar cells will probably be appropriate. You can even make use of a faulty 12v panel. Occasionally a 12v panel can be broken by unfavorable reasons, if one or two of the cells does not produce a voltage, the cells can be detached and connected with the circuit. This will likely reduce the output voltage, however the inverter will instantly adapt. How the simple 12V solar charger circuit with boost converter Works Solar Charger circuit is essentially established by a blocking oscillator. It offers 45 turns in the primary and 15 turns on the feedback of the inductor. Not any side as primary constitutes a high voltage throughout section of the cycle, and this voltage is supplied to the output through a high-speed diode to generate the output. The output voltage consists of high voltage spikes and should never be tested without load attached to the output. In this situation, it is for charging the battery. Feeding the peaks at 30mA current prototype may be used as a starting sample and as battery voltage goes up, charge current is minimized to 22mA. The transistor is switched on by way of the base resistor 1 ohm. This leads to current to stream in the primary coil and creating the magnetic flux. This flow slices the turns of the coil and constitutes a feedback voltage in the coil which activates the transistor harder. This carries on so that the transistor is completely on and at this stage, the magnetic flux in the transformer core may e at its optimum level. The magnetic flux in the transformer core starts to fail and this constitutes a stress on feedback loop causing against the resistance of 1 ohm such that the transistor turns off. The transistor consistently turns off until it eventually is totally off. The magnetic flux causes a voltage break in the primary coil. Since the transistor is turned off during this period, we are able to consider it to be stripped away from the circuit and the coil is linked to a high-speed diode. The power created by the coil goes by via the diode and presents itself at the output as a high voltage peak. This high voltage spike additionally includes current and consequently delivers the energy. This electricity is provided with into the load and in our scenario all of us discovered that the Solar Charger is charging the battery circuit 12V. The smart section of the may be the generation of the high voltage. Whenever a magnetic circuit (primary coil is wound on a ferrite rod and this is called a magnetic circuit) collapses, the voltage created in the clearance is determined by the standard of the magnetic circuit and also the rate at which it sinks. Strain can be 5, 10 or even 100 times more than the applied voltage and this is the reason why we have used. This is only among the occurrence of a magnetic circuit. The magnetic flux constitutes a voltage fall in every turn of the coil and the actual voltage is determined by the volume of flow existing and the rate of collapse. The 100u via the solar panel is built to reduce the impedance of the panel in order that the circuit can function as efficiently as possible. The simple 12V solar charger circuit with boost converter is categorized as being a low impedance. The low impedance arises from the point that the transformer is attached straight to the primary with the entrance in the course of part of the cycle. The primary resistance is merely a fraction of ohm impedance and is only some ohms as confirmed by the knowledge centered 150mA @ 3.2v. When the battery is attached to the circuit, the current is substantially increased. The 150mA is due to the constraint of the solar panel. The circuit needs a large power of the same cycle. If the current average is 150 mA, the instantaneous current is often as 300mA or even more. The panel struggles to deliver this power and thus looking for a storage device called electrolyte to compensate current peaks. The 10u works in a similar fashion. Both of these components help to make improve efficiency of the design considerably. You will observe that the battery receives the charging voltage transformer as well as 3.2v solar panel. In the event the battery voltage is 12.8V (voltage in the course of charging) power transformer will probably be corresponding to 9.6V / 12.8V and energy of the solar cell is the same as 3.2V / 12.8V. Quite simply, the battery power is going to be supplied based on the voltage of each supply. Solar Charger regulator circuit without Load Our Solar 12V Charger Circuit doesn't have any charge controller. This characteristic is absolutely not necessary with a slower charger. The charge current is so reduced battery never experience an overload. This is how functions: Once the battery is charging, a small amount of voltgae goes up over normal battery voltage. This is known as "floating charge" or "float voltage" and it is because of the chemical reaction inside the cells, which includes the truth that it bubbles. When the battery gets to the level of ALMOST completely charged, the voltage increases further more and this boost is detected by a circuit which stops the charger. Solar panels in parallel or in series? The most significant concerns in interconnection photovoltaic solar energy is whether to hook up the panels in parallel or in series. The majority of individual pv cells are manufactured from small pieces of solar stuff linked collectively and put through an intensification of the plastic material cover of the light. The output of solar cells utilized in the prototype and 0.5v 280mA (with glowing sunlight). The circuit features a minimal working voltage of approximately 1.5 V therefore any voltage in addition will certainly generate an output. Within our circumstance, cells should be attached in series to get the very best overall performance. Transformer The primary coil possesses 45 turns of wire 0.7 mm in diameter on a ferrite rod 10 mm. Wind 40 turns, closely wound, this becomes the stick after which 5 spiraled back to top. Twist the two ends with each other to keep the coil it is in place. By doing this is called a transformer. It is an oscillator associated with a transformer or flyback function block. The output is obtained through the primary through a high-speed diode. The oscillator will simply run when the coil is coupled in the proper way. The correct form is displayed in the diagram, with the start of primary and secondary, as proven in the diagram. For this to be effective, both windings has to be absorbed in the exact same direction. It is possible to track the start and finish of each coil or just hook up the transformer and see if it performs. Otherwise, reverse the arrangement connectors (reverse only one connection - not necessarily both). Absolutely nothing may be damaged when attempting this method as the solar panel would not supply adequate current to ruin the transistor. Transistor One of several specific highlights of this specific layout is the driver transistor. It is among the new style of transistors possessing a low resistance emitter, when they are saturated. Additionally it is capable of handling a high power (3 amps) and very peaks of 20 amps. If utilized in a saturation rate, excessive like this, the deficits in the transistor are extremely small and do not require heat-sinking. Some other transistors might work, nevertheless the transistor 851 ZTX 6mA included with the current output because of its attributes.]]> 1814 0 0 0 Under Soil Gold Detector Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/soil-gold-detector-circuit/ Thu, 25 Aug 2016 13:05:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1817 The suggested deep soil gold detector device consists of the measuring bridge (figure 1), the alternating voltage generator (fig 2) and the a few probes, sunken inside the earth. Deep Soil Gold Detector Circuit - Ground Scanner The resistances across the soil deposits, between the electrodes of probes are paired to the input of the bridge arms, for calibrating the variables. Before detection of gold the 100 ohm resistor may very well be realigned for bridging the balance to ensure that the dial instrument readings are originally at the zero level. Deep Soil Gold Detector Scanner The model of the probe symbolized in FIG.3 may e recognized as follows: Each one of the probes represents the insulated rods possessing a diameter of around 1.5 mm. from the outside section of the bar along its axle, these are generally stationary electrodes available as six thin-walled tube, segregated from each other. Each one electrode probe with the assistance of six cable connectivity is installed on the switch S1 measuring bridge, that subsequently hooks up with one of the 6 pairs of electrodes along with the bridge. Within this illustration, each one pair of electrodes at each of the placements of the switch S1 symbolize the accurate detail of the soil layer and its content. Immediately after positioning the probe in the field, as outlined by FIG. 4, the electrical resistance of the succeeding layers of soil introduced at various depths is identified. Assessing the values attained from the resistance, it is possible to get a realization at exactly what depth (which soil layer) are objects like gold that may be influencing the resistance of the soil. The distance between the probes are basically selected in each specific scenario. Sometimes, attaining your goal might be fulfilled with range that me around close to 2.4 m. The variable resistor of the bridge is 500 ohms as demonstrated in the deep soil gold detector circuit diagram, is for optimizing the sensitivity of the bridge based on soil type being researched.]]> 1817 0 0 0 How to Connect Solar Panels in Series and Parallel https://makingcircuits.com/blog/connect-solar-panels-series-parallel/ Tue, 06 Sep 2016 08:40:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1823 Absolute interconnected power = 150W + 150W + 150W + 150W = 600W Having said that when panels are attached in series, one of the panel may carry a rated power below the other panel, because of the lower current spec of this solar panel with respect to the other modules in the chain, that unit could tend to drag down the existing system's output: Combining different solar panels in series different spec solar panels in series Solar devices are normally attached in parallel to achieve greater output current. For Photo voltaic components attached in parallel absolute power is determined as cited below: Connecting solar panels in parallel similar solar panels in parallel Add up to combined power = 150W + 150W + 150W + 150W = 600W Contrary to the combination in series, when solar panels are connected in parallel there may be one panel having power output below the spec of the other devices, this could perhaps not influence the total power output of the chain significantly only if this particular panel possesses voltage rating on par with the other modules voltage: Connecting different solar panels in parallel different solar panels in parallel Optimum voltage on a series of modules should invariably be less than highest input DC voltage of the inverter. While hooking up diverse solar modules, it’s not the different power specifications that might be crucial, rather it’s basically the current (for series connection) and voltage (for parallel connection) that might cause the draw down of the efficiency of the system. Typically solar panels of specific or matching current needs to be connected with each other in series. Should you connect a 3A solar panel to a 3.5A solar panel, the all round current will probably be pulled down to 3A. This kind of a lowering of current would of course cause a loss of power output and eventually loss in equipment efficiency. In the same way only solar panels of specific or matching voltage must be connected with each other in parallel. Whenever you hook up a 15V panel to a 24 V panel, the overall voltage is going to be pulled down to 15 Volts. This kind of a lowering voltage will probably lead to a decrease in power output, and eventually deterioration in system efficiency. In comparison to voltage and current, watt is not a major issue. Whenever you connect with each other a 60W solar panel to a 100W panel in series, the gross hooked up power is likely to be 160W, given that the two solar panels are of identical ampere rating. At this point any specific difference in voltages is not crucial, voltages would simply add up and all you’ve might need to judge is the fact that the total voltage must come within the inverter voltage limit. In case their current specs are not the same , just be willing to witness undesirable consequences, because the overall current could possibly be the lower of the two panel specifications, which usually shows that you’re not gonna accomplish a maximum of 160W rather often way less. Just how much less - is relative to dissimilarity in specified currents. Additionally if you connect collectively a 60W solar panels to a 100W panel in parallel, the absolute associated power is likely to be 160W, assuming that the two solar panels are of matching voltage. Here any kind of difference in currents is not crucial, currents wouls simply add up and all you’ve need to take into account is that the absolute current must not extend past the highest inverter input current. When their voltage specifications are not the same , you need to be ready to expect disagreeable situations, because the overall voltage could possibly be much lower than the individual units, that could imply that you’re not likely to accomplish an overall of 160W rather consistently less. Just how much less - boils down to the difference between the voltage rating of the two.]]> 1823 0 0 0 Vehicle Distress Signal Lamp Flasher Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/vehicle-distress-signal-lamp-flasher-circuit/ Tue, 13 Sep 2016 11:33:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1832 The circuit is very straightforward. The first stage includes an oscillator about an inverter gate. This oscillator generates 2 Hz periods meaning that in a single second the output moves from high to low two times. From the finish of this oscillator have got an additional inverter gate which is accountable for governing the combustion of one of the headlights (and its inner LED) and output this to a 3rd gate is in charge of governing the 2nd lamp and LED. The gate relating to the first and second lamp activates, as soonas the first switches off the second illuminates and vice versa.   For the flash to be quicker or slower you may simply modify a few values 2.2μF capacitor and resistor 220K. The IC that we use is actually a CD40106, that is built from 6 investors CMOS gates. You could employ some other containing comparable attributes. The power-supply is 12V. If you wish to operate at 24V (for a truck or trailer) just cut off the track connected to power (exactly where it is marked with a cross) and adding a LM7812 regulator. Lastly the power devices consist of two N-channel MOSFET that make it possible for effortless handling as much as 20A (in fact the supplier claims these function flawlessly even upto 28A). Needless to say, the devices should be effectively dissipated in order to avoid the temperatures related damage.]]> 1832 0 0 0 High Current LM317 Variable Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/high-current-lm317-variable-power-supply-circuit/ Wed, 14 Sep 2016 09:08:36 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1838   Looking at the proposed high current LM317 regulator circuit design we can see how the basic LM317 variable power supply design which is normally rated to deliver just  1 amp current is cleverly upgraded to a high current version using a few 2N 3055 transistors. All the 2N3055 transistor are configured in their individual emitter follower mode, which implies that all these will follow and produce voltage output at their emitters that may be exactly equal to the LM317 output, meaning when the LM317 pot is adjusted for a particular output voltage, the emitters of the power transistors would exactly replicate and produce the same amount of voltage at their emitters, but since he collectors of these devices are connected with the high current supply rail would transform the LM317 voltage into a high current capacity that may be equal to the maximum current carrying capability of the transistors as well as the power supply specification. Thus this simple tweak using a few 2N3055 transistor transforms a ordinary LM317 variable regulated power supply into an awesome high current LM317 regulated variable power supply unit. However make sure that all the 2N3055 are mounted over a large common heatsink, using a generous amount of heatsink compound paste but without mica isolators. The 0.47 ohm resistors limit the current to the devices maximum current specs, if some other transistor such TIP35C are used this may be changed to obtain current as high as 100 amps]]> 1838 0 0 0 Arduino Calculator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/arduino-calculator-circuit/ Tue, 20 Sep 2016 10:56:24 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1842 Program: #include<math.h> float a = 500; float b = 105.33; float add; float sub; float divide; float mul; void setup() { Serial.begin(9600); Serial.println("Simple Arduino Calculator:"); Serial.println("\n"); Serial.print("a = "); Serial.println(a); Serial.print("b = "); Serial.println(b); Serial.println("\n"); Serial.print("Addition: "); Serial.print("a + b = "); // add add=a+b; Serial.println(add); Serial.print("Multiplication: "); Serial.print("a * b = "); // multiply mul=a*b; Serial.println(mul); Serial.print("Division: "); Serial.print("a / b = "); // divide divide=a/b; Serial.println(divide); Serial.print("Subtraction: "); Serial.print("a - b = "); // subtract sub=a-b; Serial.println(sub); } void loop() // we need this to be here even though its empty { } OUTPUT:
Throughout these program we have been making use of “Float” that works decimal functions, we have been applying “Serial.print();” for publishing the principles in serial monitor, remaining program is self instructive. You are able to alter the variable a and b in the system with your personal principles. Let us transfer something better, such as area of circle. The formulation for area of circle is: pi * radius^2 or pi times radius square. Considering that the value of pi will be constant, we must designate it within the program implementing “float” because the value of pi is 3.14159 wheresoever decimal point involves. Program: //-------------------Program Developed by R.Girish---------------// #include<math.h> float pi = 3.14159; float radius = 50; float area; void setup() { Serial.begin(9600); Serial.println("Arduino Area Calculator:"); Serial.print("\n"); Serial.print("Radius = "); Serial.print(radius); Serial.print("\n"); area = pi*sq(radius); Serial.print("The Area of circle is: "); Serial.println(area); } void loop() { // we need this to be here even though it is empty } //-------------------Program Developed by R.Girish---------------// OUTPUT:
Yet again, you are able to replace the principles of your personal choice in the program. We have been making use of “sq()” that executes squaring of the number within the parenthesis. At this point let us proceed to the subsequent stage. Within this program we intend to make use of Pythagoras theorem in order to calculate the hypotenuse of a triangle. The method behind this is: “hyp=sqrt(sq(base) + sq(height)); “ or square root of (base square + height square). Program: //-------------------Program Developed by R.Girish---------------// #include<math.h> float base = 50.36; float height = 45.336; float hyp; void setup() { Serial.begin(9600); Serial.println("Arduino Pythagoras Calculator:"); Serial.print("\n"); Serial.print("base = "); Serial.println(base); Serial.print("height = "); Serial.print(height); Serial.print("\n"); hyp=sqrt(sq(base) + sq(height)); Serial.print("The hypotenuse is: "); Serial.print(hyp); } void loop() { // we need this to be here even though its empty } //-------------------Program Developed by R.Girish---------------// OUTPUT:
It is possible to replace the values of base and height with your personal principles in the program. We applied “sqrt()” which usually can square root function values inside the parenthesis. Now let us execute a well-liked program which usually we might have studied in our outset of C language training course, Fibonacci series. The bottom line is the Fibonacci series is actually addition of 2 prior numbers which provides subsequent number and so forth, it often commences with 0, 1. For instance: 0, 1. So 0+1=1; next series is 0, 1, 1. Therefore, 1+1=2. Consequently next series is, 0, 1, 1, 2…..and so forth. This system created here is to obtain the Fibonacci number for 1st nth digit. You are able to replace the value of ‘n’ in the system to achieve the preferred Fibonacci series. Program: //-------------------Program Developed by R.Girish---------------// #include<math.h> int n=6; int first = 0; int Second = 1; int next; int c; void setup() { Serial.begin(9600); Serial.print("Fibonacci series for first "); Serial.print(n); Serial.print(" numbers are:\n\n"); for ( c = 0 ; c < n ; c++ ) { if ( c <= 1 ) next = c; else { next = first + Second; first = Second; Second = next; } Serial.println(next); } } void loop() { // put your main code here, to run repeatedly: } //-------------------Program Developed by R.Girish---------------// OUTPUT:
Therefore, this may have offered adequate amounts for your head and baffled that anything made to control hardware peripherals has been performing several non-sense math computation, in that case, you aren't the only one. The math performs an important function in electronics honestly, that is precisely why our textbook abounds with mathematical equations, that people do not even fully grasp and that's where calculators come to save us and here it really is. Should you have any concerns relating to this Arduino calculator circuit, you may convey them by means of your ever valuable feedback.]]> 1842 0 0 0 Simple Boost Converter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-boost-converter-circuit/ Tue, 20 Sep 2016 16:13:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1844   The shown boost converter circuit is simple with its topology since it works with a couple of standard circuits stages involving an transistorized astable stage and a boost converter stage. The astable stage is formed by the two BC548 transistors and the associated resistors and capacitors. The involved two capacitors and the two base resistors determine the frequency of the astable This frequency is fed to the gate of a mosfet which is rigged as a boost converter in conjunction with its drain inductor. The astable frequency drives the mosfet and inductor at the specified frequency causing a much higher stepped up voltage to develop across the drain and source of the mosfet. This boosted voltage is collected across the 1000uF filter capacitor after appropriately rectifying it via the 1N4007 diode. The number of turns on the coil could be equal to the supply voltgae level, here it's around 12 turns, diameter could be around 20mm. The core should be a ferrite material. The feedback BC548 makes sure that ther boost volatge should not increase above 24V which is determined by the 24V zener diode. This implies thsat the proposed simple boost converter circuit output could be dimensioned as per user's choice simply by increasing the number of turns and/or by altering the value of the 24V zener diode.]]> 1844 0 0 0 Fan Speed Control using TV Remote Handset https://makingcircuits.com/blog/fan-speed-control-using-tv-remote-handset/ Sat, 01 Oct 2016 08:44:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1851 Parts List R1, R3 = 100 ohms, R2 = 100K, R4 = 4K7, R5 = 10K, C2 = 47uF/25V C1, C4= 22uF/25V, C6 = 4.7uF/25V, C3 = 0.1, CERAMIC C5 = 100uF/50V C10 = 0.22uF/400V T1 = BC557 IRS = TSOP IR sensor IC1 = 4017 IC D1 = 1N4007 D2 = 12V 1watt zener R9 = 15K R10 = 330K R4---R8 = 50K, 100K. 150K, 220K R11 = 33K R12 = 100 ohms Diac = DB-3 TR1 = BT136 L1 = 500 turns of 28SWG over any iron bolt. C7 = 0.1uF/600V Note: the 4 SCRs are improperly symbolized as SCR BT169, all these needs to be swapped with triacs, for example BCR1AM-8P triacs, or some other equivalent triac will in addition do. Looking at the diagram above we are able to observe two the circuit set up across several unique stages. The right side of the diagram is designed like a typical light dimmer or fan dimmer circuit, apart from one modification, and this can be spotted close to its typical pot area, in which has been swapped over by four triacs possessing four individual resistor at their MT2, organized with an incrementing respects. The left side stage consisting of the IC 4017 is wired as a 4 step sequential logic generator, caused by an Infrared sensor unit which develops the IR receiver for accepting the switching activates from a hand held IR remote control unit. The flipping remote IR beams from TV IR remote transmitter brings about the IRS to produce a toggling pulse at pin#14 of the IC 4017, which inturn transforms the pulse into a sequentially jumping logic high pulse across its pin#3 to pin#10 then it's reset back to pin#3 by means of pin#1/15 relationship. The above pinouts that are in charge of making a sequentially moving logic high pulse are serially linked with the gates A, B, C, D of the marked triacs. Because the resistors associated with the anodes of the triacs turn out to be the deciding parts for the fan speed control, means that by sequentially shifting the triacs to and fro, the speed of the fan could be amplified or dropped equally, in 4 discrete measures, subject to the values of R4----R8. For that reason while the remote handset button is pushed, the IC 4017 pinouts activate the matching triac which then hooks up its anode resistor with the dimmer triac/diac arrangement, carrying out the pertinent level of fan speed. In the suggested TV remote controlled fan dimmer circuit, 4 triacs are proven for generating a 4-step speed control, but 10 such triacs could possibly be integrated with all the 10 pinouts of the IC 4017 for gaining a fantastic 10 step discretely regulated fan speed control.]]> 1851 0 0 0 Car Chasing LED Arrow Turn Signal Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/car-chasing-led-arrow-turn-signal-indicator-circuit/ Sat, 01 Oct 2016 11:31:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1854 As may be seen in the pattern, the LEDs are grouped  in different numbers across the channels, and once illuminated these light up to produce a bar graph kind of chasing and single channel chasing effect alternately. The circuit which is responsible for generating the above chasing LED arrow in a car tun signal indicator , can be witnessed below:   The idea looks pretty simple, a single IC 4017 is configured for carrying out the chasing LED in an altyernately bar graph and dot mode through a special smart arrangement of its pinouts across the connected LED series parallel channels. The speed at which the chasing eect on the LEDs is supposed to happen is determined by the flashing rate of the UJT device at pin#14 of the IC4017. The flashing or oscillating rate on the UJT can be fixed by adjusting the associated 100 pot or a preset or/and the 47uF capacitor. This in turn determines how fast or how slow the LED chasing on the LEDs can be achieved. Once installed this car LED chasing arrow turn signal indicator will instantly start producing the expected light show and produce the required turn signal indication in a much enhanced compared to the conventional single bulb flashing indicators]]> 1854 0 0 0 385 0 38 386 385 1 388 0 38 389 388 1 731 0 0 734 https://makingcircuits.com/ 731 1 736 734 0 740 https://makingcircuits.com/ 736 1 How to Connect Capacitors in Parallel https://makingcircuits.com/blog/connect-capacitors-parallel/ Mon, 03 Oct 2016 11:11:57 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1862

Capacitors in Parallel

Capacitors may be said to be joined “in parallel” if each of their pins are correspondingly linked to each pin of the additional capacitor or capacitors. The voltage ( Vc ) attached throughout each of the capacitors which are linked in parallel may be the IDENTICAL. In that case,Capacitors in Parallel possess a “common voltage” supply throughout all of them presenting:

VC1 = VC2 = VC3 = VAB = 12V

In the below given circuit the capacitors, C1, C2 and C3 are all connected with each other within a parallel arm among points A and B as demonstrated.

capacitors in parallel

While capacitors are connected with each other in parallel the sum or comparable capacitance,CT in the circuit add up to the sum of each of the specific capacitors added collectively. The reason being the top plate of capacitor, C1 is coupled to the upper plate of C2 that is attached to the upper plate of C3 and so forth. The exact same can also be witnessed for the capacitors lower plates. Then it may be considered as if the 3 pieces of plates were being in contact one another and add up to one substantial single plate thus boosting the effective plate area in m2.   Considering that capacitance, C relates to plate area ( C = ε A/d ) the capacitance associated with the pairing will likely increase. Then your total capacitance magnitude of the capacitors attached with each other in parallel could be determined by adding the plate area collectively. Quite simply, the whole capacitance can be comparable to the sum of each of the specific capacitance’s joined parallel. You could have realized that the overall capacitance of parallel capacitors can be found in the same exact way as the entire resistance of series resistors. The currents (amps) streaming via each capacitor and as all of us observed in the earlier article are relevant to the voltage. In that case by making use of Kirchoff’s Current Law, ( KCL ) to the previously mentioned circuit, we now have

Total Circuit Current

and this may be differently written as:

total circuit capacitance

Then we may state the total or comparable circuit of capacitance, CT to be the sum of each and every individual capacitance’s put together providing us with the more typical expression of

Parallel Capacitors Equation

capacitors in parallel equation
While adding mutually joined capacitors in parallel, they will need to all be transformed to the similar capacitance units, may it be uF, nF or pF. Furthermore, we are able to observe that the current running through the overall capacitance value, CT is not different from the full circuit current, iT We are able to additionally outline the total capacitance of the parallel circuit from the total accumulated coulomb charge employing the Q = CV equation for charge on a capacitors plates. The whole charge QT accumulated on all the plates is the same as the sum of the specific accumulated charges on each one capacitor hence,

Equivalent Capacitance in Parallel

As the voltage, (V) is shared for parallel connected capacitors, you can divide each side of the above formula via by the voltage going out of the capacitance and just by adding with each other the value of the specific capacitances gives you the entire capacitance, CT. Additionally, this equation is not based on the quantity of Capacitors in Parallel in the section, which enables you to therefore be generic for almost any quantity of N parallel capacitors plugged in with each other. Capacitors in Parallel Example No1 As a result by using the values of the 3 capacitors from the above illustration, we are able to estimate the overall comparative circuit capacitance CT to be:

CT = C1 + C2 + C3 = 0.1uF + 0.2uF + 0.3uF = 0.6uF

capacitors connected in parallel

One crucial point to consider regarding parallel connected capacitor circuits, the overall capacitance (CT) of any 2 or more capacitors joined with each other in parallel ends up being Higher than the value of the biggest capacitor in the group as we have been adding together values. Therefore in our illustration above CT = 0.6uF while the biggest value capacitor is barely 0.3uF. While 4, 5, 6 or higher capacitors are attached with each other the overall capacitance of the circuit CT would yet be the total of all the specific capacitors put jointly and as we understand now, the overall capacitance of a parallel circuit is invariably no less than the maximum value capacitor. It is because we have successfully raised the overall surface area of the plates. In case we achieve this with a couple of matching capacitors, we have now made twice the surface area of the plates which inturn raises the capacitance of the conjunction and so on.

Capacitors in Parallel Example No2.

Calculate the overall capacitance in micro-Farads (uF) of the following capacitors when they are coupled with each other in a parallel combination:
  • a)  2 capacitors each having a capacitance of 47nF
  • b)  1 capacitor of 470nF joined in parallel to a capacitor of 1uF

a) Total Capacitance,

CT = C1 + C2 = 47nF + 47nF = 94nF or 0.094uF

b) Total Capacitance,

CT = C1 + C2 = 470nF + 1uF

therefore, CT = 470nF + 1000nF = 1470nF or 1.47uF

Therefore, the overall or comparable capacitance, CT of a power circuit having a couple of Capacitors in Parallel is the total of the each of the specific capacitance’s applied in sync as the effective section of the plates is amplified.
]]> 1862 0 0 0 40 watt Fluorescent Emergency Lamp Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/40-watt-fluorescent-emergency-lamp-circuit/ Sat, 08 Oct 2016 05:58:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1868 Over a ferrite rod coil the two transformer winding (L1) are attached in the form of the inductor of transistor (T1). Therefore we have the oscillator circuit in the feedback mode. For every single cycle of a percentage of power transistor it is recognized by the winding L1 which retriggers the transistor and consistently runs the system. However , exactly how this inductor is created? Let's learn it First we have to get a ferrite rod for example which are found in AM radios 6cm long. Cover this bar with 60 turns of enameled wire 1 mm thick. This becomes the primary winding, which will be connected with the power transistor. Once this primary winding is completed fix it firmly in place by wrapping a layer of transparent insulation tape, and if possible secure the wire ends with fast curing epoxy glue or quick fix glue After this wind the secondary winding on the center with 13 turns of 0.4mm enameled wire turns which will form the feedback winding or feedback loop L1. This winding will ensure that the initiates oscillating as soon as powered. As before secure this winding also with a layer of insulation tape and epoxy glue. Finally now wind 450 turns of 0.4mm enameled wire forming the secondary side of T1. This winding is completed in three layers of 150 turns each, to create a decent layered winding and not a heaped bulk of wires. Make sure that between each layer a layer of insulation tape is wrapped to keep the layers intact and firmly wound. Done!...your inductor L1 for the 40 watt fluorescent emergency lamp circuit is complete Before you turn this circuit ON, make sure the inductor is in the correct phase. This check this initially connect the fluorescent tube to the secondary and momentarily switch ON the system. If the tube does not light at all would indicate a incorrect phased primary side of (L1). Now simply swap the primary side wires with the transistor. Now check it again and this time you will find the tube illuminating brightly. But If the tube turns on at the first attempt (before reversing the wires, you need not do any mods!). Next adjust the position of the coil L1 to the most optimal position over the ferrite and once done we could remove the limiting resistance (the 2.2 ohms) and allow the system to be powered directly.]]> 1868 0 0 0 Simplest Strobe Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simplest-strobe-light-circuit/ Sat, 08 Oct 2016 06:54:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1871 These flickering LEDs are nowadays are quite common everywhere, and can e easily procured from any electronic spare part shop. These LEDs are featured with an internal oscillator and multi-color LED chip within a single embedded package.   It just requires a 3 supply and that's enough for this LED to start randomly flashing with multiple colors. Although these LEDs are individually used for decoration purpose, in our simplest strobe light circuit it is applied as an oscillator for the driver transistor, which it effectively implements. As soon as the circuit is powered with 6V, the flickering LED starts randomly flickering at causing the base potential of the transistor to alternately and rapidly trigger ON/OFF at the same rate the flickering LED oscillations.   This in turn causes the collector high bright LED to flash rapidly and intermittently producing an eye blinding strobe light effect. This little simple strobe light circuit could be installed in caps, shirts buttons or anywhere you desire for generating a eye catching strobe effect in crowds or festivals occasions.]]> 1871 0 0 0 473 http://google.com 0 0 MPPT Solar Charger with 3-Step Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/mppt-solar-charger-3-step-charger-circuit/ Wed, 12 Oct 2016 09:02:55 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1874 While Q1 is on, current (I1) passes through inductor L1 and into capacitor C2 and the battery. In case Q1 switches off, the stored energy in L1 is appllied to the battery by means of diode D2 (current path I2). MPPT & charge optimisation Considering the fact that the solar panel is installed horizontally, it is reasonably crucial that you absorb the maximum electricity as possible from it so this is where the Charge Controller’s MPPT (Maximum Power Point Tracking) makes its way in. As demonstrated in Fig.1, for a standard solar panel subjected to maximum sunlight, the output stoves from optimum current while the output leads is shorted (Isc) to highest voltage while the output is open circuit (Voc). For a regular 120W 12V panel, Isc is 7.14A and Voc is 21.8V. However the optimum power from a 120W panel is at 6.74A and 17.8V that could be barely an ideal blend for a lead-acid battery. If we were to link up that 120W solar panel straight away to the battery, the charge current is likely to be approximately 7.1A at 12V (85.2W), 7.05A at 13V (91.7W) and 7A at 14.4V (101W), ie, significantly less than the 120W offered by the solar panel at 17.8V. By contrast, MPPT helps keeping the solar panel current and voltage at the maximum power point while charging the battery, granting that the battery voltage is below the solar panel voltage. This is accomplished by a smart switchmode step-down voltage converter. To learn how this implements, check with the block diagram of Fig.2 below. Current from the solar panel streams by way of diode D1 and Mosfet Q1. When Q1 is on, current (I1) runs via inductor L1 into capacitor C2 and the battery. This gathers energy within the inductor’s magnetic field. PCB design and track layout for the proposed MPPT soar charger circuit with 3 step charger     PCB track layout MPPT   MPPT PCB track layout  

Programming source code for the proposed 12V/24V solar MPPT circuit using PIC16F88

; 100W Solar Charger ; upgraded with a supplementary bulk charge restart feature after a 4hr break when sunlight returns to panel ; Option set when RB0 low ; Supplementary bulk restart anytime power demanded for float charging. Option set when RB1 low ; Added switch to float mode if bulk charging takes less than 60s. ie if the battery is fully charged list P=16F88 #include p16f88.inc ERRORLEVEL -302 ERRORLEVEL -306 ;Program Configuration Register 1 __CONFIG    _CONFIG1, _CP_ALL & _CCP1_RB3 & _DEBUG_OFF & _WRT_PROTECT_OFF & _CPD_OFF & _LVP_OFF & _BODEN_ON & _MCLR_ON & _PWRTE_ON & _WDT_OFF & _INTRC_IO ;Program Configuration Register 2 __CONFIG    _CONFIG2, _IESO_OFF & _FCMEN_OFF ; Bank 0 RAM DIGITAL            equ    H'20'    ; storage FIRST            equ    H'21'    ; first run CUT_M            equ    H'22'    ; cutout voltage high byte CUT_L              equ    H'23'    ; cutout voltage low byte FLOAT_H            equ    H'24'    ; float voltage high byte FLOAT_L            equ    H'25'    ; float voltage low byte COMP            equ    H'26'    ; compensation (temperature) BATT_HI            equ    H'27'    ; battery volts high byte BATT_LO            equ    H'28'    ; battery low byte DELCNT            equ    H'29'    ; delay counter FLASHER            equ    H'2A'    ; LED flasher timer TEMPERATURE        equ    H'2B'    ; temperature reading deg C THERMISTOR        equ    H'2C'    ; thermistor flag for LED CUT_COMP_M        equ    H'2D'    ; cutout temp. compensated voltage high byte CUT_COMP_L         equ    H'2E'    ; cutout temp. compensated voltage low byte FLOAT_COMP_M    equ    H'2F'    ; float temp. compensated voltage high byte FLOAT_COMP_L    equ    H'30'    ; float temp. compensated voltage low byte NEGATIVE        equ    H'31'    ; subtract negative flag VALUE_1            equ    H'32'    ; delay counter VALUE_2            equ    H'33'    ; delay counter HOUR0            equ    H'34'    ; hour counter HOUR1            equ    H'35'    ; 14 seconds counter for hour counter (256 x 14s=1hour) SENSOR_COUNT    equ    H'36'    ; sensor counter for periodic checking SENSOR_COUNT1    equ    H'37'    ; sensor counter for periodic checking CELL_LO            equ    H'38'    ; solar cell voltage ls byte CELL_HI            equ    H'39'    ; solar cell voltage ms byte CELL_I_LO        equ    H'3A'    ; solar cell current ls byte CELL_I_HI        equ    H'3B'    ; solar cell current ms byte CHARGE_STATE    equ    H'3C'    ; 0 charge, 1 float CHARGE_FLAG        equ    H'3D'    ; flag for charge CHRG_RATE        equ    H'3E'    ; charge change rate CELL_V            equ    H'3F'    ; solar cell voltage 8-bit CELL_I            equ    H'40'    ; solar cell current 8-bit PERIOD            equ    H'41'    ; power calculation rate CCPR1_STORE        equ    H'42'    ; CCPR1L storage value POWERH            equ    H'43'    ; power ms byte POWERL            equ    H'44'    ; power ls byte VALUE1            equ    H'45'    ; temporary value VALUE2            equ    H'46'    ; temporary value VALUE3            equ    H'47'    ; temporary value VALUE4            equ    H'48'    ; temporary value EQ_FLAG            equ    H'49'    ; equalisation flag EQ_LO            equ    H'4A'    ; ls byte EQ battery voltage EQ_HI            equ    H'4B'    ; ms byte EQ battery voltage EQ_LO_COMP        equ    H'4C'    ; ls byte temp. compensated EQ battery voltage EQ_HI_COMP        equ    H'4D'    ; ms byte temp. compensated EQ battery voltage EQ_LEVEL        equ    H'4E'    ; equalisation input (RB4) level store BATT_IND        equ    H'4F'    ; battery indicator flag when error BURST_FLG        equ    H'50'    ; burst flag HOUR3            equ    H'51'    ; 4 hour counter HOUR2            equ    H'52'    ; 56 seconds counter for hour counter (256 x 56s=1hour) BULK_TIMER        equ    H'53'    ; bulk charge timer (60s) BULK_TIMER_END    equ    H'54'    ; bulk timer ended flag ; math routines TEMP1            equ    H'5C' TEMPB0            equ    H'5D' TEMPB1            equ    H'5E' TEMPB2            equ    H'5F' TEMP            equ H'60' REMB3            equ H'61' REMB2            equ    H'62' REMB1              equ H'63' REMB0            equ    H'64' AARGB5            equ    H'65' AARGB4          equ H'66' AARGB3            equ    H'67' AARGB2          equ H'68' AARGB1          equ H'69' AARGB0          equ H'6A'    ; most significant byte of argument A BARGB3          equ H'6B' BARGB2          equ H'6C' BARGB1          equ H'6D' BARGB0          equ H'6E'    ; most significant byte of argument B LOOPCOUNT       equ H'6F'      ; division counter ; All Banks RAM ; Interrupt store registers W_TMP            equ    H'70'    ; storage of w before interrupt STATUS_TMP        equ    H'71'    ; status storage before interrupt ; start at memory 0 org    0 goto    SETUP org    4 goto    INTERRUPT ; position the lookup table at start to avoid a 256 bit boundary TEMP_CONV ; convert A/D values to deg C based on thermistor R=Ae**(B/T) where (T is in K ie deg C plus 273) ; A =0.01058 and B is 4100 addwf    PCL,f    ; add value to program counter ; 60 deg C max retlw    D'60'    ; 60deg C for A/D D49 (8-bit) retlw    D'59'    ; deg C for A/D D50(8-bit) retlw    D'58'    ; deg C for A/D D51(8-bit) retlw    D'58'    ; deg C for A/D D52(8-bit) retlw    D'57'    ; deg C for A/D D53(8-bit) retlw    D'57'    ; deg C for A/D D54(8-bit) retlw    D'56'    ; deg C for A/D D55(8-bit) retlw    D'56'    ; deg C for A/D D56(8-bit) retlw    D'55'    ; deg C for A/D D57(8-bit) retlw    D'54'    ; deg C for A/D D58(8-bit) retlw    D'54'    ; 54 deg C for A/D D59(8-bit) retlw    D'53'    ; deg C for A/D D60(8-bit) retlw    D'53'    ; deg C for A/D D61(8-bit) retlw    D'52'    ; deg C for A/D D62(8-bit) retlw    D'52'    ; deg C for A/D D63(8-bit) retlw    D'51'    ; deg C for A/D D64(8-bit) retlw    D'50'    ; deg C for A/D D65(8-bit) retlw    D'50'    ; deg C for A/D D66(8-bit) retlw    D'50'    ; deg C for A/D D67(8-bit) retlw    D'49'    ; deg C for A/D D68(8-bit) retlw    D'49'    ; deg C for A/D D69(8-bit) retlw    D'48'    ; 48 deg C for A/D D70(8-bit) retlw    D'48'    ; deg C for A/D D71(8-bit) retlw    D'47'    ; deg C for A/D D72(8-bit) retlw    D'47'    ; deg C for A/D D73(8-bit) retlw    D'46'    ; deg C for A/D D74(8-bit) retlw    D'46'    ; deg C for A/D D75(8-bit) retlw    D'45'    ; deg C for A/D D76(8-bit) retlw    D'45'    ; deg C for A/D D77(8-bit) retlw    D'44'    ; deg C for A/D D78(8-bit) retlw    D'44'    ; deg C for A/D D79(8-bit) retlw    D'43'    ; deg C for A/D D80(8-bit) retlw    D'43'    ; deg C for A/D D81(8-bit) retlw    D'43'    ; deg C for A/D D82(8-bit) retlw    D'42'    ; deg C for A/D D83(8-bit) retlw    D'42'    ; deg C for A/D D84(8-bit) retlw    D'41'    ; deg C for A/D D85(8-bit) retlw    D'41'    ; deg C for A/D D86(8-bit) retlw    D'40'    ; deg C for A/D D87(8-bit) retlw    D'40'    ; deg C for A/D D88(8-bit) retlw    D'40'    ; 40 deg C for A/D D89(8-bit) retlw    D'39'    ; deg C for A/D D90(8-bit) retlw    D'39'    ; deg C for A/D D91(8-bit) retlw    D'38'    ; deg C for A/D D92(8-bit) retlw    D'38'    ; deg C for A/D D93(8-bit) retlw    D'38'    ; deg C for A/D D94(8-bit) retlw    D'37'    ; deg C for A/D D95(8-bit) retlw    D'37'    ; deg C for A/D D96(8-bit) retlw    D'36'    ; deg C for A/D D97(8-bit) retlw    D'36'    ; deg C for A/D D98(8-bit) retlw    D'36'    ; deg C for A/D D99(8-bit) retlw    D'35'    ; deg C for A/D D100(8-bit) retlw    D'35'    ; deg C for A/D D101(8-bit) retlw    D'34'    ; deg C for A/D D102(8-bit) retlw    D'34'    ; deg C for A/D D103(8-bit) retlw    D'34'    ; deg C for A/D D104(8-bit) retlw    D'33'    ; deg C for A/D D105(8-bit) retlw    D'33'    ; deg C for A/D D106(8-bit) retlw    D'33'    ; deg C for A/D D107(8-bit) retlw    D'32'    ; deg C for A/D D108(8-bit) retlw    D'32'    ; 32 deg C for A/D D109(8-bit) retlw    D'32'    ; deg C for A/D D110(8-bit) retlw    D'31'    ; deg C for A/D D111(8-bit) retlw    D'31'    ; deg C for A/D D112(8-bit) retlw    D'30'    ; deg C for A/D D113(8-bit) retlw    D'30'    ; deg C for A/D D114(8-bit) retlw    D'30'    ; deg C for A/D D115(8-bit) retlw    D'29'    ; deg C for A/D D116(8-bit) retlw    D'29'    ; deg C for A/D D117(8-bit) retlw    D'29'    ; deg C for A/D D118(8-bit) retlw    D'28'    ; deg C for A/D D119(8-bit) retlw    D'28'    ; deg C for A/D D120(8-bit) retlw    D'28'    ; deg C for A/D D121(8-bit) retlw    D'27'    ; deg C for A/D D122(8-bit) retlw    D'27'    ; deg C for A/D D123(8-bit) retlw    D'27'    ; deg C for A/D D124(8-bit) retlw    D'26'    ; deg C for A/D D125(8-bit) retlw    D'26'    ; deg C for A/D D126(8-bit) retlw    D'26'    ; deg C for A/D D127(8-bit) retlw    D'25'    ; deg C for A/D D128(8-bit) retlw    D'25'    ; deg C for A/D D129(8-bit) retlw    D'24'    ; deg C for A/D D130(8-bit) retlw    D'24'    ; deg C for A/D D131(8-bit) retlw    D'24'    ; deg C for A/D D132(8-bit) retlw    D'24'    ; deg C for A/D D133(8-bit) retlw    D'23'    ; deg C for A/D D134(8-bit) retlw    D'23'    ; deg C for A/D D135(8-bit) retlw    D'23'    ; deg C for A/D D136(8-bit) retlw    D'22'    ; deg C for A/D D137(8-bit) retlw    D'22'    ; deg C for A/D D138(8-bit) retlw    D'22'    ; deg C for A/D D139(8-bit) retlw    D'21'    ; deg C for A/D D140(8-bit) retlw    D'21'    ; deg C for A/D D141(8-bit) retlw    D'21'    ; deg C for A/D D142(8-bit) retlw    D'20'    ; deg C for A/D D143(8-bit) retlw    D'20'    ; deg C for A/D D144(8-bit) retlw    D'20'    ; deg C for A/D D145(8-bit) retlw    D'19'    ; deg C for A/D D146(8-bit) retlw    D'19'    ; deg C for A/D D147(8-bit) retlw    D'19'    ; deg C for A/D D148(8-bit) retlw    D'18'    ; deg C for A/D D149(8-bit) retlw    D'18'    ; deg C for A/D D150(8-bit) retlw    D'18'    ; deg C for A/D D151(8-bit) retlw    D'17'    ; deg C for A/D D152(8-bit) retlw    D'17'    ; deg C for A/D D153(8-bit) retlw    D'17'    ; deg C for A/D D154(8-bit) retlw    D'16'    ; deg C for A/D D155(8-bit) retlw    D'16'    ; deg C for A/D D156(8-bit) retlw    D'16'    ; deg C for A/D D157(8-bit) retlw    D'15'    ; deg C for A/D D158(8-bit) retlw    D'15'    ; deg C for A/D D159(8-bit) retlw    D'15'    ; deg C for A/D D160(8-bit) retlw    D'14'    ; deg C for A/D D161(8-bit) retlw    D'14'    ; deg C for A/D D162(8-bit) retlw    D'14'    ; deg C for A/D D163(8-bit) retlw    D'13'    ; deg C for A/D D164(8-bit) retlw    D'13'    ; deg C for A/D D165(8-bit) retlw    D'13'    ; deg C for A/D D166(8-bit) retlw    D'12'    ; deg C for A/D D167(8-bit) retlw    D'12'    ; deg C for A/D D168(8-bit) retlw    D'12'    ; deg C for A/D D169(8-bit) retlw    D'11'    ; deg C for A/D D170(8-bit) retlw    D'11'    ; deg C for A/D D171(8-bit) retlw    D'11'    ; deg C for A/D D172(8-bit) retlw    D'10'    ; deg C for A/D D173(8-bit) retlw    D'10'    ; deg C for A/D D174(8-bit) retlw    D'10'    ; deg C for A/D D175(8-bit) retlw    D'9'    ; deg C for A/D D176(8-bit) retlw    D'9'    ; deg C for A/D D177(8-bit) retlw    D'8'    ; deg C for A/D D178(8-bit) retlw    D'8'    ; 8 deg C for A/D D179(8-bit) retlw    D'8'    ; deg C for A/D D180(8-bit) retlw    D'7'    ; deg C for A/D D181(8-bit) retlw    D'7'    ; deg C for A/D D182(8-bit) retlw    D'7'    ; deg C for A/D D183(8-bit) retlw    D'6'    ; deg C for A/D D184(8-bit) retlw    D'6'    ; deg C for A/D D185(8-bit) retlw    D'6'    ; deg C for A/D D186(8-bit) retlw    D'5'    ; deg C for A/D D187(8-bit) retlw    D'5'    ; deg C for A/D D188(8-bit) retlw    D'4'    ; 4 deg C for A/D D189(8-bit) retlw    D'4'    ; deg C for A/D D190(8-bit) retlw    D'4'    ; deg C for A/D D191(8-bit) retlw    D'3'    ; deg C for A/D D192(8-bit) retlw    D'3'    ; deg C for A/D D193(8-bit) retlw    D'2'    ; deg C for A/D D194(8-bit) retlw    D'2'    ; deg C for A/D D195(8-bit) retlw    D'2'    ; deg C for A/D D196(8-bit) retlw    D'1'    ; deg C for A/D D197(8-bit) retlw    D'1'    ; deg C for A/D D198(8-bit) retlw    D'0'    ; deg C for A/D D199(8-bit) ; 0 deg C min retlw    D'0'    ; 0 deg C for A/D D200(8-bit) ;********************************************************************************************** SETUP clrf    PORTB        ; outputs low clrf    PORTA ; set inputs/outputs bsf        STATUS,RP0    ; select memory bank 1 movlw    B'00000111'    ; comparators off movwf    CMCON movlw    B'00010011'    ; port B outputs/ inputs set movwf    TRISB        ; port B data direction register movlw    B'00111111'    ; outputs (0) and inputs (1) movwf    TRISA        ; port A data direction register movlw    B'00000111'    ; settings (pullups enabled, TMR0/256) movwf    OPTION_REG ; analog inputs, A/D movlw    B'00011111'    ; AN0 to AN4 are analog inputs movwf    ANSEL ;    movlw    B'10000000'    ; * 4MHz operation right justified A/D result, Vdd to Vss A/D movlw    B'11000000'    ; ** 8MHz operation right justified A/D result, Vdd to Vss A/D movwf    ADCON1 bcf        STATUS,RP0    ; select memory bank 0 movlw    B'01000000'    ; Fosc, channel 0 etc movwf    ADCON0 bsf        ADCON0,ADON    ; A/D on bsf        STATUS,RP0    ; select memory bank 1 ;    movlw    B'01101000'    ; * 4MHz operation movlw    B'01111000'    ; ** 8MHz operation 8MHz movwf    OSCCON        ; bcf        STATUS,RP0    ; select memory bank 0 ; timer 1 ;    movlw    B'00100001'    ; * 4MHz operation timer 1 prescaler /4, fosc/4 movlw    B'00110001'    ; ** 8MHz operation timer 1 prescaler /8, fosc/4 movwf    T1CON bsf        T1CON,0        ; timer 1 on bsf        STATUS,RP0    ; select memory bank 1 ;    movlw    H'1F'        ; * 4MHz operation 31.24kHz pwm rate 7-bit resolution movlw    H'3F'        ; ** 8MHz operation 31.24kHz pwm rate 8-bit resolution movwf    PR2            ; PWM period register bcf        STATUS,RP0    ; memory bank 0 ; pwm set clrf    CCPR1L        ; duty 0% Mosfet off bcf        CCP1CON,4 bcf        CCP1CON,5    ; clear 10-bits clrf    T2CON bsf        T2CON,2        ; enable timer 2 movlw    B'00001100'    ; set PWM mode movwf    CCP1CON        ; enable PWM operation ; initial conditions INITIAL clrf    PORTB clrf    PORTA clrf    THERMISTOR        ; thermistor flags movlw    D'1' movwf    SENSOR_COUNT    ; counter ready to zero on next decrement movwf    SENSOR_COUNT1 clrf    CHARGE_STATE    ; start at main Bulk ( 0 main Bulk, 1 float) clrf    CHARGE_FLAG        ; flag for charge movlw    D'5'            ; 5 x 0.262ms movwf    PERIOD            ; period counter for solar cell power calculations clrf    CCPR1_STORE        ; CCPR1L storage clrf    FIRST            ; first run clrf    POWERH            ; power ms byte clrf    POWERL            ; power ls byte clrf    FLASHER            ; flash timer clrf    CHRG_RATE        ; charge rate flag clrf    HOUR0            ; hour counter clrf    HOUR1            ; 14s counter for hour0 counter clrf    HOUR2            ; 56s counter for 4 hour counter clrf    HOUR3            ; 4- hour timer clrf    EQ_FLAG            ; equalisation flag bsf        EQ_FLAG,0        ; equalisation flag.0 Does not run equalisation when set clrf    EQ_LEVEL        ; equalisation input level store clrf    BATT_IND        ; no battery error when clear clrf    BURST_FLG        ; no burst clrf    BULK_TIMER        ; bulk charge timer clrf    BULK_TIMER_END    ; bulk timer ended flag ; load SLA preset values ; battery voltage reduced to 0.3125 so 14.4V becomes 4.50V and D920 (H398) with A/D conversion (10-bit) movlw    H'03' movwf    CUT_M        ; cutout SLA voltage high byte 14.4V movlw    H'98' movwf    CUT_L        ; cutout SLA voltage low byte movlw    H'03' movwf    FLOAT_H        ; float SLA voltage high byte 13.5V movlw    H'5F' movwf    FLOAT_L        ; float SLA voltage low byte movlw    H'03' movwf    EQ_HI        ; Equalsiation voltage high byte (14.4V x 10%)= 15.84V movlw    H'F4' movwf    EQ_LO        ; Equalisation voltage low byte ALLOW_INTERRUPTS ; allow interrupts bsf        STATUS,RP0        ; select memory bank 1 bsf        PIE1,TMR1IE        ; timer 1 overflow interrupt enable bcf        STATUS,RP0        ; select memory bank 0 bcf        PIR1,TMR1IF        ; timer 1 interrupt flag bsf        INTCON,PEIE        ; enable periperal interrupts bsf        INTCON,GIE        ; enable global interrupts ;******************************************************* CYCLE ; beginining of normal running loop ; sensors checked periodically decfsz    SENSOR_COUNT,f goto    CHARGE_MODE decfsz    SENSOR_COUNT1,f goto    CHARGE_MODE        ; when both zero ;    movlw    D'4'            ; * 4MHz operation movlw    D'8'            ; ** 8MHz operation movwf    SENSOR_COUNT1    ; set period to about 500ms SENSORS ; equalisation input btfss    PORTB,4        ; equalisation input selection goto    LOW_IN btfss    EQ_LEVEL,4    ; input store goto    HI_IN ; if portB,4 is high and EQ_LEVEL,4 is also high set EQ_FLAG,0 (no equalisation) clrf    EQ_FLAG bsf        EQ_FLAG,0    ; no equalisation when flag is set (PORTB,4 is high) goto    CH_1AD LOW_IN btfss    EQ_LEVEL,4 goto    CH_1AD        ; if portB,4 and EQ_LEVEL,4 both low ignore ; if portB,4 is low and EQ_LEVEL,4 is high, run delay and check again. call     DELAY btfsc    PORTB,4 goto    CH_1AD        ; If portB,4 high ignore ; if portB,4 remains low clear EQ_LEVEL,4 and clear EQ_FLAG (level change from h/l) clrf    EQ_LEVEL    ; store new portB,4 level clrf    EQ_FLAG        ; equalisation flag clear for equalisation ; level change from H/L indicates equalisation required ; flash LEDS bcf        INTCON,GIE        ; stop interrupt bcf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bsf        PORTB,6            ; equalisation LED on call    DELAY bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off call    DELAY bsf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED on call     DELAY bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off call    DELAY bsf        INTCON,GIE        ; interrupt starts again goto    CH_1AD HI_IN ; if portB,4 is high and EQ_LEVEL,4 is low, run delay and check again. call     DELAY btfss    PORTB,4 goto    CH_1AD            ; portB,4 low so bypass ; If portB,4 is still high, set EQ_LEVEL,4 and set EQ_FLAG,0 (no equalisation) bsf        EQ_LEVEL,4         ; store portB,4 level bsf        EQ_FLAG,0        ; no equalisation ; Channel 1 A/D value(mV/deg C Compensation) ; compensation calculated as (Comp/50) x 255 CH_1AD ; set analog input address bcf        ADCON0,5 bcf        ADCON0,4 bsf        ADCON0,3        ; call    DEL_AD            ; convert to digital ls bits in 'DIGITAL' ; reduce from 10-bit to 8-bit rrf        ADRESH,f        ; move right ls byte rrf        DIGITAL,f        ; ls byte moved right rrf        ADRESH,f        ; move right ls byte rrf        DIGITAL,f        ; ls byte moved right ; write compensation value movf    DIGITAL,w        ; 8-bit byte movwf    COMP            ; mV/deg C SLA compensation ; Channel 4 A/D value (thermistor (temperature)) CH_4AD ; set analog input address bsf        ADCON0,5 bcf        ADCON0,4 bcf        ADCON0,3        ; A/D No.4 call    DEL_AD            ; convert to digital ls bits in 'DIGITAL' ; change from 10-bit to 8-bit rrf        ADRESH,f        ; move right ls byte rrf        DIGITAL,f        ; ls byte moved right rrf        ADRESH,f        ; move right ls byte rrf        DIGITAL,f        ; ls byte moved right ; check for thermistor out of circuit movf    DIGITAL,w sublw    D'250'            ; >250 bcf        INTCON,GIE        ; stop interrupt clrf    THERMISTOR        ; clear value btfsc    STATUS,C goto    CK_ZRO bsf        THERMISTOR,0    ; set bit 0 when out of circuit goto    BY_ZRO ; check for zero degrees or less CK_ZRO movf    DIGITAL,w sublw    D'199'            ; >199 movlw    D'199'            ; keep at 0 degrees btfss    STATUS,C movwf    DIGITAL            ; keep at 0 degrees C so compensation plateaus below 0 degrees C ; check for thermistor short circuit movlw    D'04' subwf    DIGITAL,w        ; if less than 4 btfss    STATUS,C bsf        THERMISTOR,1    ; set when short circuit BY_ZRO TEMP_CONV1 bsf        INTCON,GIE        ; allow interrupt ; convert to temperature movf    DIGITAL,w sublw    D'199'            ; take from 199 if negative then >200 so set at 200 movlw    D'200'            ; ready to load if >200 btfss    STATUS,C movwf    DIGITAL movlw    D'49'            ; minimum value subwf    DIGITAL,f        ; take away 49 from A/D value btfss    STATUS,C        ; if minus then >60 deg C so set at 60deg clrf    DIGITAL            ; 0 so 60 deg C in lookup table movf    DIGITAL,w call    TEMP_CONV        ; convert reading to temperature in deg C movwf    TEMPERATURE        ; store value ; find compensation requirement with temperature difference from 20 deg C ; multiplied by D100 and divided by D8000 to calculate mV/deg C for cutout and float voltages ; this is added (for <20 deg C) or subtracted (for >20deg C) from cutoff and float Voltages. ; take away 20 deg C clrf    NEGATIVE        ; subtract flag movlw    D'20'            ; 20 deg C subwf    TEMPERATURE,w    ; btfss    STATUS,C        ; if negative then less than 20 deg C bsf        NEGATIVE,7 ; (temperature - 20) x 100 movwf    AARGB0 ; if negative then subtract from 20 btfss    NEGATIVE,7 goto    CONTINUE1 movf    TEMPERATURE,w sublw    D'20'            ; temperature from 20 movwf    AARGB0 CONTINUE1 ; multiply temperature difference from 20 deg C (in AARGB0) by compensation value movf    COMP,w movwf    BARGB0 call    EIGHTEIGHT ; result in AARGB0,AARGB1 ; shift result movf    AARGB1,w movwf    AARGB2 movf    AARGB0,w movwf    AARGB1 clrf    AARGB0 ; Multiply by 100 movlw    D'100' movwf    BARGB2 clrf    BARGB1 clrf    BARGB0 call    FXM2424U        ; multiply ; shift result for division movf    AARGB2,w        ; ms of multiplication movwf    AARGB0 movf    AARGB3,w        ; ls byte movwf    AARGB1 movf    AARGB4,w        ; ms of multiplication movwf    AARGB2 movf    AARGB5,w        ; ls byte movwf    AARGB3 ; Divide by D8000 = H1F40 clrf    BARGB0 clrf    BARGB1 movlw    H'1F' movwf      BARGB2 movlw    H'40' movwf    BARGB3 call    FXD3232U        ; divide ; cutoff calculations btfsc    NEGATIVE,7        ; if set add value goto    ADD_COMP1 ; take compensation value from cutoff V and place in CUT_COMP_M/LS movf    AARGB3,w        ; result subwf    CUT_L,w movwf    CUT_COMP_L movf    CUT_M,w            ; ms cutout V btfss    STATUS,C decf    CUT_M,w            ; decrease if carry movwf    CUT_COMP_M btfss    CUT_COMP_M,7    ; if bit 7 set then over so clear goto    CHECK_EQ clrf    CUT_COMP_M clrf    CUT_COMP_L ; take compensation value from equalisation voltage and place in EQ_LO_COMP, EQ_HI_COMP CHECK_EQ movf    AARGB3,w        ; result subwf    EQ_LO,w movwf    EQ_LO_COMP movf    EQ_HI,w            ; ms btfss    STATUS,C decf    EQ_HI,w            ; decrease if carry movwf    EQ_HI_COMP btfss    EQ_HI_COMP,7    ; if bit 7 set then over so clear goto    CHECK_FLOAT clrf    EQ_HI_COMP clrf    EQ_LO_COMP goto    CHECK_FLOAT ADD_COMP1 movf    CUT_M,w movwf    CUT_COMP_M movf    AARGB3,w        ; result addwf    CUT_L,w movwf    CUT_COMP_L btfsc    STATUS,C incf    CUT_COMP_M,f    ; increase if carry ; check if over 1024 btfss    CUT_COMP_M,2    ; if bit set over so set at 1023 goto    CHECK_EQ_PLUS movlw    B'00000011'        ; set at 1023 movwf    CUT_COMP_M movlw    H'FF' movwf    CUT_COMP_L CHECK_EQ_PLUS movf    EQ_HI,w movwf    EQ_HI_COMP movf    AARGB3,w        ; result addwf    EQ_LO,w movwf    EQ_LO_COMP btfsc    STATUS,C incf    EQ_HI_COMP,f    ; increase if carry ; check if over 1024 btfss    EQ_HI_COMP,2    ; if bit set over so set at 1023 goto    CHECK_FLOAT movlw    B'00000011'        ; set at 1023 movwf    EQ_HI_COMP movlw    H'FF' movwf    EQ_LO_COMP ; Float calculations CHECK_FLOAT btfsc    NEGATIVE,7        ; if set add value goto    ADD_COMP2 ; take compensation value from float V and place in FLOAT_COMP_M/LS movf    AARGB3,w        ; result subwf    FLOAT_L,w movwf    FLOAT_COMP_L movf    FLOAT_H,w        ; ms float V btfss    STATUS,C decf    FLOAT_H,w        ; decrease if carry movwf    FLOAT_COMP_M btfss    FLOAT_COMP_M,7    ; if bit 7 set then over so clear goto    CH_0AD clrf    FLOAT_COMP_M clrf    FLOAT_COMP_L goto    CH_0AD ADD_COMP2 movf    FLOAT_H,w        ; ms float V to w movwf    FLOAT_COMP_M movf    AARGB3,w        ; result addwf    FLOAT_L,w movwf    FLOAT_COMP_L btfsc    STATUS,C incf    FLOAT_COMP_M,f        ; increase if carry ; check if over 1024 btfss    FLOAT_COMP_M,2    ; if bit set over so set at 1023 goto    CH_0AD movlw    B'00000011'        ; set at 1023 movwf    FLOAT_COMP_M movlw    H'FF' movwf    FLOAT_COMP_L ; Battery voltage, Channel 0 A/D ; voltage at AN2 is 0.3125 of actual measured due to divider ; so 15V is reduced to 4.6875V and results in D960 from A/D converter (10-bit value) ; this divider value sets the other cutoff, float and compensation calculations CH_0AD ; set analog input address bcf        ADCON0,5 bcf        ADCON0,4 bcf        ADCON0,3        ; call    DEL_AD movf    DIGITAL,w movwf    BATT_LO            ; battery voltage ls byte movf    ADRESH,w        ; ms byte movwf    BATT_HI            ; battery voltage ms byte ; check if below 12.45V or about 75% of capacity ; A/D is (D796, H31C). Reset to main Bulk when voltage drops to below 12.45V movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage sublw    H'3'            ; take from movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte sublw    H'1C'            ; 12.45V btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfsc    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then >12.45V goto    BY_BULK_SET clrf    CHARGE_STATE    ; below 12.45V so set for bulk/main charging clrf    BULK_TIMER clrf    BULK_TIMER_END    ; bulk timer ended flag ; end of switched sensors BY_BULK_SET bsf        CHRG_RATE,0        ; charge rate flag set to show new values available ; Charge Control CHARGE_MODE ; if THERMISTOR,1 is set (ie a short circuit) btfss    THERMISTOR,1    ; short circuit thermistor goto    CHK_ZRO_BIT bsf        CHARGE_FLAG,0    ; set charge flag so no charge goto    NO_CHARGE CHK_ZRO_BIT btfss    THERMISTOR,0    ; thermistor out goto    CHK_BATT bsf        CHARGE_FLAG,0    ; set charge flag so no charge goto    NO_CHARGE CHK_BATT ; battery voltage: if low then apply bursts till >10.5V (D671, H29F) ; check if below 10.5V.  10.5V = 29F ;(for testing set values to test at 33F for 13V) movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage sublw    H'2'            ; take from 10.5V (H29F) movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte sublw    H'9F'            ; 10.5V (H29F) btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then >10.5V goto    BURST            ; burst charge till voltage is above 10.5V clrf    BURST_FLG        ; burst flag off (no burst) ; if battery above 15V (usually when an O/C cell) then show Batt. LED ; first check if Equalisation running btfss    EQ_FLAG,1        ; when set equalisation is running so bypass since >15V during eq goto    BATT15 bsf        PORTB,2            ; equalisation and >15V output. High on equalisation goto    MODE_CHARGE BATT15 movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage sublw    H'3'            ; take from 15V movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte sublw    H'BF'            ; 15V btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then >15V goto    MODE_CHARGE1    ; <15V bsf        CHARGE_FLAG,0    ; stop charging bsf        BATT_IND,0        ; Batt. indicator LED on (Flash Bulk LED) bsf        PORTB,2            ; >15V output goto    NO_CHARGE        ; battery voltage high so end charge MODE_CHARGE1 ; test for low battery ; if above 12V (3.75V after division (H2FF)) set RB2 low BATT12 movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage sublw    H'2'            ; take from 12V movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte sublw    H'FF'            ; 12V btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then >12V goto    BATT11.5 bcf        PORTB,2            ; output low at <15V and >12V goto    MODE_CHARGE ; if below 11.5V (3.59V after division (H2DF)) set RB2 high BATT11.5 movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage sublw    H'2'            ; take from 11.5V movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte sublw    H'DF'            ; 11.5V btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then >11.5V bsf        PORTB,2            ; set when <11.5V MODE_CHARGE bcf        BATT_IND,0        ; Batt.indicator LED off ; charge mode ; measure solar cell voltage ; AN2 ; solar cell voltage is divided by a factor of 0.176 ; set analog input address bcf        ADCON0,5 bsf        ADCON0,4 bcf        ADCON0,3        ; call    DEL_AD movf    DIGITAL,w movwf    CELL_LO            ; solar cell voltage ls byte movf    ADRESH,w        ; ms byte movwf    CELL_HI            ; solar cell voltage ms byte ; start charge when solar cell has sufficient voltage. ie about 12V ; check if above 12V D432, H1B0 (solar cell voltage is divided by a factor of 0.176) movf    CELL_HI,w        ; high byte of solar call voltage sublw    H'1'            ; take from movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    CELL_LO,w        ; low byte sublw    H'B0'            ; 12V btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then >12V goto    NO_CHARGE        ; charge off till solar cell ready clrf    HOUR3            ; prevents return to Bulk charge if this is before the end of 4hr timer ; charge; check charge status. Bulk charge or absorption/ float (trickle) clrf    CHARGE_FLAG        ; charging flag movf    CHARGE_STATE,w    ; 0 Bulk, 1 float btfsc    STATUS,Z goto    CHARGE_FULL goto    CHARGE_ABSORP_FLOAT NO_CHARGE bsf        CHARGE_FLAG,0    ; no charge flag clrf    CCPR1L            ; charge off clrf    FIRST movlw    D'5'            ; 5 x 0.262ms movwf    PERIOD ; check if 4-hour timer is set movf    HOUR3,w            ; if zero then not yet set btfss    STATUS,Z goto    CYCLE ; not set bcf        STATUS,GIE        ; stop interrupt ; set timer movlw     H'FF'            ; 256 counts for 4 hours ; ** test timer, remark out for normal 4 hours ;    movlw    H'1'            ; ** about 56 seconds timer. For use as a shorter test period ; ** movwf    HOUR3            ; set 4 hour timer clrf    HOUR2 bsf        STATUS,GIE        ; allow interrupt goto    CYCLE CHARGE_FULL; (CHARGE_STATE = 0) main bulk charge TEST_BATT2 ; compare battery voltage (BATT_HI/LO) with cutout (CUT_COMP_M/L) movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage subwf    CUT_COMP_M,w    ; take from compensated cutout movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte subwf    CUT_COMP_L,w    ; take from compensated cutout btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then battery is over cutout voltage goto    FULL_POWER_RUN ; end of bulk charge btfsc    BULK_TIMER_END,0; bulk timer ended flag. If not set, then bulk charge occurred in <60s ; so clear timer 0 so charging goes to float rather than absorption goto    ABS_TME clrf    HOUR0            ; stop absorption charge clrf    BULK_TIMER_END    ; bulk timer ended flag goto    BY_SET            ; bypass setting the timer for absorption ABS_TME ; absorption timer set clrf    CCPR1L clrf    HOUR1            ; 14 seconds counter movlw     H'FF'            ; 256 counts for 1 hour ; ** test timer, remark out for normal 1hour ;    movlw    H'4'            ; ** about 42-56 seconds timer. For use as a shorter test period ; ** movwf    HOUR0            ; set absorption period @ 1 hour BY_SET movlw    D'5'            ; 5 x 0.262ms movwf    PERIOD goto    CHARGE_ABSORP_FLOAT ; full charge; maintain max power from solar cell during bulk charging ; periodically alter the duty cycle to find power maximum ; store CCPR1L value that provides max power FULL_POWER_RUN ; set 60s timer for bulk charge movf    CHARGE_STATE,w    ; check if bulk btfss    STATUS,Z goto    BY_BULK_TIMER     ; absorption or float so bypass bulk timer movf    BULK_TIMER,w    ; check if timer running btfss    STATUS,Z goto     BY_BULK_TIMER movlw    D'229'            ; 0.262ms x 229 = 60s movwf    BULK_TIMER        ; decreased in interrupt to zero and sets bulk timer ended flag BY_BULK_TIMER movf    PERIOD,w        ; when zero check for maximum power btfss    STATUS,Z        ; goto    CYCLE movf    FIRST,w            ; first run btfss    STATUS,Z        ; when clear goto    CH_3AD clrf    POWERH            ; power clrf    POWERL clrf    CCPR1L            ; drive cleared call    DELAY2            ; time for current reading to drop clrf    CCPR1_STORE movlw    H'FF' movwf    FIRST            ; sets first run ; measure solar cell current ; AN3 CH_3AD ; solar cell current (1V=2.21A) ; set analog input address bcf        ADCON0,5 bsf        ADCON0,4 bsf        ADCON0,3        ; call    DEL_AD movf    DIGITAL,w movwf    CELL_I_LO        ; solar cell current ls byte movf    ADRESH,w        ; ms byte movwf    CELL_I_HI        ; solar cell current ms byte ; AN2 CH_2AD ; solar cell voltage is divided by a factor of 0.176 ; set analog input address bcf        ADCON0,5 bsf        ADCON0,4 bcf        ADCON0,3        ; call    DEL_AD movf    DIGITAL,w movwf    CELL_LO            ; solar cell voltage ls byte movf    ADRESH,w        ; ms byte movwf    CELL_HI            ; solar cell voltage ms byte ; multiply CELL_HI, CELL_LO by CELL_I_HI, CELL_I_LO check for maximum ; set at 8-bit ; solar cell voltage rrf        CELL_HI,w        ; shift ms byte right and store movwf    DIGITAL rrf        CELL_LO,w        ; shift ls byte and store movwf    CELL_V rrf        DIGITAL,w        ; shift stored ms byte rrf        CELL_V,f        ; shift stored ls byte ; solar cell current rrf        CELL_I_HI,w movwf    DIGITAL rrf        CELL_I_LO,w movwf    CELL_I rrf        DIGITAL,w rrf        CELL_I,f ; multiply movf    CELL_V,w movwf    AARGB0 movf    CELL_I,w movwf    BARGB0 call    EIGHTEIGHT ; result is in AARGB0,AARGB1 ; compare with POWERH,POWERL movf    AARGB0,w        ; high byte of power new subwf    POWERH,w        ; take from last power value movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    AARGB1,w        ; low byte subwf    POWERL,w        ; take from last power value btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then new power > old power goto    INC_CHRG        ; increase PWM TRANSFER ; transfer values ; new power is larger than last, transfer to POWERH,POWERL ; transfer CCPR1L into CCPR1_STORE movf    AARGB0,w movwf    POWERH movf    AARGB1,w movwf    POWERL movf    CCPR1L,w movwf    CCPR1_STORE INC_CHRG ; increase charge movf    CCPR1L,w        ; check if maximum sublw    D'64' btfss    STATUS,C        ; if maximum value end of test cycle goto    MAX                ; bypass decrease if 0 incf    CCPR1L,f call    DELAY3              ; allow time to change at I and V inputs goto    CYCLE MAX ; when max power found, set next timer for test period movlw    D'76'            ; D76 = 20s (0.262ms per bit) movwf    PERIOD            ; next 20s clrf    FIRST            ; so runs with first values at start movf    CCPR1_STORE,w movwf    CCPR1L            ; set full charge rate at maximum power goto    CYCLE CHARGE_ABSORP_FLOAT; (CHARGE_STATE = 1) movlw    D'01' movwf    CHARGE_STATE    ; absorption/float mode set when coming from full mode clrf    BULK_TIMER_END    ; bulk timer ended flag ; Measure battery Voltage ; set analog input address bcf        ADCON0,5 bcf        ADCON0,4 bcf        ADCON0,3        ; call    DEL_AD movf    DIGITAL,w movwf    BATT_LO            ; battery voltage ls byte movf    ADRESH,w        ; ms byte movwf    BATT_HI            ; battery voltage ms byte ; if battery voltage is D1023 (H3FF) then over in value movf    BATT_HI,w        ; ms byte xorlw    H'03'            ; 3 btfss    STATUS,Z goto    TEST_BATT3        ; not equal movf    BATT_LO,w xorlw    H'FF' btfsc    STATUS,Z goto    NO_CHARGE        ; battery voltage high so end charge TEST_BATT3 ; alter CHARGE_CONT to adjust the drive to maintain float V ; set values to 8-bit ; battery rrf        BATT_HI,w movwf    VALUE1 rrf        BATT_LO,w        ; get value difference movwf    VALUE2 rrf        VALUE1,w rrf        VALUE2,f ; check hour timer. If still timing then absorption. if timer ended (hour0=0) then float movf    HOUR0,w btfsc    STATUS,Z goto    FLOAT_VALUES ; check Equalisation or Absorption btfsc    EQ_LEVEL,4        ; when low run equalisation unless already run (EQ_FLAG,0 set) goto    ABSORPTION_VALUES btfsc    EQ_FLAG,0        ; if flag is set equalisation has already run so bypass to absorption goto    ABSORPTION_VALUES EQUALISATION_VALUES bsf        EQ_FLAG,1        ; equalisation started flag so LED lights ; equalisation rrf        EQ_HI_COMP,w movwf    VALUE3 rrf        EQ_LO_COMP,w    ; get value difference movwf    VALUE4 rrf        VALUE3,w rrf        VALUE4,f ; compare battery with compensated cutoff V movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage subwf    EQ_HI_COMP,w     ; take from compensated equalisation Voltage movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte subwf    EQ_LO_COMP,w    ; take from compensated V btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then battery voltage is over cut voltage goto    PWM_CONTROL        ; control power goto    DECREASE_CHARGE ABSORPTION_VALUES bcf        EQ_FLAG,1        ; clear so equaliser LEDs off ; absorption rrf        CUT_COMP_M,w movwf    VALUE3 rrf        CUT_COMP_L,w    ; get value difference movwf    VALUE4 rrf        VALUE3,w rrf        VALUE4,f ; compare battery with compensated cutoff V movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage subwf    CUT_COMP_M,w     ; take from compensated cut V movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte subwf    CUT_COMP_L,w    ; take from compensated cut V btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfss    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then battery voltage is over cut voltage goto    PWM_CONTROL        ; control power goto    DECREASE_CHARGE FLOAT_VALUES bsf        EQ_FLAG,0        ; equalisation no run flag set so no further equalisation occurs until reset btfsc    EQ_FLAG,1        ; if running flag set set bit 2 bsf        EQ_FLAG,2        ; allows EQ LED to flash bcf        EQ_FLAG,1        ; equalisation flag for eq running indicator LED ; float rrf        FLOAT_COMP_M,w movwf    VALUE3 rrf        FLOAT_COMP_L,w    ; get value difference movwf    VALUE4 rrf        VALUE3,w rrf        VALUE4,f ; compare battery with float V movf    BATT_HI,w        ; high byte of battery voltage subwf    FLOAT_COMP_M,w     ; take from compensated float movwf    DIGITAL            ; store movf    BATT_LO,w        ; low byte subwf    FLOAT_COMP_L,w    ; take from compensated float V btfss    STATUS,C decf    DIGITAL,f        ; decrease if required btfsc    DIGITAL,7        ; if set then battery voltage is over cut voltage goto    DECREASE_CHARGE ; check RB1 for return to bulk charge after drawing current when in float btfsc    PORTB,1 goto    PWM_CONTROL ; compare float control with previous CCPR1 storage during bulk charge movf    CCPR1_STORE,w subwf    CCPR1L,w btfss    STATUS,C goto    PWM_CONTROL        ; clrf    CHARGE_STATE    ; set for bulk/main charging clrf    BULK_TIMER clrf    BULK_TIMER_END    ; bulk timer ended flag goto    CYCLE ; control of PWM other than for full power PWM_CONTROL movf    CCPR1L,w subwf    CCPR1_STORE,w btfss    STATUS,C        ; if over max power point PWM value go to FULL POWER mode goto    FULL_POWER_RUN btfsc    STATUS,Z goto    FULL_POWER_RUN incf    CCPR1L,w sublw    D'64' btfss    STATUS,C goto    FULL_POWER_RUN incf    CCPR1L,f goto    CYCLE ; decrease charge DECREASE_CHARGE movf    VALUE4,w        ; absorption/float 8-bit subwf    VALUE2,f        ; battery 8-bit ; if >3 switch off charge movf    VALUE2,w sublw    D'3' btfss    STATUS,C goto    CLEAR_CHRG        ; over movf    VALUE2,w        ; subtracted value subwf    CCPR1L,w btfss    STATUS,C        ; if negative set at 0 clrw movwf    CCPR1L            ; reduce charge goto    CYCLE CLEAR_CHRG clrf    CCPR1L goto    CYCLE BURST bsf        BURST_FLG,0        ; set flag bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off ; burst pulses of current till voltage >10.5V movf    FLASHER,w        ; flasher counter (0-255 count) andlw    B'00001111'        ; ; only burst is on for 1 in 16 (6.25% on duty cycle) at a 4.2s rate btfss    STATUS,Z goto    BURST_OFF ; Burst on bsf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED on movlw    D'64' movwf    CCPR1L            ; set full charge goto    CYCLE BURST_OFF bcf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED off clrf    CCPR1L goto    CYCLE ;*************************************************** ; INTERRUPT ; start interrupt by saving w and status registers INTERRUPT movwf    W_TMP            ; w to w_tmp storage swapf    STATUS,w        ; status to w movwf    STATUS_TMP        ; status in status_tmp bcf        STATUS,RP0        ; bank select bcf     STATUS,RP1        ; select memory bank 0 bcf        PIR1,TMR1IF        ; clear flag FLASH1 ; flasher rate (increases every 0.262ms) incf    FLASHER,f        ; flasher ; rate for power calculation during charging movf    PERIOD,w        ; period for charging power cycle btfss    STATUS,Z decf    PERIOD,f        ; decrease if not 0 ; flash NTC Thermistor LED(PORTB,5)if required ; check thermistor btfss    THERMISTOR,0    ; when set, thermistor is out of circuit goto    CK_THERM1 ; charge LEDs off bcf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED off bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off ; flash NC thermistor LED movf    FLASHER,w andlw    B'00001111'        ; flash 262ms on each 2 seconds btfsc    STATUS,Z        ; goto    SET_OUT bcf        PORTB,5            ; NTC thermistor LED off goto    CHECK_END SET_OUT bsf        PORTB,5            ; NTC thermistor LED on goto    CHECK_END CK_THERM1 btfss    THERMISTOR,1    ; when set, thermistor is shorted goto    CHARGE_CONDITION ; charge LEDs off bcf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED off bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off ; flash thermistor LED movf    FLASHER,w andlw    B'00000111'        ; flash 262ms on each 1 second btfsc    STATUS,Z goto    SET_OUT1 bcf        PORTB,5            ; NTC thermistor LED off goto    CHECK_END SET_OUT1 bsf        PORTB,5            ; NTC thermistor LED on goto    CHECK_END CHARGE_CONDITION ; check battery error btfss    BATT_IND,0        ; when set flash Bulk LED goto    CHARGE_STATES ; flash Bulk LED ; charging LEDs off bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off ; flash LED movf    FLASHER,w andlw    B'00000111'        ; flash 262ms on each 1 second btfsc    STATUS,Z goto    SET_OUT_CHRG bcf        PORTA,7            ; LED off goto    CHECK_END SET_OUT_CHRG bsf        PORTA,7            ; LED on goto    CHECK_END CHARGE_STATES movf    CHARGE_FLAG,w    ; if zero then charging btfss    STATUS,Z goto    OFF_CHRG ; check burst btfsc    BURST_FLG,0        ; if set burst mode goto    BURST_IND ; check main or trickle btfss    CHARGE_STATE,0    ; clear then main Bulk goto    MAIN_LED ; if HOUR0 is clear then float. Otherwise absorption movf    HOUR0,w btfsc    STATUS,Z goto    FLOAT ; ; Absorption or Equalisation btfss    EQ_FLAG,1        ; when set Equalisation in process goto    ABSORPTION EQUALISATION bcf        PORTB,5            ; NTC thermistor LED off bcf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bsf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED on goto    CHECK_END ABSORPTION bcf        PORTB,5            ; NTC thermistor LED off bcf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off bsf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED on goto    CHECK_END ; FLOAT bcf        PORTB,5            ; NTC thermistor LED off bcf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED off bsf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED on bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off goto    CHECK_END ; MAIN_LED ;(main Bulk) bcf        PORTB,5            ; NTC thermistor LED off bsf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED on bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off goto    CHECK_END ; OFF_CHRG ; charge LEDs off bcf        PORTA,7            ; Bulk LED off BURST_IND ; for burst indication bcf        PORTA,6            ; Absorption LED off bcf        PORTB,7            ; Float LED off bcf        PORTB,6            ; Equalisation LED off ; flash Equalisation LED once run btfss    EQ_FLAG,2        ; equalisation run flag goto    HOUR_TIMER movf    FLASHER,w andlw    B'00001111'        ; flash 262ms on each 2 seconds btfss    STATUS,Z goto    OFF_TIMER bsf        PORTB,6            ; equalisation LED flashes goto    OFF_TIMER        ; bypass hour timer when charge is off CHECK_END ; flash Equalisation LED once run btfss    EQ_FLAG,2        ; equalisation run flag goto    HOUR_TIMER movf    FLASHER,w andlw    B'00001111'        ; flash 262ms on each 2 seconds btfss    STATUS,Z goto    HOUR_TIMER bsf        PORTB,6            ; equalisation LED flashes ; hour timer HOUR_TIMER incf    HOUR1,f            ; seconds movf    HOUR1,w sublw    D'52'            ; 14 seconds btfsc    STATUS,C goto    BULK_TIME clrf    HOUR1            ; cleared when 14-seconds reached movf    HOUR0,w            ; starts at 255 so 256 x 14s = 1 hour btfss    STATUS,Z        ; check if zero decf    HOUR0,f            ; no decrease if already 0 ; decrease bulk timer (used to check if bulk charge < 1 minute BULK_TIME movf    BULK_TIMER,w btfss    STATUS,Z decfsz    BULK_TIMER,f    ; decrease til zero goto    OFF_TIMER bsf        BULK_TIMER_END,0; bulk timer ended flag ; solar panel 4-hour off timer OFF_TIMER ; off timer is included if RB0 is low btfsc    PORTB,0 goto     RECLAIM incf    HOUR2,f            ; seconds movf    HOUR2,w sublw    D'208'            ; 56 seconds btfsc    STATUS,C goto    RECLAIM clrf    HOUR2            ; cleared when 56-seconds reached movf    HOUR3,w            ; starts at 255 so 256 x 56s = 4 hour btfsc    STATUS,Z        ; check if zero goto    RECLAIM            ; no decrease if already 0 decfsz    HOUR3,f            ; goto    RECLAIM clrf    CHARGE_STATE    ; set to Bulk charge after 4 hours off clrf    BULK_TIMER clrf    BULK_TIMER_END    ; bulk timer ended flag RECLAIM ; end of interrupt reclaim w and status swapf    STATUS_TMP,w; status temp storage to w movwf    STATUS        ; w to status register swapf    W_TMP,f        ; swap upper and lower 4-bits in w_tmp swapf   W_TMP,w        ; swap bits and into w register retfie                ; return from interrupt ;************************************************************** ; Subroutines ; delays ; DELAY for A/D acquisition DEL_AD ;    movlw    D'50'            ; * 4MHz operation movlw    D'100'            ; ** 8MHz operation movwf    DELCNT DEL1 decfsz    DELCNT,f goto    DEL1 bsf        ADCON0,2        ; GO/DONE bit start conversion WAIT_CONV1 btfsc    ADCON0,2        ; conversion complete when cleared ~11 cycles goto    WAIT_CONV1 bsf        STATUS,RP0        ; select memory bank 1 movf    ADRESL,w        ; ls bits bcf        STATUS,RP0        ; select memory bank 0 movwf    DIGITAL return ; delay general purpose debounce switch 500ms DELAY ;   movlw    D'2'        ; * 4MHz operation movlw    D'4'        ; ** 8MHz operation number of delay cycles DELAY_1 movwf    DELCNT DELAY_M movlw    D'255'        ; set delay period movwf    VALUE_1        ; VALUE_1 = w LP_1 movlw    D'255'        ; set delay period value 2 movwf    VALUE_2        ; VALUE_2 = w LP_2 decfsz    VALUE_2,f    ; decrease VALUE_2, skip if zero goto     LP_2 decfsz    VALUE_1,f    ; decrease VALUE_1, skip if zero goto    LP_1 decfsz    DELCNT,f goto    DELAY_M return DELAY2 ;    movlw    D'4'        ; * 4MHz operation set delay period movlw    D'8'        ; ** 8MHz operation set delay period movwf    VALUE_1        ; VALUE_1 = w LP_3 movlw    D'255'        ; set delay period value 2 movwf    VALUE_2        ; VALUE_2 = w LP_4 decfsz    VALUE_2,f    ; decrease VALUE_2, skip if zero goto     LP_4 decfsz    VALUE_1,f    ; decrease VALUE_1, skip if zero goto    LP_3 return DELAY3 ;    movlw    D'116'        ; * 4MHz operation movlw    D'58'        ; ** 8MHz operation set delay period value 2 for 50ms max power calc period movwf    VALUE_2        ; VALUE_2 = w LP_5 decfsz    VALUE_2,f    ; decrease VALUE_2, skip if zero goto     LP_5 return ;********************************* ; 24x24 Bit Unsigned Fixed Point Multiply 24x24 -> 48 ; Input: 24 bit unsigned fixed point multiplicand in AARGB0,1,2 ; 24 bit unsigned fixed point multiplier in BARGB0,1,2 ; Use: CALL FXM2424U ; Output: 48 bit unsigned fixed point product in AARGB0 ; Result: AARG <-- AARG x BARG ; Max Timing: 9+501+2 = 512 clks ; Min Timing: 9+150 = 159 clks FXM2424U CLRF     AARGB3 ; clear partial product CLRF     AARGB4 CLRF     AARGB5 MOVF     AARGB0,W MOVWF     TEMPB0 MOVF     AARGB1,W MOVWF     TEMPB1 MOVF     AARGB2,W MOVWF     TEMPB2 MOVLW     H'08' MOVWF     LOOPCOUNT LOOPUM2424A RRF     BARGB2,F BTFSC     STATUS,C GOTO     ALUM2424NAP DECFSZ     LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO    LOOPUM2424A MOVWF     LOOPCOUNT LOOPUM2424B RRF     BARGB1,F BTFSC     STATUS,C GOTO    BLUM2424NAP DECFSZ    LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO    LOOPUM2424B MOVWF    LOOPCOUNT LOOPUM2424C RRF        BARGB0,F BTFSC     STATUS,C GOTO     CLUM2424NAP DECFSZ     LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO     LOOPUM2424C CLRF     AARGB0 CLRF     AARGB1 CLRF     AARGB2 RETLW     0x00 CLUM2424NAP BCF     STATUS,C GOTO     CLUM2424NA BLUM2424NAP BCF     STATUS,C GOTO     BLUM2424NA ALUM2424NAP BCF     STATUS,C GOTO     ALUM2424NA ALOOPUM2424 RRF     BARGB2,F BTFSS     STATUS,C GOTO     ALUM2424NA MOVF     TEMPB2,W ADDWF     AARGB2,F MOVF     TEMPB1,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     TEMPB1,W ADDWF     AARGB1,F MOVF     TEMPB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     TEMPB0,W ADDWF    AARGB0,F ALUM2424NA RRF     AARGB0,F RRF     AARGB1,F RRF     AARGB2,F RRF     AARGB3,F DECFSZ     LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO     ALOOPUM2424 MOVLW     H'08' MOVWF     LOOPCOUNT BLOOPUM2424 RRF     BARGB1,F BTFSS     STATUS,C GOTO     BLUM2424NA MOVF     TEMPB2,W ADDWF     AARGB2,F MOVF     TEMPB1,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     TEMPB1,W ADDWF     AARGB1,F MOVF     TEMPB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     TEMPB0,W ADDWF     AARGB0,F BLUM2424NA RRF     AARGB0,F RRF     AARGB1,F RRF     AARGB2,F RRF     AARGB3,F RRF     AARGB4,F DECFSZ     LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO     BLOOPUM2424 MOVLW     H'08' MOVWF     LOOPCOUNT CLOOPUM2424 RRF     BARGB0,F BTFSS     STATUS,C GOTO     CLUM2424NA MOVF     TEMPB2,W ADDWF     AARGB2,F MOVF     TEMPB1,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     TEMPB1,W ADDWF     AARGB1,F MOVF     TEMPB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     TEMPB0,W ADDWF     AARGB0,F CLUM2424NA RRF     AARGB0,F RRF     AARGB1,F RRF     AARGB2,F RRF     AARGB3,F RRF     AARGB4,F RRF     AARGB5,F DECFSZ     LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO     CLOOPUM2424 return ;******************************** ; 32/32 Bit Unsigned Fixed Point Divide 32/32 -> 32.32 ; Input: 32 bit unsigned fixed point dividend in AARGB0, AARGB1,AARGB2,AARGB3 ; 32 bit unsigned fixed point divisor in BARGB0, BARGB1, BARGB2, BARGB3 ; Use: CALL FXD3232U ; Output: 32 bit unsigned fixed point quotient in AARGB0, AARGB1,AARGB2,AARGB3 ; 32 bit unsigned fixed point remainder in REMB0, REMB1, REMB2, REMB3 ; Result: AARG, REM <-- AARG / BARG ; Max Timing: 4+1025+2 = 1031 clks ; Max Timing: 4+981+2 = 987 clks ; PM: 4+359+1 = 364 DM: 13 FXD3232U CLRF     REMB0 CLRF    REMB1 CLRF     REMB2 CLRF     REMB3 call    UDIV3232L return UDIV3232L ; Max Timing: 24+6*32+31+31+6*32+31+31+6*32+31+31+6*32+31+16 = 1025 clks ; Min Timing: 24+6*31+30+30+6*31+30+30+6*31+30+30+6*31+30+3 = 981 clks ; PM: 359 DM: 13 CLRF     TEMP RLF     AARGB0,W RLF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB3,W SUBWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W SUBWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W SUBWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W SUBWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSS     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' SUBWF     TEMP,F RLF     AARGB0,F MOVLW     H'7' MOVWF     LOOPCOUNT LOOPU3232A RLF     AARGB0,W RLF     REMB3,F RLF     REMB2,F RLF     REMB1,F RLF     REMB0,F RLF     TEMP,F MOVF     BARGB3,W BTFSS     AARGB0,0 GOTO     UADD22LA SUBWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W SUBWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSS    STATUS,C INCFSZ    BARGB1,W SUBWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W SUBWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSS     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' SUBWF     TEMP,F GOTO     UOK22LA UADD22LA ADDWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W ADDWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSC    STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W ADDWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W ADDWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSC     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' ADDWF     TEMP,F UOK22LA RLF        AARGB0,F DECFSZ     LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO     LOOPU3232A RLF     AARGB1,W RLF     REMB3,F RLF     REMB2,F RLF     REMB1,F RLF     REMB0,F RLF     TEMP,F MOVF     BARGB3,W BTFSS     AARGB0,0 GOTO     UADD22L8 SUBWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W SUBWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W SUBWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W SUBWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSS     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' SUBWF     TEMP,F GOTO     UOK22L8 UADD22L8 ADDWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W ADDWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W ADDWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W ADDWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSC     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' ADDWF     TEMP,F UOK22L8 RLF     AARGB1,F MOVLW     H'7' MOVWF     LOOPCOUNT LOOPU3232B RLF     AARGB1,W RLF     REMB3,F RLF     REMB2,F RLF     REMB1,F RLF     REMB0,F RLF     TEMP,F MOVF     BARGB3,W BTFSS     AARGB1,0 GOTO     UADD22LB SUBWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W SUBWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W SUBWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W SUBWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSS     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' SUBWF     TEMP,F GOTO     UOK22LB UADD22LB ADDWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W ADDWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W ADDWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W ADDWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSC     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' ADDWF     TEMP,F UOK22LB RLF     AARGB1,F DECFSZ     LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO     LOOPU3232B RLF     AARGB2,W RLF     REMB3,F RLF     REMB2,F RLF     REMB1,F RLF     REMB0,F RLF     TEMP,F MOVF     BARGB3,W BTFSS    AARGB1,0 GOTO     UADD22L16 SUBWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W SUBWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSS    STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W SUBWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W SUBWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSS     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' SUBWF     TEMP,F GOTO     UOK22L16 UADD22L16 ADDWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W ADDWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W ADDWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W ADDWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSC     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' ADDWF    TEMP,F UOK22L16 RLF        AARGB2,F MOVLW     H'7' MOVWF     LOOPCOUNT LOOPU3232C RLF     AARGB2,W RLF     REMB3,F RLF     REMB2,F RLF     REMB1,F RLF     REMB0,F RLF     TEMP,F MOVF     BARGB3,W BTFSS     AARGB2,0 GOTO     UADD22LC SUBWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W SUBWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSS    STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W SUBWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W SUBWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSS     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' SUBWF     TEMP,F GOTO     UOK22LC UADD22LC ADDWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W ADDWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W ADDWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W ADDWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSC     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' ADDWF     TEMP,F UOK22LC RLF     AARGB2,F DECFSZ     LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO     LOOPU3232C RLF     AARGB3,W RLF     REMB3,F RLF     REMB2,F RLF     REMB1,F RLF     REMB0,F RLF     TEMP,F MOVF     BARGB3,W BTFSS     AARGB2,0 GOTO     UADD22L24 SUBWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W SUBWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W SUBWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSS     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W SUBWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSS     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' SUBWF     TEMP,F GOTO     UOK22L24 UADD22L24 ADDWF     REMB3,F MOVF     BARGB2,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB2,W ADDWF     REMB2,F MOVF     BARGB1,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB1,W ADDWF     REMB1,F MOVF     BARGB0,W BTFSC     STATUS,C INCFSZ     BARGB0,W ADDWF     REMB0,F CLRW BTFSC     STATUS,C MOVLW     H'1' ADDWF     TEMP,F UOK22L24 RLF     AARGB3,F MOVLW     H'7' MOVWF     LOOPCOUNT LOOPU3232D RLF      AARGB3,W RLF        REMB3,F RLF        REMB2,F RLF        REMB1,F RLF        REMB0,F RLF        TEMP,F MOVF       BARGB3,W BTFSS      AARGB3,0 GOTO       UADD22LD SUBWF      REMB3,F MOVF       BARGB2,W BTFSS   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB2,W SUBWF   REMB2,F MOVF    BARGB1,W BTFSS   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB1,W SUBWF   REMB1,F MOVF    BARGB0,W BTFSS   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB0,W SUBWF   REMB0,F CLRW BTFSS   STATUS,C MOVLW   H'1' SUBWF   TEMP,F GOTO    UOK22LD UADD22LD ADDWF   REMB3,F MOVF    BARGB2,W BTFSC   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB2,W ADDWF   REMB2,F MOVF    BARGB1,W BTFSC   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB1,W ADDWF   REMB1,F MOVF    BARGB0,W BTFSC   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB0,W ADDWF   REMB0,F CLRW BTFSC   STATUS,C MOVLW   H'1' ADDWF   TEMP,F UOK22LD RLF     AARGB3,F DECFSZ  LOOPCOUNT, F GOTO    LOOPU3232D BTFSC   AARGB3,0 GOTO    UOK22L MOVF    BARGB3,W ADDWF   REMB3,F MOVF    BARGB2,W BTFSC   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB2,W ADDWF   REMB2,F MOVF    BARGB1,W BTFSC   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB1,W ADDWF   REMB1,F MOVF    BARGB0,W BTFSC   STATUS,C INCFSZ  BARGB0,W ADDWF   REMB0,F UOK22L RETURN ;****************** ; 8 x 8 multiply EIGHTEIGHT      CLRF    AARGB1          ; clear partial product UMUL0808L MOVLW   H'08' MOVWF   LOOPCOUNT MOVF    AARGB0,W LOOPUM0808A RRF     BARGB0, F BTFSC   STATUS,C GOTO    LUM0808NAP DECFSZ  LOOPCOUNT, F GOTO    LOOPUM0808A CLRF    AARGB0 RETLW   H'00' LUM0808NAP BCF     STATUS,C GOTO    LUM0808NA LOOPUM0808 RRF     BARGB0, F BTFSC   STATUS,C ADDWF   AARGB0, F LUM0808NA       RRF        AARGB0, F RRF        AARGB1, F DECFSZ  LOOPCOUNT,F GOTO    LOOPUM0808 return end .HEX :020000040000FA :020000009E2838 :080008001D2B82073C343B3440 :100010003A343A343934393438343834373436347D :100020003634353435343434343433343234323491 :10003000323431343134303430342F342F342E34A0 :100040002E342D342D342C342C342B342B342B34AF :100050002A342A34293429342834283428342734BB :1000600027342634263426342534253424342434C5 :1000700024342334233422342234223421342134CE :1000800021342034203420341F341F341E341E34D5 :100090001E341D341D341D341C341C341C341B34DC :1000A0001B341B341A341A341A34193419341834E2 :1000B00018341834183417341734173416341634E7 :1000C00016341534153415341434143414341334EC :1000D00013341334123412341234113411341134F1 :1000E0001034103410340F340F340F340E340E34F7 :1000F0000E340D340D340D340C340C340C340B34FC :100100000B340B340A340A340A3409340934083401 :100110000834083407340734073406340634063408 :100120000534053404340434043403340334023411 :100130000234023401340134003400348601850174 :10014000831607309C00133086003F30850007304F :1001500081001F309B00C0309F00831240309F0001 :100160001F14831678308F008312313090001014E2 :1001700083163F3092008312950117129712920155 :1001800012150C30970086018501AC010130B600D4 :10019000B700BC01BD010530C100C201A101C3010E :1001A000C401AA01BE01B401B501D201D101C90146 :1001B0004914CE01CF01D001D301D4010330A200F4 :1001C0009830A3000330A4005F30A5000330CB00BB :1001D000F430CA0083160C1483120C100B178B1703 :1001E000B60BD129B70BD1290830B700061EFD2860 :1001F0004E1E1229C901491417294E1E1729B6236C :10020000061A1729CE01C9018B138513861305130E :100210000617B6230613B6230617B6230613B6230E :100220008B171729B623061E17294E1649149F123D :100230001F129F15AA239E0CA00C9E0CA00C200838 :10024000A6009F161F129F11AA239E0CA00C9E0CA5 :10025000A00C2008FA3C8B13AC01031831292C1494 :100260003A292008C73CC730031CA00004302002F4 :10027000031CAC148B172008C73CC830031CA0001B :100280003130A002031CA00120080520AB00B10101 :1002900014302B02031CB117EA00B11F52292B089E :1002A000143CEA002608EE00B0256908E8006A0858 :1002B000E900EA016430EC00ED01EE01D1236808A9 :1002C000EA006708E9006608E8006508E700EE0153 :1002D000ED011F30EC004030EB003824B11B8729C2 :1002E00067082302AE002208031C2203AD00AD1FE5 :1002F0007B29AD01AE0167084A02CC004B08031C04 :100300004B03CD00CD1FA129CD01CC01A12922088D :10031000AD0067082307AE000318AD0A2D1D942910 :100320000330AD00FF30AE004B08CD0067084A0730 :10033000CC000318CD0A4D1DA1290330CD00FF309C :10034000CC00B11BAF2967082502B0002408031CAC :100350002403AF00AF1FBC29AF01B001BC292408A2 :10036000AF0067082507B0000318AF0A2F1DBC298E :100370000330AF00FF30B0009F121F129F11AA235D :100380002008A8001E08A7002708033CA000280892 :100390001C3C031CA003A01BD029BC01D301D40129 :1003A0003E14AC1CD5293D14202A2C1CD9293D14FF :1003B000202A2708023CA00028089F3C031CA00319 :1003C000A01F0E2BD001C91CE7290615082A2708F3 :1003D000033CA0002808BF3C031CA003A01FF42975 :1003E0003D144F140615202A2708023CA0002808B7 :1003F000FF3C031CA003A01FFF290611082A2708A1 :10040000023CA0002808DF3C031CA003A01F061527 :100410004F109F121F169F11AA232008B8001E0814 :10042000B9003908013CA0003808B03C031CA00307 :10043000A01F202AD101BD013C0803192E2A952AAC :100440003D149501A1010530C1005108031DF0289C :100450008313FF30D100D2018317F02827082D0223 :10046000A00028082E02031CA003A01F432A541832 :100470003C2AB401D401402A9501B501FF30B400F3 :100480000530C100952A3C08031D4B2A5308031D63 :100490004B2AE530D3004108031DF0282108031D35 :1004A000582AC301C4019501C323C201FF30A10032 :1004B0009F121F169F15AA232008BA001E08BB0012 :1004C0009F121F169F11AA232008B8001E08B9000A :1004D000390CA000380CBF00200CBF0C3B0CA00056 :1004E0003A0CC000200CC00C3F08EA004008EE00A7 :1004F000B0256A084302A00069084402031CA00357 :10050000A01F882A6A08C3006908C4001508C20031 :100510001508403C031C8F2A950ACC23F0284C3048 :10052000C100A10142089500F0280130BC00D401AF :100530009F121F129F11AA232008A8001E08A700BF :100540002708033A031DA82A2808FF3A0319202A7E :10055000270CC500280CC600450CC60C340803192E :10056000D72A4E1AC62A4918C62AC9144D0CC700E4 :100570004C0CC800470CC80C27084D02A0002808E6 :100580004C02031CA003A01FF42A002BC9102D0C41 :10059000C7002E0CC800470CC80C27082D02A0006D :1005A00028082E02031CA003A01FF42A002B4914C4 :1005B000C9184915C9102F0CC700300CC800470CCA :1005C000C80C27082F02A00028083002031CA00333 :1005D000A01B002B8618F42A42081502031CF42ADB :1005E000BC01D301D401F02815084202031C432AA0 :1005F0000319432A150A403C031C432A950AF02894 :100600004808C6024608033C031C0C2B460815028A :10061000031C03019500F0289501F02850140513E0 :10062000861306132A080F39031D1A2B851740302D :100630009500F02885139501F028F000030EF100D5 :10064000831203130C10AA0A4108031DC1032C1CBA :10065000352B85130513861306132A080F39031942 :10066000332B8612802B8616802BAC1C432B8513D4 :100670000513861306132A0807390319412B86121E :10068000802B8616802B4F1C502B051386130613C8 :100690002A08073903194E2B8513802B8517802BC9 :1006A0003D08031D742B5018752B3C1C6E2B340811 :1006B0000319682BC91C622B861285138613051338 :1006C0000617802B86128513861306130517802BB9 :1006D00086128513861705130613802B861285173D :1006E000051386130613802B851305138613061333 :1006F000491D872B2A080F39031D952B0617952BAB :10070000491D872B2A080F39031D872B0617B50AA9 :100710003508343C0318902BB5013408031DB4038D :100720005308031DD30B952B54140618A52BD20A7E :100730005208D03C0318A52BD20151080319A52B50 :10074000D10BA52BBC01D301D401710E8300F00E97 :10075000700E09006430A900A90BAC2B1F151F19DE :10076000AF2B83161E088312A00008000430A900D6 :10077000FF30B200FF30B300B30BBC2BB20BBA2B6F :10078000A90BB82B08000830B200FF30B300B30B40 :10079000C72BB20BC52B08003A30B300B30BCE2BDE :1007A0000800E701E601E5016A08DD006908DE00EE :1007B0006808DF000830EF00EC0C0318F52BEF0B96 :1007C000DC2BEF00ED0C0318F32BEF0BE22BEF000B :1007D000EE0C0318F12BEF0BE82BEA01E901E8011D :1007E000003403102F2C0310192C0310042CEC0CD4 :1007F000031C042C5F08E8075E0803185E0FE90776 :100800005D0803185D0FEA07EA0CE90CE80CE70C39 :10081000EF0BF72B0830EF00ED0C031C192C5F08D1 :10082000E8075E0803185E0FE9075D0803185D0F0F :10083000EA07EA0CE90CE80CE70CE60CEF0B0C2CD1 :100840000830EF00EE0C031C2F2C5F08E8075E0851 :1008500003185E0FE9075D0803185D0FEA07EA0C4D :10086000E90CE80CE70CE60CE50CEF0B222C080079 :10087000E401E301E201E1013E240800E0016A0D28 :10088000E10D6B08E1026C08031C6C0FE2026D08BD :10089000031C6D0FE3026E08031C6E0FE4020301DC :1008A000031C0130E002EA0D0730EF006A0DE10D94 :1008B000E20DE30DE40DE00D6B086A1C712CE10202 :1008C0006C08031C6C0FE2026D08031C6D0FE30241 :1008D0006E08031C6E0FE4020301031C0130E002EA :1008E000822CE1076C0803186C0FE2076D080318EF :1008F0006D0FE3076E0803186E0FE407030103187A :100900000130E007EA0DEF0B562C690DE10DE20D09 :10091000E30DE40DE00D6B086A1CA02CE1026C08ED :10092000031C6C0FE2026D08031C6D0FE3026E08DE :10093000031C6E0FE4020301031C0130E002B12C22 :10094000E1076C0803186C0FE2076D0803186D0FC0 :10095000E3076E0803186E0FE40703010318013064 :10096000E007E90D0730EF00690DE10DE20DE30D41 :10097000E40DE00D6B08691CCF2CE1026C08031C30 :100980006C0FE2026D08031C6D0FE3026E08031C7E :100990006E0FE4020301031C0130E002E02CE107CA :1009A0006C0803186C0FE2076D0803186D0FE3075E :1009B0006E0803186E0FE407030103180130E00707 :1009C000E90DEF0BB42C680DE10DE20DE30DE40D24 :1009D000E00D6B08691CFE2CE1026C08031C6C0F17 :1009E000E2026D08031C6D0FE3026E08031C6E0F1C :1009F000E4020301031C0130E0020F2DE1076C0843 :100A000003186C0FE2076D0803186D0FE3076E08FB :100A100003186E0FE407030103180130E007E80D27 :100A20000730EF00680DE10DE20DE30DE40DE00D80 :100A30006B08681C2D2DE1026C08031C6C0FE20290 :100A40006D08031C6D0FE3026E08031C6E0FE402B9 :100A50000301031C0130E0023E2DE1076C0803187E :100A60006C0FE2076D0803186D0FE3076E0803189B :100A70006E0FE407030103180130E007E80DEF0BE8 :100A8000122D670DE10DE20DE30DE40DE00D6B0895 :100A9000681C5C2DE1026C08031C6C0FE2026D08FF :100AA000031C6D0FE3026E08031C6E0FE4020301CA :100AB000031C0130E0026D2DE1076C0803186C0F78 :100AC000E2076D0803186D0FE3076E0803186E0F39 :100AD000E407030103180130E007E70D0730EF00DA :100AE000670DE10DE20DE30DE40DE00D6B08671CF1 :100AF0008B2DE1026C08031C6C0FE2026D08031CD5 :100B00006D0FE3026E08031C6E0FE4020301031C69 :100B10000130E0029C2DE1076C0803186C0FE2071E :100B20006D0803186D0FE3076E0803186E0FE407D6 :100B3000030103180130E007E70DEF0B702D671874 :100B4000AF2D6B08E1076C0803186C0FE2076D0806 :100B500003186D0FE3076E0803186E0FE407080013 :100B6000E9010830EF006A08EE0C0318BB2DEF0B0B :100B7000B42DEA0100340310C02DEE0C0318EA076F :0A0B8000EA0CE90CEF0BBD2D080094 :02400E00700F31 :02401000FC3F73 :00000001FF]]> 1874 0 0 0 Sinewave UPS Circuit using PIC16F84A https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sinewave-ups-circuit-using-pic16f84a/ Thu, 13 Oct 2016 06:05:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1882 The main stages of the circuit can be understood from the following points: A PIC16F84A microcontroller stage primarily monitors the frequency generation for the inverter stage. It not only generates the basic 50Hz with utmost accuracy, the microcontroller also becomes responsible for driving power transistors with a pure sinewave frequency (SPWM) ensuring a perfectly optimized sine waveform at the output of the transformer. It also handles the buzzer triggering in the form of intermittent beeps whenever an AC mains failure is detected. The other features are monitored the external opamps which execute the required battery charing and other related protection features of the UPS circuit. The inverter section is built using a basic push pull center tap transformer circuit which is switched alternately using power BJTs to keep things simple and manageable. Mosfets are avoided since mosfets require much stringent PCB designing parameters. pic16f84a-sinewave-INVERTER The HEX codes and the other crucial information for this sinewave UPS circuit using PIC16F84A MCU can be downloaded from the above link:  ]]> 1882 0 0 0 718 0 0 721 http://restaurant-en-livraison92096.qowap.com/6650030/restaurant-delivery-an-overview 0 0 Microcontroller MPPT Circuit for Final Year Project https://makingcircuits.com/blog/microcontroller-mppt-circuit-final-year-project/ Thu, 13 Oct 2016 09:18:08 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1891 Introduction In this contemporary time of intensified improvement of science and technology the growing requirement of power generation has turned into a substantive concern. Renewable energy sources possess prospective of enjoying crucial role in electricity generation aiding pollution free, less noise creating and reduced upkeep energy manufacturing. Solar panels hold the pointed out strengths and can easily be traditionally used anywhere sunshine is obtainable. The output power coming from a solar panel is held in rechargeable battery, from where it is delivered to common home appliances. Even so, the output voltage along with MPPT of the panel may differ with various aspects such as sun irradiation, dirt, heat, etc. which in turn lead to less effective battery charging process. As a result, to acquire maximum energy through solar panel we'd like a maximum power point tracker (MPPT) technique. MPPT adjusts the electrical operating point of the PV panel simply by complementing the solar panel output as well as the input of the storage battery pack. The sychronisation is as a result of a microcontroller (PIC16F72), that looks after the PHOTOVOLTAIC panel and battery situations and produce necessary command signals to offer maximum power to the battery regardless of the output voltage connected with solar panel. MPPT flowchart Fundamental Functioning Fig. 1 exhibits the basic block diagram of the MPPT program. To charge the battery at constant voltage, a DC-DC buck-boost converter is actually powered through the square pulse created from the microcontroller. If output charging voltage for the battery is no more than particular voltage, subsequently duty cycle of the pulse is elevated through the microcontroller to lift the output voltage and conversely. The microcontroller detects output voltage of solar power via path A. This specific sample is commonly employed to discover whether or not the MPPT program must supply charging current for the battery. When the voltage produced through the solar panel is lesser compared to limit in that case the MPPT circuit doesn't provide any kind of charging current or voltage to the battery. Feedback through the input of the battery obtained via feedback path B is utilized to modify the duty cycle of the pulse produced in the microcontroller in ways that the device receive maximum feasible energy from PV panel to offer the battery. Fig. 1 Basic Block Diagram for proposed MPPT System Our offered program includes the important thing contraptions of sampling path, feedback path and blocks as demonstrated in Fig. 1. The in depth schematic diagram for the recommended strategy is highlighted in Fig. 2. They are additionally talked about beneath the individual sub-headings.   MPPT circuit for final year project Buck-Boost Converter A power MOSFET and an inductor (as proven in Fig. 2) are classified as the most critical areas of the MPPT circuit. Considering that the output from IO pins of the microcontroller are not able to push the MOSFETat high frequency, an n-p-n power transistor (BD437) is employed in common emitter arrangement to operate the input to the gate of MOSFET. The output of Buck-Boost converter can easily generate output voltage possibly greater or below the input voltage. This boosts the output voltage in case the voltage through PHOTOVOLTAIC panel is lesser compared to specific charging voltage of the battery; and decreases the voltage in case it is over a expected level enhancing the charging current. The outcome of Buck-Boost converter delivers negative voltage since it functions in inverting topology, i.e. if your input is positive the outcome is going to be negative and the other way round. mppt-waveform The Buck-Boost converter was created for continuous-current function procedure. Picking out switching frequency and inductance to offer steady current throughout the inductor is granted through the following formula Lmin = (1 - D)2R/2f Considering that the ferrite core inductor which was utilized functioned most effective at 100kHz frequency, working frequency (f) had been established at 100kHz. Supposing the resistance (R) in the battery 22Ω, the best charging current 800mA and voltage of 15V and lowest duty-cycle (D) to be 0.01 as authorized within this layout; the lowest inductance required had been determined being 108uH. Nonetheless, an increased inductance (465uH) utilized to make sure that the circuit would not work in discontinuous conduction mode. Different parts employed in this segment tend to be high power P-channel MOSFET (IRF9530), fast recovery switching diode along with a 470uF capacitor. Sampling Path A Sampling Path A is a straightforward voltage divider that ranges the voltage coming from solar panel to reduced degree (under 5V) suitable for applying as an input to microcontroller. Given that highest output voltage coming from solar panel will be 22V, utilizing voltage divider the outcome will be lowered to 20% to make certain that the maximum voltage in no way get across 5V, establishing the resistors value R3 and R4 to 4.7kΩ and 1.2kΩ correspondingly, the microcontroller transforms this specific sampled voltage to electronic digital value and analyzes this together with the reference of 1.62V (equivalent to 8V) to determine whether or not to maintain the MPPT circuit on or off. In case the sampled voltage through the solar panel is lesser compared to limit (1.62V) then your MPPT circuit would not offer any charging current or voltage to the battery. Feedback Path B A straightforward voltage divider can't be employed in this feedback route since the cutting down of negative voltage might furthermore generate negative voltage that is not appropriate for applying as an input to microcontroller. Therefore, a minimal power p-n-p transistor (BC178) had been accustomed to invert and sample the voltage inside the functioning array of PIC microcontroller. The value of resistors R5 as well as R6was established at 10MΩ and 10kΩ correspondingly to ensure that the transistor had been running at linear section. Microcontroller The microcontroller is paramount device of the proposed Microcontroller MPPT Circuit for Final Year Project that analyzes feedback principles with the pre-set principles to tailor-make the duty-cycle of the pulse signal intended for generating the necessary result. The microcontroller functionality is actually determined through the codes developed inside it. The flowchart in Fig. 3 exhibits the format of the software that regulates the operations of the microcontroller. This system have been composed in assembly language making use of the MPLAB software and the in depth program is offered in the file. The sampled voltages through path A and B within the analog input pins tend to be transformed into digital value and weighed against the reference principles to figure out the transformation required in the duty-cycle of the pulse created. These reference values as well as the border restraints of duty-cycle are outlined at the start of this software. A standard register (INITIATION_CHECK) is additionally fixed at low logic during the onset, utilized for process examine. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7]]> 1891 0 0 0 SG3525 Inverter Circuit with Output Voltage Correction https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sg3525-inverter-circuit-output-voltage-correction/ Fri, 14 Oct 2016 08:32:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1906 In this post you will learn how to build a reasonably powerful SG3535 inverter circuit with output correction and also with other protection features such as battery regulation and mosfet overheat protection.

The discussed inverter is actually a system that enables power equipment needing 220V AC during the circumstances of a power outage or scenarios that result in virtually no accessibility to it.

The many included features of this inverter will be liked by folks spending vacation in a outdoor tents or bivouac.

The proposed SG3535 inverter circuit with output correction has been tested practically and worked well with outstanding accuracy.

The prototype was tested with the below mentioned appliances:

• televisions and radio • bulbs, fluorescent lamps, • circulation pumps furnace CO, • power tools (drills, grinders) • computers, • Power.

SG3525 Inverter Circuit with Output Voltage Correction

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Schematic diagram of the inverter exhibits the Fig.1. Voltage 220VAC acquired by means of alternately switching windings of the transformer TS1.

The crucial job is peformed by a couple of MOSFET power transistors from the n channel - T2 and T3. These are operated specifically by the IC US3 (SG 3524).

This set up is IC PWM generator intended specifically for use in voltage converters. The frequency with which it runs correctly is fairly wide and varies from 10 Hz to 300 kHz.

In the scenario explained in this article, this frequency inverter is 50Hz, or responds to the frequency from the power main grid.

This frequency is determined by by the parts R15 and C6. Variable pulse width US3 created through the technique has been employed for voltage stabilization 220VAC output.

Among the voltage stabilizing stages are components D6, D7 and divider Resistance R12 and R13, through which voltage signal moves to the input of the amplifier error (ending IN-) of the US3.

This specific voltage is analyzed with an suitably a divided reference voltage located on the Vref port. This lets "Self Adjust" the generator into the terminal voltage of the battery.

An additional clamping circuit tend to be components D8, R6, PR1, US2, R7, R8, and C4, that happen to be in control of offering a feedback signal relative to load malfunction applicable at the output of the inverter. Inverter with no stabilization might allow the output voltage depend directly soon load power and the degree of discharge of the battery.

The voltage might range from 170V to 270V ~ ~. As a consequence of these protection circuits the unit is able to stabilize voltage at the inverter output in practically any conditions enabling a constant 220 V ~.

Supposing essentially the most undesirable scenario, which may be partial discharge the battery as well as the load of the inverter at 100 % power of 250 W output voltage is probably not going to tumble under 220 V ~.

Switching transistors T2 and T3 are blocking capacitors in the form of C8 and C9, whose job would be to limit the voltage spikes created during the switching of T2 and T3. Further safeguard is delivered by the in-built configurations of the MOSFET diode reverse.

With a load of the order of 200W or 250W, the transistors tend to work with significant amounts of current, causing notable rise in temperatures. For that reason, the inverter is geared up with an active cooling system. As soon as the temperature extends to 40 ° C (which often roughly signifies that the core temperature of the device is 70 ° C), causes the resistance of the sensor which is a PTC thermistor to increase.

This in turn cause the comparator US5 alter the status of the output towards the to a triggering of the transistor T4 whose collector is attached with a cooling fan installed near the heatsink.

Converter system protected against incorrect connection battery terminals. This particular safeguard is accomplished using a diode D1 in the control relay PK1. This circuit stage is additionally utilized as collateral protection against abnormal battery discharge.

In case the value of the input voltage the power supply drops beneath 10.5 V at the end of the 6 US1 voltage begins to develop, thus inhibiting the operation of transistor T1 and, this results in the disconnection of the relay contacts PK1.

LED D5 indicates the triggering of the inverter, while the D4 notifies that the battery is actually overly discharged. Forced to quit in the situation, the inverter system now begins operating only with a single load whose power is optimized appropriately. while protection against short-circuit by means of fuses B1 and B2 appears to be adequate. INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING OF WARNING!! The inverter generates AC voltage 220V, which can be extremely hazardous to life and health. The inverter system is assembled on one single printed circuit board which can be found in Fig.2. Figure 3 exhibits the distribution of components.

Switching transistors T2 and T3 are placed on a plate yet needs to be mounted on a individual heat sink and coupled to the transformer.

Immediately within the heat sink is actually fitted is a PTC thermistor. It appears like with regard to fuses B1 and B2, which may be accessible externally. The inverter is built with quality and standard components so that they work optimally after connecting wth the battery.

All manipulations to the system pertains to your setting potentiometers PR1 and PR2. By using PR1 set output of the inverter voltage to precisely 220V ~. It has to be taken into account that the criticality of right measurement associated with RMS voltage 220V from the inverter is vital.

Because the output waveform will not be a sine wave nevertheless in close proximity to rectangular A number of appliances might have difficulties coping with the RMS value of the output voltage.

For that reason, to measure the voltage go for the meters equipped with "True RMS" measurement feature or employ the oscilloscope. The subsequent potentiometer PR2 needs to be set for the heat sink at a temperature of about 40 ° C. in order to switch ON the connected cooling fan.

The transformer which is used is a toroidal transformer with a couple of set of winding having symmetrical V 10 (secondary winding) and a 220 V (the primary winding).

The inverter no-load really should charge at the rate of current of approx. 300 mA. In case the current drawn tends to be much higher that could indicate asymmetrical winding activation of the transformer TS1 or causing varyations in the triggering of the switching transistors T2, T3.

At the conclusion a few words on the compatibility of the inverter battery. Finding the right battery for the inverter must be paid consideration regarding two parameters.

The first being the highest current drawn from the battery, which might depend on the equipment powered by the inverter.

Each load 10 converter means 1A current usage through the battery. The 2nd aspect is battery capacity or the AH which determines the operating period of the inverter and this must be taken into consideration too.

PCB track and component overlay designs for the proposed SG3535 inverter circuit with output correction can be seen in the following diagrams

layout

pcb

Parts List for the 220V inverter circuit using SG3525 and output voltage correction feature

parts list

parts-lists

]]> 1906 0 0 0 393 0 43 394 0 43 395 393 1 396 0 46 397 396 1 398 0 46 399 398 1 623 0 0 627 https://makingcircuits.com/ 623 1 667 0 0 668 https://makingcircuits.com/ 667 1 669 0 0 670 0 0 671 https://makingcircuits.com/ 669 1 672 https://makingcircuits.com/ 670 1 677 0 0 678 https://makingcircuits.com/ 677 1 680 0 0 689 https://makingcircuits.com/ 680 1 Simple Clap Switch Circuit using Transistors (Tested) https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-clap-switch-circuit-using-transistors-tested/ Tue, 18 Oct 2016 12:52:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1918 How Clap Switch Works Flip flop circuit is built through the use of a couple of Transistor, within our circuit Q2&Q3. Inside a flip-flop circuit, at any given time just one transistor triggers while the other remains cutoff and once it receives a trigger pulse coming from external source subsequently 1st transistor gets switched off and 2nd transistor is activated, therefore output of transistor will either be logic-0 or logic-1 plus it continues to be in a single status 0 or 1 until receives trigger pulse from a clap sound. The pulse wave from a clap, which is converted as a trigger for the bistable flip-flop tends to make variations towards the output status which is contributory (opposite). End result of flip-flop, which can be in the reduced current state may not be able to push a relay so we employ a current amplifier circuit through the use of Q4 this is a common emitter circuit. The trigger from Q4 is linked to a Relay (Electromagnetic switch) that operates similar to a mechanical switch so it gets to be feasible for hooking up various other electrical equipment. The relay contact is actually coupled to the mains power line and therefore it switches on/off just about any electrical appliance attached right through this relay. Simple Clap Switch Part List:- Resistors R1=15 KΩ, R5,R6=1.5 KΩ R2, R11, R12 = 2.2 MΩ, R13=2.2 KΩ R3 = 270 KΩ, R4=3.3 KΩ R7, R8 = 10 KΩ, R9, R10 = 27 KΩ Capacitors C1 = 1000 µf/16v C2 = .01µf, C3, C4 = .047µf Semi Conductors Q1, Q2, Q3 = BC548 D2, D3, D4 = IN4148 D1, D5 = IN4007, Q4 = BC368 Sundries T1 = 12v/500mA Transformer Mic = Condenser Microphone K1 = 12V Relay, B1= Bulb or Load]]> 1918 0 0 0 How to Measure Distance using Arduino (Ultrasonic) https://makingcircuits.com/blog/measure-distance-using-arduino-ultrasonic/ Tue, 18 Oct 2016 15:58:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1921 Sound is actually a kinetic vibration transmitted through an stretchy medium. Ultrasound tend to be involving frequencies higher than 20,000 Hz. Human being can easily only listen to somewhere around between TWENTY Hz and 20,000 Hz. The rate at which sound moves is determined by the actual medium that it goes over as a result of. Throughout the air acceleration is somewhere around 345 m/s, inside water 1500 m/s and in a metal of stainlesss steel 5000 m/s. Therefore we are able to make use of ultrasound and also simply by determining Period we are able to obtain distance. This specific form of range locating can also be referred to as Sonar. Sonar is effective in the same way as Radar. To be able to calculate the distance of a sound travelled, it necessitates to get reflected. distance = time X velocity. Within this project anyone will be needing Transducer and Sensors pertaining to Ultrasound Transmission and Recognition. A single this sort of Transceivers is HC-SR04 Module. Most of these units normally transmit a quick burst of ultrasonic sound in the direction of a target as well as identify sound back to the sensor. Apart from this one may require Arduino Board along with 16×2 Lcd-display.   To make this Arduino based distance measuring circuit you will need: Arduino board LCD module 40kHz Ultrasonic sensors   Arduino Program Sketch Code 
//programme by Mr. Syed Ali//
#include <LiquidCrystal.h>
LiquidCrystal lcd(12, 11, 5, 4, 3, 2);

const int trigPin = 8;
const int echoPin = 13;
 
void setup() 

  {
    lcd.begin(16, 2);
  }
 
void loop()
{
  
  long int duration, inches, meter;
 
  
  pinMode(trigPin, OUTPUT);
  digitalWrite(trigPin, LOW);
  delayMicroseconds(2);
  digitalWrite(trigPin, HIGH);
  delayMicroseconds(10);
  digitalWrite(trigPin, LOW);
 
 
  pinMode(echoPin, INPUT);
  duration = pulseIn(echoPin, HIGH);
 
  inches = microsecondsToInches(duration);
  meter = microsecondsToMeters(duration);
  
  
  lcd.clear();
  lcd.setCursor(0,0);
  lcd.print(inches);
  lcd.setCursor(5,0);
  lcd.print("Inches");
  lcd.setCursor(0,1);
  lcd.print(meter);
  lcd.setCursor(5,1);
  lcd.print("Meter");
  delay(1000);
}
 
long int microsecondsToInches(long microseconds)
       {
       return microseconds / 74 / 2;
       }


long int microsecondsToMeters(long microseconds)
       {
       return microseconds / 2900 / 2;
       }
]]> 1921 0 0 0 Simplest Low Drop Solar Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simplest-low-drop-solar-charger-circuit/ Thu, 20 Oct 2016 06:45:00 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1934 Circuit Explanation: This low drop solar panel charger circuit is going to be used to accomplish optimum current from a solar panel system whilst charging a conventional lead acid 12 volt battery. It gives you approximately the identical current as though the solar panel was attached straight to the battery. The circuit is a discrete equivalent form of the LM1084 which is basically a 5 amp variable, 3 terminal, low dropout regulator available in the market for around $3. The regulator voltage for the battery is determined to 13.6 that could be in the vicinity of full charge. The voltage could possibly be somewhat over at 14.1 however this would demand temperature stabilization which means that the voltage collapses a tad bit as the temperature goes up. Employing 13.6 with no stabilization need not include a temperature issue. Simplest Low Drop Solar Charger Circuit   Procedure: Transistors Q1, Q2 is wired as a differential couple where Q1 detects the battery voltage and Q2 is positioned at a reference voltage fixed by the white colored LED. Resistors R3, R4 are cinfigured a voltage divider to ensure that the input to Q1 can be the just the same as Q2 while the battery is at 13.6 as well as the regulator is going to turn off to certain nominal current to keep up 13.6 volts on the battery. The white LED voltage is around 2.7 volts. Resistor R5 (330 ohm) fixes the current for the transistor set (Q1, Q2) to approximately 6 milliamps because the voltage across R5 will likely be the reference 2.7 - 0.6 (e/b drop of ). This offers us I=E/R = (2.7-0.6)/330 = 6.4 milliamps. Whenever the battery is noticeably below 13.6, Q1 is going to be off and 6.4 milliamps is going to move via Q2 and R6 delivering a voltage across R6 (750) of E=IR =.0064 * 750 = 4.8 volts. Q3 is designed as a barrier for the voltage across R6 as well as guarantees current to the bypass transistors Q4,Q5. The emitter/base junction of Q3 will probably shake off around 0.6 volts as a result the voltage on the emitter will likely be 4.8 - 0.6 = 4.2 as well as the current all through R8 (330) is going to be I=E/R = 4.2 / 330 = 12.7 milliamps. This certainly will be adequate to operate Q4,Q5 at 5 amps or perhaps higher when lowest possible amount gain of at least 20 for Q4 and Q5. Resistor R9 (750) is employed to confirm a little some current needs to switch on Q4. This functions to approximately 1 milliamp. Resistor R10 (750) acts as a pullup to secure the circuit initialization any time a battery is not plugged in. The regulator could be utilized in the form of a 13.6 volt power supply with no the battery hooked up. Insights: Drop-out voltage checked 0.82 as soon as the input had been 13.86 and output had been 13.04 and charge current had been 1.92 amps. The gain (hFE) of Q5 (2N3442) checked roughly 45 at 2 amps with under 1 volt between emitter and collector. This must run at 5 amps with a gain of possibly 20, although I could not check it out. The posted spec is hFE=20 minimum at 3 amps with VCE = 4 volts. The significance of R8 can certainly be lesser or R6 larger to augment the drive current to Q4 in case demanded. R1 and R2 signify the inner resistance of the battery as well as the solar panel. In case the panel (no load) voltage is nineteen and the charge current is two amps, and the battery voltage is thirteen, along with the drop-out voltage is 0.82, subsequently the panel's internal resistance (R2) could very well be R=E/I = 19 - (13 + 0.82) / 2 = 2.6 ohms. As soon as the battery is in close proximity to full charge along with the current is suppose 200 milliamps, the panel voltage is going to be around E = 19 - IR = 19 - (0.2 * 2.6) = 18.48 so the drop throughout Q5 is going to be approximately 18.48 - 13.6 = 4.88 volts. However these datas are rough assumptions given that the panel impedance is not really persistent. Parts List for the low drop solar panel charger circuit: Q1, Q2 = 2N3906 or the majority of small signal PNP. Q3 = 2N3904 or the majority of small signal NPN. Q4 = 2N2905A or comparable medium power (500mA) PNP Q5 = 2N3442 or 2N3055, high power NPN One White LED (2.7 volt) D1 = 1N4148 or just about any small silicon diode R1, R2 = N/A (see text) R3 = Approximately 560 ohms. Fine-tune this resistor to get the preferred battery voltage. R5, R8 = 330 ohms R6, R9, R10 = 750 ohms R4, R7 = 2.2K]]> 1934 0 0 0 IC 555 Li-Ion Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/ic-555-li-ion-battery-charger-circuit/ Fri, 21 Oct 2016 14:22:56 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1946   A zener voltage reference (2.5 volts) is used on pin 2 of the comparator so that the comparator output will switch low, triggering the 555 timer when the voltage at pin 7 is less than 2.5 volts. The 555 output turns on the 2 transistors and the batteries charge for about 30 milliseconds. When the charge pulse ends, the battery voltage is measured and divided down by the combination 22K, 8.2K and 620 ohm resistors so when the battery voltage reaches 8.2 volts, the input at pin 7 of the comparator will rise slightly above 2.5 volts and the circuit will stop charging. The proposed IC 555 Li-ion battery charger circuit could be used to charge other types of batteries such as Ni-Cad, NiMh or lead acid, but the shut-off voltage will need to be adjusted by changing the 8.2K and 620 ohm resistors so that the input to the comparator remains at 2.5 volts when the terminal battery voltage is reached. For example, to charge a 6 volt lead acid battery to a limit of 7 volts, the current through the 20K resistor will be (7-2.5)/ 20K = 225 microamps. This means the combination of the other 2 resistors (8.2K and 620) must be R=E/I = 2.5/ 225 uA = 11,111 ohms. But this is not a standard value, so you could use a 10K in series with a 1.1K, or some other values that total 11.11K Be careful not to overcharge the batteries. I would recommend using a large capacitor in place of the battery to test the circuit and verify it shuts off at the correct voltage.]]> 1946 0 0 0 523 0 0 524 523 1 527 0 0 531 527 1 535 0 0 536 0 0 537 535 1 541 0 0 543 541 1 545 0 0 546 545 1 548 0 0 549 548 1 550 0 0 551 550 1 Simplest Variable 0-100V Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simplest-variable-0-100v-power-supply-circuit/ Sat, 22 Oct 2016 03:08:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=1954 Note: The diagram shows the circuit operating with a 12V input, but the supply could be 100V maximum, for getting the expected 0-100V variable output, however make sure to upgrade the pot to 10K in such circumstances.]]> 1954 0 0 0 High Current LM317 Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/high-current-lm317-power-supply-circuit/ Tue, 25 Oct 2016 14:15:42 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2021 ]]> 2021 0 0 0 3V to 110/220V Converter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/3v-110220v-converter-circuit/ Sun, 30 Oct 2016 06:09:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2045    ]]> 2045 0 0 0 Simple PIR Motion Sensor Circuit Water Sprinkler https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-pir-motion-sensor-circuit-water-sprinkler/ Sun, 30 Oct 2016 08:59:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2051 ]]> 2051 0 0 0 12V 200 watt Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/12v-200-watt-inverter-circuit/ Sun, 30 Oct 2016 09:19:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2054   The figure above shows the complete circuit diagram of the inverter consisting of an oscillator circuit rigged around the IC 4047, whose frequency can be altered by changing the adjustments of the 50K pot. The 2N2222 transistor are configured as voltage followers and current amplifiers and are positioned to amplify the small current from the IC to a level which could sufficient enough to drive the subsequent power transistors. The BD transistor stage are connected to further amplify the current for the final 2N3772 transistor which boosts the current to a massive level and dump the same inside the primary winding of the transformer for the intended induction. The transformer is now forced to oscillate at the IC 4047 frequency but with full battery current which results in a robust 200 watt of power across its secondary output. This 220V 200 watt inverter circuit could be used for operating lights, soldering iron small heaters, fans etc, but computer should not be operated since it is a square wave design]]> 2054 0 0 0 Transmitter Circuit with Etched Coil on PCB https://makingcircuits.com/blog/transmitter-circuit-etched-coil-pcb/ Mon, 21 Nov 2016 15:51:40 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2133   pcb   3v-fm-pcb]]> 2133 0 0 0 12V 100mA SMPS Transformerless Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/12v-100ma-smps-transformerless-power-supply-circuit/ Tue, 29 Nov 2016 10:59:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2191 Circuit Description The schematic exhibits a buck converter employing LNK3204D/P/G. The circuit offers a non-isolated 12 V, 120 mA constant output. LinkSwitch-TN2 combines a 725 V MOSFET and control circuitry perfectly into a single affordable IC. Stabilization is accomplished by using a inexpensive resistor divider network feedback. The switching frequency burst characteristic of the LinkSwitch-TN2 family and the 66 kHz switching frequency of functioning allows minimizing EMI. Input EMI Filtering The input stage is made up of fusible resistor RF1, diode D1 and D2, capacitors C1 and C2, and inductor L1. Resistor RF1 can be a flameproof, plomos, wire-wound resistor. This achieves a number of capabilities: (a) restricts surge current to harmless degrees for rectifiers D1, D2 (b) supplies differential mode noise cancellation and © acts as an input fuse in case any additional component does not work out and short circuit. To face up to the immediate inrush power challenge, wire wound varieties are encouraged. Metal film resistors are generally not advised instead of RF1. LinkSwitch-TN2 combines a 725 V power MOSFET and control circuitry into a solitary cheap IC. The unit is self-starting through the DRAIN (D) pin using localized supply decoupling offered by a tiny 100 nF capacitor C3 coupled to the BYPASS (BP/M) pin while AC is initially put on. In the course of usual operation, the unit is driven from output by using a current limiting resistor R3. In this article, the unit LNK3204D is employed in a buck converter. The proposed 12V 100mA SMPS transformerless power supply circuit is developed to perform in typically discontinuous conduction mode (MDCM), using the peak L1 inductor current fixed by the LNK3204D inner current limit. The control plan employed is comparable to the ON/OFF control found in TinySwitch™. The on-time for every switching cycle is defined by the inductance value of L2, LinkSwitch-TN2 current limit as well as the high voltage DC input bus over C2. Output regulation is achieved by bypassing switching cycles in effect to an ON/OFF feedback transmission placed on the FEEDBACK (FB) pin. This may differ considerably from standard PWM strategies which regulate the duty factor (duty cycle) of each switching cycle. As opposed to TinySwitch, the logic of the FB pin may be upside down in LinkSwitch-TN. This enables an easy feedback system to be applied as soon as the device is utilized in the buck converter setup. Current on the FB pin higher than 49 µA may prevent the switching of the interior MOSFET, although current lower than this permits switching cycles to take place. Courtesy: https://ac-dc.power.com/design-support/reference-designs/design-examples/rdr-506-144-w-non-isolated-buck-converter/?AdSource=EEWeb   12V 100mA SMPS transformerless power supply circuit]]> 2191 0 0 0 Subwoofer Amplifier Circuit - High Power https://makingcircuits.com/blog/subwoofer-amplifier-circuit-high-power/ Sat, 03 Dec 2016 08:45:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2196 Subwoofer Amplifier Circuit Theory: Audio Signal is initially filtered in order to eliminate the high frequency content and enable just the lower frequencies to cross via it. This specific lower frequency transmission can now be amplified by using a voltage amplifier. This kind of lower power signal is subsequently amplified utilizing a transistor powered class AB power amplifier. high watt subwoofer amplifier circuit COMPONENT LIST R1=5.6K R2=5.6K R3=120K R4=27K R5=15K R6=3.3K R7=330 Ohms R8=33 Ohms R9, R10=2.7 K C1, C2=0.1uF, electrolyte C3,C5,C6=10uF, electrolyte C4=1uF, electrolyte Q1=2N222A Q2=TIP41 Q3=TIP41 Q4=TIP147, PNP D1, D2=1N4007 Dual Supply=+/-30V Subwoofer Amplifier Circuit Design: Audio Filter Design: In this article we developed a Sallen Key low pass filter making use of OPAMP LM7332. The cut off frequency had been believed to be 200Hz and the Quality factor is actually supposed to be 0.707. Additionally supposing the quantity of poles being comparable to 1 and value of C1 being identical to 0.1uF, value of C2 may be determined being 0.1uF. Supposing R1 and R2 to be same, the value can be obtained by replacing recognized values within the formula R1 = R2 = Q/(2*pi*fc*C2) This presents a figure of 5.6K per resistor. Here it is fixed at 6K resistors for R1 and R2. Given that we would like a closed loop gain filter, we do not require resistors in the non inverting pin, that is short circuited to the output pin. Pre Amplifier Design: The preamplifier is dependent on class A function of transistor 2N222A. Because the expected output power is 100W and load resistor can be 4 Ohms, therefore we call for a supply voltage of around 30V. Supposing the collector quiescent current being 1mA and collector quiescent voltage being 1 / 2 of supply voltage, i.e.15V, the significance of load resistor could be worked out to be corresponding to 15K. R5 = (Vcc/2Icq) Base current is determined by, Ib = Icq/hfe Substituting the figures, hfe or AC current gain , we have the base current being corresponding to 0.02mA. The bias current, Ibias is deemed being 10 times the base current, i.e. 0.2mA. The emitter voltage can be deemed being 12% of the supply voltage, i.e. 3.6V. The base voltage, Vb can now add up to Ve +0.7, i.e. 4.3V. Values of R3 and R4 tend to be subsequently determined as presented: R3 = (Vcc - Vb)/ Ibias and R4 = Vb/Ibias Substituting the values, we have R3 being corresponding to 130 K and R4 being corresponding to 22K The emitter resistor can be determined being corresponding to 3.6K (Ve/Ie). On the other hand this specific resistance is embraced among a couple of resistors, R6 and R7, where R7 is employed as feedback resistor to minimize the decoupling influence of C4. Value of R7 is determined through the values of R5 and gain and identified being corresponding to 300Ohms. Value of R6 can now add up to 3.2K. Given that capacitive reactance of C4 ought to be lower than the emitter resistance, we estimate the significance of C4 being comparable to 1uF. Power Amplifier Design: The power amplifier is fashioned utilizing Darlington transistors TIP142 and TIP147 in class AB mode. The biasing diodes tend to be picked in a way that their thermal properties are comparable to that of the Darlington transistors. In this article we select 1N4007. Given that a sizable value of bias resistor is needed for any low bias current, we decide on R9 being corresponding to 3K. The driver stage is employed in order to get a high impedance input for the power amplifier. In this article we work with a power transistor TIP41 in class A function. The emitter resistor, R8 is determined through the values of emitter voltage, Ve (1/2Vcc- 0.7) and emitter current, Ie (equal to collector current, i.e. 0.5A) and it is identified being corresponding to 28.6 Ohms. In this article we decide on a 30 Ohms resistor. The significance of bootstrap resistor R10 must be in a way that it offers high impedance to the Darlington transistors. In this article we pick out R10 being 3K. High Power Subwoofer Amplifier Circuit Operation: The audio signal is filtered through the Sallen Key low pass filter making use of the OPAMP in a way that just frequencies under and corresponding to 200Hz tend to be transferred and excess blocked. This low frequency transmission is conveyed to the input of the transistor Q1 via the coupling capacitor, C3. The transistor functions in class A mode and delivers a increased variant of the input signal in its output. This particular amplified transmission is now transformed into a high impedance transmission by Q2 and it is presented to the class AB power amplifier. Both Darlington transistors work in a way that one particular performs for positive half cycle while other for negative half cycle, hence putting together a full period of output transmission. The emitter resistors R11 and R13 are accustomed to reduce any kind of distinction amongst the complementing transistors. The diodes are accustomed to guarantee nominal overlap distortion. This high power output signal is now accustomed to commute a loudspeaker or subwoofer of low impedance, around 4 Ohms. Observe that in this article we have made use of an 8 Ohm resistor intended for only diagnostic tests purpose. Applications of Subwoofer Amplifier Circuit: This circuit can be utilized with home theatre systems to operate subwoofers to be able to develop a top quality, huge bass music. This circuit could additionally be utilized like a power amplifier intended for low frequency signals.]]> 2196 0 0 0 497 0 0 498 0 0 499 497 1 500 498 1 624 0 0 628 https://makingcircuits.com/ 624 1 Simple Bass Treble Tone Control Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-bass-treble-tone-control-circuit/ Mon, 05 Dec 2016 08:46:55 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2207 The discussed bass, treble tone controller circuit thus effectively performs like a 3 band graphic equalizer circuit allowing the user with distinct 3 way control of the sound frequency. The bass control basically allows only the lower range of the frequency, ideally between 10Hz and 300Hz, that means the user can adjust this pot to cut off all frequencies that might be within or beyond this frequency range. The treble control can be considered just the opposite of bass, and this control allows the user to trim the input frequency within the range of 2kHz and 6kHz, which implies that the user can use this pot to tailor the frequency anywhere between this range. Now obviously, the mid range control has the ability to provide the facility of adjusting frequencies between the above discussed 300Hz and 2kHz. With all the 3 controls, the this simple bass treble mid range tone controller circuit becomes a full fledged 3 way graphic equalizer circuit which enables the users to adjust the 3 control as per their personal taste such that the most pleasant hearing sensation is achieved for the listener. Parts List
R1-R2= 47K C1-C11= 10uF/25V C8= 1.2nF MKT
R3-R4-R5-R12-R13= 10K C2= 33pF  C9-10= 100nF 63V MKT
R6-R7= 3.3K C3= 2.2uF/25V MKT C12=47uF 25V
R8-R9= 1.8K C4= 47nF/25V MKT RV1-RV2= 100Kohms Lin.
R10= 270 ohms C5-C7= 4.7nF/25V MKT RV3= 470Kohms Lin.
R11= 22K C6= 22nF/25V MKT IC1= TL072, NE5532
]]> 2207 0 0 0 Automatic Submersible Pump Controller Circuit with Dry Run Protection https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-submersible-pump-controller-circuit-dry-run-protection/ Sat, 17 Dec 2016 08:47:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2214   In the depicted diagram above we can see how the NOT gates from the IC 4049 are arranged for detecting the aforesaid pump control parameters through the relevant sensors positioned inside the water at appropriate locations. We know that NOT gates are basically inverters which invert and produce an opposite polarity voltage at their output pins as compared to the potential at the input pins. The triangle shaped icons shown in the diagram are the gates wherein the flat side represents the input side and the pointed side of the triangle depicts the output side. Therefore for example, if a positive potential is detected at the input, the output transforms it into a negative potential and vice versa. A push button can also be seen which allows a manual start for the relay and the submersible motor pump in case the user wants to fill the tank regardless of the low water situation. Conversely when a low water is detected, water is removed from the yellow sensor which stops the 12V from entering the input of gate N6 rendering a negative voltage here, and this is translated into a positive at the base of the associated BC547, causing a positive 12V to reach at the input of N3, which in turn causes a positive at the base of the relay driver BC547. instantly switching ON the relay and the pump motor.   The 10uF capacitor at the base of the N3 allows the relay to remain switched ON for some time so that water can be pulled up into the overhead tank and the blue sensor is able to detect water. As soon as this happens the gate N1/N2 become active and latches relay/motor through a positive signal at the input of N3. But in case no water is detected, the 10uF capacitor in unable to hold the relay for too long, and the relay eventually deactivates, switching OFF the motor, and in the process protects the submersible motor from a dry run situation. However, if water is normally detected, the relay gets latched and the motor keeps pumping water inside the overhead tank, the tank continues to fill until the water level reaches the brim of the tank and comes in contact with the red sensor points. As soon as this happens gate N5 quickly responds making its output go low, which instantly pulls the relay driver transistor into a non-conducting state,  switching OFF the relay and the pump motor, so that water is inhibited from filling the tank and thus water overflowing is prevented. The sensors for the proposed automatic submersible pump controller circuit with dry run protection are simply made by attaching small brass screws on a non-conductive material such as plastic at around 2 cms apart. The brass screws must be adequately tin coated by soldering a layer of solder on them to prevent corrosion.]]> 2214 0 0 0 Sine wave Generator Circuit using Wein Bridge Oscillator https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sine-wave-generator-circuit-using-wein-bridge-oscillator/ Sun, 18 Dec 2016 16:07:25 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2221 Courtesy: https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wien_bridge_oscillator[/caption] The circuit displayed above represents a typical setup of the oscillator, using automated gain control, applying contemporary parts. Based on the situation that R1=R2=R and C1=C2=C, the frequency of oscillation is offered by: f={\frac {1}{2\pi RC}} along with the affliction of steady oscillation is assigned by {\displaystyle R_{b}={\frac {R_{f}}{2}}}   A sine wave generator circuit using a Wien bridge oscillator may be designed adjustable by making use of two frequency rendering components which can be altered concurrently at substantial tracking precision. Excellent tracking pots or adjustable capacitors tend to be, however, costly and hard to acquire. In order to refrain from needing to utilize this type of component, this oscillator was created to work using a single potentiometer. The output frequency, fo, will be determined via fo = 1/(2 x pi x RC x root x alpha) wherein R=Rz=R¤=R4=R6, C=C1=C2, and alpha=(P1+R1)R. Preset P2 makes it possible for modifying the all round amplification in a way that the output signal includes a realistically steady amplitude (3.5 Vpp max.) within the complete frequency range. The expressed elements enable the frequency to be altered throughout 350 Hz and 3.5 kHz. Additional frequency ranges will be conveniently described using the above mentioned expression, eventhough it must be observed that the higher frequency threshold is established primarily through the gain-bandwidth product of the opamps Type OP-221 as well as TLC272. The current utilization of the oscillator is determined by the sort of opamp applied. The below values had been assessed: OP-221: 0.5 mA; TLC272: 2mA; TL072: 2mA. Wein bridge sine wave oscillator circuit ]]> 2221 0 0 0 Simple Electronic Gong Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-electronic-gong-circuit/ Mon, 19 Dec 2016 07:30:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2229 ]]> 2229 0 0 0 507 0 0 508 507 1 552 0 0 554 552 1 Simple Lamp Flasher Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-lamp-flasher-circuit/ Mon, 19 Dec 2016 07:42:55 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2232 ]]> 2232 0 0 0 Simple Continuity Tester Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-continuity-tester-circuit/ Mon, 19 Dec 2016 08:38:48 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2235  ]]> 2235 0 0 0 Simple Dark Room Timer Circuit for Photographers https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-dark-room-timer-circuit-photographers/ Mon, 19 Dec 2016 08:37:37 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2239 ]]> 2239 0 0 0 Simple Electronic Pinball Game Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-electronic-pinball-game-circuit/ Mon, 19 Dec 2016 14:35:04 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2242 ]]> 2242 0 0 0 Simple Temperature Indicator using BC547 Transistor https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-temperature-sensor-using-bc547-transistor/ Mon, 19 Dec 2016 15:57:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2246 ]]> 2246 0 0 0 Car Lights ON Warning Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/car-lights-warning-circuit/ Tue, 20 Dec 2016 05:26:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2253 ]]> 2253 0 0 0 Door Lock Circuit using Digital Code https://makingcircuits.com/blog/door-lock-circuit-using-digital-code/ Tue, 20 Dec 2016 05:50:53 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2258 ]]> 2258 0 0 0 Doorbell With Memory Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/doorbell-memory-circuit/ Tue, 20 Dec 2016 06:18:47 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2263 ]]> 2263 0 0 0 Thermal Indicator Circuit for Heatsinks https://makingcircuits.com/blog/thermal-indicator-circuit-heatsinks/ Tue, 20 Dec 2016 06:30:31 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2266 ]]> 2266 0 0 0 Making Delay Timers using NOT gates IC 4049 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/making-delay-timers-using-not-gates-ic-4049/ Tue, 20 Dec 2016 08:47:22 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2273   ]]> 2273 0 0 0 Simple Electronic Gong Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-electronic-gong-circuit-2/ Fri, 23 Dec 2016 05:02:46 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2280 ]]> 2280 0 0 0 Simple 0-24V/5Amp Variable Power Supply Circuit with Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-0-24v5amp-variable-power-supply-circuit-with-transistors/ Mon, 26 Dec 2016 14:47:44 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2292 ]]> 2292 0 0 0 681 0 0 690 https://makingcircuits.com/ 681 1 696 0 0 702 https://makingcircuits.com/ 696 1 Wireless TV Sound Transmitter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/wireless-tv-sound-transmitter-circuit/ Tue, 27 Dec 2016 08:34:54 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2296 ]]> 2296 0 0 0 110V, 220V Voltage Regulator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/110v-220v-voltage-regulator-circuit/ Wed, 28 Dec 2016 09:27:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2305 Courtesy: Elektor Electronics Magazine]]> 2305 0 0 0 Make Stabilized Zener Diode Using Transistor https://makingcircuits.com/blog/make-stabilized-zener-diode-using-transistor/ Wed, 28 Dec 2016 16:52:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2308 ]]> 2308 0 0 0 Simple Dual Power Supply Circuit Without Center Tap https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-dual-power-supply-circuit-without-center-tap/ Thu, 29 Dec 2016 08:09:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2311 ]]> 2311 0 0 0 High Voltage Emergency Mains Cut-OFF Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/high-voltage-emergency-mains-cut-off-circuit/ Fri, 30 Dec 2016 13:49:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2317 ]]> 2317 0 0 0 Road Diversion Warning Indicator using Running LED Lights https://makingcircuits.com/blog/road-diversion-warning-indicator-using-running-led-lights/ Fri, 30 Dec 2016 14:00:10 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2320   ]]> 2320 0 0 0 Non-Contact Voltage Detector Circuits Using Transistors and IC https://makingcircuits.com/blog/non-contact-voltage-detector-circuits-using-transistors-and-ic/ Mon, 02 Jan 2017 07:32:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2394 What is non-contact voltage detector? Non-contact voltage detectors are AC mains tester which can be used to check the presence of active live wire without touching the wires physically. Traditional voltage tester has metallic tip which need to touch with live wire physically. Non-contact voltage detectors are much safer way to test AC mains and it reduces risk of electric shocks while working at high voltage situations. The non-contact voltage detectors has antenna for picking up the leakage current on active live wires. The leakage current flow through antenna and fed to very high gain amplifier. The amplifier output goes high when it detects weak electrical signals. The amplified voltage can be interfaced with LED or buzzer. So, can we completely throw off traditional voltage tester? NO! Non-contact voltage detectors need an external power which is usually a battery. Battery may die any time without a warning and circuit board may also fail as well but, it is less likely to happen and usually non-contact voltage testers available in market are equipped with battery indicators. So due these minor limitations, it is always good idea to carry a traditional voltage indicator along with non-contact voltage indicators. Now you would have a clear idea what non-contact voltage indicators are all about. Now let’s construct our own non-contact voltage tester which is good enough to detect active live wire during electrical works. Non-Contact Voltage Detector Circuits Using Transistors and IC   Here is a basic one, when it detects AC mains the LED glows, if it detects faint electrical signals the LED glows dimly. The circuit consists of very high gain amplifier which has 3 transistor connected in Darlington pair configuration. The antenna is an insulated wire which is few inch long. The circuit can be enclosed in a plastic junk box with insulated antenna wire hanging outside. Please add a LED indicator and switch to the circuit, the LED indicator will avoid confusion to user whether the circuit is active or not while testing AC mains. The battery should last for few months with normal usage. The sensitivity of the circuit is directly associated with battery voltage so, regularly replace the battery. Below given circuit is the extension of the above simple circuit. It gives visual and audio response. The LED lights up and the speaker buzz when it detects the presence of active mains live wires. This circuit has similar structure as first circuit does; it has three transistors in Darlington pair configuration for amplifying weak leakage current from AC mains. The LED is replaced by buzzer circuit and LED is also present in this circuit too. The buzzer circuit is very simple oscillator consisting of two transistors and few passive components. If it detects strong signal it buzz loud and if it detect weak signal it buzz faintly. Using IC: The above circuit is using IC 4060 which is timer IC. The LED blinks if it detects any electrical signal around the antenna; it blinks at the rate of 3Hz. If no electrical activity is detected the output either stay high or low. We all know that the digital ICs are susceptible to noise easily, taking advantage of this we can achieve similar functionality of firstcircuit. This IC based circuit is even more sensitive than first two circuits. IC 4060 is not the only IC which is sensitive to AC mains; there are other ICs which are sensitive to AC mains. If you have any question regarding non-contact voltage detectors, feel free to ask in the comment section.]]> 2394 0 0 0   Simple 12V DC Fan Speed Controller Using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-12v-dc-fan-speed-controller-using-ic-555/ Wed, 04 Jan 2017 07:28:44 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2404 To overcome this problem we are going for PWM which reduce power to the motor by switching the power on and off rapidly. The duty cycle or width of the on and off time determine the speed of fan, but the frequency remains constant. Here is a very simple PWM generator using IC555, by varying the variable resistor, the pulse width can be changed. This is fed to MOSFET which is capable of handling higher current for the fan, the diode across fan suppress high voltage spike while turning the fan on/off.]]> 2404 0 0 0 LED Amplifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/led-amplifier-circuit/ Thu, 05 Jan 2017 07:34:39 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2410 ]]> 2410 0 0 0 719 http://liteau-pour-bouteille-de95949.isblog.net/embroidery-an-overview-4408993 0 0 Solid State Relay (SSR) Circuit Using Triac https://makingcircuits.com/blog/solid-state-relay-ssr-circuit-using-triac/ Thu, 05 Jan 2017 08:25:14 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2413 Circuit Description As talked about within the above part, in the recommended SSR or solid state relay circuit design the RF interference is usually examined by forcing the triac to switch only about the zero mark of the AC sine phase and also the usage of an opto coupler means that the input is held nicely clear of the AC mains potentials existing while using triac circuit. Let us make an effort to know how the circuit operates: As demonstrated in the diagram the opto coupler results in being the portal between the trigger and the switching circuit. The input trigger is put on the LED of the opto that illuminates and creates the photo-transistor conduct. The voltage through the photo-transistor goes by through the collector to the emitter and ultimately extends to the triac’s gate to trigger it. The procedure can be quite common and is typically related with the trigger of all Triacs and SCRs. Nevertheless it's not always adequate to help make the RF noise wiped out. The part including the three transistors plus some resistors are specifically presented with the perspective of tracking the RF creation, by making certain that the triac performs just near the zero crossing thresholds of the AC sine waveform. While AC mains is ascribed to the circuit, a rectified DC gets accessible at the collector of the opto transistor and it triggers as described above, even so the voltage in the junction of the resistors attached to the base of T1 is so tweaked that it switches ON soon after the AC waveform goes up over a 7 volt level. While the waveform remains over this particular level maintains T1 switched ON. This grounds the collector voltage of the opto transistor, suppressing the triac from working, however the second the voltage gets to 7 volts and approaches zero, the transistors cease conducting permitting the triac to changeover. The method is repetitive throughout the negative half cycle while T2, T3 conducts according to voltages over minus 7 volts yet again ensuring that the triac conducts only when the phase level approaches zero crossing, appropriately getting rid of the introduction of zero crossing RF interference. ]]> 2413 0 0 0 Simple Electric Fencing Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-electric-fencing-circuit/ Sat, 07 Jan 2017 06:08:42 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2420 The proposed circuit is battery operated; you may add a solar charger to keep the circuit active always. It is basic inverter circuit which produce 230VAC and voltage Tripler is connect at the output which increment the output voltage by thrice. The output magnitude is around 700V which is enough to give nasty shock to an animal or human. The inverter produces oscillation at 50Hz from multivibrator circuit andthe current is amplified by two MOSFETs which drive the 9V-0-9V transformer. The network of resistor and capacitor increase the magnitude of voltage by thrice. One of the wires must connect to ground properly and another wire must connect to non-insulated wire which runs around your property.]]> 2420 0 0 0 Simple Variable Power Supply Circuit for Benchwork https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-variable-power-supply-circuit-benchwork/ Tue, 10 Jan 2017 08:43:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2428 ]]> 2428 0 0 0 Simple LED Stopwatch Using IC 555 and IC 4017 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-led-stopwatch-using-ic-555-ic-4017/ Sat, 14 Jan 2017 08:46:54 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2438 The proposed design is inexpensive to construct and very easy to operate. It consists of one IC 555 and four IC 4017. The IC2 consist of 10 LEDs which count from 0 to 9 second. The IC3 consist of 6 LEDs, each LED indicates 10 second. The IC4 consist of 10 LEDs which counts minutes, each LED indicates 1 minute. The IC5 consist of 7 LEDs, each LED indicates 10 minute and the illumination of 7th LED indicates completion of 1 hour and all the LEDs start from begining. The IC 555 is heart of the circuit which gives clock signal to decade counter ICs to increment position of LED’s illumination. To operate the stopwatch we just need to press the push button (push to ON & push to OFF) to start. The LEDs starts illuminating on and off in a sequence and when you want to freeze the clock, just press the button again. This will stop the IC 555 generating clock pulses and thus all the LEDs stay in current position till we turn off the supply]]> 2438 0 0 0 Programmable Musical Organ Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/programmable-musical-organ-circuit/ Tue, 17 Jan 2017 08:13:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2466 The circuit: Programmable Musical Organ Circuit The IC1 generates clock signal which is fed to IC 4017’s clock input pin. The IC3 generates tone and fed to 8 ohm through a 100uF capacitor for block DC signals. The IC3 generates different tones anywhere between few hundred hertz to few kilohertz. When different frequencies are generated with some interval, it resembles as music. By adjusting the 10 pre-set resistors at different levels properly we can generate melodious tone from the circuit. IC 4017 is decade counter; each pulse from the IC1 555 turns one of 10 output pin to high and rest of the pins to low sequentially. The pin which is high passes voltage through its connected pre-set resistor, due to its resistance the voltage passing to IC3 555 changes whichgenerates frequency depending on the pre-set resistor value. The ten diodes which are connected on all 10 output pins of IC 4017 prevent current passing to other output pins while one of the pins is high. The speed of IC 4017 which turn one of the pin to high sequentially and rest of the pins to low, depend on IC1 555, so by adjusting VR1 we can control the speed of the tone for this programmable musical organ circuit.]]> 2466 0 0 0 10 Channel Capacitive Touch Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/10-channel-capacitive-touch-switch-circuit/ Tue, 17 Jan 2017 08:21:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2469 The circuit: 10 Channel Capacitive Touch Switch Circuit Initially pin#3 will be high and rest of the pins are low.When we touch the touch plate, pin#2 turns high and rest of the pins to low and touching it again turns pin#4 highand rest of the pins to low and so on (Q0 to Q9) sequentially . The transistor detects the injected charge and amplifies. The touch signal is fed to IC 555 which is configured in mono stable mode. The IC555 generate clock pulses necessary to change the state of 10 pins in IC 4017. You can connect MOSFETs or transistor or any other peripherals according to your customized needs.]]> 2469 0 0 0 Simple Infrared Thermopile Sensor Circuit Explained https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-infrared-thermopile-sensor-circuit-explained/ Thu, 19 Jan 2017 05:58:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2472 ]]> 2472 0 0 0 How Resistors Work With AC Supply https://makingcircuits.com/blog/resistors-work-ac-supply/ Thu, 19 Jan 2017 16:08:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2477

AC resistor circuits

Genuine resistive AC circuit: resistor voltage and current tend to be in phase. In case we were to draw the graph for the current and voltage for any simple AC circuit comprising a supply source along with a resistor (image above), it may well appear quite the way it's show here: (Figure below) Voltage and current “in phase” for resistive circuit. Due to the fact the resistor basically and specifically restricts the stream of electrons at all time frames, the waveform for that voltage drop over the resistor is precisely in phase with the waveform for that current circulating within it. We are able to examine just about any moment in time across the horizontal axis of the graph waveform plot and evaluate those magnitudes of current and voltage with one another (any “snapshot” view for the values of a waveform are known as instantaneous values, indicating the values at that instantaneous moment in time). Once the instantaneous value regarding current is 0 %, the instantaneous voltage over the resistor can also be 0 %. In the same way, in any instant on time in which the current via the resistor reaches its positive maximum, the voltage over the resistor is additionally in its positive maximum, and so forth. At virtually any assigned position on time across the waveform, Ohm's Law is valid for those instantaneous values of voltage and current. We are able to likewise determine the power dissipated through this resistor in a AC circuit, and plot all those values on a single graph: (Figure below)     Instantaneous AC power within a real resistive circuit is often positive. Remember that the power will certainly not be a negative value. Once the current is positive (over a range), the voltage can also be positive, producing power (p=ie) of a positive magnitude. Alternatively, once the current is negative (under the range), the voltage can also be negative, resulting in a positive number for power (a minus quantity multiplied by a new minus quantity equates to a positive quantity). This specific steady “polarity” of power informs us how the resistor is usually dissipating power, getting it with the supply and releasing it by means of heat power. Regardless of if the current is positive or negative, a resistor never stops dissipating energy.]]> 2477 0 0 0 Simple 300 Watt Power Amplifier Circuit using Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-300-watt-power-amplifier-circuit-using-transistors/ Fri, 20 Jan 2017 09:56:13 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2482 The proposed amplifier circuit uses complementary transistors to achieve the intended high power with Hi-Fi quality. The unit is powered with a 45V + 45V supply, with current not more than 7 amps. Most of the incorporated transistors barring the BC556C must be mounted on the heatsink, which must be prferably fixed over one of the sides of the cabinet to facilitate proper dissipation. The diodes marked A, B and C are 1N4007 and these too must also be mounted on the heat sink but with thermal grease. The music fed to the amplifier input must be 1Vpp standard line. As shown in the diagram the specified power supply does not need to be a complex stabilized but must be adequately filtered using high value filter capacitors. I personally recommend the following specifications for this 300 watt amplifier circuit  power supply: You can use a transformer with a secondary section that has a central socket 32-0-32 (or 64V with central socket). For a mono configuration it must have a current of 5A, for stereo 10A. The diodes should be at least 100V by 8A for mono and 100V for 16A  for stereo. The capacitors must be 4700μF 63V each. Do not use higher voltages as this would affect the working curve of the capacitor (not filtering optimally).  ]]> 2482 0 0 0 Simple 100 Watt Amplifier Circuit using a Single IC https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-100-watt-amplifier-circuit-using-a-single-ic/ Sun, 22 Jan 2017 17:06:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2502 The coil or the inductor L in the output of the IC is formed by winding 14 turns of wire No. 18 with a 1 inch diameter without core. The distance between each of the turns is not too critical, so somewhat here and there will not affect the performance. The transformer for the power supply must be rated to provide 24v + 24v of AC supply in its secondary with a minimum of  5A current for one stage (mono) or twice 10A for two stages (stereo). Although four numbers of 15A rectifier diodes could be incorporated to make the bridge rectifier unit, it is advisable to employ a metal rectifier bridge unit instead and fit it within the relevant heat sink. Since the value of the resistance is odd the resistance of 1.1K must be kind of a precision resistor, MFR 1% or SMD. And also the resistance at the output (shown in parallel with the coil) must be rated at least 2W power. The electrolytic capacitors indicated in this simple 100 watt single chip circuit must be rated at 50V or 63V.]]> 2502 0 0 0 Simple 100 Watt Amplifier Circuit using 2N3055 Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-100-watt-amplifier-circuit-using-2n3055-transistors/ Mon, 23 Jan 2017 07:40:55 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2510 Here we learn how to make a very simple 100 watt amplifier circuit using a 2N3055 transistors and a few other passive components.

Simply by incorporating just four transistors in the quasi-complementary configuration this 2N3055 simple power amplifier circuit can deliver a good 100 watts of power over an attached 4 ohms loud speaker, and the entire design can be built at a really low cost (to be precise it would cost you only 1/2$ per transistor).

Simple 100 Watt Amplifier Circuit using 2N3055 Transistors

As exhibited in the above diagram you won't find no costly or obsolete hard to find components in this amplifier circuit, except the power supply transformer and possibly the 4 ohm loud speaker.

The input stage is created by configuring a couple of current drivers transistor stages responsible for triggering the pairs of power BJTs positioned at the output stage.

The 2N3055 power stage at the output should be mounted on large heat sinks to ensure that this crucial stage is able to dissipate adequately and function with optimal efficiency.

The a power supply of 80V, it becomes necessary to put a series capacitor in between the output stage and the speaker in order to block the DC supply from entering the speaker and allowing only the amplified 100 watt music power.

For a mono 100 watt amplifier the power supply could be rated at 1.5A , for stereo this needs to be doubled at 3 amps, and in case a quadraphonic amplifier is required then make sure to use transformer rated to handle a minimum of 6 amp.

The following diagram shows the pinout details of the various transistors used in this simple 100 watt amplifier circuit using 2N3055 transistors

2N3055 pinouts

]]> 2510 0 0 0 729 0 0 732 https://makingcircuits.com/ 729 1 733 https://makingcircuits.com/ 732 1 745 733 0 746 https://makingcircuits.com/ 745 1 Simple Wireless Headphone Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-wireless-headphone-circuit/ Mon, 23 Jan 2017 08:50:57 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2513  When somebody thinks about a simple wireless headphone circuit there are a few options that are generally visualized. The simplest of these options is incorporating IR or infrared light through which the audio signal to be transmitted is modulated and processed accordingly, while on the receiver side the signal is again demodulated and amplified appropriately for the achieving a successful wireless audio transfer.

As shown in the image of the proposed simple wireless headphone circuit, the transmitter section looks extremely easy to build. The input small step-up transformer is wired as an impedance matching adapter, it has a low impedance winding which may be seen joined in parallel with the speaker of the TV or radio or whichever audio source that needs to be transmitted wirelessly.

The output from the transformer is further amplified by the two transistors and finally fed to a couple of series connected IR diodes

These infrared diodes are standard types and in fact any typical can be applied. We can also see a 10 ohm series resistor for controlling the current through the IR diodes and this resistor must be rated at 1w. This transmitter circuit works with a 9V supply which may be acquired from the audio source's power supply or through a separate 9V DC to DC adapter

The receiver for the wireless headphone circuit works in the following manner:

The detected IR or the infrared modulated beam from the phototransistor, is first preamplified and then amplified by the BC549C transistors, which is subsequently reinforced with extra power for enabling headphone speaker to operate and reproduce the received sound data.

This receiver too identically, like the transmitter operates using a 9V supply, however since the headphone needs to be wireless and the person able to walk with it, the supply needs to come from a battery. For this a few AAA cells wired up in series can be used to achieve the required 9V for the wireless headphone.

Remember that for the audio which is being transmitted ought to be within visual straight line between the transmitter and the receiver circuits because here we are dealing with IR concept and not an RF concept. Therefore if the two counterparts Tx, Rx are not within the line, noise may be introduced into the receiver causing distortion into the sound output.

In case you may feel that the range needs to be upgraded, It may be possible by increasing the range of the transmitter by enhancing the number of transistors for BD140 and/or by including more numbers of IR diodes in the series.

]]> 2513 0 0 0 Sine Wave Inverter Circuit using PIC16F72 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sine-wave-inverter-circuit-using-pic16f72/ Mon, 23 Jan 2017 12:16:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2517   The following image shows the built prototype which tested using a 1200 watt load successfully   The close up of the mother board of the proposed sinewave inverter using PIC16F72 can be witnessed in the following image   This picture shows the PCB track layout for the proposed inverter design.   49636983LCD pic16f84a-sinewave-INVERTER sine_power_002 sinewave SN73_LCD Branded inverter Hex files and PIC code along with PCB designs of this pure sine wave inverter circuit using PIC16F72 can be downloaded from the above shown links,.........Hope this helps!!  ]]> 2517 0 0 0 427 0 0 428 427 1 429 428 1 437 0 0 438 http://Help 0 0 439 438 1 440 437 1 441 440 0 442 441 1 443 429 0 444 443 1 489 0 0 490 489 1 494 http://www.abledesigns.blogspot.com 0 0 496 494 1 513 0 0 518 http://ss 0 0 566 0 0 568 566 1 571 0 0 572 571 1 590 0 0 591 https://makingcircuits.com/ 590 1 652 http://www.abledesigns.blogspot.com 513 0 707 http://www.brave%20com 0 0 708 https://makingcircuits.com/ 707 1 709 http://www.brave%20com 708 0 Simple Square Wave Inverter Circuit Using Arduino https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-square-wave-inverter-circuit-using-arduino/ Thu, 26 Jan 2017 14:08:17 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2548 The simple inverter circuit consists of Arduino and you may choose your favorite arduino board. A voltage regulator LM 7809 which give constant voltage to arduino board regardless of battery voltage (Battery voltage must not drop below 11.90V). The two capacitors connected to voltage regulator gives stability. The input capacitor 1000uF helps the inverter to start softly and provide immunity against sudden input voltage fluctuations. Two MOSFETs are employed which can handle around 300 Watt power with heat sink mounted. If you want to more power you may choose more powerful MOSFET. The transformer is a step down one, which is used in reverse to step-up the voltage and it its centre tapped. The transformer’s voltage and current parameter also decides maximum output power. You will need 30A transformer to get 270 watt power without considering efficiency loss. You may also convert a microwave transformer and wind coils with experienced technician, but it is not recommended though. Program: //-------------Program developed by R.Girish-----------// int out1 = 8; int out2 = 7; void setup() { pinMode(out1,OUTPUT); pinMode(out2,OUTPUT); } void loop() { digitalWrite(out2,LOW); digitalWrite(out1,HIGH); delay(20); digitalWrite(out1,LOW); digitalWrite(out2,HIGH); delay(20); } //-------------Program developed by R.Girish----------//]]> 2548 0 0 0 9V Tubelight Inverter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/9v-tubelight-circuit/ Thu, 26 Jan 2017 15:27:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2551

In this article we will learn how to make an easy 9V fluorescent tube inverter circuit using ordinary parts such as IC 555 and a cheap 0-6V/220V step down transformer.

As shown in the diagram below, the IC 555 is wired in its most standard configuration of an astable multivibrator meaning in this mode the IC will begin generating pulses at its pin#3 at a frequency rate that may be directly dependent on the selected resistors and capacitor across its pin#6/2. The output from pin#3 which is in the form DC high frequency is applied to an attached mosfet, and this mosfet is in turn rigged with a step down transformer’s 6V winding for executing the intended 6V to 220V DC to DC inverter circuit.
 
This implies that the IC 555 along with the transformer mosfet driver acts like a small DC to DC inverter for generating a 6V to 220V output. This 220V may not exactly an AC because it lacks the negative half cycles and delivers only half wave pulsed 220V DC. However this 220V pulsed DC becomes enough for illuminating a 9V fluorescent tube light brightly. Therefore this simple 9V tubelight inverter circuit very efficiently cheaply enables any small fluorescent to be illuminated from a 6V battery or any 6V DC power supply.  
]]> 2551 0 0 0 70 Watt High Efficiency Power Amplifier Circuit Using IC TDA1562 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/70-watt-high-efficiency-power-amplifier-circuit-using-ic-tda1562/ Sat, 28 Jan 2017 12:33:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2556 The heatsink must be suitable for utilizing with audio signals. In the event the case temperature surpasses 120 C, the IC may move back through class-H to class-B functionality. The higher power supply voltage can now be impaired as well as the output power will be limited to 20 W. Once the supply voltage declines under the lowest working point, the amplifier is going to be muted right away. Mode select input (pin MODE) This pin offers 3 settings: 1. LOW, ‘standby’: the entire circuit is turned off, the supply current is rather reduced 2. MID, ‘mute’: the circuit is started up, however the input signal will be diminished 3. HIGH, ‘on’: standard functioning, the input signal is amplified through 26 dB. Once the circuit is actually switched through mute to ON or vice versa typically the switching happens with a zero crossing of the input signal. The circuit includes a speedy start off alternative, i.e. whenever it is turned straight from standby to on, the amplifier can be completely functional within just 50 ms (vital for purposes such as car telephony and vehicle direction-finding). Status IIO input (pin STAT) INPUT This input offers 3 options: 1. LOW, ‘fast mute‘: the circuit continues to be switched on, however the input signal is under control 2. MID, ‘class-B’: the circuit works like class-B amplifier, the high power supply voltage is unable to function well, in addition to the case temperature 3. HIGH, ‘class-H’: the circuit functions as class-H amplifier, the high power supply voltage is actually endowed, regardless of the case temperature. Once this 70 watt power amplifier circuit is turned up through fast mute to class-B/H or vice versa the transitioning is quickly executed. When the circuit is transferred from class-B to class-H or the other way round the particular changing happens in a zero crossing of the input signal. OUTPUT This output offers 3 options: 1. LOW, ‘mute’: approve of muted amplifier 2. MID, ‘class-B’: the circuit works as class-B amplifier, the high power supply voltage is unable to function well, due to the case temperatures TC > 120 C 3. HIGH, ‘class-H’: the circuit runs like class-H amplifier, the high power supply voltage is activated, since the case temperature TC < 120 C. Once the circuit is transferred from class-B to class-H or vice versa the particular transitioning occurs in a zero crossing of the input signal. The state I/O pins of maximum 8 ICs could be connected collectively for synchronizing functions. Diagnostic output (pin DIAG) DYNAMIC DISTORTION DETECTOR (DDD) On the start clipping of the output stages, the DDD gets to be effective. These details may be used to commute a sound processor chip or DC-volume control in order to attenuate the input signal and thus control the distortion. SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION Each time a short-circuit takes place in the output to ground or to the supply voltage, the output stages tend to be turned off. Will have them started up once again around 20 ms following removing the short-circuit. Within this short-circuit condition the diagnostic result is actually consistently REDUCED. Whenever a short-circuit arises over the load, the output stages tend to be turned off throughout roughly 20 ms, Right after that period will be examined throughout around 50 us whether or not the short-circuit continues to be present. In this short-circuit condition the diagnostic output is REDUCED for 20 ms and also high for 50 us. The power dissipation in a short-circuit condition is incredibly reduced. TEMPERATURE RECOGNITION Right before the temperature security gets to be effective the diagnostic output turns into endlessly LOW. Load detection: instantly following the circuit is turned from standby to mute or on, the built-in recognition circuit check ups if the load exists. The outcomes of this test could be discovered in the diagnostic output, through switching the mode select input within the mute mode. Because the diagnostic output can be an open collector output, a lot more devices could be connected jointly.   Technical Specifications for the IC TDA1562 Technical Specifications for the IC TDA1562 Pinout Description:   If you have any more doubts regarding this TDA1562 70 watt high power amplifier circuit, please put them in the comment box.]]> 2556 0 0 0 625 https://speakerstandslab.com 0 0 626 https://makingcircuits.com/ 625 1 Simple 24V 20 Amp Adjustable Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-24v-20-amp-adjustable-power-supply-circuit/ Sat, 28 Jan 2017 16:56:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2565 As evident, this 20 Amp adjustable power supply circuit is actually simply an adjustable integrated voltage regulator which can be seen engaged on several parallel power transistors. These transistors carry out the major function as may be witnessed while the regulator IC simply manages maintaining these correctly. Where it is shown as the 24v connector could be the input through the batteries. The indicated 12v connection may be the output and the Gnd connection needs to be grounded. Needless to say, all components (transistors and integrated) should be mounted on a large heatsink for facilitating good heat dissipation as well as must be electrically isolated from the heatsink metal. Adjustment: Position the 10K preset at the maximum go (or open the 10K preet connection) and hook up to the converter output lamp 12V / 50W. On the output access, link-up the batteries in series with what may be accomplished as 24V. At the output side, parallel to the lamp, attach a continuous scale tester having a appropriate rating (about 50V). Now begin to turn the preset so that the lamp lights and the tester shows 12V...that's all, your 20 amp 24V power supply circuit is set and ready to be used]]> 2565 0 0 0 433 0 0 434 433 1 How Crystal Oscillators Work https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-crystal-oscillators-work/ Wed, 01 Feb 2017 05:17:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2569 Let’s see how a crystal oscillator works. It works on the principle of inverse pizeo-electric effect. When certain type of material is mechanically stressed it produces voltage proportional to the applied stress, it is called piezo electric effect. The inverse process is utilized in crystal oscillator. When the material is applied with electricity the material begin to oscillate. The oscillation of the crystal material is very consistent, that’s why our wrist watches or wall clock utilizes quartz crystal for ticking each second.     How Crystal Oscillators Work   The circuit: The circuit is configured as common collector amplifier. The two resistors R1 and R4 providenecessary bias for the transistor. The resistor at emitter R2 sets the output voltage level. The 2N4265 transistor may be replaced with any general purpose NPN transistor. But make sure it can handle at MHz frequency range,which can be found in data sheet. The C1 and C3 are used to limit the gain of the transistor. This will limit the output amplitude and reduce power dissipation in the crystal. If the power dissipation in the crystal is high, the crystal might get damaged due to excess mechanical vibration.]]> 2569 0 0 0 Understanding Phase shift Oscillator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/understanding-phase-shift-oscillator-circuit/ Wed, 01 Feb 2017 05:42:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2572 It has three RC stages, each RC stage shift the input frequency by 60 degree. The first stage shifts frequency by 60 degree, second stage shifts frequency by 120 degree and third stage shifts frequency by 180 degree. The next stage is amplifier, which can be a transistor based amplifier or operational amplifiers. The amplifier stage generates 180 degree phase shift, which gets input from the RC network. So combining both phase shift from RC network and amplifier’s phase shift 180 + 180 = 360 degree. To get the frequency from the circuit consistently, we need to provide positive feedback to the circuit. There are two types of feedback, positive and negative feedback. Here is general meaning of those: Negative feedback is feeding the output signal to the input with 180 degree phase shift. Positive feedback means feeding the output signal to input with zero degree phase shift. In this phase shift oscillator we provide positive feedback. Simple Phase Shift Oscillator circuit using a single transistor: Understanding Phase shift Oscillator The complete circuit of a simple phase shift oscillator using just a single transistor is given above with explained 3 main parts. The frequency can be determined by following formula: Frequency = 1 / 2 x pi x R x C x sq. Root (2N) Where R is the resistor in Ohms C is the capacitance in Farads N is the number of RC stage, N=3   Here is the simulated output:          ]]> 2572 0 0 0 Mosquito Repellent Circuit - Tested https://makingcircuits.com/blog/mosquito-repellent-circuit-tested/ Wed, 01 Feb 2017 07:44:43 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2577 Mosquito Repellent Circuit - Tested

How this Mosquito Repellent Circuit Works

The low cost mosquito repellent circuit makes use of only a single IC, a CMOS type 4047. This particular extremely multi-purpose IC could be configured in lots of working modules, which includes that of the multivibrator or astable applied in this article. The working frequency is defined with the external components C1, R1, and P1. The second option assists you to marginally adjust the frequency, offered the hesitation which is out there on getting the most helpful value. To properly replicate the high frequencies created by the generator, the output transducer employed is an ordinary tweeter, but it ideally should be a piezo one. This kind of tweeter acts actually a lot like a capacitor, and thus does not necessarily clog the CMOS IC outputs which are not capable of delivering a considerable current. To acquire an output signal of ample amplitude when being run by a solitary 9 V battery. The tweeter is attached between your 4047’s Q and Q outputs. With this particular situation, it achievable to use complementary (antiphase) signals towards the tweeter so it ‘sees’ an alternating voltage of dual the supply voltage. In strictly assumptive conditions, this quadruples the output power available. In fact, it may be preferable to consider it as tripling this, however the beneft accomplished getting into it that way is , however quite genuine. Everything ends up to be, that you can place the unit in the center of the patio desk or next to your lounger to acquire a flavor of the peaceful of a summer’s night without having mosquitoes disturbing you acoustically or even worse, gnawing at. At the least, that is what all of us wish for you actually who make this. The tested mosquito repellent prototype is shown below. A transformerless capacitive power supply was used here instead of a battery so that a direct mains operation could be achieved]]> 2577 0 0 0 Simple Rat Repellent Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-rat-repellent-circuit/ Thu, 02 Feb 2017 08:31:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2601 This electronic rat repellent circuit really is easy as it simply works with a several unique variations of components. Therefore to suit your needs who may be presently studying, researching electronics, may make an effort to practice causes this circuit as it is regarded as less difficult for newbies. Only the data regarding how the essential components to develop this circuit are incredibly fewer, around under 10 components. Therefore it may very well be determined that the evaluation of the cost necessary to create this set is lower than A few dollars. Extremely ideal for newbies who would like to start an electronic circuit for the first time. The necessary components would be the fundamental components for example resistors, capacitors, transistors, IC 555, and output by means of the loudspeaker. Which means this may be the loudspeaker that can generate echolocation using a sweep of 50 Hz. The tone may be the frequency most disliked by the rats, therefore rodents will not challenge get close to this unit. You no longer need to be concerned since the emitted frequency will never affect your sleep at night. This particular audio is going to be noisy on the ears of rodents, but will not for the human hearing.]]> 2601 0 0 0 646 0 0 647 https://makingcircuits.com/ 646 1 Simple 40 watt Fluorescent Tube Emergency Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-40-watt-fluorescent-tube-emergency-light-circuit/ Thu, 02 Feb 2017 08:55:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2604 The 40 watt fluorescent tube light may be the typical type and does not have to be brand new, may even operate a tube with conventional ballast and starter not work simply because within this type of circuit the filaments are generally not used. It may be attached either a directly or a spherical. No starter or reactance ought to be employed in this circuit. PCB and Heatsink: Although it is recommended, the usage of a printed circuit board with this project is not really essential. It may be assembled right into a metal case where the transistors are mounted on each side of the case. Make sure to utilize separators and insulators in these transistors, to prevent short circuits. If you want to make use of the tube in a portable device, you should secure the components a lot more, to be able to endure the movements and shocks that this automobile will cause. Power Transistors: The power transistor required for this 40 watt fluorescent tube emergency light circuit may not be special, could be substituted by any equivalent with the voltage and current specs they may have. It is important is the fact that the two are identical, to ensure that there are actually no instabilities within the functioning of the oscillator and therefore of the technique on the whole.]]> 2604 0 0 0 Automatic Universal Battery Charger Circuit for all types of Battery https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-universal-battery-charger-circuit-types-battery/ Fri, 03 Feb 2017 09:33:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2608 Either due to the fact most of us stop using the car for long periods or for the reason that battery is about to run out, this circuit enables to load it effectively and indicate by means of an LED as soon as the charging process is completed. As can be found the circuit is an automatic battery charger circuit, consisting of an operational amplifier that is responsible for governing the state of the battery to identify the actual time by which it should stop charging the battery and trigger the LED indicator. The three-stage resistive divider enables you to make reference voltage for the operational amplifier. In this manner, the battery cut-off takes place when the current drops under the half-ampere, and the circuit starts to oscillate by operating the transistor that switches current to the LED resulting in it to glow and indicate the full charge level of the battery. Remember that the bridge rectifier for the input power supply may need to be above 10 amperes (voltage equal to or greater than 50V) therefore it is certainly not for soldering in printed circuit rather needs to be screwed to the metallic cabinet of the apparatus and hook up by crimped terminals. The original filter capacitor could be bolted up onto the plate or could be twisted in the cabinet by using a couple of plastic seals and joined in parallel with the positive and negative terminals of the rectifier bridge. The typical switch will be of the style employed in electric coffee machines that include neon gas lamp which signals if the charger is switched on. Seriously consider how this switch is actually attached because it is quite common to mistake the terminals and short circuit the 220V line. In case preferred, a DC ammeter may be inserted in line with the positive terminal of the output on the battery in order to visually keep track of the current of the battery. This device could be comparable or electronic digital battery charger, despite the fact that these days it really is a lot more jazzy these digital ones. The positive terminal of the device links to the circuit as well as the negative would go to the battery (in the direction of its positive terminal). The resistance of 0.1 ohm must be installed on the platelet, yet elevated 2 or 3 cm out of this in order to avoid heat modifying its value. You possibly can put a buzzer that will sounds simultaneously in conjunction with the LED triggering. This should be attached between anode of the LED and the emitter of the transistor and needs to be of the electronic piezo type, having oscillator a part of its internal circuitry. In order to apply it just connect the battery to charge, switch on the system and push the pushbutton that will begin charging. Once the charging is accomplished, the device LED will illuminate and the unit should be switched off and the battery taken out of the terminals. How to Set up this automatic universal battery charger circuit Suppose you want to charge a 12V 200AH battery charger circuit. You will need to complete the following initial procedures: Do not connect the battery as yet, first apply a 14.4V from the DC input side, and adjust the 10K preset such that the green LED just lights and the red LED just shuts off. That's all, you are done. Now connect the 12V 200AH battery, switch ON the input from a DC 14.4V 20 amp source and let the battery begin charging. You will the red LED glowing while the battery is charging, and as soon as it reaches 14.4V, the red LeD shuts off and the green LED lights up indicating the full charged status of the battery]]> 2608 0 0 0 Diesel Engine Delay Start Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/diesel-engine-delay-start-circuit/ Sun, 05 Feb 2017 07:41:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2617 The resistance of 47K and the capacitor of 100μF along with the transistor of the center are the ones that are responsible for recognizing the timing. The second transistor is liable for moving the coil of the relay as well as the latter is in charge of making it possible for the engine to start. For this simple diesel engine delay start circuit we put together almost all the equipment inside a relay box very easily or in a suitable small molded case. For longer time delay we simply may tweak on the values ​​of capacitor and resistance. The circuit is operated straight by 12V.]]> 2617 0 0 0 Water Level Controller using a Single SCR https://makingcircuits.com/blog/water-level-controller-using-single-scr/ Sun, 05 Feb 2017 08:48:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2622 In order to activate with rain or perhaps with liquid leaks the sensor which is made up of a couple of metal components separated with a part of tissue or porous cardstock having a bit of salt mixture. Following activation of the alarm through moisture or liquid, the sensor has to be reverted to a dry condition, just before resetting it for the next cycle. For liquid or water level activation and control, the sensor should consist of two bits of wires together with the tips peeled and split up with a distance of a couple of centimeters.]]> 2622 0 0 0 3V to 5V Boost Circuit for Battery Charging and LED Driver Applications https://makingcircuits.com/blog/3v-5v-boost-circuit-battery-charging-led-driver-applications/ Mon, 06 Feb 2017 09:00:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2629   Dependent on an integrated circuit from Maxim IC's MAX641, this particular little circuit enables to acquire 5V by establishing just a couple of type AA or as well as AAA. Not really far off is actually the standard (and inefficient 7805) linear regulator, but this IC needs a minimum of 8V at its input to ensure 5V at its output (besides it generates an excessive amount of heat!) Conversely, this particular small eight-pin integrated circuit, just like a 555 in Its structure is perhaps more nor less than a boost or step up SMPS Controller circuit which simply needs a few passive components to operate correctly. Some very exciting details regarding this 3V to 5V boost converter circuit which can e learned from the following details: Being of a switched (or switching) topology, this circuit practically will not generate much heat. The system consumes incredibly small current to operate. Through the sensing of the output power, thispin#5 loop (Feedback) enables the unit to manage the stress level very effectively. Additionally it includes an output pin that can be used for configuring a LED low battery indicator Pin#2 of the integrated device becomes grounded in case the battery level declines. This particular pin can easily instantly become compatible with an LED indication circuit or even it could possibly electronically accept a pinout of the microcontroller in order that it can be used for displaying the data visually externally, as an example, through an LCD display indicator.]]> 2629 0 0 0 Simple Microphone Amplifier Circuit with Bass Treble https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-microphone-amplifier-circuit-with-bass-treble/ Thu, 09 Feb 2017 08:47:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2635 The output of A1 is given to a tone control stage, A2. The proportion R13/R12 decides the amplification (around 18dB) in this stage. The result of R11 and C6 is actually, in theory, much like that of R2 and C2: a smaller sized value of C6 raises the lower cut-off frequency. The RC system between A1 and A2 may be the actual tone control. Potentiometer P1 fixes the bass level and P2 the treble level. Utilization is made from the attribute of capacitors performing as frequency centered resistances for ac voltages. The output signal of the amplifier can be obtained to get link with the main amplifier through C9 and potentiometer P3. This particular microphone amplifier circuit has not just already been tested in the Elektor laboratories but additionally from the designer in the course of browsing on-stage tests. A printed circuit board with this low noise amplifier can be obtained. lt is extremely narrow to allow it to be applied as an input module within a mixer.    ]]> 2635 0 0 0 How to Calculate Capacitor Series Parallel Connections https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-calculate-capacitor-series-parallel-connections/ Wed, 15 Feb 2017 07:44:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2640 0 ) and the relative dielectric constant of the material (εr). Remember that the units of length and area can be metric or English as long as these may be consistent with the relevant calculations. Capacitance of 2 Parallel Plates drawing - RF Cafe   The formula for calculating capacitance with regards to its plate dimension as explained above may be witnessed in the following formula: Capacitance of parallel plates equation - RF Cafe   The below shown physical constants and mechanical dimensional variables may be used in equations which are discussed on this page. The respective Units for the results of the equations may be seen inside brackets at the end of each equation; for e.g., Equation units in brackets - RF Cafe denotes lengths in inches and inductance in Henries. If units are missing or not indicated, that would signify to be consistent across all entities; i.e., all meters, all µF, etc. C = Capacitance L = Inductance W = Energy ε0 = 8.85 x 10-12 F/m (permittivity of free space) εr = Relative permittivity (dimensionless) µ0 = 4π x 10-7 H/m (permeability of free space) µr = Relative permeability (dimensionless) 1 meter = 3.2808 feet  <—>  1 foot = 0.3048 meters 1 mm = 0.03937 inches  <—>  1 inch = 25.4 mm Also note that, the dots (which should not to be mistaken with decimal points) are employed here for representing multiplication so that ambiguity can be avoided.

How to Calculate Capacitor Series Parallel Connections

Equations regarding how to connect capacitors in series and parallel can be witnessed in the following discussion. These statistics and formulas basically suggest that capacitance is actually a calculation indicating the ability of the 2 plates of the capacitor to maintain an electric charge. Split up and separated with a dielectric (insulator), a net positive charge will be built up on a single surface area of the plate and a net negative charge will be stored on the other surface area of the plate. For an ideal capacitor, this charge may be expected to remain stashed across the plates forever; but sadly in real life capacitors this charge progressively is shed off because of leakage currents due to the nonideal nature of the dielectric.

Series-Connected Capacitors

Capacitors in Series Formula - RF Cafe Series-connected capacitors - RF Cafe Total capacitance value of capacitors connected in series will be equal to the reciprocal of the sum of the reciprocals of each of the capacitances. The unit will be as in the original values.

Parallel-Connected Capacitors

Capacitors in Parallel Formula - RF Cafe Parallel-connected capacitors - RF Cafe Total capacitance value for capacitors joined in parallel will be equal to the sum of each of the capacitances, the unit of measurement being as used in the original parts Capacitors are actually passive components applied in electronic circuits to store and retain energy as electric field. These are often used as a compliment of inductors, which also store electricity but by means of a magnetic field. A perfect capacitor will be the similar of an open circuit (incalculable ohms) for direct currents (DC), and provides an impedance (reactance) against alternating currents (AC) which varies according to the frequency of the current (or voltage). The reactance (resistance to current circulation) of a capacitor is inversely proportionate to the frequency of the signal working on it. Capacitors had been formerly known as "condensers" for a motive which goes time for the days of the Leyden Jar in which electric charges were considered to build up in plates by way of a condensation approach. The characteristics of capacitance of resisting an alteration in voltage is taken advantage of for signals having a greater frequency component, whereas stopping signals with lower frequency elements from getting through. A typical implementing a capacitor within an RF (radio frequency) circuit is in which there may be a DC bias voltage that must be stopped up from becoming found in a circuit but permitting the RF signal to get through. DC power supplies make use of big capacitance values in parallel together with the output terminals in order to filter out low frequency ripples as a result of rectification and/or changing waveforms. Series LC circuit - RF CafeParallel LC tank circuit - RF Cafe If employed in series or parallel with an inductor, the inductor-capacitor collaboration produces a circuit that will resonates with a specific frequency which will depend on the values of each part. Within the series circuit, the impedance against current flow in the resonant frequency will be zero using ideal parts. Within the parallel circuit, impedance against current circulation will be limitless by using ideal components. Practical capacitors created from real elements additionally  present a natural capacitance whenever applied within an AC circuit. A typical circuit simulation design is demonstrated below. Real-world inductor model with resistance, inductance, and capacitance - RF Cafe   It offers typically the perfect capacitor having a parallel resistive component ('Leakage') that will react to alternating electric current. The same DC resistive component ('ESR') is within series with the ideal capacitor and an equal series inductive element ('ESL') exists as a result of metal leads (in case existing) and qualities of the plate areas. This particular inductance, along with the capacitance, produces a resonant frequency after which the capacitor appears like a natural resistance. As the functional frequency is enhanced beyond resonance (aka self-resonant frequency, or SRF), the circuit reacts as an inductance instead of a capacitance. Consequently, cautious consideration of the SRF is necessary while picking capacitors. SPICE-type simulators utilize this or a much more advanced design to accomplish a lot more accurate calculations over the broad variety of frequencies.    ]]> 2640 0 0 0 Cellphone Power Bank Circuit you can Make at Home https://makingcircuits.com/blog/cellphone-power-bank-circuit-you-can-make-at-home/ Wed, 15 Feb 2017 09:51:27 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2648 A 4 AAA cell holder box as show below: Four numbers of AAA Ni-Cd Cells, as show below: And a charger connector with wire as per your mobile's pin specification, generally it will be as shown below: Procedure: The procedure for making this power bank circuit is really simple. After procuring the above material, connect the above connector pin wire ends to the points where the red/black wires are connector in the battery holder box. Make sure the polarity is correct, although that won't burn yourself cellphone, rather it just won't initiate the charging when you connect the power bank to your mobile phone, so pay special attention on the connector polarity while soldering it with the battery holder box. We have not cut or removed the existing red black wires of the holder because we want to use it for charging the power bank when it's at home and needs a recharge and for being at ready stand by position. For charging the 4 AAA N-iCd cells, you can use any standard 5V adapter and connect it with the holder red/black wire through a 6V flashlight bulb as shown below: The 6V bulb makes sure that the cells are never over charged and it restricts the current to safe limited range Cellphone Power Bank Circuit you can Make at Home  

How to Charge the Power Bank Battery:

After you have finished making the above power bank circuit, simply fix the 4 AAA Ni-Cd cells inside the holder, and next feed a 5V DC 1 Amp to the indicated wire ends, from any suitable source such as from an USB port, a 5V SMPS adapter etc. When connected, the 6V lamp will light up brightly indicating that the battery pack is charging, gradually in the course of time this 6V bulb will start getting dimmer in response to the charging of the cells, and finally shut down when the battery pack is fully charged. You can now remove the battery box from the 5V source. Now this battery power bank is ready for charging you cellphone whenever you go out for traveling or camping etc. You can test the power bank back up output by plugging the charging pin with your cell phones charging input. If you have any related questions regarding power bank circuit please feel free to express them below in the comment box.]]> 2648 0 0 0 220V Light Dimmer Circuit using Push Button Control https://makingcircuits.com/blog/220v-light-dimmer-using-push-button-control-circuit/ Wed, 22 Mar 2017 15:17:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2672 Referring to the given figure, the IC  NB7332 is an advanced frequency generator which changes its high frequency pulse range to alter the triac's switching pattern such that for lower power pulses with wider switching periods is employed, while for higher power the gaps between the frequency pulses are reduced proportionately. The push button can be used for setting up the illumination level on the connected lamp or may be a ceiling fan. Each press of the button causes a step wise power increase on the load and finally when the full power is reached the subsequent press on the button reverts the load intensity to zero, and the process initiates from there in the ascending order. The IC NB7232 also enables an external triggered operation for the intended light dimmer operation from a remote source in order to achieve a remote controlled fan or light dimming operations. This trigger can e implemented across the end of the C1 capacitor.   If you have any doubts regarding this design make sure to ask them through your commentrs]]> 2672 0 0 0 5 Input Microphone Mixer Amplifier Circuit using a Single IC https://makingcircuits.com/blog/5-input-microphone-mixer-amplifier-circuit-using-single-ic/ Wed, 22 Mar 2017 15:44:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2675 In the beginning I believed this circuit was intended to be for use in an outdoor system attached to a telephone mixture. Therefore several microphones and only a couple of auxiliaries were involved. Within the auxiliaries hook up a micro electret which usually adequately catches the background noise and in other signals, through a resistance of 100K in series which doesn't show up in the diagram, hook up any convenient that enables to key in to the air Which can be faraway from where the system is positined. The overall performance of the circuit is extremely decent, because it simply needs 12V for its power could be provided from both a battery and a DC adapter source. The usage is incredibly low (around 10mA) and also the audio quality is extremely good. Naturally, being anything specifically within the phone had been developed in mono settings, however nothing at all inhibits you from mounting a couple of equivalent circuits with double potentiometers and create it into a full fledged stereo mic mixture circuit. Inside the microphone inputs you should make use of 6.5mm mono female plugs being that they are standard on lower Z microphones. The auxiliary inputs as an alternative tend to be freer. for me I used MiniDIN chips, such as the types used in the brand new PC's mouse. These types of chips are extremely affordable and have a mechanised contact protection better than typical 3.5mm stereo. Utilizing three terminals on the auxiliary inputs, the signal input and the polarization voltage (BIAS) needed regarding a micro electret could be delivered through various routes. In case an amplified transmission is presented at the input, you should never hook up the polarized voltage please remember to put the resistance of 100K within the connector.]]> 2675 0 0 0 Simple 220V Ding Dong Bell Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-220v-ding-dong-bell-circuit/ Fri, 31 Mar 2017 08:37:26 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2679   Each time the bell is pressed the Ding-Dong generator creates a weak audio signal with the sound of the bells. The signal is raised in volume by the amplifier and is reproduced by the speaker. The power supply provides the circuit with the voltage needed to operate. The interface allows the circuit to be connected to centrally-fed tones such as buildings or door intercom. Power Supply for the ding dong bell circuit The circuit obtains power from the position marked V + and ground. The main section of it is the integrated HT2811, manufactured by the Korean firm Holtek. Pin 1 generates the clock signals, enabling the chip to create the "Ding-Dong" audio. Pins 2 and 3 are associated with RC sets the two tones of the sounds (2 = "Ding" / 3 = "Dong"). Modifying these elements is achievable to change the sound quality of the bell. Pin 4 refers to the volume. Pin 5 outputs the sound signal which is amplified with a couple of general purpose transistors in darlington setup. Terminals 6 and 7 tend to be linked with a 680K resistor which modifies the gain of the chip's interior preamplifier. Ultimately terminal 8 powers the chip that is restricted in current through the resistance of 100 ohms as well as stabilized to 3.3v through the zener diode. The 100μF capacitor filters the probable residual ripple content in the supply line.   Replacing with reed relay interface instead of the push button switch In a situation where it is far from possible to change the network of the bell button, this particular control panel can be used. It gets an alternating or continuous voltage at the input and rectifies it with the rectifier bridge PR whose steady output is filtered through the capacitor of 470μF and then strikes the coil of a little reed relay. The main element of this relay activates the main circuit similar to a standard pushbutton. The rectifying bridge (PR) could be assembled using by diodes of 1A 250V or more rating. Please ensure that the voltage of the relay coil is identical to the voltage of the primary buzzer of the earlier buzzer (usually 12v). Even though relay could be powered without having rectifying or filtering the line, it is far from practical since the alternating current might result in the relay to behave like a buzzer, activating and deactivating its pole 50 times per second which could cause some problems for the system in the course of time. POWER SUPPLY This part of the circuit derives the voltage of the house electrical network for powering recommended the equipment. Aditionally it enables to feed the set together with batteries for situations when the power supply outage. The transformer decreases the voltage to 4.5v AC. The rectifier bridge (PR) changes alternating electric current into DC, which happens to be filtered by the 2200μF capacitor. The 1N4007 diodes work as a source selector by working the system together with mains or batteries as required. The fuse safeguards the 220v portion of the transformer. The rectifying bridge (PR) could be any device whose voltage can be more than 250V and whose current is simply not under 1A. The + V point signifies the output of the supply, while the batteries (4 in series) connect across the + Bat and -Bat points.]]> 2679 0 0 0 511 0 0 512 511 1 Simple Microphone (MIC) Amplifier Circuits using Transistors https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-microphone-mic-amplifier-circuits-using-transistors/ Tue, 04 Apr 2017 03:17:22 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2692 The circuit could be driven using any voltage between 3 and 9 volts not really being stabilized. However it is crucial that this supply is nicely filtered and decoupled. With regard to this, it is easy to put a 100μF capacitor together with a 100nF capacitor in parallel with the power line within the circuit.   This second design is a very handy little dynamic microphone amplifier circuit for amplifying weaker audio signal coming from a capacitive condenser microphone. dynamic micrphone MIC amplifier circuit You may use this kind of dynami MIC amplifier circuit for audio sensing purposes and several programmed robotic receptors. This particular condenser microphone DIY audio audio amplifier is extremely tiny and straightforward to utilize since it makes use of only a couple of general purpose transistors plus some discrete components. You are able to build this circuit using a minimal price. This circuit is suitable for inexpensive sound amplification requirements in electronics for example pre-amplifier for FM audio receivers. Circuit diagram Audio amplifier circuit Components required Resistors 1K, and 100K 1/4 watt Capacitors (10uF) Transistors any small signal type such BC547 or 2N3053 Condenser mic Speaker (8Ω, ½ Watt) Working of amplifier The two transistor MIC amplifier circuit is isolated into three sections: Condenser mic, audio amplifier and loudspeaker. Condenser microphone is really a type of capacitive sound sensor (audio transducer) that will switch the sound (audio) signal directly into electrical impulses. These electrical impulses tend to be far too weak it is therefore amplified through the amplifier unit. The increased output is acquired over the loudspeaker. The output of condenser mic is actually combined by using a coupling capacitor of 10µF, the objective of this capacitor would be to eliminate DC material in the audio transmission. A 1kΩ resistor is employed to offer the necessary biasing to the condenser microphone. Transistor Q1 is set up as collector to base biasing function. This really is achieved through 100kΩ resistance. This resistor offers negative feedback for the transistor Q1. The output of Q1 reaches at the collector (throughout 1kΩ resistor), that is the input to the transistor Q2 through a 0.1µF capacitor. The capacitor eliminates DC voltages because of the biasing of Q1. Transistor Q2 is designed like fixed bias by using a 100kΩ resistor. Additionally, it offers additional amplification. The amplified output through Q2 can be obtained over the 1kΩ resistor. The 10µF electrolytic capacitor likewise employed to block the DC voltages of this particular biasing of transistor Q2. Work with a 8Ω, ½ watt speaker to listen to the amplified signal.]]> 2692 0 0 0 Transistor Current Gain Tester Circuit - hFE Tester https://makingcircuits.com/blog/transistor-current-gain-tester-circuit-hfe-tester/ Wed, 05 Apr 2017 07:36:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2700 ]]> 2700 0 0 0 Digital Temperature Indicator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/digital-temperature-indicator-circuit/ Wed, 05 Apr 2017 08:41:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2704 It is essential, on the other hand, that the earth of the supply for IC1, IC4 and IC5 is linked to the earth of the power amplifier. The power supply for the thermometer has to be self-contained using a transformer possessing a couple of isolated secondaries. The sensor of this temperature meter has to be installed as near as you can to the power transistors on the heatsink. lf you would like to construct the circuit on a board of your personal style, keep the following factors in your mind. Both power supplies should be held separated from one another. The sole a couple of connections between meter and the measuring segment tend to be plainly pointed out on the circuit diagram. lC2 and IC3 possess a distinct supply line through the output of the 5 V regulator, whilst the emitters of T1 and T2 need to have a distinct supply line through the output of lC6. IC3 will need to have its very own OV line through the regulator. All these safety measures are essential in order to avoid lC2 being impacted by disturbance brought on by high peak currents manifesting throughout the multiplexing of the a pair of displays.

How to Set up this Digital Temperature Meter Circuit

A precise, ideally digital, meter is needed for realignment of the thermometer. Very first link Y and Z with each other and alter pot P4 to get a reading of 00 on the displays. After that take away the link and utilize a d.c. voltage of approximately 0.9 V to Y. Subsequently fine-tune P3 to acquire a reading of the identical value "like that in Y (calculated with the precise meter!). Keep in your mind that the last digit is actually not shown! For example, in case the voltage at Y is 883 mV, the screen may show 88. Subsequently link Y and X with each other. Determine the voltage throughout C5: if required, this would be tweaked to 2.73 V using pot P1. In relation to the temperature sensor, in case you're satisfied with a precision of around 3° C, pot P2 could be disregarded.’ If you prefer a even more accurate thermometer, the sensor ought to be submerged in melting ice and P2 tweaked to provide a display of 00. This can also be achievable to dip the sensor in water at around 37° C, and determine the temperature of the water using a clinical thermometer. P2 is actually then‘ fine-tuned to provide a display, corresponding to the reading of the scientific thermometer.]]> 2704 0 0 0 Single chip Quadraphonic Amplifier Circuit - For Making Home theater Systems https://makingcircuits.com/blog/single-chip-quadraphonic-amplifier-circuit-making-home-theater-systems/ Tue, 11 Apr 2017 16:01:59 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2709 Power Supply: Considering that the whole system is driven by 12v we made the decision, in our condition, to utilize a supply for auto-stereo. You may also put together one to put into the enclosure. That is again with the user's discernment. Precaution for Operating the quadraphonic amplifier circuit: The heatsink connected to the IC, should be sufficient to keep the chip in a comfortable temperature. We use a Pentium III cooler using its fan operating. To get this done just connect the fan to Vcc since it too employs 12v the same as the amplifier.]]> 2709 0 0 0 Hi-Fi Bass, Treble, Presence Tone Control Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/hi-fi-bass-treble-presence-tone-control-circuit/ Sat, 15 Apr 2017 08:29:23 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2713 If you find a distortion content or deformation inside the music, cut down the adjustment right up until a dedicated processing is accomplished. The 100K potentiometer sets the quantity of bass, whilst the 10K potentiometer executes exactly the same for the treble response. Since the power supply for this simple Hi-fi bass, treble, presence tone control circuit is actually symmetrical at the port 4 of the integrated (GND marked in the image above) it ought to connect with -15V while terminal 8 (designated as Vcc) needs to go to + 15V. The body should be assembled to 0V, that the integrated will not hook up with over to the non-inverting input of the operational 2nd (port 5).]]> 2713 0 0 0 710 http://www.liQ0V.com ... [Trackback] [...] Read More here: makingcircuits.com/blog/hi-fi-bass-treble-presence-tone-control-circuit/trackback/ [...]]]> 0 0 Non-Contact AC Mains Tester Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/non-contact-ac-mains-tester-circuit/ Sun, 23 Apr 2017 09:09:07 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2732 How the circuit Works As we can see in the above figure, 3 transistors are connected in a cascaded manner such that emitter of the first conects with the base of the second transistor and subsequently, the second transistor's emitter joins the base of the third. This configuration enables the circuit to attain a gain of about a million hFe. This happens because the transistors are configured in the popular Darlingtom mode, however here we have 3 BJTs tied up in the instaed of two which is normally seen in conventional Darlington pairs. Connecting 3 BJTs in the Darlington form causes the wiring tio become extremely sensitive and thus enables it detect even the smallest of RF disturbances that may be present in the atmosphere. The proposed non contact mains AC phase tester or detector circuit can be seen powered with a 6V battery, which could be formed using a couple of 3V button cells in series. However even a single 3V button would be able to operate the circuit as effectively. This entire contactless wiring tester circuit or contactless mains phase tester circuit could be housed inside an empty screwdriver device and used for locating fault in house wiring without having to practically touch the wiring or without the need of opening the wiring. The detection of the broken wiring or faulty wiring could be done simply by hovering the sensor point close to the wiring lines and locating the missing or broken wiring points. The piezo can be also seen in the circuit, this is in the form of a 27mm piezo element connected parallel with the LED...the piezo will begin producing a mild sound whenever a AC mains is detected along with the LED which will become illuminated. Save]]> 2732 0 0 0 Automatic Solar Charger Circuit Single Transistor https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-solar-charger-circuit-single-transistor/ Fri, 28 Apr 2017 09:22:34 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2737 Simple Charger using a Battery and Solar panel A solar panel can certainly be applied to directly charge a battery with virtually no other elements. Just hook up the panel with the battery and it can charge once the panel begins getting dazzling sunshine - offering the panel a voltage of minimum 30% to 50% more than battery power you might be charging. Below is a few remarkable information: The voltage from the solar panel is not important and the voltage of the battery really does not make a difference. You are able to hook up any solar panel to any battery - ensuring the solar panel constitutes a voltage minimum 30% to 50% higher than the battery you might be charging. single transistor automatic solar battery charger circuit The output voltage of the solar panel may only adjust to the voltage from the battery. Despite the fact that there exists a voltage mis-match, there isn't any "missing" or thrown away energy. A good 18v solar panel "runs into" a 12v battery using the optimum current it could possibly generate once the strength of the sunlight is a highest. To avoid an excessive amount of mis-match, it is strongly recommended you keep the panel voltage to inside 150% of the battery voltage. (6v battery - 9v utmost solar panel, 12v battery - 18v optimum panel, 24v battery - 36v spork panel). However below is the key factor: In order to avoid overcharging of the battery, the wattage of the solar panel is extremely important. When the wattage of your 18v panel is 10watts, the current is 10/18 = 0.55 amps = 550mA. To counteract overcharging a battery pack, the charging current must not be greater than one-tenth its amp-hr capacity. In particular, a 2,000mAhr group of cells must not be charged at a level beyond 200mA for 14 hours. This can be referred to as its 14-hour rate. Yet this rating can be a CONSTANT RATING as a solar panel delivers an output for approximately 8 hours each day, you are able to boost the charging current to 550mA for Eight hours. This may provide the power to completely charge the cells. For this reason a 10 watt solar panel could be directly attached to a group of (practically fully discharged) 2,000mAhr cells. For a 12v 1.2AHr battery, the charging current is going to be 100mA for 12 hours or 330mA for 4 hours along with a regulator circuit is going to be necessary to protect against overcharging. For any 12v 4.5AHr battery, the charging current is going to be 375mA for Half of the day and a bigger solar panel is going to be necessary. The Role of a Blocking Diode Some solar panels may discharge the battery (a touch) while it isn't obtaining sunlight and a diode is usually included with to protect against self discharge. This diode lowers 0.6v once the panel is working and can cut down the ideal current (somewhat) while the solar panel is charging the battery. In case the diode is Schottky, the voltage-drop can be 0.35v. Some solar panels incorporate this diode - known as BYPASS DIODE. How to Stop Overcharging You will find a couple of methods to protect against overcharging the battery. 1. Discharge the battery practically thoroughly every night and make use of a solar panel which will mainly offer 120% of the amp-hour capacity of the battery the next day. 2. Put in a VOLTAGE REGULATOR. Here is the most basic and least expensive regulator to charge a 12v battery. The solar panel should have the ability to generate a minimum of 16v on NO LOAD. (25-28 cells). The diagram simply exhibits a 24 cell solar panel - it ought to be 28 cells. The one other factor you need to think about is the wattage of the solar panel. This can count on how quickly you would like to charge the battery and/or just how much power you take out through the battery every day and/or the amp-Hr capacity from the battery. As an example, a 12v 1.2A-Hr battery consists of 14watt-hours of electricity. An 6watt panel (16v to 18v) may give you 18watt-hours (in glowing sunshine) in Three hours. The battery will probably be totally charged in 3 hours.]]> 2737 0 0 0 Automatic Day Night Triggered Car Headlamp Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-day-night-triggered-car-headlamp-circuit/ Wed, 10 May 2017 16:30:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2743 ]]> 2743 0 0 0 Simple Constant Current Battery Charger Circuits https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-constant-current-battery-charger-circuits/ Thu, 18 May 2017 15:21:43 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2751 The wattage rating for your resistor can be determined through the square of the current multiplied by the resistance or (0.3)² x  22 = 2 watts, but a five watt or higher value is actually highly recommended. The next circuit below demonstrates a constant current source accustomed to charge a team of 1 to 10 ni-cad batteries. simple current controlled battery charger circuit using a single Darlington BJT The emitter voltage of the TIP32 will probably be around one and half volts over the voltage on the slider of the pot. In the totally way up situation of the pot the transistors is going to be switched off and also the current is going to be in close proximity to 0V. A pot is applied to establish the voltage in the emitter of the TIP32 that ensures the current over the output and the ten ohm resistor. The TIP 32 transistor will likely waste around 7 watts when the output is overloaded and demands to be installed on a big heat sink. This generates around 7 watts of temperature with a load using the maximum current through the 10 ohm resistor, therefore a ten watt or higher wattage may be necessary. In case greater than 4 cells are hooked up, the utmost current obtainable may cut down and restricts the current adjustment to around A HUNDRED milliamps for TEN cells. The typical rate of charge with regard to high capacity (4AH) 'D' cells will be THREE HUNDRED to FOUR HUNDRED milliamps for 13 hrs and ONE HUNDRED milliamps intended for (1.2AH) 'C' or 'D' cells. With regard to smaller Nine volt battery packs the rate of charge can be Seven milliamps therefore you might slow up the range to 0-20 mA simply by using a 750 ohm resistor instead of the TEN. The charge current could be fixed by hooking up a ammeter along the output (ensuring that all the batteries are detached) after which fine-tuning the pot towards the ideal current, or through tracking the voltage throughout the TEN ohm resistor (1 volt = ONE HUNDRED mA) or (One volt = 1.33 mA having a 750 ohm resistor). simple current controlled battery charger circuit using LM317 IC The simple constant current charger circuit above shows how to use a LM317 adjustable voltage regulator as a constant current source. The voltage in the middle of the wiper port and the end terminal is actually 1.25 volts, therefore simply by joining the wiper terminal with the load and inserting a resistor (R) somewhere between the load and the end terminal, a constant current of 1.25/R can be set up. As a result you may require a TWELVE ohm resistor (R) for getting 100mA charging current and also a 1.2 ohm, 2 watt resistor with regard to One amp current. A diode can be used in series with the input in order to avoid the battery packs from implementing a opposite voltage towards the regulator IC in the event the power is switched off whereas the battery pack continue to be attached. It's almost certainly recommended that you eliminate the battery packs ahead of switching off the supply voltage.]]> 2751 0 0 0 How to Charge a Li-Ion Battery Correctly and Safely https://makingcircuits.com/blog/how-to-charge-a-li-ion-battery-correctly-and-safely/ Sun, 21 May 2017 07:18:16 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2758 In "1C", "C" refers to the AH or the mAH value of the battery, meaning if the Li-ion cell is rated at 2600mAH then the "C" value becomes 2600, or 2.6 Amps, which implies that it can be charged at its full 1C, or at 2.6 amps if required. Companies of these cells encourage charging with 0.8C or less in order to lengthen battery life; on the other hand, many Power Cells will acquire an increased charge C-rate using minor stress. Charge performance is approximately 99 percent and the cell continues to be cool in the course of charging process. A number of Li-ion batts may possibly encounter a temperature surge of approximately 5ºC (9ºF) while achieving 100 % charge. This might be as a result of protection circuit and raised internal resistance. You should stop making use of the battery or charger in case the temperature goes up over 10ºC (18ºF) within reasonable charging rates. Full charge takes place when the battery extends to the voltage limit and the current drops to three percent of the rated current. A battery can also be regarded as completely charged when the current comes to the same level and unable to drop any more. Increased self-discharge could possibly be the reason for this disorder. Boosting the charge current is not going to speed up the full-charge status enough, apparently. Despite the fact that the battery gets to the optimum voltage more rapidly, the saturation charge normally takes longer time consequently. Referring to the above graph, with increased current, Stage 1 is quicker however the saturation throughout Stage 2 is going to take more time. A higher current charge may, however, rapidly fill up the battery to around 70%. Li-ion will not have to be totally charged as is the situation with lead acid, neither is it advisable to accomplish this. Actually, it is far better never to thoroughly charge just because a high voltage strains the battery. Deciding on a lower voltage tolerance or getting rid of the saturation charge completely, extends battery life although that lowers the back up time slightly. Chargers for client goods choose optimum capacity and can't be modified; lengthened product lifespan is identified a lot less essential. Some lower-cost commercial chargers could use the simple “charge-and-run” approach that will charge a lithium-ion battery in an hour or less without exploring Stage 2 saturation charge. “All set” shows up when the battery gets to the full voltage limit at Stage 1. State-of-charge (SoC) at this stage is around 85 percent, an amount that could be adequate for several customers. Some alternative chargers set a lower charge voltage limit deliberately to extend battery-life.

Charge V/cell

Capacity at cut-off voltage

Charge time

Capacity with full saturation

3.80

3.90

4.00

4.10

4.20

60%

70%

75%

80%

85%

120 min

135 min

150 min

165 min

180 min

~65%

~75%

~80%

~90%

100%
The table shown above demonstrates the approximated volumes when charged to various voltage thresholds by using and with no saturation charge. (See also BU-808: How to Prolong Lithium-based Batteries.) Li-ion batteries are not able to take in overcharge. Whenever completely charged, the charge current has to be shut down. A consistent drip charge might result in plating of metallic lithium and skimp on safety. To reduce strain, maintain the lithium-ion battery on the peak cut-off as brief as you can. As soon as the charge is ended, the battery voltage starts to decline. This assists in easing the voltage stress. With time, the open circuit voltage will probably negotiate to between 3.70V and 3.90V/cell. Remember that a Li-ion battery which has acquired a completely saturated charge keeps the voltage higher for a extended than one which hasn't attained a saturation charge. Whenever lithium-ion batteries has to be kept in the charger for functional ability, some chargers implement a short filling charge to pay for the little self-discharge the battery and its shielding circuit take in. The charger might get started once the open circuit voltage falls to 4.05V/cell and switch off yet again at 4.20V/cell. Chargers designed for functional preparedness, or standby mode, frequently allow the battery voltage drop to 4.00V/cell and recharge to solely 4.05V/cell rather than the total 4.20V/cell. This minimizes voltage-related stress and extends battery-life. A few lightweight equipment hold charge during the ON situation. The current consumed with the unit is known as the parasitic load and this can corrupt the charge cycle. Battery companies recommend against such parasitic loads during the charging process, since they lead to mini-cycles. This cannot continually be prevented and a laptop attached to the AC mains is such an instance. The battery could possibly be charged to 4.20V/cell after which discharged through the unit. The stress level on the battery can be excessive since the cycles take place on the high-voltage limit, and often also at raised temperature. A portable unit must be switched off in the course of charge. This permits the battery to attain the established voltage limit, and current saturation point flawlessly. A parasitic load rattles the charger by suppressing the battery voltage, and blocking the current within the saturation phase to decrease to a point low enough by simply pulling a leakage current. A battery could be completely charged, however the predominant circumstances may force a extended charge, triggering more stress. Let's Summarize Quickly, the main Points regarding How to Charge a Li-Ion Battery Safely and Correctly
  1. Switch off the unit or detach the load while charging to let the current to decrease unhindered in the course of saturation. This is required because a parasitic load could "confuse" the charger.
  2. Always charge with a modest temperature. Never charge at freezing temperature.
  3. Lithium-ion truly does not have to be fully charged; a partial charge is the most suitable.
  4. Not every chargers implement a complete topping charge as well as battery most likely will not be fully charged once the “ready” sign shows up; a 100 % charge over a fuel gauge could be a false signal.
  5. You should stop using the charger and/or battery in the event the battery starts becoming too much warm.
  6. Put on some charge to a discharged battery prior to retaining (40-50 percent SoC is more preferable).
]]> 2758 0 0 0 Anti-Burglar Home Lighting Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/anti-burglar-home-lighting-circuit/ Mon, 22 May 2017 03:50:40 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2771 Through the"time that IC1 begins counting, the output of N5 shall be logic '1' although the output of N7, and for that reason transistor T1, will continue to be unaltered right up until a logic '1' additionally shows up from N8. That will naturally be produced by lC2 and its affiliated gates. In the period that IC1 is counting it really is feeding time clock pulses to lC2. These are extracted from the Q9, Q10 or Q12 outputs from pin13, 15 or 1) of IC1. The Outputs of lC2 along with gates N1 . . . N4, N8 and N9 form a quasi random generator that, by way of gate N7, regulates transistor T1 and clicks the house lights off and on. This with any luck , puts off our thief buddy by offering the look and feel that the residence may possibly not be as vacant as he might have appreciated! Following a certain time period (1 to 3, 5 hours), output 14 of IC1 ultimately comes back to logic '1'. This leads to numerous things transpire. Through diode D1 it prevents the internal clock oscillator. This subsequently retains Q14 at logic '1'. At this point gate N7 is prohibited hence switching off the house lighting. Just about all will stay at calmness with the house (our phantom residents tend to be in bed) until the subsequent night when the course of action commences once again. By now our frustrated robber has long gone off to fewer active homes! Adjustments of the random generator is reasonably easy. The sensitivity of R1, that is the light degree where N6 chooses to change, is defined by P1. The entire functioning time (of IC1) is scheduled by P2 while the random ‘pattern’ depends upon which of the Q outputs of IC1 is employed to clock IC2. When the random generator is not needed in that case naturally lC2 and its assortment of gates could be overlooked. Nevertheless, remember to plug pin 6 of N7 to the positive supply rail. The house lamps could be started up and off using a relay linked to T1. Be careful that the maximum current consumed by the relay doesn't go over 50 mA. In case more current becomes necessary at this stage, T1 and the mains transformer should be upgraded. One last notice. The LDR for this anti burglar house light circuit must not be installed in a condition where road lamps or car headlamps might trigger fake activation of the circuit. In case this would transpire the house lamps could possibly go on and Off through the night. Our insistent thief could possibly arrive at the realization that there is an all night celebration happening and choose to drop in in the end]]> 2771 0 0 0 Mains Wiring Phase, Neutral, Earthing Tester Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/mains-wiring-phase-neutral-earthing-tester-circuit/ Mon, 22 May 2017 04:38:56 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2777 While the circuit is actually coupled to the mains each neons will probably illuminate dimly. When the push button is at this point pushed one lamp will shut out fully and another will light up adequately. This in reality informs us about three issues: there exists a phase current, the ‘live’ path may be the one with the illuminated neon, and all 3 lines (live, neutral and earth) are functioning. In accurately wired household networks, the live and neutral contacts are usually recognized beforehand. In this instance an additional 100 k resistor could be included as shown. The bottom neon must subsequently light in the beginning; running the push button must trigger the upper neon to illuminate. Any other outcome may signify a wiring fault! If you have any doubts regarding this mains wiring fault tester, please consider commenting below.]]> 2777 0 0 0 Metal Detector Circuit using a Single IC https://makingcircuits.com/blog/metal-detector-circuit-using-single-ic/ Tue, 23 May 2017 02:42:57 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2784 Simple metal detector circuit The metal detection circuit displayed here might reveal the limitations of the simpleness of a metal detector, however the design performs remarkably well. It works with a single 40106 hexadecimal incinerator, a capacitor and a search coil not to mention the batteries. One pin of IC1b pin 4 has to be linked to a medium wave radio antenna, or it ought to be twisted round the radio. It could be employed even as a portable metal detectors. As mentioned, the metal detector comes with a reputable range for beat frequency operation (bfo) as much as 90 mm. In reality, for ease-of-use, the capacitor C1 may be removed. In this manner, the I noticed an amazing range of 150 mm. On the other hand, as the frequency is increased to over 4MHz, lack of stability turns into a significant issue. simple metal detector circuit using a single IC 40106 Metal detector diagram As displayed, the circuit oscillates close to 230 kHz. The frequency can even be examined by altering the value of C1. A Faraday shield could be included in minimize ground effect and capacitive coupling, which is wired to 0V. Considering that the inductor L1 is tolerant to the rapid changeover voltage, the load of C1 seems to be a bit retarded once the logic level of IC1a pin 2 varies. This produces a rapid fluctuation, that is caught by an MW radio. Any kind of modification in the inductance of the search coil through the (presence|occurrence} of metal) leads to an alteration in the frequency of the oscillator. Even though 230kHz no longer has enough range of the Medium Wave band, a MW radio may evidently recapture the harmonics of this frequency. How to Calibrate the Metal Detector The making of the L1 search coil lets plenty of margin for error and is also faraway from criticality. I, in my prototype applied 70 turns 30 inches (.315 mm) of enamelled copper wire with 120 mm in diameter. The metal detector is set up by adjusting the MW radio to whistle. Not every of the harmonics work effectively, and the best suited one need to be identified. The existence of metal will evidently affect the tone of the whistle. Please Note: The explained circuit isn't a commercial or security metal detector and is definitely not a metal detection product. It's simply a portable metal detector and, not a full-fledged hand-held metal detector.]]> 2784 0 0 0 Proximity Detector Circuit - LC Tuned IC CS209 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/proximity-detector-circuit-lc-tuned-ic-cs209/ Tue, 23 May 2017 04:01:04 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2792 ]]> 2792 0 0 0 Simple Water Level Alarm Circuit using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-water-level-alarm-circuit-using-ic-555/ Tue, 23 May 2017 04:17:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2795 Notes: The above IC 555 water level alarm circuit can be powered through a 3V battery. Build the circuit over a good quality PCB or a strip board. The probes may possibly is made up of a couple of insulated aluminum copper wires. You can put probes at the level where an individual must diagnose the exact level.]]> 2795 0 0 0 Simple 1 minute to 60 minutes Timer Circuit using IC 4011 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-1-minute-to-60-minutes-timer-circuit-using-ic-4011/ Wed, 24 May 2017 16:35:01 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2802 ]]> 2802 0 0 0 Simple 12V Battery Charger with Battery Indicator https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-12v-battery-charger-with-battery-indicator/ Thu, 25 May 2017 02:42:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2808 How the simple battery charger circuit works - The charging circuit is created around voltage regulator IC 7815 and a couple of BC transistors 547 BJTs. - The main 230V or 110V input could be the first steped down through a step-down transformer, after that it may be rectified and filtered. - This DC voltage is then delivered to the voltage regulator IC 7815 ;. The output gets regulated at 15V for charging the connected 12 volt rechargeable battery at the output of the voltage regulator. And it begins charging the battery as soon as the main power is available. - Any time battery voltage falls under a particular value LED1 ceases to glow and the buzzer begins sounding indicating that the battery is discharged and requires recharging. Bill of Material -transformer (230V to 15V or 110V T0 15V) -pont rectifier (1N4007 x 4) -condenser (470UF, 50V) - IC 7815 Voltage Regulator -12V rechargeable battery]]> 2808 0 0 0 Automatic Darkness Activated Porch Light Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-darkness-activated-porch-light-circuit/ Thu, 25 May 2017 04:04:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2811 For a photosensitive component, we employed a photoresist (LDR), referenced FR1 in the plan. The pin 3 (non-inverting) of the opamp IC1 is coupled to the junction of the LDR and the trimmer R1. The LDR is coupled to the + 12 volts and the trimmer to ground, the installation makes up a bridge connected with adjustable values. The opposite (inverting) pin of the same opamp is attached to the junction of the two resistors R2 and R3, R2 being linked with +12 volts and R3 to ground, the construction comprises a bridge of set value. The tenson at the center is 6 volts. For as long as the LDR is lit up by a light source on the pin 3 of IC1, we possess a positive voltage bigger than that existing on the pin 2 and therefore the output pin 6 of IC1 reaches logic level 1 + 12 volts). The resistor R4 consequently find it difficult to polarize the transistor that is a PNP, the relay as a result continues to be inactive. Once the LDR is positioned in the dark, on the pin 3 of IC1, we get a positive voltage below that's existing on the pin 2. Because of this, the output pin 6 of IC1 reaches logic level 0 the ground). The resistor R4 is as a result grounded and the base of the transistor TR1 is biased (PNP). The last mentioned then gets conductive and the relay put into its collector is turned on, making it feasible to toggle any load. The trimmer R1 attached in line with the photoresistor acts to determine the sensitivity of the detection. Parts List for the above explained automatic darkness activated porch light circuit R1 = 10 kΩ preset R2 = 10 kΩ R3 = 10 kΩ R4 =1.2 kΩ R5 = 1.2 kΩ FR1 = Photoresist C1 = 100 μF electr olytic DS1 = Diode 1N4007 TR1 = PNP BC557 IC1 =  μA741 Relay = 12 V 400 ohms]]> 2811 0 0 0 Capacitive Proximity Sensor Alarm Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/capacitive-proximity-sensor-alarm-circuit/ Mon, 29 May 2017 09:28:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2822 capacitive proximity sensor alarm circuit To the silicon DS1 and DS2 that, by aligning it, supply a positive DC voltage. This particular voltage extends to the base of TR2 that in this manner prospects and excites the relay linked to its collector. Since the oscillator works around its crucial level, the moment an individual comes near or touches the sensor dish, the oscillator ceases and the base of TR2 is inhibited from receiving positive voltage to maintain per se in conduction, and Ends conducting, which in turn switches OFF the relay. To place the oscillator in its crucial operating position, an variable capacitor C1 of 60 pF is positioned Between collector and emitter of TR1. DL1, in parallel together with the winding of the relay, runs away anytime the latter stops. Because the JAF1 choke is 1 mH, a frequency of approximately 500 kHz is attained. By self adjusting the value of this component the circuit functions too, however on another frequency. To verify the sensor for this capacitive proximity alarm, you can use a rectangle of printed circuit (or a sheet metal, for instance of aluminum) of 10 x 20 cm (smaller it might find hard to prevent the oscillator). List of electronic components: R1 = 10 kΩ R2 = 470 kΩ R3 = 3.3 kΩ R4 = 1 kΩ C1 = 10-60 pF capacitor C2 = 10 nF polyester C3 = 680 pF ceramic C4 = 10 nF polyester C5 = 100 μF electrolytic C6 = 10 nF polyester JAF1 = self 1 mH DS1 = diode 1N4148 DS2 = diode 1N1448 DS3 = diode 1N4007 DL1 = LED light TR1 = NPN BC107 TR2 = NPN BC517 RL1 = relay 12 V 1 RT S1 = switch (Unless otherwise stated, all resistances Are 1/4 W at 5%)  ]]> 2822 0 0 0 653 0 0 655 https://makingcircuits.com/ 653 1 Darkness Safety Light Circuit for Bikers and Pedestrians https://makingcircuits.com/blog/darkness-safety-light-circuit-bikers-pedestrians/ Thu, 01 Jun 2017 08:58:06 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2827 Be replaced by the 74LS132). The initial 3 gates IC1-A, IC1-B and IC1-C are employed in an oscillator level as their frequency is dependent upon the values ​​of C1, R1 and R2, the 3rd IC1-D is attached as a possible inverter to trigger the LEDs DL1 And DL2. Figure 1: Electrical diagram of the nighttime turn signal for bicycle or pedestrian. All these integrated circuits working at 5 V and the batteries 6F22 at 9 V getting unquestionably incredibly handy, the voltage is lowered and stabilized by a regulator 78L05. Simply by switching the knob slider of R2 from one ending of its track to another, the blinking moves from 0.5 to 3 flashes per second. This blinking darkness safety light circuit for bikers and pedestrians is fitted in a tiny pocket worn as a passing in a belt to place close to its waist (by bike, on foot, etc.). You will notice that this blinking safety is absolutely great at nighttime. Absolutely nothing stops more to construct a number of (the cost price is derisory) and to put them in a number of locations such as on shoes, shoulders, helmet, belt, legs etc....or even on a scooter stepney tyre,  in order to boost the field of vision. Parts List R1 =2.2 kΩ R2 =10 kΩ trimmer R3 = 220 Ω R4 = 220 Ω C1 = 47 μF electrolytic C2 = 47 μF electrolytic C3 = 47 μF electrolytic DL1 = LED diode DL2 = LED diode IC1 = integrated SN74HC132 IC2 = integrated MC78L05 S1 = switch (Unless otherwise stated, all resistances Are 1/4 W at 5%)]]> 2827 0 0 0 Speaker Box Amplifier Circuit with Woofer, Tweeter https://makingcircuits.com/blog/speaker-box-amplifier-circuit-woofer-tweeter/ Fri, 02 Jun 2017 16:37:04 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2830 It is an amplifier which, with a voltage of 14.4 Volts, distributes a total power of 20 Watts in two different channels to which are connected as TWEETER and as WOOFER respectively. This proposed 20 watt speaker box amplifier circuit is therefore equipped with an active CROSS-OVER filter with a crossover frequency of 2 KHz. Each loudspeaker must support a power of 10 Watts and have an impedance of 4 Ohms. The trimmer TR1 allows the best acoustic rendering of the power of that. Output of the treble channel. The supply voltage is adjusted to be between 12 and ges-tive up to 15 volts. This buyit-in woofer/tweeter speaker amplifier circuit can be also advantageously used as a BOOSTER for 2-way radio. In this case, a resistance of 3.3 kOhms must be interposed between the output of the car radio and the input of the amplifier. In order to avoid unpleasant distortions, signals above 50 mV must be avoided. In order to assemble the components, the implantation diagram must be followed. Parts list for the speaker box amplifier circuit: All resistors are 1/4 watt unless otherwise stated. R1 = 680 Ohms R2 = 10Kohms R3 = 1 Kohm R4 = 1 Kohm R5 = 10 ohms R6 = 10 Ohms R7 = 10hm R8 = 1 Ohm TR1 = 10 Kohms trimmer CI = 5.6 nF ceramic. C2 = 5.6 nF ceramic. C3 = 2.2uF16Velec. C4 = 2.2uF16Velec. C5 = 2,2uF16Velec. C6 = 100uF16Velec. C7 = 100uF16Velec. C8 = 100uF16Velec. C9 = 100nFpol. C10 = 100nFpol. CII-lOOnFpol. Cl2 = 2200uF16Velec. IC1 = TDA2004-2005 1 Heat sink.  ]]> 2830 0 0 0 Simple Stereo Amplifier Circuit using IC TDA2004 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-stereo-amplifier-circuit-using-ic-tda2004/ Sat, 03 Jun 2017 08:56:42 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2837
  • The main features which includes in this IC are: Low distortion. Almost zero noise.
  • The IC also features substantial stability of the of the package with supplemental essential safety measures throughout its functioning using the following protections:OUTPUT AC SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND EXTREMELY INDUCTIVE LOADS OVERRATING CHIP TEMP LOAD DUMP VOLTAGE SPIKE FORTUITOUS OPEN UP GROUND
  • Space and cost conserving : suprisingly low quantity of external parts,quite simple installation system without any electrical isolation amongst the package and the heatsink.The TDA2004A is actually a class B dual audio power amplifier in MULTIWATT bundle particularly created for stereo audio amplification purposes.tda2004 car battery stereo amplifier circuit
  • Simple Stereo Amplifier Circuit using IC TDA2004PARTS LIST
  • Resistors ( all are 1/4 watt 5%) R1= 1Ω R2= 1Ω R3= 1.2kΩ R4= 1.2kΩ R5= 3.3Ω R6= 3.3Ω R7= 120kΩ C1= 2200µF 16V C2= 2200µF 16V C3= 100µF 16V C4= 100µF 16V C5= 100nF (104) C6= 100nF (104) C7= 220µF 16V C8= 220µF 16V C9= 2.2µF 16V C10= 2.2µF 16V C11= 100nF (104) C12= 470µF 25V C13= 10µF 16V LS1, LS2= 4Ω 10W speaker IC1= TDA2004
    • With the part values displayed along with a supply voltage of 14.4V (a fully charged car battery), the stereo amplifier has the ability to of offering a power output of a minimum of 6W, normally 6.5W with a load impedance of 4Ω. It may also deal with a load impedance of 2Ω, whereby the output power is actually a the least 9W, but generally 10W. Power outputs with this arrangement are susceptible to about 10% distortion, nevertheless, if reduced power outputs are suitable, 4W with a load impedance 4Ω or 6W having a load impedance of 2Ω, distortion is barely within the limits of 0.3%. The voltage gain of the left-hand channel depends upon the proportion of R3 to R5, as well as that of the right-hand channel through the percentage of R4 to R6. Using the values provided, this can be 50dB. Consequently, a signal of 50mV is necessary at the input to offer the optimum output. If this input sensitivity is really high, a 50kΩ stereo potentiometer could be integrated within the input. The impedance of non-inverting amplifier input is at the most 100kΩ. TDA2004 PIN Settings Top View TDA2004 PIN Configuration-top-view The system composed of resistor R1 and capacitor C5 (and R2, C6) is incorporated to avoid the amplifier getting unstable at higher input frequencies. The bandwidth of the circuit is higher than enough for proper use as a audio stereo amplifier. The frequency response of amplifier will be 40Hz to 16kHz (3dB level). The IC needs to be maintained adequately cooled. The thermal resistance of the heatsink ought to be a minimum of 4°C/W.

    TDA2004 Stereo Amplifier PCB Layout

    TDA2004/TDA2005 20watt stereo amplifier PCB layout]]>     2837 0 0 0     Metal Detector for Identifying Metal Pipes, Nails, Cables https://makingcircuits.com/blog/metal-detector-identifying-metal-pipes-nails-cables/ Mon, 12 Jun 2017 08:51:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2845 One amongst its primary uses is to sense the existence of metallic tubes (water tube, gas tube, electric cable, etc.). Identifying these is very beneficial when drilling or fitting nails on walls. At any time a identification is conducted, the machine has to be calibrated as depicted below: 1) Keep the sample metal part of near the coil at some reasonable distance 2) Adjust potentiometer P entirely to the right, such that the RED LED just lights up 3) Turn the potentiometer to the left until the RED LED just turns off and the GREEN LED illuminates. The detector is then ready for use. Keep in mind that calibration has to be repeated every once in awhile. At any time the detector picks up the existence of metals, the RED LED illuminates and the GREEN switches off. The coils L1 and L2, wrapped on the ferrite bar, must be completed meticulously, following cautiously the instructions of the diagram. metal detector coil construction Two simple 9-volt batteries are as much as necessary to power the equipment. To cover the gadget, it is suggested Never to utilize metallic housings. PCB Design for the metal detector pcb layout for the metal detector circuit track side   Parts List for the above metal detector circuit for locating underwall metals All resistors are Of 1/4 watt except if mentioned otherwise mentioned R1 = 1 M R2 = 47K R3 = 1 K R4 = 330 R5 = 330 PI = 10K CI = 1 nF disc C2 = 0.1 uF disc C3 = 0.1 uF disc C4 = 0.1 uF disc C5 - 47 nF disc C6 = 0.22uF. D1 = M117 D2 = AA117 DL1 = Red Led DL2 = Green LED IC1 = UA741 T1 = BC237 Wire diameter 0.3 mm l Ferritede = 8X10 1 IC socket 8 pins Holder for 9 volt battery]]> 2845 0 0 0 Simple 1000 watt Heater Controller Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-1000-watt-heater-controller-circuit/ Mon, 12 Jun 2017 16:34:35 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2859 Simple 1000 watt Heater Controller Circuit Installating the drive (1000W max) The electrical diagram of the inverter is demonstrated below: Heater Controller Part Specifications: R1: 3.9kOhms / 0.25Watt. Minimum value for restricting possible current peaks on the heater and the diac. You can pick 3.3k or 4.7k with no issues P1: 470kOhms of choice. Perhaps 1MOhm ,. It requires minimal 470k if not even on the maximum value, the flambeau will invariably sparkle just a little. C1: 100nF (unpolarized). The voltage throughout its terminals cannot surpass 35V peak. You can select a 63V or 100V model. Diac: 32V, reference DB3 for instance. There exists just one recognized design. Triac: it is a model 1000V bare minimum. The current maintained the triac might be equal to two times the current in the bulb for garnering a perimeter. The triac has to be installed on a little heatsink for 100W and more. A BTA10-400 supports 10A and can take a load up to 1000W (4.3A on 230V). Triac clamps: A1 (anode 1), A2 (anode 2), G (trigger) Warning: this controller module is directly coupled to the mains supply! This tend to be hazardous to human life. Even if the set up looks simple, be mindful!]]> 2859 0 0 0 30 Watt Stereo Amplifier Circuit Using IC TDA1521 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/30-watt-stereo-amplifier-circuit-using-ic-tda1521/ Tue, 13 Jun 2017 15:11:15 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2862 30 Watt Stereo Amplifier Circuit Using IC TDA1521     The electrical diagram of FIG. 1 displays the level that this integrated circuit can make it easy to create a Hi-Fi amplifier working having a symmetrical double feed: we are going to examine only one of the two channels (another being identical ) Pointed out INV1, -INV1 and OUT1. All of us prefer The settings offering for the application of the signal to the input -INV (non-inverting) based on the ground. Because the power supply is dual, we are able to ground the inverting inputs (INV1 and INV2, respectively pins 2 and 8) and the reference point (pin 3). Therefore, the feedback system is definitely a parallel / series since it requires a part of the output voltage and exchanges it to the inverting input of the first operational amplifier with the bridge created of resistors of 20 k and 680 k. The input signal of the circuit extends to pin 1 via C4, it is amplified for the first time and, at the output of a 1st amp-op stage, goes by to the input of a second one that boosts the level And reverses its Phase prior to delivering it to the power segment produced in contributory balance by two built-in transistors, an NPN and a PNP. These BJTs run in emitter-follower, so that they merely amplify in current and leave one other phase signal as it was at the input of the circuit integrated. First conclusion: Inverting (INV) and non-inverting (-INV) make reference to the inputs of the first operational amplifier and never to the entire amplifier. Without a doubt, to possess a signal Output in phase using the one sent to the integrated circuit, it should be shipped to the inverter (by shutting to the ground -INV) in contrast to when it is provided for the non-inverting and INV to GND, as in Our own program, the entire amplifier gets, actually, inverter. In functioning with a sinusoidal input wave at 1 kHz, achieving the loudspeaker is actually a voltage of the same envelope and frequency, with an amplitude Around 32 times higher but out of phase by 180 °. The TDA1521 features a number of protections, in addition to a delay network that, in the transient of Switches off the input stage to prevent amplifying the LF prior to the power supply has attained its speed values: in parallel using the input, there exists a second op-amp, The last mentioned should never amplify anything but give a reference voltage to the subsequent stage throughout power-up. A voltage window comparator comprising two op amps regarded as "Voltage Comparator" Monitors the power supply. In function, the two resistors of 10 k figure out precisely 0 V on the line terminating at pin 3, ie the ground potential. "In operation" ... but while the power is switched on it is extremely probable that asymmetries take place And that the potential on the positive series is different considerably from that of the negative. Because the signal BF could be delivered very distorted, it really is worthless to amplify it therefore, the comparator, sensing the abnormality, places the outputs of the two op amps in the low level (0 V) and intervenes on the "Switch" CMOS that delivers the supply voltage of the preamplifier stages towards the points Vr, by deactivating the first op amps and making just those of reference to operate. This ensues that the a couple of, attached to Vref1, polarize the inverting "inputs" of the 2nd stages with This potential (Vref1, exactly ...) simply to maintain the whole amplifiers in balance. When the power is nicely balanced, the window comparator updates it, sets its output level high and regulates the CMOS "switch" to drive the voltage Vp to the input ampli-op, ie those given by The line Vb. The reference polarization is then turned off and the music signal could be amplified and brought to the speakers. Regarding these, the TDA1521 offers short circuit protection on output terminals (on a single or each channels) ... for just one hour! Protection can also be induced in the event of overload, ie if the load impedance is too low and demands more current than the highest permissible. We will now leave the integrated circuit to obtain the existence of C4 and C8, essential for the decoupling of the inputs and the R / C dipoles, each and every in parallel with one of the loudspeakers (or loudspeakers): these RC networks in order to partly make up the rotation. C1 and C2 make up for the phase shift that the loudspeakers, Through their inductive nature, bring in between voltage and current: the objective of this compensation is to steer clear of the phase shift becoming adequately noticeable to convey, via the feedback, a LF component able to generating a self-oscillation of the amplifier as a whole. When it comes to power supply, that is partially on the circuit board (not the transformer!), It has 3 input points VA, GND, VB, that obtain the three outputs of the symmetrical center-tap secondary. D1, D2, D3, D4 form a rectifier bridge that makes it feasible to rectify the AC voltage supplied by the transformer in positive half-wave the current of the upper winding Navigate D2 and load C6 with a sinusoidal instinct after which come back by the ground to the central socket. The low winding offers a current to C7 with the center tap that returns through the negative via D3. Within negative half-wave D3 and D2 tend to be forbidden while D1 and D4 carry out: the current Moves via VB via D1 to C6 that charges with a brand new sinusoidal pulse, simultaneously one more pulse of equal amplitude goes by with the mass, load C7 and comes back through D4 on VA. As a result of the particular settings of the bridge diodes, electrolytic Are subjected to current pulses at the frequency of 100 Hz (2 for every time period) which charge these to compensate for the energy they produce to the TD1521 in regular usage. C3 filters any disturbances from the transformer. The whole circuit calls for a double 12 + 12 Vfc alternating voltage, which takes in a bit more than 16 Vdc on each branch (+16 Vdc between pin 7 of the integrated circuit and the mass, -16 Vdc between pin 5 and GND) Uses 70 mA at rest (in the lack of signal Input) and 2 A at highest power on 4-ohm speakers. Diagram showing the components of the stereo amplifier.   Drawing the stereo amplifier printed circuit board to scale 1. The practical implementation The practical acknowledgement of this Hi-Fi stereo amplifier could barely be less complicated: indeed the simple printed circuit offers just a few elements and the solitary integrated circuit SIL obviously does not have any support! Figure 2b shows the style of the small printed circuit board at level 1. If you have it in front of you, attach the several components besides the integrated circuit, finishing with the a couple of large electrolytic capacitors. Additionally, screw the integrated circuit on the heatsink (this should have an Rth of 3.3 ° C / W maximum) using the a couple of bolts, keeping in mind to put a sheet of mica or teflon insulation and a couple of Slim and regular layers of white silicone thermal paste known as "compound" to both the sides of the insulation piece. After that, twine its tabs into the gaps of the printed circuit board and weld all of them, after that slice extra lengths. If you wish to install your amplifier within a case, try some fine metallic model. Application tests: Hook up a pair of speakers with impedance no less than 4 ohms, switch on (2 x 9 to 15 Vac), after which attach a stereo sound source to the input. This particular should be built with a level control program, or else precede each channel having a potentiometer Whose slider or knb shall be linked to capacitor C4 or C5 of 1 μF, one end to ground as well as the other to the inbound LF source (utilizing a dual potentiometer is more preferable). See figure 4. List of components: R1 = 8.2 Ω 1/4 W R2 = 8.2 Ω 1/4 W C1 =22 nF ceramic C2 = 22 nF ceramic C3 = 100 nF multilayer C4, C5 = 1 μF 63 V polyester C6 = 4 700 μF 25 V electrolytic C7 = 4 700 μF 25 V electrolytic D1----D4 = 1N5404 U1 .... TDA1521 Misc: 1 ...... heatsink (Rth less than 3.3 ° C / W) 2 ...... bolts 3MA 12 mm Unless otherwise specified, all Resistors are 1/4 W at 5%. TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS - Power supply: balanced 12 V balanced voltage - Maximum output power RMS: 2 x 15 W / 4 ohms, 2 x 10 W / 8 ohms - Maximum musical output power: 2 x 30 W / 4 ohms - Harmonic Distortion: 0.007% (1 W / 1 kHz) - Input sensitivity: 300 mV / 20 kilohms - Frequency: from 7 Hz to 60 kHz (-3 dB) - 70 dB for each channel - Output power (R1 = 8 ohms): 2 x 10 W RMS - Output power (R1 = 4 ohms): 2 x 15 W RMS - Bandwidth (-3 dB): 7 to 60,000 Hz - Sensitivity to maximum power (8 ohms): 290 mVeff - Sensitivity to maximum power (4 ohms): 250 mVeff - Input impedance: 20 kilohms - Signal-to-noise ratio: 98 dB - Crosstalk: -70 dB - Excellent stereo amplification - Low noise - Overload protection: Maximum one hour.]]> 2862 0 0 0 Small FM Transmitter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/small-fm-transmitter-circuit/ Thu, 15 Jun 2017 08:40:22 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2857 Small FM Transmitter Circuit Prototype   FM Transmitter Circuit Description The offered system enables us to generate an FM transmitter, which includes an amplified microphone circuit, with compact dimensions (23 × 41 mm) that functions within a frequency range between 70 and 110 MHz. It could be picked up by a straightforward FM receiver a few tens of yards apart. To be able to enhance the range, you should implement at point A a piece of 75 cm long wire that has an antenna function. Just one 9 volt battery is sufficient to power the device. The consumption is 5 mA only.   small FM transmitter circuitFor your set up of the components it really is adequate to follow along with cautiously the clues of the layout diagram. Parts List for the proposed small FM transmitter circuit All resistors are Of 1/4 watt except if mentioned otherwise R1 = 10 K R2 = 10 K R3 = 68 K R4 = 120 Ohms CI 100 nF . C2 = 47 nF . C3 = 470 pF . C4 = 3.3 pF . CV1 = 4- 20 pF trimmer. L1 = 0.6 μH coil. T1 = 2N2222 M = Electret MIC. 1 Clip for 9 volt battery. Technical specifications : POWER SUPPLY: 9V Battery PP3 Power consumption: 5mA FREQUENCY: 70-110 MHz Distance Range: Over 100 meters      ]]> 2857 0 0 0 Simple Smartphone Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-smartphone-charger-circuit/ Wed, 21 Jun 2017 08:51:32 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2906 This circuit works extremely well with low voltage solar power panels to create a little battery charger or to power directly a 5 volt device. Additionally it is mainly excellent to obtain usable voltages from tiny DIY stepper motor wind turbines  yet again to recharge the batteries or LED light. The source of the voltage booster circuit explained in this post is inspired from the original MintyBoost - a powered DIY device / recharging a USB device (for instance, then an iPod, and today iPhones and other smartphones) employing just a couple of Rechargeable AA batteries. Converter MAX756 3.3V / 5V Step-Up DC-DC: The important thing take into account in this voltage booster is the MAX756 - a MAXIM integrated circuit. This particular little chip boosts input supply voltages as little as 0.7 volts into a 3.3 volt or 5 volt output (user selectable) to up to 87% efficiency. The utmost output current is actually 200 mA which can be adequate for a broad variety of applications, which includes LED lighting, and the lowest input voltage is low makes it possible for the full capacity of the batteries to be utilized fully. Making the DC-DC converter for charging smartphones The below components are essential to create this 0.7 to 5 volts DC to DC converter using potentials and possibly prototyping or soldering tools and tips: 1 x MAX756 2 x 100uF capacitors 2 x 0.1uF Capactitors 1 x 1N5817 Schottky diode 1 x 22UH Power Inductor smartphone charger circuit prototype In the image shown above is the (not so photogenic) circuit finished on prototypying mock-up. The above simple smartphone charger circuit was successfully tested with a couple of 'flat' AA rechargeable batteries. The complete battery voltage had been assessed at 2.21 volts, and the output voltage of the circuit had been tested at 5.00 volts using just one digital multimeter. The output voltage had been employed to power an ultrabright LED for 24 hours (by way of a current limiting resistor 270 Ohm) with no indications of dimming throughout this time around. 3.3V output of MAXC756 The above circuitry is utilized to induce DC voltages from 0.7+ Volts to 5.0 Volts. Simply by altering the input to pin 2 of the MAX756 from ground to positive, the output is triggered at 3.3 volts. This lets some LEDs to be illuminated without necessity for any series resistor or having a smaller resistance, so there exists much less waste of power by means of heat. The Volt DC 3.3 output could furthermore be applied for Trickly charging a couple of AA batteries (in series) using the MAX756's 200mA current output. For more information regarding the IC and the parts, you can refer to this datasheet of the IC]]> 2906 0 0 0 Day Night Activated Triac Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/day-night-activated-triac-switch-circuit/ Fri, 23 Jun 2017 08:43:38 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2918 Generally speaking, this is a type of photoelectric relay which is driven directly through the home's mains electrical system, with no need for any kind of mechanized device like relay or other component. This day night switch circuit using triac and LDR is extremely straightforward, therefore its inexpensive and simple to build, only there exists one particular drawback, it is not flexible and is not going to enable electronic adjustments to drive or modify the switch. That, by the way, is not a mechanical switch, rather an SCR or triac. Photoelectric relay cell Interconnection of a photoelectric relay cell Photoelectric relays There are numerous remedies developed to automatically switch off the lamps as soon as it's dark. Generally we require a DC power supply and an electromechanical relay, however in case you come up with a circuit which can be directly coupled to the AC power supply, the quantity of components necessary is usually minimized down and that is exactly what reveals in this project displayed below. day night automatic triac switch circuit   The key component of the day night triggered triac switch circuit is a LDR photoresistor of sensitive resistance, resistance in Quebec may differ its resistance According to the strength of the light it obtains, it possesses a resistance of 200 ohms at nighttime and during daylight a few thousand Ohms. The capacitor C1 is a voltage divider for delivering the photosensitive LDR and the triac gate. In Normal light, voltage declines as LDR resistance diminishes, however, at night, resistance to photoresistor gets higher, causing improved triac activation current, operating and lights. Parts List C1 = 105/400V PPC capacitor R2 = 1K, 1/2 watt LDR = high sensitive type Triac = BT136]]> 2918 0 0 0 684 http://www.talkingelectronics.com 0 0 685 http://www.talkingelectronics.com 684 0 686 http://www.talkingelectronics.com 0 0 687 http://www.talkingelectronics.com 0 0 688 https://makingcircuits.com/ 684 1 Automatic 12V Battery Charger Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/automatic-12v-battery-charger-circuit/ Fri, 23 Jun 2017 16:10:45 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2927 Its functioning seemingly automatic considering that, whenever it's plugged into a battery, it will eventually only function if the battery is discharged, and it is going to automatically remove when the battery is fully charged. The unit is driven by a transformer whose secondary is usually 14-15 Volts having a current of 3 Amperes minimum. Automatic 12V Battery Charger Circuit The trimmer TR1 is tweaked to ensure that at the output of the battery charger there exists a voltage of about 14.4 volts without load. The absolute maximum distributable current is 3 Amperes, so DO NOT make an effort to recharge batteries with a capacity higher than 36Ah. Best utilization of this device would be to power a battery charger for alarm system with battery in standby mode. In the course of installation, attention should be taken to hook up the battery with the proper polarity. For the construction of the components, cautiously stick to the configuration of the diagram. Printed circuit, AUTOMATIC BATTERY CHARGER INPUT 14-15 VOLTS at a charging CURRENT of MAX 3 AMPERES Automatic 12V Battery Charger Circuit PCB Layout track side Parts List for the 12V automatic car battery charger circuit: All resistors are Of 1/4 watt unless otherwise specified. Rl-470 Ohms R2 = 10 K R3 = 270 Ohms TR1 = 10 K trimmer. Cl = 1000uF25V. DZ1 = 5.1 volts lWzener. T1 = 2N2218 T2 = 2N3055-BDW21C 1C1 = UA741 PT1 = KBL04 / 01 1 Socket 8 pins. 1 Heat sink for Tl. 1 Heat sink for T2.]]> 2927 0 0 0 IC 7812, 7805 Current Booster Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/7812-7805-ic-current-booster-circuit/ Sun, 25 Jun 2017 08:46:21 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2933 increase boost current in 7812, 7805 and all 78XX circuit using transistor The current booster circuit for 7812, 7805 ICs offered in this article demonstrates that a less complicated solution might be achievable: the power transistor, T1, is presented with an emitter resistor! This successfully handles the problem, due to the fact the current via T1 is then proportionate to the current delivered through the voltage regulator. In case the 78XX regulator and T1 are attached onto the same heatsink, the transistor is additionally thermally guarded! The output voltage will depend merely on the type of voltage regulator used and, as presented here, the circuit is well suited for currents as much as 2 A. If greater values are needed, a number of parts might have to be modified based on the given chart below. To increase currents over 7 A, transistor T1 should be substituted by a couple of parallel attached transistors each of containing an emitter resistor, R1 and R1' respectively. 78XX current booster parts list chart table]]> 2933 0 0 0 Programmable Plant Watering Timer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/programmable-plant-watering-timer-circuit/ Wed, 28 Jun 2017 03:40:27 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2941     The automatic plant watering timer circuit can be visualized in the above images. The description can be understood from the following explanation: 1) IC 4060 is wired as a standard timer circuit which generates clock signals at a rate depending on values of the R, C components connected across its pin#9 and pin#10. This could be set to achieve a clicks signals with delays of 1 hour, 2 hour or whatever may be required to appear at pin#3 of the IC. Only one of the 7 stages are shown above, for 7 days week you will have to make 7 nos of IC 4017 stage...the 4060 need not be repeated, the signal from pin#3 and BC557 of IC 4060 can be commonly applied to all the 4017 stages. 3) THe above clocks are transferred to pin#14 of IC 4017 via the BC557 transistor. 4) Te IC4017 responds to each positive edged clocks and shifts a logic high across its pin#3 to pin#8 5) The selector switch across the 4017 outputs decides after how many hours the next similar stage needs to be triggered so that the next 4017 stage repeats the timing cycle, and subsequently the next second 4017 stage triggers the 3rd 4017 stage through its own selector switch and the BC547 stage....and so on. The 20 second Delay Timer circuit for the programmable plant watering timer circuit Pin#2 of the IC 4017 can be connected to a 20 second delay OFF timer circuit, which can be built as per the below given diagram. Pin#2 of the 4017 IC is configured with the 33uF end of the following circuit. simple delay OFF timer circuit When power is first switched ON, the IC 4017 and 4060 both get reset, and simultaneously the logic from pin#3 of 4017 jumps to its pin#2. This initiates the 20 second timer circuit by triggering its relay ON. The relay now powers the MCU...but only until 20 seconds have elapsed, when the timer switches OFF the relay ans the MCU. After this the IC 4060 keeps counting and with every logic high clock it forces the IC 4017 to shift its logic across the shown output pinouts. Depending on which pinout is connected with the selector switch the 4017 C latches and halts when the logic shifts on that particular pinout. Once this happens , the BC547 carries forward the process and triggers the next 4017 IC, and the same process is repeated with the second stage until the 3rd stages is trigger and s on. Modified water timer diagram as per the rectifications suggested by Mr. Michael: Please refer to the comment discussion for the details.]]> 2941 0 0 0 598 http://- 0 0 599 https://makingcircuits.com/ 598 1 600 https://makingcircuits.com/ 598 1 602 http://- 0 0 603 https://makingcircuits.com/ 602 1 604 http://- 0 0 605 https://makingcircuits.com/ 604 1 606 http://- 0 0 607 https://makingcircuits.com/ 606 1 608 http://- 0 0 612 https://makingcircuits.com/ 608 1 614 https://makingcircuits.com/ 608 1 617 http://- 0 0 618 https://makingcircuits.com/ 617 1 Dynamic MIC Preamplifier Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/dynamic-mic-preamplifier-circuit/ Wed, 28 Jun 2017 05:25:09 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2950 MIC preamplifier circuit dynamic Circuit Description By using just a couple of BC547 NPNs or Equivalent, and through a directly coupled circuit we can make a MIC preamplifier circuit for amplifying minute mic signals into very strong signal. Figure 2: Electrical diagram (the voltages indicated have Were measured by supplying the circuit with a voltage of 12 V). TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS of this MIC preamp : Required Supply voltage 9 to 18 V Current consumption at 12 V 1.5 mA Minimum input signal 30 mVpp Maximum Output Signal at 12 V 7.5 Vpp Bandwidth 10 Hz to 40 KHz Average gain 250   Bill of Materials R1 =100 k preset R2 =47 k R3 =82 k R4 =560 R5 =4.7 k R6 =680Ω R7 =680Ω R8 =100Ω R9 =47 k R10 =100 k R11 ... 100 k C1 =390 nF polyester C2 =10 μF electrolytic C3 =1 μF polyester C4 =1 μF polyester TR1 =BC547 TR2 =BC547 PCB Design and Component layout ]]> 2950 0 0 0 Very Sensitive Clap Switch Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/sensitive-clap-switch-circuit/ Sun, 02 Jul 2017 12:04:50 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2964 very sensitive clap switch circuit It could be arranged in a couple of diverse working modes: 1) The relay becomes engergized anytime it receives an audio and deenergizes as soon as the sound ends. 2) The relay is activated when the MIC is hit with a sound and continues to be activated even once the sound stops. To deactiavte the relay, you will need to create another sound by clapping or by any method. Therefore you can assume that the relay functions as ON/OFF switch itself. The item is a gadget very sensitive to sounds and noises. It could be pre-programmed based on a couple of distinct functioning processes. Using the selector DV in position 1, the relay is activated as soon as the capsule M receives a sound and turns off once the sound stops. However Having the selector switch DV in position 2, the relay switches ON when the MIC capsule gets a sound, and stays switched in that position even after the sound is removed. And to de-energize the relay OFF you might requires another sound to hit the MIC and turn the relay OFF. The microphone capsule is attached to the circuit with a little shielded cable, it can be positioned over a particular range (15 or 20 cm minimum) in this manner as to avoid the level of sensitivity of the microphone and prevent stary pick up from the vibrations of the relay. The supply voltage has to be 12 Volts DC regulated. During idle conditions, the consumption is approximately 1 mA, with the relay activated it is around 45 mA. To be able to perform the setting up for this sensitive clap switch circuit, the layout of the components has to be cautiously implemented. Parts List All resistors are Of 1/4 watt unless stated otherwise R1 = 6.8K R2 = 4.7 K R3 = 39 K R4 = 5.6 K R5 = 470 K R6 = 470 K R7 = 100 K R8-3.9 K TRl = 2.2M CI = 100 nF. C2 = 22uF16Velec. C3 = 22uF16Velec. C4 = luF16Velec. D1-1N4148 D2 = 1N4148 Tl = 2N1711 IC1 = LM324 IC2-4017 DV = Selector. M = Micro capsule. RL1 = 12 V relay. 1 Support 14 pins. 1 Support 16 pins. PCB design for this super sensitive clap switch circuit or voice operated relay circuit clap switch PCB layout]]> 2964 0 0 0 220V Fan Regulator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/220v-fan-regulator-circuit/ Sun, 02 Jul 2017 14:31:02 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2969 simple fan regulator circuit 220V It is additionally advised never to make an effort to employ this fan regulator circuit with fluorescents lamps. It is preferable if you make use of the circuit with optimum power, to place a heat sink on the TRIAC T1 in order to lengthen the life of the circuit. Parts list for this simple yet very efficient fan regulator circuit All resistors are 1/4 watt 5% rated unless otherwise mentioned opposite. Rl = 33K R2 = 560K Pl = 220Kohms. CI = 0.1 μF 400 V. C2 = 0.33 yF 100 V. D1-1N4007 D2-1N4007 D3 = Diac DB-3 LI = Coil on ferrite Fl = Ferrite 8 X 50mm T1 = TRIAC 400V8A. WARNING ! CIRCUIT WORKS WITH 230 VOLT. HANDLE WITH UTMOST CAUTION !   PCB Layout for the above explained simple 220V fan regulator circuit   fan regulator PCB layout 220V]]> 2969 0 0 0 Simple 12 watt Amplifier Circuit using TDA1020 IC https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-12-watt-amplifier-circuit-using-tda1020-ic/ Mon, 03 Jul 2017 03:33:13 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2980 12 watt power amplifier circuit using tda1020 IC Pinout Specifications of the IC TDA1020 Pin#1: Negative supply (substrate) Pin#2: Output power stage Pin#3: Positive supply (VP) Pin#4: Bootstrap Pin#5: Ripple rejection filter Pin#6: Input power stage Pin#7: Output preamplifier Pin#8: Input preamplifier Pin#9: Negative supply]]> 2980 0 0 0 Adjustable Power Supply 3 to 30V 3A Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/adjustable-power-supply-3-30v-3a-circuit/ Thu, 06 Jul 2017 08:42:25 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2985 Adjustable power supply 3-30V 3A stabilized (regulated DC Power) Parts List: R1 = 8.2K R2 = 2.2K R3 = 680R R4 = 1K R5 = 82K R6 = 0.18R / 5W C1 = 470p C2 = 100nF-63V C3 = 100nF-63V C4 = 100uF 63V- C5 = 10KuF-60V D1 to D6 = 6.6A Q1 = MJ3001 (Darlington) IC1 = UA723D Specifications: Overload protection is built-in Short-circuit protection also included Output current not to exceed 3A at the input Output Ripple Voltage may not be higher than: 0.5 mV Output voltage is linearly adjustable from 3 to 30V, stabilized Input voltage should be preferably from 9 to 30V AC (depending on the desired output voltage) Mounting inside a metallic cabinet In case a metallic box is utilized, the tramsformer should be attached to it firmly with nuts and bolts for safety purposes. Make certain that the heatsinks used doesn't touch the metallic box. This may result in a short circuit. While installing a toroidal transformer, it should be observed that the fixing bolt doesn't come in contact with the box. This may result in the transformer to burn up When the circuit is required to be incorporated into another box make sure, it is designed with ventilation gaps (you possibly can make yourself by drilling a handful of these holes), essential to relieve the developed heating. How to test this 30 V variable power supply circuit Hook up a voltmeter to "GND" the points and '+ OUT "and set" RV1 "until the preferred output voltage is arrived at. Utilize some heatsink compound paste to the bottom of the transistor and attach it on the heatsink. When you need 3 to 8 volts in that case R2 will likely be 5.6K Should you need greater than 8 volts in that case the R2 is going to be 2.2K The recommended transformer for this Adjustable power supply 3-30V 3A circuit must have the rating of 30VAC to 120VA]]> 2985 0 0 0 36 Watt BTL Power Amplifier Circuit using IC TDA1562Q https://makingcircuits.com/blog/36-watt-btl-power-amplifier-circuit-using-ic-tda1562q/ Sat, 08 Jul 2017 09:35:05 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=2990 This innovative Powerful Midget Amplifier can definitely throw a punch of about 36 W constant RMS right into a 4 ohm loudspeaker when you use a 14V power supply. On the other hand, it's the 70W output power which it could possibly offer in dynamic signal circumstances (music) that actually allow you to sit back and feel amazed. As may be seen in the photographs and circuit diagram, the Powerful Midget makes use of only a few components. It truly is constructed on a PCB which measures merely 104mm x 39mm, but even though its dimension could be small, these are certainly not small concerning its power. And also the noise and distortion statistics are extremely great as well. 36 watt power amplifier circuit In the middle of the circuit would be the integrated circuit TDA1562Q, referred to by Philips as a "monolithic integrated bridge-Tied load (BTL) class H high efficiency power amplifier. It is made in a 17-pin "DIL-bent-SIL" plastic package and is not simply made to be applied in car audio and portable PA but also for multilevel purposes, along with Mini/Midi sound systems and sound with the TV. PCB design and component layout: PCB for the 36 watt amplifier circuit Technical Specifications Output power 36W RMS under with a 4 ohm loudspeaker Music power 70W peak to peak on 4 Ohm loudspeaker Frequency response is around 1dB low to 28Hz and 55kHz Input sensitivity is approximately at 130mV RMS (@36W) The harmonic distortion may be typically measured at  0.2% Unweighted 95dB signal-to-noise ratio (22Hz to 22kHz)]]> 2990 0 0 0 Metal Detector Circuit using Single Transistor - Tutorial https://makingcircuits.com/blog/metal-detector-circuit-using-single-transistor-tutorial/ Sun, 09 Jul 2017 16:12:18 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3001 simple metal detector using single transistor This really is called an LC circuit where L is the inductor of the inductor in Henries (or mH or UH) and C is the capacitance of the capacitor in farads (or uF or nF or pF). Let's commence when the transistor activates and enables a pulse of energy to get into the tuned circuit (afterwards you will notice how the transistor activates). The energy pulse (current) starts by attempting to input both the coil and a capacitor. You possibly can think about the coil the smallest resistance, nevertheless the capacitor is discharged and has a assumptive zero resistance and starts to charge. Whenever a small tension shows up via this, you might believe that the coil could end up being the least resistance since it includes just a few turns of copper wire. But the wire is wound in a coil and forms an inductor (it has an inductor). If a voltage is put on, the low resistance of the inductor enables a current circulation, however this current generates magnetic flux which reduces off the turns of the coil and constitutes a voltage feedback which clashes the incoming current. It functions this way: Assume you supply 200mV to the coil. The voltage feedback it generates could be as high as 199mV and for that reason you merely get 1mV with which it drives current into the coil. When the resistance of the coil is 100mohms, the current is going to be about 10mA. The capacitor will acknowledge in addition to that and so it charges first. As the voltage on the capacitor boosts, it shows its inductor voltage and enables current flow (at a level which will take the coil) to create magnetic flux. This flux is known as electromagnetic force lines and produces an increasing sector. The capacitor cannot supply the energy for very long and after a brief period of time the current diminishes, evoking the magnetic field to start to break down. The magnetic field created collapses a voltage which is reverse to this initially delivered to it and the lower section of the coil turns into positive based on the top part. If we consider the coil being small battery we see that this contributes to its voltage to the 9v of supply and the collector's terminate of the coil gets greater than 9V. This voltage is noticed by the feedback capacitor 1n (between the collector and the emitter) and it moves the voltage to the transmitter, where it boosts the emitter voltage. The base of the transistor is held steady and constant by the activity of the capacitor 10n retaining and the transistor turned off somewhat. This process carries on and ultimately the collector may very well be as withdrawn from the circuit in order that it does not place any load on the tuned circuit. Whenever an inductor is not loaded on this kind, the magnetic field of collapse may generate the maximum voltage. This is actually the case in the circuit above and as the collapse of the magnetic field, it constitutes a voltage (about 25v) that is substantially greater than that put on it. This voltage is handed down to the "C" component of the tuned circuit (the capacitor 1n connected across the coil) and the capacitor charges as much as. Whenever all the magnetic flux has become transformed into the voltage the capacitor is charged and it starts to offer this charge back to the coil. Along the way, the voltage across the capacitor is decreased The frequency of the circuit is approximately 140 kHz and it is fixed by the inductance of the coil and the capacitor through it. Once we put an article of metal in the magnetic field of the coil, many of the flux lines go through the metal and so are changed into an electrical current known as eddy current in the metal. Which means that we eliminate a few of the magnetic flux and for that reason it is less accessible to return to the coil as soon as it begins to break down. Because of this the reverse-voltage created by the coil is going to be reduced and then the capacitor is going to take much less time to charge to its optimum value. Therefore, the transistor is going to be turned on sooner and thus the frequency of the circuit increases. The flux created by the coil is electromagnetic radiation similar to radio waves having the identical frequency. If we place a radio close to the coil and tune this to a harmonic, both frequencies will "beat" together and develop a "null spot" on the radio. If a piece of metal gets into the field of the coil, the frequency varies a bit and a low-frequency tone is imparted from the loudspeaker. A change in the frequency of only a few hertz is going to be distinctly heard and this is the reason why the circuit is so efficient. The sensitivity of the coil is determined by the frequency of alter energising the circuit at the smallest insertion of a metal item. This involves the transistor to work at an amplitude that is not saturated, in order that the tiniest penetration of a part of metal inside the field will probably affect the frequency. You will need to remember that the amplitude of the wave is additionally decreased as soon as a piece of metal is brought near, nevertheless the radio is not really setup to identify this. Various other metal detectors identify the drop in amplitude and afterwards you will notice the way the two circuits compare and contrast. CONSTRUCTION : All parts fit on a small PC board with two coil wires and two of the battery. PCB for metal detector circuit LIST OF PIECES 1 - 220Ω (red-red-brown-gold) 1 - 47k (yellow-violet-orange-gold) 2 - 1n 1 - 4nF7 1 - 10nF 1 - 47uF 1 - BC 547 1 - slide switch 1 - 9V Battery connector 1 - battery 9V 6.5 m of winding wire (noncritical gauge) Search Coil Winding Details   metal detector search col construction The search coil for this one transistor metal detector circuit is created by winding 16 turns around a diameter of 12cm spherical subject. This is often a bottle of juice or perhaps a square object which the coil could be built rounded later on. Make use of 4 pieces of tape or tape round the winding turns to keep them in position and glue the coil to the base board of silicone sealant. The base includes a wooden handle screwed into the angle of 60 °. Additionally, you will require a small transistor stuck on the stick close to the base in order that it could take the field of the coil and identify when the frequency of the oscillator alters. The picture listed below displays the most effective layout. Give it a try: Hook up the battery and switch on the transistor radio. Tune on the dial and you may receive several points in which the radio produces a whistle due to its local oscillator beat with the detector coil output. you might get the best outcome at about 1400kHz that is certainly the location where the tone could possibly be set at a really low frequency. Once the detector is searched on a 20cm to about 10cm piece, the enhancements made on tone could possibly be easily recognized. The frequency of the oscillator of the metal detector changes somewhat the battery voltage falls and the temperature of the circuit increases on a hot day. This is often reimbursed by adjusting the frequency of the radio in order that the tone is kept as minimal as you can. You are now all set to go out and try your chance.]]> 3001 0 0 0 6V, 12V, 24V Automatic Battery Charger for Automobile https://makingcircuits.com/blog/6v-12v-24v-automatic-battery-charger-for-automobile-circuit/ Tue, 18 Jul 2017 09:18:11 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3020 6V, 12V, 24V Automatic Battery Charger for Automobile circuit   As displayed in the full circuit diagram of this universal 6V, 12V, 24V automatic battery charger circuit for the automobiles, we employ a transformer T1 of 190 VA reducing the stage 230 V to 32 V (additionally of course). The integrated circuits of the control circuit of this battery charger are provided from the voltage rectified by DS1-DS2 smoothed by C1 and stabilized at 33 V by TR3 and the DZ1 attached to its base; The regulator IC1 after that stabilizes it at 15 V. The AC mains signal is identified up by two photocouplers OC1-OC2 to be able to know if the zero crossing of the sinusoidal signal occurs at 50 Hz. This signal is converted In square wave through the gates IC5 / A-IC5 / B-IC5 / C-IC5 / D and the synchronized signal, entering TR4 and IC2 then TR1 and TR2, As can be seen, DS3-DS4-SCR1-SCR2 form an ideal bridge offering the voltage necessary to charge the battery. The charge level is scheduled through the switch S3 that enables to decide on one of the three voltages 6, 12 and 24 V. Our battery charger is dependent on the specification of varying the charging voltage just by tweaking the conduction time Of the controlled diode and that is the thyristor. Observe that the thyristor acts similar to a diode but a diode whose current runs between anode and cathode and could be managed by working on the junction through pulses delivered to the trigger. Throughout the charging of the battery, the voltage can vary in the initial charge level to the voltage value hard-wired employing S3. IC4 is attached as a switch enabling the voltage at the terminals of the battery to move when the mains sinusoid goes by zero phase; Therefore, within this transition to 0, the thyristors tend not to execute and the voltage neglects at IC7 / A, installed in "buffer" (buffer). The comparator IC7 / B may then evaluate the actual voltage of the battery (status of charge) given by IC7 / A and the voltage determined with S3. If the voltage of the comparator IC7 / B differs from that preferred with S3 then this output 7 of IC7 / B normally takes the logic level 1 and the signal with the two inverters IC5 / E-IC5 / F, driver IC2 that retains As a result the thyristors in conduction to be able to carry on the charge of the battery. Remember that when the thyristors conduct, the voltage is likely to move into high instant values and, with no large choke Z1 which encapsulates them, the current might also provide such peaks. Z1 acts for the current as a capacitor for voltage. To prevent making use of cumbersome and expensive resistances with low ohmic values ​​on which to sketch a measurable current percentage, we now have drawn directly on the printed circuit a "strip line" RCS. Its functionality is specifically to exchange a resistance of really low value. The charging current is therefore supervised instantly and, appropriately converted into voltage level by IC6 / A, this current is visualized by way of IC1 by means of a luminous scale through a bar of 10 LEDs The voltage obtained from the RCS terminal is additionally compared with IC6 / B with the voltage extracted from the potentiometer R30 accustomed to alter the load current (from 1 to 5 A). Once the switch S2 is in the Regular situation, the battery continues to be in the charging state forever, since the IC5 / E-IC5 / F ICs terminate the current control over IC6 / B through the signal delivered to pin 8 of IC2 . While, alternatively, S2 is in the automatic situation, it is IC6 / B that, constantly monitors and controls the current of the battery, adjusts it to match with the chosen current with the potentiometer R30. One fuse F2 on the positive output and an additional F1 at the input of the mains supply give you a sufficient assurance against probable short circuits. PCB design for the complete 6V, 12V, 24V automatic battery charger circuit.   Parts List R1 ..... 220 2 W *R2 ... 1 k *R3 ... 1 k *R4 ... 4,7 k *R5 ... 4,7 k *R6 ... 220 *R7 ... 220 *R8 ... 1 k *R9 ... 1 k R10 ... 1k R11 ... 470 R12 ... 1 k R13 ... 1 k R14 ... 33 k 1 W R15 ... 33 k 1 W R16 ... 1 M R17 ... 1 M R18 ... 10 k R19 ... 33 k R20 ... 10 k R21 ... 10 k R22 ... 10 k R23 ... 180 k R24 ... 1 k R25 ... 1 k R26 ... 180 k R27 ... 1 k R28 ... 10 k R29 ... 10 k R30 ... 10 k pot. lin. R31 ... 10k R32 ... 10 k R33 ... 10 k R34 ... 3,3 k R35 ... 47 k R36 ... 12 k R37 ... 10 k R38 ... 15 k R39 ... 4,7 k RCS ... strip line C1...... 100 μF 50 V électrolytique C2...... 100 μF 50 V électrolytique C3...... 10 μF électrolytique C4...... 1 nF polyester C5...... 100 nF polyester C6...... 2,2 μF électrolytique C7...... 470 nF polyester C8...... 100 μF 25 V électrolytique C9...... 100 nF polyester C10 ... 47 nF polyester C11 ... 47 nF polyester C12 ... 100 nF polyester C13 ... 100 nF polyester C14 ... 100 nF polyester C15 ... 10 μF électrolytique C16 ... 100 nF polyester C17.... 10 μF électrolytique C18 ... 1 μF polyester C19 ... 100 nF polyester C20 ... 100 nF polyester Z1...... ZBF1623 DS1........1N4007 DS2........1N4007 *DS3 .....BYW29 *DS4 ..... BYW29 *DS5 .....1N4007 *DS6 .....1N4007 *DS7 .....1N4007 *DS8 .....1N4007 DS9........1N4148 DS10 .....1N4148 DS11 .....1N4148 DS12 .....1N4148 DZ1........zener 33 V 1 W *SCR1...thyristor TAG675/800 *SCR2...thyristor TAG675/800 *TR1......PNP ZTX753 *TR2......PNP ZTX753 TR3 ........NPN ZTX653 TR4 ........NPN BC547 TR5 ........NPN BC547 OC1........phot. H11AV/1A OC2........phot. H11AV/1A IC1 .........LM342/15 IC2 .........LM311N IC3 .........LM334 IC4 .........CMOS 4007 IC5 .........CMOS 40106 IC6 .........LM358 IC7 .........LM358 T1...........transformateur secteur 190 VA 230 V / 32 V 6 A mod. T190.01 F1...........fusible 2 A F2...........fusible 10 A S1 ..........interrupteur S2 ..........interrupteur S3 ..........commutateur 3 positions Note: components with an asterisk Are mounted on the power stage main board. Resistances are Of 1/4 W unless otherwise stated For the small board R1 ..... 10 k R2 ..... 1,2 k R3 ..... 680 C1...... 10 μF électrolytique C2...... 47 μF électrolytique DL1 ...DL5 ...5LEDs DL6--DL10---5 Leds IC1..... LM3914 Note : all 1/4 W. Final Prototype Image     Complete wiring and PCB connection layout diagram ]]> 3020 0 0 0 Programmable electronic Door Bell Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/programmable-electronic-door-bell-circuit/ Fri, 14 Jul 2017 08:44:29 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3030 The exact level is effortlessly variable using the trimmer R6: with R5 it is the network for altering the current in the loudspeaker (the complicated resistance between pin 4 and ground is inversely proportionate On the output level of the amplifier stage) and this is the reason why, while getting close to the cursor of R5, the tone level boosts and while it nears the ground it diminishes. The SAE800 usually is at relaxation and eats a few μA: the speaker doesn't produce any audio. To audio may have a single or maybe more tones, push the bell switch attached by two wires to the PUSH BUTTON tips, in other words close the contact: the inner logic is activated and the very first tune is produced, after that probably , Based on the setting up of the jumpers, the 2nd and the 3rd. Let's observe how to set the required audio, supposing the SAE800 is energized by high logic at around (5 V to the applied voltage pin 3) associated with one of many control pins (7 and 8); In case these pins are kept open or attached to ground, the integrated circuit is in "stand-by" function and utilizes practically nothing. If E1 (pin 8) is sealed (jumper 1), it is in monotonic setting; With E2 (pin 7, jumper 2), the integrated circuit produces a two-note dissolved sequence (bitonal mode), the very first acute and the second the minimum; Ultimately, to change to the tri-tonal mode, pins 7 and 8 (jumper 3) should be established in the logic level. During the latter scenario, this is a diode array (D3 and D4) which, with jumper 3 sealed, provides the higher logic level and switches to the three-tone mode within a shifted diminishing sequence. Without a doubt, when the jumper 1 is sealed, the positive voltage gets to straight the pin 8 and the solitary note is released after which diminishes steadily. Likewise, whenever jumper 2 is sealed: pin 7 reaches the high logic level and also the sequence of two shifted, dissolved and damping audio appears in the loudspeaker. Eventually, once the jumper 3 is closed, via D3 and D4 the control voltage gets to the lines E1 and E2 collectively: the diodes possess the functionality of polarizing two pins by making use of the voltage to a solitary line, that inhibits, if just one Is directly raised on, and the other is not. Without a doubt, when we use a polarity Positive on jumper 3, both lead however, when we feed jumper 1 or jumper 2, these stay blocked simply because reverse polarized. Concerning the activating of the IC in this programmable electronic door bell music circuit, remember that the lines E1 and E2 have a sort of anti-bounce: the logic triggers the functionality of the audio using a specific delay according to activation of the communicating input, Exactly, to prevent commutation unneeded and harmful to the correct working of the in this circuit, R4 and C5 have values decided to run the oscillator with a frequency of approximately 28.4 kHz, where the 3 notes are subsequently attracted: the very first is 1/20 of this frequency, ie 1.42 kHz, the second 1/6 more serious (1.19 kHz) and the 3rd 1/3 even a lot more significant (still compared to the first note), ie 940 Hz. The length of every tone is around 2.1 s. The audio reproduction in mono, bi or tri-tonal style comes to an end after 2.1 - 3.26 - 4.43 s correspondingly. Additionally, right after triggering and start of the reproduction of a series of tunes, the integrated circuit could be activated all over again just following a delay according to the parameterized mode: 2.1 s in mono, 3.26 in bi and 4.43 In tri-tonal. You can now install the board in a plastic housing of appropriate size, as shown in the beginning of the article: the front panel will be pierced with regular holes for sound output from the loudspeaker and one of the short sides for The passage of the 230 V mains wires and those going to the doorbell button on the bearing. Place the chime against a wall, using dowels and screws, inside the house (Choose the location so that you can always hear the ringing from anywhere in the house) and wire it. PCB Design and Component Overlay for the electronic programmable musical door bell circuit PCB Design and Component Overlay for the electronic programmable musical door bell circuit How to Test the electronic assembly: Following a wide range of inspections, reestablish the 230 V mains and push the bell button: the loudspeaker must produce one, two or three tones. You might have closed riders 1, 2 or 3 (rememeber, just one at any given time). You are able to set If possible the volume using the trimmer R6 and a tiny electric screwdriver. If absolutely no audio is released, examine with a multimeter whether the 230 V mains voltage gets to the terminal block or not. For additional assessments on the board, make sure to first switch off the mains supply (utilizing the circuit breaker in the table). Technical Specifications and Features: - Power supply input: 230 VAC - Power consumption by the circuit: 3 VA - Power output in the speaker: 1 W - Push-button control - Bell sound can be set to 1, 2, 3 tones in sequence - Adjustable listening volume]]> 3030 0 0 0 Plant Physiology Analyzer Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/plant-physiology-analyzer-circuit/ Sat, 29 Jul 2017 08:44:33 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3067 Plant Physiology Analyzer Circuit ]]> 3067 0 0 0 Push-Button ON/OFF Switch using Schmitt Trigger https://makingcircuits.com/blog/push-button-onoff-switch-using-schmitt-trigger-circuit/ Sat, 29 Jul 2017 15:57:43 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3081 On the other hand this drop in voltage on the input of the gate is not going to trigger its output to alter state yet again since the input level will still be over a lower switching limit of the Schmitt trigger. This ‘intermediate’ voltage level will continue while the switch is pressed. Once the switch is at some point released, C1 will subsequently discharge totally. The 0V over the capacitor will never impact the trigger because it is no longer attached to the capacitor (the switch is open). At this point once the switch is closed the 0V may achieve the input of the gate and its output may yet again change state. It is crucial that P1 is defined accurately for the circuit to function however it will be discovered in practice this presents no issue. Different types of Schmitt trigger suit this circuit: 4093, 40106, 74LS14, 74LS132. If TTL lCs are employed, the supply voltage should be 5 V; for CMOS lCs it may lie in between 5 V and 15V. The above discussed push-button electronic ON/OFF switch circuit can be integrated with a relay or triac to operate any type of heavy load by simply toggling the push-button ON/OFF. ]]> 3081 0 0 0 Anti-Theft Tracker Alarm Circuit for Protecting valuable https://makingcircuits.com/blog/anti-theft-tracker-alarm-circuit-protecting-valuable/ Thu, 03 Aug 2017 15:38:52 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3090 The anti-theft tracker alarm Circuit explained in this article can be used for protecting any preferred valuable item by attaching the receiver device with it while the transmitter is positioned near the user for the monitoring at a preferred distance away. As long as the item is within the allotted safe range, the transmission from the transmitter unit keeps the alarm inside the receiver unit silent, however in an even the item it tends to get misplaced  or an attempt is made to steal the valuable item, and moved away from the range, the receiver attached with the item begins producing a very shrill ear piercing noise or tone, alerting everybody around the item ad also the user whose is quickly informed regarding the item being robbed by a potential intruder. A transmitter radiates over certain area, which range from 3 to 30 meters, a weak coded signal meant for one or more receivers positioned inside the items to be guarded. If an deceitful individual attempts to take the secured object, from a few meters, the receiver no more gets a signal and begins to emit An strong tone signaling the displacement of the protected item from the safe range. The system may also be used as an electronic reminder for individuals who often forget their baggage in airports! Anti-Theft Tracker Alarm Circuit for Protecting valuable Our assembly: The assembly suggested in this post comes into the latter category: it has been designed specifically to locate prospective thieves merged with the crowd and capable of taking away, slowly, belongings.     Our Anti-Theft Tracker Alarm Circuit for Protecting valuable circuit is considerably less complicated and more specific: it is designed for exhibitions, festivals and all scenarios whereby it is far from possible (or simply bothersome) to set up a passage control. Additionally, whenever an object has a magnetic anti-theft tag, the crook can often take it off prior to attaining a managed exit. With this technique, on the other hand, when the thief travels away a few meters, a powerful acoustic signal denounces the effort of burglary and enables, in addition to catch hold of the thief, The wiring diagram Let us see now how our system functions. This is fundamentally an alarm causing the transmission loss, ie a process comprising a transmitter sending a modulated HF carrier having a specific code, linked to a Receiver which stays at rest (no alarm activating) so long as it is in receipt of this carrier signal. Once we install this receiver into the item to be safeguarded and if it is outside the transmitter's protection area, lacking of signal, its alarm is activated and a powerful and distressing whistle (see figure 9, the characteristics of the buzzer used) sounds within the object being carried away.   This product provides a couple of indisputable positive aspects: to begin with, it can be taken to rooms of different dimensions because, by adjusting the antenna of the transmitter module, a range of around 3 to 30 meters can be acquired. Additionally, possessing a single transmitter and a receiver that contains the alarm A single transmitter hypothetically limitless can be used for tracking many number of objects simultaneously. The device is as a result modular and scalable: in its standard configuration it includes a mini-transmitter and a small receiver, but absolutely nothing stops it from associating to it as numerous receivers as there may be items to be safeguarded from one Undesirable taking away. We may see carefully now, one and then the other of these two units, transmitter and receiver. The TX (transmitter) The electrical diagram of the transmitter is offered in figure 1. You can view this is a very simple circuit: a microcontroller U1 controls a hybrid transmitter module U2 and the complete is driven by a 9F 6F22 battery With an integrated voltage regulator U3. The PIC12F672-MF417 microcontroller is previously programmed in the manufacturing plant to generate a 4-byte code (8 bits each) in speedy sequence each second. The information is fixed and the first 3 groups offer the details itself, while fourth group presents the checksum. This code is effortlessly identified by the receiver whose microcontroller is hard-wired for this!   To be able to reduce consumption as far as possible, the U2 transmitter hybrid module (an AUREL TX433SAW) is only turned on as soon as the microcontroller transmits a data stream every second. The command sequence is as follows: once the data to be transmitted on the line GP0 is found, the line GP2 is sent to the high logic level (5 V) in order to source U2. Quickly after the 4 bytes are delivered and therefore pins 5 and 7 of the microcontroller return to the high logic state (1) for 2 seconds. Every single emission is complemented together with the lighting of the LED LD1, highlighting the working status. The antenna must be selected based on the range, ie the preferred level of sensitivity of the activating of the alarm: typically, it is adequate to attach a simple copper wire in the slot affiliated to pin 11 of U2. In any circumstance, do not need take a piece of wire 17 cm long (which may make up a quarter wave) since you might stretch the range of the transmitter to a 100 meters ... and that genuinely can spoil the objective right ! The RX The plan of the receiver represents FIG. 5. It really is scarcely more complicated than that of the transmitter, but nothing at all exclusive is to be documented. To stimulate the buzzer (a SONITRON SMA-24L), we have executed a fascinating method. We will first observe that the radio signal is identified up by The antenna and transferred to the input (pin 3) of the superheterodyne radio receiver hybrid module (an AUREL RX4M30RR04) working on the frequency of 433.92 MHz and furnished with a quadrature AM demodulator, Of the pin 14. The second option is attached straight to the pin 7 (GP0) of the microcontroller U1, on which it transmits all the data that it gets. The microcontroller of the mobile receiver Is also a PIC12F672-MF418 And is previously programmed at the manufacturing plant to execute the below capabilities: after the I / O is initialized, it cyclically changes on the hybrid receiver module by delivering the Vcc pins (10 and 15) through its pin 6. Throughout the triggering cycle, it checks the status of the line GP0 where it wants data to be. If it obtains them and identifies these as legitimate, it turns off the RX for some time somewhat under the second and then turns this on once again and waits for a fresh pulse train. Let's evaluate one particular situation at a time, starting with the assumption that the transmitter synchronism code is acquired correctly. Under this affliction, absolutely nothing occurs and the receiver powers down and then activates once again following a little less than a second. In case, alternatively, in the switch-on time period the RX4M30RR04, the microcontroller does not discover the synchronism code directed by the transmitter, it raises the alarm counter through one unit and the receiver remains alight. Following another second without having code reception, the alarm counter is amplified by another unit and so on. Mark = SONITRON Reference = SMA-24L Sound pressure at 30 cm at 12 V = 98 dBA Frequency = 3 kHz Voltage = 1.5 to 15 Vdc * Consumption = 6.7 mA Mass = 4 g * Since only 3 V is available, a voltage elevator However, needless to say, the circuit switches into alarm any time the synchronism signal is just not received 3 times consecutively. This goes along to the start-up of the buzzer BUZ1, that causes it to produce a very high supersonic audio tone, preventing just by turning off the power supply. Without a doubt, possibly if the object is introduced nearer to the transmitter in order that it will get the synchronous signal again, the buzzer continues to scream. In case, after one or two reception errors, the system comes back to the transmitter protection area, the alarm counter is totally reset to zero. It is now time to think about the peculiarity of the control circuit of the BUZ1. We have aimed towards creating just as much sound as possible with a power supply of just 3 V (two LR03 / AAA batteries, maybe rechargeable type ALCAVA, in series). For this, we implemented a high-efficiency buzzer (see Figure 9), competent at emitting a note of 98 dBA of volume at 1 meter of distance. On the other hand, to have the required performances, the component needs a supply voltage of around 16 to 20 V. So, how you can accomplish ? The answer we have implemented consists in acquiring this voltage using a very simple, nonregulated switching device: once the acoustic note is to be released, The line GP5 of the PIC generates a rectangular wave at the frequency of 50 kHz, fast switching the transistor T1; The collector of the latter routinely grounded one side of the inductor L1 (the other is attached to the positive supply). The rapid switching establishes pulses with an amplitude of about 20 V, charging via the diode D1 the electrolytic capacitor C1, at the terminals of which a DC voltage of this value is acquired. To be able to transmit the note, therefore, it is enough to polarize the base of T2: this can determine the activation of the buzzer, which oscillates at about 3 kHz as a result of the electronics which it is set up. It is often mentioned, when the circuit has moved into an alarm, it isn't achievable to deactivate the oscillator by taking the device nearer to the transmitter. We will now take a look at a different situation: Described that if in the course of one or two reception intervals the microcontroller would not read the synchronism code, it triggers a software counter which often takes care, from the third successive reception fault, to switch on the acoustic signal; In case, soon after a couple of reception downfalls, the code is again received, the counter is reset. This implies that, to be able to switch on the alarm, it is crucial how the reception fails again 3 times in sequence since the earlier flaws were terminated.   List of components for the TX of this Anti-Theft Tracker Alarm Circuit for Protecting valuable R1 = 470 Ω R2 = 100 Ω U1 = μcontroller PIC12F672-MF417 U2 = Aurel Module TX433SAW U3 = Regulator 78L05 LD1 = red LED 5 mm Others: 1 Support 2 x 4 pin 1 Connector for 9 V battery 1 Cup 8.5 cm of enamelled wire 10 To 12/10 for antenna List of RX Components R1 = 100 Ω R2 = 4.7 kΩ C1 = 470 μF 25 V D1 = Diode 1N4007 L1 = Self 330 μH U1 = μcontroller PIC12F672-MF418 T1 = NPN BC547 T2 = NPN BC547 U2 = Module Aurel RX4M30RR04 BUZ1 = Buzzer SONITRON SMA- 24L with electronics Others: 1 Support 2 x 4 pin 4 AAA battery clips 1 Cup 8.5 cm of enamelled wire 10 To 12/10 for antenna]]> 3090 0 0 0 Music Light Circuit without Contact https://makingcircuits.com/blog/music-light-circuit-without-contact/ Fri, 11 Aug 2017 11:55:13 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3115 music operated dancing light circuit contact less   Circuit Description: The circuit functioning can be understood from the following points: We can see a MIC at the left hand side, a 741  IC stage at the center configured as a comparator, and 3 triacs with lamps on the right side. The power to the circuit is applied from a transformer based power supply circuit, and also AC mains for the 20V bulbs or lamps. Without any sound signal on the MIC all the lamps are in the switched OFF mode because pin#2 of the IC 741 is held low causing pin#3 to be high, and this forces its output pin#6 also to e high, which in turn causes the NPN T1 to conduct and keep the triac gates connected with ground. Due o this all the triacs remains shut off. However when a suitably powerful sound signal may be from a loudspeaker hits the MIC, the MIC resistance starts fluctuating room low to high and vice versa, in response to the sound pressure of the music. This fluctuating pulses correspondingly causes the output of the IC 741 also to fluctuate, and this in turn forces the triac gates to switch ON OFF in tandem and quite in a sequential manner, enabling a dancing or chasing kind of light effect illumination on the connected lamps. In fact, all the triacs are switched at the same rate however due to the the presets at the gates of the respective triacs, the switching timing can be slightly changed enabling a running or chasing kind of sequential lighting effect on the lamps i response to the music from the source. The degree at which the different triacs can be  fired is adjusted by the respective presets, enabling a beautiful music light operation on the lamps without any physical contact with the music source. However be extremely cautious not to touch the internal circuit of the design while it is in the powered state because the whole circuit is not isolated from mains and therefore might e floating at the mains level. If you have any doubt regarding the making of the above music light circuit without wire and contact, you can use the comment box below for expressing the same. Parts List T1 = 4A400VTRIAC T2-4A400VTR1AC T3 = 4A400VTRIAC Ql = 2N2218 IC1 = 741 Rl = 22 K R2 = 47 K R3 = 47 K R4 = 330 R5 = 330 R6 = 330 R7 = 330 R8 = 150 K R9= 100 P4 = 2,2 Kohms pot Cl = 220uF16Velec. C2 = 22 nF ceramic. C3 = 10uF16V elec. C4=10uF16V elec. C5=luF16V elec. C6=luF16V elec. C7=luF16V elec. C8 = 330nF pol. C9= 100 nF ceramic. D1 = 1N4148 PR= Bridge PI = 2.2 Mpot P2 = 2.2 K pot P3 = 2.2 K pot M = capsule mic TR = transfo 230/9 V 0,25A PCB design for the music light circuit ]]> 3115 0 0 0 Wireless DC Motor Speed Control Using Arduino https://makingcircuits.com/blog/wireless-dc-motor-speed-control-using-arduino/ Mon, 14 Aug 2017 05:26:58 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3123 It works on SPI communication protocol. It can transmit data ranging from 250KBPS to 2 MBPS. It has 125 channels for communication. It has theoretical maximum range of 100 meters. It works on the same band of your WI-FI. Care must be taken while powering this NRF24L01 module as it works on 3.3 V and 5 V will kill the module. Now let’s move on to remote controller circuit:

    The Remote controller schematic:

    The Remote controller schematic: The three 10K ohm potentiometers are connected to analog pins of arduino A0, A1 and A2. The remote can be powered from a 9V battery by connecting via DC jack. If you have any confusion regarding the wiring between Arduino and NRF24L01 module, please refer the table given beside the circuit. Please download the library file here: https://github.com/nRF24/ Download Program for remote: Remote That concludes the remote controller circuit. Now let’s see the receiver circuit.

    The receiver schematic:

        NOTE: The connection between NRF24L01 and Arduino is not shown in the above diagram; please connect NRF24L01 to Arduino as shown in the remoter controller circuit diagram. The three MOSFETs are connected to PWM pins of Arduino board which are 6, 5 and 3. You can’t use non PWM pins for generating PWM signals in Arduino. You may use any N-channel MOSFET whose gate threshold is less than 4 V. You must power the motors separately as per the motor’s voltage specification. The Arduino board can be powered from 9V battery via the DC jack or from USB. Download Program for receiver: receiver That concludes the receiver. The potentiometer connected to A0 controls the motor at pin #3, the potentiometer connected to A1 controls the motor at pin #5 and the potentiometer connected to A2 controls the motor at pin #6 at the receiver. The DC motors can be varied from full stop to maximum speed by rotating those10K ohm potentiometers. Note 1: if you are not using all the three motors for your project, please ground the unused potentiometer pins in the remote. For example, if are using only one motor for your project; connect motor and MOSFET at pin #3 at receiver. Connect the potentiometer to pin A0 and ground pins A1 and A2. Do nothing to pins PWM pins 5 and 6 at receiver side. Similarly ground only the A2 pinif you are using 2 motors. Note 2: You can connect the Arduino of either remote or receiver to computer and open the serial monitor; you can see some parameter such as the voltage level at analog pins, PWM level (0 to 255) and which motor is currently controlled. If you have any quires regarding this project, please leave in the comment section, you may receive a quick reply.]]>     3123 0 0 0     Music Stroboscope Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/music-stroboscope-circuit/ Tue, 05 Sep 2017 14:11:49 +0000 http://makingcircuits.com/?p=3139

    Processing of the Music signal:

    The Integrated circuit referenced IC1 consists of a couple of operational amplifiers. The "inverting" input of the amplifier (I) obtains the signals from the " 6 V winding of the transformer through C6 and R3. The "non-inverting" input is afflicted by the supply half potential by the divider bridge shaped by R4 and R5. Therefore, it is this particular potential which can be found on the output S1 in the lack of signals. However, when signals of a music comes from a source, the same signals are amplified on the output but amplified and aimed at the DC component of 4.5 V. You are able to change the signals "Maxima" and "minima" by working on the slider of the adjustable A1. Within this type of amplifier, the gain is depicted by the relationship: G = A1 / R3L Amplifier (II) has its input (E1) afflicted by a fixed potential described through the values ​​of R6 and R10. The value of the second option depends upon the relationship: u = R6 / R6 + R10 * 9V In our situation: u = 6.8 V Therefore, so long as the potential from the output of the amplifier (I) On the input (e +) of the amplifier (II) is no more than 6.8 V, the output features a "low" state at the waste voltage around, ie rather less than 2 V. Positive pulses with an amplitude more than 6.8 V and input (e +), the output of the amplifier (II) provides "high" states. The gates NOR (I) and (II) of IC2 perform a couple of effective inversions. This leads to the same signal as that output from the output, Amplifier (II), however with "high" and "low" states correspondingly comparable to 9 V and to 0V.

    Integration:

    Every rising edge from the output of the NOR gate (I) of IC2 is evaluated by the differentiating stages formed by C7, R7 and D1. Because of the quick charging of C7 through R7, there exists a sequence of positive positive pulses on the input (13) of the monostable flip-flop composed of the NOR (III) and (IV) gates, at intervals of 20 ms, Of IC2. The second option then restores at its output a number of "high" states, calibrated each time based on the values ​​of R11 and C9, consecutively to the relationship: AT = 0.7 x R11 x C9 The viewer can confirm that The duration is approximately 15 ms. The "high" states therefore produced result in the integrating method formed by D2, R12, R13 and C3. The capacitance C3 is charged by R12, throughout the "high" states supplied by the monostable flip-flop. Alternatively, during the "low" states, it could only discharge in R13, of higher value. Whenever the slider of the adjustable A2 is in the midsection placement, this period is about 0.2 sec. It will likely be observed that the slot is not really square in shape. Certainly, the duration of the "low" states is a lot less than that of the "high" states. The main reason for this is the shunting of A2 by the diode D3 once the output of the oscillator is in the "low" state.

    Generation of the Strobe flashes:

    The strobe flashes are created by a strobe lamp of 30 to 40 joules. To be able to run effectively, such a lamp has to be subjected to a DC voltage of a minimum of 300 V. This value is acquired by the load of capacitors C12, C13 and C14 attached in parallel, via R1. The load develops every two alternations from the 230 V mains. Throughout non-active alternations, diode D5 offers the required blocking to stop discharge to the mains. On the positive reinforcements of these capacities, a highest potential U is recognized in a way that: U = 230VxV2 is around 325V . Another energy reserve, yet of much more moderate capacity, works based on the exact same theory. This is actually the load of C5 via D6 and R22. Throughout the small "low" states provided by the oscillator, the transistor T, of PNR type, saturates. Consequently, it enables the circulation of a current, restricted to R21, in the "trigger -cathode" space of thyristor THY. The last mentioned starts instantly. In this way a powerful, point-like current emanating through the positive arm of C5 through the "anode-cathode" junction of THY and one of the two windings of the triggering choke S. The winding under consideration is the one which Possesses few turns in accordance with the second. Consequently, the control pulse goes through a very high voltage crescendo, that triggers the arc between the anode and the cathode of the strobe lamp, the power simply being supplied by the capacitors C12, C13 and C14. The lamp produces a brief, super bright light. These capacities, along with C5, reload between 2 consecutive whizzes. The resistors R18 and R19 discharge the capacitors for the similar factors as those mentioned previously in the paragraph concerning the power supply.  

    PCB Design for the Music Strobe Light

    PCB Component Layout

      ]]>     3139 0 0 0     Simple Sawtooth Generator Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-sawtooth-generator-circuit/ Wed, 27 Sep 2017 11:44:48 +0000 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=3306   The ‘SCR’ is not really, as usual, fired by a pulse. Rather, the ’gate' is biased by voltage divider R3/D2 and when the ‘anode to cathode’ voltage surpasses this bias, the 'SCR' fires. C1 then discharges quickly via the ‘SCR’ and current limiting resistor R2. Once the voltage across the capacitor has dropped to approximately 1.4 V, the current from the 'SCR' is becoming low enough for it to cut off. C1 once again charges and the routine repeats. The ensuing sawtooth output voltage is demonstrated in figure 1. The frequency of the output voltage may be tweaked within a range of about 102 ; with the values proven the frequency range is 5...500 Hz. The smaller C1, the more quickly it is going to charge, and the higher the frequency. The circuit was tested in our laboratories with frequencies up to 100 kHz, however higher frequencies are usually achievable. The amplitude of the sawtooth voltage will depend on the ‘gate’ bias across zener diode D2 and it can consequently be changed by switching this diode. It will, however, be borne in your mind that tne zener voltage should not be over fifty percent the supply voltage to make sure appropriate functioning of the generator. If an exponential ramp is necessary rather than linear one, T1 can basically be removed and R1 hooked up straight to the supply voltage. C1 will likely then charge straight from the supply and automatically offer an exponential waveform in this simple sawtooth generator circuit.]]> 3306 0 0 0 Keypad Lock Circuit using a Single IC https://makingcircuits.com/blog/keypad-lock-circuit-using-a-single-ic/ Wed, 27 Sep 2017 12:18:23 +0000 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=3312 Introduction A decimal keyboard, a CMOS IC, about three transistors and an opto-coupler . . . that may be about all that is required to create this electronic lock using a three digit combination.  

    How the Locking is Triggered

    Locking is accomplished using a cascade of analogue switches, every one of which is hooked up, through the programming matrix, to one of the keys on the keypad. Imagine line A is linked to key 2, line B to key 9, and line C to key 5. When key 2 is currently pushed ES1 closes and remains closed simply because of the current sent to it via R7. In case key 9 is then pushed ES2 shuts and continues to be closed (due to the fact ES1 has already been closed). At this point all that is required is to click key 5, whereupon ES3 closes hence initiating the opto-coupler, whose transistor subsequently conducts. The keys not utilized in the ABC code need to all be attached to the D line.   keypad lock circuit using a single CMOS IC   Whenever one of them is pressed, in error or in lack of knowledge, line D sets ES4 to an active high logic level (that it maintains due to R6) and T1 conducts and therefore disables the circuit totally; in reality even though E81 is again turned on, by the pertinent key, it will not auto-hold as long as T1 is executing.

    Understanding the Push Button Actions

    To begin once again, pushbutton S1 must very first be pressed, hence opening ES4 and stopping T1. Additionally it is helpful to be able to reset the lock outwardly and this really is accomplished by way of T2, that is attached parallel to the reset circuit and regulated by the. # key. Key * could possibly be applied as an ordinary bell push, triggering relay Re via transistor T3; therefore driving the bell transformer. One additional statement regarding the functioning of the lock: contemplate again our combination of 295,and believe that ~the first key pressed had not been 2 but 9, that is not wrong, just mislaid. The B-9 connection leads to ES2 to ciose however it cannot stay closed when key 9 is released due to the fact ES1 is open. An optocoupler is utilized here in preference some other options that could possibly be picked in some other applications, and testifies to be straightforward, low-cost and efficient in this keypad lock circuit using a Single IC.]]>     3312 0 0 0     +/-5V to 12V Adjustable Power Supply Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/5v-12v-adjustable-power-supply-circuit/ Thu, 28 Sep 2017 12:29:45 +0000 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=3318 Circuit Description   Additionally it is achievable to supply TTL logic circuits, integrated circuits and every other unit in which the working voltage is between 5 and 12 volts utilizing a single output.   +/-5V to 12V Adjustable Power Supply Circuit   Using the two outputs in series, a power supply with a voltage varying between 10 and 24 Volts can be formed It should not be overlooked that regardless of the type of usage possible, it should not go beyond the consumption of 500-600 mA. Because of its functioning, you must hook up to the input a transformer with a secondary of 15 Volts which could deliver a current of at least 500 mA.   For the assemblage of the components, cautiously stick to the layout diagram.

    PCB design for the +/-5V to 12V Adjustable Power Supply Circuit

    Component supply configuration adjustable ± 5 to 12 Volts 500 mA circuit board power supply adjustable ± 5 to 12 Volts 500 mA  

    ELECTRONIC COMPONENT LIST:

    All resistors are 1/4 watt unless otherwise stated. R1 = 4.7K R2 = 4.7K Pl = 2.2K potentA. Cl = 1000uF25Velec. C2 = 1000uF/25Velec. C3 = 0.1 uF ceramic. D1-1N4001 ... 7 D2 = 1N4001 ... 7 D3-1N4001 ... 7 D4 = 1N4001 ... 7 T1 = TIP32 1C1 = 7805 IC2 = 741 1 8-pin support. 2 Heat sink]]>     3318 0 0 0     Quartz Mosquito Repellent using a single IC4060 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/quartz-mosquito-repellent-using-a-single-ic4060/ Fri, 29 Sep 2017 03:25:21 +0000 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=3326
    In this post we will make a highly effective mosquito repellent circuit using a single Ic 4060 oscillator reinforced with a quartz crystal for better reliability and better impact on mosquitoes.

     What is Quartz


    A few of the aspects that impact the frequency steadiness of an oscillator typically consist of: disparities in temperature, variations in the load, along with variations to its DC power supply voltage among other things. Frequency balance of the output signal could be significantly enhanced by the appropriate choice of the components employed for the resonant feedback circuit, such as the amplifier. However there exists a limitation to the stableness which can be extracted from normal LC and RC tank circuits. In order to have a extremely high degree of oscillator steadiness a Quartz Crystal is normally applied as the frequency determining unit to generate another kinds of oscillator circuit known normally as a Quartz Crystal Oscillator, (XO). Whenever a voltage source is ascribed to a small slim piece of quartz crystal, it starts to transform shape creating a attribute referred to as the Piezo-electric effect. This Piezo-electric Effect could be the property of a crystal through which an electrical charge constitutes a physical force by altering the contour of the crystal and vice versa, a mechanical pressure placed on the crystal generates an electrical charge. Then, piezo-electric equipment could be categorised as Transducers because they transform energy of one type into energy of another (electrical to mechanical or mechanical to electrical). This piezo-electric influence generates mechanical vibrations or oscillations which is often accustomed to affect the standard LC tank circuit in the earlier oscillators. There are various forms of crystal ingredients to use as oscillators most abundant and crucial of these for electronic circuits currently being the quartz minerals, due in part to their better mechanical durability.

    How the Circuit Functions


    The signal imparted by buzzer BZ is extremely distressing for many bugs and particularly for mosquitoes. Its waveform tends to make a large number of harmonics. and for that reason ultrasound, sonl results in. The frequency of the signal reaches the boundaries of the threshold of human audibility, quartz Q makes it possible for to help keep it consistent. The device may be powered by 230 volts AC or using a single 9 volt battery. The maximum current taken is approximately 15 mA. The illumination of the LED guarantees the right functioning of the device. Quartz Mosquito Repellent using a single IC4060

    WARNING !


    Once the battery is introduced, DO NOT hook up the device to the mains voltage.

    WARNING !

    Once the device is coupled to the mains voltage in 230 Volts AC, you have to be extremely cautious while handling it. While assembling the components, proper care has to be delivered to place the diodes in the good sense. An inversion of the latter would certainly result in permanent damage to the set up. Provided the power of the signal (particularly with 230 volts AC power), the buzzer BZ can produce oscillations noticeable by a powerful and uncomfortable whistle. This annoyance could be eradicated by inserting between the buzzer and the printed circuit a cardboard or foam rubber.

    LIST OF ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS:


    All resistances are of 1/4 watt unless stated otherwise opposite. R1 = 220Kohms R2 = 4.7 Mohms R3-220 Ohms Cl-470nF400Vpol. C2 = 100pF16Velec. C3 = 47 pFceramic. C4 = 47 pF ceramic. C5 = 100 nF ceramic. 1) 1 = 1N4007 D2 = 1N4007 D3 = 1N4007 DZ1 = Zener 12 volts DL1 = red LED Q = 4 MHz quartz. BZ = Buzzer. IC1 = 4060B 1 Clip for 9 volt battery. 1 Support 16 pins.

    Parts Layout on PCB. PCB Overlay

    PCB Design for the quartz mosquito repellent circuit

    ]]>     3326 0 0 0     Simple Voltage Controlled Oscillator using IC 555 https://makingcircuits.com/blog/simple-voltage-controlled-oscillator-using-ic-555/ Sun, 01 Oct 2017 03:00:10 +0000 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=3355 How the Circuit Works   A voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) employing timer 555 is demonstrated in the following diagram. The circuit is oftentimes known as voltage-to-frequency converter, considering that the output frequency could be transformed by changing the input voltage. As expressed in earlier content, terminal pin 5 is the voltage control terminal and its particular functionality is to control the threshold and the trigger level. Generally, the control voltage is + 2/3 V DC, due to the internal voltage divider. Even so, an external voltage could be placed on this terminal directly or by way of a pot, as highlighted in the figure, through altering the pot, the control voltage could be varied. Voltage over the timing capacitor is displayed in the figure, that can vary between + V control and ½ V control. When the control voltage is elevated, the capacitor requires a lengthier time to charge and discharge, the frequency, consequently, diminishes. Therefore, the frequency could be improved by changing the control voltage linearly.  

    Waveform Generated across the IC 555 pinouts

    It would be also interesting to learn what kind of waveform are initiated across the various pinouts of the IC 555. When a varying voltage is applied at the control input of the IC, the amplitude of the triangle waves across the timing capacitor or between the pin#6/2 and the ground also proportionately varies. Higher voltages at pin#5 causes higher amplitude on the triangle waves and vice versa However the pin#3 of the IC produces an entirely different response for this voltage controlled oscillator circuit. The pin#3 generates a PWM waveform whose duty cycle varies exactly in proportion with the level of voltage applied at pin#5 of the IC.]]>     3355 0 0 0     3V to 12V Transistor Boost Converter Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/3v-12v-transistor-boost-converter-circuit/ Sun, 01 Oct 2017 04:49:05 +0000 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=3359 Introduction If you have been wondering how to boost a small 3V battery voltage to a significantly large 12V output, then this article can be very useful for you, which you can build and use it for the mentioned purpose. With this circuit you will be now able to apply a controlled boosted voltage and illuminate bigger LEDs rated to operate at 12V, with a 3V supply inputs.

    How the Boost Converter Works

    As can be seen the schematic below the proposed 3V to 12v boost converter circuit utilizes just a few transistors, an inductor and some capacitor to enable a full fledged 12V to be acquired from a minimal 3V supply input. Within this tiny switching power supply, a Schmitt trigger oscillator is utilized to stimulate a switching transistor which supplies current into a compact inductor. Power is trapped in the inductor as the transistor is switched on, and unveiled on the load circuit as soon as the transistor reboots. Higher or lower voltages can be acquired through altering the voltage divider which feeds the zener diode. The performance is approximately 80% by using a higher Q inductor. The output voltage will depend on the load resistance and is particularly restricted to a zener diode which puts a stop to the oscillator once the voltage gets to about 14 volts. 3V to 12V Transistor Boost Converter Circuit]]>     3359 0 0 0     Powerful LED Flashlight using Stepper Motor https://makingcircuits.com/blog/powerful-led-flashlight-using-stepper-motor/ Mon, 02 Oct 2017 12:16:21 +0000 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=3370   The light of the lamp is sufficient to view distinctly at nighttime. Additionally it is light source adequate for photography. These devices is as a result ideal for spies, criminals as well as youngsters who would like to study privately between the sheets. However the stepper motor LED light flashlight, generator, must also be kept ready for your next emergency short-circuit situation within the house basement.     The DC resistance is 10 Ohm, the idle voltage approximately. 4 ... 5 V. A number of parallel electrolytic capacitors having a overall of approx. 12000 μF supply a couple of extremely bright LEDs via a series resistor of 33 Ohm. The lamp will probably remain illuminated for around 20 seconds. The motors coming from DC fans of the dimensions 80x80 to 120x120 mm may also be used easily, along with voltages of 12 - 24 V. For any basic lighting effects game, it really is enough to switch a number of LEDs antiparallel with each coil. This presents a good LED light effect from the stepper generator, whose illumination and frequency will be acceleration primarily based.]]> 3370 0 0 0 Liquid Level Sensor Circuit https://makingcircuits.com/blog/liquid-level-sensor-circuit/ Mon, 09 Oct 2017 07:52:18 +0000 https://makingcircuits.com/?p=3444 By: Swagatam (image courtesy: elektor electronics)

    Introduction

    In the proposed circuit, we employ an oscillator, whose frequency is applied across a given probe ends, and this probe is positioned at the specified level inside a tank or container wherein the liquid level is required to be sensed. liquid level sensor circuit

    Using CMOS Gates for the Sensing

    As shown the above circuit diagram, just a couple of CMOS gates are used for the application which can be achieved using a single IC 4093. Since the IC 4093 consists of 4 such gates in it, gives you the freedom of building two such units and apply it for detecting and controlling two liquid level simultaneously. For your information, the IC 4093 consists of 4 or quad NAND gates with Schmitt trigger property, a feature which allows the gates to work with a small amount of hysteresis which in  turn allows better accuracy and control of the system. In our liquid level sensor application, two such NAND gates are used, however the NAND gates here are used like inverters by shorting their input pins. To be precise here the NAND gates work like NOT gates with Schmitt trigger facility. The first gate N1 is configured as an oscillator for applying the frequency across the sensing probes.

    Why an oscillator

    Well, an oscillating electrical pulsed detection of the fluid across the probes helps the probes to remain corrosion free and long lasting. Especially when this fluid sensor circuit is used as a water level sensor circuit, the probes may be required to remain immersed inside water for many occasions causing persistent oxidation of the probe metal. However with the use of an oscillating electrical signal across the probes, the issue of corrosion is greatly reduced. The second gate N2, is arranged in the form of a buffer sage for accepting a conducting path across the probes whenever the fluid or water reaches the probe level. As soon as this is detected, minute pulsating current hit the input of N2, causing a high logic here. This high logic causes an opposite or inverted low logic at the output of N2, enabling the PNP BJT to trigger instantly. The triggering of the BJT in turn actuates the relay which ensures an immediate cut off for the rising liquid by switching off the relevant pump through its contact wiring. The relay is required to be wired appropriately with the pump motor of the fluid or the water pump, depending on which fluid is used inside the container for the sensing and cut off. If you have any further doubts regarding this simple fluid level detector circuit which can be also used as a simple corrosion free water level controller circuit, please drop a line in the below given comment section for getting quick replies.]]>     3444 0 0 0